f '^"/^ ,.u 
 
 John Swett 
 
 wii .•?' 
 
,^.a; -^Jry^^^lMy. 
 
 %^\^. ^ 
 
 \U9W 
 
 'o-nn 
 
 ^ j^i^W/ 
 
•2^ t 
 
Digitized by tine Internet Archive 
 
 in 2008 with funding from 
 
 IVIicrosoft Corporation 
 
 http://www.archive.org/details/compendiousgermaOOwhitrich 
 
WHITNEY'S MODERN LANGUAGE BOOKS. 
 
 FRENCH. 
 
 A FRENCH GRAMMAR. With Exercises and Illustrative 
 Sentences from French Authors. i2mo, 442 pp. 
 
 PRACTICAL FRENCH. Taken from the Author's larger 
 Grammar, and Supplemented by Conversations and Idio- 
 matic Phrases. i2mo, 304 pp. 
 
 BRIEF FRENCH GRAMMAR. i6mo, 177 pp. 
 
 GERMAN. 
 
 A COMPENDIOUS GERMAN GRAMMAR, izmo, 303 pp. 
 BRIEF GERMAN GRAMMAR. i6mo, 143 pp. 
 GERMAN READER. i2mo, 523 pp. 
 GERMAN-ENGLISH DICTIONARY. 8vo, 900 pages. 
 GERMAN TEXTS Edited by Prof. W. D. Whitney. 
 Lessing's Minna von Barnhelm. Annotated by W. D. Whit- 
 ney, Prof in Yal College. i6mo, 138 pp. 
 Schiller's Wilhelm Tell. Annotated by Prof. A. Sachtleben, 
 
 of Charleston, S. C. i6mo, 199 pp. 
 Goethe's Faust. Annotate ' by Wiw. Cook. i6mo, 229 pp. 
 Goethe's Iphigenie a Tauris, Annotated "by Prof Franklin 
 Carter, Williams College. i6mo, 113 pp'. 
 
 Schiller's Maria Stuar- Annotated by E. S. Joynes, Prof, in 
 University of South Carolina. i6mo, 222 pp. 
 
 Lessing's Nathan der Weise. Annotated by H. C. G. Brandt, 
 Prof, in Hamilton College. i6mo, 158 pp. 
 
 WHITNEY-KLEMM GERMAN SERIES. 
 
 By William D. Whitney and L. R. Klemm. 
 
 GERMAN BY PRACTICE. i2mo, 305 pp. *■ 
 
 ELEMENTARY GERMAN READER. i2mo, 237 pp. 
 
 HENRY HOLT & CO., Publishers. NEW YORK. 
 
COMPENDIOUS 
 
 QEEMAE^ GEAMMAK 
 
 BT 
 
 WILLIAM D. WHITNEY 
 
 Professor of Sanskrit and Comparative Philology and Instructor 
 in Modern Languages in Yale College 
 
 SIXTH EDITION, THOKOUGHLY REVISED 
 
 AND 
 
 WITH NEW EXERCISES 
 
 NEW YOKE 
 
 HENKY HOLT AND COMPANY 
 
 F. W. Christern 
 
 Boston: Oabl Schoenhof 
 

 COPTBIGHT, 1888, 
 BY 
 
 HENRY HOLT & CO. 
 
 EDUCATION DEPt; 
 
PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. 
 
 (somewhat abbreviated.) 
 
 THE author of a new German grammar, in a community 
 where so many are already in use, and with so much 
 approval, may well feel called upon to explain and defend 
 his undertaking — esj)ecially, when his work is compara- 
 tively wanting in those practical exercises, for writing 
 and speaking, which make the principal part of the other 
 grammars now most in use. 
 
 That system of instruction in modern languages of which 
 the Ollendorff grammars are popularly regarded as the 
 type has its unquestionable advantages where learning to 
 speak is the main object directly aimed at, and where the 
 smallness of the classes, and the time spent with the in- 
 structor, render it possible for the latter to give each pupil 
 that amount of personal attention and drilling which is 
 needed in order to make the system yield its best results. 
 
 But in our schools and colleges this is for the most part 
 impracticable. Their circumstances and methods of in- 
 struction render translation and construction the means 
 by which the most useful knowledge and the best discipline 
 can be gained. To the very great majority of those who 
 learn German, ability to speak is an object inferior in 
 importance to ability to understand accurately and readily 
 the language as written or printed ; and the attainment 
 of the former is properly to be made posterior to that of 
 the latter. One who has mastered the principles of 
 grammar, and acquired by reading a fair vocabulary and 
 a feeling for the right use of it, will learn to speak and 
 to write rapidly and well when circumstances require of 
 him that ability. 
 
 54 ! 584 
 
IV PBETACE. 
 
 Moreover, there is a large and increasing class of students 
 whose philological training has to be won chiefly or alto- 
 gether in the study of the modern languages, instead of 
 the classical — and who must win it by methods somewhat 
 akin with those so long and so successfully followed in 
 classical study. For the class referred to, German offers 
 peculiar advantages, quite superior to those presented by 
 any other modern language. In words, forms, and con- 
 structions, it is enough unlike English to call forth and 
 exercise all the pupil's powers of discrimination, to sharpen 
 his attention to the niceties of word and phrase, and to 
 train his j^hilological insight ; while, at the same ^ime, the 
 fundamental relation of German to the most central and 
 intimate part of English makes the study instinct with 
 practical bearings on our own tongue, and equivalent to 
 a historical and comparative study of English itself ; and, 
 both on the esthetic and on the practical side, there is no 
 other modern literature so rich in attraction and so liberal 
 of reward to us as the German. 
 
 It has appeared to me that, in these aspects of the study, 
 hardly sufficient assistance was furnished the teacher and 
 learner by the grammars hitherto accessible. Three sub- 
 jects especially have called for more careful exposition : 
 the derivation of German words from one another ; the 
 construction of sentences ; and the correspondences be- 
 tween German and English. I have also desired to see in 
 some respects a more acceptable arrangement of the ordi- 
 nary subject-matter of a grammar — one having in view 
 the history of words and forms, although not obtruding 
 the details of that history unnecessarily upon pupils un- 
 prepared for their study. 
 
 At the same time, I have endeavored to make a really 
 compendious and simple grammar, according to the promise^ 
 of the title-page, a grammar which might answer the needs 
 even of young scholars, although containing some things 
 which they would not fairly understand and appreciate 
 
PEEFAOE. t 
 
 until later. That I shall have satisfied others' ideal of a 
 compendious grammar, by including all they may deem 
 essential and omitting the unessential, I do not venture to 
 hope ; but only trust that I may have come pretty near to 
 meeting the wants of many. 
 
 A careful distinction of the contents of the book by 
 variety of type, according to their degree of immediate 
 importance, has been attempted throughout. Especially, 
 I have meant to put in the largest type (sm. pica) just 
 about so much as the scholar ought to learn carefully and 
 thoroughly in his first course of grammar-lessons, pre- 
 paratory to reading. This a class should acquire, accord- 
 ing to the age and capacity and previous training of its 
 members, in from twelve to twenty-five lessons ; and 
 should then at once be put into reading, while the grammar 
 is taken up again, and such part of what was before 
 omitted is learned as the judgment of the intelligent 
 teacher shall direct. 
 
 After enough reading has been done to give some fami- 
 liarity with forms and constructions, I would have the 
 writing of exercises begun ; and I feel confident that a 
 better result in reading and writing together will be won 
 thus, in a given time, than by any other method. I have 
 myself been accustomed to prepare exercises for my classes, 
 for turning into German, from whatever text the class 
 were reading; taking a sentence or paragraph, and putting 
 its phrases into a different shape from that presented in 
 the text, so that the student shall have his main vocabulary 
 before him on the page, instead of having to hunt for 
 proper expressions in the dictionary, with knowledge in- 
 sufficient for the task. This method I would recommend 
 to others. 
 
 Some of the subjects treated in the grammar (especially 
 word-derivation, and the relation of English and German) 
 need support from the lexicon. Considering the general 
 deficiency of information on these subjects in the access- 
 
VI PREFACE. 
 
 ible dictionaries, I am endeavoring to give the beginner 
 help till he can make his analyses and comparisons for 
 himself, in the Vocabulary to a German Eeader, which is 
 published as a companion-book to the present one. From 
 its pages have been drawn a large part of the examples 
 given in the Grammar. 
 
 Of course, I have consulted, and more or less used, a 
 good many grammars while engaged in the preparation of 
 this one, deriving more or less of valuable information or 
 suggestion from each and all of them. But I do not feel 
 that I need to make special acknowledgments save to one — 
 the work of Heyse (in its two editions, the Schul- Grammatik 
 and the AusflZhrliches Lehrhuch). To it my obligations 
 have been more constant and various than I can well point 
 out in detail ; hence this general confession of indebted- 
 ness. Those familiar with Heyse will have no difficulty in 
 tracing its influence in many parts (for examjDle, in the 
 classification of verbs of the Old conjugation, which I have 
 taken almost without modification from that authority); 
 while they will also find that I have nowhere followed it 
 slavishly. 
 
 It has everywhere been my intention so to set forth the 
 facts of the language as to favor the recognition of 
 language as a growth, as something which has been grad- 
 ually converted into what it is, from a very different con- 
 dition, by those who have used it — a recognition which is 
 the first need, if one would really understand language, 
 and which must lead the way to those deepen studies into 
 the history of languages and of language, constituting so 
 important a branch of modern science. 
 
 The study of German is so rapidly increasing in preva- 
 lence that there is pressing need of raising it to a some- 
 what higher plane. I trust it will be found that this 
 volume contributes its part, though a small one, to so de- 
 sirable an end. W. D. W» 
 
 Yale College, New Ha\en, Aug. 1869. 
 
PREFACE TO THE SIXTH EDITION. 
 
 TN the revision of this work no fundamental changes have 
 -*- been made in its plan or structure. Even the para- 
 graphing has been kept unchanged throughout, so as not 
 to interfere with the pertinence of the references exten- 
 sively made to it in text-books heretofore published. But 
 many additions and improvements have been introduced — 
 partly the result of the author's own experience in the use 
 of the work, partly due to the suggestions of other users : 
 among whom are to be specially mentioned, with thanks. 
 Prof. A. S. Wheeler of the Sheffield Scientific School of 
 Yale College, and Prof. O. Seidensticker of Philadelphia. 
 The so-called New Orthography of German words has also 
 been described, and everywhere introduced, in brackets, 
 beside the old spelling : it has not yet been so widely 
 adopted in German literature that its acceptance in place 
 of the old seemed advisable. And, especially, an entire 
 new set of Exercises has been prepared, including illustra- 
 tions of the intricacies of German usage by extracts from 
 the best German authors : as to their use, see the Note 
 below. 
 
 To obviate objections made from some quarters to the 
 use of the smaller type of the first edition, something of the 
 former elaborate classification of the matter of the volume 
 by three sizes of the type, etc., has been abandoned, and 
 only two sizes, of superior legibility, are now employed. 
 
 Grateful for the favor with which the work has been 
 received during nearly twenty years, the author hopes 
 that in its somewhat changed form it will continue to 
 merit the approval of teachers and students. 
 
 Yale College, New Haven, May 1888. 
 
 I am indebted to friends, especially to Mr. Herrmann 
 Knapp, of San Jose, Cal., for sundry corrections in this 
 year's impression. January, 1893. 
 
 vii 
 
NOTE ON THE EXERCISES. 
 
 The exercises (pp. 285 — 395) are intended to be used in 
 connection with the first study of the grammar ; but it has 
 seemed best to put them together, instead of scattering thetu 
 through the body of the text. They are divided into two 
 series. The first series consists of simple exercises for trans- 
 lating from German into English and vice-versa. These follow 
 in the main the arrangement of the grammar, though in some 
 places this order is abandoned — as, by introducing a lesson on 
 prepositions quite early in the series, and by taking up the 
 subject of sentence-construction before going on to the sub- 
 junctive and infinitive, the use of which necessitates more 
 involved sentences than the pupil is prepared for. Each exer- 
 cise is accompanied by a vocabulary of the words used for 
 the first time in it, the object being to familiarize the pupil 
 gradually with a good number of the most- used German words, 
 and thus to give him a vocabulary which he will find useful in 
 all reading or speaking. There are also general vocabularies 
 at the end, including all the words used in both series of 
 exercises. 
 
 The second series of exercises consists of sentences selected 
 from the writings of well-known German authors, illustrative 
 of the usages of the language, including also those more 
 special idiomatic points not taken up in the first series. 
 Accompanying these are short English themes for translation 
 into German, in which are used as far as possible the same 
 words or the same constructions which are to be found in the 
 illustrative sentences. With the help of the English vocabulary, 
 the pupil will be able without too much difficulty to render 
 these into German, 
 
 In making use of these exercises each teacher will of course be 
 guided by his own judgment and the necessities and capabil- 
 ities of his class. If the exercises are too long, they can be 
 divided. If too short, or not full enough, it will be easy, still 
 using the same words or constructions, to add an indefinite 
 number of sentences to each exercise. If the object is to get 
 the class to the point of reading German as soon as possible, 
 it will be best merely to read through the German exercises of 
 the first series, leaving the English ones to be taken up and 
 written after some reading has been done. In the same way, 
 the reading through of the illustrative sentences, and the 
 
PREFACE. ix 
 
 writing of the English themes accompanying them, will serve 
 as a review of the grammar or a valuable auxiliary to reading. 
 After studying carefully the illustrative sentences, the student 
 will meet with little in any German reading which can cause 
 him grammatical dilSculty and the working through of the 
 English themes should be sufficient preparation for rendering 
 into German, or writing in German, in a freer and more general 
 way. All the exercises are annotated with references to the 
 grammar in cases of special difficulty. 
 
 The illustrative sentences are classified by the paragraph 
 of the grammar which they illustrate, the number of the 
 paragraph being given in brackets. Each sentence is followed 
 by the name of its author in parenthesis. For those authors 
 most frequently met with are used the following abbreviations: 
 
 grei. 
 
 Freitag. 
 
 ^lop. 
 
 Klopstock. 
 
 a 
 
 Goethe. 
 
 M* 
 
 Lessing. 
 
 sr.®r. 
 
 A. Grimm, 
 
 a^.9?. 
 
 Jean Paul Richter. 
 
 ^.®r. 
 
 Herman Grimm. 
 
 SRutf. 
 
 Riickert. 
 
 a@r. 
 
 Jakob Grimm, 
 
 m» 
 
 Schiller. 
 
 €>ei. 
 
 Heine. 
 
 ©piet 
 
 Spielhagen. 
 
 ^e^. 
 
 Heyse. 
 
 @pr. 
 
 Spruch (proverb). 
 
 $umb. 
 
 Humboldt. 
 
 m 
 
 Uhland. 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 ^^The references are to paragraphs. 
 
 Alphabet, 1-4. 
 
 Use of capitals, 4. 
 
 New Orthography, 5. 
 
 Pronunciation, 6-55. 
 
 Vowels, 7-22 ; consonants, 23-53 ; foreign words, 54 ; ac- 
 cent, 55. 
 
 Parts of Speech, 56. 
 
 Declension, 57-62. 
 
 Rules for gender of nouns, 61. 
 
 Articles, 63-67. 
 
 Use of articles, 66. 
 
 Nouns, 68-113. 
 
 General rules of declension, 68-73; First or strong de- 
 clension, 74-90; first class, 75-80; second class, 81-86; 
 third class, 87-90; Second or weak declension, 91-95; ir- 
 regular declension, 96-100; nouns of foreign origin, 101; 
 proper names, 102-108; modifying adjuncts of the noun, 
 109-112 ; equivalents of the noun, 113. 
 
 Adjectives, 114-148. 
 
 When declined, 114-118; first and second declensions, 
 119-128; mixed declension, 124.2; adjective used as sub- 
 stantive, 129 ; as adverb, 130 ; participles as adjectives, 131 ; 
 comparison of adjectives, 133-142 ; comparison withadverbp 
 141 ; modifying adjuncts of the adjective, 143-148. 
 
CONTENrS. XI 
 
 Pbonouns, 14.9-195. 
 
 Personal pronouns, 151-156; possessive pronominal ad- 
 jectives, 157-162 ; demonstratives, 163-166 ; determinatives, 
 167-171 ; interrogatives, 172-176 ; relatives, 177-183 ; inde- 
 finite pronouns and indefinite numerals, 184-195. 
 
 NuMERAi^, 196-208. 
 
 Cardinals, 197-202 ; ordinals, 203 ; multipUcatives, etc., 
 202-206 ; derivatives from ordinals, 207-208. 
 
 Uses of the Forms of Declension, 209-230. 
 
 Numbers, 210-211; cases:— nominative, 212-214; genitive, 
 215-220 ; dative, 221-225 ; accusative, 226-230. 
 
 Conjugation, 231. 
 
 Verbs, 232-319. 
 
 Classification, 233 ; simple forms of the verb, 235-237 ; 
 compound forms, 238-240 ; use of l)abzn or jetn as auxiliary 
 of tense, 241-244 ; conjugations, 245-246 ; New or weak 
 conjugation, 247-250 ; modal auxiliaries, 251-260 ; Old or 
 strong conjugation, 261-273 ; passive verbs, 274r-282 ; 
 reflexive verbs, 283-290 ; impersonal verbs, 291-295 ; com- 
 pound verbs, 296 ; separable, 297-301 ; inseparable, 302-307 ; 
 separable or inseparable, 308-311 ; other compound verbs, 
 312-313 ; verbal adjuncts, 314-319. 
 
 Uses of the Forms of Conjugation, 320-359. 
 
 Person and number, 320-322 ; mode and tense: — indicative, 
 323-328; subjunctive, 329-333; conditional, 334-336; im- 
 perative, 337-338 ; infinitive, 339-348 ; participles, 349-359. 
 
 Indeclinables, 360. 
 
 Adverbs, 361-370. 
 
 Classification, 362 ; origin, 363-367 ; comparison, 368 ; 
 special uses, 369 ; place, 370. 
 
 Prepositions, 371-381. 
 
 Cases governed by them, 372-376. 
 
 Conjunctions, 382-386. 
 Classification, 383. 
 
 Interjections, 387-392. - 
 
XU CONTENTS. 
 
 WOKD-FORMATION, DERIVATION, 393-417. 
 
 Introductory explanations, 393-402 ; derivation of verbs, 
 403-406 ; of nouns, 407-412 ; of adjectives, 413-416 ; of the 
 other parts of speech, 417. 
 
 WOED-COMBINATION, COMPOSITION, 418-425. 
 
 Introductory explanations, 418-419 ; composition of verbs, 
 420; of nouns, 421-422 ; of adjectives, 423-424; of particles, 
 425. 
 
 Construction of Sentences, 426-446. 
 
 Introductory explanations, 426-429 ; regular order of the 
 sentence, 430: inverted order, ^^ l interrogative and opta- 
 tive sentences, 432 ; conditional clauses, 433^ transposed 
 order, 434 ; dependent clauses, 435-439 ; substantive depen- 
 dent clause, 436 ; adjective dependent clause, 437 ; adverbial 
 dependent clause, 438 ; summary of the rules of arrangement, 
 440-444 ; concluding remarks, 445-446. 
 
 Belation of German to English, 447-461. 
 
 Introductory explanations, 447-452 ; the law of progres- 
 sion of mutes, 453-457 ; correspondences, 458-60. 
 
 Brief History of the German Language, 462-469. 
 
 Three periods of history of High-German, 463 ; Old High- 
 German period, 464 ; Middle High-German period, 465 ; New 
 High-German period, 467 ; what the present German is, 468 ; 
 remarks, 469. 
 
 German Written Character, pp. 275. 
 
 List of Irregular Verbs, pp. 278-284. 
 
 Exercises, First Series, pp. 285-334. 
 
 " Second Series, pp. 335-395. 
 
 German-English Vocabulary, pp. 397-444. 
 
 English-German Vocabulary, pp. 445-461. 
 
 Index, pp. 463-472. 
 
GERMAN GRAMMAR. 
 
 ALPHABET. 
 
 1. The German language is usually printed in an 
 alphabet having the same origin as our own, and the 
 same extent ; but in the form of its characters nearly 
 resembling what we call "Old English," or "Black- 
 letter." 
 
 This is one of the derivative forms of the old Latin alphabet, a 
 product of the perverse ingenuity of monkish scribes in the Middle 
 Ages. It was in general use throughout Europe at the time of the 
 invention of printing, but was abandoned by one nation after another 
 for the simpler, neater, and more legible character which we call 
 "Roman," and which the Germans know as "Latin" (lateinisch). For 
 scientific hterature, the latter is in more common use among the Ger- 
 mans themselves, and many of the best German scholars are in favor of 
 the entire relinquishment of the other. 
 
 2. The letters of the ordinary German alphabet, with 
 their "Koman" equivalents, and the names by which 
 the Germans call them, are as follows : 
 
 German 
 
 Roman 
 
 German 
 
 German 
 
 Boman 
 
 German 
 
 letters. 
 
 equiv'ts. 
 
 names. 
 
 letters. 
 
 equiv'ts. 
 
 names. 
 
 % a 
 
 a 
 
 a, (ah) 
 
 ®,9 
 
 g 
 
 ga 
 
 33,6 
 
 b 
 
 ba {bay) 
 
 €>,^ 
 
 h 
 
 U 
 
 S, c 
 
 c 
 
 tsa 
 
 5, i 
 
 i 
 
 e{ee) 
 
 ®,b 
 
 d 
 
 da 
 
 3,i 
 
 J 
 
 yot 
 
 e,. e 
 
 e 
 
 a 
 
 «, ! 
 
 k 
 
 ka 
 
 ^, f 
 
 f 
 
 ef 
 
 ?, I 
 
 1 
 
 el 
 
2 ' 
 
 c cc. . 
 
 • • • 
 * * * • 
 
 ALPHABET. 
 
 
 [4- 
 
 kSfeiroali » ' 
 
 ♦itoriiah** 
 
 'German 
 
 
 German 
 
 Roman 
 
 German 
 
 letters. 
 
 equiv'ts. 
 
 names. 
 
 
 letters. 
 
 equiv'ts 
 
 names. 
 
 m,m 
 
 m 
 
 em 
 
 
 X,t 
 
 t 
 
 ta 
 
 % n 
 
 n 
 
 en 
 
 
 n, u 
 
 U 
 
 u (oo) 
 
 0,0 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 «, u 
 
 V 
 
 fou (found) 
 
 %P 
 
 P 
 
 pa 
 
 
 2B,tt) 
 
 w 
 
 va 
 
 0,q 
 
 q 
 
 ku (koo) 
 
 X, 3? 
 
 X 
 
 ix 
 
 di,x 
 
 r 
 
 er 
 
 
 ?)-9 
 
 y 
 
 ipsilon 
 
 ®,f, « 
 
 s 
 
 es 
 
 
 3'i 
 
 z 
 
 tset 
 
 1. There is a special written alphabet, as well as a printed, 
 for the German. The forms of its letters, and specimens of 
 written texts, will be given at the end of this work. The begin- 
 ner had better not concern himself with it, as he can make prac- 
 tical use of it to advantage only when he has already gained 
 considerable famiharity with the language. 
 
 , 2. When German is written or printed in the " Latin " char- 
 acter, each German letter is represented by its Latin equivalent, 
 with the single exception that for the compound ^, sz, is usually 
 and preferably substituted ss (or fs : see 49). 
 
 3. Certain points concerning this alphabet require 
 special notice on the part of the learner : 
 
 1. Of the two forms of small s, the second, or short §, is used 
 y at the end of a word ; the other, or long |, in other situations : 
 
 thus, Ia§ ; but lejen, fo. 
 
 If a word ending in § is followed by another in composition, 
 it is still written with short § : thus, loycje^en, In^'^er, bc§^al6, 
 baSfelbe, ^onnerStaG, Sicbe^Iirief. Short § is also used before an 
 ending of derivation beginning with a consonant : thus, 33i§tf)um 
 [^^i§him], 2Bei§!)cit, BDel)aft, ^a5d]t\\, Utoeleui, loybar; further, in 
 foreign words before other consonants than t or |) : thus, 5[Ra§fe 
 33o§!et or 35D§quet, ^i§cour§, ^igcipUn, ^atriotigmug. 
 
 2. Some of the letters are modified in form by combination 
 with one another: thus, c^, ch; cf, ck; §, sz; ^, tz. 
 
 3. Some letters resemble one another so much as to be easily 
 confounded by the beginner : 
 
 Thus, 33, h, and 35, v; g, c, and ®, e; (S, g, and @, s; ^, fc, 
 9?, n, and ^, r; %, d, £), o, and Q, q;- also, b, h, b, d, and ]^, h; 
 f,/, and f, s; !, k, and t, t; r, r, and r, oc. 
 
 4. The German uses capital initial letters 
 
 f~ 
 
4] NEW ORTHOGRAPHY.' ', ' ,',3 ' '3' 
 
 1. As the English, at the beginning 6i senli^nces; 'of ^'''^ 
 lines in poetry, and of direct quotations. 
 
 2. For all nouns, common as well as proper, and for ^ 
 words used as nouns. 
 
 Words used as nouns are especially adjectives (129) and ^ 
 infinitives (340). As no fixed line divides their ordinary from 
 their substantive use, there are doubtful cases in each class, 
 with regard to which usage is conflicting. 
 
 But nouns and noun-forms used as other parts of speech — 
 adverbs, prepositions, prefixes, etc. — do not take capitals : thus, 
 ftatt, fang, f(uG§, lelb tt)un. 
 
 3. For pronouns of the third person, when used in 
 address, with the value of those of the second person 
 (153). 
 
 That is, especially, ©ie, with its oblique cases, and its corre- ;< 
 sponding possessive 3^r; but not its reflexive, ]t(f). 
 
 4. Pronouns of the second person properly take capitals only 
 when intended to come under the eye of the person addressed 
 (as in letters, etc.) ; but they are sometimes written with capitals 
 also in other cases. 
 
 5. Kespecting the indefinite pronouns ^e'^^^^^^^^^ every one, 
 Semonb any one, Dliemanb no one, etc., and the pronominal 
 adjectives used substantively, such as afle§ everything, matK^er 
 many a one, einige some, usage is very various. Some write ein 
 with a capital when it is emphatic, or means one. 
 
 6. For adjectives derived from names of persons or 
 places, usually ; but not for adjectives of nationality, as /^ 
 englijd) English, fran^ofifd) French, 
 
 7. Adjectives of title, or those used in respectful and compli- 
 mentary address, also usually take capital initials : thus, @ure 
 ^oniglic^e C>ol&eit your royal highness, ©ic, SBoWfleborener ^txx 
 you, excellent sir, griebrid) ber .3tt)eite or ber ^ro^e. 
 
 NEW ORTHOG-RAPHY. 
 
 5. 1. German scholars have, for some time past, been 
 attempting to improve the spelling of the language in the direc- 
 tion of simplicity and consistency, especially as regards the use 
 of double vowels, of double consonants, of 1^ as the sign of a A. 
 long vowel, etc. Some of these changes have recently been 
 officially authorized, and are gradually coming into more or less 
 
4:\ PrvONUNClATION. [6- 
 
 general use, while others are liable to be met with in the works 
 of certain authors. 
 
 2. In this grammar the old and stiU prevailingly used orthog- 
 raphy will be employed; but the authorized changes will be 
 ► given under the head of Pronunciation after the various letters, 
 and the new spelUng of each word wiQ be added after it in 
 brackets wherever it occurs. 
 
 PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 6. The precise mode of production of German articulated 
 sounds, taken singly or in combination, as well as the general 
 tone and style of utterance, can only be acquired through means 
 of oral instruction, and by long practice. The following rules, 
 however, will help the learner, with or without a teacher, to 
 approximate to the true pronunciation of German words. 
 
 The subject is a comparatively easy one to deal with, because 
 
 ^ 1. There are no silent letters, either vowels or con- 
 sonants. 
 
 i- Excepting sometimes ^ (28). 
 
 y 2. As a rule, the same letter receives the same sound 
 under all circumstances. 
 
 ^ Exceptions, 5, c, b, g, f, t) — see those letters, below. 
 
 3. The German, however, like many other languages, 
 writes certain simple sounds, vowel or consonant, with 
 combinations of two and of three letters, or with 
 digraphs and trigraphs. 
 
 VOWELS. 
 
 7. Each simple vowel sound is either long or short, 
 varying in quantity, or time of utterance, without at the 
 same time varying, like our English vowels, to any- 
 notable extent, in quality, or nature of sound. 
 
 The distinction of long and short vowels must to a great 
 extent be learned by experience ; but the following rules will be 
 found of service : 
 4- 1. A vowel doubled, or followed by ^, is long. 
 
 2. A vowel is short before a double consonant, and 
 "^"^aorfiL usually before a group of two consonants - unless 
 
10] VOWELS. 5 
 
 tlie latter of the pair or group belongs to an appended 
 ending or suffix. 
 
 8. %, tt. — ^t has always the sound of our open or ,•<; 
 Italian a, in far, father. 
 
 It is long in %a\, ^aax, 33a^n, naft, 5^amen. 
 
 It is short in 33afl, 5Rann, ^atte, ^anh, fcf)arf, !ann, Balb. 
 
 Particularly avoid the flattening of this vowel, or its reduc- 
 tion to a sound at all resembling that of our "short a" in hat, can, 
 
 1. Some words vary in spelling between aa and a; of those 
 more usually having aa the New Orthography prescribes a in 
 gjia^ measure, ©c^af sheep, ©(^ar troop (and =]d)ar in $flug* 
 fd^ar), ©tar starling, SBage scales, 2Bare w;are, Bar in cash 
 (Sarf(^aft cas/i). 
 
 9. @, e. — (S is pronounced nearly as our e in they, or 
 our "long a" in/a^e, only without the distinct vanishing- 
 sound of ee into which our a passes at its close. Short 
 e is nearly our " short e " in met, men. 
 
 It is long in §eer, meftr, 'Sttij, 
 
 It is short in benn, fc^nell, nett, §err, 2Belt. 
 
 In long syllables — and by some authorities also in short ones 
 — is distinguished a closer and an opener utterance of the e, the 
 latter inclining very slightly toward our " short a " (in hat, can). 
 The difference is analogous to that between the French e and e. 
 Thus, e is said to be close in me'^r, Ute!^, jeber (first syllable), and 
 open in (the first syllables of) Seben, geben, beten. No rules are 
 to be given respecting the occurrence of this distinction ; nor is 
 it much to be insisted on. 
 
 Unlike the other vowels, e is notably slighted and obscured in 
 sound when unaccented. Especially before a liquid (n, I, r), in a 
 syllable following the accent, it acquires nearly the tone of our 
 " short It " (in but), and becomes very inconspicuous. 
 
 Guard against giving to final e the sound of English e; it 
 should have a very open utterance, and in parts of Germany 
 even becomes like our "short u" (in but, puff). 
 
 1. The New Orthography writes §erbe herd, instead of §eerbe. 
 
 10. 3f t. — 3 has the sound of our i inpiqice, machine, 
 or of our " long e," or double ee. When short, it is more 
 like our " short i " (in pin), yet somewhat less removed 
 than that is from our " long e." 
 
 -f- 
 
6 PRONUNCIATION. [10^ 
 
 It is long in t^n, t^r, Sgel, bir, Wint. 
 
 It is short in biflig, bitten, ^jinter, ift, ^rift. 
 
 3 is never written double, and it is followed by ^ only in the 
 personal pronouns i^n, t^m, i^r, i^rer, i^nen, and the possessives 
 i^r and i^rig. To indicate its long sound an e is generally 
 added, making the digraph, or compound vowel, ie (18). 
 
 11. C, 0. — D has always the tone of our "longo/' 
 except the distinct vanishing-sound of u (po) with which 
 the latter ends. 
 
 It is long in 5!Jloor, 33ol^ne, ^otp (Bebot, ^ober. 
 
 It is short in ']oU, (SJott, often, molh, ^opf. 
 
 Never give to o the quahty of our "short o" in Iwt, on, etc.; 
 this is no proper o-sound, but pretty nearly the German short a. 
 
 1. The New Orthography writes So§ lot (and lofen and 
 Sofung). 
 
 12. U, tl. — Vi long is our u in ruhf or oo in hoot ; 
 VL short is nearly our u in pvM, or oo in book, but less 
 removed from long u. 
 
 It is long in UI)r, nun, gut, ru^en. 
 
 It is short in q^ruft, ©tunbe, !RuII. 
 
 U is never doubled. 
 
 Be especially careful not to give to u, under any circum- 
 stances, the pronunciation of English u in union, mute, cure ; to 
 do so is to put a y before it. 
 
 13. ^, ^. — ^ is found only in foreign words (except, 
 according to the usage of some, in the digraphs al), et) : 
 see below, 19.3), and is ordinarily pronounced as an t 
 in the same situation. 
 
 Examples : ©^rup, %\\)\, \X)X\]^, 9J^t)rte. 
 
 Some require that in words from the Greek, of more learned 
 and less popular use, it should have the sound of ii (17)- 
 
 MODIFIED V0WEI.S. 
 
 14. 1. The modified vowels are, historically, prod- 
 ucts of the mixture of an e or t-sound with a, o, u, or of 
 the phonetic assimilation of the latter to the former in 
 a succeeding syllable. They were written %q, Dc, Uc, 
 ae, oe, ue, and are still often so written when the vowel 
 
17] MODIFIED VOWELS. 7 
 
 modified is a capital ; but when small letters were 
 used, the e came to be first written above the other 
 vowel — thus, a, Of it — and then, for convenience, was 
 reduced in common use to a couple of dots — as d, b, it. 
 
 2. They are never doubled ; and hence, a noun containing in 
 the singular a double vowel, if requiring modification in the 
 plural, loses one vowel : thus, (gaal forms ©die, %a^ forms S]er. 
 
 15. %, S.— S has the sound of an open c — that is to 
 say, of an e very slightly approaching our *' short a"; 
 it is everywhere hardly distinguishable from an e in 
 the same situation. 
 
 It is long in |?(dger, prdgen, Sfer, Spacer, ^[fldftre. 
 It is short in §dnbe, Spfel, ftdttc, ^drfer, fdflen. 
 
 1. A number of words vary in their spelhng between d and e. 
 Of those often spelt with e the New Orthography prefers d in 
 ©ebdrbe gesture; and in those oftenest written with d it prefers 
 e in uBerfd)tt)cnQUd) exuberant, and tnelfd) Welsh. For the inter- 
 change of du and eu see below, 21.3. 
 
 16. O, 5. — D is really produced by a combination 
 of that position of the tongue in which e (e in they) is 
 uttered, and of that position of the lips in which o is 
 uttered ; but it is not easily given by a conscious effort 
 so to dispose the organs. It is nearest in tone to our 
 u in hurt, but is notably different from this, verging 
 considerably toward the e of they. It is closely akin 
 with the French e^^-sounds. 
 
 It is long in Ofen, mo^^en, fc^on, ftoren, 6l. 
 
 It is short in fonnte, bffnen, C)o(Ic, ©potter, Orter. 
 
 To form o, therefore, endeavor to hit an intermediate sound 
 between the vowels of hurt and hate. 
 
 The German poets frequently make o rime with the simple 
 C, and in parts of Germany the two are hardly distinguished. 
 But their real difference, as properly pronounced, is quite 
 marked, and should never be neglected. 
 
 17. tl, tt. — U is produced by a combination of that 
 position of the tongue in which i (^ in piqiie, pin) is 
 uttered, and of that position of the lips in which u {u in 
 
8 PEONUNCIATION. [17- 
 
 rule^ pull) is uttered. It is tlie same sound with, the 
 French u. To utter it, first round the lips to the 
 U-position, and then, without moving them, fix the 
 tongue to say i (ee) — or vice versa. 
 
 It is long in libel, 8d)ulcr, miibe, tntju, tix% iibcr. 
 
 It is short in ^IM, Tlixikx, Uppigfeit, fiiEcn, §iittc, biinn. 
 
 The sounds of o and ii are, among the German vowels, much 
 the hardest to acquire, and cannot be mastered without assidu- 
 ous practice under a teacher. 
 
 DIPHTHONGS AND VOCAL DIGRAPHS. 
 
 18. For t, D, 11, see Modified Vowels, above (14-17). 
 3c, as already noticed (10), is an t made long by the 
 
 addition of an e, instead of by doubling, or the addition 
 of ^. 
 
 Historically, te often represents an original combination of 
 separate vowels. 
 
 Examples : bie, lief, liegen, grieben, 3fliemen. 
 
 At the end of a few words (mostly coming from the Latin, 
 and always accented on the preceding syllable), the e of ie has 
 its own proper sound, and the i is pronounced like y before it, 
 or else forms an independent syllable: thus, Sinien, (^lorie, 
 gamilie, Sragobte ; also ^nie (plural of ^nie, and better spelt 
 ^niee). 
 
 1. The New Orthography writes te instead of i in verbs (404, 
 II. 4) hke marfd^ieren, ftubieren, ^antieren. 
 
 19. 1. ?li. — %i is a combination of letters represent- 
 ing a true diphthongal sound, which is composed of the 
 two elements a (a in far) and i {{ in pique). It is pro- 
 nounced nearly as the English aye (meaning * yes '), or 
 like the "long *" oi aisle, ish, but with the first con- 
 stituent of that sound made very slightly opener and 
 more conspicuous, a little dwelt on. It occurs in very 
 few words. 
 
 Examples: §ain, SSaife, 5!}^ai. 
 
 2. @i. — (Si represents the same sound, and is of 
 very much more frequent occurrence, being the ordin- 
 ary German equivalent of our "long *." 
 
24] DIPHTHONGS. 9 
 
 Examples : ^ein, 33eil, @imer, fei, (Si, ©itelfeit. 
 
 3. ^^ and et) were formerly written in certain words instead 
 of ai and ei : they are now gone nearly out of use, only a few 
 authors retaining them. 
 
 Examples : Tlat), fetjn, fel), ^oliset). 
 
 20. ?(lt. — 5(u combines the two sounds of a (in far) 
 and u (in rule), and is pronounced almost precisely like 
 the English ou, ow, in house, down, but with the first 
 element, the a-sound, a shade more distinct. 
 
 Examples: §au§, faufen, luge, ©au, braun, Waul. 
 
 21. 1. ©tt. — ^u is most nearly like the English oi, 
 oy, in hoil, loy, differing chiefly in having the first ele- 
 ment briefer and less conspicuous. Theoretically, its 
 final element is the ii-sound. 
 
 Examples : i^eutc, ncu, ©uter, greunbe, euer. 
 
 2. 9(u, ttU. — Su is the modified diphthong corre- 
 sponding to ait, as d to a. It is pronounced in the 
 same manner as eu. 
 
 Examples: SuQier, Oaute, Braunen, ^rciume. 
 
 3. There are a number of words which vary in their spelling 
 between eu and du. Of those oftenest spelt with du the New 
 Orthography prefers eu in bleueu maul, beud)ten seem, (SJreuel 
 horror, greulid) horrible, leugnen deny, f(f)neu5en snuff. 
 
 22. Hi. — Ui is found only in :^ui, pfut, and is pro- 
 nounced like we. 
 
 CONSONANTS. 
 
 23. S, b. — 33 has the same sound as in English, when 
 followed in the same syllable by a vowel or a semivowel 
 (r, I), or when doubled. 
 
 Examples : 33iber, 33uBe, 1)dbtn, ober, 33Iet, breci^en, ^bbe. 
 
 In other situations — i.e., when final, or followed by a 
 consonant in general — it loses its sonant character, and 
 is converted into the corresponding surd, p. 
 
 Examples: ©tab, (je^oBt, ob, f^ub, C)cib§bura'. 
 
 24. 6, e.-^(£, in words properly German, is found 
 
10 PEONUNCIATION. [24- 
 
 only in the combinations (^, d, fd), for which see below, 
 43, 44, 48. 
 
 In words borrowed from other languages and not 
 Germanized in spelling, it is, as in English, hard before 
 a, 0, u, I, n, r, but soft before c, i, t) : in the former case, 
 it is pronounced as k, in the latter, as ts (German ^: 42). 
 
 Examples : ^ato, (^^arcer, (Concert, Sicero, CUaubiu^, Ocean. 
 
 1. There are many foreign words in regard to which usage is 
 still unsettled, either ! or c being written for the hard sound, 
 and either 3 or c for the soft sound : thus, farcer or ^arjer, 
 (Concert or ^onjert. 
 
 25.* 2), b. — ^, like h, has its own proper sonant 
 sound, that of English d, before a vowel, or any con- 
 sonant that may intervene between it and a vowel in 
 the same syllable ; also when doubled. 
 
 Examples : ^amm, bid, ^orf, bu, ^bel, brei, ^voaU, ^robbel. 
 
 At the end of a word, or of a syllable before another 
 consonant, it is changed to the corresponding surd, t. 
 
 Examples : 2kh, ^iahi, milb, ^Ibenb, lanblid). 
 
 1. The combination bt is the equivalent of a double t, the b 
 not being separately pronounced : thus, gefanbt, berebt, Idbt, 
 f anbte ; and in a few words the spelling wavers between bt and t. 
 The New Orthography writes tot dead, instead of the usual 
 tobt (hence also toten, etc.) ; also Qcfcl)eit clever, instead of 
 gefdjeibt. 
 
 26. |5, f . — 5 ^^s always the same sound as in 
 English. 
 
 27. @, g. — @, like the other sonant mutes, h and b, 
 has its proper hard sound (as English g in go, give, get) 
 when doubled, or when followed in the same syllable 
 by a vowel or a liquid ((, it, r). It is never softened 
 before e or t — as it also is not in any English word of 
 Germanic origin. 
 
 Examples : (S5an§, Qcgen, (^ier, gut, grog, ^la§, (^nabe, ^ogge. 
 
 In the same situations in which h and b become p and 
 t, g is also changed to a surd ; it does not, however, 
 assume the* value of !, but rather that of cI) (43). 
 
34] CONSONANTS. 11 
 
 Examples: %aQ, aoQ, 3w9/ ^ogt, ^J^afib, ru^ig, laglic^. 
 
 There is much difference of usage among Germans, and of 
 opinion among German orthoepists, as to the pronunciation of 
 g. All, indeed, agree to give it the hard sound when initial. 
 But in other situations, some always soften it to d) — e. g., in 
 ^^Qsn, Siege. Others do not allow it anywhere the precise 
 c^-sound, especially not after the hard vowels (a, 0, u), but pro- 
 nounce it nearly as f, or as something between a g and f, or 
 between a f and (f) — and so on. 
 
 In many words taken from the French, g has its French 
 sound, like that of the English s in vision, or z in azure: thus, 
 (^enie, ^age, Sngenieur, Orange, genieren. 
 
 28. §, 1^. — § has the sound of English h when it 
 begins a word (or either of the suffixes {)eit, I)aft). Else- 
 where it is silent, serving either to lengthen the pre- 
 ceding vowel, or to make a hiatus between two vowels. 
 
 For tf), which is pronounced as simple t, see below (37.2). For 
 (^ and jd), see below (43, 48). 
 
 Examples: I)in, fter, ^at, ©of, ^ni, ^ol^er, l!inbI)cit,J)al)l^aft,frDft, 
 raf(^, ©^u^, rul)en, %^r\, (^I)re, cl)cr, i()m, O^r, tl)un, ^t!)er. 
 
 29. Sf J» — 3 ^s always pronounced like our y con- 
 sonant. 
 
 Examples: 3a!^r, jung, ieber, So^ann, bejaften. 
 
 30. B, f, — ^ has always the sound of English h 
 Instead of double f is written c! (which, however, if 
 separated in syllabication, becomes t4). 
 
 Examples : faun, fennen, f^eib, £reibe, ^nie, ^nabe, ^lode, bruf= 
 fen (but brurfcn). 
 
 31. 8, I ; SK, tit. — These letters have the same 
 sounds as their English correspondents. 
 
 32. 91, II. — ^ has usually the same "Sound as Eng- 
 lish n. Like the latter, it has before f the value of ng : 
 thus, finfen, ^ant 
 
 For the digraph ng, see below (45). 
 
 33. $JJ, Ji. — ^ is pronounced as in English. For 
 the digraph pi), see below (46.2). 
 
 34. £l, r|. — O, as in English, is always followed by 
 
12 PEONUNCIATION. [34- 
 
 XI, and qu is pronounced as hv, but with the pure labial 
 utterance of the -y-sound, as explained below (under 
 ttj, 39). 
 Examples : Oual, quer, Ouirl, quoH. 
 
 35. 91, t. — ^ has a decidedly more distinct and 
 forcible utterance than in English, being more or less 
 rolled or trilled, and hence formed a little further for- 
 ward in the mouth than our r. In every situation, it 
 must be clearly heard. 
 
 Examples : 9ianb, reben, flitter, Sfloftr, runb, ^cr, §crr, ^Irbetter, 
 gii^rer, t)ermer!en, marmorner, eriernbarer. 
 
 36. @, f, §. — ©, after a manner analogous with b, 
 b, and g, has its proper surd or hissing sound only 
 when doubled, final, or standing before a consonant; 
 before a vowel (not before a semivowel ; nor when pre- 
 ceded by a surd consonant, as t, cf), or a liquid, I, m, n, 
 r) it approaches a sonant, or buzzing sound, that of our 
 z, and in the usage of some localities, or of some classes, 
 it is a full s; according, however, to the better sup- 
 ported pronunciation, it is a compromise between s 
 and 2, a kind of sz. Before t and p at the beginning 
 of a word, it is usually and regularly pronounced 
 as sh (rather less broadly and conspicuously than our 
 common sh); but the pronunciation as written has also 
 good usage (especially in Northern Germany) in its 
 favor. 
 
 Double §> (f^, ff) is always surd or hissing; for % 
 see 49. 
 
 Examples: (S5Ia§, ^(x\i, S3o§f)eit, tt)tj]en, Sootfe, emftG, alfo, ©o:^n, 
 ©eele, 33efcn, (S^efang, fteif, ©trang, ©pur, fpringen. 
 
 37. %, t. — %, in words properly German, has always 
 the ordinary sound of English t 
 
 Examples: %o.\t\, Saube, %zii, treten, Xritt, ^inte. 
 
 1. In the terminations of certain words from the 
 Latin or French, t is pronounced as ^ (i. e., as English 
 ts) before ia, te, io : thus, martialifd^, patient, Station. 
 
39] CONSONANTS. 13 
 
 2. Xf) is pronounced always as simple t, its I) having, 
 in real German words, no historical ground, but only a 
 phonetic value, as indicating the long quantity of the 
 neighboring vowel : thus, ^f)a(, Zi)at, Zi)on, t^un, Xt)ure, 
 X^rcine. 
 
 3. The New Orthography omits the "f) of tft at the beginning of 
 a word in all cases in which the following vowel is otherwise 
 shown to be long: thus, %m animal, %d\ part (with Urteil, 
 SSorteil, etc.), ^eer tor, kmx dear, %an dew, t)erteibiGen defend; 
 also in %^vixm tower, and in the suffix =tum (for ^f^uin) : thus, 
 9tei^tum wealth. But the f) is retained in xi)ee tea. It writes 
 t instead of t^ everywhere at the end of a word (or of a radical 
 syllable before a suffix or ending) : thus, glut flood, 9Jlut spirit, 
 5^ot need, ^at council, rot red, mert dear, Sddtjel riddh, ^tem 
 breath, 5!Jliete hire, ^ute rod — instead of giut^, etc. 
 
 Some writers omit the Ij of t^ in all cases. 
 For ^, see below (61). 
 
 38, §B, H. — '^ is hardly found except at the begin- 
 ning of a word, and there has the sound of English /. 
 In the case or two where it occurs in the interior of 
 words before a vowel, it is pronounced as our v; as 
 also, in words taken from foreign languages which give 
 it the latter sound. 
 
 Examples: 35atcr, ml, SSerfaH, t)or, t)oIIig, SSolf, freDeIn, 
 S!Iat)e, 55acan3, SSenebig, t)ioIett, ^ult)er. 
 
 39. SB, Ul. — 3S, when not preceded by a consonant 
 in the same syllable, is commonly and correctly pro- 
 nounced precisely as the English v, or between the 
 edges of the upper teeth and lower lip. Another mode 
 of its utterance, which is also supported by good 
 authority, excludes the action of the teeth, and pro- 
 duces the sound between the edges of the lips alone. 
 As thus made, it is still distinctly a v (not a w), though 
 one of a different quality from our v : the difference, 
 however, is not conspicuous to an unpractised ear. All 
 authorities agree in requiring this purely labial pro- 
 nunciation after a consonant (which consonant is nearly 
 
14 PBONUNCIATION. [34- 
 
 always a sibilant, fc^ or j) : and the same belongs, as 
 above noticed (34), to the u of the combination qu. 
 
 Examples: 2Belle, 2Baf)n, 2But^, mliQn, {corner, aiDei, %mtU 
 
 40. X, J. — 3£ is found in only an exceedingly small 
 number of words originally German. It has the sound 
 of English x (ks), whether as initial or elsewhere. 
 
 Examples: Igt, C)e£e, %tii, ^mopljon, 3Eenien, 3Ei)roGra|)l)tc. 
 
 41. ^, ^. — ^ in German is a vowel only (13). 
 
 42. 2, 3. — 3 is always pronounced as ts, except in 
 the combination [3 (see below, 49) : its two constituents 
 should be sharply and distinctly uttered. Instead of 
 double J is written t^ (51). 
 
 Examples : ^inn, SoH, ju, gerjiel^en, gagen, ^eijen, ^rinj, §ol3, 
 ^ers, $Iafe, stDei. 
 
 CONSONANTAL DIGEAPHS AND TETGKAPHS. 
 
 43. g]|, dj. — The compound d) has two sounds: 
 one is deeper or more guttural, nearly our throat- 
 clearing or hawking sound, and is heard after a, 0, u, 
 an ; the other, after any other vowel or a consonant, is 
 more palatal, made over the middle of the tongue, and 
 approaches the sA-sound, or is nearly as we should 
 pronounce Jiy in hyen. 
 
 (^^, in all situations, is a rough breathing, an h, rasped out 
 with conspicuous force through as nearly as possible the same 
 position of the organs in which the preceding vowel was uttered. 
 According, then, as the vowel is one produced in the throat — 
 namely, a, 0, U — or one which comes forth between the flat of 
 the tongue and the palate — namely, c, i, t), d, b, ix — or as it is a 
 diphthong whose final constituent is of each class respectively 
 — -namely, an on the one hand ; a\, ei, Ciu, cu on the other — the 
 following d) has a different pronunciation, guttural or palatal. 
 
 1 . (If) after a consonant has the softer or palatal sound. 
 
 As above noticed (27), c\ not followed by a vowel etc. 
 ha.s the sound which d) would have in the same situa- 
 tion. 
 
46] CONSONANTS. 15 
 
 Examples : guttural c^ : 35a(^, ho6), 33u(^, an^, Tla6)tx, %^t\xm, 
 
 palatal c^: ^ec^, rc(i)t, i(^, ni(^t§, ftd^er, 33ud)er, 
 a^kn, Sdc^er, Soccer, rei(^, euc^, feud)!, bduc^te, burc^, i)old^, man* 
 (f)er, 2Bea, ric^tig, 9)^dgbe, beugte, Suglein, Stt'erg. 
 
 The fault particularly to be avoided in practising the d) -sound 
 is the closure of the organs, forming a mute consonant, a kind 
 of k or g. If such a mispronunciation is once acquired, it can- 
 not be unlearned without great trouble. Much better utter a 
 mere breathing, an h, at first, depending upon further practice 
 to enable one by degrees to roughen it to the desired point of 
 distinctness. 
 
 2. (£^ before §, when the §> belongs to the stem of 
 the word, and not to an added suffix or inflectional end- 
 ing, loses its peculiar sound, and is uttered as Jc (i.e., 
 
 d)g as x). 
 Examples: 2Ba(^§, Od}fe, 5u(^§, 33ud)fe, ®ei(^fel, tt)cc^feln. 
 
 3. In words taken from the Greek, d) has usually the softer 
 or palatal d)-sound before e or i, as (S;i)irurg, $cted)ien ; but else- 
 where it is pronounced as f : thus, (XI)aractcr, (^I)or, S^lor, (Sftrift. 
 In words from the French, it has the French c/i-sound, or that 
 of German fd) (our sh): thus, 9ied)erc^e, d)armant, (Sl)auf]ee. 
 
 44. ^t, i, — Sf, as already explained (30), is the 
 written equivalent of a double 4. 
 
 45. 91g, tt(|. — 9^CJ is the guttural nasal, the equiva- 
 lent of English ng, standing related to ! and c^ as it to t 
 and b, and iii to p and h. Its g is not separately uttered, 
 as g, before either a vowel or a consonant : thus, finger 
 like singer J not like finger; Ijimgrig like hangrope, not 
 like hungry. 
 
 Examples : jung, fingen, (Bang, ^dngc, Idngcr, bringlid^. 
 
 46. 1. ^f, J)f. — ^f is often etymologically the equiva- 
 lent of our p (^fiuib pound, ^]al'){ pale), but it is uttered 
 regularly as a combination of p and f. 
 
 2. ^J, ^^, — ^f) is found only in words of foreign 
 origin, and has the sound of f, as in English. 
 
 Examples : ^fcffer, ^jerb,to|)f, rupfcn ; ^f)a]e, $ftD§pl)or, ^rap^it. 
 
16 PRONTTNCIATION. [47- 
 
 47. Ctt, (\n. — This combination has been abeady 
 explained (34, 39). 
 
 48. ^Sf, f^. — @c^ is the equivalent of our sk 
 
 Examples: ©d^iff, f(?^on, ](^eu, %]^^, 5if(^, ©r^nur, <B^mn, 
 ©(^lo^, ©d^merg, fc^reiben, !inbif(^. 
 
 49. @}, ^. — @J is pronounced as a double g (ff, 36), 
 the J losing its distinctive character in the combination. 
 Double ff is not written at the end of a word, nor before 
 a consonant (t), nor after a long vowel or diphthong, 
 ^ being in such situations substituted for it. 
 
 Examples: lap la^t (from lajfen), ©c^oB (but ©d^bffe), genic^en, 
 ©trau^ and ©trdu^e, ^a^, ^'d^li^, t)a^te (but f)afjett). 
 
 As was remarked above (2.2), when German is written or 
 printed in the Roman character, § should be represented by ss 
 (according to the rules of the New Orthography, rather by the 
 obsolete and barbarous combination fs). 
 
 1. The New Orthography writes the suffix =ni^ (408-9) with a 
 single g : thus, (^Ieid)tu§, ginfterntS. 
 
 60. Xi^, i^. — Xf), as noticed above (37), is equivalent 
 to t simply. 
 
 61. X}, ^. — ^^ is the written equivalent of a double 
 5, and is pronounced in the same manner as a single ^. 
 
 Examples : pafe, pd^e, ft^en, Tlix^t, iefet, pIbfeUd). 
 
 GENEEAL SUPPLEMENTAKY EULES. 
 
 52. 1. Other combinations of letters than those 
 treated of above, whether of vowels or of consonants, 
 are pronounced as the single letters of which they are 
 made up. 
 
 2. Doubled consonants, however, are not pronounced 
 double, but in the same manner as single ones. 
 
 Double consonants, in general, have no etymological ground, 
 but are an orthographical device for indicating the short quan- 
 tity of the preceding vowel. 
 
 53. But doubled consonants, or double vowels, or any of the 
 foregoing combinations of vowels or consonants, if produced by 
 
55] FOEEIGN WOBDS. 17 
 
 the coming together of the final and initial letters of the parts 
 making up a word — either by composition or by the addition of 
 prefixes or of suffixes of derivation beginning with a consonant 
 — are pronounced as in those parts taken separately. Thus, 
 
 beerbet (be=erbet) not as ^eere; geirrt (ge4rrt) not as @eier; 
 
 beurtt)eilt (bentrt^eitt)" 33eute; ^anbbruc! (^onb=bruc!) " (Sbba; 
 
 SHittag (9)nt4ag) " 'Mittt; iiJegging (weg.ging) " (Sgge; 
 
 5lbbUb <m=-bUb) " (Sbbe; auffaUt (auMallt) '* 3tffe; 
 
 t)ieUeicf)t (t)iel4ei(f)t) " Selle; benuoc^ (ben^norf)) " §enne; 
 
 tierreift (uer-reift) " fperren; ba^felbe (bag4etbe) " beffen; 
 
 tuatfifam (tt)Qd)4am) " H)ad)fen; ungar (uu-gar) " Ungar; 
 
 ^ougrfjen (C5au§=(f)en) " ^af^en; §oii§5in8 (^auS^^jing) " au^er; 
 
 ^utsuder(^u^u(fer) " ^ilje; megeffen (tt)eg=e[fen) " gegeffen; 
 
 Slbart (5tb=Qrt) " ?tbenb; ^anbeifen (§anb=eifen) " f)anbe(n» 
 
 54. Foreign Wards. — 1. Many words taken into German from 
 other languages (especially French) are made more or less like 
 German words in spelling and in pronunciation. But many 
 others retain their foreign peculiarities. The most common and 
 important of these have been noticed above, under the different 
 consonants; less frequent are the following: c^n, pronounced 
 like ny, as in gftampagne, Sorgnette; II, like hj, as in 33iEarb, 
 SBillet; gu, as hard g, as in ^uitarre; qu, as k, as in33ouquet; 
 n with preceding vowel as a nasal vowel, as in Baffin, 9lefrain, 
 33aIIon. So also among vowels : a\, as a, as in ^Iffaire ; an and 
 eau, as o, as in (Epaulette, pateau ; eu, as o, as in ^bieu, Sn^^nieur ; 
 DU, as u, as in feoufin, ^DUr; oi, hke English wa in was, as in 
 SJlemoiren, toilette, 
 
 2. In pronouncing the classical languages, Latin and Greek, 
 the Germans follow, in general, the rules of utterance of their 
 own letters, both vowels and consonants. But, in reading Latin, 
 g is always hard, and v has the sound of EngUsh v (German to), 
 not of German t) (English/). 
 
 ACCENT. 
 
 55. Tlie accentuation of German words is so generally 
 accordant in its principles witli that of English words, 
 that it occasions little difficulty, even to the beginner, 
 and can be left to be learned by practice, without detailed 
 exposition and illustration. The following are its lead- 
 ing rules : 
 
18 ACCENT. [55- 
 
 1. The accent ordinarily rests, in words uncom- 
 pounded, on the radical or chiefly significant syllable — 
 never on terminations of declension or conjugation, 
 almost never on suffixes of derivation, and never on the 
 inseparable prefixes of verbs (302), either in the forms 
 of conjugation or in derivative words. 
 
 Exceptions are : the sufBx el (408); the i or ie of verbs ending 
 in the infinitive in tren or ieren (404) ; and a few wholly anomalous 
 words, as leben'big (from le'ben, le'benb). 
 
 2. In compound words, except compound particles, 
 the accent rests, as in English, upon the first member. 
 The separable prefixes of verbs are treated as forming 
 compounds, and receive the accent, in the verbal forms 
 and in most verbal derivatives. 
 
 Exceptions are : many compounds with all, as aflma^'tig 
 almighty, aflein alone, allererft first of all; compound words of 
 direction, like ©iiboft south-east; and a number of others, as 
 Sa^rl^un'bert century, leibei'gen vassal, tDiflforn'men welcome. 
 
 3. Compound particles usually accent the final mem- 
 ber : thus, ba^in thither, obgleicf) although, ^u\oVc\t accord- 
 ing to, jut) or previously. 
 
 Exceptions are : many adverbs which are properly cases of 
 compound nouns or adjectives ; and some others : compare 425. 
 
 4 The negative prefix m\ has the accent commonly, 
 but not always (compare 416.46). The same is the case 
 with er^ and ur. 
 
 5. Words from foreign languages regularly retain the accent 
 belonging to them in those languages — yet with not a few, and 
 irregular, exceptions. As the greater part of them are French, 
 or Latin with the unaccented syllables at the end dropped off, 
 they more usually accent the final syllable. Some change their 
 accent in the plural: thus, 2)o!'tor, ®o!to'ren, (S;:^ar after, S^a= 
 ralte're. 
 
 PARTS OF SPEECH. 
 
 56. The parts of speech are the same in German as 
 in English. 
 
69] DECLENSION. 19 
 
 They are classified according to the fact and the mode of 
 their grammatical variation, or inflection. 
 
 1. Nouns, adjectives, and pronouns are declined. 
 
 Among these are here included articles, numerals, and par- 
 ticiples, which are sometimes reckoned as separate parts of 
 speech. 
 
 2. Verbs are conjugated. 
 
 3. Adverbs, prepositions, and conjunctions are unin- 
 flected. 
 
 4 Interjections are a class by themselves, not enter- 
 ing as members into the construction of the sentence. 
 
 DECLENSION. 
 
 57, Declension is the variation of nouns, adjectives, 
 and pronouns for number, case, and gender. 
 
 68. There are two numbers, singular and plural, of 
 which the value and use are in general the same as in 
 English. 
 
 For special rules concerning the use of the numbers in Ger- 
 man, see 211. 
 
 69, There are four cases in German, as in the oldest 
 known form of English (Anglo-Saxon). 
 
 1. The nominative, answering to the English nomina- 
 tive. 
 
 The nominative case belongs to the subject of a sentence, 
 to a word in apposition with it, or a predicate noun qualifying 
 it; it is alse used in address (as the Latin vocative). See 
 212-14. 
 
 2. The genitive, answering nearly to the English pos- 
 sessive, or objective with of. 
 
 It is therefore most often dependent upon a noim, but is also 
 used as the object of certain adjectives, verbs, and prepositions; 
 and it stands not infrequently without a governing word, in an 
 adverbial sense. See 215-20. 
 
20 DECLENSION. [5&^ 
 
 3. The dative, corresponding to the Latin and Greek 
 dative, or to the English objective with to or for. 
 
 The dative stands as indirect object of many verbs, transitive 
 or intransitive, and also follows certain adjectives and preposi- 
 tions. In rare cases, it is the equivalent of an ablative. See 
 221-5. 
 
 4 The accusative, nearly the same with our objective. 
 
 This is especially the case of the direct object of a transitive 
 verb ; certain prepositions are followed by it ; it is used to 
 express measure (including duration of time and extent of 
 space), also the time when anything is or is done ; and it occa- 
 sionally stands absolutely, as if governed by having understood. 
 See 226-30. 
 
 A noun in apposition with a noun standing in any of these 
 relations is in general put in the same case with it (but see 
 213.2). 
 
 60. There are three genders, masculine, feminine, 
 and neuter. 
 
 Each noun is of one or the other of these genders, yet not 
 wholly according to the natural sex of the object indicated by it. 
 The names of most objects having conspicuous sex are, indeed, 
 mascuUne or feminine, according as those objects are male or 
 female ; but there are not infrequent exceptions ; and the names 
 of objects destitute of sex have a grammatical gender, as mas- 
 culine, feminine, or neuter, according to rules of which the 
 original ground is in great part impossible to discover, and 
 which do not admit of succinct statement. 
 
 61. In the main, therefore, the gender of German 
 words must be learned outright; but the following 
 practical rules will be found of value : 
 
 1. Exceptions to the natural gender of creatures having sex. 
 
 a. All diminutives formed by the suffixes c^en and lein (410.1) 
 are neuter: thus, ba§ 3[Rdb(^en the girl, ba§ grdulein the young 
 lady. 
 
 h. Besides the special names which designate the male and 
 female of a few species, there is a neuter name for the young, or 
 for the species, or for both : thus, ber ®ber the hoar, bie ©au 
 the sow, ba§ Serfel the pig, \)a^ ©d^tucin the Iwg. 
 
61] GENDEE. 21 
 
 But most names of animals are of one gender only, and gener- 
 ally either masculine or feminine: thus, ber ©afe the hare, bie 
 S^ad^tigaE the nightingale; but ba§ (Srocobil the crocodile. 
 
 c. Of anomalous exceptions, only 'Cia§ SScib woman, requires 
 special notice. 
 
 2. Attribution of gender to classes of inanimate objects. 
 
 a. Names of the seasons, months, and days of the week, of 
 the points of compass, and of stones, are mascuhne : thus, ber 
 SSinter vnnter, ber Wax May, ber 2}ZDnta9 Monday, ber 5lorb 
 ncyrth, ber ^tefel fiint 
 
 b. Most names of plants, fruits, and flowers (usually ending 
 in e), are feminine : thus, bie gtc()te the pine, bie ^flaume the 
 plum, bie 9lcl!e the pink. 
 
 c. Most names of countries and places, of metals, the names 
 of the letters, and other parts of speech used as nouns, are 
 neuter: thus, ba§ Stalien Itahj, ba§ 33erUn Berlin, ha^i ©ifen 
 iron, ba§ 1 the letter x, ba§ ^a unb ^ein tM ^jes and no. 
 
 3. Geyider as determined bij derivation or termination (for 
 further details, see 408-11). 
 
 a. Masculine are the greater number of derivatives formed 
 from roots without suffix, by change of vowel; also (though 
 with very numerous exceptions) of words in el, en, and er ; and 
 all derivatives formed by ing and ling. 
 
 Thus, ber ©|)ru(^ the speech, ber 5]agel the nail, ber 9legen the 
 rain, ber ginger the finger, ber S^edel the covei\ ber 33Dl^rer the 
 gimlet, ber Sinbling the foundling. 
 
 b. Feminine are most derivatives in e and t, and all those 
 formed by the secondary suffixes ei, I)ett, !ett, fdjaft, nng, and in 
 (or inn). 
 
 Thus, bie ©)3ra(^e speech, bie ^a^i might, bie ©(!)mei^elel 
 flattej^j, bie 2Bci§!)cit wisdcm, bie @itel!eit vanity, bie Stcnnbfd)aft 
 friendship, bie Orbnung order, bie greunbin the female friend. 
 
 c. Neuter are all diminutives formed with d)en and Icin (as 
 already noticed), most nouns formed by the suffixes jel, fal, ni^ 
 [ni^], and tl}um [turn], most collectives and abstracts formed by 
 the prefix ge, and all infinitives used as nouns. 
 
 Thus, ba§ 9J^dnn(^en tJie mannikin, ba§ ^nablein the little boy, 
 bag mtm [9ldtfel] the riddle, ha^ ©c()icffal fate, ha^^ mi^m^ 
 [(Slei(!)ntg] the likeness, ha^ I?i3nigtf)um [.^onigtum] the kingdmn, 
 ha^ ^efieber plumage, ba§ diejprdd) talk, 'i)a^ ^tel^en the act of 
 standing, 
 
 4 Gender of compound nouns. 
 
22 GENDER. [61- 
 
 Compound nouns regularly and usually take the gender of 
 their final member. 
 
 Exceptions are bie ^ntmort answer (ba§ SBort word), ber ^b* 
 f(^eu abhorrence (bie (Sc^eu fear), several compounds of ber 
 DJlut^ [9Jlut] spirit, as, bie (^rofemut!) [(^ro^mut] magnanimity, 
 ©anftmutl^ [Sanftmut] gentleness, and 2)emut5 [^emut] humility, 
 etc., names of cities (which are neuter), and a few others (421). 
 
 5. Gender of nouns of foreign origin. 
 
 Excepting a few words — which, having become thoroughly 
 Germanized, have had their original gender altered by assimila- 
 tion to analogous German words, or otherwise anomalously— 
 nouns from other languages are masculine, feminine, or neuter, 
 as in the tongues whence they come : thus, ber %\kl the title 
 (Lat. titulus, m.), bie ^rone the crown (Lat corona, t), ba§ 
 ^l^dnomen the plienomenon (Gr. phainomenon, n.) ; but ber 
 ^brper the body (Lat. corpus, n.), ha^ genfter the window (Lat. 
 fenestra, 1), bie DIummer the number (Lat. numerus, m.). 
 
 6. Some nouns are used as of more than one gender. Thus, 
 some of those in rti^ [nt§] are either feminine or neuter : see 
 408, in. 6. %\)dl [%n\] is generally mascuhne, but sometimes 
 neuter, especially when used in the sense of share; its com- 
 pounds also vary in gender. Other examples are : ber (or ba§) 
 ^dfig cage, Ort place, g^or chorus; bie (or ber) 33utter butter, 
 ©emmel roll; ba§ (or ber) glo^ raft, 2}lunbel ward, gieratT^ 
 [Sterat] ornament; and so on. 
 
 7. A number of nouns are of more than one gender according 
 to differences of meaning : being either of kindred derivation, or 
 of only accidental coincidence of form. The commonest of 
 these are as follows : 
 
 ber S3aitb, volume ba^ iBanb, hand, rihbon 
 
 ber 33unb, covenant tcc^ S3unb, bundle 
 
 ber (Srbe, heir \>Ci^ @rbe, inheritance 
 
 bie gtur, meadow ber (or bie) %tuv, floor 
 
 ber @e^ott, contents bo§ (or ber) (S>tl\a\t, wages 
 
 ber ^aft, hold bie §aft, confinement 
 
 ber §eibc, heathen bie §eibe, heath 
 
 ber ^ut, hat bie §ut, guard 
 
 ber ^uube, customer bie ^iinbe, information 
 
 ber @c!^ilb, shield ba^ @d^ilb, si^/n 
 
 ber @ee, lake bie @ee, sea, ocean 
 
 ber (Sproffe, descendant bie @proffe, rownd (of ladder) 
 
 ber @tift, pegr ba§ ®tift, /oMrwIaiion 
 
 bie SSel^r, defense ba8 Se^r, loeir 
 
64] ARTICLES. 23 
 
 bcr Surfct, hump bie SBurf cl, 6os5 
 
 ber liefer, ja?^ bie liefer, pine-free 
 
 ber Inciter, guide bie better, ladder 
 
 bcr 3JJangeI, Zacfc bie SJlangel, mangle 
 
 bie 3Jlar!, marfc, marc?i ba§ 3)Jar!, marrow 
 
 ber 3Raft, masf {of a ship) bie 9}Jaft,/o(Mer 
 
 ber 9J?effer, measurer , ba§ SJJeffer, fcni/e 
 
 ber 2;i)or, /ooZ baS 2;^or, gra<e 
 ber (or bie) 2Beif)e, fci^e (6irc?) bie SBei^e, consecration 
 
 62, Adjectives and most pronouns are inflected in 
 the singular in all the three genders, in order to agree 
 in gender with the nouns which they qualify or to 
 which they relate. No such word makes a distinction 
 of gender in the plural. 
 
 ARTICLES. 
 
 63. For the sake of convenience, the declension of the 
 definite and indefinite articles is first given. 
 
 The definite article is the same with the demonstrative pro- 
 noun, in its adjective use (164.1) ; the indefinite is the same with 
 the numeral ein one (198). Our own articles are of like origin. 
 
 Definite Article. 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 X 
 
 masc. 
 
 fern. 
 
 neut. 
 
 m. f. n. 
 
 
 Nom. bcr 
 
 bie 
 
 ha^ 
 
 bie 
 
 the 
 
 Gen. be§ 
 
 ber 
 
 be§ 
 
 ber 
 
 of the 
 
 Dat. bent 
 
 ber 
 
 bem 
 
 ben 
 
 to the 
 
 Ace. \>m 
 
 bie 
 
 has. 
 
 bie 
 
 the 
 
 
 Indeftnite 
 
 Articles. 
 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 N. 
 
 ciu 
 
 eine 
 
 ein 
 
 a 
 
 G. 
 
 eine§ 
 
 einer 
 
 eine§ 
 
 of a 
 
 D. 
 
 einem 
 
 einer 
 
 einem 
 
 to a 
 
 A 
 
 einen 
 
 eine 
 
 ein 
 
 a 
 
 64. 1. The stem (base, theme) 
 
 of the definite article is b only ; 
 
 of the indefinite, eitt : the rest is declensional ending. 
 
 2. Notice that the declension of ein differs from that of ber in 
 that the former has no ending in the nom, masculine and thQ 
 nom. and ace, neuter. 
 
24 AETIOLES. [65- 
 
 65. The ace. neuter ba§, and the dat. masc. and neuter 
 bem are frequently appended to prepositions in the form of 
 simple § and m, being written as one word with the preposition ; 
 and, in such contracted forms, a preposition ending in n (an, in, 
 t)on) loses its n before m. The dat. feminine ber is in like 
 manner cut down to r, but only after ju, forming jur. 
 
 The commonest cases of this contraction and combination 
 are am, im, t)om, jum, beim (for an bem, in bem, Don bem, gu bem, 
 bel bem), and an§, auf§, tn§, fur§, t)or§ (for an ha^, etc.). Much 
 less frequent are aufm, t)orm, bur(f)§, and, with dissyllabic prepo- 
 sitions, uber§, iiberm, and the like. 
 
 Earely, the ace. masculine ben is similarly treated, forming 
 iibern, l^intern, and so on. ■ 
 
 The contractions are almost always used in adverbial phrases : 
 thus, am ^nbe in fine, im (^angen on the whole, etc. 
 
 Some writers mark the omission of part of the article in these 
 contracted forms by an apostrophe : thus, auf §, iibef m, ^intef n, 
 etc. 
 
 Very rarely, the same contraction is made after other words 
 than prepositions : thus, mann enbli(^ au^aefungen iff § alte, emige 
 Sieb when will the everlasting old song he sung out ? 
 
 USE OF THE ARTICLES. 
 
 66, In general, the articles are used in German 
 nearly as in English. But there are also not a few 
 differences, the more important of which are stated 
 below. 
 
 1. The definite article regularly stands in German before a 
 noun used in its most comprehensive or universal sense, as 
 indicating the whole substance, class, or kind of which it is the 
 appellation: as, ha§ ^olb ift gelb gold is yellow; bte 33Iatter 
 b e r ^flangen jinb griin leaves of plants are green. 
 
 2. By a Uke usage, it stands before abstract nouns : as, \ja§ 
 Seben ift fura, bie ^unft ift lang life is short, art is long; ber 
 ^laube ma^t felig faith makes happy; xn§ 35erberben lorfen to 
 entice to destruction. 
 
 3. It is often used where we use a possessive pronominal 
 adjective (161), when the connection sufficiently points out the 
 possessor, or when the latter is indicated by a noim or pronoun 
 in the dative, dependent on the verb of the sentence : as, ber SSater 
 
66] AETICLES. 25 
 
 fdiiittcltc ben ^opf the father shook his head; ba crGteiff^ t^m 
 b i e ©eelc then it takes hold upon his soid. 
 
 4. It is prefixed to words of certain classes which in English 
 are used without it : as, 
 
 a. To the names of seasons, months, and days of the week : 
 as, im WiXiitx in winter ; in bem (or im) OJlai in May; am 5rei= 
 ia(^ on Friday. 
 
 h. To names of streets and mountains, and to feminine names 
 of countries: as, in ber ^riebric^^flrage in Frederick street; 
 ber35efut) Vesuvius; in ber (Bdjm'u in Switzerland. 
 
 c. Often to proper names, especially when preceded by adjec- 
 tives or titles : as, b e m franfen (^eorg to sick George; b a § fc^one 
 33erlin beautiful Berlin; — or, when the name of an author is 
 used for his works : as, i(?^ (efe b e n ©(^iEer lam reading Schiller; 
 — or, in a famiUar or contemptuous w^ay : as, rufe ben ^oftann 
 call John ; — or, to indicate more plainly the case of the noun : as, 
 ber ©(fatten ber DJZaria Maria's shadx)w; ben ^Irginofth be§ 
 ^nbronifuS the jealousy of Andronicus (compare 104). 
 
 5. There are numerous phrases, in German as in English, in 
 which the article is omitted, although called for by general ana- 
 logies. These often correspond in the two languages : as, gu 
 33ette to bed, bei ^ijc^ at table, ^Infer merfen to cast amhor, SSinb 
 nnb 3Bctter wind and iveather, 9J^ei[ter rii^rt fic^ unb (^efelle master 
 and mail bestir themselves; — in other cases, the German retains 
 the article which is omitted in Enghsh: as, in bie ©^ule to 
 school, i m C^immel unb auf ber @rbe in heaven and on earth, a m 
 ^benb at evening; — or, less often, the article, retained in Eng- 
 lish, is omitted in the German: as, Dor ^lugen before the eyes, 
 Qen Often toward the East; — and the article is often omitted in 
 proverbial phrases: thus, ^Rorgenfhmb' l^at ©olb im 3JJunb 
 the morning-hour has gold in its mouth. 
 
 6. The article is usually omitted in technical phraseology 
 before words referring to persons or things as already men- 
 tioned or to be mentioned, as befagt, Qcbad)t, genannt the afare^ 
 said, folgcnb the following, erfter and letter former and latter, 
 etc.; also before certain nouns, as 3n^aber holder, UeberbrinGei 
 bearer, etc. 
 
 7. In place of our indefinite article with a distributive sense, 
 the German employs the definite article : as, jo Die! ho.^ ^f unb 
 so much A pound; be§ ^benb§ of an evening; breimal bie 
 2Bo(^e three times a week. Also, in certain cases, the definite 
 article in combination with a preposition stands where the 
 indefinite would be expected: as, (©taat um (^taat foUte gur 
 
26 NOUNS. [66- 
 
 ^rot)iti5 tocrben state after state was to he turned into a prov- 
 ince. 
 
 8. The indefinite article is often omitted before a predicate 
 noun, and before a noun in apposition after al§ as, signifying 
 occupation, office, rank, or the like : thus, er tvax ,^aufmann, tt)tE 
 aber ie^t ©olbat tDerben he was a merchant, but noiv icants to 
 become a soldier, [^ fann e§ al§ 5Jlann nid)! bulben / cannot, as 
 A man, endure it. 
 
 The above are only the leading points that require notice in 
 comparing the German and English use of the articles. The 
 German allows, especially in poetry, considerable irregularity 
 and freedom in their employment, and they are not rarely 
 found introduced — and, much more often, omitted — where gen- 
 eral analogies would favor a contrary treatment. 
 
 67. In regard to their position — the definite article 
 precedes all other qualifying words (except all all) ; 
 and the indefinite suffers before it only jo or fold) sicch, 
 tDeld) what, and tva§> fitr ivhat sort of. 
 
 Thus, bie beibcn l^naben both the boys, ber bo|)|)clte ^rei» dx)uble 
 the price, folc^ cin DJ^ann (or ein fol(i)cr Tflann) such a man, ml^ 
 ein §elb what a hero: but eine fialbe ©tunbe half an hour, ein fo 
 armer 5Jlann so poor a man, cine gans fd)5ne ^u^fic^t quite a fine 
 view. 
 
 NOUNS. 
 
 68. In order to decline a German noun, we need to 
 know how it forms its genitive singular and its nom- 
 inative plural ; and upon these two cases depends the 
 classification of German declensions. 
 
 1. Compound nouns have the inflection of their final member ; 
 excepting ^Soflmad^t commission, O^nma^t /ain^, which are of the 
 2nd declension, while 9J^a(i)t might is of the 1st declension, 2nd 
 class. 
 
 69. 1. The great majority of masculine nouns, and 
 all neuters, form their genitive singular by adding ^ or 
 e§ to the nominative. These constitute the first or 
 STRONG DECLENSION ; which is then divided into classes 
 according to the mode of formation of the nominative 
 plural. 
 
71] GENERAL RULES OF DECLENSION. 27 
 
 a. The first class takes no additional ending for the 
 plural, but sometimes modifies the vowel of the theme : 
 thus, (Spaten spade, (Spaten spades ; but 3Sater father, 
 ^akx/atJiers. 
 
 h. The second doss adds the ending e, usually also 
 modifying the vowel: thus, Sa^r year, Sat)re years; 
 gufe/oof, %\\\i^feet. 
 
 c. The third class adds the ending cr, and always 
 modifies the vowel (when this is capable of modification) : 
 thus, 9}^annma7i, Wiimnamen; %mh grave, ^xah^x graves. 
 
 d. By modification of the vowel is meant the substitution of 
 the modified vowels (i, b, \i (14), and an (21.2), for the simpler 
 a, 0, U, and ail, in themes containing the latter. The change of 
 Vowel in English man and men, foot and feet, mouse and mice^ 
 and their like, is originally the same process. 
 
 2. Some feminines form their plural after the first and 
 second of these methods, and are therefore reckoned as 
 belonging to the first and second classes of the first 
 declension, although they do not now take §> in the 
 genitive singular. 
 
 70. The rest of the masculine nouns add n or en to 
 the theme to form the genitive singular, and take the 
 same ending also in the nominative plural. Most fem- 
 inines form their plural in the same way, and are there- 
 fore classified with them, making up the second or weak 
 
 DECLENSION. 
 
 The feminines have to be classified by the form of their 
 plurals only, because, as is pointed out below, all feminine 
 nouns are now invariable in the singular. 
 
 71. The two cases above mentioned being known, 
 the rest of the declension is found by the following 
 general rules : 
 
 1. Singular, a. Feminines are invariable in the sin- 
 gular. 
 
 For exceptions, see below, 95. 
 
 h. In the masculines and neuters of the first or 
 strong declension, the accusative singular is like the 
 
28 NOUNS. [71- 
 
 nominative. Nouns which add only § in the genitive have 
 the dative also like the nominative ; those which add e§ 
 in the genitive regularly take e in the dative, but may 
 also omit it — it being proper to form the dative of any 
 noun of the first declension like the nominative. 
 
 c. Masculines of the second or weak declension have 
 all their oblique cases like the genitive. 
 
 2. Plural, a. The nominative, genitive, and accu- 
 sative are always alike in the plural. 
 
 h. The dative plural ends always in n : it is formed 
 by adding n to the nominative plural, provided that 
 case end in any other letter than n (namely, in e, I, or r, 
 the only other finals that occur there) ; if it end in 
 n, all the cases of the plural are alike. 
 
 c. But nouns making foreign plurals (101. 4, 5) have no dative 
 plural different from the other cases. 
 
 72. 1. The general scheme of noun-declension, then, 
 is as follows : 
 
 1st (strong) Dect.ension 
 
 '. 
 
 
 2nd (weak) De 
 
 X]T,F,NS 
 
 
 Singular : 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 m. n. 
 
 f. 
 
 
 m. 
 
 f. 
 
 
 K 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 G. 
 
 =e§, ■■ 
 
 =§ 
 
 
 
 
 »en, =n 
 
 
 
 
 D. 
 
 -c, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 =en, =n 
 
 
 
 
 A. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 =en, ^n 
 
 
 
 
 Plural: 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 let 01. 
 
 2nd 01. 
 
 I 
 
 3rd CI. 
 
 
 
 N. 
 
 
 
 
 =e 
 
 
 =er 
 
 =en, 
 
 :=n 
 
 G. 
 
 
 
 
 *c 
 
 
 =er 
 
 «cn. 
 
 *tt 
 
 D. 
 
 
 *n 
 
 *cn 
 
 
 =crn 
 
 -en, 
 
 ^n 
 
 A. 
 
 
 
 
 't 
 
 
 *cr 
 
 ^ett, 
 
 =n 
 
 
 
 vowel 
 sometimet 
 modified. 
 
 vowel 
 
 =fiilr 
 
 vowel 
 always 
 modified. 
 
 vowel 
 
 never 
 
 modified. 
 
 2. The following general rules, applying to all declension-- 
 that of noims, adjectives, and pronouns — are worthy of notice; 
 
 a. The ace. singular of the fem. and neuter is like the nom- 
 inative. 
 
 h. The dat. plural (except of personal pronouns) ends in n. 
 
76] GENEKAL RULES OF DECLENSION. 29 
 
 73. It will be seen, on comparing the declension of nouns 
 with that of the definite article (63), that the former is less full, 
 distinguishing fewer cases by appropriate terminations. Besides 
 their plural ending — which, moreover, is wanting in a consider- 
 able class of words — nouns have distinct forms only for the 
 genitive singular and the dative plural, with traces of a dative 
 singular — and even these in by no means all words. 
 
 a. The names strong and weak declension were introduced by Grimm, 
 and, though destitute of any resonable ground of application, have 
 become too generally and firmly established to be gotten rid of. A 
 historically suitable designation would be "vowel-declension" and 
 " n-declension, " since the first mode of declension properly belongs to 
 themes originally ending in a vowel (though the plural-ending ei* comes 
 from themes in g) ; the second, to those ending in n : other consonant- 
 endings with their peculiarities of declension have disappeared. The 
 whole German declensional system has undergone such extensive cor- 
 ruption, mutilation, and transfer, that the old historical classifications 
 are pretty thoroughly effaced, and to attempt to restore them, or make 
 any account of them, would only confuse the learner. 
 
 FIKST OR STRONG DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 
 
 74. As already explained, the first or strong declen- 
 sion contains all the neuter nouns in the language, all 
 masculines which form their genitive singular by adding 
 g or e§ to the nominative, and such feminines as form 
 their nominative plural either without an added ending, 
 or else by appending c to the stem. 
 
 FIRST CLASS. 
 
 75. The characteristic of the first class is that it 
 adds no ending to form the plural : its nominatives are 
 alike in both numbers — except that in a few words the 
 vowel of the singular is modified for the plural. 
 
 76. To this class belong 
 
 1. Masculine and neuter nouns having the endings e(, 
 er, en (including infinitives used as nouns, 340), and one 
 or two in ent ; 
 
 2. A few neuter nouns having the prefix ge and ending 
 in e ; also one masculine in e (^df e cheese) ; 
 
 3. All neuter diminutives formed with the suffixes 
 (^en, lein, and )el ; 
 
30 
 
 NOUNS. 
 
 [76- 
 
 4 Two feminines ending in er (SKutter mother and 
 Slodjter daughter). 
 
 No nouns of this class are monosyllabic (except the infinitives 
 t^un and fein). The endings el, er do not include iel, eel, ier, eer, 
 but imply the simple vowel e as that of the termination. 
 
 77. Nouns of the first class add only § (not e^^) to 
 form the genitive singular, and never take e in the 
 dative. 
 
 Their only variation for case, therefore, is by the assumption 
 of § in the gen. sing, (of masc. and neut. nouns), and of n in the 
 dat. plural. 
 
 78. About twenty masculines, and both feminines, 
 modify in the plural the vowel of the principal syllable. 
 
 1. The masculines modifying the vowel in the plural are : 
 
 Stcfer, cultivated field §ofen, Jiarbor 
 
 5lpfel, apple ^ammel, ram 
 
 S3oben, ^oor jammer, hammer 
 
 S3ogen, l)ow §anbel, business 
 
 5Bruber, brother ?aben, shop 
 
 ^aben, thread 9J?aiigeI, want 
 
 ©avten, garden SJiantet, cloak 
 
 ©raben, ditch ^ahd, navel 
 SBogen, ^aben, and ^amniel sometimes have the unmodified vowel 
 
 79. Examples : — 
 I. With vowel unchanged in the plural : 
 
 9^agc(, naU 
 Ofen, stove 
 (Sattel, saddle 
 ®d)aben, harm 
 @d)nabe(, beak 
 ©d^iDoger, brother-in-law 
 SBater, father 
 SSogel, bird 
 
 ©paten i<pade, m. 
 
 (^emalbe picture, n. 
 
 ^dfe cheese, m. 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 ber ©paten 
 be§ ©patent 
 bem ©paten 
 ben ©paten 
 
 ha§> ©emcilbe 
 be§ ©emcitbeS 
 bem ©emiilbe 
 ha^ ©emcilbe 
 
 Plural. 
 
 ber ^afe 
 be§ Sl'afeg 
 bem ^dfe 
 ben ^afe 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A 
 
 bie ©paten 
 ber ©paten 
 ben ©paten 
 bie ©paten 
 
 bie ^emalbe 
 ber ©emcilbe 
 ben (^emntben 
 bie (^emdlbe 
 
 bie ^afe 
 ber f afe 
 ben ^afen 
 bie ^^dfe 
 
d2] 
 
 FIRST OR STRONG DECLENSION. 
 
 31 
 
 II. With vowel modified in the pkiral 
 
 33rubcr brother, m. 
 
 ^lofter convent, n. 
 
 Gutter mother, f. 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 N. 
 
 ber 33ruber 
 
 hc[§> mo]itx 
 
 bie 9[Rntter 
 
 G. 
 
 be§ ^ruberg 
 
 be§ ^lofterg 
 
 ber 99intter 
 
 D. 
 
 bem ^ruber 
 
 bem S^lofter 
 
 ber aJ^utter 
 
 A. 
 
 ben 33riiber 
 
 Flural 
 
 bie mutkx 
 
 N. 
 
 bie ^riiber 
 
 bie ^'Ibfter 
 
 bie ^miitter 
 
 a 
 
 ber 33ruber 
 
 ber Softer 
 
 ber ^O^iitter 
 
 D. 
 
 ben 53rubern 
 
 ben £Ibftern 
 
 ben SJiiittern 
 
 A. 
 
 bie 33riiber 
 
 bie mofter 
 
 bie ai^iitter 
 
 80. 1. A few nouns are of this class in the singular and of 
 the second declension in the plural ; a few others have lost an 
 original ending n or en in the nom. (or nom. and ace.) singular : 
 for all these, see Irregular Declension (96—8). 
 
 2. Among the infinitive-nouns belonging to this class are 
 a few of irregular ending : namely, %\jun doing and 8ein being, 
 with their compounds, some of which are in common use as 
 nouns— e. g., ^afein existence, 2BDl)lfein welfare—; and others 
 which end in eln and crn : thus, 2[Banbeln lualklng, SSanbern 
 wandering. 
 
 [Exercise 1. Nouns of First Declension, 1st Class.] 
 second class. 
 
 81. The characteristic of the second class is that it 
 forms the plural by adding e to the singular ; at the 
 same time, the vowel of the principal syllable is usually 
 modified in the plural ; but to this there are many ex- 
 ceptions. 
 
 82. To this class belong 
 
 1. The greater number of masculine nouns ; 
 
 2. Many neuters ; 
 
 3. More than thirty monosyllabic feminines (with 
 their compounds, and including the compounds of funft, 
 not in use as an independent word), with the feminines 
 
32 
 
 NOtJNS. 
 
 [82- 
 
 formed by the suffixes m^ [n\§] (about a dozen in num- 
 ber) and ]ai (two or three). 
 The feminines belonging to this class are : 
 
 Stngft, anxiety §anb, hand 9?ac^t, night 
 
 Slpt, axe ^aut, skin ^a\)t, seam 
 
 SBanf, bench ^(uft, cleft 9?ot^ [9f?ot], need 
 
 SBraut, bride ^raft, strength ^u% nut 
 
 SBrunft, fervor ^uf|, cow ®au, sow 
 
 S3ruft, breast ^unft, arf @(f)nur, sHng 
 
 l^auft, /s< 2au8, Zouse ©cf)tx)ulft, swelling 
 
 ^lnd)t, flight i^uft, air ©tobt, city 
 
 ^ruc^t, /rM« ?uft, pZeoswre SBonb, loaZZ 
 
 ®ang, sroose 9}?a(^t, might SBurft, sausage 
 
 @ruft, uawZ< 9}?agb, maid 3u(f)t, training 
 
 @un\t, favor 9J?au8, mowse 3unft, gfwiZd 
 
 9?ot^ [9^ot] hardly forms a plural except in the dative, 9^bt^en, in 
 certain phrases. ©c^tDuIft makes also @d)tt)utften. 
 
 83. Masculines and neuters form their genitive 
 singular by adding either § or e^; the dative is 
 like the nominative, or adds e. 
 
 1. The ending eg is more often taken by monosyllables, § by 
 polysyllables ; but many words may assume either, according 
 to the choice of the writer or speaker, depending partly on 
 euphony, and partly on the style he is employing — e§ belonging 
 to a more serious or elaborate style, and § being more collo- 
 quial. Nouns of more than one syllable with unaccented final 
 containing e hardly admit e in the ending. On the other hand, 
 nouns having a final sibilant require an e to make the genitive 
 ending perceptible. Thus, %aQ^ or %aQt§, ^bnxQ^ rather than 
 ^onigeS, almost always ©c^metterltngg, and always glomes, 
 Sud^fe§, Sa^eg. 
 
 2. The use or omission of e in the dative is nearly parallel 
 with the use of e§ or § in the genitive ; but it may be left oft 
 from every noun without exception. It is regularly omitted 
 from a noun immediately following a preposition ; thus, mit 
 9ie(^t with right, tjor 3orn for anger; exceptions are gu or nad^ 
 §aufe Iwme. 
 
 84. Of the masculines, the great majority take the 
 modified vowel in the plural, there being only about 
 fifty exceptions ; of the neuters, only two, gtofe raft and 
 &)QX choir, require the modification, and two others, 
 
85] 
 
 FIEST OR STRONG DECLENSION. 
 
 33 
 
 S5oot hoat and 9^ol)r reed, may take it or not; of the 
 feminines, all except those ending in ni^ [ni^] and ]a( 
 modify the vowel. 
 
 1. The masculines not modifying the vowel in the plural 
 are: 
 
 %Qi\, ed 
 %QiX, eagle 
 5tmbofe, anvil 
 %xm, arm 
 S3ou, building 
 S3efu(^, visit 
 SSorn, fountain 
 S)ad^g, badger 
 2)oId^, dagger 
 2)od^t, wick 
 S)om, fMhedral 
 S)orn, thorn 
 2)rud, print 
 §orft, forest 
 ®rab, degree 
 province 
 
 ®aum, palate 
 §all, sound 
 ^alm, stalk 
 ^aud), breath 
 ^uf, /lOO/ 
 
 ^unb, (^ofif 
 kxaljxi [^xan]f crane 
 ^ad}^, salmon 
 Saut, sound 
 
 Sump, ragamuffin 
 SJiorb, murder 
 Ort, pZace 
 ^arf, parfc 
 ^fab, paf/i 
 ^Jpfau, peacock 
 
 ^|^unf(^, punch 
 Ouaft, tosseZ 
 ©c^uft, wretch 
 <Bdin^, shoe 
 @taar L®tar], starling 
 (Stoff, s«w# 
 
 ZaQ, day 
 2^^roit, throne 
 Xobf death 
 Zxnpp, troop 
 Xn\^, flourish 
 35erfu(^, trial 
 
 ®aVL, ^alm, and 2;^ron also make plurals of the second or weak 
 declension, ^fau is also declined throughout by the second declension. 
 
 85. Examples : — 
 
 I. With vowel modified in the plural 
 
 ©ol&n son, m. 
 
 N. ber (So^tt 
 
 G. beg ©oI)ne§ 
 
 I), bem (Soljue 
 
 A. ben ©ofjit 
 
 N. bte ©o^c 
 
 G. ber (Si)f)ne 
 
 D. htn <Bo[)ntn 
 
 A. bie (Sof)ue 
 
 8lo§ ra/if, n. 
 Singular, 
 
 be§ glo^eg 
 bem gto^e 
 ba§ g(o6 
 
 Plural. 
 
 bie Siofee 
 ber glofje 
 ben glofjeu 
 bie Slbjje 
 
 §anb /iamZ, f, 
 
 bte §anb' 
 ber §anb 
 ber §anb 
 bie $onb,' 
 
 bie §anbe 
 ber ^anbe 
 ben ^ditbeii 
 bie §dnbe 
 
34 NOUNS. 
 
 n. With vowel unchanged in the plural : 
 
 [85. 
 
 9Jlonat month, m. Sal)r year, n. ©rfparni^ [=ni§] saving, f. 
 
 N. ber SQZonat 
 
 G. be§ Tlomi^ 
 
 D. bem 93Zonat 
 
 A. ben Monat 
 
 N. bie SQ^onate 
 
 G. ber SJ^ouate 
 
 D. ben 5Dlonaten 
 
 A. bie 93Zonate 
 
 Singular. 
 
 \>a^ 3af)r 
 beg Sa^reS 
 bem ^a^xt 
 ha§ 3a^r 
 
 Plural 
 
 bie 3a^re 
 ber 3a()re 
 ben Qa^ren 
 bie ^a^xt 
 
 bie Grfparni^ [-nig] 
 ber (Srfparnig [:=ni§] 
 ber dTfparni^ [=ni§] 
 bie C^rfparni^ [=ni§] 
 
 bie (Srfparniffe 
 ber (Srfparniffe 
 ben (Srfparniffen 
 bie ©rfpamiffe 
 
 86. Most nouns of foreign origin belong to this class. For 
 some irregularities in their declension, as well as in that of 
 other members of the class, see below, 97 etc. 
 
 [Exercise 2. Nouns of First Declension, 2nd Class.] 
 
 l^}^\ THIRD CLASS. 
 
 L I i' V / 8|j). The characteristic of tliis<jlass is the assumption 
 otthe ending er to form the nominative plural, along 
 with modification of the vowel of the theme (if it admits 
 of modification). 
 
 88. The class is composed chiefly of neuter nouns, 
 with a few masculines, but no feminines. 
 
 Besides the nouns formed by the suffix t^um [turn] (which are, 
 with two or three exceptions, neuter, and which modify the 
 vowel of the suffix, not that of the radical syllable), there are 
 not far from fifty neuters, and about a dozen masculines, be- 
 16nging to the class ; also, three or four words of foreign origin. 
 
90] 
 
 FIRST OR STRONG DECLENSION. 
 
 35 
 
 1. The neuters are 
 5tag, carcass 
 Stmt, office 
 S3ab, bath 
 33anb, ribbon 
 ^i(b, picture 
 matt, leaf 
 33rctt, board 
 iBud), book 
 '3) ad), roof 
 2)enfma(t, monument 
 S)ingt, ^/trngf 
 S)orf, village 
 (Si, egf^r 
 ^ad^, departmerd 
 
 ®elb, money 
 ©emad^t, chamber 
 
 ©eiuanbt, garment 
 
 @(ieb, Zinfc 
 @rab, gfrnt-e 
 @ra§, gfrass 
 @ut, property 
 ^aiipt, Aead 
 
 ^emb, s/iirf 
 ^olj, wood 
 ^orut, horn 
 
 3oc^t, yoke 
 ^alb, caZ/ 
 ^inb, child 
 ^leib, dress 
 ^orn, srmm 
 
 ?ieb, songf 
 $?ocf), /ioZe 
 2Ralt, mark 
 2«at)lt, meaZ 
 9J?au(, moi*</i 
 9?eft, "es< 
 
 9?ab, whed 
 
 9?iub, mMe 
 @cf)eitt, 6iM 
 @cf)ilbt, si^fn 
 @(^Io§, castle 
 ©c^raevt, sioord 
 ©tiftt, foundation 
 %\)Ci[, valley 
 %\\6)% cloth 
 SSotf, people 
 SSamniS, waistcoat 
 SBeib, woman 
 SSortt, loord 
 
 35ormunb, guardian 
 SSalb, /ores^ 
 2Burm, loorm 
 
 ^raut, /ier6 
 ©emiit^ [©emiit], disposition ?amm, Zam6 
 @efcf){ed)t, seic !i?anbt, Zarw^ 
 
 @e[td)t, face ^id,tt, %M 
 
 @e[penft, gr/iosi 
 
 2. The mascuUnes are: 
 ^ofett)i(^tt, scamp 3JJann, man 
 @eift, spirit Drtt, place 
 
 @ott, (?o(2 9lanb, rim 
 
 ?eib, &o(Zy ©traiifet, bouquet 
 
 The nouns marked with t in the ahove hsts make also plurals in e, 
 SBurm and @trauJ3 with modification of the vowel. 
 
 89. Eespecting the form of tlie genitive singular 
 ending, whether g or e^, and respecting the dative, 
 whether like the nominative or adding e, the same rules 
 apply as in the second class (83). 
 
 /^ Examples:— OJ^.o.jr' f^^M^ 
 
 C)au§ 2Beib Strt^um t=tum] ^ann 
 
 hotcse^ n. woman, n. error, m. man, m. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 N. \)a§> §au§ SScib ber ^v^t^um ^ann 
 
 G. be§ §aufe§ SSeibeg be§ 3rrt^um§ aJJanneg 
 
 D. bem §aufc SSeiOe bent Srrt^um 3[Ranne 
 
 A. bag §aug SSeib ben ^i^i^t^um Tlann 
 
 
36 
 
 N. 
 
 bte §aufer 
 
 G. 
 
 ber §aufer 
 
 D. 
 
 ben |)aufern 
 
 A. 
 
 bie §dufer 
 
 NOUNS. 
 
 Plural 
 
 SSeiber bie 3rrt!)umer 
 SSeiOer ber Srrt^iimer 
 SSeibern h^n Qrrt^iimern 
 SSeiber bie 3rrtl)iimer 
 
 (90- 
 
 Wdnmx 
 Tl'dnncv 
 SJ^cinncru 
 SO^cinncr 
 
 [Exercise 3. Nouns of First Declension, 3rd Class.] 
 -^Cx^ SECOND OE WEAK DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 
 
 yl. To the second or weak declension belong only 
 masculine and feminine nouns. They form all the cases 
 of the plural by adding n or en to the stem, and mas- 
 culines add the same in the oblique cases of the singular. 
 
 92. 1. Nearly all the feminine nouns in the language 
 are of this declension : namely — 
 
 a. All feminines of more than one syllable, whether prim- 
 itive words, as ©eite side; or primary derivatives, as ^ab^ gift; 
 words formed with prefixes, as (SJefal^r danger, or with suffixes, 
 as ^ugenb virtue, 'iBa\)X^ni truth, ^ixx\t\n princess ; or words de- 
 rived from other languages, as 9}linute minute, 5}lelobie melody, 
 Station nation, Unit)eriitGt university. 
 
 Exceptions : those having the suffixes ni^ [m^] or jal (see 82.3). 
 
 h. About sixty monosyllables : namely — 
 
 5lrt, manner 
 
 ^oft, fare 
 
 ©ci^rift, writing 
 
 2(u, meadow 
 
 ^a% burden 
 
 ©(f)utb, fault 
 
 Sba^n^ track 
 
 ?ift, trick 
 
 ®d)ur, shearing 
 
 SBrut, brood 
 
 Wait, mark 
 
 ®ee, sea 
 
 SBu&it, bay 
 
 mik, milt 
 
 ®pur, trace 
 
 iBurg, casile 
 
 9^uU, nought 
 
 @tatt, place 
 
 %a\)vt, passage 
 
 ''^a(i)t, agreement I 
 
 1 ©tint, forehead 
 
 glur, field 
 
 WW, duty 
 
 ©treu, liUer 
 
 glutf) [%{nt], fiood ^0% post 
 
 ©ud)t, malady 
 
 ^orm, form 
 
 Ouol, torment 
 
 Xi)at, deed 
 
 grarfit, freight 
 
 ma\t, rest 
 
 Z\)nv, door 
 
 ^rau, woman 
 
 @aat, seed 
 
 2^racl)t, cosiume 
 
 grift, period 
 
 @au, sow 
 
 %x\\i, pasture 
 
 @ei{3, goat 
 
 'Bdjaax [<B6)ax'], 
 
 company \\i)X, watch 
 
 @ic^t, gout 
 
 @rf)ar, share (of a 
 
 , plough) aSc^r, defense 
 
 @ift, gift 
 
 @(i)i(^t, layer 
 
 SSelt, world 
 
 ^ut, heed 
 
 ®d|Iacf)t, battle 
 
 3al){, number 
 
 3ad^t, yacht 
 
 @rf)Iucf)t, ravine 
 
 3eit, time 
 
 3agb, hunt 
 
 ©d^nur, daughter 
 
 -in-law 
 
94j 
 
 SECOND OE WEAK DECLENSION. 
 
 37 
 
 2. Masculines of the second declension are 
 a. Words of more than one syllable in e, as 53ote messenger^ 
 ^aiit spouse, ^nabt boy — including those that have the prefix 
 QC, as ^cf d!)rte companion, ©efeEe fellow, and some nouns of na- 
 tionality, as ^xm^t Prussian, ^xan^o']t Frenclmian ; also a few 
 in er and or, as 33aicr Bavarian, Ungar Hungarian, 
 h. About twenty monosyllabic root-words : namely — 
 %^\\, forefather ^elb, hero 0(^§, ox 
 
 33ar, hear ^err, gentleman %x\\\i, prince 
 
 33urfd), student ^\xi, shepherd ®(f)ent, cuphearet 
 
 ^(§.lixi\t, Christian Tlt\i\d), man ^d)dp§, icether 
 
 ^int, finch 9Ro^r, moor @pal^, sparrow 
 
 ^ixx^t, prince SRaxx, fool (Btxau% ostrich 
 
 @raf, count 9^ert), nerve 2^^or, fool. 
 
 The nominatives S3urjd)e, Dd)\t, and <®(^enfe are also in use. 
 c. Many foreign words, as ©tubent student, Tlonaxd) monarch, 
 S3 arbor barbaman. 
 
 ^3^ Nouns ending in e, cl, er, and ax unaccented, add 
 only n to the stem ; others add en. 
 
 1. Before this ending, the n of the sufBx in is doubled : thus, 
 giirftin, giirftinnen. 
 
 2. ^nx gentleman, in modern usage, ordinarily adds n in the 
 singular, and en in the plural, being the only masculine whose 
 forms differ in the two numbers. 
 
 ' g? No noun of this declension modifies its vowel in 
 the plural. n 
 
 94. Examples :- 
 
 - J^ 
 
 ^ ' '-'' 
 
 
 I. Feminines: 
 
 
 ^-^^ 
 
 
 ©eitc. 
 
 %W, 
 
 SSa^r^ieit, ^ 
 
 5^attDn, 
 
 side. 
 
 deed. 
 
 truth. 
 
 nation. 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 N. bie (Scite 
 
 ^^at 
 
 SSnfjrljeit 
 
 Nation 
 
 G. ber Seite 
 
 Xijat 
 
 SSaljr^eit 
 
 Station 
 
 r>. ber (Seite 
 
 Zi)at 
 
 SSaljrIjeit 
 
 D^ation 
 
 A. bie ©eite 
 
 Plural 
 
 SSaljr^eit 
 
 Station 
 
 N. bie ©eiten 
 
 ^§atcn 
 
 SSarjrljeiten 
 
 9?ationcu 
 
 Gr. ber <Seiten 
 
 ^f)aten 
 
 SSaljr^eiten 
 
 9?atiDneu 
 
 r>. ben (Seitcn 
 
 3:l)atcn 
 
 SSaI)rI)eiten 
 
 9^ationen 
 
 A. bie <^eiten 
 
 ^f>ateu 
 
 SlSa^r^eiten 
 
 ^f^atiptieu 
 
38 
 
 NOUNS. 
 
 [94^ 
 
 n. Masculines : 
 
 
 ©tubent 
 student. 
 
 ^naBe 
 boy. 
 
 55ater 5Henf(^ 
 Bavarian. man. 
 
 N. ber ^mh^ 
 G-.D.A. Slnabeu 
 
 Singular. 
 q3ater ^enfc^ 
 ^aiern SJienjc^ett 
 
 Plural. 
 
 ©tubent 
 ©tubcutcu 
 
 N.G.D.A. ^mUn 
 
 SBaiern 93^enfc^en 
 
 ©tubenten 
 
 95. 1. Formerly, many feminine nouns of this declension, 
 like the masculines, took the declensional ending in the genitive 
 and dative singular ; and this ending is still commonly retained 
 in certain phrases : e. g., auf @rben on earth, t)on ©eiten on the 
 part of. Occasionally, also, it appears in a gen. feminine pre- 
 ceding the governing noun, as um feiner ©eelcn §eil for the wel- 
 fare of his soul; and yet more rarely, by poetic license, in other 
 situations : e. g., auf ber (^affen on the street, ha^ 2id)t ber ©onnen 
 the light of the sun. 
 
 2. Occasionally, when two nouns are used together, the 
 ending en of the second declension is omitted ; thus, §elb unb 
 ^id^ter (accus.) he7^o and poet, 5Jlenf (^ 3U SJlenfcf) man to man. 
 
 [Exercise 4. Nouns of Second Declension.] 
 
 IRREGULA.E DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 
 
 96. Irregularities in the declension of nouns of foreign 
 origin, and of proper names, will be considered below, under 
 those titles respectively (see 101-8). 
 
 97. Mixed Declension. 
 
 1. A number of masculine and neuter nouns are regularly 
 and usually declined in the singular according to the first 
 declension, and in the plural according to the second. Such 
 are: masculines — 
 
 S3auev, peasant 
 ©eoatter, godfather 
 l^orbeer, laurel 
 2Haft, mast 
 Mvi^l^\, musck 
 
 9^ad)bor, neighbor 
 ^antoffel, slipper 
 <B6)mn], pain 
 @ee, lake 
 (^toat, state 
 
 ®tarf)et, goad 
 ©tral)!, ray 
 llntert!)Qn, subject 
 S>ettcr, cousin 
 3ievat^ [-xai], ormnmni. 
 
IIIREGUIAR DECLENSION. 
 
 89 
 
 Neuters — 
 
 
 
 Sliige, eye 
 S3ett, bed 
 
 ©nbe, end 
 ^cmb, shirt 
 
 O^r, ear 
 2Be^, pain. 
 
 Several of these words have other forms. Thus, (S^eDatter, 
 and ^^antoffcl and SSettcr make a plural also according to the 
 first declension 1st class ; ^auer, 9la(i)bar, and Untertftan make 
 a singular also of the second declension. 
 
 2. Further, certain nouns of foreign origin are of the first 
 declension in the singular, and the second in the plural, as 3n= 
 feet insect, gen. sing. 3nfecte§ ; pi. gnfecten :— especially those 
 ending in unaccented or (which, however, throw the accent for- 
 ward, upon the or, in the plural), as ^oc'tor, gen. sing. ®Dc1or§, 
 pi. ^octo'ren. 
 
 3. Examples : — 
 
 
 
 
 @taat 
 
 9?a(^bar 
 
 2)octor 
 
 5luge 
 
 state, m. 
 
 neighbor, m. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 doctor, m. 
 
 eye, n. 
 
 N. ber <Bia(\i 
 
 9^acf)bar 
 
 doctor 
 
 ha^ ^nge 
 
 G. be§ ©taateg 
 
 9^acpar§ 
 
 ®octor§ 
 
 beg 5Iuge§ 
 
 D. bent (Staate 
 
 9Zac!)bar 
 
 2)Dctor 
 
 bent 5lnge 
 
 A. ben ©taat 
 
 9kd}0ar 
 Plural 
 
 doctor 
 
 bag 5tuge 
 
 ^. etc. bie ©taateti 
 
 9^ac()barn 
 
 SDoctoren 
 
 ^ngen 
 
 98. Declension with defective stem. 
 
 1. A few masculines^ otherwise declined according to the 1st 
 class of the first declension, p,s stems in en, sometimes or usu- 
 ally drop the n or en in the nominative singular. Thus : 
 
 %tU ( or =jen), rock 
 griebe (or =ben), peace 
 gunte (or 4m), spark 
 ©ebanfe (or .!en), thought 
 @(aube (or -Mn), belief 
 
 §aufe (or .en), heap 
 
 ^ame (or =men), name 
 
 ®Qme (or .men), seed 
 
 SBiUe (or 4eu), will 
 
 @c^abe (or =ben), (ci inplur.) harm 
 
 2. Like the above, ber ©(^mers pain has sometimes the 
 genitive in en§; and ba§ ^erg heart has a corresponding declen- 
 sion, but with the accusative like the ncxninative. 
 
40 
 
 NOUNS. 
 
 [98- 
 
 3 
 
 . Examples :^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^amtn name, m. 
 
 ^vkhtn peace, m. 
 
 ^crj ^ear<, n. 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 N. 
 
 ber DZame (or :=men) 
 
 griebe (or 
 
 =ben) 
 
 ha^ §er§" 
 
 a 
 
 be§ 9^amen§ 
 
 grieben§ 
 
 
 beg ^ergeng 
 
 D. 
 
 bem D^amen 
 
 grieben 
 
 
 bem ^erjen 
 
 A. 
 
 ben Seamen 
 
 grieben 
 Plural. 
 
 
 ha^ ^erj 
 
 N., 
 
 etc. Seamen 
 
 grieben 
 
 
 ^erjen 
 
 99. Bedundant Declension. 
 
 1. A considerable number of nouns are declined, either in 
 the singular or the plural, or in both, after more than one form. 
 The most important of these have been already pointed out 
 above under the different declensions and classes ; others are 
 sometimes met with in dialectic, and even in literary, use. 
 
 2. A smaller number have two well established forms of the 
 plural, belonging to different significations of the word ; they 
 are as follows : 
 
 bag iBoitb 
 
 ^anber, ribbons 
 
 53anbe, bonds 
 
 bie 53on! 
 
 SSdnfe, benches 
 
 ^on!en, banks 
 
 ber S3auer 
 
 S3auern, peasants 
 
 iBauer, builders 
 
 ber S3ogen 
 
 iBogen, sheet of paper 
 
 33ogen, bows (for shooting) 
 
 ha^ 2)ing 
 
 S)inge, things 
 
 2)inger, creatures 
 
 ber guB 
 
 m^^rfeet 
 
 ^U^e, feet (a measure) 
 
 bag ©efid^t 
 
 @efid)te, apparitions 
 
 ©efic^ter, /aces 
 
 ha^ ^orn 
 
 §orne, kinds of horn 
 
 Corner, horns (of animals) 
 
 ber ^aben 
 
 Saben, shutters 
 
 :2a ben, shops 
 
 bag $?anb 
 
 Sanbe, regions 
 
 ^iinbtv, countries 
 
 bag Sid^t 
 
 iidjtt, candles 
 
 $?i(^ter, lights 
 
 ber Wann 
 
 9JJanner, men 
 
 Ttanmn, vassals 
 
 ber monh 
 
 SJJonbe, moons 
 
 SJJonben, months 
 
 ber Ort 
 
 Dxte, regions 
 
 Orter, places (towns) 
 
 bie @au 
 
 @aue, sows 
 
 ®auen, wild pigs 
 
 ber @(^itb 
 
 ©d^itbe, shields 
 
 @d)i(ber, signs 
 
 bag Znd} 
 
 Xu^e, kinds of cloth 
 
 Xn6)ev, pieces of cloth 
 
 bag Sort 
 
 SSorte, words 
 
 Sorter, vocables 
 
 100. Defective Declension. 
 
 1. In German, as in English, there are classes of nouns — es- 
 pecially abstracts, as ^emutl^ [^emut] humilityj and names of 
 
101] IRKEGXILAR DECLENSION, 41 
 
 substances, as ^olb gold (unless, as is sometimes the case, they 
 have taken on also a concrete or individualized sense, as %'iiot= 
 Ijtikn follies, ^apiere papers) — which, in virtue of their significa- 
 tion, have no plural. 
 
 Some abstract nouns, when they take such a modified sense 
 as to admit of plural use, substitute other, derivative or com- 
 pound, forms : as, %oh death, ^obegfaKe deatJis (literally, cases of 
 death), 35eftre6en exertion, 33eftreBun0en exertions, efforts. 
 
 2. A much smaller number have no singular : as, (^Ikxn parents, 
 DJiafern measles, Striimmer ruins, Seute people. 
 
 3. Compounds of 9J^ann man substitute leute for mann in the 
 plural, when taken collectively : thus, ^aufmann merchant, ^auf= 
 leute merchants; but 53iebermanner worthy men, ©"^renmdnner wen 
 of honor, as individuals only, not forming a class. 
 
 NOUNS OF FOREIGN ORIGIN. 
 
 ^01. 1. Nouns derived from foreign languages are 
 variously treated, according to the completeness of their 
 naturalization. 
 
 2. The great mass of them are assimilated in inflec- 
 tion to German models, and belong to the regular de- 
 clensions and classes, as already stated. 
 
 3. A class of nouns in um from the Latin form a plural in en ; 
 thus, 3nbit)ibuum, 3nbit)tbuen; ©tubium, ©tubien; and a few in 
 qI and il add ien : thus, l^apital, llapitalien j goffil, goffilien. One 
 German noun, ^Icinob jewel, makes a similar plural, ^leinobien. 
 
 4. A few, as in English, form their plurals after the manner of 
 the languages from which they come ; but are hardly capable 
 of any other variation, except an § as sign of the genitive sing- 
 ular: thus, 9Jluftcu§, 9J?ufici; 5:eTnpu§, Slempora ; factum, Sacta. 
 
 5. Some from the French and English, or other modern 
 languages, form the plural, as well as the genitive singular, in § : 
 thus, feibene ©op^a§ silken sofas, bie Sorb§ the lords. 
 
 Sometimes, rather than add a genitive sign § to a word which 
 in the original took none such, an author prefers to leave it, like 
 a proper name, uninflected : thus, be§ ^aQUax of the jaguar, be§ 
 ^lima of the climate. 
 
 Before this foreign and irregular §, some authorities set an 
 apostrophe, both in the genitive and the plural, especially after 
 a vowel. The same is true in proper names. 
 
42 NOUNS. [102- 
 
 PROPER NAMES. 
 
 /102. Proper names are inflected like common nouns, 
 unless they are names of persons, of places (towns and 
 tha like), or neuter names of countries. 
 
 \ 103. Names of countries and places admit only the genitive 
 ending § (not e§) ; if, as terminating in a sibilant, they cannot 
 take that ending, they are not declined at all : thus, bie SSiiften 
 5lfrt!a§ the deserts of Africa, bie SiniDoftner ^erling the inhabitants 
 of Berlin, but bie ^inmo^ner t)on ^art^ t1ie inhabitants of Paris 
 (or, bie SintDol^ner ber 6tabt $ari§). 
 
 ( 104? Names of persons were formerly more generally and 
 more fully declined than at present ; now, the article is custom- 
 arily used to indicate the case, and the name itself remains un- 
 varied after it in the singular. 
 
 But the genitive takes an ending if followed by the governing 
 word : as, be§ grofeen griebrid)^ S^ftaten Frederwk the Great's deeds. 
 i 105. ) When used without the article, such nouns add § in the 
 genitiv^ : thus, (5cf)iner§, 5riebrid}§. But masculine names end- 
 ing in a sibilant, and feminines in e, have en§ in the genitive : 
 thus, 9}^a5en§, ©opftienS. i p^ '^ 
 
 The dative and accusative, of both genders, were formerly 
 made to end in n or en, which ending is now more often, and 
 preferably, omitted, and the name left unvaried in those cases. 
 
 ^y But classical names ending in § are unchanged in the gen- 
 itive: thus, ^Itreu§' 6oI)n Atrem' son, ^emo§tl^ene§' Sfleben De- 
 mosthenes' speeches. And German nouns ending in a sibilant are 
 sometimes treated in the same way : e. g. 3^blt^^ (^ebii^te Zedlitz' 
 poems. The use of the apostrophe in such cases is common, but 
 not universal. 
 
 ^ 106. J The plurals of masculine names, with or without the 
 article, have e (rarely en), with n added in the dative ; of fem- 
 inines, n or en. Those in o (from Latin themes in on) add ne: 
 thus, gato, Satone. 
 
 107. ; 3^11^^ ^^d 6^riflu§ are still usually dechned as Latin 
 neuns :' gen. ^efu, Sf)nfti ; dat. 3efu, (Skifto ; ace. 3ef urn, (S:^riftum. 
 Other classical names were formerly treated in the same man- 
 ner, and cases thus formed are occasionally met with, even in 
 recent works. 
 
 108. 1. A proper name following a title that has the article 
 before it k left unvaried ; if without the article, it takes the 
 
110] ADJUNCTS OP THE NOUN. 43 
 
 genitive sign, and the title (except §err) is unvaried: thus, 
 ber ©o^n Haljer griebric^S the son of Emperor Frederick, §errn 
 ©d^mibtg ^an^ Mr. Smith's house, but ^reusgufi be§ ^aijers grieb= 
 rid) tJw crusade of Emperor Frederick. 
 
 2. An appended title is declined, whether the preceding name 
 be declined or not; thus, ^Ue^anbcra bc§ (^ro^cn (^e(d)i(^te 
 Alexander the GreaVs history, bie 51'^aten be§ .^i)niQ§ Sriebri(5^ be§ 
 3tt)eiten the deeds of King Frederick the Second. 
 
 3. Of two or more proper names belonging to the same 
 person, only the last is liable to variation under the preceding 
 rules: thus, §errn 3o^ann ©d^mibt^ ^au^ Mr. John Smith's 
 house; but, if the last be a family name preceded by t)On, it 
 takes the genitive ending only before the governing noun: 
 thus, gricbrid) Don ©d^lEerS 2Ber!e, but bie 2Ber!e r^riebrid)§ bon 
 ©d)iner the works of Frederick von Schiller. 
 
 [Exercise 5., Nouns of Mixed Declension, etc.] 
 
 MODIFYING ADJUNCTS OF THE N3UN. 
 
 109. A noun may enter as an element into the structure of 
 the sentence not only by itself, but is modified and limited by 
 adjuncts of various kinds. 
 
 110. 1. The most usual adjunct of a noun is an adjective 
 (including under this term the pronominal and numeral ad- 
 jectives and the articles) : namely 
 
 a. An attributive adjective, directly qualifying the noun, 
 preceding it, and agreeing with it in gender, number, and case : 
 as, ctn Quter DJJann a good man, ber fc^onen Srau of the beautiful 
 woman, biejen artigen ^Hnbern to these well-hehaved children (see 
 115). 
 
 h. An appositive adjective, less directly qualifying the noun, 
 immediately following it, and in German not varied to agree 
 with it (treated, rather, as if the predicate of an adjective 
 clause) : thus, ein Sel^nftuI)! reid) gefc^nifet unb tDunberlic^ an arm- 
 chair [which is] richly carved and quaint (see 116.2). 
 
 But an adjective may follow a noun, as if appositive, and yet 
 be declined, being treated as if having a noun understood after 
 it: thus, bie geinbe, bie mac^tigen, jiegcn the enemies, the mighty, 
 prevail, menn id) Dergang'ner Stage, gliidlid)er, 311 benfen tuage when 
 I venture to think of past days, happy ones, Such cases are 
 poetic and rare. 
 
44 NOUNS. [110> 
 
 c. An adjective clause, containing a verb and its subject, and 
 introduced by a relative pronoun or conjunction : as, ber 3f{tng, 
 ben fie mir (^a'i) the ring which she gave to me, bie ©iitte, tt)D ber alte 
 S3ergmann tt)ol^nt the cottage where the old miner lives (see 437). 
 
 2. Sometimes an adverb, by an elliptical construction (as rep- 
 resenting the predicate of an adjective clause), stands as 
 adjunct to a noun : as, ber Tlann Ijkx the man here, ber S)immel 
 bort oBen heaven above: that is, the man who is here, etc. 
 
 111. A noun is very often limited by another noun. 
 
 1. By a noun dependent on it, and placed either before or 
 after it. 
 
 a. Usually in the genitive case, and expressing a great 
 variety of relations (216). 
 
 b. Very rarely, in the dative case (225.1). 
 
 2. By an appositive noun, following it, and agreeing with it 
 in case (but not necessarily in gender or number) : as, er l^at ben 
 ^atfer griebric^, feinen ^txxn, t)errat5en [t)erraten] he has betrayed 
 the Emperor Frederick, his master, ben fie, meine (^eliebte, mir 
 Q^Oih which she, my beloved, gave me. 
 
 The appositive noun is sometimes connected with its subject 
 by the conjunction al§ as: thus, gieftt, al^ ber lefete ^ii^ter, ber 
 le^te SJlenf (^ !&inau§ the last man marches out as last poet. 
 
 3. The ether parts of speech used as substantives (113), of 
 course, may take the place of the Umiting noun. 
 
 112. A noun is limited by a prepositional phrase : that is, by 
 a noun whose relation to it is defined by a preposition : as, ber 
 ©(^litffel 3U ©amletS 33etraQen the key to Hamlefs behavior. 
 
 This construction is especially frequent with verbal derivatives 
 retaining something of the verbal force: thus, ^rgiejung gur 
 Sreifteit education to freedom, bie ^offnung auf eine ^inigung tnit 
 bem ^aifer the Iwping for an understanding with the emperor. 
 
 In other cases, the prepositional phrase is virtually the predi- 
 cate (3186) of an adjective clause: as, ber SJiann im Often the 
 man [wlio was or lived] in the East. 
 
 EQUIVALENTS OF THE NOUN. 
 
 113. 1. Other parts of speech are habitually or occasionally 
 used as substantives, and may be substituted for the noun in a 
 part or all of its constructions. These are 
 
 a. The substantive pronouns and numerals : as, t(^ I, birf) 
 thee, fie she, her, they, them, mx who, fe(f)g ber 9)^dnner six of the 
 men. 
 
116] EQUIVALENTS OF THE NOUN. 45 
 
 b. Infinitives of verbs (which are properly verbal nouns): see 
 339 etc. 
 
 c. Adjectives (including pronominal and numeral adjectives 
 and participles) are often converted into nouns (see 129). 
 
 2. Any word or phrase, viewed in itself, as concrete rep- 
 resentative of what it signifies, may be used as a neuter sub- 
 stantive : thus, fein eigen 3c^ his own "I", ol^ne SOSenn ober ^ber 
 without "if" or "hut", jebeg Siir unb SBlber every pro and con, 
 
 3. A substantive clause, containing a verb and its subject, 
 and introduced generally by ba§ that, oB whether, or a compound 
 relative word, takes the place of a noun in some constructions 
 (see 436). 
 
 For a fuller definition of the relations and constructions in 
 which the various equivalents of the noun may be used, see the 
 several parts of speech concerned. 
 
 -iS 
 
 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 The Adjective, in German, is declined only 
 wli6n used attributively or substantively. 
 
 /il6/^4' The attributive adjective always precedes 
 rhe noun Vhich it qualifies ; it is varied for number and 
 case, and (in the singular only) for gender, and agrees 
 in all these particulars with its noun. 
 
 But the noun to which the adjective relates is often omitted: 
 the latter, in such case, has the same form as if followed by the 
 noun: as, er T^at tDei^e Ociufer, unb mx l^aben Braune lie has white 
 houses, and we have brown, geben ©ie mir stDcierIci %n6:), rot^e^ 
 [rote§] unb f d) tt) a r 5 e § give me two kinds of cloth, red and black. 
 
 2,-^ov the adjective used as a substantive, see below, 129. 
 
 \ 116) The adjective remains uninflected when used 
 predicatively, appositively, or adverbially. 
 
 1. A predicate adjective (316) is one which is by means of a 
 verb made to belong to and qualify a noun (or pronoun, etc.). 
 Its uses may be classified as — a. simple predicate, after 
 verbs that signify being, becoming, continuing, seeming, and the 
 like : as, fein ^an^ Wax jd)on unb m\^, w'xxh aha je^t alt, unb fiel)t 
 l^dfjlid) an§ his liouse was handsome and white, but is now 
 growing old, and looks ugly ; — b. adverbial predicate, divid- 
 
46 ADJECTIVES. [116- 
 
 ing its qualifying force between the noun and the verb : as, ba§ 
 C)au§ [te^^t feft^^/te Iwuse stands firm, tobt [tot] unb ftarr liegt bie 
 SBiifte l^ingeftredft the steppe lies stretched out dead and stiff; — c. 
 objective or factitive predicate, expressing a condition 
 effected in or ascribed to an object by the action of a transitive 
 verb : as, ba§ mad)t mid^ traurig that makes me sad, ]\^ fialh tobt 
 ftot] lac^en to laugh one's self half to death, er Baut ha^ §au§ ftoc^ 
 he builds the house high, ic^ mli meine 5lugen off en bel^alten I will 
 keep my eyes open, bie lang^ ic^ t)erGeffen geglaubt which I had long 
 believed forgotten — whence, of course, also as simple predicate in 
 the corresponding passive expression: as, ha^ 't)au§ toirb IjO^ 
 Qebaut the house is built high. 
 
 2. The appositive adjective follows the noun : as, tt)ir tt)aren 
 glDei ^inber, flein unb fro!) we were two childj-en small aiid merry, 
 2Borte fii^ mie DJionblid^t words sweet as moonlight. 
 
 3. For the adjective used as adverb, see below, 130. 
 
 4. The uses of the adjective in apposition, as predicate, and as adverb, 
 pass into one another by insensible gradations, and the same word 
 often admits of more than one understanding. The appositive adjective 
 is distinguished from the attributive rather formally than logically, and 
 sometimes, in poetry, an adjective really attributive in meaning is 
 treated as appositive : as, bei etnem SSirt^e [Sirte] tvunberntilb with a 
 host wondrous kind; einen 53Iicf sum ^imtnel ^q6) a look to Heaven high. 
 The attributive adjective was formerly permitted after the noun as well 
 as before, and was declined in that position ; as was also the adjective 
 used predicatively. 
 
 ^/ll7, A few adjectives are always used predicatively, 
 and are therefore never declined ; others are used only 
 attributively, and are therefore always declined. 
 
 a. Of the first class, some of the most common are Bereit 
 ready, fetnb hostile, funb known, c^mahx aware, eingeben! mindful, 
 tfteil^aft [teilftaft] participating, nii^ useful. 
 
 b. To the second class belong many adjectives expressing, 
 formal relations — viz., certain pronominal adjectives, as jener 
 yon, jeber every, meinig mine, felbig self-same; some adjectives of 
 number, time, and place, as gtt)ett second, '^eutig of to-day, bortig 
 there situated, tdglirf) daily, Ci\\\'CiX[<^X\&^ in the first place; and, in 
 general, adjectives of material in en, ern, for which prepositional 
 phrases are usually substituted in predicate construction. 
 
120] DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 47 
 
 DECLENSION OP THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 118..^ Each adjective, in its attributive use, is subject 
 to two different modes of declension, according as it is 
 or is not preceded by certain limiting words. These 
 we shall call the fiest and second, or stkong and weak, 
 declensions (see 132). 
 
 (ll9./ 1. The endings of the fiest or steong declen- 
 sion are the same with those of the definite article, al- 
 ready given (63). 
 
 Excepting that the nom. and ace. sing, neuter have e§ in- 
 stead of a§, and the nom. and ace. plural and fem. singular 
 have c instead of ie : that is, the final and characteristic letter 
 is the same, but differently preceded. 
 
 2. The second or weak declension has only two 
 endings, e and cu : e belongs to the nominative singular 
 of all genders, and hence also (see 72.2a), to the ac- 
 cusative of the feminine and neuter; en is found in all 
 the other cases. Thus 
 
 Adjective Endings of Declension. 
 
 First (strong) Declension. Second (weak) Declension. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 m. f. n. m.f. n. 
 
 ^e -e :=e ==eu 
 
 -en =en ^cn ^en 
 
 =:en ^en -en ^en 
 
 -en ^e =e ^tn 
 
 3. It will be noticed that the first declension has more than 
 twice as many distinct endings as the second, and that it there- 
 fore makes a correspondingly superior, though a far from 
 conapl^e, distinction of genders and cases. 
 
 ( 120. \l. The endings as given are appended through- 
 out to the stem of the adjective, or to the adjective in 
 its simple predicative form. 
 
 Thus, from gut good are formed, in the first declension, Quter, 
 Qute, oute§, fiutem, gutenj in the second, gutc, guten. 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 m. 
 
 f. n. 
 
 m. t. n. 
 
 N. 
 
 ^er 
 
 =:e ^c§ 
 
 =e 
 
 G. 
 
 :=e§ 
 
 :=er ^c^ 
 
 ^er 
 
 D. 
 
 =^em 
 
 -er :=em 
 
 ==en 
 
 A. 
 
 =en 
 
 =e ==e§ 
 
 -e 
 
48 ADJECTIVES. [120- 
 
 2. But adjectives ending in e reject this e in every case be- 
 fore taking the en^ding (or, what is the same thing, reject the c 
 of every ending). 
 
 Thus, from trdge lazy come trdQer, trage, trageg, tragem, Iragen. 
 
 3. Adjectives ending in the unaccented terminational syl- 
 lables el, en, er, also usually reject the e either of those syllables 
 or of the declensional ending. 
 
 Thus, from ebel noble come ebler, eble, eble§, and generally 
 eblem and eblen, less often ebelm, ebein ; from l^eiler cheerful come 
 usually l^eitrer, l^eitre, 5^itre§, and :^eilerm and l)ettern, or l^eitrem 
 and ^eitren; from eben even come ebner, ebne, ebne§, ebtiem, 
 ebnen. The full forms of these words, however — as ebener, l^eite* 
 rer, and, less often, ebele^ — are also in good use, especially in a 
 more stately or solemn style. 
 
 4. §DC^ high loses its c when declined: thus, ^ol^er, fto^e, 
 6Qi>£|, etc. 
 
 / 121. \ 1. The adjective takes the more distinctive 
 endings of the first declension, unless preceded by a 
 pronominal limiting word (i. e. an article, pronoun, or 
 pronominal adjective: see 123) which itself has those 
 endings. 
 
 Thus, as we say ber 5Jlann the man, so also guter Wann good 
 man, but ber Qute 3JJann the good man; as bie grauen the women, 
 so gute Srauen, and gute fc^one grauen, but bie guten fd^onen 
 Srauen the good handsome wanien; as bem ^inbe to the child, so 
 fiutem ^tnbe, and gutem, frf)onem, artigem ^inbe, but bem guten, 
 jc^onen, artigen ^inbe to the good, handsome, well-behaved child. 
 
 2. Or, in other words, a pronominal limiting word 
 before the adjective, if it have itself the more dis- 
 tinctive adjective ending characteristic of the case and 
 gender of the qualified noun, takes that ending away 
 from the adjective, reducing the latter from the first to 
 the second declension : the distinctive ending is not re- 
 peated upon both words. 
 
 Note that certain cases — the ace. sing, masculine, the nom. 
 and ace. sing, feminine, and the dat. plural — have the same 
 ending in the one declension as in the other, and are therefore 
 not altered, whatever the situation in which the adjective is 
 placed. 
 
122] DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 49 
 
 ^^ Apparently by an irregular extension of this tendency to 
 avoid the unnecessary repetition of a distinctive ending, a gen. 
 sing. mascuUne or neuter ending in § takes before it usually 
 the second form of the adjective (in en), instead of the first (in 
 e§). 
 
 Thus, fallen SSafferS of coU water, frozen Tlni^t^ [mum] with 
 joyous spirit, (jro^en %\)n\^ [Xeil§] in great part, and so on, are 
 much more common than !alte§ 2Baffer§, ]xo^t% 2Jlutl)eg [2)Zute§] 
 etc., although the latter are not incorrect. 
 
 C 12^. Examples :— 
 
 1. Complete decj^nsion of an adjective, gut good, in both 
 forms. 
 
 ^lEST Declension. 
 
 m. 
 
 N. guter 
 
 G. gute^ 
 
 D. gutem 
 
 A. guten 
 
 Singular, 
 f. 
 gute 
 guter 
 guter 
 gute 
 
 Plural. 
 
 m. f . n. 
 
 gute 
 guter 
 guteit 
 gute 
 
 Second Declension. 
 Singular. 
 
 N. ber gute 
 
 G. be§ guten 
 
 D. bem guten 
 
 A. htn guten 
 
 bie gute ha^ gute 
 
 ber guten be§ guten 
 
 ber guten bem guten 
 
 bie gute ha^ gute 
 
 Plural. 
 
 m. f. n. 
 
 bie guten 
 ber guten 
 ben guten 
 bie guten 
 
 2. Declension of noun and accompanying adjective: rotifer 
 [roter] 2Bein red wine, gro^e 3reube great joy, fd^lei^teg ^elb had 
 money. 
 
 First Declension. 
 
 Second Declension. 
 
 Singular, 
 
 m. 
 
 N. rotter [roter] 3Sein 
 
 G. rot^eS [roteg] or rot{)en Seined 
 
 D. rot^em [rotem] SSeine 
 
 A. rotfjen [roten] StSein 
 
 ber rot^e [rote] SSein 
 be§ rotI)en [roten] 2Beine§ 
 bem rotfien [roten] ^eine 
 ben rottjen [roten] SSein 
 
50 ADJECTIVES. [12a- 
 
 Bingidar, . 
 
 N. groge S^eubc bte groge Sreitbc 
 
 G. groBer greube ber groBen greube 
 
 D. grower greube ber gro^en greube 
 
 A. gro^e greube bie gro^e greube 
 
 N. f^tec^teg ^etb ha^ fd^Ied^te ©etb 
 
 a fc^Ie^teg or 4eu ©elbe§ be§ fc^Iec^teu @etbe0 
 
 D. fc^Iec^tem (S^elbe bent fd^lecl^ten ©elbe 
 
 A. fc^lec^teg ®elb bag fc^tec^te ®elb 
 
 Flural 
 
 m. f. n. m. f. n. 
 
 N. rot^e [rote] SSeine 2C. bte rotten [roten] SSetne 2C. 
 
 G. grower greuben 2C. ber gro^eu greuben 2C. 
 
 D. f(^led)ten ©elbern :c. ben fc^Iedjten (^elbern 2C. 
 
 A. gro^e greuben 2C. bie gro^en greuben jc. 
 
 123. The words which, when placed before an adjec- 
 tive, take away its distinctive ending, or reduce it from 
 the first to the second declension, are — 
 
 1. The two articles, ber and ein, with fetn (195.2), the negative 
 of the latter. 
 
 2. The possessive adjectives, mein, bein, fein, unfer, euer, il^r 
 (157 etc.). 
 
 3. The demonstrative, interrogative, and relative pronominal 
 adjectives ber, bie§ and Jen (163), and ml<i) (174). 
 
 4. The indefinite pronolomal adjectives and numeral adjectives 
 ieb, iegli(5^, foli^, mand), anber, etntg, etli(^, afl, t)iel, trenig, me^r, 
 me^irer (170, 189-194). 
 
 But )o\^ after ein is treated as a simple adjective, and does 
 not affect a following adjective : thus, ein fold^er guter 5!Jlann. 
 
 5. A few proper adjectives: namely, t)erjc?^tebene pi. sundry 
 (nearly equivalent with einige and me^rere), and folgenb, eriDd^nt, 
 obig, and their like, used idiomatically without the article (66.6) 
 to indicate things which have been specified or are to be speci- 
 fied. 
 
 124. 1. Since, however, a part of these words — 
 namely, ein, fein, and the possessive adjectives — lack the 
 
125] DECLENSION OP ADJECTIVES. 51 
 
 distinctive ending in three of their forms, the nominative 
 singular masculine and the nominative and accusative 
 singular neuter, the adjective following those cases 
 retains the ending. 
 
 Thus, as we say guter DJlann, Qute^ ^inb, so also em Quter ^ann, 
 ein Qute§ ^inb (as opposed to bcr Quk Tlann, ba§ gute ^inb), be- 
 cause there is nothing about the ein which should render the 
 full ending upon the adjective unnecessary. 
 
 2. In this way arises what is sometimes reckoned as 
 a " third " or " mixed " declension, composed of three 
 forms taken from the first declension, and the rest from 
 the second. For example, mein guter 7ny good is declined 
 
 Singular, Plural. 
 
 m. f. n. m. f. n. 
 
 N. mein guter meinc gute mein gute^ meine guten 
 
 G. meine§ guten meiner guten melne§ guten meiner guten 
 D. meinem guten meiner guten meinem guten meinen guten 
 A. meinen guten meine gute mein gute§ meine guten 
 
 There is neither propriety nor advantage in treating this as a 
 separate declension. For each gender and case, there are two 
 forms of the adjective, and only two, and the learner should be 
 taught to distinguish between them, and to note, in every case, 
 the reason of their respective use — which reason is the same in 
 the " mixed " declension as elsewhere. 
 
 3. In like manner, when mand), n)el(^, and fold) are used with- 
 out an ending of declension (see 170, 174, 191), the succeeding 
 adjective takes the full ending of the first declension. 
 
 Thus, mcM) reic^er §inimel what a rich sky, but me((^er reicl)e 
 C)immel; mand) Bunte 33lumen, but manege bunten 33Iumen many 
 variegated flowers. 
 
 4. The same is true after all, Dtel, mentg, and me'^r, when they 
 are undeclined : thus, t)iel gute§ Dbft much good fruit, me^r off ene 
 SOBogen mxyre open carriages. 
 
 /^125. 1. The adjective follows the first declension not only 
 when it has no other limiting word, or only another adjective, 
 before it, but also when preceded by an indeclinable word, such 
 as ettt)a§, genug, allerlei, and the numerals. 
 
 2. After the personal pronouns (which do not take the endings 
 of adjective declension), the adjective ought, by analogy, to be 
 of the first declension ; and this is not absolutely forbidden ; but 
 
52 ' ADJECTITES. [125- 
 
 in common usage the adjective takes the distinctive endings 
 only in the nominative singular (with the accusative neuter), and 
 follows in the other cases the second declension. — That is to 
 say, the adjective after a personal pronoun is declined as after 
 ein, or by the "mixed" declension (124.2). 
 
 Thus, id) armer Xl^ox I poor fool, bu IkU^ lluib thou dear child; 
 but tDir armen 5:i&oren we poor fools, i^r fii^en Sieber ye sweet songs. 
 
 126. 1. The ending e§ of the nom. and ace. neuter in the first 
 declension is sometimes dropped : this omission is especially 
 frequent in poetry. 
 
 Thus, fd)5n ^tikx firie weather, ^ al\ 6) (Btlh false money, ein 
 anber geft a different festival, ber 35ol!er ^eilig 9te^t the sacred 
 law of nations. 
 
 2. In old style German, and in poetry, the ending is sometimes 
 dropped in other cases also : thus, licb SJJutter dear mother, Ueb 
 ^nabe dear boy. 
 
 3. Adjectives used as collective nouns are uninflected in such 
 combinations as mit ^ro^ unb ^lein with great and small, bei ^Ht 
 unb Sung among old and young. 
 
 4. Certain adjectives are in all constructions indeclinable ; 
 thus,^ a. those ending in lei (415.11) and those in er from nouns 
 of places (415.5) ; b. lauter mere, mtfjx more, mniQU less; c. certain 
 foreign names of color (properly nouns) as, rofa rose, lila lilac. 
 
 127. After a part of the pronominal adjectives mentioned 
 above, 123.4, it is allowable, and even usual, to use the ending 
 of the first declension instead of the second in the nom. and ace. 
 plural. 
 
 Thus, einige Qto^e ^aften sundry big boxes, mandjt QlndU^t 
 ^blkx many fortunate races, me^rere lange (Stra^en several long 
 streets. 
 
 128. 1. When two or more adjectives precede and qualify 
 the same noun, unless the first be one of those mentioned in 
 123, all regularly and usually take the same ending. 
 
 2. Rarely, however, when the following adjective stands in a 
 closer relation to the substantive, as forming with it a kind of 
 compound idea, to which the preceding adjective is then added 
 as a more adventitious determinative, the second is allowed to 
 be of the second declension, though the first is of the first ; but 
 only in the genitive and dative cases. 
 
 Thus, l^ofte f(^atttge 33dume high shady trees, mit frobem leti^tem 
 ©inn with light joyous mind, guter alter foftbarer SBein good old 
 
120] DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 53 
 
 costly wine ;— hut tion f(^onem tollmen [rolen] Sluc^c of handsome 
 red cloth, frif(^erI}o(Idnbtf(^en .t)dnnGe of fresh Dutch herrings, mit 
 etgnem inneren DrganiSmu^ ivlth peculiar internal organization. 
 
 3. Occasionally, what is more properly an adjective qualifying 
 the noun is treated in German as an adverb limiting a following 
 adjective before the noun, and so (130) is left undeclined : thus, 
 bie SBoIfen, bie forrnlo^ graucn 2od)ter ber 2uft the clouds, the gray 
 shapeless daughters of the air, bie unGlucfjelig h'aurige 53eGcgnim(i 
 the unhappy sad meeting, ber uralt fromtnen ©itte of the ancient 
 pious custom. 
 
 4. So also, of two adjectives connected by unb and, the former 
 is occasionally left without an ending : thus, ein unglaublid) reid^ 
 unb Ueblid)er 9J^unb an incredibly rich and lovely mouth. 
 
 [Exercise 6. Adjectives of First Declension.] 
 [Exercise 7. Adjectives of Second Declension.] 
 
 The Adjective used as Substantive. 
 
 In German, as in other languages, adjectives are 
 rerj often used as substantives, either with or without 
 an article or other determining word. 
 
 2) When so used, the adjective is written with a 
 capital letter, like any other substantive ; but it retains 
 its proper declension as an adjective, taking the endings 
 of the first or of the second declension according to the 
 rules already given. 
 
 3. An adjective used as a substantive in the masculine or 
 feminine gender usually denotes a person; in the neuter 
 (singular only), a concrete abstract — a thing which, or that in 
 general which, possesses the quality designated by the ad- 
 jective. 
 
 Thus, ber ®utc rdumt ben $Iafe bem 33cjcn the good (man) gives 
 vUwe to the ivicked, ba^ l^ie unb ia ein ©liidlid^er QetDefen that here 
 and there has been one happy person, eineSc^one a beaidy, mcine 
 ©eliebte my beloved, 3^re 9flc(i)te your right hand,—\vo ha§ ©trenae 
 mit bem S^i'ten, mo ©tarfeg fid) unb 5DliIbe§ paarten where the hard 
 has united with the tender, where what is strong and ivhat is gentle 
 Imve combined, burc^ 0einere§ gum ©ro^ern mic^ geiDO^nen ac- 
 custom me by the less to the greater. 
 
 4. Some adjectives are so constantly used in this way as to 
 have quite acquired the character of substantives, From these 
 
64 ADJECTIVES. [129- 
 
 are to be distinguished certain neuters derived from adjectives 
 without a suffix, and declined as nouns of the first declension : 
 as, @ut property, 9te(^t right, ^ot^ [9iot] red, ^eutfd) German 
 (language). 
 
 5. After etlt)a§ something, tr)a§ what, something, ni(^t§ nothing, 
 an adjective is treated neither as attributive nor as appositive, 
 but as an adjective used as substantive, in apposition : it is 
 therefore of the first declension, and (regularly and usually) 
 written with a capital initial. 
 
 Thus, e§ mu^ no(^ ettr)a§ @ro^ere§,no(f)etn)a§ Q^xxVx^txt^ 
 fommen there must he coming something more that is greater and 
 more splendid, tt)a§ id) ©raufameg erlitt wlutt that was dread- 
 ful I endured, e§ ift nid)t§ ^i e u e § it is nothing new, t)on ettr)a§ 
 5lnbercm of something else. 
 
 6. There is no strict and definite limit between the adjective 
 belonging to a noun understood and the adjective used as a 
 noun, and many cases admit of interpretation as either the one 
 or the other. 
 
 The Adjective used as Adverb, 
 
 ly adjective, in German, may be used in its predica- 
 tive or iininflected form as an adverb. 
 
 Thus, ein ganseg ^avi§ a whole hx)me, but ein g a n a fc^oncg ^a\i§ 
 a wholly beautiful house, and ein flans fd}on gebaute§ |)au§ 
 a quite heautifuUy built house, er |(^reibt o u t he writes well, er 
 Ia(^te no^ t)tel bummer he laughed ijet much more foolishly. 
 
 See further 363; and, for the adjective with adverbial form, 
 128.3. 
 
 [Exercise 8. Adjectives as Substantives and Adverbs.] 
 
 131. Participles as Adjectives. — Participles, being verbal ad- 
 jectives, are treated in nearly all respects as adjectives — as 
 regards their various use, their mode of declension, and their 
 comparison. See further 349 etc. 
 
 132. The double declension of the adjective is in some respects 
 analogous with the two-fold mode of declension of nouns, and is often, 
 like the latter, called "strong" and "weak" declension. The second 
 or "weak" declension of adjectives, like that of nouns, is made upon 
 the model of a theme ending in n. But the other shares in the pecu- 
 liarities of the old pronominal inflection ; being originally formed, it is 
 assumed, by the composition of a declined pronoun (long since lost in 
 separate use) with the adjective theme. The principle on which the 
 
136] COMPARISON OF ADJECTIYES. 55 
 
 distinction in the use of the two is now based - namely, the economical 
 avoidance of unnecessary explicitness — is of comparatively recent intro- 
 duction. The first declension was formerly used when the logical 
 emphasis rested on the attribute ; the second, when it rested on the 
 person or thing to which the attribute related ; the "strong" adjective 
 qualified an indefinite or abstract object ; the **weak," one definite or 
 individualized. 
 
 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 133. Although the subject of comparison, or formation of 
 derivative adjectives of the comparative and superlative 
 degrees, comes more properly under the head of derivation or 
 word-formation, it will be, for the sake of practical convenience, 
 treated here. 
 
 134. The German adjective, like the English, is sub- 
 ject to variation by termination in order to express 
 degree of quality indicated ; a comparative and a super- 
 lative degree are thus formed from the simple adjective, 
 which, with reference to them, is called positive. 
 
 135. 1. The endings forming the comparative and 
 superlative are the same as in English — namely, er and 
 eft. But 
 
 2. Adjectives ending in c add only r for the comparative; 
 and those in el, en, er usually (before the endings of declension, 
 always) reject the e of those terminations before er. 
 
 3. Except after a sibilant letter (3, §, ^, jd)), and a b or t usu- 
 ally (especially when preceded by another consonant: and 
 excepting the nb of the present participle), the e of the super- 
 lative ending eft is regularly omitted, and the ending reduced 
 to simple ft. After a vowel, except e, the e may be either omit- 
 ted or retained. 
 
 136. Monosyllabic adjectives whose vowel is a, 0, or 
 U (not an) more usually modify those vowels in the 
 comparative and superlative : but there are many (about 
 fifty, including several which may follow either method) 
 that leave the vowel unchanged. 
 
56 
 
 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 [136- 
 
 These adjectives are : 
 
 baitgt, anxious taljl, bald fcinft, gentle 
 
 hax\d), harsh !arg, miserly fatt, sated 
 
 hlant, shining !Iart, clear tc^taff, relaxed 
 
 6Ia^t, pale tnapp, close \d)lani, slender 
 
 blo^, bare la^m, lame ff^^offf rough 
 
 bratt, brave la%, weary ftarr, stiff 
 
 Bunt, ^ay ^^^*' ^^^ ^**'^^' ^^^^ 
 
 bumpf, dull morfc^, ro«eri ftraff, fense 
 
 \alil, fallow mdt, naked ftumm, c?um6 
 
 falb, *• na^t, ioe< ftumpf, obtuse 
 
 \a\\(i), false p\att,Jki,t toK, mad! 
 
 \iad), flat ^Jtump, blunt r)oU,full 
 
 fro^, happy y:ci\^, q^^ck UJa^r, /rue 
 
 frommt,piows roi), rowgf/i tt)unb, wounded 
 
 gtattt, smoo<^ i^«ni>/ ^^wnd gflfjmt, tame 
 
 \)0^l, hollow fac^t, sq/i( gartt, tender 
 j^olb, gracious 
 Adjectives marked with a f in the list sometimes modify the vowel in 
 comparison, but the unmodified form is in better usage. 
 
 137. The formation of comparatives and superlatives by the 
 endings er and eft is not, as in English, hmited to monosyllabic 
 adjectives. But superlatives of harsh combination are avoided ; 
 nor are adjectives compared which (see 11 7^) are used only 
 predicatively, and are incapable of declension. 
 
 Of course, as in English, some adjectives are by their sig- 
 nification excluded from comparison: e. g., gang entire, tobt 
 dead, trben earthen. 
 
 138. Examples : — 
 
 
 
 Positwe. 
 
 Comparative. 
 
 Superlative. 
 
 \^m, beautiful 
 
 f(^oner 
 
 ftf)onft 
 
 Ifieife, hot 
 
 ^ei^er 
 
 l^ei^eft 
 
 Irdge, la^y 
 
 trager 
 
 trdgeft 
 
 fret, free 
 
 freier 
 
 freift, freieft 
 
 alt, old 
 
 alter 
 
 alteft 
 
 fromm, pix)us 
 
 frfimmer 
 
 frommft 
 
 furg, short 
 
 fiirger 
 
 fiirgeft 
 
 froi joyous 
 
 fro!)er 
 
 fro^ieft 
 
 bunfel, dark 
 
 bunfler 
 
 bunfelft 
 
 tnagcr, thin 
 
 magrer, magerer 
 
 magerft 
 
 offen, open 
 
 offner, offener 
 
 offenft 
 
 bemorfen, abandoned 
 
 bertDorfener 
 
 bertDorfenft 
 
 Bebeutenb, significant 
 
 Bebeutenber 
 
 Bebeutenbft 
 
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 67 
 
 139. Irregular and Defective Comparison. 
 
 1. A few adjectives are irregular in the comparative, or in 
 the superlative, or in both : namely — 
 
 Gut, good Befler beft 
 
 t)lel, mwih mel^r meifl 
 
 1^0^, Ugh l^ol^er pd^ft 
 
 nal^, nigh na!)er nd(i)]t 
 
 gro^, great grbfeer 9ro|t (rarely gro^cft) 
 
 2. A few are defective, lacking a positive : 
 
 little tninber minbeft 
 
 mid mittler mittelft 
 
 especially, a class derived from prepositions or adverbs : 
 [in, in] inner innerft 
 
 [au§, out] au^er du^erft 
 
 [ober, oben, above] oBer oBerft 
 
 [unter, unten, hehw] unter unterft 
 
 [t)or, in /ronq t)orbcr Dorberft 
 
 [l^inter, ^inten, behind] l^inler l^interft 
 
 3. Two lack (as adjectives) both positive and comparative : 
 Me, ere] [e^er, sooner] ti\\, first 
 
 Me le^t, lajst 
 
 From these two superlatives are irregularly formed new 
 comparatives, erfler /ormer and letter latter. So also, from the 
 comparative me^r more, the double comparative me'^rer (used 
 almost only in the plural me^rere several) is made. 
 
 140. Declension of Comparatives and Superlatives. 
 
 1. In general, comparatives and superlatives are 
 subject to the same rules of declension as their 
 positives, the simple adjectives. 
 
 That is to say, they are uninflected when used in apposition, 
 as predicate, or as adverb (with exceptions noted just below), 
 and declined when used attributively or Substantively ; and 
 they have the same double declension as simple adjectives, 
 determined by the same circumstances. The comparative 
 presents no irregularities, but— 
 
 2. a. The superlative does not often occur without an article 
 or other limiting word before it, and is therefore more usually 
 of the second declension. 
 
 It occurs of the first declension especially in the vocative, 
 after a limiting genitive, and in phrases which omit the article : 
 
58 ADJECTIVES. [140- 
 
 thus, ItcBfter 35rubcr dearest brother, auf beg 9Jleere§ tiefunterftem 
 ^runbe on the sea's very lowest bottom, in. Joc^fter (Jile in extreme 
 (higfwst) haste, meiner 2Bunf(i^e tuarmfter, innigfler the warmest, most 
 heartfelt of my wishes. 
 
 b. "What is of much more importance, the superlative is not, 
 Uke the positive and comparative, used predicatively in its unin- 
 flected form ; but for this is substituted an adverbial expression, 
 formed with the preposition an and the definite article bem (dat. 
 sing, neuter), contracted into am. 
 
 Thus, er ift mir am 1 1 e b ft e n he is dearest to me, m ©ommer 
 finb bie Sage ju fur 3; im C>erbfte, no(^ fiirger; aber am fur = 
 S e ft c n tm SBinter in summer the days are too short ; in autumn 
 yet shorter ; but shortest in winter. 
 
 This expression means literally * at the dearest,' ' at the short- 
 est,' and so on, but is employed as general predicate in many 
 cases where we could not substitute such a phrase for it. Its 
 sphere of use borders close upon that of the superlative with 
 preceding article, agreeing with a noun understood ; and it is 
 often inaccurately used in place of the latter : e. g., er ift am 
 flei^igften unter alien ©d^iilern he is most diligent of all the scholars, 
 for er ift ber flei^igfte 2c. lie is the most diligent, etc. Thus, we 
 ought to say, biefer ©turm mar geftern am fteftigften this storm was 
 most violent yesterday, but ber fleftrige ©turm mar ber l^eftigfte the 
 storm of yesterday was the most violent (e. g., of the year). 
 
 Only aUerliebft is used directly as predicate : ha^ mar aHerliebft 
 that was charming. 
 
 c. For the superlative as adverb are also generally substi- 
 tuted adverbial phrases formed with am, auf§, and gum (see 
 363.2). 
 
 [■ 141. Comparison with Adverbs. 
 
 1. Adjectives not admitting of comparison in the usual man- 
 ner, by er and eft (137), may be compared, as in English, with 
 help of the adverbs mz^x more and am meiften most. 
 
 Thus, er ift mir meftr feinb, alg i^ iftm lie is nmre unfriendly to 
 me than I to him, er mar mir am meiften niife lie was most useful 
 to me. 
 
 2. When, of two qualities belonging to the same object, one is 
 declared to be in excess of the other, the comparison is usually 
 and more properly made with mel^r. 
 
 Thus, er mar mel^r ta|)fer al§ flug he was more bold than prudent ; 
 but, ma'^rer, al§ tlug unb fromm more true than prudent and 
 dutiful (Goethe). 
 
145] COMPARISON OP ADJECTIVES. 59 
 
 142. Additional Bemarks. 
 
 1. The superlative has, as in other languages, a twofold mean- 
 ing and use: one implying direct comparison and eminence 
 above others (superlative relative) ; the other, general eminence, 
 or possession of the designated quality in a high degree (super- 
 lative absolute). 
 
 Thus, f(^onfte 33Iumen ifnost beautiful (exceedingly beautiful) 
 flowers, bie fi^onften 33Iumen the most beautiful flowers (of all those 
 had in view). 
 
 This distinction appears especially in adverbial superlatives : 
 see 363.2c. 
 
 2. Less often, the comparative is used absolutely, without 
 direct comparison implied: thus, cine Idngere Sfiebe a lengthy 
 speech, I)ol}ere (5d)ulen high schools. 
 
 3. To a superlative is often prefixed aHer, in order further to 
 intensify its meaning: thus, ber aUerfd^bnfte the rnost beautiful 
 of all. 
 
 ^Iler is the gen. pi. of all all, and so is used in its hteral sense, 
 only combined with the adjective, and often in connections where 
 its introduction as an independent adjunct of the adjective would 
 be impossible. 
 
 [Exercise 9. Comparative and Superlative of Adjectives.] 
 
 MODIFYING ADJUNCTS OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 143. The adjective, in all its uses as adjective and as substan- 
 tive (for its adverbial use, see under Adverbs, 363), is hable to 
 be hmited by modifying adjuncts of various kinds. 
 
 144. 1. The customary adjunct of an adjective is an adverb : 
 as, ]"e^r gut very good, l^erglii^ fro^ heartily glad. 
 
 2. An adjective may be limited by an adverbial clause, con- 
 taining a verb and its subject, and introduced by a conjunction 
 (see 438.36). 
 
 Thus, er ift fo gut, ba§ \^ iftn nur licBen !ann he is so good, that 
 lean not but love him, frdnfer al§ man glaulite sicker than was 
 supposed. 
 
 An adverbial clause can hardly qualify an adjective, except as 
 a specification of degree, where a comparison is made. 
 
 145. An adjective is often limited by a noun (or pronoun) 
 dependent on it. 
 
 1. By a noun in the genitive case : thus, lebtg aHer ^f(i(^t free 
 from all obligation, x^x^x ^tnk gemi^ sure of its prey: see 817. 
 
60 PRONOUNS. [14:5- 
 
 2. By a noun in the dative case : thus, t'^m ctQCn peculiar to 
 Mm, glei(^ einer Seid^e like a corpse: see 223. 
 
 3. By a noun in the accusative case, but only very rarely, and 
 in predicative construction : thus, id^ bin e§ miibe I am tired of it : 
 see 229. 
 
 4. By an infinitive, with its sign gu to: thus, leic^t gu t)erf(^affen 
 easy to procure : see 344. 
 
 146. An adjective is limited by a prepositional phrase : that 
 is, by a noun whose relation to it is defined by a preposition : 
 thus, t)om ©(^aumc rein free from scum, anQcnel^m t)on (55eftalt 
 agreeable in figure. 
 
 147. 1. An adverbial adjunct to an adjective always pre- 
 cedes it — except the adverb genug erumgh. 
 
 2. An adjective used attributively must be preceded by all its 
 modifying adjuncts : thus, aller t)on bem beut]d)en 9f{ei(^c abl^dngi= 
 gen, ober bagu gel^briQen SBolferftdmme of all tJw rax^es dependent on 
 the German empire, or belonging to it. 
 
 3. Adjectives used in the predicate or in apposition may take 
 the limiting noun, with or without a preposition, either before 
 or after them : but the adjective more usually follows ; and 
 necessarily, if the limiting word be a pronoun without a prep- 
 osition. 
 
 148. Participles, as verbal adjectives, share in most of the 
 constructions of the adjective ; see 349 etc. 
 
 PRONOUNS. 
 
 149. In German, as in English, substantive pronouns and 
 
 pronominal adjectives (or adjective pronouns) are for the most 
 part not distinguished from one another (as they are distin- 
 guished in French) by different forms, but the same word is 
 used, according to circumstances, with either value. It will be 
 convenient, therefore, to treat both classes together, explaining 
 under each word its own proper use or uses. 
 
 L15CL The principal classes of pronouns are — 
 
 1. The personal; 
 
 2. The possessive ; 
 
 3. The demonstrative (including the determinative) ; 
 
 4. The interrogative ; 
 
152] 
 
 PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 61 
 
 5. The relative (all of which are also either de- 
 monstrative or interrogative) ; 
 
 6. The indefinite, with the indefinite numerals. 
 
 The determinative, indefinite, and numeral pronouns are in 
 part of ambiguous character, being intermediate classes through 
 which the pronouns shade off into ordinary adjectives and 
 numerals. 
 
 PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 161. 
 
 r 
 
 The personal pronouns are 
 First Peeson. 
 Singular, ' Plural. 
 
 1 
 
 N. 
 
 ^ ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 t^ir 
 
 we 
 
 
 G. 
 
 meiner, mein 
 
 of me 
 
 
 unfer 
 
 of us 
 
 
 D. 
 
 mtr 
 
 to me 
 
 
 un^ K-^vW to us 
 
 
 A- 
 
 ntid^^ 
 
 me 
 
 
 un0 
 
 us 
 
 
 
 Second Person. 
 
 
 
 
 N. 
 
 bu 
 
 thou 
 
 
 xf)X 
 
 ye 
 
 
 G. 
 
 beiner, bein 
 
 of thee 
 
 
 euer 
 
 of you 
 
 
 D. 
 
 bir 
 
 to thee 
 
 
 euc^ 
 
 to you 
 
 
 A. 
 
 bic^- 
 
 thee 
 
 
 tu6) 
 
 you 
 
 
 \ 
 
 Third Person, 
 
 Singular, 
 
 
 
 masc. 
 
 fern. 
 
 
 neut. 
 
 N. 
 
 er 
 
 he 
 
 fie 
 
 she 
 
 e§ 
 
 it 
 
 X^. 
 
 feiner, fetn of him 
 
 t^rer 
 
 of her feiner, fein of it 
 
 D. 
 
 if)m 
 
 to him 
 
 if)r 
 
 to her it)m 
 
 to a 
 
 A. 
 
 i()n 
 
 him 
 
 fie 
 Plural 
 
 m. f. n. 
 
 her 
 
 e§ 
 
 it 
 
 / 
 
 N. fie they 
 
 G. i^rer of them 
 
 D. i^nen , to them 
 
 A. fie them 
 
 Si(^, the special reflexive of the third person (see 155.3), is 
 also a member of this class, a personal pronoun. 
 
 152. 1. 5[Rein, bein, jein are older forms of the gen. singular, 
 now antiquated, but still met with in certain phrases ; i()r, for 
 
62 PEONOXTNS. [152- 
 
 t^rer, does not occur ^, unferer, for unfer, and curcr, for euer, are 
 not unknown, but rare. 
 
 Examples are : il)r Snftnimente f^ottet mein ye instruments mock 
 me, n)a§ bebarf man fein what do they require of him? ntd)t au^ 
 SSerac^tutiQ euer rmt out of contempt of you. 
 
 2. These genitives in composition with l^alBen, tDegen, and 
 tDiHen add a wholly anomalous et ; and unfer and euer, in like 
 manner, add a t: thus, meinetl^arben, beinettt)eQen, urn feinettDillen, 
 unferttDegen, euert!&alben, etc. 
 
 3. Genitives of the personal pronouns are everywhere of rare 
 occurrence, and only as objects of verbs (219) and adjectives 
 (217). For the genitive Umiting a noun is substituted a posses- 
 sive adjective (158.2). 
 
 il53v Use of the Personal Pronouns in address. 
 
 1. In German, as in English, the pronoun of the second pers. 
 singular, bu thou, is no longer used in address, in the ordinary 
 intercourse of Ufe. 
 
 It is retained (as in English) in the language of worship and 
 of poetry : and further, in that of familiarity— the familiarity of 
 intimacy, between equals, as between husband and wife, near 
 relations, or particular friends, also among children; — the 
 familiarity toward inferior age and - otation, as on the part of 
 any one toward young children, or on the part of teachers or 
 employers toward youthful pupils or .A^^vesitsf; — and even, 
 sometimes, the familiarity of insult or comtempt. 
 
 2. The pronoun of the second pers. plural — il)r ye etc. — was 
 at one time generally current in Germany for the singular (like 
 our you), and is still met with in poetry or narrative: but 
 modern use authorizes it only in addressing more than one of 
 such persons as may, singly, be addressed with bu. 
 
 3. The singular pronouns of the third person — er he, fie she, 
 etc. — were also once used in customary address, but soon sank 
 to the condition of address by an acknowledged "superior to an 
 Inferior — as by a monarch to a subject, a master to a servant, 
 and the like — with which value they are still retained, but are 
 going out of vogue. * 
 
 Employed in this way, er and fie and their cases are usually 
 and properly written with a capital. 
 
 4 At present, the pronoun of the third pers. plural 
 ^[ie they — and its possessive, xijx their, are alone 
 
154] PBONOUNS m ADDRESS. 63 
 
 allowed, in the sense of you, your, in common life, 
 in addressing either one person or more than one. 
 When thus used, they are, for distinction, written with 
 capital letters, @te, S^nen, Sljr, etc. (but the reflexive 
 fti^ is not so written). 
 
 Thus, id) banfe Sl^nen fiir S^re ©efalliflfeit, bag ©ie fi(^ bie 
 93Zuf)e QCficben l^aben I thank you for your kindness, in that you 
 have given yourself the trouble. 
 
 The verb with (gie is always in the plural, whether one person 
 or more be intended. But a following adjective is either 
 singular or plural, according to the sense : thus, ©ie ungliicf= 
 Ii(f)er you unhappy man! but ©ie unglucfUd)en you unhappy ones! 
 
 The use of @ie in address is quite modem, not having become 
 generally established till about the middle of the last century. 
 
 5. Some authorities write all the pronouns of address with 
 a capital, even ^u, ^i(^, (Ju(f), etc. ; but this is not to be ap- 
 proved, except in such documents as letters, where the words 
 are to reach the person addressed through the eye. 
 
 \154} Peculiarities in the use of Pronouns of the third person. 
 
 1. As a general rule, the pronoun of the third person, 
 in the singular, takes the gender of the noun to which 
 it relates. 
 
 Thus, when speaking of a hat (ber Qvi\), we use er and i'^n ; of 
 a pen (bie Seber), fie; of bread {)ia^ 33rob), e§. 
 
 Excepted from this rule are such words as SBeib woman, which 
 are neuter, thou^ designating female persons ; also diminu- 
 tives (neuter) of personal appellations, such as 5!Jidbrf)en girl, 
 f^rdulein young lady, ^ndblein little hoy : a pronoun referring to 
 one of these often follows the natural gender, instead of the 
 grammatical. I^inb child is represented by e§ it, as with us. 
 
 2. But these pronouns are seldom used in the genitive or 
 dative for things without life. For the genitive is substituted 
 the genitive of a demonstrative, ber or berfelBe ; for the dative, 
 the dative of the same : or, if governed by a preposition, a 
 combination of that preposition with the adverb 'tio, (or bar) 
 there. 
 
 .Thus, bamit therewith, bat)on thereof, barin therein, barnad^ 
 thereafter, and so on, are used instead of mit i^m or i!^r with it, 
 etc. ^ar is put instead of ba before a vowel or n. 
 
64 PBONOUNS. [154r- 
 
 Similar substitutions of the demonstratives are often made 
 also in other cases where we employ the personal pronoims : 
 see below, 171. 
 
 3. The neuter accusative c§ is, in like manner, almost never 
 allowed after a preposition, but is replaced by ba before the 
 preposition : thus, bafiir, barum, for fiir e§ for it, urn e§ about it. 
 
 4. The neuter e§ has certain special uses. 
 
 a. It is, as in EngUsh, the indefinite and impersonal subject 
 of a verb : thus, e§ regnet it rains, e§ tft fein 33ruber it is his brother, 
 e§ freut m\^, ©ie gu f el^en it rejoices me to see you. 
 
 b. In this use, it often answers to our there before a verb : as, 
 e§ ttjar ein ^ern barin there was a kernel in it, e§ mirb Sf^iemanb 
 tommcn there will no one come. 
 
 c. Yet more often, it serves the purpose of a mere grammat- 
 ical device for shifting the true subject to a position after the 
 verb, and is itself untranslatable : as, e§ fperren bie 9flie|en ben 
 ctnfamen SBeg the giants bar the lonely way, e§ fur(i)te bie (^btter 
 ^a§ 5Jlenf(5^en0ef(!^Ie(5^t let the human race fear the gods. 
 
 d. In all these uses, the verb agrees in number with the fol- 
 lowing noun, the logical subject or the predicate : thus, e§ tDaren 
 bie alIerfd)onften it was ("or, they were) the very finest ones. 
 
 e. (J§ also stands as indefinite object ; also as predicate, 
 representing another word or phrase already used, and of 
 which the repetition is avoided (to be rendered, then, by so, 
 be so, do so, or the like) : thus, \^ felber bin e § ni(i)t me^r 
 I myself am so [what I was] no longer, al§ i(^ e § no(^ fonnte 
 when I was still able to do so. 
 
 /. Instead of it is I, and the hke, the German reverses the ex- 
 pression, and says \^ bin e§ I am it, ©ie njoren e§ you were it 
 (i. e., it was you), etc. 
 
 g. (^§, in all situations, is liable to be abbreviated to ^§ : the 
 apostrophe should in such case always be written, but is some- 
 times omitted. 
 
 166.) Beflexive use of the Personal Pronouns. 
 
 XTa. reflexive pronoun is one which represents the same per- 
 son or thing as the subject of a sentence, but in the relation of 
 object — namely, as object, direct or indirect, of the verb in the 
 sentence ; or (less properly) in a prepositional adjunct to that 
 verb. 
 
155] PEBSONAL PEONOUNS. 66 
 
 It is usually to be rendered by a personal pronoun with the 
 word self added: thus, id) tr)af(^e m\^ I wash myself, \^ f(^mei(^Ic 
 ttitr I flatter myself \^ fc^one tnetner (or nttc^) I spare myself i^ 
 fto^e fie t)on mir I thrust them from myself (or, from me). 
 
 \2^ In the first and second persons, singular and 
 plural, the reflexive pronoun is the same with the per- 
 sonal in every case, the latter being used in a reflexive 
 sense, without any adjunct corresponding to our self 
 (but compare 5, below). 
 
 The same is the case with the genitive of the third person — 
 as, er fd)ont feiner he spares himself— hut 
 
 ir3.)ln the third person, there is a special reflexive 
 prbnoun, ftc^, which must always be used instead of the 
 dative or accusative of a personal pronoun, after either 
 verb or preposition, when the subject of the sentence 
 is referred to. It has the value of both accusative and 
 dative, of either number, and of any gender. 
 
 Thus, er, fie, e§ tDcifd^t fi(^, fd)mei(^elt jic^ he, she, or it washes or 
 flatters himself, herself, or itself, fie n)afd)en fic^, fc^meic^eln \i^ they 
 wash themselves, or flatter themselves, ba§ ift an unb fiir fid) gut 
 thut is good in and by itself. 
 
 4. In German, as in French (there is no corresponding usage 
 in English), the reflexive pronoun in the plural is not seldom 
 employed in what is called a "reciprocal" sense, answering to 
 our one another. 
 
 Thus, tt)ir 1;)aikn un§ nte fe^en foUen we ought never to have 
 seen one another, \\)i "^affet euc^ %ie hate each other, fie (©ie) 
 geben ft c^ ba§ 3eid)en they (you) give one another the signal. 
 
 Instead of the reciprocal reflexive (or, rarely and redundantly, 
 along with it), the word einanber one another is often employed. 
 
 Only the connection and the requirement of the sense can 
 show in any case whether the pronoun has its directly or its 
 reciprocally reflexive value. 
 
 5. ©elbft (or felBer) self may be added to any reflexive pro- 
 noun, for greater emphasis ; or, in the plural, to exclude the 
 reciprocal sense. 
 
 It may also be added for emphasis to any pronoun, or noun, 
 answering to our myself, thyself, itself, etc. 
 
66 PEONOUNS. ' [156- 
 
 156. The dative of a personal pronoun is sometimes intro- 
 duced into a clause expletively, for liveliness of expression : as, 
 Ia| mtr ^min ben %lkn let the old man in here {for me): 
 compare 222. III. c. 
 
 [Exercise 10. Personal Pronouns.] 
 POSSESSIYE PKONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. 
 
 157. The personal pronouns are always substantive ; 
 their corresponding adjectives are the possessives : 
 namely 
 
 mem, my 
 
 unjer, our 
 
 bein, thy 
 
 euer, your 
 
 fein, his, its 
 
 xtjX, their 
 
 t^r, her 
 
 (3i)r, your) 
 
 The possessives of the masc. and neut. singular are the same, 
 {ein. The possessive of the fern, singular and that of the plural 
 of all genders also agree in form ; and, as the latter (see 153.4:) 
 is used in the sense of a second person, \tjx has three meanings, 
 her, tlieir, and your (the last of which is distinguished to the 
 eye by the capital initial). 
 
 158. 1. It will be noticed that the possessives correspond 
 closely in form with the genitives of the personal pronouns, 
 being, in fact, the same words in a different condition. 
 
 2. The ofQce, also, of the possessive, agrees with that of the 
 genitive of a noun. The genitive of the pronoun is very seldom 
 used to limit a noun, but for it is substituted a possessive in the 
 form of an adjective, qualifying the noun (216.3). 
 
 Thus, bie ^Irme be§ 9Jlanne§ the man's arms; but feine ^rme his 
 arms, not bie ^rme feiner the arms of him. Karely, such cases 
 occur as 33el^errfrf)un() eurer felbft control of yourself (a verbal 
 noun imitating the construction of the verb). 
 
 (^§^i As regards their declension, possessives are 
 treated in the same manner as other adjectives. 
 
 1. They are used predicatively in their simple or thematic 
 form. 
 
 Thus, ber 33e(i)er tft bein the goblet is thine, bie ^raut jei mein he 
 the bride mine. 
 
169] 
 
 POSSESSIVES. 
 
 67 
 
 2. When used attributively (their regular and or- 
 dinary office), they are declined, not like ber tlm, but like 
 cin a (63). Thus, mcin my is declined— 
 
 VI 
 
 N. mein 
 
 Gr. meineg 
 
 D. meinem 
 
 A. tneinen 
 
 and unfer our — 
 
 N. unfer 
 
 G. unfereg 
 
 D. imferem 
 
 A. unferen 
 
 Singular, 
 t. 
 meine 
 meiner 
 tneiner 
 meine 
 
 unfere 
 unferer 
 nnferer 
 nnfere 
 
 n. 
 
 mein 
 meine§ 
 meinem 
 mein 
 
 nnfer 
 nnferel 
 unferem 
 unfer 
 
 Plural. 
 
 m. f. n. 
 
 meine 
 meiner 
 meinen 
 meine 
 
 unfere 
 unferer 
 unferen 
 unfere 
 
 Unfer and eucr follow the same rules as other adjectives (120.3) 
 respecting the contraction of their endings : thus, we may have 
 unfere or unfre, unfere^, unfer^, or unfre§, and so on. 
 
 3. The possessive is also often used substantively, or with 
 the value of a pronoun (not qualifying a noun expressed, but 
 representing one understood) ; in that case, it is declined in full 
 like an adjective of the first or strong declension: thus, 
 nominatives meiner, meine, meine§, meine. 
 
 For example, ba§ ift nid)t bein ^ed)er; c§ ift mein er that is not 
 thy goblet; it is mineji. e., my goblet); fein Q'xxn, Vok meineS his 
 brain, like my own. 
 
 4. In the same substantive use, the possessive may be 
 preceded by the definite article ; and it is then declined hke any 
 other adjective in like circumstances, or by the second or 
 weak adjective declension (119.2) : thus, nom. ber, bie, ba§ meine, 
 gen. bc^, ber, bc§ meinen, etc. 
 
 For example, fein 9lid)tcrfhil)l ift nid)t ber meine his judgment- 
 seat is not mine ; loft mir bag ^^ers, baji id) b a§ eure riiftre set my 
 heart free, that I may touch yours. 
 
 5. Again, for the simple possessive, in its absolute or pro- 
 nominal use after the definite article, is substituted a derivative 
 in ig: thus, mcinig, unfrifi, etc. These are never used except 
 with the article, and therefore always follow the second ad- 
 jective declension. The nominatives of the whole series are — 
 
68 
 
 PBONOTJNS. 
 
 [159 
 
 m. 
 
 bcr meinige 
 ber beinige 
 ber feinige 
 ber i^rige 
 ber unfrige 
 ber eurige 
 ber i'^rige 
 [ber Sl^rige 
 
 Singular, 
 f. 
 
 bic meinige 
 bie beinige 
 bie feinige 
 bie i^rige 
 bie unfrige 
 bie eurige 
 bie il^rige 
 bie 3t)rige 
 
 bag meinige 
 bag beinige 
 ha^ feinige 
 bag i^rigc 
 ha^ unfrige 
 bag eurige 
 bag il^rige 
 bag 3^rigc 
 
 Plural. 
 
 m. f. n. 
 
 bie meinigen, mine 
 bie beinigen, thine 
 bie feinigen, his, its 
 bie i^rigen, hers 
 bie unfrigen, ours 
 bie eurigen, yours 
 bie il)rigen, theirs 
 bie S^rigen, yours] 
 
 Neither the derivatives in tg, nor the simple possessives pre- 
 ceded by the article, are ever used attributively, quaUfyiQg a 
 noun expressed. 
 
 SJJein etc., used predicatively, assert o^vIlerslup pure and simple : thus, 
 ber §ut ift mein the hat belongs to me, and to no one else. Tlnntx, ber 
 meine, and ber meinige are nearly equivalent expressions, adding to the 
 idea of property that of particularizing or identifying the thing owned : 
 thus, er ift meiner etc. it is the one that belongs to me. S)er meinige etc. 
 are most common in colloquial use ; ber meine etc. are preferred in 
 higher styles. 
 
 160. The absolute possessives preceded by the article (ber 
 meine, ber meinige, etc.) are sometimes used substantively (like 
 other adjectives : see 129) : the neuter singular denoting 'what 
 belongs to one' (his property, his duty, or the hke) ; the plural 
 * those who belong to one' (as his family, his friends). 
 
 Thus, unfere $f(id)t ift, auf ba§ Unfrige gu feften, unb fiir bie 
 Hnfrigen gu forgen our duty is to attend to our business and take 
 care of our dependents, er ermunterte bie ©einen he encouraged his 
 men, gemorbet t)on ben ©einen auf bem ©emen murdered by his 
 own people on his own ground. 
 
 161. The German, like the French, avoids the use of the pos- 
 sessives in many situations where we employ them : either put- 
 ting in their stead the definite article only, where the possessor 
 is sufficiently pointed out by the connection ; or, along with the 
 article (or even without it), using the dative of the correspond- 
 ing personal pronoun, where it can be construed as indirect 
 object of the verb in the sentence (see 222. III. b). 
 
 Thus, er fc^iittelte ben ^opf he shook his head, ber grofl bringt 
 mir burd) afle ^noc^en the frost penetrates through all my bones, 
 er pel i^r um ben §al§ he fell upon her neck, e§ !am mir in 
 (Sinn it came into my mind. 
 
164] DEMONSTKATIVES. 69 
 
 162. ®cro and ^ftto are old-style expressions, used in cere- 
 monious address, before titles, etc. : thus, ^^^ro 3}laieftdt your 
 majesty, ^ero 33efe^le your commands. 
 
 Before titles, jeine and feiner are often abbreviated to ©e. and 
 ©r. ; and for cucr, cure, is written ^tt). 
 
 DEMONSTEATIYES. 
 
 163. The proper demonstratives are bcr this, that, 
 bie^3 this, that, and jcn yon, that. Their original value is 
 that of adjectives ; but they are now with equal free- 
 dom used adjectively, qualifying a noun expressed, and 
 absolutely, or as pronouns, standing for a noun under- 
 stood. 
 
 3)er is historically the same word with our the, that, and they; bieS is 
 our this, these, those ; jen is our yon, and may by this correspondence be 
 conveniently distinguished from jeb (jeber) every (see 190), with which 
 it is apt to be confounded by learners. 
 
 164. 1. ^er when used adjectively is declined like 
 the article \)tx (63) : being, in fact, the same word, and 
 distinguished from it only by greater distinctness, of 
 meaning and of utterance. 
 
 Thus, ber Drt ift iibel regiert that place is ill governed, ber einc 
 6ot bie, bie anberen anbere, ©aben one has these gifts, others have 
 other. 
 
 2. ^cr when used absolutely, or as pronoun, has pecu- 
 liar forms in a part of its cases — namely, the genitives 
 singular and plural and the dative plural — where it 
 adds cii to the adjective forms, at the same time doub- 
 ling their final §> : thus, 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 m. t. n. m. f. n. 
 
 N. ber bie ha§> bie 
 
 G. beffen, (be^) beren, (ber) beffen, (be^) beren, (berer) 
 
 D. bem ber bent benen 
 
 A. ben bie ha^ bie 
 
 The genitives singular be^, ber, be^ are also allowed, but very 
 rarely used, except the neuter in certain compounds, as be^^ 
 we^en, beS^db (also written be^megen^ be^l^alb). 
 
70 PRONOUNS. [164- 
 
 In the genitive plural, berer is used instead of beren when a 
 limiting addition, usually a relative clause, follows : thus, berer, 
 bie mi^ lieben of those who hve me, berer t)Dn $ari§ of them of 
 Paris (^people from Paris). 
 
 165. ^te^ and jen are declined as adjectives of the 
 
 first declension, or like the definite article (only with c^ 
 
 instead of a^ in the nom and ace. neuter) ; and without 
 
 any difference, whether they are used as adjectives or 
 
 as pronouns. Thus, 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 m. f . n. m. f. n. 
 
 N. biefer biefe biefe§, (bieS) biefe 
 
 G. biefeg biefer biefe^ biefer 
 
 D. biefem biefer -biefem biefen 
 
 A. biefen biefe biefe^, (bie§) biefe 
 
 The nom. and ace. neuter biefeS is often abbreviated to bie§ 
 (or bie^), especially when the word is used as a pronoun. 
 « 
 
 166. Use of the Demonstratives. 
 
 1. liefer is a general demonstrative, answering to both this 
 and that. If, however, the idea of remoteness in place or time 
 is at all emphasized, either by the antithesis of this and that, or 
 in any other way, that must be represented by jener. Often, biefer 
 and jener are to be rendered the latter (biefer, the one last men- 
 tioned, the nearer) and the f<yrmer (iener, the one mentioned 
 earlier, the remoter). ^ie§ and ba§ are also sometimes con- 
 trasted as this and that. 
 
 2. ^er has a great range of meaning, from the faint indefinite- 
 ness of the article to the determinateness of biefer — depending 
 mainly on the emphasis with which it is uttered. Special uses 
 worthy of note are as follows : 
 
 a. ®er is the demonstrative employed in such phrases as 
 unfere $ferbe unb bie ber Sremben our horses and those of the 
 strangers, ber mil ben ^ellen ^ugen he (the one) with the sharp 
 eyes. 
 
 Karely, berienige (168) is used in the same sense. 
 
 h. It takes the place of the pronoun of the third person used 
 emphatically : thus, b i e mu^ rec^t bumm f ein she (this person) 
 must he right stupid, ber fiittrc ^rdl)'u mciy he (that one) be food 
 for CTQW^, 
 
169] DEMONSTBATIVES. fl 
 
 3. The neuters singular, bQ§, bie§ (or bie|, biefe^), and (rarely) 
 iene§, are used, like e§ (154.4), as indefinite subjects of verbs ; 
 and, if a plural predicate noun follows the verb, the latter agrees 
 with the noun: thus, ba§ ift mcin 3Sater that is my father, ba§ 
 finb bie Sftcisunflen those are the charms, bie§ ift ber ^ampf ber 
 ^^ferbe unb f^if(i)e this is the combat of horses and fishes. ®q§ is 
 sometimes used in a half-humorous, half-contemptuous way of 
 persons, singular or plural: e. g. \)a^ fc^lenbert tt)ie bie ©d^neden 
 tliose people loiter like snails. 
 
 4. Compounds of the adverbs ba and ^ier with prepositions 
 are very frequently used instead of cases of the demonstratives 
 with governing prepositions : thus, ):)ami therewith, barin^/iemn, 
 for mit bem, in bem ; ftiermit herewith, pterin herein, for mit biefem, 
 in biefem. 
 
 5. For the demonstratives as substitutes for the personal 
 pronoun, see below, 171. 
 
 DETEEMINATIYES. 
 
 167. Certain pronominal words, connected with the demon- 
 stratives in derivation or meaning, or in both, are ordinarily 
 called determinatives. 
 
 168. ^erienige. — 1. This is made up of the definite article ber, 
 and ienig, a derivative from |en yon, that (like meinig from mein, 
 etc., 159.5). The latter part never occurs without the former, 
 and they are written together as a single word, although each 
 is separately declined, the one as the article the other as an 
 adjective of the second declension. Thus, 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 m. f. n. m. f. n. 
 
 N. 
 
 berjenige 
 
 bicienige 
 
 bngjeuige 
 
 bieienigen 
 
 G. 
 
 begienigen 
 
 berienigen 
 
 be^jenigen 
 
 berienigen 
 
 D. 
 
 bemjenigen 
 
 berjenigen 
 
 bemieuigen 
 
 benienigen 
 
 A. 
 
 benienigen 
 
 bteienige 
 
 ba^ienige 
 
 bieienigen 
 
 2. ^erienige is used both as adjective and as pronoun, more 
 often the latter. Its specific ofiice is that of antecedent to a 
 following relative ; in this ofQce it is interchangeable with the 
 demonstrative ber, as the latter 's more prosaic and colloquial 
 substitute : thus, berienige, or berjenige 5J?ann, mclc^er tt)eife ift, ift 
 gufrieben he (that man) who is wise is contented. 
 
 169. ^erfelbe. — 1. This word is composed of the definite ar- 
 ticle and the adjective fclb. Both its parts are declined, after 
 the manner of berjenige (168.1). 
 
72 PRONOUNS. [169- 
 
 2. ^erfelBc is both adjective and pronoun, and means literally 
 the same. But it also interchanges with the demonstratives as 
 substitute for the pronoun of the third person (see 171). 
 
 3. For berjelbe are sometimes used berfclbige and felbiger, 
 which, however, are antiquated expressions, ^er namlic()e is its 
 equivalent in the full sense of the same. 
 
 ©elber and felbft (155.5) are indeclinable forms of the same 
 adjective jelb, always following, appositively, the noun or pro- 
 noun which they qualify, often at a distance from it. Selbft is 
 also used adverbially, meaning even, and as substantive in the 
 phrase t)on felbft of its own accord. 
 
 ©elb is also, rarely, declined after biefer as after bet. The 
 genitive of berfelbe is written either be^felben or befjelben: the 
 former is theoretically preferable (3.1), the latter more usual 
 (likewise baSfelbe, neuter). 
 
 170. ©dIc^. — 1. ©oI(?^ is the English such, and is used, both 
 as adjective and as pronoun, in nearly the same manner. It is 
 declined like biefer (165) ; or, when preceded by ein, as any other 
 adjective would be in the same situation (124). 
 
 2. Such a is either fo^ ein, or ein foI(f)er, the adjective being 
 undeclined when placed before the article. For as, when used 
 after such with the value of a relative pronoun, the German uses 
 the relative: thus, foI(i)en, bie i^n fannten to such as knew him. 
 
 171. The Demxmstratives and Determinatives as Substitutes. 
 
 The pronouns of these classes are often used where we put 
 the third personal pronoim or its possessive : 
 
 1. For the emphatic pronoun of the third person (166.26), and 
 the antecedent of a relative clause (168.2), as already explained. 
 
 2. Where the demonstrative meaning helps avoid an ambi- 
 guity: as, er ging mit meinem ^Setter unb beffen ©o{)n, or bem 
 ©ol^ne b e § f e I b e n he went with my cousin and his (the latter' s) 
 son;— or an awkward- repetition : as, er fjai eine ©c^mefter: fennen 
 ©ie btejclbe (for fennen ©ie fie)? he has a sister ; do you know 
 her? 
 
 3. In the obUque cases, where things and not persons are in- 
 tended : as, [^ bin beffen benotI)iGt [benotigt] I am in need of it 
 (fetner would mean of him, rather). In like manner, with prepo- 
 sitions, instead of the adverbial compounds with ba (154.2,3) : 
 as, id) "i^aU einen (Garten, unb Qtijt oft in bemfelben (or barin) 
 fi)a3ieren I have a garden, and often go to walk in it. 
 
174] INTEBKOGATIYES. 73 
 
 4. The substitution, especially of berfelbe, is often made, in 
 popular use, in cases where no reason can be assigned, and 
 where the personal pronoun would be preferable. 
 
 [Exercise 11. Possessive and Demonstrative Pronouns.] 
 
 INTEEEOGATIVES. 
 
 172. The interrogatives are U)er who, tt)a^ what, and 
 it)ctd)er what, tvhich. 3Ser and lt)a§ are pronouns only; 
 n)eld)er is primarily adjective, but also frequently used 
 as pronoun. 
 
 173. 1. SBer and tva^ are peculiar in having no plural ; 
 also, in conveying no idea of gender, but being distin- 
 guished precisely as our who and what, the one denoting 
 persons, the other things. They are declined as follows : 
 
 N. tDer who tva§ what 
 
 G. meffen, (tre^) whose meffen, (tDe§) of what 
 
 D. tuem to whom 
 
 A. tt)en whom tr»a§ what 
 
 2. SSefe as genitive of mx is antiquated and out of use, and as 
 genitive of tt)a§ is hardly met with except in compounds like 
 TDe§tt)egen, tDcS^alb (or me^tregen, mefe^alB). 2Ba§ has regularly 
 no dative ; for both its dative and accusative as governed by 
 prepositions are substituted compounds of those prepositions 
 with the adverb tt)0 or iDor where: thus, tDomit wherewith, with 
 what, tDorin wherein, in what, trofiir wherefore, for what (hke 
 bamit, ftiermit, etc. : see 154.2, 166.4). 
 
 3. Popular colloquial usage sometimes puts tt)a§, both as ac- 
 cusative and as dative, after prepositions : thus, tnit toa^ with 
 what, |iir tDa§ for what, and instances of such use are occasion- 
 ally met with in hterature. 
 
 4. 2Be§ is, quite rarely, used adjectively : as, tt) c ^ 8inne§ bcr 
 §crr fei of what disposition the master is. 
 
 174. 1. SSeld^ is declined like btc§ (165), or as an 
 adjective of the first declension. As an adjective, quali- 
 fying a noun expressed, it means either what or which; 
 used absolutely, it is our which. 
 
74 PRONOUNS. [174r- 
 
 2. Before etn or an adjective, especially when used in an ex- 
 clamatory way, tt)el(^ generally loses its declensional endings, 
 and appears in its undeclined form. 
 
 Thus, tt)el(^e§ 33u(^ what (or which) hook, ml^t§ t)Dn biefen 
 ^iic^ern which of these books:— votl^ tiefe§ 6ummen, trelc^ ein l^eller 
 ^on what deep mmimiur, what a clear tone ! tDeld) f (^Ie(i)te Sitten 
 what bad manners ! 
 
 175. 2Ba§ with the preposition fiir fm- after it (sometimes 
 separated from it by intervening words), is used in the sense of 
 what sort of, what kind of. It is then invariable, and the words 
 to which it is prefixed have the same construction as if they 
 stood by themselves. 
 
 Thus, n)a§ Iiaft bu fiir einen 5tf(^ Gefangen what sort of a fish 
 have you caught ? t)on tt)a§ fiir 3^ii9^TT, unb mit n)a§ fiir eitiem 2Ber!- 
 geuQe, mac^en ©ie ba§ of what kind of stuffs, and with what sort of 
 an instrument, do you make that ? 
 
 176. 1. All the interrogatives are used also as rel- 
 atives (see 177). 
 
 2. 2Ba§ stands often for ettt)a§ something; tt)er, in the sense of 
 some one, is quite rare ; tt)el(f), as pronoun only, is famiUarly, 
 but not elegantly, used to signify some. 
 
 Thus, nD(^ raa^ mertft [mert] still worth something, \^ mo(^te Xva^ 
 ^jrofitiren I would fain profit somewhat, meinte mer aii§ ber ^efell= 
 fdjaft remarked some one in the company, ^aBen <Bk ^flaumen ? 
 geben Sie mtr tDclc^e have you plums? give me some. 
 
 3. 2Ba§ is used not rarely for um n)a§, or tDorum why? thus, 
 tt)a§ Birgft bu bein (^efid)t why hidest tJwu thy face? and sometimes 
 for it)te how: thus, \va^ mein arme§ Q^x^ gittert how my poor heart 
 trembles! 
 
 RELATIVES. 
 
 177. The demonstrative pronoun (not adjective : 
 164.1) ber, and the interrogatives Wqx, Wa^S, IDQ^ fiir, and 
 treldjer (both adjective and pronoun), are used also as 
 relatives ; they are declined, as such, in the same man- 
 ner as when having their more original and proper 
 value. 
 
 178. ®er and tt)eld)er are the ordinary simple relatives follow- 
 ing an antecedent, In the nominative and accusative, they are 
 
179] RELATIVES. 75 
 
 used interchangeably, according to the arbitrary choice of 
 spealier or writer. In the dative (except after prepositions) the 
 cases of ber are rather preferred to those of tt)el(^er; and, in the 
 genitive (as pronouns), only befjen and beren are ever met with. 
 
 179. 1. 2Ber and ma^, Voa§ fiir, and tDeId)cr used adjectively 
 (also absolutely, when meaning which), like who and what in 
 English, are properly compomid relatives, or antecedent and 
 relative combined. 
 
 Thus, met Bel 9lad)t t)orBeifu5r,. 'jatj bie Slammen he who (who- 
 ever) went by at night saw the flames, tt)a§ im DJ^enfc^en nic^t tft, 
 fommt au(^ nic^t aua i^m what (wliatever) is not in a man does not 
 come out of him, id) tt)ifl Deraeffen, tDcr id^ Bin, unb \va§ id) litt 
 I will forget who I am and what I have suffered, mit iiix iranbelt, 
 tt) c m fie bie SBei^e liel^ with her walks he on whom she has bestowed 
 consecration, man fnd)te gn t)ergeffen, n)eld)e ^otl) [5^ot] uBeraH 
 5errf(^te one sought to forget what distress was everywhere prevail- 
 ing, rt)er mei^, m a§ f iir eine Sift ba^tnter ftedt who knows what sort 
 of a trick is hidden in that ? 
 
 2. But the demonstrative is repeated, for distinctness, after 
 the compound relative, much more often in German than in 
 English : 
 
 Thus, tt)er nid)t t^ormart^ ge'^t, ber fommt guriide who (whoever) 
 does not advance, he (that one) falls back, to a § bu nie Derlierft, ha^ 
 mu^t bu Beiceinen what you never lose, that you have to bewail, 
 tt)a§ id) fiir §errUd)feit Gefd)ant, ba§ ftel)t nid)t in ber SBorte ^ad)t 
 ivliat kind of magniftcerice I saw, that is not in the power of words 
 to tell 
 
 3. As occasional irregular variations of the mode of relative 
 expression may be noticed the use of the personal pronoun in- 
 stead of ber as antecedent after mer, of ber instead of mer as 
 preceding relative, of tDer instead of U)eld)er after ber, etc. 
 
 4. The examples show that mer and tt)a§ are sometimes to be 
 translated by whoever and whatever. To give them more 
 distinctly this indefinite sense, they may be followed (either im- 
 mediately, or, more often, after one or more interposed words) 
 by auc^ even, nur only, or immer ever, especially the first: thus, 
 iDaS er and) tftue whatever he may do. ^lud) is often added 
 with the same sense to relative adverbs : thus, mo er and) fei 
 wherever he may be, \mt fie fid) and) baQegcn ftreBcn however they 
 may remt. 
 
76 PRONOUNS. [179- 
 
 5. After a neuter pronoun, personal, demonstrative, or in- 
 definite (as c§, ba§, alle^, ettt)a§, md)t§, manrf)e§, Did, tDcnig), also 
 after an adjective (especially a superlative) taken in a general 
 sense and not referring to some definite object, the compound 
 relative tDa§ is used, instead of the simple relative ba§ or tt)el(^e§. 
 
 Thus, iiber ba§, h)a§ er jelbft erja^Ite about that which he was 
 himself relating, qKc^ U) a § t)on bir mir fom all that came to me 
 from thee, ni(^t§ tt)a§ meine 5!JieinunQ ftorte nothing that sliould 
 shake my opinion, ba§ erfte tuaS fie i)orten the first thing which 
 they heard. 
 
 That is to say, for an adjective clause qualifying the ante- 
 cedent is substituted a substantive clause in apposition with it 
 (436.3c.). 
 
 6. Like ba§ (166.3), tt)a§ is sometimes used collectively of 
 persons in the singular or plural : thus, \x\i\) iibt jt(f) tt)a§ ein 
 9}^eifter tDerben tuiU whoever would he a master begins to practice 
 early. 
 
 ^ 180. For the dative or accusative case of a relative (either 
 simple or compound) governed by a preposition is usually sub- 
 stituted, when things and not persons are referred to, the com- 
 pound of the preposition with an adverb (as in the case of the 
 demonstratives and interrogatives : see 166.4, 173.2). But the 
 compounds of ha (bat)on, barau^, etc.) are only rarely used rela- 
 tively, those of tt)o (n)Dt)on, tDorau§, etc.) being preferred. 
 
 181. A verb agreeing with a relative is put in the third per- 
 son even when the antecedent of the relative was a pronoun of 
 the first or second person (or a vocative), unless that pronoun 
 be repeated after the relative. 
 
 Thus, um mid), bcr f id) rettet su bir about me, who am taking 
 refuge with tlwe, U\i bu e§, ber fo gittert is it tlwu who art trem- 
 bling thus?— hut um mi(!), bcr td^ mi(f) rette ; bift bu e§, ber bu fo 
 3itterft ;— gliirffeliger ^lepnber, ber bu ^ialknm^,i\dt)Z]i fortunate 
 Alexander, that didst never see Italy ! 
 
 182. 1. In antiquated or archaic style, f o is used as indeclin- 
 able relative, representing the nominative and accusative cases 
 of ber and votl^tx : thus, ber DJlanu, f o e§ f agte the man who said it. 
 
 2. In a like manner, ba is appended to a relative to express 
 indefiniteness, itself being wholly untranslatable : thus, trer ba 
 atl^tnet fatmet] im rofiQcn Sid)t whoever Weathes in the rosy light. 
 
188] INDEFINITES. 77 
 
 183. The relative, often omitted in English, must always be 
 £xpressed in German: thus, bic greunbe, b ie id) IteBe the friends 
 I love. 
 
 [Exercise 12. Interrogative and Eelative Pronouns.] 
 
 INDEriNITE PKONOUNS AND INDEFINITE NUMERALS. 
 
 184. A class of words needs some attention under the above 
 head, in connection with the pronouns, as being more or less 
 related with the latter, and differing from ordinary nouns and 
 adjectives, in derivation or in office, or both. 
 
 185. 30^ an one.—^an (originally the same word with 3!Jlann 
 man) is employed as wholly indefinite subject to a verb, like the 
 French on, our one, they, people, we, taken indefinitely. Thus, 
 man f acit cme says, they say, it is said. If any other case than a 
 nominative is required, einer (195) is used instead. 
 
 186. Semanb some one, 5^iemattb no one.— These are com- 
 pounds of DJlann man with the adverbs je ever and nic never. 
 They ought, therefore, to be declinable only as substantives of 
 the first declension ; and it is proper always so to treat them, 
 adding § in the genitive, and leaving the other cases like the 
 nominative. But (especially where the phrase would otherwise 
 be ambiguous or indistinct) they are allowed to take the endings 
 em or en in the dative, and en in the accusative. 
 
 3^iemanb no one must be used instead of nt(^t Semanb not any 
 one, except in an interrogative sentence. 
 
 187. Sei^si^ntann every one. — This word is made up of Jeber 
 every (190) and 5}^ann man, but is used without distinction of 
 gender. Its first part is undeclined, and it is varied only by 
 adding § to form the genitive. 
 
 188. (Jttt)a§ something, nid)t§ nothing. — These words are in- 
 variable in form, and always have a substantive value. A fol- 
 lowing limiting adjective is treated as a substantive in apposi- 
 tion with them (129.5) : and the same construction is usual with 
 a noun after etlDaS : thus, etir)a» ©elb some money. Both are 
 often used adverbially. 
 
 For n)a§ in the sense of ettDa^, see 176.2. 
 
 5^i(^t§ is usually and regularly used instead of nlc^t etn)a§ not 
 anything, except when the sentence is interrogative as well as 
 negative. 
 
78 PRONOUNS. [189- 
 
 189. Sinig, etli(^ some. — These are used chiefly in the plural, 
 and declined like hk§ (165). They are employed both adjec- 
 tively and substantively. 
 
 @tU)eI(^ is a word, now antiquated, having the same meaning : 
 for this, tt)el(f)er is often used colloquially (176.2), as tt)a§ for 
 
 190. 3^^/ icfiUt^, iebmeb each, every.— Only the first of these 
 is in familiar use. All are declined like bte§ ; or, the first two as 
 adjectives of the "mixed" declension (124.2) when preceded by 
 ein, the only limiting word which can stand before them. They 
 are used either adjectively or substantively. 
 
 The original themes are {eber and jebtDcber, and their er has 
 not until modern times been treated as ending of declension 
 only. For Sebermann, see above, 187. 
 
 191. Tlan^ many. — In the singular, mancf) means many a; 
 in the plural, many. It is usually declined like bie§ (165), but, 
 before an adjective, may be left uninflected : thus, mand) bunte 
 ^Inmtn many variegated flowers, mand) giilben ®ett)anb 77iany a 
 golden garment. It is also used substantively. 
 
 192. SSiel much, tuenig little. — 1. After another limiting word, 
 t)lel and toenifi are declined as any other adjectives would be in 
 the same situation — except in ein tt)enit3 a little. If they precede 
 the noun which they qualify (or another adjective qualifying it), 
 they are sometimes declined and sometimes left unvaried — and 
 the former more when the meaning is distributive, the latter 
 more when collective : thus, t)iel 2Bein a great quantity of wine, 
 but Dieler SBein wine of many kinds; t)iel Iei(^t bej^mingte ^dfte 
 anumber of light-winged guests, but j^iele anbere 2^^ier[2^ier=]ge= 
 flalten m^any other animal shapes (individual) — but this distinc- 
 tion is by no means closely observed. Both words are used 
 substantively as well as adjectively, and may govern a partitive 
 genitive : as, uiele ber gufecjanger many of the pedestrians. 
 
 2. 3CReI)r more and tueniger less, comparatives of bid and tDenig, 
 are generally invariable. But nie^r has a plural, me^re, or (irreg- 
 ularly, but much more commonly) mel)rere, meaning several, 
 many. 
 
 193. %U all. — 1. When it directly precedes the noun it quali- 
 fies, aU is fully declined (like bie§, 165) ; but before a pronominal 
 word (adjectively or substantively used) it may remain unvaried 
 (with a tendency toward the same distinction of collective and 
 distributive meaning that appears in Diel : see 192.1). 
 
197] INDEFINITES. 79 
 
 Thus, allcr 2[Betteifer all 2eal;—aUt beine ftoften 2Ber!e all thy lofty 
 works, afle bte %aq,t be§ gefteg all the days of the festival, t)on all 
 bent flange by all the splendor, bei all biefen 35erl)dltnif)en in view 
 of all these circumstances. 
 
 2. In certain phrases, a He is used instead of aH undeclined : 
 thus, Bei alle bent in spite of all that. 
 
 3. The neuter singular alle§ (hke the corresponding case of 
 other pronominal words) is employed in an indefinite way of 
 persons, meaning every one: thus, aEe§ nal^ert ftc^ einanber all 
 draw near to one another. 
 
 4. The plural of aH is sometimes used distributively : as, aEe 
 2So(f)en every week. 
 
 194. ^nber other is a pronominal word, but not distinguished 
 in its uses from an ordinary adjective. 
 
 For nD(^ ein in place of anber, see 198.3c; for anber as ordinal, 
 203.1a. 
 
 195. (Sin one, an, a, fein not one, none, no. — 1. The numeral 
 ein one is also used as indefinite pronoun (see 198.2), and as 
 article (63). 
 
 2. ^ein is the negative of ein, and is everywhere dechned as 
 the latter would be in the same situation. Like D^iemanb (186) 
 and nid)t§ (188), it often requires to be taken apart in translat- 
 ing into ein and nic^t not; e. g. fo fein ^efi^t ja^ id} in meinem 
 Seben such a face I never saw in my life. 
 
 NUMERALS. 
 
 196. Although the numerals do not form in the proper sense 
 a separate part of speech, their peculiarities of form and use are 
 Buch that they require to be treated as a class by themselves. 
 
 197. 1. The fundamental words denoting number, 
 the CA.RDINAL numerals, are as follows : 
 
 1. ein 
 
 11. elf 
 
 21. ein nnb gtrangifi 
 
 2. gmei 
 
 12. amoif 
 
 22. atuei nnb siDangiG 
 
 3. brei 
 
 13. breigel^n 
 
 30. breifjig 
 
 4. t)ier 
 
 14. Dierse'^n 
 
 40. Diergifi 
 
 5. fiinf 
 
 15. fiinfjelin 
 
 50. fiintsig 
 
 6. ]ed)§ 
 
 16. fed)3el)n 
 
 60. ]cdm 
 
 7. jieben 
 
 17. fiebijel)n 
 
 70. fiebaig 
 
 8. a^t 
 
 18. ad)t3eftn 
 
 80. ad)t3ig 
 
 9. neun 
 
 19. neun3el)n 
 
 90. nenngig 
 
 LO. seftn 
 
 20. gtnanaiQ 
 
 100. l)unbert 
 
 1000. 
 
 taujcnb 
 
 1,000,000. DJaUion 
 
80 NUMERALS. [197- 
 
 2. An older form of elf 11, now nearly out of use, is cilf. For 
 fiinfseftn 15, and funfatg 50, the less regularly derived forms 
 funfge^n and funf^ig are also in good and approved use. 6ieben= 
 ge^n 17 and fieBenaifi 70, instead of the contracted fieBje^n and 
 fieBgig, are not infrequent, ©ed^ae^tt 16 and fediaig 60 are ab- 
 breviated, for ease of pronunciation, from |e(^§3eftn and ferfjSgtg, 
 which may likewise be employed. 
 
 3. The odd numbers, between twenty and a hundred, are 
 formed always by prefixing the name of the unit to that of the 
 ten, with unb and interposed : thus, brel unb gti^ansig three and 
 twenty (not gtuanatg^brel twenty-three). With the higher numbers, 
 the odd numbers follow, as in English : thus, l^unbert unb fieben 
 107 ; tauf enb unb bret unb biergig 1043 ; and the unb and may be 
 dropped, especially when more than two numbers are put to- 
 gether : as, ein taufenb ad)t ^unbert neun unb fe(f)gig, or a(f)tael^n 
 l&unbert neun unb fe(i)stg, 1869. 
 
 4. The higher numbers, l^unbert, taufenb, mtHion, are multiplied 
 by prefixed numbers, as in English : thus, fe(^§ ^unbert 600 ; 
 brei unb ac^tgig taufenb 83,000. The German says eine 9}liflion 
 a million, as we do ; but simply l^unbert a hundred, taufenb a 
 thousand: ein ^unbert, ein taufenb, mean one hundred, one 
 thousand. 
 
 198. ^in is the only cardinal number that is fully inflected. 
 
 1. K used adjectively, or qualifying a noun expressed, it is 
 (unless preceded by another qualifying word : see 3) declined 
 when numeral in the same manner as when indefinite article (63). 
 
 Thus, ein SJiann one man or a man, ein ^inb one child or a 
 child. 
 
 2. When used absolutely, or pronominally, standing for a 
 noun understood, it is declined like bte§ (165), or an adjective 
 of the first declension (but eine§ is usually contracted to etn§ in 
 the nom. and ace. neuter). 
 
 Thus, um ein (^\\th, unb bann urn nocf) ein§ Idnger longer by one 
 joint, and then by one more, einer t)on end) one of you, einer ber auf 
 ein ^benteuer auSge^^t one who goes out upon an adventure, t)on \\6) 
 gu iagen, n)a§ etnem lieb ift to drive away from one's self what is 
 dear to one! 
 
 3. When preceded by another limiting word (usually the def- 
 inite article), it is declined as any adjective would be after the 
 same word. 
 
 Thus, ber eine ]pxad^ the one spoke, mtt biefer ein en Strung 
 with this one error, auf f etnem ein en ^eine on his one leg. 
 
200] CARDINALS. 81 
 
 a. ®er etnc is often employed where we should say one 
 simply ; occasionally it forms a plural, bie einen the ones, some. 
 
 b. In numeration, the pronominal neuter, ein§, is used : thus, 
 cin§, gmct, brei one, two, three; einmal ein§ \\t ein§ once one is one. 
 
 c. 5^o(^ ein one mare is employed instead of ein anber another, 
 where simple addition, not difference, is signified : thus, ntmm 
 no^ ein (55olbflii(i take another gold piece (i. e. in addition to the 
 one you have) ; but ntmm ein anbereg take another (i. e. in place 
 of the one you have). 
 
 d. In the compound numbers, ein unb StDanjig 21, etc., ein is 
 invariable : also, usually, in ein unb berfelbe, ein paax, ein mmq, 
 ein l^alb, etc : thus, mit ein tt)enifi SBafjer with a little water, mil 
 ein paax ©(^ritten with a few steps, ein ^x'xtkl Don ein Qalb a third 
 from a half. 
 
 , e. In order to distinguish to the eye ein used as pronoun or 
 'numeral from the same word as article, some write it with a 
 capital, ©in ; others, with the letters spaced, e i n (the ordinary 
 German equivalent of our italics) ; others, with an accent upon 
 the e, ein : others leave the difference of value to be pointed out 
 by the connection. 
 
 /. The neuter ein§ is sometimes used in an indefinite way of 
 persons : thus, unfer ein§ one of tis, nun f ag^ mir ein§, man foil !ein 
 SBunber glauben riow let any one tell me we are not to believe in 
 miracles ! 
 
 199. 3^^^ 2 and brei 3 are generally unvaried, but have 
 gen. and dat. plural forms— gmeier, gweien ; breier, breien— which 
 may be used whei-e the case would not otherwise be indicated. 
 
 a. For gn)ei, the old masculine gtt)een (twain) and feminine 3tt)o 
 are antiquated, but still occasionally met with : thus, ttJaren mit 
 mir 3n)een C^enoffen were with me two comrades, gmo ©djmdben 
 fangen um bie SBette two swallows were singing in emulation. 
 
 b. 33eibe both is often used where we say two: thus, meine 
 beiben SBriiber my two brothers. 
 
 200. 1. From the other units and tens, only a dative in en is 
 occasionally formed, when the words are used substantively ; 
 or, yet more rarely, from all the units, a nom. and ace. in e (a 
 relic of a former fuller declension)— namely, in certain special 
 uses, as aUt SSiere all fours ; or in poetry, to make an additional 
 syllable ; or in colloquial and low style. 
 
82 NUMEEALS. [200- 
 
 2. §unbert 100, and taufenb 1000, are frequently construed 
 and declined as (neuter) collective substantives. SJliOion (fern.) 
 is regularly and usually so treated. 
 
 3. As names of the figures designating them, the numerals 
 are treated as feminine nouns [Qdijl f. number being understood), 
 and take the plural ending en, and sometimes e in the singular : 
 etn forms bie ^in§, bie ©infen. 
 
 201. 1. The cardinal numerals are used in general with equal 
 freedom as substantives and as adjectives : thus, ein ^inb a 
 child, ein§ ber ^'inber one of the children, t)ier ober fiinf folrfier 
 9Jldb(?^en four or five of su^h girls, tuir brei greunbe we three 
 friends, unf er brei three of us, etc. 
 
 2. For the use of a singular instead of a plural noun of 
 measure after numerals, see 211.2. 
 
 202. From the cardinals come, by derivation or composition, : 
 all the other classes of numerals, the most important of which 
 are explained below. 
 
 203. Ordinals, 1. The ordinals are a series of ad- 
 jective derivatives, formed from the cardinals by the 
 suffixes t and ft : from the numbers 2-19, by adding t ; 
 from the higher numbers by adding ft. 
 
 Thus, 3tt)eit second, neunt ninth, fec^gel^nt sixteenth, gtDanstQft 
 twentieth, l^unbertft hundredth, taufenbft thousandth. 
 
 a. But the ordinal of ein is tx\t first; brei forms irregularly britt, 
 and a(i^t, ad^t (instead of ad)tt); anhtx other is sometunes used 
 instead of gtDeit second. 
 
 h. Compound numbers add, as in EngUsh, the ordinal ending 
 only to their last member: thus, ber gtDei unb stDangigfte 22d, ber 
 l^unbert unb erfte lOls^, im ac^^tge^n ^unbert fieben unb aditgigften 
 Saftre in the ISSlth year. 
 
 2. The ordinals are not used predicatively or adverbi- 
 ally and consequently do not appear (except in compo- 
 sition) in their simple undeclined form. They are 
 declined in all respects like other adjectives. 
 
 [Exercise 13. Cardinal and Ordinal Numerals.] 
 
 204. Multiplicatives. These are formed by compounding 
 the cardinals with the words fad) or fdltig : thus, einfa(| or ein* 
 
208] NUMEKAL DERIVATIVES. 8S 
 
 fdltia simple, gmeifac^ or gtDeifdlttQ double, gel^nfad) or geftnfdltig 
 ten-fold. They are adjectives, and are treated in all respects 
 like other adjectives. 
 
 205. Variatives. These add eriet to the cardinals: thus, 
 einerlei of one sort, breierlei of three sorts, tiielerlei of many sorts. 
 They are used as adjectives (see 415.11), but are incapable of 
 declension. 
 
 206. Iteratives. These are adverbs, formed by compound- 
 ing the numeral with mai (literally mark; hence repetition, 
 time): thus, einmal once, gel^nmal ten times, tnand^mal many 
 times, often. 
 
 a. The word mat is often written apart from the numeral, 
 sometimes with a capital, as an independent word. 
 
 h. As the examples have shown, derivative words of these 
 three classes are formed also from the indefinite numerals. 
 
 207. Derivatives from the Ordinals. 
 
 1. IXmidiiatives are formed by adding ^alB half to the ordinal 
 as ending in te (or t), and denote a quantity half a unit less 
 than the corresponding cardinal. Thus, t)ierte^alb or t)iertl)alb 
 four less a half or three and a half. They are construed as invari- 
 able adjectives. 
 
 The implied meaning is, ['the first, second, and third 
 complete; but] the fourth, [only] half* Instead of gtDeiteftalb 
 1|, anbertt)al6, irregularly fortned from anber other, in the sense 
 of second (203.1a), is in use. 
 
 2. Fractionals are originally compounds of the ordinals with 
 %\)Z\\ [^eil] part, but are abbreviated by the contraction of the 
 latter into tel, before which the final t of the ordinal is dropped : 
 thus, brittel (britt=tcl, britt Xfteil [^eil]) third, mxizi quarter, ixom= 
 gigftel twentieth part. 
 
 Instead of gmeitel second part is used only I)alb, ^a\\k half. 
 
 3. Ordinal Adverbs add the ending en§ to the ordinal theme : 
 thus, n\izx[^ firstly, gipanjiflften^ in the twentieth place. 
 
 208. Other derivative numeral words it belongs rather to 
 the dictionary than to the grammar to explain. 
 
84 USi;S OF THE FORMS OF DECLENSION. [209- 
 
 USES OF THE FORMS OF DECLENSION. 
 
 209. The following rules apply only to nouns and to words 
 (pronouns, numerals, adjectives, infinitives : see 113) used as 
 nouns ; since the declension of all adjectives and words used 
 adjectively (articles, pronominal adjectives, and participles) is 
 determined by that of the nouns to which they belong, and 
 with which they are made to agree in number, case, and gender. 
 
 NUMBERS. 
 
 210. The value and use of the numbers are, in general, the 
 same in German as in English. 
 
 211. 1. This does not exclude minor differences in regard to 
 particular words, which the one language may, in general or in 
 certain connections, use as singular and the other as plural : 
 for example, Sange (sing.) tongs (pi.), Slattern (pi.) small-pox (sing.), 
 auf bem ^rm (sing.) in the amis, (gie (ht. they pi.), you (meaning 
 one or more : see 153.4), etc. 
 
 2. Masculine and neuter nouns used to express measure- 
 ment, of extent, quantity, weight, or number, generally stand 
 in the singular instead of the plural after numerals (whether 
 cardinal or indefinite); also, the fem. ^Dlarf marks. 
 
 Thus, fie ^aben fieben bi§ a6:jt 3u^ Sdnge they have seven or 
 eight feet of length, gebn 5 a ^ 33ier ten casks of beer, n)ict)iel 
 ^funb Su^er how many pounds of sugar? ein ^ulf^^cer t)on ge^n 
 taufenb 3Jlann an auodliary army of 10,000 7nen, gmanaig ^D^f 
 Sflinber twenty head of cattle, brei Soil breit three inches broad. 
 
 But brei ® 11 e n (f.) %Vi^ three yards of cloth, fiinf ^ e i I e n (f.) 
 tt)eit Jive miles distant ; — and also taufenb © d) r i 1 1 e (m.) lang 
 1000 paces kmg. Kespecting the form of the noun expressing 
 the thing measured, see below, 216.5a. 
 
 3. In the familiar expressions for the time of day, U^r hour 
 is also unvaried after a numeral : thus, neun U^r nine o'clock. 
 
 CASES. 
 Nominative. 
 
 212. The proper office of the nominative is to stand as the 
 subject of the sentence : as, ber 3}lenf (^ benft, ^ott lenft man pro- 
 poses, God disposes. 
 
 Of course, also, a noun in apposition with a subject nom- 
 inative is put in the nominative ; since (111.2) an appositive 
 noun always agrees in case with the noun it explains. 
 
215] GENITIVE. 85 
 
 213. 1. With the verb jcin to he, and a few others, of kindred 
 meaning — such as tuerben become, bleibcn continue, l^ci^en he 
 called, fd^einen appear — also, with the passive of verbs that 
 govern a second accusative as objective predicate (227.36), a 
 noun may be used in the nominative as predicate: (i. e. as, 
 through the verb, describing and qualifying the subject: com- 
 pare 116.1). 
 
 Thus, mein 33ruber tft b e r 2 e "^ r e r biefe§ ^naben ray brother is 
 this hoy's teacher, ber bleiBt e in 91 art fetn Seben lang he (lit. that 
 one) remains a fool his whole life long, er tDtrb etn(^eigl^al§ ge* 
 fd^olten he is called reproachfully a miser. 
 
 a. With icerben, however, the noun is often put in the dative, 
 after the preposition gu: as, ba tt)erben SBeiber gu C)t)dnen 
 then women heccnne hyenas (turn to hyenas). 
 
 2. The nominative is sometimes used in apposition and pred- 
 ication relating to a word (usually a pronoun) in an oblique 
 case. Thus, la^ mic^ bein greunb (more usually beinen Steunb) 
 fein let me be thy friend, id) fel)e jte ein (or einen) 9taub ber glam^ 
 men tuerben I see them become a prey to the flames, er nennt mii^ 
 fein (or feinen) greunb lie calls me his friend, al§ i(^ mid) einen 
 grembling in biefem l^reife \at} (Schiller) as I saw mijself a stranger 
 in this circle; but@ie fet)en mic^ ein Uanb ber Snellen (Lessing) you 
 see me a prey to the waves; so also after tt)ie and al§ : thus, ber 
 3flu!)m biefeg ^JJlanne§ al§ berebter 3ftebner (or al§ eineg berebten 9teb:= 
 ner§) mar meit oerbreitet this man's fame as an eloquent speaker 
 was spread widely abroad, always jein 9lubm al§ 3flebner his fame 
 as orator, einem 9Jlanne mie 6ie fann e§ nid)t an ^elb fel)len (Les- 
 sing) a man like you cannot want for money. 
 
 214. The nominative is used in address (as a " vocative "). 
 Thus, l^olber griebe, fii^e ©intrac^t, meilet iiber blefer ©tabt lovely 
 
 Peace! sweet Concord! linger aver this city. 
 
 Genitive. 
 
 215. The genitive in German, as in the other related lan- 
 guages, is primarily and especially the adjective or adnominal 
 case, denoting by a form of the noun a variety of relations 
 such as might be expressed by a derivative adjective. As was 
 remarked above (under 158.2), it is in part traceably of adjective 
 origin. But its later uses arise also in part from its being 
 merged with other primitive cases — particularly the ablative, 
 the case representing the /ram relation, of origin or removal— 
 
86 USES OF THE FOEMS OF DECLENSION. [215- 
 
 and assuming their office. To trace all these uses to their 
 origin would require vastly too much of detailed historical dis- 
 cussion, and will not be attempted here. 
 
 216. Tlie Genitive with Nouns. 
 
 1. The German genitive is especially the case of a noun that 
 is added to another noun in order to limit or define its meaning. 
 
 2. It is used, accordingly, in all the senses in which we use 
 the possessive case of a noun, or a pronominal possessive (my, 
 your, his, etc.) ; also, in most of the senses belonging to a noun 
 connected with another noun by the preposition of: thus, 
 
 a. As genitive of possession or appurtenance: ha^ ^an^ 
 meine§ 35ater§ the house of my father, be§ 9Jlanne» ^op\ the man's 
 head. 
 
 6. As genitive of origin or cause : in be§ (3(^rerfen§ ^aijn in 
 the madness of terror, ber ^rtcb ber (^ro^mut^ [(^ro^mut] the 
 impulse of magnanimity. 
 
 c. As complement of relation (designating that toward which 
 the relation expressed by the governing noun is sustained) : 't)tx 
 SSater beS ©otineg the father of the son, be§ 3Sater§ ©ol^n the 
 fatJwr's son, ^onig biefeg 9fteid)§ king of this realm. 
 
 d. As partitive genitive (expressing a whole of which the 
 governing noun is a part), in all its varieties : bet ©c^rerfUi^fte 
 ber ©(^reden the most terrible of terrors, ein§ ber fleinften ^inber 
 one of the smallest children, iebeS biejer 33eburfni[fe each of these 
 needs, allgut)iel be§ ©pa^e§ quite too much of the joke. 
 
 e. As genitive of material, constitution, or equivalence : ein 
 SS)a(^ fc^attenber ^ud^en a roof of shady beeches, ber Sraeige Iau= 
 BigeS fitter the leafy trellis-work of the branches, eine ^nga^I 
 f(^reienber ^naBen a number of shouting boys, be§ ®oIbe§ ©trbme 
 streams of gold. 
 
 f. As genitive of characteristic : ein Tlann ^o^en 9iange§ unb 
 grower ^ugenb a man of high raiik and great virtue, ein .f)irten= 
 ftamm tiirftfc^er ^bfunft a slwpherd-race of Turkish descent. 
 
 g. As subjective genitive (implying an action of which the 
 thing designated by the genitive is the subject) : be§ SturmeS 
 ©aufen the roaring of the storm, ber 9Jlagnete ©ciffen unb Sieben 
 the hating and loving (attraction and repulsion) of magnets. 
 
 h. As objective genitive (implying an action of which the 
 thing designated by the genitive is the object) : bein SBunfcf) be§ 
 ^uten thy desire of good, SSerbefferer ber SBelt unb be§ ©efe^e§ 
 Improver of the WojM and of the Law. 
 
216] GENETIVE. 87 
 
 The relation of the genitive to its governing noun is so in- 
 flnitively various that neither the above classification nor any 
 other is exhaustive or peremptory. 
 
 3. In these relations, the genitive of a personal pronoun is 
 rarely admitted ; but for it is usually substituted a possessive 
 pronominal adjective, qualifying the noun to be limited (158.2). 
 
 Exceptions : certain cases of partitives, of genitives followed 
 by a qualifying word, and a few others : as, unf er einer ofie of us, 
 \f)xtx Beibcn (Jinbriicfe the impressions of them both, il^rer 5}lcifter 
 tt)erben to get the better of them. 
 
 4. For the genitive, in all these uses, may be substituted a 
 dative with the preposition t)on o/, as in English. 
 
 a. The substitution is made, especially, when the expression 
 would otherwise be ambiguous or unclear, from the want of a 
 distinct ending to the genitive, or of a limiting word showing 
 its character: thus, bie ^IntDO'^ner t)Dn ^ari» the inhabitaiits of 
 Paris, 35ater t)on jed)§ ^inbern father of six children; but bie (&'u\= 
 moaner 55erUn§ the inhabitants of Berlin, 33ater biefer |ecl)g ^inber 
 father of these six children; — or, to avoid a succession of several 
 genitives: as, ber ©oftn t)on bent Dftetme ^aijer @manuel§ the son 
 of tlie uncle of Emperor Emanuel. And the construction with t)on 
 is the regular and usual one instead of the genitive of material 
 and of characteristic. 
 
 5. a. After nouns signifying measure, of extent, quantity, 
 weight, or number, the noun designating the substance measured, 
 if not preceded by an adjective, is usually put neither in the 
 genitive (partitive genitive), nor in the dative with tion of, but 
 is treated as indeclinable. 
 
 b. Thus, ein (^Ia§ SBein a glass of wine (i. e., wine, to the extent 
 of one glass), gmei ^funb %^zt two pounds of tea, brei ©Hen Xnd) 
 three yards of cloth, einige 33u(^ papier a few quires of paper, 
 gro^e 33Idtter 9iauf(i)gDlb great sheets of gold-tinsel ;— hut, cin ^Ia§ 
 biefe§ SSeing or t)on btefcm 2Betne a glass of this wine, jtrci ^^^funb 
 guten %l)tt^ two pounds of good tea. 
 
 c. Exceptions are occasionally met with: thus, ben beften 
 33e(^er 2Betng the best goblet of wine, 300 Centner @oIbe§ 300 cwt. 
 of gold. 
 
 d. By abbreviation, the name of the month is left unvaried 
 after a numeral designating the day : thus, ben neunten 9Jlai the 
 ninth of May. 
 
 6. The genitive, in any of its senses, may be placed either be- 
 fore or after the noun which it limits (aj^ is shown by the exam- 
 
88 USES OF THE FORMS OF DECLENSION. [216- 
 
 pies given). But its position before the noun, especially if lim- 
 ited by any other word than an article, belongs rather to a 
 higher or poetic style ; in plain colloquial prose, the genitive 
 ordinarily follows the noun that governs it. An objective gen- 
 itive most rarely precedes ; and never, if another genitive be 
 dependent on the same noun : thus, be§ ^onigg 2BaT^l eine§ Tl\= 
 nifterg the king's choice of a minister. 
 
 As in English, the noun preceded by a dependent genitive 
 takes no article : thus, meine§ greunbe^ ^n^ my friend's heart, 
 but ba§ §er3 meine^ greunbeg the heart of my friend. 
 
 217. The Genitive with Adjectives. 
 
 About thirty adjectives (with their corresponding negatives) 
 are followed by a genitive, denoting that in respect of which the 
 action or quality they express is exerted. 
 
 Thus, be§ 6ingeti§ miibe weary of singing, tt)iirbtger be§ 9ling§ 
 more worthy of the ring, etne§ ©ultonS untoiirbig unworthy of a 
 Sultan, jii^er ©rinnerung \)oUfull of sweet memories. 
 
 a. These adjectives are mostly such as are followed by of in 
 English, although some admit a different construction. Among 
 the commonest of them (besides those already instanced) are 
 BetDU^t conscious, fd^ig capable, getBi^ sure, fc^ulbtg guilty, fatt 
 sated, uBerbriiffig tired, )3oUfull. Some of them also are construed 
 with prepositions, and a few (229) even govern an accusative, 
 when used with the verbs jein and tDerben. 
 
 218. The Genitive with Prepositions. 
 
 About twenty prepositions govern the genitive. 
 
 Thus, tDcgen feiner ©iinbe on account of his sin, tt)dftrcnb meincr 
 toUen SaQh during my mad chase, ungea(^tet biefer ©rfldrung not- 
 witJistanding this explanation, ftatt buf tiger ©drten instead of fra- 
 grant gardens. 
 
 a. The prepositions governing the genitive are mostly of 
 recent derivation from nouns and adjectives. For a list of them, 
 see below, under Prepositions (373). 
 
 219. The Genitive as Object of Verbs. 
 
 1. A genitive immediately dependent upon a verb has gener- 
 ally the office of a remoter object, further qualifying the action 
 of the verb upon its nearer personal object. 
 
 2. A number of transitive verbs govern a genitive in addition 
 to their direct object, the accusative. 
 
219] GENITIVE. 89 
 
 a. These are verbs of removing, depriving, accusing, convict- 
 ing, admonishing, assuring, and the hke, and one or two others 
 (miirDigcn esteem worthij, Dertroften console). 
 
 Thus, er flagt ben Wiener be§ i)ieBftal^l§ an he accuses the servant 
 of theft, er ft at un§ einer gro^en gurc^t entlebigt he has rid us of a 
 great fear, cr berauBt ben Ungliidliiiien ber '^offnung he robs the 
 wretched man of hope. 
 
 3. A number of reflexive verbs admit a genitive in addition to 
 their reflexive object. 
 
 a. These verbs are of too various meaning to admit of classifi- 
 cation. Some of them may be rendered in English either by a 
 construction resembling the German, or as simple transitive 
 verbs taking a genitive as direct object : thus, freue bi(^ b einer 
 Sugenb rejoice thyself of (enjmj) thy youth, er entfinnt \i^ jebeg 
 2Borte§ he bethinks himself of (recollects) every word, fic^ 9efdftr= 
 Iid)er SBaffcn bebienen to serve one's self with (employ) dangerous 
 weapons; — others, only in the latter method: thus, mit @ifer 
 ftab' ic^ m^ ber ©tnbten befltfjen zealously have I pursued my 
 studies, bemer fteiltgen Seii^en, o 2Baftrfteit, ftat ber 33etrug fi(^ an= 
 gema^t thy holy signs, Truth ! has deceit usurped. 
 
 4. A few impersonal verbs take a genitive of the object, with 
 an accusative of the subject, of the feeling they represent. 
 
 a. They are erBarmen pitij, geliiften long, jammern grieve, reuen 
 or gereuen rue: thus, mid) erbarmt feine§ @lenb§ I pity his misery. 
 
 5. A number of verbs may take a genitive only (corresponding 
 to a direct object in English). 
 
 The commonest of these are ac^ten regard, Bebiirfen neea, 
 brau(^en use, benfen think of, entbeftren do without, ermangeln lack, 
 eriDdftnen mention, gebenfen remember, genie^en enjoy, gefdjmeigen 
 keep silence about, ftarren await, ftiiten guard, Iad)en laugh at, 
 pflegen nurse, )d)Dnen spare, fpotten mock, uerfeftlen miss, t)ergefjen 
 forget, \QOi^xx[t\)mtxi perceive, voaxiiXi wait for. 
 
 Thus, er a^)kiz ntd)t ber marmen ©onne he heeded not the warm 
 sun, e§ Bebarf ber ^nnaftme nicftt it needs not the assumption, 
 anbrer greoel nidjt gu gebenfen not to mention other atrocities, la^ 
 mid) ber neuen greifteit genie^en let me enjoy the new freedom, jebeg 
 ,\^eiben§ i^ergeffenb forgetting every trial, \{)x fpottet mein ye mock 
 me, mo id) beiner xoaxit where I wait for thee, 
 
 6. Many of the verbs in these various classes may take instead 
 of the genitive an accusative, or else a noun governed by a 
 preposition : for example, all the impersonals, and all but two 
 
&0 USES OF THE FOEMS OF DECLENSION. [219-' 
 
 (ermanG^In and gejd)tt)etgen) of the last class. The construction 
 with the genitive is an older one, which has for some time been 
 going gradually out of use, and is now mainly antiquated or 
 poetic : thus, biefc grei^eit, b i e i(i) {e^t genie^e this liberty which I 
 now enjoy, benen, auf bie bie emigc gi^eil^eit tDartet to those for 
 whom eternal freedom is waiting, er f reut \\^ ii b e r f ein ©liidf 
 he rejoices at his good fortune. 
 
 220. Other uses of the Genitive. 
 
 1. The genitive of a noun is often used in an adverbial sense, 
 especially (with or without a limiting adjective) to denote time ; 
 also (with adjective) not infrequently manner, more rarely place. 
 
 Thus, eine§ %aQt^ im Senge one day in spring, be§ 2Binter§ jinb 
 tDtr tt)ie t)ergraben in bem ©(^nee in the winter we are, as it were, 
 buried up in the snow, bie 2BoI!en, bie 5!Jlor9en§ unb ^^benb§ iiBer 
 tl)n l^in f egelten the clouds which sailed along over him of a morn- 
 ing and evening, er fdiliirft langen -!palfe§ he sips with outstretched 
 neck, prft bu'§ flingen mdd^ttgen 9lufe§ dx)st thou hear it ring with 
 mighty sound ? \^ ermal^nte iftn afle§ ©rnfte§ I admonished him in 
 all seriousness, ja^te f4)Iei(^^ x^ meiner SBege I softly steal off on 
 my way. 
 
 a. A large number of adverbs are, by origin, genitives of 
 nouns or adjectives, or of a noun and a limiting word which 
 have grown together by familiar use : see 363-5. 
 
 2. A genitive is sometimes used with a verb (especially jein 
 and tuerben) in the sense of a predicative adjective, or as predi- 
 cate genitive : thus, fie tt)aren munter unb Quter ^inge they were 
 merry and of good cheer, bie toaxtn oft ni(^t jo gro^, ober gleid^en 
 ^Iter§ mit tl)m they were often not so big, or of equal age with him, 
 alle raerben auf einmal eine§ ©tnne§ all become suddenly of one 
 mind, \^ bin SSiEen^ I am of a mind. 
 
 a. The genitive in this construction is allied with the genitive 
 of characteristic (216.2/). 
 
 3. By a construction formerly not rare, but now little used, a 
 partitive genitive is used with verbs : thus, er tranf be§ 33a(i)e§ 
 he drank of the brook, fie brac^tc be§ flaren ^errlid^en 2Beine§ she 
 brought of the clear excellent wine. 
 
 4. Yet more unusual are cases of the occurrence of a posses- 
 sive genitive and of a genitive of origin with verbs : thus, tl^ue 
 n)a§ betne§ %mk§ tft dx) what belongs to (is of) thy office, |)unger§ 
 flerben to die of hunger. 
 
222] DATITE WITH VERBS. 91 
 
 5. A genitive is sometimes used with an interjection, to signify 
 the thing which is the occasion of the exclamation : thus, ad) be§ 
 Ungliitf^ alas for the mishap (see 392). 
 
 Dative. 
 
 221. 1. The dative is originally and properly the case of the indirect 
 personal object, designating the person or persons with reference to 
 whom, or as aSectmg whom, anything is or is done — a relation which is 
 ordinarily (though not always) expressed in English by the preposition 
 to or /or. In this sense, the dative in German is usually the adjunct of 
 a verb, much less often of an adjective, very rarely of a noun. 
 
 2. The dative has also inherited the offices of primitive cases, now 
 lost ; especially of the instrumental, expressing the with or by relation, 
 and the locative, expressing the in relation. In these senses, it is ordin- 
 arily governed by prepositions. 
 
 222. The Dative with Verbs. 
 
 The dative, in German, is most often the indirect personal ob- 
 ject of a verb. 
 
 a. It is thus doubly contrasted in office with the genitive : the 
 latter usually limits a noun ; and, as indirect object, it is prevail- 
 ingly not personal : thus, [^ i)er|id)ere iftn einer ©ac^e / assure 
 him of a matter, but i(^ t)erfid)ere i^m eine ©ac^e I assure (vouch 
 for) a matter to him; \i) Beraube i^n feine§ (^elbeg Iroh him of his 
 money, but {^ raube \tim fein (^elb I steal from him his money. 
 
 h. The connection of the dative with the action of the verb is 
 of every degree of closeness, from constituting its essential or 
 necessary complement to indicating a mere incidental interest 
 in its action: thus, er bot mir bie §anb he offered me his hand, 
 i^ legte e^ i^m auf ben %\\d^ Ilaid it on the table for him. 
 
 I. 1. A large number of transitive verbs take, along with the 
 accusative, a dative as more or less necessary complement of 
 their action. Such are 
 
 a. Many simple verbs, especially such as denote a bringing 
 near or removing, a giving or taking, imparting, commanding, 
 permitting or refusing, and the like. 
 
 Thus, er brac^te ben 9ting ber Allien he brought the ring to the old 
 woman, id) fdjrelbe meinem SSater einen 33rief I write my father a 
 letter, man eriaubt afle§ einem greunbe one permits a friend any- 
 thing, 
 
 h. Many verbs compounded with inseparable or separable 
 prefixes, especially ent, er, t)er, and auf, a^, bet, nadi, dor, $u. 
 
92 USES OF THE FORMS OF DECLENSION. [22^ 
 
 Thus, er Dermarfit ben 9fling bem liebften feiner ©bl^ne he makes 
 over the ring to the dearest of his sons, er mollte 'xi)m bie ^rone auf= 
 fefeen he wished to set the crown on his head, fie mu^te i^m bie 
 Sungfrau gufagen she had to promise him the girl. 
 
 c. A few verbs that require a reflexive object in the dative, 
 forming a class of improper reflexives (290) : thus, i(^ l^abt mir 
 33eif qE Derbient I have earned myself applause. 
 
 d. A few verbs compounded with adjectives, or verb-phrases 
 akin with such : e. g., tra^rf agen prophesy, funb ma^tn make 
 known. 
 
 2. In the passive of these verbs, where the object-accusative 
 becomes a subject-nominative, the dative remains as sole object : 
 thus, ber Sling murbe ber ^Iten gebracS^t the ring was brought to the 
 old woman, e^ tt)irb mir !unb gema^t it is made known to me. 
 
 3. As the examples have shown, the English also often uses 
 its objective without a preposition (when placed next the verb) 
 in a dative sense. In other cases, it expresses the dative 
 relation by prepositions, especially to. But, where the verb 
 implies removal, the dative frequently answers to our objective 
 with from. 
 
 Thus, nimm meiner Dlebe ieben ©tad^el take from my words all 
 sting, e§ ftaftl mir ba§ SeBcn it stole my life from me, e§ betnem 
 5}litleib gu entgie'^en to withdraw it from thy compassion, er foU 
 mir ni(^t lebenbig geften he shall not get away from me alive. 
 
 a. The same is true of the dative after intransitive verbs : see 
 below. 
 
 4. Either the direct or indirect object may often be omitted, 
 and the verb used with the other alone: thus, einem ein 33u(j^ 
 borlefen to read a book aloud to some one, ein 53u(^ Dorlefen to 
 read a book aloud, einem t)orIefen to read aloud to some one; also, 
 simply t)DrIefen to read aloud, lecture. 
 
 II. 1. Many verbs take a dative as their sole 'object. 
 
 These, as not admitting an accusative, are reckoned as in- 
 transitive ; but many of them correspond to verbs which in 
 English are looked upon as transitive (227.1«, b). 
 
 a. A number of simple verbs, together with a few that have 
 the inseparable prefixes be, ge, er ; also, the contraries of several 
 of them, formed with the prefix mi^. 
 
 The commonest of these are antmorten answer, banfen thank, 
 bienen serve, bro^ien threaten, f(uc!)en curse, folgen follow, l^elfen 
 
222] DATIVE WITH VEKBS. 93 
 
 help, f(^aben harm, fd)meid)eln flatter, tro^en defy, trauen trust, 
 h)el)ren control, Begegnen meei, gefaEen please, ge^orc^^en obey, 
 criDtebern answer. 
 
 Thus, feib il^r tl^nen nic^t begegnet did you not meet them ? folgt 
 hnxd) ben ^etfter bem ©tral^l follows the beam of light through the 
 ether, nok'§ t^nen gefciHt as it pleases them, mnn e§ mir nic^t mi^fiele 
 if it did not displease me, iann e§ bir nic^t f(^aben can it not harm 
 thee ? :^elft mir help me ! ben 9taumen unb Seiten gu tro^en to defy 
 space and time. 
 
 b. A large number of verbs compounded with the inseparable 
 prefix ent, and with the prepositions ab, an, auf, au§, bet, ein, 
 entgegen, nad^, nnter, t)or, miber, su ; deriving their power to take 
 the dative object from the modification of meaning given by the 
 prefix. 
 
 Thus, bie ©(^tt)erter entfliegen ber ©(^eibe the swords leap from 
 the scabbard, t)iele ftimmten biefer ^nftd)t bei many acceded to this 
 view, fommt einer \i)m entgegen if one comes to meet him, urn d5n= 
 Ud)en ©reigniffen uorsubengen in order to avoid such occurrences, 
 ml^tt ben ^efe(i)ten gnfa^ who was looking on at the contests. 
 
 The meaning added by the prefix is, as the examples show, to 
 be very variously rendered in English. 
 
 c. A number of verbs compounded with nouns, adverbs, and 
 adjectives ; also, of verbal phrases akin with such. 
 
 Thus, ba^ fein (SJefang feinem 0eibe gleic^fommen miiffe that his 
 song mu^t correspond with his attire, er elite feinem SSater jn ^\ii\t 
 he hastened to the help of his father, e§ tl)nt mir leib it pains me, 
 er ma^t biefer ^ame ben ©of he is paying court to this lady, e§ 
 tDarb i^m gu XtjiW \%t\\'\ it was granted him (fell to his share). 
 
 d. SSerben become is sometimes used alone with a (possessive) 
 dative in the sense of gu ^l^eil [%t\\\ merben : thus, bagn n)arb bem 
 5[Renf d^en ber 35erftanb for that end was understanding given to man 
 (became his). Quite rarely, such a possessive dative follows f ein : 
 as, e§ ift il^m it is his (belongs to him). 
 
 e. A few impersonal verbs, or verbs used impersonally, take 
 a dative designating the subject of the feeling or condition they 
 express : thus, e§ grant mir lam horrified, il^m fd)n)inbelt he turns 
 giddy. Some of these take also the accusative. 
 
 /. Also fein, tuerbcn, and gel^en or ergeften, with adverbial ad- 
 juncts, are frequently thus used impersonally with the dative 
 (292.4:) : thus, if)m tt)ar bange he was in anxiety, mir mirb fo mol^l 
 
94 USES OF THE FORMS OF DECLENSION. [222- 
 
 so pleasant a feeling is ccmiing over me, \o\t \\i mir benn Iww is it 
 then with me ? bcm ift f o the case is thus (it is thus with regard to 
 that). 
 
 2. Of the intransitive verbs governing the dative, a part — 
 especially those that denote an action proceeding from a 
 person — may form an impersonal passive governing the same 
 case (see 279.2). 
 
 Thus, e§ waxh mir l^art beocQnet I have been harshly dealt with 
 (met), e§ tpurbe i^m gel^olfen he was helped. 
 
 III. In a looser and less strictly dependent construction — as 
 denoting the person (or thing) in behalf of whom, or as affecting 
 whom, anything is or is done, the dative ( " dative of interest " ) 
 is used so freely, and with so many verbs, that to attempt giv- 
 ing rules for its occurrence would be useless. Only one or two 
 points call for special notice. 
 
 a. A dative grammatically dependent on the verb is often 
 used instead of a possessive genitive quaUfying a noun in the 
 sentence: thus, bem '3)iener urn ben Qa\§ faEenb falling upon the 
 servant's neck, leget ben 3D^toEner ber 9Jiaib in ben ©d^oo^ lay 
 Miollner in the maid's lap. 
 
 b. This is especially common with the personal pronouns : 
 thus, e§ Bli^t au§ htn ^ugen i^m fii^n a daring look beams from 
 his eyes (see 161). 
 
 c. The personal pronoun is sometimes thus used in a manner 
 that seems to us expletive : thus, jiel^ mir oh fie fommen see (for 
 me) whether they are coming (compare 156). 
 
 IV. For the dative dependent upon a verb, in all its varieties 
 (but not with all verbs : especially not with those which take 
 the dative after the manner of a direct object, Il.la), is some- 
 times substituted a case governed by a preposition (as gu to, fiir 
 for, Hon from). This substitution is notably more frequent with 
 a noun than with a personal pronoun ; a dative of the latter is 
 often used where one of the former would make a harsh or 
 forced construction. 
 
 223. The Dative with Adjectives. 
 
 1. The construction of the dative with adjectives is analogous 
 to its construction with verbs. Some adjectives call for the 
 case as their essential or natural defining complement ; others 
 admitit in a looser relation, after the manner of a " dative of 
 interest " (above, 222.III.). 
 
2U] DATIVE. 9^ 
 
 2. Adjectives taking the dative as their more essential com- 
 plement are especially those that signify nearness or remoteness, 
 likeness or unlikeness, suitableness, property, inclination, ad- 
 vantage or disadvantage, and the like. Usually, they require 
 in English the preposition to before a noun Umiting them. 
 
 Thus, mt nai) fii^r i^ m\^ bir how near I feel myself to thee! 
 bem ^Idferbau fremb strangers to agriculture, 2BoI!en qU'i^ gittigen 
 clouds like wings, einen il^m eigenen SBertft a value peculiar to it, 
 eine ©eele, bie ber %\)0i\ nit^t getDac^fen ift a soul that is not equal to 
 the deed, ein mir unDer^offteg (^lixd a happiness unhopedfor by me. 
 
 3. Participles of verbs governing the dative admit a comple- 
 ment in the same case, in analogy with the uses of the verbs 
 from which they come, and according to their own character as 
 active, passive, or neuter participles. 
 
 4. Verbal derivatives in Bar and It(^, signifying possibility, 
 take a dative of the person whom the possibility concerns: 
 thus, mir begreiflid) comprehensible to me, bem 9!Jlenfcf)en unbetro^n- 
 bar uninhabitable by man. 
 
 5. Almost any adjective qualified by gu too or getiug suffi,- 
 dently, enough admits an adjunct in the dative : thus, ba§ 0eib 
 ift mir gu lang, i^m aber nid)t lang genug the garment is too long for 
 me, but not long enough far him. 
 
 6. Many adjectives admit a dative adjunct more readily, or 
 only, when used with a verb, either predicatively or forming a 
 more or less closely compounded verbal phrase : thus, ba§ ift 
 mir rec^t that suits me (seems to me right), ba§ tt)trb bem £naben 
 fc^tt)er that grows hard for the boy. 
 
 For such phrases, with transitive, intransitive, and impersonal 
 verbs, see above, 222.1.1(^, II.lc,/. 
 
 7. For the dative with an adjective, also, is often used a case 
 governed by a preposition (especially Don /rom, fiir/or). 
 
 224. TJie Dative with Prepositions. 
 
 1. About twenty prepositions govern the dative. 
 For the list of them, see under Prepositions (374). 
 
 2. Nine prepositions govern the dative when the relation ex- 
 pressed is that of situation or locality ; but the accusative, when 
 motion or tendency toward anything is implied. 
 
 These are an, auf, I)inter, in, neben, iiber, unter, Dor, 3tt)if(f)ett 
 (see 376). 
 
96 USES OF THE FOEMS OF DECLENSION. [225- 
 
 225. The Dative in other constructions. 
 
 1. The use of the dative as a virtual possessive genitive, 
 grammatically dependent on a verb, but logically, or according 
 to its real meaning, qualifying a noun, has been explained above 
 (222.III.a,&). Karely, the dative js found having the same value 
 with a noun alone : as, bem 9liefen giir Sufi /or the gianfs pleasure 
 (for a pleasure to the giant), er gab, iftm gu (S^ren, mandie gefte he 
 gave many festivals in his honor. Yet more rarely, it occurs with 
 a noun in other relations usually expressed by a genitive, or 
 with the aid of a preposition : as, ein 9Jiufter ^iiroern unb 33auern 
 a model for citizens and peasants, ©emipeit einem neuen 33unbe 
 assurance of a new covenant. 
 
 2. The dative sometimes follows a noun in exclamatory 
 phrases (as if the imperative of jein to he were understood) : 
 thus, bem 33uben unb bem ^nt^t bie ^(^t outlawry to the villain 
 and flunkey! greube bem 6terbli(!)en joy to the mortal! Some 
 words habitually employed as exclamations are also followed by 
 a dative signifying the person toward whom the feeling ex- 
 pressed by the exclamation is directed: such are tt)0^l, §eil, 
 SIBe^, and the like (see 392). 
 
 ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 226. The relations of the accusative are more simple than those of 
 the other oblique cases. Its proper office is to stand as direct object 
 of a verbal action ; and also, in the relation, most nearly akin with the 
 former, of the goal of motion ; but this it has in German only in part. 
 The German uses it also as the case absolute, 
 
 227. The Accusative with Verbs. 
 
 1. The accusative is especially the case belonging to the 
 direct object of a transitive verb : as, ic^ fe^^e ben 9JJann; er trdgt 
 clnen S)ut I see the man; he wears a hat. 
 
 a. And a transitive verb, on the other hand, is one that takes 
 a direct object in the accusative. The classification of verbs as 
 transitive and intransitive is in part formal rather than logical 
 (i. e. a matter of usage, and not of essential meaning), and — 
 
 h. Some verbs which in English are regarded as transitive 
 take in German the genitive (219.5) or the dative (222. II.l), and 
 therefore belong to the class of intransitives. Again, some verbs 
 which to us are intransitive are in German, uniformly or oc- 
 casionally, transitive: as, i^r Ijobt mid) fpre(^en iDoHen you have 
 desired to speak to me. 
 
227] ACCUSATIVE. 97 
 
 2. The accusative is also sometimes used as the object of a 
 verb properly intransitive. 
 
 a. Some verbs may be followed by an accusative of meaning 
 akin with their own, or signifying a substantive idea which they 
 themselves virtually involve ( " cognate accusative " ). 
 
 Thus, tt)ir fterben ^ier ben 2:ob ber greien we die here the death 
 of the free, betet einen frommen ©pruc^ way a piom phrase, fie 
 ](^ldft ben le^ten ©d^Iaf she sleeps the last sleep. 
 
 h. By a pregnant construction, an intransitive may be fol- 
 lowed by an accusative of that which is effected or made to ap- 
 pear by the action it designates: thus, tont bie ^lode (^rab^efang 
 the bell tolls a funeral hymn, wa^ grinfeft bu mir Ijzx what grinnest 
 thou at me (what does thy grinning signify) ?— or by an accusa- 
 tive and an adjective or other equivalent expression as objective 
 predicate, signifying the condition into which that which is 
 designated by the accusative is brought by the action described 
 by the verb : thus, \i^ ^alb tobt [tot] lai^en to laugh one's self half 
 dead, \^ tranm^ al§ ^inb m\^ ^uxMt I dream myself back into 
 childhood (as child), bu tt)irft bie SBdd^ter an§ bem ©djlafe fc^reien 
 tliou wilt scream the guards out of sleep. 
 
 c. Some impersonal verbs, denoting a personal condition or 
 state of feeling, take an accusative signifying the person af- 
 fected : thus, e§ liiftet feinen, euer 9Jlann 3U tuerben no one desires 
 to become your husband, mid) T^ungert Jam hungry. See 294. 
 
 With these are included also biinfen, bdu(^ten [beuc^ten] seem 
 (the only verbs in which a like construction still appears in 
 English) : thus, mi^ hmitmethii^ks, mid) bduc^te [beud)te] methought 
 (292.2). These (and some of the others also) admit a dative 
 instead of an accusative object (222.II.le). 
 
 d. For the accusative after Jein or merben with certain adjec- 
 tives, see below (229). 
 
 3. A few transitive verbs govern two accusatives : namely — 
 
 a. Se^ren teach takes an accusative of the thing taught to- 
 gether with an accusative (or sometimes a dative) of the person 
 to whom it is taught : thus, id^ lebre iftn (or i^m) bie Tln\it I teach 
 him music. §ragen ask and bitten beg also sometimes add to their 
 personal object a pronominal accusative of the thing desired: 
 thus, \^ bitte bid) nur bie§ I beg of thee only this. 
 
 b. C)ei^en and nennen call, name, fd)impfen and fd^elten call by 
 way of reproach, and tauf en christen, which add to their personal 
 object a second accusative as objective predicate, denoting the 
 
^8 USES OF THE FOEMS OF DECLENSION. [227- 
 
 name or title given: thus, t(^ toill alk§ eine (Sd)ictunQ nennen 
 I will call the whole a wm^k of destiny, er fc^impfte feinen ^egner 
 einen DIarren he reviled his adversary as a fool. 
 
 c. A noun in the accusative as objective predicate now and 
 then appears with other verbs— as, fo glaube jeber feinen ^ting ben 
 ed^ten then let each believe his own ring the genuine one ; but tliis 
 construction is generally avoided by the use of a different ex- 
 pression : as, man ma^i or nja^It tftn gum ^onifl tliey make, or 
 choose, him king (for king), \^ l^alte i^n fiir meinen greunb I deem 
 him my friend, \6) fenne iftn al§ einen ^l^renmonn I kmm him a 
 man of honor. 
 
 228. The Accusative with Prepositions. 
 
 1. Eight prepositions always govern the accusative. 
 
 They are bi§, bur(i), fiir, Qegen or gen, ol&ne, fonber, urn, n)iber 
 (see 375). 
 
 2. Nine prepositions are followed by the accusative when they 
 indicate motion or tendency toward ; otherwise, by the dative. 
 
 They are an, auf, Winter, in, neBen, iiber, unter, t)Dr, gtt)if(f)en 
 (see 376). 
 
 229. The Accusative with Adjectives. 
 
 A few adjectives, when used predicatively with fein or h)erben 
 (especially the latter), may take an object in the accusative. 
 
 They are anfii^tig, bemu^t, gema^r, gemol^nt, Io§, miibe, fatt, 
 iiberbriiffig, gufrieben: thus, bie ©eifter njerb' id) nun nid)t log 
 I cannot now get rid of the spirits, id) \mf eg gufrieben I should be 
 content with it, menu mx nic^t fein (Jingreifen gema^r tt)iirben if we 
 did not feel its taking hold. 
 
 This anomalous construction is of quite modern origin, and 
 in part owing to a misapprehension of the old genitive eg as an 
 accusative. It is easier with a pronoun than with a noun as 
 object, and in the case of gufrieben contented is limited to a 
 pronoun. The governing force belongs to the combination of 
 adjective and verb (compare 223.6). 
 
 230. The Accusative in absolute construction. 
 
 1. The accusative is used absolutely (that is, as adverbial ad- 
 junct of a verb or adjective, but not properly governed by them) 
 to express measure — whether of duration of time, of extent of 
 space, of weight, of value, or of number. 
 
230] ACCUSATIVE. 99 
 
 Thus, er I)or(^te eincn ^lugenbUc! he listened for a moment, an bie 
 id) Diele 3at)re nirf)t ocbad)t of which I have not thought for many 
 years, man I)atte fie nur mn'm 2.age border Gcfeften they had been 
 seen only a few days before, stDangig 3a^^^ ^^^ twenty years since, 
 al» fie eine oute ©ti-cc!e fortgcoanaen tuaren when they had gone on 
 a good piece, cine !)albe Stiinbc )oox bcm (Bdjlo^ half a league outside 
 the castle, ad^t 9J2orGen tief eight furlongs deep, c^ luieflt ein ^funb 
 it weiglis a pound, ba§ foflet ivozi %\)a\tx that costs two dollars, ein 
 C)eer 300,000 Wann ftar! an army 300,000 men strong. 
 
 a. To an accusative expressing duration of time is often 
 added the adverb lanG long : as, er lag fieben 3a^re lanfi he lay 
 for seven ijears, ben flangcn %a(^ lang the whole day long; — less 
 often other adverbs: as, bag Qange 3al)r burc^ tlie whole year 
 through, biefe '^txi iiber all this time. 
 
 h. By a similar construction, an adverb of direction or motion 
 is very frequently added to an accusative of space, in such way 
 as almost to have the value of a preposition governing it : thus, 
 bie ^reppen l^erunter down the stairs, ben 58erg l^inan up the 
 mountain, ben SBcg am 33ad) l^tnauf up the path by the brook, ben 
 Oangen (S^orfo I)in unb n)ieber through the whole Corso and back. 
 
 2. The accusative is also used to express the time of occur- 
 rence ("time when"). 
 
 Thus, ba§ ficfd)at) iebe§ ^al^x that happened every year, ben 
 ^benb beim %aniz that evening at the dunce, er fie^t bie SKelt faum 
 einen geiertag he sees the world only on a holiday. 
 
 a. This use of the accusative borders on that of the adverbial 
 genitive (220.1) : but the accusative has the more definite mean- 
 ing, and cannot be used witliout a defining adjunct : thus, 
 ^lbenb§, be§ ^benb§ of an eveniiig, in the evening (now and then, 
 or habitually) ; but bicfen ^benb this evening, le^ten ^benb last 
 evening, and so on. 
 
 3. a. A noun in the accusative is sometimes used absolutely, 
 with an adjunct (prepositional or adjective), to express an ac- 
 companying or characterizing circumstance — as if governed by 
 with or having understood. 
 
 Thus, bie D^lilttcr crfc^icnen, ben ©dugUng im ^rme the mothers 
 appeared, (with) their infants in their arms, anbere fliet)en, iDtlbc 
 ^Ingft im funfelnben ^ugc others fly, wild terror in their flashing 
 eyes. 
 
 h. This is especially usual with a participle as adjunct of the 
 noun : thus, mnli ung, bie ^-acfcl unuicmanbt beckons to us, with 
 
100 CONJUGATION. [230- 
 
 torch inverted, man aeiDoftnt e§, ben ^op^ Qegen ben ^orfo Gend)let; 
 ftill gu fte^en it is trained to stand still, (having) the head directed 
 toward the Corso, jelbft ^ranfe nic£)t auSgenommen even sick persons 
 not excepted. 
 
 c. Allied with this is , the so-called imperative use of the 
 participle (see 359.3). 
 
 CONJUG-ATION. 
 
 231. Conjugation is variation for mode, tense, number, 
 and person. 
 
 Only verbs are conjugated : hence, the subject of con- 
 jugation is coincident with that of verbal inflection. 
 
 VERBS. 
 
 232. The essential characteristic of a verb is that it predi- 
 cates or asserts something of a subject: that is to say, it 
 ascribes some action, or state, or quality, to some being or 
 thing expressed by a noun or pronoun. 
 
 This predication or ascription is not always direct and positive ; 
 it may be contingent, inquiring, or optative : compare 427. 
 
 233. Verbs are variously classified. 
 
 1. They are divided into transitive and intransitive, accord- 
 ing to the nature of the relation they sustain to a noun repre- 
 senting the object of their action : a verb that admits an object 
 in the accusative is called transitive ; otherwise, intransitive. 
 
 Thus, transitive verbs, ii^ lobe \^\\ I praise him, er jdjIdQtmid) 
 he strikes me; — intransitive, ic^ \\t^t, er fdflt I stand, he falls, er 
 fd^onet feitie§ Setnbeg he spares his enemy, tcE) banfe 3^nen I thank 
 you. 
 
 a. That the distinction of transitive and intransitive is in part formal 
 rather than essential, has been pointed out above (227. la, 6) ; practically, 
 however, it is one of importance. 
 
 2. Under these classes are distinguished — 
 
 a. Reflexive verbs, which take an object designating the 
 same person or thing with their subject. 
 
 h. Impersonal verbs, used only in the third person singular, 
 and either with an indefinite subject or without an expressed 
 subject. 
 
236] SIMPLE FOEMS OF, THE VEEB. , 101 
 
 3. Transitive verbs, again, fornl by'"tl]LeTielp bf'ah auxiliaiy 
 verb a passive voice, denoting the suffering of an action, and 
 talcing as its subject what was the object of the transitive verb : 
 which latter, by contrast with the other, is said to be of the 
 
 ACTIVE VOICE. 
 
 4. Nearly all verbs, moreover, admit of being compounded 
 with certain prefixes, of a prepositional character ; with refer- 
 ence to such composition, therefore, they are distinguished as 
 
 SIMPLE and COMPOUND. 
 
 234. The general rules of conjugation apply alike to all verbs, 
 of whatever class they may be. They will be first stated and 
 illustrated in their application to simple personal verbs in the 
 active voice. 
 
 SIMPLE FORMS OF THE VERB. 
 
 235. The German verb has the same simple forms 
 as the English, namely : 
 
 1. Two tenses, the present, and the preterit, or indef- 
 inite past 
 
 a. The value and use of these tenses nearly correspond in the 
 two languages. But the present is sometimes employed in place 
 of our perfect, or our future ; and the limits of the preterit and 
 the perfect are also not precisely the same in both : see 324 etc. 
 
 2. These tenses are formed each in two modes, the 
 indicative and the subjunctive. 
 
 a. The subjunctive is nearly extinct in English : the German 
 subjunctive is employed sometimes for our potential and con- 
 ditional ; others of its uses have no correspondent in English : 
 see 329 etc. 
 
 b. The rendering of the subjunctive tenses in the paradigms, 
 therefore, by may and might is only conventional, and for the 
 sake of uniformity; such rendering gives but one of their 
 various meanings. 
 
 3. Each tense is declined in two numhers, with three 
 persons in each number, as in English. 
 
 4. Of an imperative mode there are two persons, the 
 second singular and the second plural. 
 
 5. An infinitive, or verbal noun (339). 
 
102 
 
 VEEBS. 
 
 [235- 
 
 6. Two PAETiciPLES, or verbal adjectives (349): one 
 present and active ; the other past, and prevailingly 
 passive. 
 
 a. The infinitive and participles are not proper verbal forms, since 
 they contain no idea of predication. They present the verbal idea in 
 the condition of noun and of adjective respectively; but, as regards 
 their adjuncts, they share in the construction of their corresponding 
 verbal forms : see 348 and 357. 
 
 236. Examples : 
 
 1. Iteben love (root, IteB). 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 pers. singular. 
 
 1 \6) lieBe Hove 
 
 2 bu liebft thou lovest 
 
 3 er (iebt he loves 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 1 W'w lieben we love 
 
 2 x^x Hebt ye love 
 
 3 fie lieben they love 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 Present 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 \(i) liebe / may love 
 
 bu Itebeft thou mayest love 
 
 er Hebe he may love 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 tvxv lieben ive may love 
 
 xi)X liebet ye may love 
 
 fie lieben they may love 
 
 Preterit, 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 1 id§ liebte I loved id^ liebte, =bete I might love 
 
 2 bu liebteft thou lovedst bu liebteft, :=beteft thou mightest love 
 
 3 er liebte he loved er liebte, -bete he might love 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 1 U)ir Itebteu we loved 
 
 2 i^r liebtet ye loved 
 
 3 fie liebten they loved 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Wix liebten, =beten we might love 
 xijx liebtet, ==betet ye might love 
 fie liebten, ==beten they might love 
 
 Imperative, 
 singular. 
 2 liebe, liebe bu love thou 
 
 Infinitive. 
 lieben to love 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 liebt, liebt xl)x 
 
 love ye 
 
 Participles. 
 
 Present. 
 liebenb loving 
 
 Past. 
 geliebt loved 
 
236] 
 
 SIMPLE FOEMS OF THE VEEB. 
 
 103 
 
 Bemarks. 1. This verb illustrates the mode of inflection of 
 verbs of the New or weak conjugation, corresponding with what 
 are wont to be called " regular verbs " in English. The special 
 rules concerning the inflection of such verbs are given below : 
 see 246 etc. 
 
 2. The forms liebeft and liebct may be used also in the present 
 indicative and the imperative, as well as UeBete etc. in the preterit 
 indicative, and geliebet in the past participle ; see below, 237.3.C. 
 
 2. geben give (root, geb). 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVK 
 
 Present, 
 
 1 tdf) gebe I give . id^ gebe 
 
 2 bit giebft, giOft thou givest bu gebeft 
 
 3 er glebt, gibt he gives er gebe 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 / may give 
 thou mayest give 
 he may give 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 1 tt)ir geben we give 
 
 2 \i)x gebt ye give 
 
 3 fie geben they give 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 tt)tr geben we may give 
 \S)x gebet ye may give 
 fie geben they may give 
 
 Preterit, 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 1 \6) gab 
 
 2 bn gabft 
 
 3 er gab 
 
 / gave 
 thou gavest 
 he gave 
 
 i(^ gabe 
 bn gab eft 
 er gcibe 
 
 / might give 
 thou mightest give 
 he might give 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 1 n)ir gaben 
 
 2 i^r gabt 
 
 3 fie gaben 
 
 we gave 
 ye gave 
 they gave 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 iDir gdben 
 ibr gcibet 
 fie gaben 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 2 gieb, gib bn give thou 
 
 Present. 
 gebenb giving 
 
 Infinitive. 
 geben to give 
 
 Participles. 
 
 we might give 
 ye might give 
 they might give 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Q^thi, gebt \^x give ye 
 
 Past 
 
 gegeben given 
 
104 YEEBS. [236- 
 
 Bemarks. 1. This verb illustrates the mode of inflection of 
 verbs of the Old or strong conjugation, corresponding with 
 what are wont to be called "irregular verbs" in English. The 
 special rules concerning the inflection of such verbs are given 
 below: see 261 etc. 
 
 2. The forms geBet, QaBeft, Qobtt (for gebt, fiabft, Qobt) are 
 occasionally met with ; also gaBft, Qobi (for gabeft, Qabel). For 
 the double forms giebft, gibft, etc., see 268.16. 
 
 237. General Rules respecting the Simple Forms of the Verb. 
 
 1. Of the forms thus given, three are called the 
 PKiNcrPAL PARTS, because, when they are known, all the 
 others can be inferred from them : these are the infin- 
 itive, the 1st pers. sing. preterit, and the -pBist participle: 
 thus, lieBen, Itebte, geliebt; geben, ^ab, gegeben. 
 
 or. The infinitive always ends in n, and almost always 
 in en. The rejection of this n or en gives us the eoot 
 (3935) of the verb. 
 
 Not ending in en are only fein he, iljnn do, and infinitives from 
 roots of more than one syllable ending in I or r, as tt)anbeln walk, 
 tDonbern wander. 
 
 K There are, as the examples show, two ways of 
 forming the preterit and past participle : the preterit 
 adding ete or te to the root, or else adding nothing, but 
 changing the radical vowel ; the participle taking the 
 ending et or t, or else en or n. According to these dif- 
 ferences, verbs are divided into two conjugations (see 
 below, 246). 
 
 2. The endings of tense inflection are 
 
 first pers. singular, e, — first pers. plural, en, n 
 
 second pers. " eft, ft, e, — second pers. " et, t 
 third pers. " et, t, e, — third pers. " en, n 
 
 The rules for their use are as follows : 
 
 a. The first persons sing. pres. indicative and subjunctive 
 are the same, and formed by adding e to the simple root. 
 
 Exceptions are only bin am, f ei may he, and the pres. indicative 
 of the modal auxiharies (see 251.3), and toiffen Imow (260). 
 
237] SIMPLE FORMS OP THE VERB. 105 
 
 h. The first (and third) pers. singular of the preterit sub- 
 junctive, and of the preterit indicative except in verbs of the 
 Old or strong conjugation (269.1.1), also end in e. 
 
 3. a. The third pers. sing. pres. indicative has the ending t or 
 ct (our th, s in loveth, laves) : in all the other tenses, the third 
 person is like the first. 
 
 Exceptions : without the ending t are only the modal auxiliaries 
 (see 251.3), and a few other verbs (268.5). 
 
 h. The ending of all second persons singular (except in the 
 imperative) is ft or eft (our sHn Invest); of all first and third 
 persons plural (excepting only finb are), en or n ; of all second 
 persons plural (with the single exception fetb are) et or t. 
 
 c. The retention or rejection of the vowel e of the endings eft, 
 et (also of e before the te forming the preterit of one conjuga- 
 tion) depends partly on euphony, partly on arbitrary choice. 
 The e must always be used when the final letter of the root is 
 such that the consonant of the ending would not otherwise be 
 distinctly heard— thus, we may say liebeft or liebft, but only 
 lief eft readest, tangeft dancest; liebt or \kM, but only bittet begs, 
 rebet talks — also, when a harsh or unpronounceable combination 
 of consonants would otherwise occur— thus, only at^meft [atmeft], 
 atfimet [atmet] hreathest, breathes; fe^neft, fegnet blessest, blesses. 
 In other cases, the writer or speaker is allowed to choose 
 between the fuller and the briefer form ; the latter being more 
 familiar or colloquial, the former more used in stately and 
 solemn styles. But the e is more often retained in the sub- 
 junctive, and especially when the distinction of subjunctive and 
 indicative depends upon it. 
 
 The e of the ending en of the first and third persons plural is 
 rarely dropped except after unaccented er or el, in the indicative. 
 
 Special rules affecting some of the forms of the Old or strong 
 conjugation will be given below (268-9). 
 
 d. The final imaccented e of all verbal forms (as of all other 
 words in the language) is not imfrequently cut off, especially in 
 poetry, and in colloquial style. An apostrophe should always 
 be used, to show the omission ; but this is sometimes neglected. 
 
 4 The inflection of tlie tenses is always regular, ex- 
 cept in the second and third persons singular of the 
 pres. indicative, which often show a difference of vowel 
 or of consonant, or both, from the other persons of the 
 
y 
 
 106 VERBS. [237- 
 
 tense. The same irregularities appear in part also in 
 the imperative singular (see 268, 270). 
 
 5. The imperative singular ends in e in nearly all verbs (for 
 exceptions, see 270.2) ; the plural is the same with the second 
 pers. pi. indie, present. Both numbers admit of use, as in Eng- 
 lish, either with or without a subject pronoun. 
 
 For the filling up of the imperative with subjunctive forms, 
 see 243.1. 
 
 6. The form of the present participle may always be 
 found by adding b to the infinitive. 
 
 Only t!)un cto and fein be form t^uenb, (eienb. 
 
 7. The past participle has usually the prefix j^e. For 
 exceptions, see 243.3. 
 
 8. Notice that the third pers. plural of all verbal forms is used 
 also in the sense of a second person, singular or plural 
 (see 153.4), its subject fie being then written with a capital : thus, 
 <5ie liebcn you love, 8ie gab en you gave. 
 
 (Exercise 14. Simple Forms of the Verb.) 
 
 COMPOUND FOKMS OF THE VEKB. 
 
 238. As in the case of the English verb, again, the 
 scheme of German conjugation is filled up with a large 
 number of compound forms, made by the aid of 
 auxiliary verbs. 
 
 239. Conjugation of the Auxiliaries of Tense. 
 
 The auxiliaries used in the formation of the tenses 
 of ordinary conjugation are three : namely, Ijabcn have, 
 fein he, tDerben become. The simple forms of these verbs 
 are as follows : ^ 
 
 1. §aben : — principal parts t)aben, l^atte, gcljabt. 
 
 Indicative. Subjunctive. 
 
 Present. 
 
 SINGULAR. SINGULAR. 
 
 1 ic^ ^abe I ham ic^ ^abe I may have 
 
 2 bu ^aft tlwu ha4 bit Ijabeft thou mayest have 
 
 3 er ^ai he has cr \jciiK he may have 
 
239] 
 
 PLURAL 
 
 2 \[)x ])aht 
 
 3 " ' ' 
 
 AUXILIARIES OF TENSE. 
 
 107 
 
 fie ^aben 
 
 we have 
 y[e have 
 they have 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 1 id^ '^atte"" ^ ^ rhad 
 
 2 bu ^atteft \Xj'^u hadst 
 
 3 er f)aitt^)^ he had 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 I tvxx 'fatten s , we had 
 
 i^r ^attet 
 fie fatten 
 
 ye had 
 they had 
 
 Present. 
 
 tt)ir Ijaben 
 fie ^aben 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 we may have 
 ye may have 
 they may have 
 
 iPreterit. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 x6) f)aii^ 
 bu ^atteft 
 er l^citte 
 
 / might have 
 thou mightest have 
 he might have 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 irtr fatten ive might have 
 \f)X f)dttet ye might have 
 fie Ijdtten they might have 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 SINGT 
 
 f;abe have thou 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 ^abt have ye 
 
 Infinitive. 
 l^aben to have 
 
 Participles. 
 Present. 
 l^abenb having 
 
 Past 
 ge'^abt had 
 
 2. (Sein he: — principal parts fetn, Voax, cjeUjefcn. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 singular. 
 
 1 \6) bin I am 
 
 2 bu bift thou art 
 
 3 er ift he is 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 1 \mx finb we are 
 
 2 if)r feib ye are 
 
 3 fie finb they are 
 
 Present. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 td§ fet I may be 
 
 bu feieft thou mayest be 
 
 er fei he may be 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 tvxx feien 
 i^r fcict 
 fie foicu 
 
 we may be 
 ye maybe 
 they may be 
 
108 
 
 VEBBS. 
 
 [239- 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 idf) tvax I was 
 bu tuarft thou wast 
 er toax he was 
 
 PLURAIi. 
 
 tt)ir tt)aren we were 
 \i)x tvaxtt ye were 
 fie tuaren they were 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 2 fei be thou 
 
 Preterit, 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 id^ tDcire / mty/i^ be 
 
 bu hjareft //iow mightest be 
 
 er tt)dre /le mi^Ti^ be 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 iDtr iDaren ii?e might be 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 i^r tuaret 
 fie tDciren 
 
 ye might be 
 they might be 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 feib be ye 
 
 fein 
 
 to be 
 
 Participles. 
 Present. 
 fetenb being gettjefen been 
 
 3. SSerben becorm: — principal parts tuerben, tvaxh or 
 
 ttjurbe, getDorben. 
 
 Indicative. Subjunctive. 
 
 Present. 
 
 SINGULAR. SINGULAR. 
 
 1 i6) ttjerbe / become id^ lt)erbe / may become 
 
 2 bu tDirft ^/iow becomest bu tr»erbeft //loit mayest etc. 
 
 3 er tt)irb Ae becomes cr U)erbe Ae may become 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 1 tDir tDerben if^ become 
 
 2 i()r tDerbet ye become 
 
 3 fie tDerben ^/iey become 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 iDir tuerben i^e may become 
 \l)X iDerbet ye may become 
 fie trerbeu they may become 
 
 Preterit. 
 
 SINGULAR. SINGULAR. 
 
 1 id^ UJarb, I became id^ tt)iirbe I might become 
 
 iDurbe 
 
 2 bu marbft, thou becamest bu iDiirbeft thou mightest etc. 
 
 iDurbeft 
 
 3 er tDarb, he became er tDiirbe he might become 
 
 tpurbe 
 
239J AUXnJARIES OP TENSE. 109 
 
 PLUBAL. PLURAL. 
 
 1 Wiv tDurben loe became ttjir iDiirben loe might become 
 
 2 i^r tDurbet ye became i^r tDiirbet ye might become 
 
 3 fie murben they became fie tDiirben they might become 
 
 Imperative, 
 singular. plural. 
 
 2 njerbe become thou tuerbet become ye 
 
 Infinitive. 
 IDerben to become 
 
 Participles. 
 Present. Past. 
 
 trerbenb becoming getnorben become 
 
 4. Irregularities in the Conjugation of these Verbs. 
 
 a. §aben is analogous in its conjugation with lieben, above, 
 but the frequency of its use has led to abbreviation of a few 
 of its forms. Thus, {)aft and f^at are for older l^abft and l^abt, 
 and ^atte for l^abte. The modification of the vowel in l^dtte, 
 pret. subj., is against the prevailing analogy of verbs of its class 
 (see 250.2). 
 
 b. ©ein is of the same conjugation with gebcn, above. Its 
 irregularity, which is far greater than that of any other verb in 
 the language, comes mainly from its being made up of forms 
 derived from three independent roots : bin and bift are from the 
 same root as our be, being, been (original form bhu; Lat. /m, 
 Greek phuo) ; the rest of the present from the same root as our 
 pres. indicative am etc. (original form as; Lat. sum, etc., Greek 
 eimi); while the preterit wax and past participle, Qett)efen, are 
 from the root of our was, were (original form vas, dwell, abide. 
 
 Some authors still retain eij for ei (see 19.3) in fein, in order to 
 distinguish it from the possessive fein (157). 
 
 c. SBerben is a nearly regular verb of the same conjugation 
 with fleben. For its persons mirft and mxh, see below, 268.5. In 
 the double form of its pret. ind. singular, it preserves a solitary 
 relic' of a condition once belonging to many verbs in the lan- 
 guage, whose preterits had a different vowel in the singular and 
 plural. SBarb is the original form, and n)urbe is a quite- modern 
 and anomalous fabrication, made after the analogy of the plural 
 wurben^ 
 
no VEEBS. [240- 
 
 240. Formation of the Compound Tenses. 
 
 1. From ^akn or fetn, with tlie past participle of any 
 verb, are formed a perfect and a pluperfect tense, in- 
 dicative and subjunctive, and a perfect infinitive. 
 
 a. The Perfect tense, indicative and subjunctive, is formed 
 by adding the past participle to tlie present tense of l^aBen or of 
 fein : thus, trf) l)abe oeliebt I have loved, or I maij have laved, id) 
 bin gefommen I have (dm) come, id) fei gefomtnen I may have 
 come. 
 
 h. The Pluperfect adds the participle to the preterit of the 
 auxiUary : thus, [^ ^atte gelieBt J had hved, \^ ^^citte gelieBt I 
 might have loved, id) tDar gefommcn I had (was) come, i^ waxt 
 gefommen I might have come. 
 
 c. But the modal auxiliaries (251) and a few other verbs 
 (namely laffcti, I)ci^en, I)elfen, l^oren, fe^^en, le'^ren and lerncn— the 
 last two not uniformly), when construed with another verb in 
 the infinitive, form their perfect and pluperfect tenses by adding 
 the infinitive instead of the participle to the auxiliary (see 261.4). 
 
 d. The Perfect Infinitive prefixes the participle to the sim- 
 ple or present infinitive : thus, gelieBt ^ahtn to have loved, ge^- 
 fommen fein to have come. 
 
 e. "What verbs take 'tjdbm and what take fein as their auxiUary, 
 will be explained below (see 241). Por omission of the auxiliary, 
 see 439.3a. 
 
 2. From ti:)erben, with the infinitives, present and past, 
 of the verb, are formed a future and a future perfect 
 tense, indicative and subjunctive, and a conditional and 
 conditional perfect. 
 
 a. The Future tense, indicative and subjunctive, is formed by 
 prefixing to the present infinitive the present tense, indicative 
 and subjimctive, of tDcrben: thus, i^ merbe lieben or fommen I 
 shall love or come. 
 
 h. The Future Perfect prefixes the same tenses to the per- 
 fect infinitive: thus, i(^ tt)crbe gelicbt ^aben I shall have loved, 
 id) merbe gefommen fein I shall have come. 
 
 c. The Conditional and Conditional Perfect are formed by 
 prefixing to the present and perfect infinitive the preterit sub- 
 junctive of iBerben : thus, \i^ n)iirbe lieben or fommen I should love 
 or come; i(^ miirbe geltebt l^aben I should have loved, \6) miirbe 
 gefommen fein IsJiould have come. 
 
241] COMPOUND TENSES. Ill 
 
 3. The uses of these tenses so nearly agree with those of the 
 corresponding English phrases with which they are translated 
 that they need no explanation here : for details, see 323 etc. 
 
 4. The German is the only one of the Germanic languages which, in 
 its modern extension of the conjugational system by composition, has 
 chosen iDerben as its auxiliary for forming the future tenses. 3d) tnerbe 
 geben, hterally lam becoming io give, receives a future meaning through 
 the idea of I am coming into a condition of giving, i. e. I am going to give. 
 
 a. In the tenses formed with l)al)en, the participle is originally one 
 qualifying the object of the verb in the manner of an objective predi- 
 cate, or expressing the condition in which Ihae (possess, hold) the 
 object. This, as being the constructive result of a previous action, is 
 accepted as a description of that action, and ic^ ^abe bie ^ilrme auggeftved t, 
 for example, from meaning I have my arms stretched out, comes to signify 
 J have stretched out my arms. 
 
 h. On the other hand, in the tenses formed with feiu, the participle is 
 originally one qualifying the subject in the manner of a direct predicate, 
 and defining a state or condition in which the subject exists. This, in 
 English, has become (by a process quite analogous with that just above 
 described) also a passive, or an expression for the enduring of the action 
 which produced that condition. But the German uses (see below, 275) 
 another auxiliary to form its passives, and, in its combination of fein 
 with the participle, it only adds to the assertion of condition the less 
 violent implication that the action leading to the condition is a past 
 one : ic^ bin gefomnien lam here, being come : i. e., my action of coming 
 is a thing of the past; or, I have come. 
 
 c. In strictness, then, t)aben should form the past tenses only of trans- 
 itive verbs, and when they take an object; and fein, only of intransitives 
 which express a condition of their subject. But, as have in English has 
 extended its use until it has become the auxiliary of all verbs without 
 exception, so, in German, l}aben has come to be used with transitive 
 verbs even when tLey do not take an object, and with such intransitives 
 as are in meaning most akin with these ; until the rules for the employ- 
 ment of the two have become as stated in the next paragraph. 
 
 241. Use of Ijahcn or fcin as Auxiliary of Tense, 
 1. Yerbs which take Ijiibcn as auxiliary are 
 
 a. All transitive verbs (including the reflexives and 
 the modal auxiliaries). 
 
 b. Almost all intransitives which take an object in the 
 genitive (219.5) or the dative (222.II.la). 
 
 _— jC— A^argcfnumber of other intransitiv^.s, especially 
 such as denote a simple activity, a lasting condition, or 
 
112 VERBS. [241- 
 
 a mode of motion (including all the proper impersonal 
 verbs). 
 
 2. Verbs wliicli take fetn for auxiliary, as exceptions 
 under the above classes, are — 
 
 a. Especially, many intransitives which signify a 
 change of condition, or a movement of transition, from 
 a point of departure or toward a point of arrival. 
 
 These intransitives are partly such as do not take an object — 
 as, tt)erben become, fommen come, f aHen/aW, finfen sink, trac^fen grow, 
 fterben die, berften hurst, erftarren stiffen, erlofd^en become extin- 
 guished, einf(^Iafen fall asleep, guriirftreten retreat;— ^a.vt\j such as 
 may take a dative object in virtue of the meaning given them 
 by a prefix: as, entlaufen run away from, tt)iberfaftren happen to, 
 cntQCQenQe'^en go to meet, auffaHen strike the attention of. 
 
 b. A few others, without reference to their meaning : namely, 
 of verbs that take an objective dative, begefitten meet, folgen 
 follow, tceiij^en give way, gelingen and gliiden turn out success- 
 fully (with their opposites, mi^IinQen and mi^glurfen) : also jein 
 be, Heiben remain, gc'^en go. 
 
 3. A small number of verbs may take either auxiliary. 
 
 a. Some that are used with different meanings : as, ber ®edeb 
 l&at aufaeftanben the cover has stood open, mein 33ruber ift auf* 
 ficftanben my brother has got up. 
 
 b. About twenty verbs of motion, which take ^aben when the 
 act of motion or its kind are had^'in view (as in answer to the 
 questions liow, how long, when, where ?), but f ein when reference 
 is had to a starting-point or an end of motion (as in answer to 
 the questions whence, whither, Jww far?): thus, ber ^nabe ^at 
 fiefpruttQcn the boy has jumped, but er ift t)Dm 33aume gcfprungen 
 he has jumped from the tree; fie l^aben t)iel gereift they have 
 travelled muxih, but er ift na^ ©nglanb gereift he has gone to 
 England. 
 
 c. ©te^en stand, liegen lie, fifeen sit (especially the first), are 
 sometimes conjugated with fetn, but properly take ^aben under 
 all circumstances. 
 
 242. Oth^er verbal Auxiliaries. 
 
 Besides the three heretofore spoken of, there are a number 
 of verbs, generally or often used with other verbs, to impress 
 upon them modifications of meaning more or less analogous 
 
243] AUXILIARIES. 113 
 
 with those expressed by the forms of conjugation of some lan- 
 guages. Such are 
 
 1. The MODAL AUXILIARIES, of wMch there are six : fonnen can, 
 moQm may, hixx^m he permitted, mn\\^n must, ]oUtr\ shall, tDoIIen 
 will. They have, however, a much more independent value and 
 use in German than in English, and are not to be treated as 
 bearing any part in the ordinary verbal conjugation. Their 
 peculiarities of inflection and construction will be explained 
 below (251 etc.). 
 
 2. The CAUSATIVE auxiliaey, laffen, which (as one among many 
 uses) is often employed in a causal sense with the infinitive of 
 another verb : as, einen ^od mad)cn to make a coat, einen D^orf 
 macf)en lafjen to have a coat made (cause to make it) : see 343.1.5. 
 
 3. ^"^un do (267-5), which we employ freely as auxihary in 
 Enghsh, is not used as such in German. Some of the German 
 dialects, indeed, make an auxiliary of it ; and it is now and then 
 found having that value even in the literary language : thus, 
 unb tl^ u' nid)t me^r in SSorten framen and do no longer peddle out 
 words. 
 
 243. Other points in general conjugation, affecting the Impera- 
 tive, Infinitive, and Past Participle. 
 
 1. The third pers. singular, and the first and third pers. 
 plural, of the present subjunctive are very commonly used in an 
 imperative sense (see 331), and may be regarded as filling up 
 the defective declension of that mood. Thus, for the two verbs 
 first given, 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Singular, Plural. 
 
 1 licben U)ir let u^ love 
 
 2 lieBc, liebe bu love liebet, liebt xijt love 
 
 3 liebc cr let him love lieBen fie let them love 
 
 1 Qebett tt)ir let us give 
 
 2 Qxtb, gib bu give gebt, Qebet iftr give 
 
 3 gebe er let him give geben fie let them give 
 
 Of these forms, the third plural is in especially frequent use 
 as substitute for the second person of either number (153.4) : 
 thus, gcben ©ie mir ba§ 33u(^ give me the hook. 
 
 Other imperative phrases — as, er foil (jeben he shall give, Ia§ 
 un§ fleben, la^t un§ geben, laffen 6ie un§ geben let us give-^-avQ 
 more or less employed, but need no special remark. 
 
114 VERBS. [243- 
 
 2. The infinitive, as in English (though not so commonly), takes 
 often the preposition gu to as its sign ; this is always placed 
 next before the simple infinitive form : thus, gu QeBen, gegeben gu 
 
 For details respecting the use of p, see 341 etc. 
 
 3. The past participle of nearly all verbs has the prefix ge. 
 Exceptions are 
 
 a. Verbs that begin with an unaccented syllable, especially 
 1. Those ending in the infinitive in iren or ieren (being verbs de- 
 rived from the French or Latin, or others formed after their 
 model) : as marfd^iren [mar((^ieren] march, part, rtiarfc^irt [=fd)icrt] ; 
 ftubiren [ftubieren] study, part, flubirt [=biert]. 2. Those com- 
 pounded with an inseparable, and therefore unaccented, prefix : 
 as, t)ergeben forgive, part. jjerQeben. 3. A few others, such as 
 prop^^eaeien prophesy, Irompeten trumpet. 
 
 b. SSerben, when used as passive auxiliary, forms U) orb en 
 instead of getoorben (see 276.1aj. 
 
 c. The syllable ge was not originally an element of verbal inflection, 
 but is one of the class of inseparable prefixes (see 307.5). It was 
 formerly used or omitted as special prefix to the participle without 
 any traceable rule, and has only in modem times become fixed as its 
 nearly invariable accompaniment. Hence, in archaic style and in 
 poetry, it is still now and then irregularly dropped. 
 
 \^^^Synopsls of the complete conjugation o/^aBen and jein. 
 
 The synopsis of iDerben will be given later, in connection with 
 that of the passive voice of the verb (277). 
 
 Indicative. 
 Present, I have etc, /am etc, 
 
 s. I tjobt Bin 
 
 Peeteeit, I had etc. I was etc. 
 
 s. I ^latte tDor 
 
 Pebfect, I have had etc. I have been etc. 
 
 s. I l^aBe ge^abt Bin gettjefen 
 
 Plupeefect, I had had etc. I had been etc. 
 
 s. I ^atk Qti)aU \oax getoefen 
 
 FuTUEE, I shaU have etc. I shall he etc. 
 
 s. I U)erbe %aBen n)erbe fein 
 
 FuTUEE Peefect, I sholl have had etc. I shall have been etc. 
 
 s. I merbe ge^aBt l^aBen merbe gemejen fein 
 
245] AUXILIARIES. 115 
 
 SUBJTJNPTIVE. 
 
 Pbesent, I may have etc. Immj he etc. 
 
 s. I ftaBe fei 
 
 Peetekit, I might have etc. I might he etc. 
 
 s. I \aiit tt)dre 
 
 Peefect, I may have had etc. I may hxive heen etc. 
 
 s. I l^aBc %t))aU jei fletDcjcn 
 
 PiiUPEEFECT, I might have had etc. I might have heen etc. 
 
 s. I fjcitte ge!)abt iDare Qewefen 
 
 FuTUEE, J s^aZ/ Aaue etc. / shall he etc. 
 
 s. I merbe ftaBen tuerbe fein 
 
 FuTUEE Peefect, I shall have had etc. I shall have heen etc. 
 
 s. I tDerbe gel^abt ^aben merbe flemefen jein 
 
 Conditional. 
 Conditional, I should have etc. I should he etc. 
 
 s. I miirbe ^^aben tt)urbe fein 
 
 Cond'l Peefect, I should have had etc. I should have heen etc, 
 
 s. I tDiirbe ge^abt ijaUn miirbe getuejeu fein 
 
 Impeeative. 
 have etc. 6e etc. 
 
 s. 2 :f)abe fei 
 
 * Infinitives. 
 Peesent, to have to he 
 
 l^aben fein 
 
 Peefect, to have had to have heen 
 
 gel^abt l^aben getDefen fein 
 
 Participles. 
 Peesent, having heing 
 
 l^abenb feienb 
 
 Past, had heen 
 
 gel^abt fleniefen 
 
 [Exercise 15. Simple and Compound Forms of the Auxiliaries.] 
 
 CONJUGATIONS OF VERBS. 
 
 245. Yerbs are inflected in two modes, called respect- 
 ively the Old or Strong, and the New or Weak conju- 
 gations. 
 
116 VEEBS. [246- 
 
 246. 1. Verbs of the Old or Strong conjugation form 
 tlieir preterit by a change of the vowel of the root, with- 
 out any added ending, and their past participle by the 
 ending en : thus, geben, (\ab, gec^eben ; fingen, fang, gefnngen. 
 
 2. Verbs of the New or Weak conjugation form their 
 preterit by adding te or ete to the root, and their par- 
 ticiple by the ending et or t: thus, (ieben, liebte, geltebt; 
 reben, rebete, gerebet. 
 
 3. The Old and New Conjugations correspond to what have been 
 generally called in English the "Irregular" and *'Eegular " verbs. The 
 former, as the name implies, is the more primitive method of inflection ; 
 its preterit was originally a reduplicated tense, like the Greek and Latin 
 perfects (as dedoka, tetigi) ; and, in the oldest Germanic languages, many 
 verbs have retained the reduplication (as I)ai^atb held, from l^atban hold: 
 jaiflep slept, from ftepatt sleep). By phonetic corruption and abbrevia- 
 tion, however, this reduplication led to an alteration of the radical 
 vowel, and then was itself dropped, in the great majority of verbs ; pro- 
 ducing phenomena of conjugation so various that there was left no 
 prevailing and guiding analogy by which to inflect the new derivative 
 verbs, that were brought in as needed, to supplement the old resources 
 of expression. Hence the need of a new method of conjugation ; which 
 was obtained by adding the preterit of the verb do (did) to the theme 
 of conjugation. The preterit-ending te of the New conjugation is the reUc 
 of this auxiliary (as, in English, I loved stands for an original I love-did). 
 
 The Old conjugation therefore includes the more primitive verbs of 
 the language ; the New, all those of later origin. Only, as the latter have 
 become the larger class, and their mode of conjugation the prevailing 
 one, some of the old verbs (although to by no means such an extent as 
 in English) have been changed, in part or altogether, to conform to it. 
 See below, 272. ^ 
 
 The wholly fanciful names "Strong" and "Weak," now generally 
 adopted, are the invention of Jacob Grimm (compare 73, 132). 
 
 We shall take up first the New conjugation, as being simpler 
 in its forms, and easiest to learn. 
 
 NEW OE WEAK CONJUGATION. 
 
 247. The characteristics of the New or Weak con- 
 jugation are that its preterit ends in te, and its participle 
 in t. 
 
NEW OB WEAK CONJUGATION. 
 
 117 
 
 248, Examples : reben tolh, manbern wander. 
 Principal Parts. 
 reben, rebete, gerebet wonbern, wanberte, Qewanbert 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Peesent, IMk etc. 
 
 I wander etc. 
 
 s. I rebe 
 
 2 rebeft 
 
 3 rebet 
 
 tt)onbere, tt)anbre 
 
 tt)anberft 
 
 ttjanbert 
 
 P.I reben 
 
 2 rebet 
 
 3 reben 
 
 tt)anbern 
 tt)anbert 
 wanbern 
 
 Peetekit, I talked etc. 
 
 I wandered QUi. 
 
 s. I rebete 
 
 2 rebeteft 
 
 3 rebete 
 
 tDanberte 
 
 tt)anberteft 
 
 n)anberte 
 
 P.I rebeten 
 
 2 rebetet 
 
 3 rebeten 
 
 tt)anberten 
 n)anbertet 
 tt)anberten 
 
 Perfect, I have talked etc. 
 
 I have wandered etc. 
 
 s. I ^aht Qerebet 
 
 2 5aft Qerebet 
 
 3 i)ai Qerebet 
 
 bin getranbert 
 bift gemanbert 
 ift geiDanbert 
 
 p. I ftaben Qerebet 
 
 2 ^abt Qerebet 
 
 3 ^aben Qerebet 
 
 ftnb gen)anbert 
 feib getDanbert 
 finb gett)anbert 
 
 Plijpeefect, I had talked etc. 
 
 IhM wandered etc. 
 
 s. I 5atte gerebet 
 
 2 l^atteft gerebet 
 
 3 ftatte gerebet 
 
 tt)ar QetDanbert 
 XocLX\i gett)anbert 
 xoax getDanbert 
 
 p. I fatten gerebet 
 
 2 ^attet gerebet 
 
 3 fatten gerebet 
 
 tt)aren getronbert 
 Xoaxi getoanbert 
 U)aren gen)anbert 
 
 FuTUEB, I shall talk etc. 
 
 IsMl wander etc. 
 
 s. I merbe reben 
 
 2 tnlrft reben 
 
 3 tuirb reben 
 
 tt)erbe n)anbern 
 tt)irft ttjanbern 
 iDirb tuanbern 
 
118 
 
 VERBS. 
 
 [248^ 
 
 P. I toerbctt rcbctt 
 
 tDerben tDanbern 
 
 2 tt)erbet reben 
 
 merbet manbern 
 
 3 merben reben 
 
 tDerben raanbern 
 
 FuTTJEB Peefect, I shttll have talked etc. 
 
 / sTiall have wandered etc. 
 
 s. I merbc gerebet tjobm 
 
 toerbe getoanbert fein 
 
 2 h)trft fierebet l^aben 
 
 mx\t gett)anbert fein 
 
 3 tDirb gerebet \)ahm 
 
 mxh gemanbert fein 
 
 P. I n)erben oerebet ^aUn 
 
 njerben getranbert fein 
 
 2 merbet gerebet ftaben 
 
 mxhzt geraanbert fein 
 
 3 toerben Qerebet l^aBen 
 
 n)erben gemanbert fein 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 Peesent, I may talk etc. 
 
 I may wander etc. 
 
 s. I rebc 
 
 tt)anbere, njanbre 
 
 2 rebeft 
 
 tt)anbereft, n)anbreft 
 
 3 rebe 
 
 wanbere, iuanbre 
 
 P.I rebcn 
 
 tt)anberen, tranbren 
 
 2 rebet 
 
 tt)Qnberet, nianbret 
 
 3 reben 
 
 toanberen, manbren 
 
 Pbeteeit, I might talk etc. 
 
 I might wander etc. 
 
 s. I rebete 
 
 n)anbertc 
 
 2 rebeteft 
 
 tt)anberteft 
 
 3 rebete 
 
 tt)anberte 
 
 p. I rebeten 
 
 tDanberten; 
 
 2 rebetet 
 
 toanbertet 
 
 3 rebeten 
 
 tt)anberten 
 
 Peefect, Im^y have talked etc. 
 
 I may have wandered etc. 
 
 s. I ^aU gerebet 
 
 fei gemanbert 
 
 2 l^abefl Qerebet 
 
 feiefl geraanbert 
 
 3 ftabe Qerebet 
 
 fei gemanbert 
 
 p. I fiaben gerebet 
 
 feien gemanbert 
 
 2 ^aM oerebet 
 
 feiet getuanbert 
 
 3 Ibaben gerebet 
 
 feien genianbert 
 
 Plupeefect, I might have talked etc. 
 
 I might have wandered etc. 
 
 s. I ptte gerebet 
 
 n)are gemanbert 
 
 2 ptteft gerebet 
 
 tt)dreft gett)anbert 
 
 3 ^citte gerebet 
 
 njdre gemanbert 
 
 p. I !)dtten gerebet 
 
 n)dren gen)anbert 
 
 2 i\aM gerebet 
 
 iDciret getuanbert 
 
 3 Mtten gerebet 
 
 tt)dren gemanbert 
 
248] 
 
 NEW OB WEAK CONJUGATION. 
 
 119 
 
 FuTUEE, Ishcdl talk etc. 
 
 s. I iDcrbe reben 
 
 2 merbeft reben 
 
 3 tDerbe reben 
 
 p. I n)erben reben 
 
 2 tt)erbet reben 
 
 3 ttjerben reben 
 
 FuTUEE Perfect, I shall hxjLve talked etc. 
 
 s. I tt)erbe gerebet ^aben 
 
 2 merbeft gerebet ^dbtn 
 
 3 mxht Qerebet ^dbm 
 
 p. I merben Qerebet ^aben 
 
 2 trerbet flerebet ftaben 
 
 3 toerben gerebet 'iiobtn 
 
 I shall wander etc, 
 
 tt)erbe toanbern 
 werbeft n^anbern 
 IDerbe tcanbern 
 
 toerben manbcm 
 tt)erbet tt)anbern 
 irerben nianbern 
 
 I shall have wandered etc. 
 
 tDerbe gemanbert fein 
 n)erbeft Gett)anbert jein 
 tt)erbe getoanbert fein 
 
 werben gemanbert fein 
 toerbet gett)anbert fein 
 merbcn getDanbert fein 
 
 Conditional. 
 
 Conditional, I should talk etc. 
 
 s. I iriirbe reben 
 
 2 tt)iirbeft reben 
 
 3 tDiirbe reben 
 
 p. I miirben reben 
 
 2 miirbet reben 
 
 3 tt)iirben reben 
 
 CoND. Peef., I should have talked etc. 
 
 s. I n)iirbe gerebet l^aben 
 
 2 miirbefl gerebet l^aben 
 
 3 tt)iirbe gerebet ^aben 
 
 p. I tt)iirben gerebet ftaben 
 
 2 iDiirbet gerebet baben 
 
 3 miirben gerebet l^aben 
 
 I should wander etc. 
 
 n)iirbe n)anbern 
 Wiirbeft njanbern 
 Wiirbe njanbern 
 
 h)iirben n)anbern ♦ 
 
 tDiirbet manbern 
 tDiirben tt)anbern 
 
 I should have wandered etc. 
 
 tt)iirbe gettjanbert fein 
 tDitrbeft gett)anbcrt fein 
 tt)iirbe gett)anbert fein 
 
 tt)iirben geiDanbert fein 
 njiirbet gett)anbert fein 
 miirben gewanbert fein 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 talk etc. 
 
 s. 2 rebe, rebe bn 
 3 rebe er, er rebe 
 
 p. I reben tt)ir 
 
 2 rebet, rebet I'^r 
 
 3 reben fie 
 
 loandfer etc. 
 
 n)anbere, toanbere bu 
 tDanbere er, er tt)anbrc 
 
 tt)anbern tt)ir 
 ttJanbert, tt)anbert if)r 
 wanbern jle 
 
120 
 
 YEEBS. 
 
 £248- 
 
 Infinitive. 
 Present, to talk to vender 
 
 reben, gu rebcn toonbern, gu manbern 
 
 Pbefect, to have talked . to have wandered 
 
 gerebet l^aben, gcrebet 3u l^obcn Qetuanbcrt jetn, Qcmanbcrt gu jetn 
 
 Pbesent, talking 
 rcbenb 
 
 Pabticiples. 
 
 wandmng 
 tDanbernb 
 
 Past, talked 
 gerebet 
 
 ^^ wandered 
 gewanbert 
 
 Bemarks. The conjugation of reben exemplifies the necessity 
 of retention of c of the endings et, ete after a consonant with 
 which t would be confounded in pronunciation. SGSanbern is one 
 of the verbs which (241.36) take sometimes !^aben and some- 
 times |ein as auxiliary. It exemplifies the loss of e of the ending 
 en, and other peculiarities of the combination of endings with 
 verbal roots in el and er. 
 
 Irregularities of the New Conjugation. 
 
 249. A few verbs, all of which have roots ending in nn or nb, 
 change the radical vowel e to a in the preterit indicative (not the 
 ^^bjunctive also) and in t^e past participle. Thus : 
 
 Participle. 
 
 gebrannt 
 
 gefannt 
 
 genannt 
 
 gerannt ^ 
 
 gefanbt 
 
 gemanbt 
 
 a. The last two, fenben and n)enben, may also form the pret. 
 
 indicative and the participle regularly: thus, jenbete, gefenbet; 
 
 ttjenbete, gemenbet. 
 
 250. 1. Two verbs, Brtngen hring and benfen think, are still 
 more irregular, and agree closely in their forms with the corr 
 responding EngUsh verbs. Thus : 
 
 Infinitive. Preterit. Participle. 
 
 indicative. subjunctive. 
 
 brlngen hring bra(f)te brdc^te gebrad)t 
 
 benfen think ba(i)te Va^ii gebacC)! 
 
 InfinUive. 
 
 brennen hum 
 fennen krww 
 
 Preterit. 
 indicative. subjunctive. 
 
 brannte brennte 
 fannte fennte 
 
 nennen 
 
 name 
 
 nannte nenntc 
 
 rennen 
 fenben 
 tt)enben 
 
 run 
 send 
 turn 
 
 rannte renntc 
 fanbte fenbete 
 tDanbte wenbete 
 
251] 
 
 MODAL AUXILIARIES. 
 
 121 
 
 2. The irregularities of ^aBen have been given in full above 
 (239.4:a) ; bringen, benfen, and fjobtn, with some of the modal 
 auxiliaries, are the only verbs of the New or weak conjugation 
 which modify in the preterit suhj. the vowel of the indicative, 
 like the verbs of the Old or strong conjugation (269.11). 
 
 V 
 
 [Exercise 16. Yerbs of the New or Weak Conjugation.] 
 
 251. Modal Auxiliaries. 
 
 1. These are (as already-noticed) 
 
 biirfen be allowed miiffen must 
 
 jjonnen can 
 
 jollen shall 
 tDolIen will 
 
 tnoQen may 
 
 2. While the corresponding verbs in English are both 
 defective and irregular, these have in German a com- 
 plete conjugation (only lacking, except in tuoUen, the 
 imperative), but with the following irregularities : 
 
 a. For the singular of the present indicative are 
 substituted forms which properly belong to a preterit 
 of the Old conjugation. 
 
 These are, in fact, relics of an ancient preterit used in the sense of a, 
 present— thus, fann can is literally I have learned how, foE shallis I have 
 owed, mag may is I have gained the power ^ — and the rest of their conjuga- 
 tion is of more modern origin. 
 
 h. Those which have a modified vowel in the infinitive 
 reject the modification in the preterit indicative and the 
 past participle. 
 
 c. All the rest of their inflection is regular, according 
 to the rules of the New conjugation (except that ntogen 
 changes its c\iod) before t in the preterit and participle). 
 
 3. Thus, the simple forms are — 
 Indicative Peesent. 
 
 S.I barf 
 
 !ann 
 
 mag 
 
 mufe 
 
 foil 
 
 tt)ill 
 
 2 borfft 
 
 fannft 
 
 tnagft 
 
 mu^t 
 
 fonft 
 
 miflft 
 
 3 barf 
 
 !ann 
 
 mag 
 
 mu| 
 
 foH 
 
 tt)ill 
 
 P. I biirfen 
 
 fonnen 
 
 mogen 
 
 miiffen 
 
 follen 
 
 moEen 
 
 2 biirft 
 
 fonnt 
 
 mogt 
 
 mii^t 
 
 foEt 
 
 tDOEt 
 
 3 biirfen 
 
 fonnen 
 
 mogen 
 
 miiffen 
 
 foHen 
 
 moHen 
 
122 
 
 YERBS. 
 
 [261- 
 
 Indicative Peeteeit. 
 
 S.I burfte 
 
 etc. 
 
 fonnte 
 
 etc. 
 
 mo(5^te 
 
 etc. 
 
 mu^te 
 
 etc. 
 
 foEte 
 
 etc. 
 
 n)oflte 
 
 etc 
 
 Subjunctive Peesbnt. 
 
 
 
 
 
 S.I biirfe 
 
 etc. 
 
 fonne 
 
 etc. 
 
 moge 
 
 etc. 
 
 miiffe 
 
 etc. 
 
 fone 
 
 etc. 
 
 ttJoKe 
 
 etc. 
 
 Subjunctive Peeteeit. 
 
 , 
 
 
 
 
 S.I biirfte 
 
 etc. 
 
 fonnte 
 
 etc. 
 
 mo(?^tc 
 
 etc. 
 
 miifete 
 
 etc. 
 
 foUtC 
 etc. 
 
 tDoUte 
 
 etc. 
 
 Impeeative. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 S.2 
 
 
 
 
 
 moUe 
 
 P. 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 tt)om 
 
 Paeticiples. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Pres. biirfenb 
 Past geburft 
 
 fonnenb 
 gefonnt 
 
 mbgenb 
 gemo(i)t 
 
 miiffenb 
 gemu^t 
 
 foHenb 
 QefoEt 
 
 mollenb 
 QetDoEt 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 biirfen 
 
 fonnen 
 
 mogen 
 
 miiffen 
 
 foHen 
 
 njoflen 
 
 4. The compound tenses are formed in the same 
 manner as those of other verbs — with one important 
 exception, namely — 
 
 * a. When used in connection with another verb (infin- 
 itive), the infinitive is substituted for the participle in 
 the perfect and pluperfect tenses. 
 
 Thus, er l^at e§ nt(f)t g e ! o n n t , but er ftat e§ nic^t tl)un f o n n e n 
 lie has not been able to do it; toa^^abi\i)X g e tt) o U t what have you 
 wished?, but \^t !)abt m6) fprei^en tDolIen you have wanted to 
 speak to me; xm ftaben n)arten miif f en ^^6 have been compelled to 
 wait. 
 
 5. The compound tenses are, then, as follows : 
 Peefect (first person the same in both modes). 
 
 s. I l^abe geburft, gefonnt, 2C. 
 or l^abe biirfen, fonnen, :c. 
 
 Indicative Plupeefect. 
 
 s. I 5atte geburft, gefonnt, :c. 
 or 5atte biirfen, fonnen, :c. 
 
 Subjunctive Plupeefect. 
 
 s. I 5citte geburft, gefonnt, 2C. 
 or :f)dtte biirfen, fonnen, it. 
 
253] MODAL AUXnJAEIES. 123 
 
 FunmB (first person the same in both modes), 
 s. I tt)erbe biirfcn, fonnen, :c. 
 
 FuTUBE Pebfect (first person the same in both modes). 
 
 s. I tDcrbc Qeburft 5aBen, gefonnt l^aben, :c. 
 
 CoNDinONAIj. 
 
 s. I toiirbe biirfen, fonnen, 2C. . 
 
 CONDinONAIi PEEFECT. 
 
 s. I mxht geburft ^dbtn, Qefonnt f^aUn, :c. 
 
 Inflnitive Peefect. 
 
 Qcburft ^aben, gefonnt ijobm, k. 
 
 6. a. The absence of a complete conjugation of the correspond- 
 ing auxiliaries in English makes it necessary for us often to 
 render the German verb by a paraphrase: substituting, for 
 example, he able for caii (fbnnen) ; be compelled, have to, for must 
 (miijfen) ; he willing, wish, desire, for will (tDoIIen), and so on : 
 compare below, 253-9. 
 
 6. The same absence has led to the use of certain idiomatic 
 and not strictly logical constructions in English, in which the 
 auxiliary of past time, have, is combined with the principal verb 
 in the participle, instead of with the modal auxiliary ; while the 
 Germa^, more correctly, combines it with the latter. Thus, he 
 would not have done it is not, in German, er tDoHte e§ nid)t Qd^an 
 ]&aben, unless it signifies he was not willing to have done it; if, as 
 usual, it means he ivould not have been willing to do it, it is er ^attc 
 e§ ntd)t tl)un mo Hen. Thus also, he might have come (that is, he 
 would have been able to come) is er ftdtte fommen fonnen, not er 
 fonnte gefommen fetn. The logical sense of the sentence may be 
 tested, and the proper German expression found, by putting the 
 corresponding verbal phrase in place of the simple auxiliary ui 
 the EngUsh. 
 
 USES OF THE MODAL AUXILIARIES. 
 
 252. Although the exposition of the meanmg of these auxilia- 
 ries belongs rather to the dictionary than to the grammar, 
 yet such is the frequency of their use, and the intimacy of their 
 relation to the verbs with which they are combined, that it is 
 desirable to give here some account of their chief uses. 
 
 253. ^iirfen. — 1. This represents two separate verbs of the 
 older language, the one meaning need, require^ the other dare, 
 
124 VEEBS. [253^ 
 
 venture, trust one^s self. The former sense is nearly lost, appear- 
 ing only occasionally with ttur and faum, and in a few other 
 phrases : thus, er barf nur befe^len he needs only to command. The 
 other has been in modern use modified into be authorized, 
 permitted, and, even where it approaches nearest to dare, means 
 properly rather /eeZ authorized, allow one's self. Thus, Dliemanb 
 barf |)Iunbern no one is permitted to plunder, barf ic| Bitten may I 
 ask? einem ^aifer barf bie 9Jitlbe nte fe:^Ien an emperor may never 
 lack clemency, er burfte i^n tn§ ^ngefiiit ^retfen he was allmued to 
 praise him to his face. 
 
 2. The preterit subjunctive biirfte signifies, by a quite special 
 use, a probable contingency: as, ba§ biirfte todt^x ]tin that is 
 likely to be true. 
 
 254. ^bnnen. — The original meaning of fonnen, as of our can, 
 is to know how ; but both have alike acquired the sense of be 
 able, and signify ability or possibility in the most general way, 
 whether natural, conceded, or logical. Thus, icf) !ann lefen, I 
 can read, meinetmegen !antt er ge^en he can (may) go, for all me, 
 iene ^age !i)nnen mieber fommen tlwse days may return (their 
 return is possible), er !ann f(^on gefommen fein he may possibly 
 have already arrived. 
 
 265. 9Jlogen. — This verb meant originally to have power, but 
 its use in that sense is now antiquated and quite rare : thus, 
 tDenn feiner fie ergriinben mag though none is able to fathom them. 
 At present, it has two leading significations : 
 
 1. That of power or capability as the result of concession on 
 the part of the speaker ; and that, either a real permission — as 
 er mag t^n Beftalten he may keep it — or as a logical concession or 
 allowance, as \)a^ mag mo^t 3U '^ixitu fommen that may happen at 
 times. 
 
 2. That of choice, liking, desire : thus, maS fie bir ni(f)t offen* 
 Baren mag what she does not choose to reveal to thee, ba§ m o d^ t e 
 er gar nt(^t ^bren Jie did not like to hear that at all. This meaning 
 is most frequent with the preterit subjunctive : thus, e§ m b (^ tc 
 !ein §unb fo Idnger leBen no dog would care to live longer thus, 
 au(i) t(f) m d) t^ mit bir fterBen I too would like to die with thee. 
 
 a. WoQtn has other uses (akin with the above, but of less 
 definite character), in which it approaches very near to equiva- 
 lence with the subjunctive tenses : thus, in expressing a wish, 
 mi3ge nie ber ^ag erf(i)etnen may the day never appear, mo^k bie 
 gauge SBelt un§ f)oren would that the whole world might hear us; 
 
251] MODAL AUXILIARIES. 125 
 
 also, in clauses expressing design or purpose : as, bamit fie nii^t 
 ou^Gleiten mogen that they may not slip; or after an indefinite 
 pronoun : as, tx)a§ er au(^ t^un mag (or ll^iie) whatever he may do. 
 
 256. 9Jlufjen. — This, like ntogen, has wandered far from its 
 primitive meaning, which was find room or opportunity, and now 
 designates a general and indefinite necessity (as fbnnen a 
 correspondingly indefinite possibiUty), either physical, moral, or 
 logical. It is rendered by our he compelled to, he ohliged to, have 
 to, cannot hut, and the like. Thus, alle 5[Rcnfd)en miifjcn fterben 
 all men must die, luir miifjen trcu jctu we must be faithful, e§ mu^ 
 in biefer SBcife (icjc[)e^en fein it must have taken place m this way, 
 toir mu^ten umtDenben we had to turn hack, :^eute mu^ bie ^(otfe 
 IDerben to-day the hell has to came into existence, man mu^te olau= 
 ben 07ie could not hut suppose, i(f) mn^te iiber bie Seute lad^en I could 
 not help laughing at the people. 
 
 a. As mu^t in English is present only, such phrases as those 
 above given should always be used in translating the other 
 tenses of miifjen. 
 
 257. (SoKen. — Its proper sense is originally that of duty or 
 ohligation, and in the past tenses, especially the preterit, it is 
 often still used in that sense : thus, e§ foHle fo, unb ni^t anber§ 
 fein it ought to he thus, and not otherwise, er l^dtte fommen foKen 
 he ought to have come. 
 
 But to this meaning has now become added, in prevailing use, 
 the distinct implication of a personal authority, other than 
 that of the subject, as creating or enforcing the obligation : 
 thus : 
 
 1. Proceeding from the speaker ; in which case the auxiliary 
 intimates a command, a promise, a threat, or the like : as, bn 
 follft (^ott lieBen thou shalt love God, meine io(^ter foGen bic^ n)ar= 
 ten my daughters shall wait on thee, man brol^t, biefer ober iener 
 ^onig fofle geflen xtju gie'^en it is threatened that this or that king 
 shall take the field against him. 
 
 2. Recognized by the speaker, but not proceeding from him ; 
 in which case foUen is to be rendered by to he to, to he intended 
 or destined to, or other like expressions : as, menn man gule^t 
 Jjalten fofi, mill man lieber ftier bleiben if one is finally to stop, one 
 will rather stay here, ma§ ]oU Qt]d:)ti}tn what is to happen? man 
 smeif elte metc^en 2Bea man einf (^lagcn f oHe they douhted which road 
 they were to take, ma§ mog \(i) T^ier moftl l^oren foKen what can I 
 
126 VERBS. [257- 
 
 be meant to hear here? bariiBer foUtc er bitter enttauf(i)t tuerben he 
 was destined to be bitterly undeceived upon that point. 
 
 3. A special form of this use of follen is its employment to 
 report something that rests on the authority of others, is 
 asserted by them : thus, 35erBred)en, bie er Begangen l^aben foE 
 cjimes which he is claimed to have committed, t)iele follen an biefem 
 %aQt umgefommen fein many are said to have lost their lives on 
 tJiat day. 
 
 4. In conditional and hypothetical clauses, joKte is sometimes 
 used like our should, nearly coinciding in meaning with the 
 proper conditional tenses : thus, follf er auc^ ftriiudjeln iiBerall even 
 should he everijwhere stumble ; so, elliptically, in interrogation : 
 foEte ba§ tDaJr fein \is it possible that] that should be true? 
 
 258. StBoHen. — This signifies will, intent, choice, on the part 
 of the subject of the verb : thus, \d) mU h'x&i gleic^fall^ Begleiten 
 I will accompany thee likewise, feiner WxH ben 53e(^er geiDinnen no 
 one wants to win the goblet, n)a§ er 3terUrf)e§ aup^ren mti what- 
 ever he intends to bring forward that is pretty, id) tooUk i^n mit 
 (Sd^d^en Belaben I would load him with treasures. 
 
 a. Occasionally it indicates a claim or assertion (compare the 
 correlative use of follen above, 257-3) : thus, er mil bid) gefe^en 
 ]j)aBen he claims to have seen you (will have it that he has done so). 
 
 b. Not infrequently it implies the exhibition of intent, or 
 impending action, and is to be rendered by be on the point of 
 and the like; thus, er tr)iE Q^l)tn he is on the pohit of going, t'm 
 SBaner, tDeld^er fterBen tDoIIte a peasant who was about to die, 33ra- 
 ten \mU t)erbrennen the roast is on the brink of burning. 
 
 259. The Modal Auxiliaries witJwut accompanying Verb. 
 
 All these auxiliaries are sometimes met with unaccompanied 
 by an infinitive dependent upon them. Thus : 
 
 1. When an infinitive is directly suggested by the context, 
 and to be supplied in idea : thus, baB jeber fo toE jein biirfe al§ 
 er moEe that every one may be as wild as he will (be), id) t^ue, tt)a§ 
 i(^ !ann I do what I can (do). 
 
 2. Very often, an adverb of direction with the auxiliary takes 
 the place of an omitted verb of motion : thus, tt)ir miif jen oud) 
 baran we mujst also [set] about it, fie ffinnen nid)t t)Dn ber 6teEe 
 they cannot [stir] from the place, n)ol)in f oEen bie whither are they 
 to [go], ber immer bat)on wolik who all the time wanted [to get] 
 
262] MODAL AUXILIARIES. 127 
 
 away, er barf nt(i)t toeit genug l^inau§ he may rwt venture [to go] 
 far enough out. 
 
 3. Other ellipses, of verbs familiarly used with these, or 
 naturally suggested by the context, are not infrequent : thus, 
 tua^ foH id) what am I to [do] ? U)a§ foE biefe Utebe what is this talk 
 intended to [signify] ? bie fal((^en Sftinge merben ba§ ntd)t fonnen 
 the false 7nngs will not be able [to accomplish] that, tiic^t S5er= 
 goIbuHQ tDtll man mel^r one will no longer [have] gilding. 
 
 4. The auxiliary is thus often left with an apparent direct 
 object, really dependent on the omitted verb. In other cases 
 the object may represent the omitted verb — as, ^atte id) nuc^ ge- 
 freut, al§ id) e§ nod) ionnk had I enjotjed myself when I was still 
 able to do so — or be otherwise more really dependent on the 
 auxiliary. SBolIen is most often used thus as a proper tran- 
 sitive : thus, Tii(^t er mU euren Untergang not he wishes your ruin, 
 tt)a§ ®ott getDoflt what God has willed — also, mogen in the sense 
 of like: as, i^ mag i()n nic^t I do not like him — and fbnnen in the 
 sense of know (a language): as, fonnen ©ie 2)cut](^ do you know 
 German ? 
 
 260. SBiffen know, knmu how, has a conjugation nearly akin 
 with that of the modal auxiliaries : namely — 
 
 lYes. InMc. meiB, tuei^t, \m\^, miffcn, tDi^t, iDtffen. 
 
 Pres. Subj. miffe, etc. 
 
 Pret. Indie. wn^k, etc. Pret Subj. toix^k, etc. 
 
 Past Partic. gett)n^t. 
 
 [Exercise 17. Modal Auxiliaries.] 
 
 OLD OR STRONG CONJUGATION. 
 
 261. The characteristics of the Old or strong con- 
 jugation are : the change of radical vowel in the pre- 
 terit, and often in the past participle also ; and the 
 ending of the past participle in en. 
 
 With these are combined other peculiarities of inflection, of 
 less consequence, which will be found stated in detail below. 
 For the reason of the name *'01d" conjugation, see above, 246.3. 
 
 Change of Badical Vowel. 
 
 262. The changes of radical vowel in verbs of 
 the Old or strong conjugation are, in general, as fol- 
 lows : 
 
128 VERBS. [262- 
 
 1. The vowel of the infinitive and that of the present 
 tense (indicative and subjunctive) are always the same. 
 
 But the vowel of the present is sometimes altered in the 
 second and third persons singular indicative : see below, 268. 
 
 2. The vowel of the preterit is always different from 
 that of the infinitive and present. 
 
 3. The vowel of the past participle is sometimes the 
 same with that of the infinitive and present, sometimes 
 the same with that of the preterit, and sometimes 
 different from either. 
 
 263. According to the varieties of this change, the verbs 
 are divided into three principal classes, each with several sub- 
 divisions. 
 
 Class I. Verbs whose infinitive, preterit, and participle have 
 each a different vowel. 
 
 Class II. Verbs in which the vowel of the participle is the 
 same with that of the present. 
 
 Class III. Verbs in which the vowel of the participle is the 
 same with that of the preterit. 
 
 a. This is merely a classification of conyenience, founded upon the 
 facts of the modem language. The latter have undergone too great 
 and too various alteration to allow of our adopting, with practical 
 advantage, a more thorough classification, founded on the character of 
 the original radical vowel, and the nature of the changes it has suffered, 
 
 264. First Class. Verbs whose infinitive, preterit, and par* 
 ticiple have each a different vowel. 
 
 I. 1. Verbs having the vowels t — a — u in the three f orm« 
 specified. 
 Example : jingen — fang — Qefunaen (sing, sang, sung). 
 To this subdivision belong 16 verbs, all of them having roots 
 ending in ng, n!, or nb. 
 
 2. Vowels i — a — o. 6 verbs : root ending in tin or mm. 
 Example ; fpinnen— jpann— gefponnen (spin, span, spun). 
 
 3. Vowels e — a — o. 22 verbs. 
 
 Example : bre(^en — brac^ — gcbrD(f)en (break, brake, 
 broken). 
 One verb, Qcbarcn, has irregularly d for e in the infinitive. 
 
266] OLD OK STRONG CONJUGATION. 129 
 
 4. Vowels i or te — a — e. 3 verbs. 
 
 Examples : fi^en — f a^ — Gefeffen (sit, sat, sat). 
 Hepen — lag — gelegen (lie, lay, lain). 
 
 These are properly verbs belonging to the first division of the 
 next class, II. 1, but have their vowel irregularly varied in the 
 infinitive. 
 
 265. Second Class. Verbs having the same vowel in the in- 
 finitive and participle. 
 
 II. 1. Vowels c — a — e. 10 verbs. 
 
 Example : fe^en — \ai} — gefe^en (see, saw, seen). 
 
 Three verbs properly belonging to this division have changed 
 their vowel to t or te in the infinitive, and thus become a fourth 
 division of the first class (see above). 
 
 2. Vowels a — u — a. 10 verbs. 
 
 Example : jc^Iaflcn— f(^Iug— Qef (^laQcn (slay, slew, slain), 
 
 3. Vowels a — te or t — a. 16 verbs. 
 
 Examples : fallen — fiel — gef alien (fall, fell, fallen). 
 
 Sangen — l^ing — ge^angen (hang, hung, 
 hung). 
 
 4. Vowels an, u, or o — te — an, u, or o. 4 verbs. 
 Examples : laufen — lief — gelaufen (leap) run, 
 
 rufen — rief — gerufen cry. 
 fto^en — ftie§ — gefto^en thrust. 
 
 266. Third Class. Verbs having the same vowel in the 
 preterit and participle. 
 
 m. 1. Vowels ei — t — i. 22 verbs. 
 
 Example : bet^en — bi^ — geBifjen (bite, bit, bitten). 
 
 2. Vowels ei — te — te. 16 verbs. 
 
 Example : treiben — trieB ^ getrieBen (drive, drove, driven). 
 These two divisions differ only in the length of the vowel of 
 the preterit and participle. One verb, I)et^en, has the participle 
 gel&ei^en (below, 267). 
 
 3. Vowels te or ii — o — o. 24 verbs (only 3 with u). 
 Examples : fliegen — flog — geflogen (fly, flew, fkmn). 
 
 liigen — log — gelogen lie (speak falsely). 
 
 4. Vowels au — o — o. 4 verbs. 
 Example : f augen — fog — gef ogen suck. 
 
130 VEBBS. [266- 
 
 5. Vowels, t, e, d, b, or a — o — o. 20 verbs. 
 Examples : fUmmen — flomm — geflommen climb. 
 
 tt)eben — toob — geiDoben (weave,wove,woven). 
 
 lodgen — mog — geiDOfien weigh. 
 
 f(S^tr)bren — ](^tt)or— Qefi^tDoren (swear, swore, 
 
 sworn). 
 jc^allen — f(^oE — gej(i)oEen sound. 
 
 All the verbs in this division are stragglers, irregularly altered 
 from other modes of conjugation. Of those having e in the in- 
 finitive (Uke tueben) there are eleven ; of the other forms, only- 
 one, two, or three each. 
 
 6. Vowels t — u — u. 2 verbs. 
 
 Example : f ^inben — f (^unb — gefdjunben flay. 
 These, also, are stragglers, from I.l. 
 
 267. Verbs with irregular change of vowel. 
 
 1. fommen — !am — gefommen (come, came, come): 
 an exception under 1.3, the original vowel of the infinitive being e. 
 
 2. 1)i\^t\i — l)ie^ — ge^et^en he called: 
 an exception under III.2, as noted above. 
 
 3. geften — ging — gegangen go : 
 
 an exception under II.3, the original infinitive being gangan. 
 
 4. fte^en — ftanb — geftanben stand: 
 
 in Old High-German, belonging to II. 2 (ftantan — ftuont— ftantan). 
 
 6. tl^un — tftat — gef^an (do, did, done). 
 FORMATION AND INFLECTION OF THE SIMPLE VERBAL FORMS. 
 
 268. Present Tense, 
 
 The first person singular and all the plural persons 
 of the present indicative, together with the whole of 
 the present subjunctive, are, without exception, reg- 
 ularly formed (see 237), and need no remark. But the 
 second and third persons singular of the indicative are 
 subject to various irregularities. - 2-"*^ 
 
 ^ Verbs having c as radical vowel in the first person change 
 it to ie or t in the second and third — short e becoming i, and 
 long e becoming te (that is, long i: see 18) : thus, ^elfe, l)tlfft, l)i(ft; 
 fte^Ie, ftieWft, ftiel)lt; effen, iffeft, i^t; feften, fietift, jiebt. But^ 
 
OLD OR STRONG CONJUGATION. 131 
 
 d. A few verbs leave the e unchanged : namely, ge^en, [tel^en, 
 l^eben, meBen, pfleaen, betDegen, melfen, genefen — besides a few 
 which here, as in others of their forms, follow the New or 
 weak conjugation. 
 
 h. Two or three verbs that have long e in the first person 
 shorten it to i in the second and third: namely, ne^men, nimmft, 
 nimmt; treten, trittft, tritt. @eben makes either cicbfl, gicBt, or 
 gibft, gibt. 
 
 r2r)Verbs having a as radical vowel in the first person modify 
 it (to d) in the second and third : thus, trage, trcigft, trdgt ; laffe, 
 Id^eft, Idfet. But— 
 
 a. The a remains unchanged in f(f)affen and fd)aflcn, and in 
 other verbs which substitute in part the forms of the New or 
 weak conjugation. 
 
 3. Saufen, f aufen, and fto^en also modify the vowel in the same 
 persons ; fommen does so sometimes, but not according to the 
 best usage ; Iof(i)en forms Ii](i)eft, \\\^t 
 
 4. gliegen and about a dozen other verbs of its class (III.3) 
 have a second and third person in eu — as flicge, flcugft, fleugt; 
 liige, leugft, leugt — which are now antiquated, and only met with 
 in archaic and poetic style. One or two that have roots ending 
 in )) change this letter to cC) after eu. 
 
 5. The tendency to reject the e of the endings eft and et is 
 stronger in these persons with altered vowel than anywhere else 
 in conjugation. The e of eft is rarely retained except after a 
 sibilant— as in eriifrfjcft, Id^eft, given above. The e of et is always 
 omitted, even when preceded by t, i^, b ; hence, after these 
 letters, the t, being no longer audible, is also dropped in writing. 
 
 The verbs which thus lose the ending of the third pers. sing, 
 pres. indicative are fed)ten, fid)t; berften, birft; flerf)ten, flid)t; 
 gelten, gilt; fc^eltcn, fd)ilt; it)crben, toirb ; l^ilten, I)dlt; ratten [raten], 
 rdtt) [rdt] ; braten, brdt ; bieten, beul. Only laben forms Idbt. 
 
 ^265>. Preterit Tense. 
 
 I. 1. The preterit indicative is formed by the change 
 of radical vowel alone, wdthout an added termination, 
 and therefore ends in the final letter of the root, what- 
 ever that may be. But — 
 
 a. A few roots, ending in the infinitive with a double con- 
 sonant, and lengthening their vowel in the preterit, reduce the 
 
132 VEEBS. [269- 
 
 double consonant to a single one : namely, f d)reden, f (i)ra! ; treffen, 
 traf; Bitten, Bat; Barfen, But; fd^affen, f(^uf ; faEen, ftel; fommen, 
 !am. 
 
 h. A few others (fifteen), on the contrary, shortening their 
 vowel in the preterit, double the following consonant ; and three 
 of them, ending in b, change it to tt : namely, kiben, Utt ; f (^ttei= 
 ben, f (^nitt ; fieben, f ott. 
 
 All of these save three (triefen and fieben, 111.3 ; and faufen, 
 111,4) are of division IILl : e. g., teiten, ritt, Qeritten {ride, rode, 
 ridden). 
 
 c. More isolated cases are gie'&en, gOQ ; fta^en, l^ieB ; ji^en, fa^. 
 For Qel^en, aing ; fteften, ftanb ; tt)un, t:^at, see 267. 
 
 2. The second person singular strongly inclines to the abbrevi- 
 ated form of the ending, [t instead of eft, and in ordinary use 
 rejects the e except after a sibilant or in order to avoid a very 
 harsh combination of consonants. 
 
 3. Traces of an ending e in the first and third persons are, 
 very rarely, met with : especially f a^e, for f a^ saw ; also Bielte. 
 Tor tDurbe, from n)erben, see 239.4c. 
 
 4. A few verbs have a double form in the preterit, of which 
 one is in more common use, the other archaic or provincial. 
 
 But fc^tt)or and f(^n)ur are of nearly equal authority : of the 
 others, those most often met with are :^uB, for ;^oB (!)eBen, 111.5), 
 and ftunb, for ftanb (ftelf)en). 
 
 This double form (as in like cases in English : e. g. , hegan or 'begun) is 
 due to the fact that in the ancient language many verbs had different 
 vowels in the singular and plural of the preterit indicative, both of 
 which, in the later usage, appear in either number of a few verbs. The 
 vowel of the subjunctive preterit agreed with that of the indicative plu- 
 ral, not the singular : whence the double forms of the subjunctive, noted 
 below. 
 
 n. {1^ The preterit subjunctive is regularly formed 
 from tne indicative by adding e (in the first person), 
 and modifying the vowel, if the latter be capable of 
 modification: thus, jang, ftingc; \a\), fdt)e; fdjlug, fdjliige; 
 fiel, fiele; flog, floge; fd}tt)or or fdj^itr, f(^ti:)ore or fc^tDiire; 
 t^at, tl)ate. But— 
 
 a. Some verbs have a double form of the subjunctive, of 
 which one differs in vowel from the indicative : thus, all in divis- 
 ion 1.2 have a second in d— e. g., fpann, fpdnne or fpbnne— which 
 
271] OLD OE STEONG CONJUGATION. 133 
 
 is as common as that in a, or more so ; and others (especially 
 in 1.3) have second forms in 5 or ii : e. g., gait, Qdlte or golte, \Daxh, 
 tt)arbe or rvixxht ; the latter being the preferred one, probably as 
 better distinguished from the present gelte, tDerBc, etc. All that 
 have two indicative forms have the two corresponding sub- 
 junctives : thus, ftcinbe and pnbe, pBe and pbe. 
 
 270. Imperative. 
 
 1. The imperative singular regularly ends in e, the plural in et 
 or t, adding those endings respectively to the root of the verb 
 as shown in the infinitive : thus, fingen, fittGC ; f(f)Iagen, ](!)IaGe ; 
 rufcn, rufe ; fommen, fomme ; Qcften, ge^e. But— 
 
 2. Verbs which in the second pers. sing, of the pres. indicative 
 change e to i or ie (268.1) take the latter also in the imperative 
 singular (not in the plural) — at the same time rejecting the e of 
 the ending. 
 
 Thus, l^elfen, l^ilf ; fte^len, ftiel)l; effen, i^; fe^en, fie"^. 
 
 a. So, also, verbs that have an archaic second person in eu 
 (268.4) have a corresponding archaic imperative : thus, fliegen, 
 fliege or fleug. (Jrlojc|en (268.3) forms erUf(^. But verbs that 
 modify a, an, o to d, du, o (268.2,3) retain in the imperative the 
 unchanged vowel and the ending: thus, tragen, Irage; laufeti, 
 laufc ; fto^en, fto^e. 
 
 6. Exceptions are: mxhtn (tuirft) has iDerbe; feT^en (fte!)ft) has 
 either jie!)e or fie:^. 
 
 3. The e of the singular ending is dropped much more freely 
 in the other verbs of this than in those of the New conjugation, 
 and in some — as fomm, la^ — is almost never used. 
 
 271. Past Participle. 
 
 1. The ending of the participle is en. 
 
 The e of the ending is ordinarily retained in all cases, but may 
 be occasionally dropped, especially after a vowel or )): thus, 
 gefet)en or geje^^n. When, however, the participle is used as an 
 adjective and declined, it is subject to the same abbreviation as 
 other adjectives ending in en (120.3) : thus, t)crgangner ^age of 
 past days, t)erf (!)tt)unbncr ^rac^t of vanished splendor. 
 
 2. A number of participles share in the irregular changes of 
 a final radical consonant exhibited by the preterit : namely — 
 
 a. All those that shorten in the preterit the vowel of the infin- 
 itive (269.1.15): thus, reiten, ritt, gerittenj leiben, lilt, gelitten j 
 faufen, foff, gefoffen. 
 
134 YEKBS. [271- 
 
 6. Of those that lengthen the vowel (269.1.1a), only one, 
 namely Bitten, hat, Qebeten ;— but treffen, traf, Qetroffen ; f aflen, fiel, 
 QcfaHen, etc. 
 
 c. Also, gteften (gog), gegocen; ji^en (fa^), oefeffen; ge^en (ginQ), 
 Qegangen; fte^^en (ftanb), geftanben; iftun (t^at), gctftan. 
 
 3. (Jffen eat has the prefix twice : thus, Qegeffen (geffen from 
 Qe=effen, and gc again prefixed). 
 
 272. Mixed Conjugation. 
 
 The same tendency which has converted a large number of 
 the "irregular" verbs in English into "regular" has been active, 
 though to a much less degree, in German also. Besides those 
 verbs which have entirely changed their mode of infiection, and 
 therefore no longer require to be made any account of under 
 the Old or strong conjugation, there are others which form a 
 part of their inflection by the one method and a part by the 
 other, or which have equivalent forms of either conjugation. 
 Thus, 
 
 1. Some have a double series of forms through the whole or 
 nearly the whole conjugation : the forms of the Old conjugation 
 being then either poetic and unusual (as in xa^m),.or else 
 belonging to the verb in certain special meanings (as in tDtegen) 
 or in its transitive use (as in bleirf)en). 
 
 2. Some have certain forms of either conjugation — especially 
 the second and third pers. ind. present and second sing, 
 imperative, with differences of use as above stated ; most often 
 with intransitive meaning for the Old forms : such are jc^rerfeit/ 
 Dcrberben, fieben, lofd)en, fd^mclgen, fdjtrenen, and others. 
 
 3. Some have retained only a participle of the Old conju- 
 gation; and even that in special uses or connections. The 
 participle is in general the form that has maintained itself most 
 persistently. 
 
 These irregularities, as well as those which are explained in 
 more detail above, are exhibited in a table of irregulak verbs, 
 given on pp. 278-284 
 
 ^^73)) Examples of Verbs of the Old or Strong Conjuga- 
 tion. 
 
 S3inbcn (1.1). ^ommen (267.1). 
 
 Principal Parts. 
 
 Mrtbcn, banb, geBunben, fpmmen, !am, gefommen, 
 
273] 
 
 OLD OR STEONG CONJUGATION. 
 
 135 
 
 
 Indicativk *^ 
 
 Peesent, I bind etc. 
 
 
 I come etc. 
 
 s. I buibe 
 
 
 fomme 
 
 2 binbeft 
 
 3 binbet 
 
 
 tommft 
 fommt 
 
 p. I binben 
 
 
 fommen 
 
 2 binbet 
 
 
 fommt 
 
 3 btnben 
 
 
 fommen 
 
 Pbeteutt, I hound eta. 
 
 
 I came etc. 
 
 s. I banb 
 
 
 fam^ 
 
 2 banbft 
 
 3 banb 
 
 
 famft 
 fam 
 
 p. I banben 
 
 
 famen 
 
 2 banbet 
 
 
 famt 
 
 3 banben 
 
 
 famen 
 
 Peefect, J/iave6oMndetc. 
 
 
 I have c(yme etc. 
 
 s. I fiaU gebnnben 
 
 etc. 
 
 
 bin gefommen 
 
 etc. 
 
 Plupeefect, I had hound etc. 
 
 I had come etc. 
 
 s. I 5atte Qebunben 
 
 etc. 
 
 
 mar gefommen ' 
 
 etc. 
 
 Futuee, I shall bind etc. 
 
 
 I shall come etc. 
 
 s. I tt)erbe binben 
 
 
 merbe fommen 
 
 etc. 
 
 
 etc. 
 
 FxjT. Peef., I shall have bound etc. 
 
 I shall have come etc. 
 
 s. I mxht gebunben ftaben 
 
 etc. 
 
 
 merbe gefommen fein 
 
 etc. 
 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 Peesent, I may bind etc. 
 
 
 I may come etc 
 
 s. I binbe 
 
 
 fomme 
 
 2 binbeft 
 
 3 binbe 
 
 
 fommeft 
 fomme 
 
 p. I binben 
 
 
 fommen 
 
 2 binbet 
 
 
 fommet 
 
 3 binben 
 
 
 fommen 
 
136 
 
 YERBS. 
 
 [273- 
 
 Peeteeit, I might bind etc. 
 
 I might come etc. 
 
 s. I banbe 
 
 !dme 
 
 2 bdnbeft 
 
 3 bdnbe 
 
 fdmeft 
 fame 
 
 p. I bdnben 
 
 fdmen 
 
 2 bdnbet 
 
 fdmet 
 
 3 bdnben 
 
 fdmen 
 
 Peefect, I may have b<mnd etc. 
 
 I may have come etc. 
 
 s. I l^abe gebunben 
 
 etc. 
 
 fei gefommen 
 
 etc. 
 
 Plupeef., I might have hound etc. 
 
 I might have come etc 
 
 s. I l^dtte Qebunben 
 
 etc. 
 
 tDdre gefommen 
 
 etc. 
 
 FuTiJEE, I shall bind etc.] 
 
 I shall come etc. 
 
 s. I tperbe btnben 
 
 toerbe fommen 
 
 etc. 
 
 etc. 
 
 FxjT. Peef., I shall have hound etc. 
 
 I shall Imve come etc. 
 
 s. I tuerbe Qebunben l^aben 
 
 etc 
 
 merbe gefommen fein 
 
 etc. 
 
 Conditional. 
 
 Conditional, 1 should bind etc. 
 
 I should come etc. 
 
 s. I tt)urbe binben 
 
 tt)urbe fommen 
 
 etc. 
 
 etc. 
 
 CoND. Peef. I should have hound etc. 
 
 I should have come e\ 
 
 s. I ttjiirbe gebunben l^aben 
 
 etc. 
 
 tDiirbe gefommen fein 
 
 etc. 
 
 Imperativk 
 
 bind etc. 
 
 come etc. 
 
 s. 2 binbc 
 
 fomme, fomm 
 
 3 binbe er 
 
 fomme er 
 
 p. I binben tt)tr 
 
 fommen ton 
 
 2 btnbet 
 
 fommt 
 
 3 binben fie 
 
 fommen fie 
 
276] PASSIVE. 137 
 
 Inhnitive. 
 Present, io hind to come 
 
 binben fommcn 
 
 Peefect, to have hound io have come 
 
 flcbunbcn \jabtn Qefommen fein 
 
 Pabticiples. 
 Pbesent, hinding coming 
 
 Binbenb fommcnb 
 
 Past, hound come 
 
 oebunbcn gcfommcn 
 
 [Exercise 18. Yekbs of the Old or Strong Conjugation.] 
 PASSIVE VEKBS. 
 
 274. The passive voice is a derivative conjugation of 
 a transitive verb, in which that person or thing which 
 in the simple conjugation is the object of the transitive 
 action becomes a subject of the suffering of that action : 
 thus, active, ber §unb bi§ ben Snaben the dog bit the hoy ; 
 passive, ber Slnabe tDurbe Horn §nnbe gebtffen the boy was 
 bitten by the dog. 
 
 a. That a kind of passive is also formed from some intran- 
 sitive verbs is pointed out below (279.2,3). 
 
 b. The passive is mainly a grammatical device for directing 
 the principal attention to the recipient of the action, and the 
 action as affecting him, and putting the actor in a subordinate 
 position. 
 
 275. The German passive, like the English, is 
 formed by the aid of an auxiliary verb — but by a 
 different one, namely the verb tDer ben become. 
 
 276. 1. To form the passive of any verb, its past participle 
 is combined with iDerben, throughout the whole conjugation of 
 the latter. In this combination — 
 
 a. The past participle of the auxihary, wherever it occurs, is 
 abbreviated from getoorben to worbcn. 
 
 h. The participle of the main verb is put after the proper 
 verbal forms (simple tenses) of the auxiUary, but before its in- 
 finitives or participles. 
 
138 
 
 VERBS. 
 
 [276- 
 
 This is in accordance with the general rule for the position 
 of any word limiting an infinitive or participle: see below, 
 348.2, 358. 
 
 2. Hence, to produce any given person, tense, and 
 mode of the passive of a verb, combine its past parti- 
 ciple with the corresponding person, tense, and mode of 
 tperben. 
 
 277. Synopsis of the Forms of tuerben and of a Pas- 
 sive Verb, 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Peesent, I become etc. 
 s. I merbe 
 
 Peetebit, I became etc. 
 s. I tt)arb, iDurbe 
 
 Peepect, I have become etc. 
 s. I Bin getDorben 
 
 Plupeefect, Ihad become etc. 
 s. I \oax Qeraorben 
 
 FuT¥EE, IshaU become etc. 
 s. I tDcrbe tuerben 
 
 Fur. Peef., I shall have become etc. 
 s. I tDcrbe Qemorben fein 
 
 I am loved eto, 
 tt)crbe fleltebt 
 I loas loved eto. 
 
 ttjarb, tDurbe gelicBt 
 
 I have been loved etc. 
 Bin geliebt iDorben 
 
 IJiad been loved etc. 
 xoax gelieBt morben 
 
 I shall be loved etc. 
 tt)erbe geliebt merben 
 
 I shall have been loved etc. 
 iDcrbe geliebt ttjorben fcin 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 Peesent, Imay become etc. 
 s. I merbe 
 
 Peeteeit, I migM become eiXi. 
 s. I wiirbe 
 
 Pbefect, Iwxiy have become etc. 
 s. I fei gett)orben 
 
 Plupeefect, I might have become etc. 
 
 s. I mare gen)orben 
 
 FuTUEE, I shall become etc. 
 s. I merbe merben 
 FuT. Peef., IshaU have become etc. 
 
 s. I tperbe geiDorben fein 
 
 I mxiy be loved etc. 
 tt)erbe geliebt 
 
 I might be loved etc. 
 njiirbe geliebt 
 
 I may have been loved etc. 
 fei geliebt tt)orben 
 
 I might have been loved etc. 
 tt)are geliebt ttiorben 
 
 I shall be loved etc. 
 tt)erbe geliebt ii^erben 
 
 I shall have been loved etc. 
 
 tt)erbc geliebt toorben fein 
 
279] PASSIVE. 139 
 
 Conditional. 
 CoNDiTioNAii, I should hecome etc. I should be loved etc. 
 
 s. I miirbe trerben miirbe Gdiebt iDerben 
 
 CoND. Peef., I should have hecome etc. I should have been loved etc. 
 
 s. I tDiirbe fletDorben jein njiirbc geliebt toorben fein 
 
 Imperative. 
 become etc. be loved etc. 
 
 s. 2 tDcrbe toerbe gelieBt 
 
 Infinitives. 
 Peesent, to become to be loved 
 
 tuerben geUeBt tDerben 
 
 Peefect, to have become to have been loved 
 
 QctDorben fein geliebt tDorben jein 
 
 Participles. 
 Peesent, becoming being loved 
 
 trerbenb geliebt tDerbenb 
 
 Past, become been loved 
 
 getDorbcn Gcltebt toorben 
 
 Bemark : geliebt tt)orben is used only in formiag the compound 
 tenses, since the past participle of a transitive verb has by itself 
 a passive value. 
 
 278. The passive voice of a transitive verb has one peculiar 
 form, a kind ot future passive participle, formed from the pres- 
 ent active participle, by putting ju before it: thus, gu lieBenb. 
 It implies a possibility or a necessity: thus, ein gu Iie6enbe§ ^inb 
 a child to be loved — i. e., which may or should he loved. It can 
 only be used as an attributive adjective, and therefore hardly 
 deserves to be called a participle. 
 
 a. It is in reality a quite modern and anomalous derivative 
 from an infinitive, answering attributively to the infinitive with 
 3U taken predicatively (343.in.l&) : as, ba§ ^inb ift gu Ueben tJw 
 child is to he loved — i. e., may or should be loved. 
 
 279. 1. Transitive verbs, with hardly an exception, may form 
 a passive voice, with a complete scheme of conjugation, as given 
 above. 
 
 §aben have is not used in the passive. 
 
140 VERBS. [279- 
 
 2. Many intransitives (especially such as denote a mode of 
 action by a person) may form an impersonal passive — that is, a 
 passive third person singular, with indefinite subject e§, or with 
 omitted subject (291). 
 
 Thus, e§ tDurbc geia(^t utib gefunfien there was laughing and 
 singing, urn ^ntttjort tt)irb Qcbeten an answer is requested. 
 
 a. These passives do not represent any subject as suffering 
 an action, but simply represent the action, without reference to 
 an actor. 
 
 3. Those intransitives which, by a pregnant construction 
 (227.2?>), govern an accusative along with a factitive predicate, 
 are also convertible into passives in corresponding phrases: 
 thus, fie tDerben aw^ bem <5(i)lafe gejc^rieen they are screamed out 
 of sleep, er tDurbe frei Qcfpro^en he was acquitted (declared free). 
 
 280. 1. Verbs which govern two accusatives (227.3), except 
 le^retl, take in the passive the second accusative, either as ob- 
 ject (fragen, etc.), or as predicate nominative (nennen, etc.). 
 
 2. Transitive verbs which, in addition to their direct object, 
 govern a genitive (219.2) or a dative (222.1.1), retain the latter 
 along with the passive : thus, ber Wiener tDurbe be§ 2)ieBfta^I§ 
 anQcflaflt the servant was accused of robbery, afle§ tt)irb einem 
 greunbc erIauBt everything is permitted to a friend. 
 
 3. Of the intransitives that form an impersonal passive, such 
 as govern a genitive or dative take the same case in the pas- 
 sive : thus, e§ tDirb melner gefc^ont lam spared, i^m tt)urbe gejolfen 
 lie was helped. 
 
 281. The passive is veiy much less frequently used in 
 German than in English, being replaced by other modes of 
 speech. Sometimes a full active expression, with subject and 
 object, is employed instead. Most often, the intent of the pas- 
 sive form of speech is attained by using an active verb with the 
 indefinite subject man one, etc. (185.) : thus, man fagt it is said, 
 ein ^efe^, tDcltfie^ man erlie^ a laic which was passed. Not infre- 
 quently, a reflexive phrase is substituted, the return of the 
 action upon the subject being accepted as signifying the latter's 
 endurance of the action : thus, e§ f ragt fi(f) it is questioned (asks 
 itself), ber ©diliifjel fiat fic^ gefunben the key has been found. 
 
 282. 1. By its use of tuerben become instead of fctn he as auxiliary 
 forming the passive, the German is able clearly to distinguish between 
 the actual endurance of an action, and existence in a state wtiieh is the 
 
283] EEFLEXIVES. 141 
 
 result of such action. Thus, alle genfter tt)erben nadj unb na(^ mit 
 jteppid^en be^cingt all windows are hy degrees hung with tapestry, and rt)ie 
 atte ^enftei* mit Xeppic^en bepugt finb as all the windows are hung with 
 tapestry; elugelaben wiirben fie they were invited, and eingetaben fmbfieatt' 
 they are all invited— the latter phrases, in either pair, signifying the con- 
 dition to which the act described by the former led. As we use the same 
 verb, he, in both senses, of copula and of passive auxiliary (accepting 
 the simple statement of the resulting condition as sufficiently implying 
 the suffering of the action), our expression is liable to ambiguity— an 
 ambiguity which we are sometimes forced into removing by the use of 
 the phrase he heing: thus distinguishing it is being cleaned (eg n)irb 
 gereinigt) from it is cleaned (eg ift gereinigt). And our sense of the 
 distinction is so obscured that the English pupil finds it one of his 
 greatest difficulties to know when to translate to he before a participle by 
 fein, and when by luerben. Only assiduous practice in noting the distinc- 
 tion as made in German will remove this difficulty. A practical rule 
 which will answer in a great number of cases is this : if, on turning the 
 expression into an active form, the sam;e tense (pres. or pret.) is required, 
 it was passive and requires iuevbeit ; if the tense has to be changed to a 
 perfect (perf. or plup.), fein is the proper word. Thus they were invited 
 is fie ttjurben eingelaben when it means / invited them, but fie njaren ein= 
 getaben when it means I had invited them; and fmb is used in eingelaben 
 finb fie aWf because it means I have invited them. 
 
 2. The German itself sometimes loosely accepts the statement of con- 
 dition, with the pres. or pret. of fein, in Meu of the full passive ex- 
 pression in perf. or pluperfect. Thus, ber ^ifc& Wax gefangen the fish had 
 heen caught (for wax gefangen morben), fie ift ermorbet auf ber £onbner 
 ©tra^e she has heen murdered, in London street. 
 
 REFLEXIVE VERBS. 
 
 283. A reflexive verb is one that represents the 
 action as exerted by the subject upon itself. 
 
 1. Such verbs are formally transitive, since they take an 
 object in the accusative; they all, then, take l^aBen as their 
 auxiliary. 
 
 2. Logically, or according to their real meaning, they are 
 rather to be regarded as intransitive, since they do not signify 
 an action exerted by the subject upon any object outside of 
 itself : thus, \^ f iirc^te mic^ (literally I frighten myself) I am 
 afraid is in idea as much intransitive as i(^ gittere I tremble. 
 And, as noticed above (281), a reflexive verb is often used even 
 in a passive sense, the idea of the endurance of the action on 
 the part of the subject being more conspicuous to the mind 
 than that of its exertion of the action. 
 
142 
 
 VERBS. 
 
 [284- 
 
 284. Such a verb, therefore, takes as its object a re- 
 flexive pronoun, of the same person and number with 
 its subject. 
 
 1. The reflexive pronouns of the first and second persons are 
 the same as the personal ; that of the third person is fi(^, in 
 both numbers (155). 
 
 2. The reflexive pronoun is placed where any other pronoun 
 would be placed as object of the verb : namely, after the verb 
 In the simple tenses, but before the infinitives and participles. 
 
 285. Conjugation of a Reflexive Verb. 
 
 ©td^ freuen to rejoice (rejoice or gladden one's self). 
 
 Principal Parts. 
 ©ic^ freuen, freute fic^, gefreut. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 s. I \^ frcuc mi(^ 
 
 2 bu freueft hi^ 
 
 3 er freut \\^ 
 
 p. I h)ir freuen un§ 
 
 2 i:^r freut eu(^ 
 
 3 fie freuen fief) 
 
 s. I t^ freute m\^ 
 
 etc. 
 
 Peesent. 
 
 S. I 
 
 x6) 5a'6e mtc^ fiefreut 
 bu ^aft bt(^ gefreut 
 er ):jat fie!) gefreut 
 tt)ir ftaben un§ gefreut 
 iftr !)abt eu(^ gefreut 
 fie l^oben \x^ gefreut 
 
 s. I \6) l^attc mi(^ gefreut 
 
 etc. 
 
 s. I x$) merbc m\^ freuen 
 
 2 bu iDirft bi(^ freuen 
 
 3 er tt)irb \\(i) freuen 
 
 Peeteeit. 
 
 Peefect. 
 
 PliUPEEFECT. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 i(^ freue mid^ 
 bu freueft h\^ 
 er freue fid^ 
 n)ir freuen un§ 
 i'^r freuet eud^ 
 fie freuen fid^ 
 
 id^ freute mid^ 
 
 etc. 
 
 x^ l)aht mx^ gefreut 
 bu ^abeft bid^ gefreut 
 er ):jahz fic^ gefreut 
 tt)ir l^aben un§ gefreut 
 i^r fjobtt eud^ gefreut 
 fie IjaUn fid) gefreut 
 
 x^ ^dtte mid^ gefreut 
 
 etc. 
 
 FUTUEE. 
 
 id^ tt)erbe mid^ freuen 
 bu tt)erbeft btd^ freuen 
 er ttjerbe fid^ freuen 
 
286] EEFLEXIYES. 143 
 
 P. I njtr tuerben un§ freuen ton tDcrben un§ freuen 
 
 2 i^r merbet eu(f) freuen \t\x tuerbet eu(!) freuen 
 
 3 fie n)erben fid) freuen fie tt)erben fi^ freuen 
 
 FUTUEE PeEFECT. 
 
 s. I \6) merbe mic^ gefreut ftaben td^ tDerbc mid) gefreut 5aBen 
 
 etc. etc. 
 
 ' Conditional. 
 CoNDinoNAii. CoNDinoNAii Peefect, 
 
 s. I ic^ n)iirbe mi(f) freuen id) tDiirbe mid) gefreut :^aben 
 
 etc. etc. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 SiNQTJIiAR. PLUEAIi, 
 
 1 freuen mx un§ 
 
 2 freue bi^, freue bu hx^ freut eud^, freut \^x tu(i) 
 
 3 freue er \x^ freuen fie fid) 
 
 Infinitive. 
 Present. Peefect. 
 
 fi^ freuen fn^ gefreut 5aBcn 
 
 Participles. 
 Peesent. Past. 
 
 fi(^ freuenb fic^ gefreut 
 
 Bemarks. 1. The reflexive pronoun is not given with the 
 participle in the principal parts, since, that participle being in 
 transitive verbs of a passive character, it can take no object 
 except as used with an auxiliary in forming the compound 
 tenses. 
 
 2. The fid) given with the infinitives and participles is, of 
 course, only representative of the whole body of reflexive 
 pronouns, with all of which those forms, not being restricted 
 to any one person or number, may be construed. 
 
 286. Any transitive verb in the language may be 
 used refiexively, or take a reflexive pronoun as object ; 
 but none are properly regarded as reflexive verbs 
 except — 
 
 1. Those which are only used with a reflexive object: as, 
 fi(^ f(^dmen be ashamed, \\6) fe'^nen long, fief) vrjiherfefeen resist. 
 
144 VERBS. [286- 
 
 2. Those which are usually or often used reflexively, and 
 have a special meaning in that use, the object not maintaining 
 its independence, but combining with the verb to form a single 
 conception, the equivalent of an intransitive verb : as, |i(^ l^iiten 
 beware (i)uten guard), fid^ fteEen make believe, pretend (fteHen 
 plme), fid^ uerlaffen rely (t)erlaffen quit). 
 
 287. 1. A reflexive verb is thus often related to the simple 
 verb as a corresponding intransitive to a transitive — thus, 
 freuen give pleasure to, \x^ ^xzutn feel pleasure, fiir^ten fear, \i^ 
 furd)tcn be afraid. But — 
 
 2. A few are intransitive, and of nearly the same meaning, both 
 as simple verbs and as reflexives : thus, irren and fi(^ irren be 
 mistaken, nal^en and fid) na^en draw nigh, ganfen and \\^ janfen 
 quarrel. 
 
 288. 1. An intransitive verb is much more often used tran- 
 sitively (227.26) with a reflexive object than with one of another 
 character : thus, er arbeitet unb Iduft fid^ tobt [tot] he works and runs 
 himself to death, bu follft bid^ einmal fait effen thou shalt eat thyself 
 full fUt. satisfied) for once. 
 
 2. An intransitive reflexive is sometimes used impersonally 
 instead of an intransitive passive (279.2), especially with adverbs 
 of manner, to express the action itself, without reference to a 
 subject : thus, e§ tangt fic^ Vxtx gut it is good dancing here, lebl&aft 
 Irdumt fici^'» unter biefem ^aum it is lively dreaming under this 
 tree, e§ ficl^t fi(^ gar artig in hk Rni!\6)tn t)\ntm it is very pretty 
 looking into the carriages. 
 
 289. 1. A considerable number of reflexive verbs take an 
 additional remoter object (not personal) in the genitive (219.3). 
 
 a. The construction of a reflexive verb with the genitive is 
 notably easier than of the same verb used otherwise than 
 reflexively— thus, id) erinnere m\^ meineS S5erge!^en§ I remember 
 (remind myself of ) my fault, but \^ erinnere \i)n an fein SSergel^en 
 I remind him of his fault — ^yet many of these also frequently 
 make their construction by the aid of a preposition, and many 
 others admit only a prepositional construction : thus, \^ jjer* 
 laffe mi(^ auf il^n I rely on him. 
 
 2. Only two or three reflexives take a remoter object in the 
 dative : such are \\^ nafjtn approach, fid) toiberfefeen oppose, fic^ 
 bequemen submit. 
 
292j IMPERSONALS. 145 
 
 290. A small number of verbs are used with a reflexive ob- 
 ject in the dative, in a manner quite analogous with the true 
 reflexive verbs, and therefore form a class of improper reflex- 
 ives. 
 
 a. Most of these require in addition a direct object in the ac- 
 cusative : thus, \6) ma^e mir fein Utirec^t an / make no unjust 
 claim, \^ bilbc miu ba§ nic^t ein I(3U) not imagine that, bu getraueft 
 ^ir t)iel thou darest much. But ]i^ fd^meic^eln flatter one's self 
 is intransitive. 
 
 IMPERSONAL VERBS. 
 
 291. 1. An impersonal verb, or a verb used imperson- 
 ally, is one by means of whicli the action implied in the 
 verb is represented as exerted, without reference to a 
 subject or actor. 
 
 2. Such a verb stands always in the third person 
 singular, and either without a subject, or, more usually, 
 with the indefinite subject e^ it. 
 
 Thus, e§ reflnet it rains, i. e. there is rain falling; e§ flopft it 
 knocks, i. e. there is a knocking; am ^angeg buftet'^ unb Ieu(i)tef § 
 on the Ganges are sweet odors and shining sights; mict) biiuft me 
 seems, I e. it seems to me; \t)n ^ungerte him hungered, i. e. he was 
 hungry (227.2c). 
 
 292. No verbs in German are absolutely and ex- 
 clusively impersonal : verbs impersonally used may be 
 classified as follows : 
 
 1. Verbs describing the phenomena of nature, which are 
 almost invariably impersonal in virtue of their meaning : thus, 
 e§ ftaQelt it hails, e§ ^ai aef c^neit it has snowed, es tt)irb bonnern unb 
 Bli^en it will thunder and lighten. 
 
 2. Certain verbs which by the idiom of the language are ordi- 
 narily used in an impersonal form: as, biinfen and bdud^ten 
 [beui^ten] seem, geliiften desire, Qelingen v^ove successful; and a 
 number of verbs signifying personal conditions and feelings, as 
 l^ungern hunger, biirflen thirst, frieren freeze, fd^minbeln be giddy, 
 Qrauen he horror-struck, etc. 
 
 a. All this class of impersonals take an object designating the 
 person affected by their action, or the subject of the feeling or 
 condition they describe: some take an accusative, others a 
 dative, others either an accusative or dative (222.n.le ; 227.2c) ; 
 
146 VERBS. [292- 
 
 thus, mid) oeliiftete md)t nac^ bem t^euren [teuren] So'^n I should 
 not long for the costly prize, biirftet beinen Seinb, fo trdnfe iftn if 
 thine enemy is thirsty, give him to drink, mir Qrauet t)or ber (Spotter 
 5fleibe I dread the envy of the gods, e§ biinft mir or mid) it seems 
 to me. ' 
 
 3. Almost any verb, transitive or intransitive, is liable to oc- 
 cur in impersonal use — if transitive, along with its ordinary 
 object. 
 
 Thus, mie fteftfg mit ben ^ottern Jiow fares it with the gods? 
 crQe!)f^ eu(^ tt)olf)( if it goes well with you, eg fetjlte an C)oIa there 
 was lack of wood, pibfeltd) regt eg fic^ im Utofire suddenly there is a 
 stir in the reeds, eg treibt il^n ben ^reig gu eriDerben he is impelled 
 to gain the prize, eg erf orbert eine ^re^ung it requires a turning, 
 eg bebarf ber ^nna^me nic^t it needs not the assumption. 
 
 a. The very common use of eg giebt it gives (i. e. there are given 
 or furnished), in the sense of there is or are, with following ac- 
 cusative, requires special notice : thus, 'ta Qdb eg ©c^aufelflii^Ic 
 there were rocking-chairs there, eg giebt t)iele, bie alter finb, there 
 are many who are older, "iid)^ eg meniger S()riften gdbe alg 6aracenen 
 that there were fewer Cliristians than Saracens. 
 
 4. Impersonal phrases formed with the verbs jein and merben 
 along with adverbial of adjective adjuncts, describing personal 
 conditions or states of feeling, and always accompanied by a 
 dative designating the person to whom such conditions belong, 
 are very frequent. 
 
 Thus, mir ift gang anberg i\\ ^O^ufft [^ut] I feel quite otherwise 
 (it is to me quite otherwise in mind), il^m Xoai jo bange he was so 
 apprehensive, mie mir tt)ol^I ift how well I feel! mie ift mir benn 
 Iww is it with me then ? — nun tt)irb mir immer bdnger now I grow 
 more and more anxious, mie n)e^ tDirb mir how I am beginning to 
 suffer ! je falter eg ift, befto l^ei^er tt)irb mir the colder it is, the Jwtter 
 I become, [{^m. iff g, alg ob'g ^n l^iniiberrief he feels as if he were 
 invited across. 
 
 5. Impersonal expressions are often made from intransitive 
 verbs in a passive or reflexive form (see 279.2, 288.2). 
 
 Thus, l)eute ^benb tt)irb getanat n)erben there will be dancing this 
 evening, eg fifet fi(^ fd)Ie(^t l^ier it is disagreeable sitting here. 
 
 293. The impersonal subject eg is (as is abundantly shown 
 by the examples already given) very often omitted — not, how- 
 ever, with the impersonals describing the phenomena of nature ; 
 nor, generally, with verbs which are not of common use in im- 
 
297] IMPEBSONALS. 147 
 
 personal form ; but, as a rule, with verbs which are of common 
 impersonal use, whenever the e§ would, by the rules for the 
 arrangement of the sentence, come elsewhere than in its natural 
 place next before the verb. 
 
 a. That is, especially in the cases mentioned in sections 2, 4, 
 and 5 of the last paragraph, whenever the object of the im- 
 personal verb, or an adjunct qualifying the verb, is placed before 
 it — and the putting of the object first, with consequent omission 
 of e§, is the more usual construction. 
 
 294. Since the impersonal verb represents the simple action 
 without reference to an acting subject, such impersonals as 
 take an object, direct or indirect, representing the person or 
 thing affected by the action or condition, are virtually equivalent 
 to passives or intransitives, having that person or thing as their 
 subject — and they often may or must be so rendered in English. 
 
 a. Many of the examples given above have been so rendered, 
 and those with jein or it)erben hardly admit of being treated 
 otherwise : thus, further, e§ erforbert eine ^re^ung a turning is 
 required, e§ bebarf ber ^nnabme nic^t the assumption is not needed. 
 
 295. A verb having the indefinite subject e§ it is not always 
 to be regarded as impersonal ; the ey sometimes represents in- 
 definitely a subject which is contemplated by the mind, and ad- 
 mits of being definitely stated ; yet more often (154.4), e§ is a 
 grammatical subject only, standing for a logical subject which 
 is to be statetl later, whether a substantive clause, an infinitive 
 clause, or a simple substantive : thus, e§ freut un§, ha^ (Sie ^ier 
 finb it rejoices us that you are here, e§ freut ini§, <Sie bu fe'^en it re- 
 joices Its to see you, eg freut un§ biefe 9lad)rid}t this news rejoices us. 
 
 [Exercise 20. Passive, Eeflexive, and Impersonal Yerbs.] 
 
 COMPOUND VERBS. 
 
 296. Verbs in German admit of composition with various 
 other parts of speech— with nouns, adjectives, and adverbs. 
 The importance and frequent use of certain classes of these 
 compounds render it necessary that they be treated here, rather 
 than later, under the general subject of the composition of 
 words. 
 
 297. Yerbs are compounded especially with a class 
 of elements called prefixes. These are all of kindred 
 
148 VERBS. [297- 
 
 derivation, being originally adverbs, words signifying 
 place or direction ; but they bave become divided in 
 modern use into two well-marked classes : 
 
 1. Prefixes whicb are also employed as independent 
 parts of speech, adverbs or prepositions. These form 
 a less intimate union with the verb, being separable 
 from it in many of its forms ; they are therefore called 
 SEPAEABLE PREFIXES, and a verb in combination with them 
 is said to be separably compounded. 
 
 2. Prefixes which, in their present form, occur only 
 in combination with verbs, and never admit of separa- 
 tion from verbal forms (or verbal derivatives) ; they 
 are called inseparable prefixes, and the verb with 
 them is said to be inseparably compounded. But — 
 
 3. A few independent prefixes sometimes form with 
 verbs combinations after the manner of the inseparable 
 prefixes, and therefore require to be treated as a class 
 by themselves. 
 
 verbs separably compounded. 
 
 298. The class of separable prefixes is divided into two sub- 
 classes, simple and compound. 
 
 1. The simple separable prefixes (including those sometimes 
 also used as inseparable — see 308 etc.) are : 
 
 db off, down ^oxt forth, away oB over, on 
 
 an on, at geoen afgainst -^ iiber over 
 
 auf up, upon — in in. - urn around 
 
 an^ out, from I)eim home ^unter under 
 
 Bei hy, beside, with ^er toward one ^ Dor before 
 
 ^^ ^^ !• there at -'^^^ -^^^^ ^^^ ^^^^^ ^^ i ^9^^'^^ or 
 
 bar ) ' Winter behind tt)icber j again 
 
 burc^ through mit with mq away 
 
 ein in, into nad) after gu to 
 
 empor up, aloft nteber down guriid back 
 
 entamei in two, apart gufommen together 
 
 2. The compound separable prefixes are — 
 
 a. Combinations of many of the above with one another, 
 especially with the words of more general direction or place 
 l)n, I)in, ia or bar, tjor: as :^eran, I}inan, baran, t)oran. 
 
299] SEPAEABLE COMPOUNDS. 149 
 
 6. One or two combinations of the above with preceding in- 
 separable prefixes : namely, beiDor before, entgeflen against (this, 
 however, is really derived from in^gegen). 
 
 c. .%a^\m\6)Z\\ between (gtrtfc^en by itself is not used as a 
 prefix), and l^intan behind (contracted from l^inten an). 
 
 d. Note that, of those given in the list above, several are 
 really compound adverbs (empor, entgtt)ei, guriicE, sufammen), 
 although not made up of two different prefixes. 
 
 299. Conjugation of Verbs compounded tvith Separable 
 Prefixes. 
 
 The conjugation of a compound verb is in general 
 the same with that of the simple verb : only one or two 
 matters regarding the treatment of the prefix require 
 notice : 
 
 1. The prefix stands before the verb in the infinitive 
 and both participles, but after it in all the other simple 
 forms. 
 
 a. In the former case, the prefix is written with the verb as a 
 single word ; in the latter case it is, of course, separated from 
 it; and, if the verb be followed by other adjuncts — as objects, 
 adverbs, etc. — the prefix usually and regularly stands last, at 
 the end of the whole clause : thus, from anfangen begin, \^ 
 \a\w a\[Ibegin,\^ fing bicfen DJlorgen friil) gu ftubircn [ftubie^^ 
 ren] an I began early this morning to study. 
 
 b. But if, by the rules for the arrangement of the sentence 
 (434), the verb is transposed, or removed to the end, it comes, 
 even in the simple forms, to stand after its prefix, and is then 
 written as one word with it : thus, al§ i(^ biefen 9!)Zorgen frii:^ gu 
 ftubiren [ftubieren] anfing as J began to study early this 
 morning. 
 
 2. The ordinary sign of the past participle, (^c, is 
 inserted between the separable prefix and the root; 
 also the sign of the infinitive, ^^u, whenever used. 
 
 Thus, angefangen begun, an^ufangen to begin: in the latter 
 case, as the example shows, the verb is written along with its 
 infinitive sign and prefix, as one word. 
 
 3. The prefix has the principal accent. 
 
150 
 
 VEEBS. 
 
 [300- 
 
 300. Examples: anfanj^en begin (II.3), I)erQnnaf)en 
 draw nigh. 
 
 Principal Parts. 
 
 anf angen, fing an, angef atigen ]^erannal^en, natjk Ijerati, ^erangcnaftt 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Peesent, I begin etc. 
 s. I fange an 
 
 2 fangll an 
 
 3 fangt an 
 p. I fangen an 
 
 2 fangt an 
 
 3 fangen an 
 
 Pbeteeit, I began etc. 
 s. I fing an 
 
 Peefect, I have begun etc. 
 s. I ]^aBe angefangen 
 
 Plupeefect, I had begun etc. 
 
 s. I l^atte angefangen 
 
 FuTTJEE, I shall begin etc. 
 
 s. I werbe anfangen 
 Fur. Peef., I shall have begun etc. 
 
 s. I n)erbe angefangen ^aben 
 
 I draw nigh etc. 
 na^e Beran 
 nal^fl Ijeran 
 naftt l^eran 
 na^en 5eran 
 naT^t T^eran 
 naften l^eran 
 
 I drew nigh etc. 
 na!)te fteran 
 
 I have drawn nigh etc. 
 bin fterangenal^t 
 
 I had drawn nigh etc. 
 xoax fterangenaftt 
 
 I shall draw nigh etc. 
 tDerbe ^erannaften 
 
 I shall have draicnnigh etc. 
 
 tDerbe Ijerangena^t fein 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 Peesent, I may begin etc. 
 
 s. I fange an 
 
 etc., etc. 
 
 I may draw nigh etc. 
 nafte ^eran 
 
 etc., etc. 
 
 Conditional. 
 CoNDiTioNAii, I should begin etc. I should draw nigh etc. 
 
 s. I mxht anfangen ttiiirbe ^eranna^en 
 
 etc., etc. etc., etc. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 begin etc. 
 s. 2 fange an, fange bu an 
 3 fange er an 
 
 etc. 
 
 draw nigh etc. 
 
 nafte ^eran, na^e bu ^eran 
 na^e er l^eran 
 
 etc. 
 
303] INSEPARABLE COMPOUNDS. 151 
 
 Infinitive. 
 Peesent, to begin to draw nigh 
 
 anfanaen, ansufangen l&eranna:^en, l^eranguna^en 
 
 Peefect, to have begun to have drawn nigh 
 
 angefangen l^aben ^^rangenaT^t fein 
 
 Paeticiples. 
 Peesent, beginning drawing nigh 
 
 anfangenb l^erannal^enb 
 
 Past, begun drawn nigh 
 
 angefangen l&crangena^t 
 
 301. 1- The meaning of the simple verb is often greatly- 
 altered by its composition with a prefix, as in anfangen begin, 
 literally take hold on: in other cases, each member of the 
 compomid retains its independent meaning nearly unchanged. 
 
 2. When the combination is of the latter character, no ab- 
 solute line is to be established dividing the employment of the 
 prefix as prefix from its use as independent adverb ; and there 
 are many instances in which the prefix (especially a compound 
 one) is treated in both ways indifferently, and either written 
 with the verb or separated from it ; thus, tDO man mager ^tnein 
 geftt unb fett fterau§ fomnit (or, l^ineinge^t, ^eraugfommt) where one 
 goes in lean and comes out fat. 
 
 [Exercise 21. Verbs Separably Compounded.] 
 VERBS INSEPARABLY COMPOUNDED. 
 
 302. The inseparable prefixes are be, ent (or emp), 
 cr, Q^c, i)er, and ^er. 
 
 a. These prefixes are, most of them, traceably descended 
 from those of the other class : their original form and present 
 office will be explained below (307). 
 
 303. They remain in close combination with the 
 verb to which they are attached, through its whole 
 conjugation, forming with it, as their name denotes, an 
 inseparable combination, of which the radical syllable, 
 and not the prefix, receives the accent. Hoijcq — • 
 
152 VERBS. [303- 
 
 1. The sign of the infinitive, ^u, is put before the 
 combination (and separated in writing from it), as if it 
 were a simple verb. 
 
 2. The sign of the participle, ge, is omitted altogether. 
 a. Since, as was pointed out above (243.3a), this is never 
 
 prefixed to an unaccented syllable. Moreover, the ge is itself 
 an inseparable prefix, and no verbal form is ever allowed to 
 have two inseparable prefixes. 
 
 304. Examples : beginnen hegin (1.2), Derretfen jour- 
 ney away. 
 
 Principal Parts. 
 
 beginnen, begann, begonnen toerreifen, t)erreifte, berreift 
 
 JjfDICATr^K 
 
 begtnnc 
 
 begann 
 
 );)a^t begonnen 
 
 l^atte begonnen 
 
 tt)erbe beginnen 
 
 tt)erbe begonnen l&aben 
 
 fterrelfe 
 berreifte 
 bin t)erreift 
 war t)erreift 
 merbe Derreijen 
 ttjerbe derreift fein 
 
 
 Subjunctive. • 
 
 bcginne 
 
 beganne or begfinne 
 
 etc., etc. 
 
 terreife 
 t)erreifete 
 
 etc., etc. 
 
 
 Conditional. 
 
 tt)urbe beginnen 
 
 etc., etc. 
 
 n)urbe t)errelfen 
 
 etc., etc. 
 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 begtnnc 
 
 berrelfc 
 
 
 Infinitives. 
 
 beginnen, gu beginnen 
 begonnen ^aben 
 
 toerrelfen, gn berrclfcn 
 Derreift jein 
 
 
 Participles. 
 
 beglnnenb 
 begonnen 
 
 toerrelfenb 
 tterreift 
 
307] INSEPAEABLE PEEFIXES. 153 
 
 305. A few inseparably compounded verbs are further com- 
 pounded with a separable prefix. Such combine the peculiar- 
 ities of both modes of conjugation, taking no ge in the 
 participle, and interposing gu of the infinitive between the two 
 prefixes : thus, anerfennen recognize, anjuerfennen, erfanntc an, 
 anerfannt. 
 
 a. Some of these, however— as anbetreffen, auferfte^en, au§- 
 erlcfen, einberleiBen, Dorentftalten— are never used except in such 
 verbal forms, or in such arrangements of the sentence, as re- 
 quire the separable prefix to stand before the verb : thus, al§ 
 (^6rifhi§ auferftanb when Christ arose; but not gl^riftuS erftanb auf 
 Christ arose. 
 
 306. No verb separably compounded is ever further com- 
 pounded with an inseparable prefix. 
 
 a. The words sometimes given as examples of such compo- 
 sition are really derivatives from nouns : thus, tieraBfd^eueit 
 regard with horror is not from a verb a6fd)euen, but from the 
 noun ^Ibj^eu horror ; beauftragen commission, in Uke manner, is 
 from ^uftrag an errand, charge; benad^ri(^tigen inform from 
 9^a(^rid)t news, information, and so on. 
 
 307. Derivation and Uses of the Inseparable Prefixes, 
 
 1. The inseparable prefixes are elements which have become 
 greatly changed, both in form and in meaning, from their 
 originals, and have acquired such importance in the system of 
 word-formation as to call for special notice in the grammar. 
 
 a. While they have in part a distinct and clearly definable 
 force in the compounds they form, they in part also modify in 
 a very general and indefinite way the meaning of the verbs to 
 which they are attached ; and their spheres of use variously 
 approach, and even sometimes overlap, one another. Only 
 their leading applications will be stated below. 
 
 h. These prefixes are also freely used in forming derivative 
 verbs from other parts of speech (see 405.III) ; such derivatives 
 are conjugated in the same manner as the inseparably com- 
 pounded verbs. 
 
 2. ^e is the same with our own prefix he, and of kindred 
 force with the latter ; it comes ultimately from the separable 
 prefix and independent preposition bet hy. 
 
 a. Prefixed to an intransitive, it adds the meaning of ux>on, 
 about, or the like, converting the intransitive into a transitive : 
 
154 VERBS. [307- 
 
 thus, flagcn moan, beflagcn bemoan, firtfien sing, Bcfinflcn sing 
 about, besing. 
 
 b. Prefixed to a transitive, it changes the direction of the 
 verbal action, converting into a direct object what was only in- 
 directly or remotely the object of the simple verb : thus, malen 
 paint a picture, bemalen paint over (as a wall), rauben steal 
 (something from some one), berauben rob (some one of something). 
 
 c. Rarely, it only slightly modifies the meaning of a verb, 
 usually in the way of a strengthening or extension of its action : 
 thus, berfen and bebeden cover ; brcingen and bebrdngen crowd, 
 oppress; l^arren and bel^arren wait, persist; fle^en and befteben 
 stand, subsist 
 
 d. Some of its compounds are restricted to a reflexive use : 
 thus, \\^ befinben^ncJ one's self, be; fid) bctragen bear one's self, 
 behave. 
 
 3. ©nt was earlier ant, in which form it appears in ^nttDort 
 answer and ^ntli^ countenance; it is by origin an adverb mean- 
 ing against, related to our and and the prefix of aiwwer (and- 
 swarian), etc. In combination with three verbs beginning with 
 f, it has taken, by assimilation, the form tmp : thus, empf angen, 
 empfe^len, empfinben. 
 
 a. Its primitive meaning appears in a few compounds, as cnt- 
 fpre(f)en correspond, answer; empfangen receive. 
 
 b. Its leading idea is now that of out; it denotes removal, 
 separation, deprivation, sometimes even negation: thus, ent- 
 geben, entfommen, entflieben escape; entgieben take aicaij; entlaffen 
 let off, release; entfagen renounce; entttjeiben desecrate. 
 
 c. It sometimes indicates transition into a condition : as, cnt* 
 brennen take fire, entfteben come into being. 
 
 4. ©r is the same word with the prefix ur forming nouns (411.4), 
 and means by origin forth, out, being related to au§ out, and 
 probably ultimately identical with it. 
 
 a. It has most nearly its primitive force in such verbs as 
 ergieben educate, bring up, erri^ten erect, erfd^retfen startle. 
 
 b. It often signifies a passing into a condition, a becoming, 
 the beginning of an action : as, erfd)einen (shine forth) appear, 
 ertbnen sound forth, tx^ittnn fall a trembling. 
 
 c. It strengthens the verbal idea, often adding an implication 
 of accomplishment or attainment : as, erf(i)o|)fen exhaust, ertrogen 
 endure, erleben experience, er]u(J)en request, erfinben invent. 
 
 i 
 
307] INSEPARABLE PREFIXES. 155 
 
 d. Hence (its prevailing office in the production of new com- 
 pounds), it signifies an acquisition by means of the action ex- 
 pressed by the simple verb: thus, erjafien obtain by hunting^ 
 ertrofeen get by defiance, ertangen bring on by dancing. 
 
 5. (55e is believed to have had at first the sense of with, together, 
 which sense appears, somewhat dimly, in a few of the com- 
 pounds it forms : as, tjcfrieren become solidified by cold, gerinnen 
 coagulate, gefaflen (fall in with) please, gefteften (stand by) confess. 
 But this sense has become so generalized and effaced, and its 
 applications are so various and indistinct, that it would be in 
 vain to attempt to classify them. 
 
 a. The adoption of this prefix as regular characteristic of past 
 participles has been already referred to (243.3c) as comparatively 
 modern, and hardly admitting of explanation. 
 
 6. a. 35er is historically the same word as bor forward, forth, 
 and its leading idea is that of forth, away : as in Derbrdttgen 
 crowd out, toeriagen chase away, t)er!aufen bargain away, sell, t)er* 
 reifen journey off, t)erfpielen lose at play. 
 
 b. Hence, as intimating removal through the action of the 
 verb to which it is attached, it comes further to imply loss, 
 detriment, destruction : as in uerbrauc^en wear out, uerberben 
 ruin; — or a removal from what should be, the production of an 
 untoward effect: as in ticrfii^ren lead astray, VitxxMznput out of 
 place; — or the commission of error : as in t)erre(^nen misreckoyi, 
 berfennen mistake; — or a reversal of action : as in berbieten forbid, 
 t)erad)teti despise. 
 
 c. On the other hand, it signifies a complete working-out of 
 the action of the verb : as in berBluten bleed to death, DerBrenuen 
 bum up; — which may imply a cessation of the action, as in 
 berBIii^en blossom out, fade, wither; or, more usually, a strength- 
 ening of the action, as in t)er]infen sink away, Dertilgen blot out, 
 toerfdjlie^en shut up, uerBinben unite; — and this intensive force in 
 a few cases makes transitive, as t)erla(f)cn deride, berfc'^Ien miss, 
 fail of. 
 
 7. 3er represents an older bi§, which is related to the Latin 
 dis, and means, like the latter, apart, asunder. 
 
 a. Accordingly, it either intensifies the meaning of verbs 
 which contain the idea of dissolution, of going to pieces or re- 
 ducing to pieces, or it adds that idea: thus, gerbrecf)en break 
 asunder, aerjprengen bJm) to pieces, $erf alien fall apart, jerrinncn 
 become dissolved. 
 
156 VERBS. [308- 
 
 PREFIXES SEPARABLE OR INSEPARABLE. 
 
 308. A few prefixes, belonging properly to the 
 separable class (being all of tliem in nse also as inde- 
 pendent parts of speech), nevertheless sometimes form 
 compounds after the manner of inseparables. 
 
 309. These prefixes are — 
 
 burd} through iiber over unter under 
 
 t)tnter behind um about tDiber ) against 
 
 trteber ) a^ain 
 
 a. SBiber and tt)tcber are the same word, but differently spelt, 
 to indicate a difference of meaning. All verbs compounded with 
 tuiber are inseparable; all but one or two compounded with 
 ttjieber are separable. 
 
 310. In verbs separably compounded with these prefixes, 
 both members of the compound have their own full meaning, 
 hardly modified by the combination; the inseparable com- 
 pounds often take an altered or figurative sense. 
 
 a. Thus, as separable compounds, burc^bringen crowd through, 
 "^interge'^en go behind, iikrfe^en set across, umcje^en go around, 
 revolve, untermerfen throw under, tt)ieber!)oIen/e/c7i6acfc;— but, as 
 inseparable compounds, \)\xx6)^x\x[0,iX[ penetrate, permeate, I)inter= 
 geften deceive, u6er|e^en translate, umQeI)en evade, unteriDerfen ^6- 
 jugate, mieberftolen repeat. Yet the difference is not often so 
 marked as in these examples, and in a host of cases the two 
 classes of compounds are distinguished by only a slight shade 
 of meaning, if at all. 
 
 311. The compounds, of either class, are accented 
 and conjugated according to the rules already given. 
 That is to say — 
 
 1. The separable compounds are accented on the prefix ; they 
 put the prefix before the verbal form in the infinitive and par- 
 ticiples, but after it in other cases; they take the signs of 
 participle and infinitive between the prefix and the root. 
 
 Thus, from burcf)'bnngen crowd through come burd^'gubrinaen, 
 bringe burc^, brang burd), bin burc^^'gebrungen, merbe burd)'bringen, 
 burd)'gebrungen. 
 
313] COMPOUND VERBS. ' 157 
 
 2. The inseparable compounds are accented on the radical 
 syllable, reject the ge of the participle, and put gu of the infin- 
 itive before the whole combination. 
 
 Thus, from bur^brin'fien penetrate come gu burc^brtn'Gen, bur(f)= 
 brin'ge, burrfibrang', ^obe burdjbrun'gcn, tocrbe bur(i)brin'gen, burc^^* 
 brun'gen. 
 
 OTHER COMPOUND YERBS. 
 
 312. Yerbs compounded with other adverbs than those al- 
 ready mentioned, or with nouns or adjectives, fall into two 
 classes : 
 
 1. True or close compounds, in which the first member has 
 become an integral part of the combination, and the whole is 
 treated as a simple verb. 
 
 Thus, l^anb'^aBen handle, manage, gu ftanb^aben, ^onblfiaBte, Qt^ 
 l^anbftabt; todjt]aQtn prophesy, gu ma^rfagen, tDa^rfagte, gema^r* 
 fagt; liebfojen caress, gu Uebfofeti, licbfofte, geUebfoft. 
 
 2. Loose or false compounds, phrases, written together as one 
 word, in which the first member is treated as any such word 
 limiting the verb would be, and the combination is conjugated 
 like a verb separably compounded. 
 
 Thus, ftattfinben take place, ftattgufinben, f anb ftatt, ftattgefunben ; 
 ttJO^It^un benefit, tt)ot)lgutftun, t))at tDol^l, iroftlget^an ; feftlj(^lagen 
 miscarry, f eftlgufdjlagen, f dfilug fel^I, fel^Igef d)Iagen ; lo^fpreiien ab- 
 solve, Io§gufpred)en, fprac^ lo§, lo§gefprD(^en. 
 
 a. If a verb of the former class has not the accent on its first 
 syllable, it loses (243.3a) the ge of the past participle: thus, 
 fro^Iod'en, frol)locft. 
 
 b. From the same class are to be carefully distinguished 
 certain verbs which have the aspect of compounds, but are in 
 fact derivatives from compound nouns : such are frii^ftiiden to 
 breakfast (from gruftftiid breakfast), rat^|d)Iagen [ratj(i)Iagen] 
 consult (from 9ftatftf(i)Iag [9tatfcf)lag] consultation). 
 
 313. W\^ and doH are treated in part as proper prefixes, and 
 form both separable and inseparable compounds, which are 
 accented and conjugated like those made with bur(^, etc. 
 (308-11). 
 
 But mi^ is very rarely treated as a separable, and only by the 
 insertion of ^u and ge in the infinitive and participle : thus, m\^= 
 gut)erftet)en, mi^gegangen, but not irf) t)erftel^e mig, etc. ; and some 
 verbs take a prefixed ge in the participle: thus, gemi^brau(^t^ 
 
158 VEEBS. [313- 
 
 gemi^^tinbelt, etc. 35oII forms five or six inseparable compounds, 
 as t)oIIbrin9en accomplish, uoflsie'^en execute, and a number of 
 loose separables, as t^oUQXZ^tn pour full. 
 
 [Exercise 22. Verbs Inseparably Compounded, Eia] 
 
 ADJUNCTS OF THE VEKB. 
 
 314. A verb, in a proper verbal form (that is to say, exclud- 
 ing the infinitives and participles : see 339, 349), always stands 
 as the bare predicate of a sentence ; and all that constitutes the 
 complete predicate is brought in in the way of modifying ad- 
 juncts to the verb, variously limiting and qualifying its action. 
 
 a. The proper verbal forms, those possessing the char- 
 acteristic of person, are often called its " finite " forms : they are 
 better called its personal forms, and this expression will be used 
 here. 
 
 h. Even in the compound tenses of the verb itself, the rank of 
 verb belongs in strictness only to the personal auxiliary, the 
 other parts being adjuncts of the latter: thus, in id) l^abe i{)n Qe= 
 !ran!t I have pained him, ^dbt is the bare predicate, and ge- 
 frdnft is an attribute of the object, as much as finbe and franf, 
 respectively, in id) finbe i^n !ran! I find Jam sick; x^ merbe gefrcintt 
 I am pained, \^ bin gegangen I am (have) gone are analogous, 
 in like manner, with \^ merbe !ran! I become sick, [^ bin tt)eg I 
 am away; and \^ tcerbe gefrdnft tt)orben fein I shall have been 
 pained is made up by the addition of successive modifying ad- 
 juncts to merbe, each adjunct after the first being (see 348.2) 
 regularly prefixed to the one which it further limits ; the phrase 
 means literally I am entering (merbe) into a state of having (fein) 
 become (morben) pained (gefrdnft). That the auxiliaries have 
 more or less completely the inferior value of copulas, connecting 
 the subject with the chiefly significant part of the predicate, 
 does not alter their formal or grammatical character. 
 
 c. No personal form of a verb has the value of adjunct to 
 another pers-^nal form ; there are as many separate sentences 
 as there are separate verbs. All the other parts of speech (ex- 
 cepting the conjunctions : see 382. a) may enter, by connection 
 with the verb as its adjuncts, into the relation of parts of the 
 predicate of a sentence. 
 
 315. Object of a Verb. Most verbs may take an object — that 
 is to say, may be followed by a noun (or its equivalent) in an 
 
316] VERBAL ADJUNCTS. 159 
 
 oblique case, designating the person or tiling upon which, or as 
 affecting which, the action which it describes is exerted by the 
 subject. 
 
 1. A "transitive" verb takes its object in the accusative case ; 
 and such is called a direct object: thus, er 1:jat ein en §ut, unb 
 trdgt il& n he has a hat, and wears it: see 227. 
 
 a. A few transitive verbs are followed by two accusatives : 
 see 227.3. 
 
 2. Many "intransitive" verbs take an indirect object in the 
 genitive or dative case: thus, ic^ frf)one meine^ Setnbe§ I 
 spare my enemy, er folgt mir he'follows me: see 219, 222.11. 
 
 3. Many verbs, besides their direct object, take a remoter 
 object in the dative or genitive, indicating the person or thing 
 affected less immediately by the action of the subject upon the 
 object, or further defining that action : thus, [^ rauBe b i e f e m 
 50^anne ba§ ^elb I steal the money from this man, i^ berauBc 
 tl^n f ein e § ®elbe§ I rob him of his money: see 219, 222.1. 
 
 316. Predicate Noun or Adjective. A noun or adjective is 
 called predicate, if it is brought by the verb into connection 
 with a noun or its equivalent (either the subject or the direct 
 object of the verb), as limiting or qualifying that noun. 
 
 1. a. A predicate noun stands in the nominative, relating to 
 and qualifying the subject of the verb, after jein be, tDerben 
 become, bleiben continue, fc^etnen, biinfen, and bduc^ten [beuc^^ten] 
 seem, and !)ei^en be called; also, with the passive of the verbs 
 that take a noun in the accusative as objective predicate: see 
 213. 
 
 These are verbs of incomplete predication, requiring a 
 complement. Especially fein be is the ordinary simple con- 
 nective of a subject with its predicated quality, and is therefore 
 called the copula. 
 
 b. After a few verbs — of calling, regarding, and the like — a 
 predicate noun stands in the accusative, brought by the verb 
 into relation with its object: this is called an objective predicate: 
 thus, er nannte m\^ feinen greunb he called me his friend: see 
 227.3&,c. 
 
 2. a. A predicate adjective is used after the same verbs as a 
 predicate noun : thus, er t[t unb Wxbi mir treu, unb tt)irb nte un=' 
 treu tt)erben he is and continues faithful to me, and will never be* 
 come unfaithful. 
 
160 VEKBS. [316- 
 
 &. With verbs of more complete predication, or of full pred- 
 ixjative forpe, an adjective is often used in a manner which it is 
 convenient to distinguish as adverbial predicate (116.1b) : thus, 
 bie ^inber ftanben ft u m m the children stood silent, bie Stimme 
 ftromte l^immlijc^ 1^ elle \)oxthe voice poured forth hearenly clear, 
 tDtrb^S au^ f d) o n gu %aq,t fommen will it also come forth beauti- 
 ful? 
 
 G. Some verbs are followed by an adjective as objective pred- 
 icate (116.1c), relating to and qualifying their object : thus, jic 
 ringen bie §dnbe ft)unb they wring their hands sore, bie \^ gerne 
 b r e i f a (i) biete which I gladly offer threefold, fie ftellt fid) ii b c r ^ 
 r a f (^ t she feigns herself surprised, id) f iiftle meine ^raf te 1^ o 1^ e r 
 I feel my powers higher, er ftdit \\)Xi It) a rm he Jiolds him warm. 
 
 This predicative construction is much more common with 
 adjectives than with nouns, which generally require al§ as, fiir 
 for, gu to, or the like, before them : compare 227. Sc. 
 
 317. Adverb. The verbal idea is limited by an adverb, or 
 by more than one, in the most various manner, in respect to 
 time, place, occasion, manner, end, and so on. See Adverbs, 
 361 etc. 
 
 Thus, x6) gel)e je^t /am goiiig now, er too^nt file r he lives here, 
 fie fprec^en q u t they speak well, bu bift l^eute morgen fe^r fpcit er* 
 tt)a(J^t you woke very late this morning. 
 
 318. Prepositional Phrase. A phrase composed of a prepo- 
 sition along with the word (generally a noun, with or without 
 adjuncts) which it governs, and the nature ol' whose relation to 
 the verbal action it defines, is a very frequent adjunct to the 
 verb, taking the place of object, predicate, or adverb. 
 
 a. As direct object in place of an accusative, such a phrase 
 can hardly stand : but it may be used for a genitive object — as, 
 t(^ tDarte auf iftn, for id) tuarte feiner limit for him; for a dative 
 object— as, er folgt mir, or er folgt auf mid) he follows me; yet 
 more freely for a remoter obje t along with a direct object — as, 
 i^ freue tnid) iiber bteje§, for id) freue mid) befjen I rejoice at this, 
 id) f c^retbe einen 33nef an i^n, for \d) f d^reibe iftm einen Srief I write 
 a letter to him. 
 
 b. Examples of prepositional phrases with predicate value 
 are e§ tDar t)on entfc^eibenbcr 2Bid}tifl!eit it was of decisive im- 
 portance, bie ^ranten blieben in ber Witk the sick remained in the 
 midst, fie ertpd^Iten tl)n gum l^aifer they chose him emperor, bte§ 
 tDXxh gum ^uSbrud ber ©eele this becomes an expression of the soul. 
 
319] VERBAL ADJUNCTS. 161 
 
 c. Adverbial prepositional phrases are ber SSogel fpielt im 
 SauBe the bird plays in the foliage, mt betQcn ben Samen in ber 
 @rbe ©(i)oo& we hide tJie seed in th£ earth's bosom, er rief mit lauter 
 Sttmme he cried with a Imtd voice. 
 
 319. Order of the verbal adjuncts. 
 
 1. In the normal or regular arrangement of the sentence, all 
 the adjuncts of a personal verb are placed after it. 
 
 a. For the inverted order of arrangement, in which one of the 
 adjuncts is frequently placed before the verb it modifies, and 
 for the transposed order, in which the personal verb is placpd 
 after all its adjuncts, see the rules given for the order of 
 the sentence, below, 431, 434. 
 
 2. When the verb is modified by two or more adjuncts, the 
 general rule is, that one which is more closely combined in idea 
 with the verb, and more essentially modifies its predicative 
 meaning, is placed further from it than one of a more external 
 and accessory character. Hence — 
 
 a. The infinitive or participle, in a compound verbal form, 
 stands at the end of the sentence : thus, jie ft a 1 1 e iftre 3<iftne 
 f(ftarf in feine ginger Q e f e fe t she had sunk her teeth sharply into 
 his fingers, it)r merbct eucft fo Hutig enter Tla^^i nicftt liber- 
 ie b c n you will not presume so cruelly upon your power. 
 
 b. An infinitive dependent upon any verb, modal or causative 
 auxil ary or other, stands in like manner at the end of the 
 sentence: thus, [^ n)in t)or iftr mic^ niebernjerfen I wilt 
 humble myself before her. 
 
 c. A separable prefix belonging to the verb takes the same 
 place: thus, fie f aft babei re(ftt finfter nnb nnmiHig au§ she looked 
 at the same time right gloomy and out of humor. 
 
 d. Any part of speech compounded with a verb after the 
 manner of a separable prefix, or forming with it a verbal phrase 
 analogous with such a compound, takes the same place : thus, 
 i(ft naftm ni(ftt§ meftr t)on ber ftinler mir liegenben ©bene maftr 
 I no longer saw anything of the plain that lay behind me. 
 
 e. Of two cases governed by the same verb, the second ac- 
 cusative (227.3) is placed after that which is the more immediate 
 object of the verb ; the genitive (219.2,3) follows the accusative ; 
 the dative (222.1.1) usually precedes the accusative (except 
 when this is a pronoun or emphatic). 
 
 /. Of more than one adverb qualifying the same verb, an ad- 
 verb of time ordinarily precedes one of place, and both are 
 
162 USES OF THE FORMS OP CONJUGATION. [319- 
 
 placed before one of manner or degree : thus, er arBeitet immer 
 flei^ig he always works industrioiisUj, bu mol^nft ^ier fel)r beqiiem 
 you live here very comfortably. Hence, also, the adverb of nega- 
 tion, ni(i)t, if it modifies the general assertion of the sentence, 
 stands last ; but if its negative force applies to some particular 
 adjunct of the verb, it is placed next before that adjunct. 
 
 3. The rules as above stated are subject to various modifica- 
 tion under the influence of accent or emphasis, or of euphony. 
 
 a. Any adjunct of the verb may be transferred to a position 
 other than its proper one (usually later), for the purpose of 
 being made more prominent. 
 
 h. Since a pronoun is, in general, a less significant and em- 
 phatic word than a noun, usage has established the rule that — 
 
 A pronoun immediately dependent on the verb (not governed 
 by a preposition), whether as direct or indirect object, comes 
 first among the verbal adjuncts. 
 
 Among the pronouns, a personal pronoun comes before a de- 
 monstrative, the briefer personal pronouns, especially e§ it, be- 
 fore the longer, and the reflexives first of all. 
 
 4 Prepositional phrases take, in general, the position belong- 
 ing to the part of speech whose equivalent they are ; but they 
 are more hable than single words to change place for euphonic 
 reasons. 
 
 5. The natural connections of the different verbal adjuncts 
 are regarded in the arrangement of the sentence ; those which 
 affect one another, and exert a combined influence upon the 
 verbal action, being put together. 
 
 6. The above are only the leading principles of the arrange- 
 ment of words in a sentence. To follow out their application in 
 detail, and illustrate their joint and mutual action, and the more 
 or less irregular and arbitrary modifications which they admit, 
 cannot here be attempted. 
 
 USES OF THE FORMS OF CONJUG-ATION. 
 
 PERSON AND NUMBER. 
 
 320. In general, the verb is of the same person and number 
 as its subject. 
 
 a. Being, of course, of the first or second person only when 
 its subject is a personal pronoun of those persons respectively, 
 since all other words are of the third person. 
 
322] PERSON AND NUMBER. * 163 
 
 321. Special Rules respecting Person. 
 
 1. When the same verb has subjects of more than one person, 
 it is of the first person (plural) if either of its subjects is of the 
 first person ; otherwise, of the second : thus, i^ unb bu f in b "^ter 
 land thou are here, bu unb er glaubt e§ beibe nid)t \^ou and he 
 both disbelieve it. 
 
 2. After a relative (ber) referring to an antecedent of the first 
 or second person, the verb is in the third, unless the personal 
 pronoun is repeated after the relative (compare 181) : thus, bu, 
 ber bem 33a]ili^! ben DJ^orbblic! gab tlwu wlw gavest to the basilisk 
 his deadly glance (but bu, ber bu Q(i^]i). 
 
 322. Special Bules respecting Number. 
 
 1. A verb having for its subject more than one singularnoun 
 is put in the plural. 
 
 a. To this rule there are frequent exceptions — either as the 
 several subjects are regarded as combined into a single idea ; 
 or as, when preceding or following an enumeration of single 
 subjects, the verb, by a familiar license of speech, is suffered to 
 agree with the one nearest it alone ; or as the verb is in fact 
 understood with other than the one subject with which it 
 agrees: thus, Winter mir lie fit nur Summer unb ®Ienb behind me 
 lies only sorrow and misery, 5el§ unb Wtn tt)irb fortcieriffen rock 
 and sea are hurried onward, e§ begleite burc^ ^eben unb ©terben 
 un§ Sieb unb :^iebe unb SBein may song and love and wine ac- 
 company us through life and death, Siiiien, 93lorben, ©tel)len unb 
 ^^ebredien tjat iiber^anb genommen hjing, murder, theft, and 
 adultery have become prevalent. 
 
 2. A collective noun in the singular takes a verb in the singular 
 much more strictly than in English. 
 
 a. Exceptions are only such expressions as ein ^aar two or 
 three, eine 5Jlencje a number, ein '^ufeenb a dozen, which are fre- 
 quently used with plural nouns (ordinarily construed apposition- 
 ally with them : see 216.5a), and have gained a plural value by 
 association: thus, in tr)eld)em ein $aar SSbgel \)m unb mieber 
 l^iipf en in which a couple of birds hop back and forth, im C>ofe 
 jpielten ein $aar ber munteren ^inber in the yard were playing 
 two or three of the merry children, ein $aar ]inb getuoftnlic^ t)or= 
 au§ a couple are generally in front. 
 
 3. After the impersonal and indefinite subjects e§, bie§, ba§, 
 toa§, tt)eld^e§, etc., the verb is put in the plural if a following 
 
t64 trSES OF THE FORMS OF CONJUGATION. [322- 
 
 predicate noun is plural : thus, c§ f i n b unfer gtDei there are two 
 of us, ba§ finb meine greunbe tJiose are my friends.— ^o also 
 occasionally in a case like bie grud^t biefe§ 33aumeg finb fleine 
 'Beeren the fruit of this tree is small berries. 
 
 4. Out of exaggerated respectfulness, the plural verb is some- 
 times (the usage is happily going out of vogue) construed with 
 a singular title, or name and title : as, b e H e b e n bcr ^err biefen 
 ©etfel gu erproben may the gentleman he pleased to try this purse, 
 6etne 9]laieftdt ber ^omq l^aben gerubt his majesty the king has 
 
 been gracwusly pleased to , §err doctor tDurben ha tak6)'\\ixt 
 
 the d/yitor was put through his catechism there. 
 
 MODE AND TENSE. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 323. The use of the indicative mode, in its various tenses, 
 corresponds upon the whole pretty closely in German and in 
 English. The principal points of difference will be stated below. 
 
 324. Indicative Present. 1. The German present — e. g. \^ 
 Hebe — answers to the three English forms of the present I love, 
 I do love, and I am loving: the shades of difference among these 
 different values are either left to be inferred from the context, 
 or are expressed or intimated' by adjuncts to the verb or by 
 verbal phrases. 
 
 2. In German, as in English and French, the present is often 
 substituted for the preterit in lively narration : thus, id) bielt 
 ftiHe, unb fal^ mic^ wa&j bem ©tanbe ber (Sonne urn. 3nbem ic^ nun 
 |o e m p r b H cE e, j e b e \^ iz. I stopped, therefore, and looked 
 about me for the position of the suji. While, now, lam thus look- 
 ing upward, I see etc. 
 
 3. In expressing a past action or state which is continued so 
 as to be present also (or in signifying what has been and still 
 is), the German, like the French, indicates the present part and 
 leaves the past to be inferred, while the English does the 
 contrary : thus, j i n b <Ste f c^on lange bier have you been (are you) 
 here already a hng time ? er f (^ I d f t feit fiinf S^bten nnter bem 
 (5(^nee he has been (is) sleeping for five years beneath the snow. 
 
 4. The German present, much more often than the English, 
 is used in the sense of a future : thus, n)ie fan g^ \df§ an ? id^ 
 breb' mt(b urn, fo x\V§ getban how shall I set about it? I will 
 turn myself about; that will fetch it; bie ^iiter, bie cr bereinft erbt 
 the property which he will one day inherit. 
 
326] mDICATIVE TENSES. 165 
 
 This future use of the present is a direct inlieritance from a 
 former condition of Germanic language (as represented to us by 
 the oldest Germanic dialects), in which the present and future 
 meanings were both habitually expressed by the present tense, 
 the later auxiliary futures, as I shall or will hve \^ toerbe lieBcn, 
 not having been yet brought into use. 
 
 325. Indicative Preterit. 1. The preterit answers to our 
 own simple past tense, in its three forms I loved, I did love, I 
 was loving — all expressed, without distinction, by [^ lieBte. 
 
 2. As the present for the perfect (324.3), so the preterit is 
 sometimes used for our pluperfect, to express what, at a given 
 time, had been and was still: thus, ft) a ten ©ie f(^on lange ha 
 had you been (were you) there long already ? 
 
 3. The distribution of the expression of past time between 
 the preterit and perfect is not precisely the same in German as 
 in English. As (326.2) the German perfect often stands where 
 we should use the preterit, so the contrary is also sometimes 
 the case: thus, i:^r ^brtet, ml6) f$rerflt(f)e§ ©eric^t be§ C>errn 
 iiber 3eru{alem e r g i n g you have heard what a terrible judgment 
 of the Lord has corne upon Jerusalem. 
 
 326. Indicative Perfect. 1. The perfect answers in the main 
 to our perfect, expressing completed action, or action in the past 
 with implied reference to the present, as no longer continuing : 
 thus, x^ !^a6e geliebt I have loved, or Mve been loving. 
 
 2. But the perfect is not infrequently used where we employ 
 the preterit ; the perfect is rather the tense by which something 
 is simply asserted as true, while the preterit implies a connec- 
 tion with other past events in continuous narration, or a 
 personal participation of the speaker, as spectator or joint 
 actor. 
 
 Thus, ©ott ftat bieJlBelt erfc^affcn God created the world (it was 
 God lohoetG.), ic^ bin geftcrn in ber J!trd^e geiDcfen I was at church 
 yesterday, un(er Sreunb ift neiilt(^ geftorben our friend died lately; 
 —but (S^ott erfd)uf bie SSelt in fcc^§ 5:agen, unb tul^te am ficbentcn 
 God created the world in six days, and rested on the seventh, ic^ 
 tt)ar in ber ^irc^c, mo §err 9L cine t)ortreff(i(^e ^rebigt I)idt I was 
 at church, where Mr. JSf. preached an admirable sermon, unjer 
 SSater flarb gcftern our father died yesterday (in our presence). 
 
 a. Something of the same distinction ai>pears also in English 
 usage, and it is impossible to explain fully the difference in 
 idiom betweeri the two languages without a great deal of 
 
166 USES OF THE FORMS OF CONJUGATION. [326- 
 
 detailed illustration. Moreover, there are many cases in either 
 tongue where both tenses might be employed with equal 
 propriety. 
 
 3. For the present in place of our perfect, see 324.3 ; for the 
 perfect in place of the future, see 328.36. 
 
 327. Indicative Pluperfect. The pluperfect in German, as in 
 English, expresses action already finished at a time in the past 
 either defined or contemplated by the speaker : thus, id) i}aik 
 Qellebt I had loved or been loving. 
 
 328. Indicative Future and Future Perfect. 1. These tenses 
 ordinarily agree in use with their English correspondents: 
 thus, i(^ tt)erbe lieben I shall hve or be loving, [^ merbe QcUcbt 
 l^aben I shall have loved or been loving. 
 
 a. They express simple futurity, that which is going to be ; 
 and are carefully to be distinguished from the modal auxiliary 
 forms composed of the infinitive with tuoHen and foUen (267-8), 
 which more or less distinctly imply an assent or intent, and a 
 propriety or obligation. 
 
 2. The futures are sometimes used to indicate a claimed 
 probability, or to express a conjecture : thus, ba§ tDirb tco^I Sft^ 
 33ruber fein that is ijour brother, is it not? er tt)irb tud)t lange bort 
 (^eblieben jetn I presume he did not stay there long. 
 
 3. a. In German, as in English, the perfect is often employed 
 where the future perfect would be logically more correct, the 
 implication of futurity being sufficiently made by the context : 
 thus, icf) raerbe fommcn, fobalb id) ntcincn 33rief G^ft^n^ben babe I 
 shall come as soon as I have written my letter (not gefd)riebcn l^aben 
 tDerbe shall have written). 
 
 b. A present or perfect is occasionally substituted for a future, 
 by a figure of speech, to indicate the certainty of what is to take 
 place: thus, jene tjai cjelebt, ttienn \^ bte^33Iatt an§ meinen §dnben 
 Qcbc she has ceased to live, if I let this paper go out of my hands, 
 ftel^', ober bu bift be§ Xohz^ stand, or thou art a dead man! 
 
 c. For the frequent use of a present nst ad of a future tense, 
 see 324.4. 
 
 [ExEECisE 27. Use of the Tenses of the Indicative.] 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 329. The subjunctive mode, which has almost passed out of 
 U^e in Enghsh, still continue^ in full currency in German, 
 
331] SUBJUNCTIVE. 167 
 
 having, if the two " conditional " tenses be included with it (as 
 they are in fact subjunctive, both in form and character), more 
 than a corresponding tense for every tense of the indicative. 
 In some of its offices (the oj tative, potential, conditicnal) it 
 answers to what is left of our own subjunctive, and to the 
 compounded tenses (with the auxiliaries may, might, would, and 
 should) by whicli we have in part supplied the place of the latter ; 
 in other offices (especially in indirect statement, 333) there is in 
 EngUsh hardly anything analogous, though the classical tongues 
 present similar constructions in abundance. 
 
 330. The subjunctive is the mode of possibility, contingency, 
 subjectivity, in contradistinction to the indicative as the 
 mode of actuality, direct assertion, objectiveness. 
 
 a. The subjunctive of the Germanic languages is by origin an optative, 
 or mode expressing wish or desire, and there was another mode more 
 properly known as subjunctive. In the Greek, both still subsist to- 
 gether ; but in German, as in Latin, the two have become one, which 
 combines, with various modifications and restrictions, their several offices. 
 
 h. Not every statement of a hypothetical or contingent char- 
 acter requires the subjunctive: that character is often suffi- 
 ciently intimated by the radical meaning of the verb used, or of 
 the adverbs or conjunctions employed with it; the cases in 
 which this mood is availed of are those to be explained below. 
 
 c. Even in the cases detailed, there is considerable freedom 
 of choice between a subjunctive and an indicative expression, 
 depending on the degree of contingency or reality of the imphed 
 conception, the difference being sometimes so slight as to be 
 hardly definable ; and an indicative is occasionally used where 
 analogy would lead us to expect a subjunctive, as if, by a figure 
 of speech, to give a character of actuality to what is in itself 
 properly contingent. It is not possible to say, as in some other 
 languages, that certain grammatical constructions, or certain 
 particles, require or "govern" the subjunctive. 
 
 d. In the subjunctive, the distinctions of tense are of only 
 subordinate value, and are even to some extent effaced. The 
 tenses do not, therefore, require to be separately treated. 
 
 331. The Subjunctive as Optative. 
 
 1. The present subjunctive is frequently used in an optative 
 sense, as expressing a wish, request^ or direction on the part of 
 the speaker. 
 
168 USES OF THE FORMS CP CONJUGATION. [331 
 
 Thus, flcfeanet fei er aUc S^xi blessed he he ever, lang leBe ber 
 ^onifi, e§ freue fi(5^, tuer ba . . . . long live the king! let him rejoice 
 who . . . . , brdutlid^e§ Seinen legen mx bem Xftor an let us dress 
 Thor in bridal vestments, gefte^^ i(f) e§ nur only let me confess it. 
 
 a. This use is Umited to the first and third persons of both 
 numbers : for the second persons, the imperative is used ; in 
 the first singular, mbge may is common as auxiliary ; and the 
 same auxiliary may also be employed in the other persons. 
 
 b. The subject is put after the verb, except in the third pers. 
 singular, where it may have either position, and more usually 
 stands before. 
 
 c. The optative subjunctive is used, as already noticed (243.1), 
 to fill out the declension, of the imperative, and is practically, 
 in the third pers. plural, the most common imperative form, 
 since the use of the second person in ordinary address is no 
 longer approved (153.4:). 
 
 d. This subjunctive sometimes becomes, in appUcation, con- 
 cessive, or expresses a supposition or assumption : thus, man 
 begegne 3emanbcn im §au§; e§ fei eine ^efefljrf)aft beifammen let 
 one meet anybody in the house ; let a company be assembled (i. e. 
 supposing such to be the case); er tl^ue, tt)a§ er tDofle let him do what 
 he please (i. e. tliough he do). 
 
 e. Hence, with benn, it becomes, by an elliptical construction, 
 equivalent to unless; thus, er fitftre benn gretia 3ur 33raut mir 
 l^eim unless he bring me home Freya as bride (i. e. [if he 
 would gain what he wishes] then let him bring, etc.), i^r mit^tet 
 ttiir gur ©telle benn t)erf))red^en unless you promise me on the spot. 
 
 2. The preterit and pluperfect tenses are also employed in a 
 kind of optative sense, but only by elliptical construction, in ab- 
 breviated conditional and indirect phrases where the wishes 
 expressed are implied to be contrary to fact, or impossible of 
 attainment. 
 
 Thus, tt)are e§ bo(^ ^Benb if it were only evening! ^dtte x^ mx^ 
 bod^ gefreut had I only enjoyed myself (while it was still in my 
 power to dx) so)! ad), ha^ meine ^ugen ^l)rdnenqueEen wdrcn 
 that my eyes were fountains of tears ! 
 
 332. The Subjunctive as Conditional and Potential. 
 
 The conditional and potential uses of the subjunctive so pass 
 Into one another that they can hardly be treated separately. 
 We commence, for convenience, with the hypothetical period. 
 
332] CONDITIONAL SUBJUNCTIVE. 169 
 
 1. The hypothetical period consists of two parts or clauses, the 
 one (the apodosis) expressing a conclusion or result which would 
 follow, if the condition were true which is expressed by the 
 other (the protasis) — it being at the same time implied that the 
 condition is not realized, and, generally, that the result is there- 
 fore also untrue. This, in its complete form, requires a past 
 tense (preterit or pluperfect) of the subjunctive in each clause. 
 
 Thus, regtcrte 3lled)t, fo laget iftr t)Dr mir im 6tauBe if right 
 prevailed, you would lie in the xlust before rue, it)enn'§ Idiiger Qe= 
 bauert l^dtte, mxt ic^ im groft erftarrt if it had lasted longer, I 
 should have been stiffened with frost, gliidlic^er tt)drc an^:) i(^, tt)enn 
 \6) \\a6) ^fien gegogen tDdre I too should be happier, if I had 
 marched to Asia. 
 
 a. Either of the two clauses may stand first, and the idea of 
 if in the clause of condition (protasis) may be expressed either 
 by a conjunction (tuenn) or by the inverted arrangement (433) — 
 as the examples show. 
 
 b. In the result or conclusion (apodosis), the conditional tenses 
 may be used instead of the proper subjunctive : see below, 335. 
 
 c. The implication as to the result is liable to modification by 
 various causes : for example, by its being put into the form of 
 a question— as, tt)a§ tDdre au§ mir gemorben, l^dttet xt\x mid) iu(^t 
 aufgenommen what would have become of me, if you had not 
 received me ? — or by an even involved in the condition : as, unb 
 tt)dren t)on (^olb fie, \6) gdbe fie bir even were they of gold, I would 
 give them to thee. 
 
 d. If the condition be regarded as doubtful merely, and not 
 contrary to reality, the verbs are put in the indicative mode : 
 thus, alw^ays when the tense is present or perfect — as, tcenn er 
 fommt, gel^e ic^ fort if he comes, I shall go away, wtnn er gefommen 
 ift mill id) il)n fel^en if he be arrived, I wish to see him; and often 
 when the tense is past: thus, menn er fi^on gefommen mar, mu§ 
 er ung gefe'^en l^aben if he had already come, he cannot have failed 
 to see v^. 
 
 e. Rarely, a pret. indie, is used, for emphasis (compare 328.36), 
 in the clause of result, and even in that of condition : thus, 'tn 
 marft Derloren, l^'dik er ni^t fiir bic^ geft)rD(^en thou wast lost, had 
 lie not spoken for thee, mar id) ... . ber SBerrdtijer [33errdtcr], i(^ 
 ptte mir ben guten (Sd)etn gef|)art had I been the traitor^ I might 
 have spared myself the fair show. 
 
170 USES OF THE FORMS OF CONJUGATION. [332- 
 
 2. In the incomplete hypotJietical period, either the condition 
 or the conclusion is unexpressed, but is more or less distinctly 
 intimated or implied. 
 
 a. The conclusion is wanting altogether, and the condition 
 has the value of a wish or prayer (see 331.2). In this case a bod) 
 or nut is more often introduced to help the optative expression, 
 but is not indispensable : thus, mdren mx nur ben 53er\i t)orI'.ei 
 [Jiow happy 1 should be] if we were only past the hill! fonnf i(^ 
 tnit if I coidd hut go along with you I 
 
 b. The conclusion may be intimated by al§ as, and the con- 
 ditionality of the other clause expressed either by a conjunction, 
 ob or tt)enn, or (more commonly) by the inverted arrangement 
 (4336) of the clause after al§ : 
 
 Thus, i^r etlet [a, al§ tDcnn i'^r ^^Imd I)dttet you are hurrying as 
 [you would do] if you had wings, er tDiII bie 2SaI)rI}ett fo, al§ ob )ic 
 5D^unge tt)dre he demands truth in this way as [he would demand it] 
 if it were cash, ber ^oben flafft auf, aU tt)dre er Don ©rbfto^en er= 
 fcfliittert the soil cleaves open, as [it would do] if it were shaken 
 by earthquakes. 
 
 c. The analogy of this construction calls always for a past 
 tense, but a present is sometimes met with, as if the phrase 
 were one of indirect statement (333) instead of conditional : thus, 
 ha voaxh e§ mir qI§ fbnne id) burd^ ben 3Boben fel^en, al§ fei er Qriine^ 
 ©Ia§ then it seemed to me as if I could see through the ground as 
 though it were green glass. Occasionally, it really represents an 
 indirect phrase: thus, ic^ bad)te qI§ fei e§ . . ., for tc^ bad)te, eg 
 f ei . . . -f thought as if it were, for I thought it was, so and so. 
 
 d. The conclusion is expressed by some other and virtually 
 equivalent means: thus, \^ oebac^te, bafern ic^ !ein ^Ibenteuer 
 fdnbe, ben §eimn)eg gu fudjen I intended, in case I should meet with 
 no further adventure, to seek the way homeward. 
 
 e. On the other hand, the conclusion may be fully expressed 
 and the condition intimated by some word or phrase which 
 more or less distinctly implies it : 
 
 Thus, D mdre id) ein Qro^er 33aum! bann fonnte t^ meinc 
 3tt)et(\e au§brelten that I were a big tree ! then [if I were so] 
 I might spread out my branches, man(^e§ bdtf ic^ oetban; a lie in 
 toer fc^eutnidjt bie .^often Iwoidd have done much— only, who does 
 not fear the cost? [if Iliad not feared the cost]^ fonft n)dr' er ge=? 
 |aKen otherwise [if thi^ were not so] he would have fallen. 
 
332] CONDITIONAL SUBJUNCTIVE. 171 
 
 f 3.f A yet less explicit implication of a condition makes of the 
 past subjunctive a. -proper potential, expressing what in general, 
 under the circumstances, might, could, or would be : 
 
 Thus, ha^ ginge no(^ tliat might answer yet, e§ ^tk fic!)^§ fetner 
 t)ertt)OGen no one would have presumed to do so, e^ fonnte mi(^ 
 retten it might be able to rescue me, iiinun \l)x jeben ©tadjcl, ber 
 t)ertt)unbcn fonnte take from it (222.1.3) everij sting that should be 
 able to wound. 
 
 a. The potential subjunctive is sometimes used in place of an 
 indicative, when it is desired to soften the positiveness of an 
 assertion: thus, [i^ bdc^te I should think, for I think, id) niod)te 
 I should like (255.2), ic^ mdre faft Qegen ^^aumftdmme angerannt^ 
 I came near r^unning against trunks of trees. 
 
 4. Analogous, on the other hand, with the clause expressing 
 the condition in the hypothetical period, are occasional phrases 
 like e§ n3irb nadjgea'^mt, tt)are e§ nur mtt eintQen ,^utfd)en it is 
 imitated, were it only with a few carriages, BefonbcrS, iDcnn er ]\^ 
 t)er)c^o))en ^aben lollte especially if he should chance to have ex^ 
 hausted his ammunition. 
 
 5. Akin with the potential and hypothetical uses of the sub- 
 junctive are the following more special cases : 
 
 a. The subjunctive present is used in a clause involving an 
 indefinite relative pronoun or conjunction {whoever, however, 
 etc.): thus, tDie and) ber menidjlid)e manfe however human (will) 
 may waver, jo flein fie auc^ fei however small it be, auf melc^e ^rt 
 e§ jci in whatever way it may be. 
 
 b. The subjunctive, present or past, is used after ba^, auf ha%, 
 bamtt in order that, to express the end had in view, or sought to 
 be attained: thus, loft mir ha^ ^zx^ '^ci^ ic^ "^ci^ cure riil^re relieve 
 my heart, that I may move yours, er tuunfd}te gu regieren, nur bamit 
 ber (S^ute ungel)tnbert gut fein moc^te he desired to rule only in order 
 that the good might be able to be good without hindrance. 
 
 The tense is governed by the requirements of the sense, gen- 
 erally according with that of the preceding verb. 
 
 c. In these, as in other constructions, the indicative is also 
 met with, especially after bamtt: thus, U)a§ au(^ bie ©innlic^feit 
 gu t^un gebrdngt ift whatever our sensuousness is impelled to do, 
 bamit man bicje ©tabt einne!)men !ann that the city may be (where- 
 with it is able to be) captured, baj^ icber Quell Oerfiegt that every 
 fountain may dry up (so that every fount sliall d^y up). 
 
172 USES OP THE FORMS OP CONJUGATION. [332- 
 
 d. A subjunctive is used in a dependent substantive clause 
 (generally after tia^ that) to denote something that is provided 
 for or looked forward to, regarded as of probable, desirable, or 
 suitable occurrence : thus, er mu^te bleiben bi§ (or big ba^) bie 
 glut^en [gluten] \\^ Derltefen he had to remain till the floods should 
 subside, e§ lag i^m baran, ba^ ber Sriebe ni(^t unterbroc^en tt)erbe 
 he was anxious that the peace should not be broken, e§ gel^ort ftc^, 
 t)a^ bag ^eburfnip [^ebiirfnig] befriebigt tDerbe it is proper that the 
 want be satisfied. 
 
 In some of its forms, this construction passes over into that 
 of the subjunctive of indirect statement (see the next paragraph), 
 after verbs of wishing, anticipating, and the like. 
 
 [Exercise 28. Subjunctive as Optative, Conditional, and 
 
 Potential.] 
 
 333. The Subjunctive of Indirect Statement. 
 
 1. By a construction which has only partial analogies in Eng- 
 lish, the German subjunctive is often used to express a thought 
 indirectly, as reported, recognized, or contemplated by some 
 one. 
 
 Thus, er antmortcte, er a^tt 5rtebri(6 unb miinjc^e ben grie= 
 ben he answered that he esteemed Frederick and desired peace, 
 \mx miff en !aum, mag ju tftun ]i\ we hardly know what is to be 
 done, benft man er ge^e meg if one thinks he is going away, man 
 fieftt glelcf), me^ ©inneg ber ©err f ei one sees at once of what mind 
 the master is. 
 
 2. Such a subjunctive stands always in a (logically) dependent 
 substantive clause. The use of this mode more fully sub- 
 ordinates the clause to the action of the verb in the other clause, 
 upon which it depends, relieving the speaker from responsibility 
 for it or concern with it. 
 
 3. Verbs most often followed by the subjunctive of indirect 
 statement are especially — 
 
 a. Verbs that signify imparting, in every form, as statement, 
 report, assertion, confession, reminding, and the like. 
 
 b. Verbs that signify apprehension, as perceiving, knowing, 
 feeling, calling to mind, imagining, concluding, and the Hke. 
 
 c. Verbs that signify contemplation with feelings of various 
 kinds, as belief, doubt, dread, wonder, joy, sorrow, wish, hope. 
 
333] SUBJUNCTIVE OF mDIEECT STATEMENT. 173 
 
 Some of these verbs complicate the idea of indirectness with 
 that of desire, doubt, or conditionality, as expressed by the 
 subjunctive in its other uses. 
 
 d. The verb upon which the clause of indirect statement 
 depends is sometimes unexpressed, being inferred from the 
 connection: thus, bie ;^ateinec murben ftart derfolGt, tDcil jener fie gu 
 fel^r Begiinftigt ^aht the Latins were severely persecuted, because 
 (it was claimed that) he had favored them too much. 
 
 e. Or, the clause is dependent on a noun of kindred meaning 
 with the verbs above mentioned : thus, au§ 33ef orgntB [^^ef orfltti^], 
 ba6 er Unruften erregen tDcrbe out of apprehension that he would 
 stir up disorders, unter bem SSormanb, cr {) a b e friifter befd)tr)oren 
 aHe§ angugeigen under the pretext that he had earlier taken oath to 
 denounce everything, bie ^ad)ri(^t, ha^ er fie in§ ©efdngni^ [(55e=' 
 fcingniS] getDorfen ^abe the news that he had thrown them into 
 prison. 
 
 4. a. Eegularly and ordinarily, the verb in the indirect state- 
 ment has the same tense as it would have if the statement were 
 made directly, by the person and under the circumstances con- 
 templated. 
 
 Thus, fie glaubten, ha^ e§ voaf^t f ei they believed that it was true 
 (since they would have said ''we believe that it is true''); er ttnt== 
 tuortete, er f ei nic^t gefommen, (Sftriften feinblid) angugreifen, fonbern 
 tt)erbe nur (SJetDalt mil (S^etDdt guriidheiben he answered, he was 
 not ("I am not'') come to attack Christians, but would only (''I 
 shall only") repel violence with violence; balb fragte man nidjt 
 me'^r, mx mitgebe, fonbern n^er guriidbleibe soon it was no longer 
 asked w1k> was going along (" who is going ? "), but who was stay- 
 ing (''who is staying?") behind; ic^ I)abe gen:)iinfd^t,er f olle fid) auf 
 Sleifen begeben I have wished that he should betake himself to 
 journeying. 
 
 b. Hence, the use of the present, perfect, and future sub- 
 junctive in indirect statement is much more frequent than that 
 of the preterit and pluperfect and of the conditional. But — 
 
 c. The past tenses are used, when they would have been used 
 (either as indicative or as subjunctive) in the corresponding 
 statement made directly : thus, cr uninfd)te, bag er auf bem 33oben 
 geblieben mdre he wished he had remained in the garret, mcr fann 
 n)tffen, n)a§ ntd)t 3<^iTiiinb glaublid) fdube who can tell what some- 
 body might not think credible? be§ (Sjefiible^, baJ5 nid)t§ im Sebcn 
 rec^t gefd)dbe luenn e§ bloji gefc^dbe of the feeling that nothing in 
 life would be done rightly if it should be simply done. 
 
174 tsEs 01* a^HE eorms o^ ooNJuaAHOi?. [333* 
 
 Barely, on the other hand, a subjunctive of indirect statement 
 is forced out of the past tense which it should have into the 
 present, as the more usual: tense belonging to the indirect 
 construction. 
 
 d. Moreover, in a clause dependent on a verb of past tense, 
 the subjunctive is quite often put in the past (as it always is in 
 English), contrary to strict rule: thus, fieglaubteu e§ tDdrc (for 
 fei) C>ci^nen^ef rfjrei they thought it was the crowing of cocks, jte frag- 
 ten o6 fie re(^t mii^te (for tutfje) mx i^r Wann tucirc (for fei) 
 tliey asked whether she really knew who her husband was, ging bei 
 mir 3u Silat^ [9tat], oB ic^ fie medte (for merfe) t^k counsel with 
 myself, whether I should wake her. 
 
 e. This assimilation of the subjunctive in tense to the verb on 
 which it depends is, in general, much more common in the 
 more careless and less dignified styles of writing, and in col- 
 loquial discourse, than in higher styles. But it is occasionally 
 met with in every style, sometimes without special assignable 
 cause, sometimes where a present subjunctive form would not 
 be distinguishable from an indicative, or where a clause is 
 dependent on another dependent clause, and needs to be 
 distinguished from the latter in construction: thus, er Bot burc^ 
 ©efanbte an, bie giirften moc^ten (for mogen, which would be in^ 
 dicative as well) felbft entfc^eiben, tr)a§ er red)tmd§ig befd^e he 
 offered through embassadors that the princes might themselves 
 decide what he rightfully possessed. 
 
 5. The indicative may also be used in phrases similar to those 
 above cited, mostly with an impUcation of actuality, as recog- 
 nized by the speaker also : thus, roer toei^, lt)0 bir beln (^\Mt 
 Blii^t who knows where thy fortune is blooming for thee (as it 
 surely is blooming somewhere)? man mu^te glauben, ha^ er DoHig 
 t)ergeffen toar one could not but believe that he was wholly for- 
 gotten, er t)ertt)etlte, bi§ er fi(^ iibergeugt IjatU, ha^ !eincr Don ben 
 f einen j u r ii tf b It e b he delayed till he was persuaded that none of 
 his men was left behind. 
 
 But the difference of implication is often very indistinct, and 
 the choice between the two modes depends in part upon the 
 style used : too nice a use of the subjunctive in easy or col- 
 loquial discourse would be thought finical and pedantic. 
 
 6. The elliptical use of the subjunctive of indirect statement 
 with optative meaning, or to express a wish, has been referred 
 to above (331.2): thus, o bafj fie emtg griinen bliebe that it 
 
335] OONDITIONAL. 175 
 
 might ever continue to flourish ! [i. e. id) mb(f)te, ba^ . , . , I should 
 wish that . . .). 
 
 7. A past subjunctive tense is sometimes used interrogatively, 
 by way of questioning or disputing something supposed to have 
 been asserted: thus, hn l^dtteft e§ Qefagt? bu l^aft mir ni(^t§ Qefafit 
 [is it claimed tJiat] you have said so ? you have said yiothing to me, 
 gaftfreunblid) ftdtte ^nglanb m^ empfangen? that England had 
 received me Jiospltably ? 
 
 [Exercise 29. Subjunctive of Indirect Statement.] 
 
 Conditional. 
 
 334. The conditional tenses are, in form, subjunctive 
 preterits corresponding to the future as a present: thus, er 
 tt)irb Ueben he is about to love, er irerbe lieben he may he about to 
 love, er tDiirbe Ueben he might oy would be about to love. 
 
 Their proper significance, then, is that of contingent futurity, 
 such a potentiality as may be signified by a tense past in form. 
 In this they coincide (as appears from the rules and examples 
 given above, 332) with the past subjunctive tenses, preterit and 
 pluperfect. In fact — 
 
 335. 1. The conditional corresponds in meaning with the 
 preterit and pluperfect subjunctive, being an admissible sub- 
 stitute for these tenses in some of their uses. 
 
 a. Especially, in the conclusion (apodosis) of a complete 
 hypothetical period (332.1): thus, lebteft hn noc^, \^ tDiirbe bi(^ 
 It e b e n t)on biefer Sett wert thou yet alive, I should love thee hence- 
 forth, !cine§ toiirbe lenfjam oenuQ jein, menu tDU' blo^ fein^afein 
 in ber §anb ncn)a^r n)urben none would be manageable enough, if 
 we were mei^ely aware of its presence in the hand. 
 
 b. In a conclusion with condition only intimated (332.2e) : 
 thus, bie 35ogel tDiirben bann defter in meinen S^Jeigen bauen in 
 that case (if this were so) the birds would build nests in my 
 branches, prob' e§ lieber nic^t, benn bu njiirbej't gerfi^ellt ttjerben 
 rather, do not try it; for (if thou didst try it) thou wouldst be 
 dashed in pieces. 
 
 c. In a more strictly potential construction (332.3) : thus, \x^ 
 crnftUc^ 5U me^ren ttiiirbe ]d)x Getdt)rlid) fein to defend one's 
 self seriously woidd be very dangerous, ba§ tDiirbe un§ gu tDeit 
 f ii 1^ r e n that would lead us too far. 
 
 2. The use of the conditional is much less frequent than that 
 of the past subjunctive tenses in the constructions above ex- 
 
176 USES OF THE FOEMS OF CONJUGATION. [335- 
 
 plained. While the two are so nearly equivalent that the sub- 
 junctive may usually be put in place of the conditional, they are 
 not absolutely identical in sense ; the conditional may some- 
 times be preferred where the idea of futurity is prominent (as 
 in the first example above, under a) — as also for formal reasons, 
 where the subjunctive verb would not be plainly distinguished 
 from an indicative (as in the first example under b). 
 
 336. The conditional is sometimes employed in indirect 
 statement in place of the future subjunctive, in the same manner 
 as a preterit subjunctive for a present (333.4:C?)— that is to say, 
 with the value of a past subjunctive to the future: thus, er 
 tDu^te, ba§ biefe ^nerbietungen ben touggug nic^t aufl)alten 
 U) ii r b e n (for tuerben, which would not be distinguishable from 
 an indicative) he knew that these offers would not detain the 
 crusade. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 337. The use of the imperative requires no explanation, 
 being the same in German as in English. 
 
 a. With the proper imperative persons (the second persons 
 singular and plural) the subject pronouns, bu and \t)x, may be 
 either expressed or omitted : if expressed, they follow the verb. 
 
 &. For the use of the present subjunctive as imperative in the 
 third persons singular and plural and the first plural, see 331.1c. 
 
 338. Besides the phrases mentioned at 243.1 as employed 
 imperatively, the present, indicative, or the future indicative, 
 sometimes intimates a peremptory order, as if from one whose 
 simple word is equivalent to a command ; the past participle 
 has, elliptically (see 359.3), a similar force ; and the infinitive is 
 used, dialectically or colloquially, with the same meaning (347.2). 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 339. The infinitive is properly the verbal noun, and all its 
 uses grow out of its value as such. 
 
 340. 1. Any infinitive is capable of use directly as a noun, 
 either with or without an article or other limiting words. Such 
 a noun is always of the neuter gender (61.3c), and declined ac- 
 cording to the first declension, first class (76) ; and, having the 
 value of an abstract, it very seldom forms a plural. 
 
 Thus, ©otteSldftern, Siiaen, ^Jiorben unb ©te^leti ftat iiber^anb 
 Qenommen blasphemy, lying, murdering, and stealing have become 
 
343] mPiNiTiVE. 177 
 
 prevalent, ml^ ein %ppti\i gum ©d)maufen what an appetite for 
 feasting ! er fing tuieber mit feinem Mfeli*^ ^oflidjen ©ru^en an he 
 began again with his odiously polite greeting. 
 
 2. As the examples show, such a noun is more usually to be 
 rendered by our verbal noun in ing (which we often call " par- 
 ticipial infinitive," although in truth it is quite another word 
 than the present participle); but also, not rarely, by other 
 verbal derivatives. 
 
 3. There are some nouns, originally infinitives, which are in 
 such constant use as to have won an independent value as 
 nouns : such are SeBen Ufe, ©ntfe^en horror, ^^nbenfen memorial, 
 and so on. 
 
 341. In German, as in English, the preposition gu to, which 
 was originally used only in its proper prepositional sense with 
 the infinitive, governing the latter as it would govern any other 
 noun under similar circumstances, has now become attached as 
 a kind of fixed accompaniment, or sign, to the infinitive in a 
 great part of its uses ; and therefore, in describing the different 
 infinitive constructions, it becomes necessary to distinguish 
 between the cases in which gu is employed and those in which 
 it is omitted. 
 
 342. T/ie Infinitive as subject of a verb. 
 
 The infinitive, either with or without gu, is often employed as 
 the subject of a verb. 
 
 Thus, mad^jen, groS unb alt merben, ba§ ifl ba§ eingig ©(^one to 
 grow, to become big and old — that is the only fine thing, xoo getaufc^t 
 gu tDcrben ung '^eilfamer tt)ar where to be deceived was more ad- 
 vantageous for lis, mitjolc^en tft nicf)t gut in ber^Jd^e tdmp^ixi fight- 
 ing at close quarters with such men is not good, gefd^rlici) i]T§ ben 
 Sen gu toerfen it is dangerous to wake the lion. 
 
 a. The infinitive as subject is in the great majority of cases 
 accompanied by gu. 
 
 b. More usually (as the examples show), the infinitive stands 
 as logical subject, the verb taking in addition e§ it or ba§ that, 
 or the like (especially the first), as impersonal or indefinite 
 grammatical subject (compare 295). 
 
 343. The Infinitive as object, or dependent on another verb. 
 I. The infinitive without gu is directly dependent on — 
 
 1. The various auxiliaries: as, merben, the auxiliary of the 
 future and conditional tenses (240.2) ; I)al)en, the auxiliary of 
 
178 USES OP THE FORMS OF CONJUGATION. 343- 
 
 the perfect and pluperfect tenses, in the cases where the infin- 
 itive is used instead of the past participle in forming those 
 tenses (240.1c) ; the auxiliaries of mode (242.1) ; if)\in, when used 
 as auxiliary in the sense of our do (242.3) ; laffen, as causative 
 auxiUary (242.2) : see below, 5. 
 
 2. §aBen have, in certain phrases, with an adjective: thus, bu 
 l}a\i gut reben that is easy to say (i. e. thou hast talking good, makest 
 an easy thing of talking). 
 
 3. 2!^un, and a few other verbs, followed by ni(f)t§ al§ nothing 
 [else] than, nothing but: thus, er t^at m6)i§ al§ fie anfrf)auen he 
 did nothing hut look at her, e§ foftet m^\^ al§ bie ©emeinc fein fiir 
 aUc it costs nothing but being the common one for all 
 
 4. Semen learn: thus, er ftatte ha^ ©utc toiirbiflen gelernt he had 
 learned to value what was good. 
 
 5. A number of verbs admit an infinitive in the manner of a 
 second object, along with their ordinary object : these are tjei^en 
 call, bid, nennen call, lel^ren teach, !)elfen help, madden make, lajfen 
 allow, cause, and a few that denote perception by the senses, 
 namely f eften (and rarely f d)auen) see, ^oren hear, \ixijkn feel, and 
 finben find. 
 
 Thus, er l^et^t i^n tueber Soften noc^ 9Jlul)e fparen he bids him 
 spare neither expense nor labor, toag man fo erfennen l^eifet (nennt) 
 what people call knowing, ba§ lel^rt un§ beurtfteilen [beurteilen] 
 ob . . . that teaches us to judge whether . . . , mx miifjen il^m ftelfen 
 ^iiten we must help him tend his herd, bie greifteit mad^t end) 
 [(J^njdrmen this freedom makes you rave, ber ©ott, ber ©if en tcac^fen 
 iie^ tlie God who made iron grow, er fiel^t fie erbletd^en unb finfen 
 Jin he sees her turn pale arid sink down, \^ finbe fie auf bem 
 (5o|)I)a Itegen I find her lying on the sofa. 
 
 a. With most of the verbs under this head, the object taken 
 along with the infinitive has the logical value of a subject-ac- 
 cusative to the infinitive — which is the nearest approach made in 
 German to that construction, familiar in the classical tongues, 
 especially in the Latin: thus, id) ]^ore \ia^ (^ra§ n)a(^fen I hear 
 the grass grow signifies that the grass grows, and that I per- 
 ceive it so doing. 
 
 This construction, especially with fejen, l^oren, and laffen (and 
 by far oftenest with the last), is followed out into a variety of 
 other forms, some of them of a pecuhar and idiomatic character : 
 thus — 
 
 b. The proper object of the governing verb is frequently 
 omitted, and the infinitive then designates its action without 
 
343] INFINITIVE. 179 
 
 reference to any definite actor : tlius, ic^ pre flopfen I hear 
 [scymeone] knock (hear a knocking), la^t flingeln cause to ring (let 
 the hell he rung), (ag iiberall fiir ba§ ^^reugfteer in ben ^trc^en beten 
 cause to pray for the C7'usading army everywhere in the churches 
 (let it he prayed for). 
 
 c. If, tlien, tlie infinitive itself talies an object, the construc- 
 tion is equivalent to one in which that object is directly de- 
 pendent upon the governing verb, and is the subject-accusative 
 of the infinitive taken as an infinitive passive ; and it is gener- 
 ally best so rendered : thus, i^ :^i3re eu(^ ieben %aQ ^reifen I hear 
 you to he praised evay day (hear [them] praise you), er lie^ bie 
 brei Ulinge fiir einen mad)en he caused the three rings to he made in 
 place of one (caused to make them). 
 
 d. That the construction has in fact, in the apprehension of 
 those who use the language, been virtually converted into a 
 passive one, and the real object of the infinitive transferred to 
 the governing verb, is shown by the circumstance that that 
 object, when designating the same person or thing with the 
 subject of the verb, is expressed by the reflexive instead of the 
 personal pronoun : thus, er moflte fid) nid)t ^alten (affen he would 
 not let himself he held (instead of would not allow [any 5ne] to 
 hold him), \ia^ Id^t f i ^ '^oren that lets itself he heard (i. e. is worth 
 hearing), al§ er fid) eltca^ t)DrIcfen Ue§ as he was having some- 
 thing read aloud, to himself, er la^t oft Don fid) Ijoren he lets himself 
 he often heard from, (lets [ms*] often hear from him). Occasionally, 
 the logical object of laffen is even added in the form of a 
 prepositional adjunct : thus, fie lie^en fid) b u r d) bie '^a&^t 
 nid)t abl)alten they did not suffer themselves to he restrained hy the 
 gwards— instead of fie lie^en bie "^a^z fie nid)t abl^alten they did 
 not suffer the guards to restrain them. 
 
 6. Special and more anomalous cases are — an infinitive 
 in the sense of a present participle after bleiben remain: thus, 
 fie biieben im Staffer fteden they remained sticking in the water; 
 and after ^aben with a direct object : thus, er ftat SBeiii im teller 
 Itegen he has wine lying in his cellar : — an infinitive of purpose 
 (below, III.l) without gu in a few phrases : as, la^ fie betteln gebn 
 let them go hegging ! er legt fic^ fd)Iafen he lays himself down to 
 sleep; — andfpajieren to he out for pleasure or exercise (expatiate) 
 after a verb expressing the kind of motion : as, ic^ reitc, faftre, 
 ge^e f])a3ieren I ride, drive, or walk out for pleasure. 
 
180 USES OF THE EOKMS OF CONJUGATION. [343- 
 
 II. The infinitive with 311 is often construed as a direct object : 
 
 1. As the sole object of a considerable number of verbs, es- 
 pecially of verbs whose action points forward to something as 
 to be attained or done : for example, such as signify begin, un- 
 dertake, endeavor, venture, plan, hope, desire, promise, refrain ; 
 and some others. 
 
 2. Along with an indirect personal object, with verbs signify- 
 ing command, permit, impute, forbid, and the like. 
 
 Thus, er fieBot mir gii fi^njeigen he commanded me to remain 
 silent, bie 2Bad)e eriaubt 31iemanben tjorsutreten the guard allows 
 no one to step forward. 
 
 III. The infinitive with gu is construed in the manner of an 
 indirect object : 
 
 1. To express the purpose or design of an action : thus, t(J) 
 bin md}t ha 3ftdt:^fel [3^dtfel] gu Ii3fen lam not here to solve riddles, 
 bie D[Reere 311 Befreien, foflten aHe Scinber eroBert ttjerben to free the 
 seas, all lands were to he subdued. 
 
 a. This comes nearest to the original and proper purpose of 
 an infinitive with ju to, in order to, for to. The same meaning is 
 conveyed more explicitly by prefixing um (see below, 346.1). 
 
 h. "feie infinitive stands thus often after fetn to he and ftet)en 
 stand, with the logical value of an infinitive passive : thus, ba 
 tuar fo t)iele» 311 fe'^cn there was so much there to he seen (so much 
 for seeing, as object for sight). 
 
 This construction in itself evidently admits of either an active 
 or a passive interpretation, according as the thing mentioned is 
 put forward as subject or object of the verbal action conveyed 
 by the infinitive. German usage merely adopts the latter 
 alternative. 
 
 c. §aBen, with a following infinitive and gu, also sometimes 
 forms a phrase in which what is properly the object of ^abzn is 
 regarded and treated as if dependent on the other verb : thus, 
 n)ir 5aBen ben (^^orfo gu Befc^reiben we have to describe the Corso 
 (have Che Corso for describing, or as theme for description); — the 
 object may even be omitted, or an intransitive infinitive em- 
 ployed, leaving to !^aben simply the idea of necessity : thus, er 
 ^at ntd^t me^r gu fiirc^ten he no longer has [aught] to fear. 
 
 2. In other relations such as are ordinarily expressed by a 
 remoter object, or a prepositional phrase having the value of 
 such an object, after verbs intransitive or transitive : thus, al^ 
 
345] INFINITIVE. 181 
 
 er iam gu fterBen when he came to die (to dying), ha treiBf § i!)n, ben 
 ^rei§ gu ermerBen then he feels impelled to gain thepii-ze, man 9e= 
 lt)oI)nt e§ ftill 5U fte'^en ^^ is trained to stand still, m^t barf x^ bir au 
 Qleic^en mi(^ t)ermefien /ma?/ not presume to be like thee, tDirfreucn 
 un§, ba§ gu Wren w;e rejoice at hearing that, er rul^t iiic^t bie ©tabt 
 SU t)ersieren he ceases (rests) not to adorn the city, ba§ (^ebrdnge 
 flinbert i^n gu flie^cn the crowd forbids (hinders) him to fly. 
 
 As the examples show, the infinitive in this construction, 
 though it often has the value of a dative, which its governing 
 preposition gu to best fits it to fill, is also sometimes used in 
 the manner of a genitive, or of an "ablative" (expressing the 
 from relation). 
 
 [Exercise 30. The Infinitive as Subject and Object.] 
 
 344. The Infinitive as adjunct to an Adjective. 
 
 1. The infinitive, always with its sign gu, is used as limiting 
 adjunct especially to adjectives denoting possibility, ease or 
 difficulty, obligation, desire, readiness, and the like — to such, in 
 general, as point forward, to something to be attained or done. 
 
 Thus, bereit ben ^fetl)er gn burc^bringen ready to penetrate the 
 ether, leic^t gu frf)affen easy to obtain, bange, feinen ©(^mud gu t)er* 
 lieren afraid of losing his adornment. 
 
 2. Many adjectives when qualified by gu too or genug, etc. 
 enough, sufficiently, become capable of taking an infinitive as 
 adjunct : thus, mdrf)ttg genug, bie grogtcn ^l)iere [^tere] gu tobten 
 [tbten] poiuerful enough to kill the largest animals, gu flein ben 
 3ftaum gu fiiden too small to fill the space. 
 
 But after gu and an adjective, the infinitive governed by um 
 (346.1), or an awkward and illogical construction with al^ ha^ 
 than that is more frequent. 
 
 Compare the power to govern a dative given to an adjective 
 by the same quahfying words (223.5) ; the cases are plainly 
 analogous, the gu in such infinitive combinations having its 
 proper prepositional force. 
 
 345. The Infinitive as adjunct to a Noun. 
 
 The infinitive, always accompanied by gu, is often dependent 
 upon a noun. 
 
 The cases of such infinitives may be classified under three 
 heads : 
 
182 USES OF THE FORMS OF CONJUGATION. [345- 
 
 1. The governing noun is one related in meaning to the verbs 
 and adjectives already specified as admitting a dependent in- 
 finitive : thus, (Jrlaubni^ [@rlaubnt§] ben 53aum gu |)Iunbern ver- 
 misswn to plunder the tree, o^nc ^offnung aufgufte^en without hope 
 to rise again (of rising), bie 33eaierbe, fie gu tt)ec!en the desire to 
 awaken her, ben 33orjd)Iag, feine ©fil^ne aBgufenben the proposal to 
 send off his sons. 
 
 2. The preposition gu has nearly its proper meaning as con- 
 necting the infinitive with the noun: thus, 3eit, fic^ gu ergo^en 
 time to please one's self (for pleasing), Wntl) [DJ^ut], mi(^ in bie 
 SBelt gu tnagen courage for venturing into the world, ber ^ugenblid 
 gu reben the moment for talking. 
 
 3. The infinitive represents a genitive, most often a genitive 
 of equivalence (216.2e), or has the logical value of an added ex- 
 planation of the governing noun : thus, bie (5(^lt)a(^^eit, jebem gu 
 Derfpred^en the weakness of promising to each one, ein ©efii^I be§ 
 58erbtenfte§, biefe gauge ^'o^z au^gufiillen a feeling of the merit of 
 filling out this whole height. 
 
 These classes, however, variously cross and pass into each 
 other. 
 
 346. The Infinitive governed by a Preposition. 
 
 1. Only three prepositions— namely, um in order, o^ne without, 
 ftatt or anftatt i'nstead — are allowed in German directly to govern 
 the infinitive (preceded by its sign gu). 
 
 They are placed at the beginning of the infinitive clause, pre- 
 ceding all the words dependent on or limiting the infinitive, 
 which stands last, always with gu next before it, and which is 
 ordinarily to be rendered (except after um) by our infinitive in 
 ing: thus, iebermann fommt, um gu |e!)en ober gefe^en gu merben 
 every one comes in order to see or to he seen, o^ne euc^ ft^mer gu 
 t)er!Iagen without accusing you sorely, anftatt aber bie I)ieburd) 
 ergeugte giinftige ©timmung gu benu^en instead, however, of im- 
 proving the favorable state of mind thus brought about. 
 
 2. With other prepositions, when a similar expression is re- 
 quired, the infinitive clause is represented beforehand by a ba 
 or bar in composition with the preposition, and then itself fol- 
 lows, as if in apposition with this ba. 
 
 Thus, fie maren nabe b ar an, auf ibn gu treten tlwy luere near to 
 treading on him (near to this — viz. to tread on him), htVda1i)xit m\6) 
 b a t) r, bie Matter an ben ^ufen fetbft gu legen saved me from 
 
348] INFINITIVE. 183 
 
 laying the adder to my own bosom (from this— viz. to lay etc.), fie 
 brangen barauf, \\6) red^t§ gu wenben they insisted on turning 
 to the right. 
 
 a. Such a phrase as they insisted on his turning to the rights 
 where the subject of the action signified by the participial infin- 
 itive is different from that of the verb with which this is con- 
 nected by the preposition, cannot be expressed in German by an 
 infinitive: for the infinitive clause is substituted a complete 
 substantive clause (436.3cZ), with a personal verb and its subject : 
 thus, fie brangcn barauf, ^a^ er fi(^ re(i)tg tDenben follte they insisted 
 on this — that he should turn to the right. 
 
 347. The Infinitive in Absolute Constructions. 
 
 1. In various elliptical constructions, chiefly analogous with 
 such as are usual in English also, the infinitive stands without 
 being dependent on any other word : thus, tt)arum mid) mdtn why 
 awaken me? a^\ auf ha^ mut^icje [mutige] 3fto§ mic^ gu fd)tt)ingen 
 oh, to leap upon a spirited horse ! o f (^one§ 33ilb, gu f el^en . . .oh 
 beautiful picture! to see ... , anbercr 3ret)el nid)t gu gebenfen not 
 to mention other outrages : and so on. 
 
 2. By a usage not authorized in good German style, an in- 
 finitive is colloquially used with an imperative meaning : thus, 
 ha bleiBen stay there! 
 
 348. Infinitive Clauses. 
 
 1. The infinitive used directly as a noun (340) has the con- 
 struction of an ordinary noun. But in its proper use as infinitive it 
 shares in the construction of the verb of which it forms a part, 
 taking the same adjuncts — whether predicate, object, adverb, or 
 prepositional phrase — as the personal forms of the verb ; thus 
 forming often extended and intricate infinitive clam^es, which 
 have the logical value of full substantive clauses, and are ex- 
 changeable with such. 
 
 Thus, man ift befi^aftigt, ba§ fd)one ^flafter, tt)o e^ abgutt)et(5^en 
 fd)eint, mieber neu in ©tanb gu fe^en people are occupied with set- 
 ting the nice pavement newly in order again, ivJierever it seems 
 
 to be giving way, or man ift bamit bef^dftigt, ba^ man in 
 
 ©tanb fefet. 
 
 2. As a rule, the infinitive stands last in such a clause ; and, 
 in general, whatever is dependent on ^a infinitive is placed 
 before it. 
 
184 USES OF THE FORMS OF CONJUGATION. [348- 
 
 a. See the examples already given. When two or three in- 
 finitives come to stand together, each precedes the one it 
 depends on, in the reverse of the EngUsh order : thus, i^r ^abt 
 mt(^ ermorben laffen tt)oEen you have wanted to cause to murder 
 me (have me murdered). But an infinitive used as participle 
 (240.1c) allows nothing to follow it, and an auxiliary infinitive 
 must be placed before it: thus, \^i tuerbet m6) t}ab en ermorben 
 laffen iDoIIen you will have wanted etc. Compare 439.2. 
 
 [Exercise 31. Infinitive as Adjunct and with Preposition.] 
 
 Partidxiles. 
 
 349. The participles are properly verbal adjectives, and all 
 their uses and constructions are those of adjectives. 
 
 350. The present participle has active force, representing in 
 adjective form the exerting of an action, or the continuing of a 
 state or condition, in the same way as this is represented by 
 the present tense of the verb. 
 
 Thus, ber reifenbe ^aler the travelling painter (i. e. the painter 
 who travels), eine lieBenbe 50^utter a loving motlier. 
 
 a. In rare cases, and by a license which is not approved, a 
 present participle is used passively : thus, eine melfenbe ^nt^ (eine 
 ^u'^ tt)el(^e gemelft trtrb) a milking cow (a cow that is milked), bie 
 Doriabenbe 3fieife (bie 9leife bie man l^or^at) the intended journey 
 (the journey which one has before him), ber betreffenbe $un!t the 
 point concerned. 
 
 351. 1. The past participle of a transitive verb has passive 
 meaning, without any distinct implication of past time. 
 
 Thus, ba§ geliebte ^inb the beloved child, i. e. the child whom 
 one has loved, or loves, or will love, according to the connection 
 in which the term is used. 
 
 a. But such a participle, from a verb denoting a single act 
 rather than a continuous action, may sometimes be used with 
 a past meaning: thus, ba§ gefloftlene ^ferb the stolen horse, ber 
 fletrunfene SBein the imbibed wine. 
 
 2. The past participle of an intransitive verb has active mean- 
 ing, and is for the most part employed only in the formation of 
 the compound tenses of the verb. But — 
 
 a. The past participle of a verb taking fein as its auxiliary 
 (241.2) may be used adjectively, with a distinctly past meaning : 
 
354] PAKTICIPLES. 185 
 
 thus, ber GefdHcnc 6(f)nee (ber (^(^nee, H)el(^cr Qef alien tft) the fallen 
 snow. 
 
 3. Many words have the form of past participles, but the 
 value of independent adjectives, either as having a meaning 
 which would not belong to them as participles, or as being di- 
 vorced from verbs both in form and meaning, or as derived 
 from verbs which are no longer in use as verbs, or as seeming 
 to imply verbs which have never been in use. 
 
 Thus, gclet)rt learned, befannt hiwwn, t)erbroffen listless i—tx^a- 
 Ben lofty (erftoben raised), gebiefienp^^re, sterling (aebte^en thriven); 
 —)dzx\io\)\in furtive, t)erjd)ieben different;— <^t\\xmi starry, beial^rt 
 aged. 
 
 a. Such past participles have not rarely assumed the value 
 of present participles : thus, Derfd^mteQen silent, t)erbient deserving, 
 beforgt anxious, |)fli(^tt)ergeffen duty-forgetting. 
 
 352. The future passive participle, as has been already no- 
 ticed (278), is formed only from transitive verbs, and is not used 
 otherwise than attributively. 
 
 Thus, bie 9tDlIe einer auf feme SBeife gu Beru!)t(^enben ^^xau the 
 part of a woman wJio was in no way to be pacified, bte gleic^geittg 
 angutretenben ^ilgerfa'^rten the pilgrimages to be entered upon at 
 the same time— hut bie grau ift auf feine 2Bei)e gu Beru^igen the 
 woman is in no way to be pacified (343.III.16). 
 
 353. The present participle is used freely as an attributive, 
 and hence also, like other attributive adjectives, as a sub- 
 stantive ; but it is rarely employed as a predicate. 
 
 Thus, bie jpielenben Siiftc^en the sporting breezes, er tt)e(fte ben 
 ©c^lummernben he awoke the sleeper (slumbering one), ha§ triis 
 genbe 35ilb lebenber gutte the deceiving show of living f^dness, in 
 ber §anb be§ ©(^reibenben ober 3Jlalenben in the hand of the writer 
 or painter. 
 
 a. But there are a number of present participles which have 
 assumed the value and character of adjectives, and admit of 
 predicative use : for example, reigenb charming, ■^inrei^enb ravish- 
 ing, Bebeutenb important. 
 
 b. Such constructions as our he is loving, they were going, 
 though not unknown in ancient German, are no longer in use. 
 
 354. The past participle (except of an intransitive having 
 I)aben as auxiliary : see 351.2) is commonly employed both attrib- 
 
186 USES OF THE FOKMS OF CONJUGATION. [354- 
 
 utively and predicatively, and may be used as a substantive, 
 like any other adjective. 
 
 Thus, bic berlorene ^txi the hst time, in mxQ tDieberftolter ©eftalt 
 in ever repeated form, gcbt ben ^efangenen lebig set free tlw 
 prisoner (imprisoned one). 
 
 355. Both participles admit of comparison, or form a com- 
 parative and superlative degree, only so far as they lay aside 
 the special character of participles, and become adjectives. 
 
 Thus, bebeutenbcrc ©nmmen more important sums, t)a^ erl^abenfte 
 S3ilb the most majestic image. 
 
 356. As adverbs they are used rather sparingly, except those 
 which have assumed the value of adjectives. 
 
 Thus, au§ge3et(^net gelel^rt exceedingly learned, fiebenb fieife 
 boiling hot, entgudenb oft ravishingly often, i'^re gefenft jc!)Iummerns 
 ben 35Iatter their droopedly slumbering leaves. 
 
 357. Both participles are, especially in higher styles of com- 
 position, very commonly used appositively (110.1&), either alone, 
 or with limiting adjuncts such as are taken by the personal 
 forms of the verb. 
 
 Thus, ber TOe fa^ !opffcf)uttelnb nieber the old man looked dmvn, 
 shaking his head; f(^lafenb ^atte jte mir fo gef alien she had so 
 pleased me sleeping; l^errlid^e ^aben befd)erenb erfd)etnen fie bestow- 
 ing splendid gifts, they appear; bem 33ei]'ptele folgcnb, empfingen 
 biefe iefet ba§ ^reug following the example, these now took the cross; 
 't)a^ §eer t)atte, buri^ fruc^tbare ©egenben t)orau§3te!)enb, unb reid)Ud^ 
 mit SebenSmitteln Jjerforgt, bie ^rau erreid)t the army, moving on 
 through fruitful regions and abundantly supplied with provmons, 
 had reached the Drave; \^ bin ctn Sreunb uon (SJefc^ic^ten, gut er= 
 Sdlblt I cirii fond of stories, well told; x\o^ lefen uniflort bie ^lugen 
 bie ;3nf^rift nic^t my eyes, dimmed with grief, do not yet read the 
 inscription; ic^ fntete nieber, t)on SieV unb ^nbac^t gang burd)ftra^Iet 
 I kneeled down, quite irradiated with love and devotion; t)om 
 ^O^ei^el befeelt, rebet ber fii^lenbe ©tein animated by the chisel, the 
 feeling stone speaks; icf) berlie^ fie tDeinenb Ileft her weeping. 
 
 a. Such a participle or participial phrase is used only in the 
 sense of an adjective clause, and expresses ordinarily an ac- 
 companying circumstance, or describes a state or condition ; it 
 may not be used, as in English, to signify a determining cause, 
 or otherwise adverbially : in such phrases as not finding him, I 
 went away, walking uprightly, we walk surely^ having saluted 
 
360] PABTICIPLES. 187 
 
 him, we retired, full adverbial clauses must be substituted for 
 the participial phrases: thus, ha t^ x^n ni(!)t fanb;— tuenn toir 
 aufric^tig tcanbeln j — nad^bem mt iftn begrii^t fatten. 
 
 b. Rarely, however, the participle approaches a causative 
 force: thus, bte§ befur(i)tenb, tbhkk Ltotete] er ben ^Beauftragten 
 fearing this, he slew the messenger. Compare also 431.d 
 
 358. The participial clause follows the same rule of arrange- 
 ment as the infinitive clause (348.2) : namely, the participle 
 regularly and usually stands last, being preceded by all that 
 limits it or is dependent on it. 
 
 a. This rule is without exception, when the participle is used 
 attributively (compare 147.2); in the appositive clause, the 
 participle not very rarely stands first : thus, ber britte, mit ben 
 frofteften ©offnunoen beaonnene, mit feltener 0ufi6eit gefii^rtc 
 ^reuggug the third criisade, begun with the gladdest hopes, con- 
 ducted with rare prudence; in ben Sbeen ber franjofifi^en Um- 
 tt)dlgung ern)ad)]en, rein ge^alten t)on il)ren 35erbre(5^en, begabt mit 
 ber ®etfte§fldrfe . . . grown up in the ideas of the French revolution, 
 kept free from its crimes, gifted with the strength of mind . . . 
 
 359. Special Uses of Participles. 1. The past participle is 
 used in the sense of a present participle, after one or two verbs 
 of motion, to express the mode of motion : thus, f o fam ^^dufig 
 ein Oafe angefprnngen a hare often came jumping along, :^eulenb 
 fommt ber ©turm gefloQen the howling storm comes flying. 
 
 2. After a verb of calling, a past participle is occasionally 
 used in an infinitive sense : thus, ba§ ftei^t auc^ fiir bie Su'^unft 
 Qeforgt that I call (is called) caring for the future also. 
 
 3. By an elliptical construction, a past participle has some- 
 times the value of an imperative : thus, ins x^dh, in bie ^retl^ett 
 QCjogen march forth (let tliere be marching) into the field, to free- 
 dom! ben UlajDpen gegdumt [have] the steed bridled! See 230. 3c. 
 
 [ExEBCisE 32. Participles.] 
 
 INDECLINABLES. 
 
 • 360. There are three classes of words not admitting inflec- 
 tion, or grammatical variation of form indicating change of 
 relation to other words, and which are therefore called indeclin- 
 ables, or particles, These three are adverbs, prepositions, and 
 
188 INDECUNABLES. [360- 
 
 cjoNJUNcnoNS. They pass over into one another, to some extent, 
 the same word having often more than one oflSce. 
 
 fit- 3a yes and min no are particles which fall properly into 
 no one of the classes mentioned, each being by itself a complete 
 (abbreviated) expression, affirming or denying a thought as al- 
 ready expressed by another. 
 
 ADVERBS. 
 
 361. Adverbs are words qualifying verbs and adjectives, as 
 also other adverbs, and defining some mode or circumstance of 
 the 'action or quality signified by those parts of speech. 
 
 In certain exceptional cases, adverbs qualify prepositions 
 also : see 369.1. 
 
 362. Adverbs may be classified according to their 
 meaning as — 
 
 1. Adverbs of manner and quaUty: as, bUnbling^ blindly, 
 trcult(^ faithfully, t)oflenb§ completely, anber^ otherwise, alf o thus. 
 
 2. Adverbs of measure and degree : as, beina^c almost, gdnglic^ 
 wholly, faum scarcely, gu too, fel)r very. 
 
 3. Adverbs of place and motion: as, I)ier here, hoxt yonder, 
 fjn hither, ^in hence, em|)or up, red)t§ to the right, m^ away. 
 
 4. Adverbs of time : as, bann then, einft once, oft often, jd^on 
 already, tnhW^ finally, nie iiever, ^eute to-day. 
 
 5. Adverbs of modality, or such as Umit not so much the 
 thought itself as its relation to the speaker, or show the logical 
 relation between one thought and another : thus, affirmative, 
 ^iixwaijX assuredly, aIIerbtnQ§ by all means ; —negative, nii^t not, 
 !enie§tt)efl§ by no meaiw ; —potential, \)kM^t perhaps, tt)a^r}(i)em- 
 \\^ probably; — causal, ba^er therefore, xoaxnm. for what reason. 
 
 a. This last is a transition class between adverbs and conjunc- 
 tions : see 385. 
 
 h. These leading divisions may be very variously subdivided, 
 nor are their own limits precise or absolute. The relations ex- 
 pressed by adverbs are almost as indefinitely various as those 
 expressed by adjectives, and are in like manner incapable of 
 distinct and exhaustive classification. Hence it is of equal or 
 greater importance to note their various derivation, to which 
 we next pass. 
 
363] ADVERBS. 189 
 
 363. Adverbs from Adjectives, 
 
 1. Almost all adjectives in German admit of use also 
 as adverbs, in their nninflected or thematic form (see 
 130). 
 
 a. Exceptions are : the articles and pronominal and numeral 
 adjectives (except erft) ; further, most participles having their 
 proper participial meaning (356); and a few others, as arm, 
 gram, todtjx, from which derivative adverbs have been formed 
 by means of endings (below, 3). 
 
 h. In an earlier condition of the language, the adjective when 
 used as adverb had an ending of inflection. A relic of this 
 ending is the e of lange long (adj. lang long), and that of gerne, 
 feme, ja(^te, flille, and a few others, which are now more com- 
 monly used without e. 
 
 2. Adjectives are thus used as adverbs both in the 
 positive and the comparative degree ; but only rarely 
 in the superlative. 
 
 a. Superlatives that are employed as adverbs in their simple 
 form are meift, Idngft, iiingft, tta(f)ft, ^o^ft/ ciu^erft, mogli^ft, 
 innigft, frcunbli^ft, ^^erjlii^ft, fliitigft, gefafligft, and a few others. 
 
 b. Instead of the simple adjective, is commonly used in the 
 superlative an adverbial phrase, composed of the adjective with 
 preceding definite article and governed by a preposition, an or 
 auf ; more rarely, in or ^u (compare the similar treatment of the 
 superlative as predicate, 140.2b). 
 
 Thus, tt)a§ am meiften in bte ^lugen fiel what most struck the eye, 
 ba§ ^t^rb, ha^:) fic^ geftern am fcf)Ie(^teften geftalten the horse that 
 behaved worst yesterday; man mu^ fie auf§ befte ergte^en one 
 must bring them up in the best possible manner, er bot burc^ ^e= 
 fanbte auf§ I)ofIicf)fte an he offered most courteously through ambas- 
 sadors; §erren nic^t im minb'ften eitel gentlemen not in the least 
 vain; ha tra} er sum erften %^xt)m then he smote Tlirym first (for 
 the first). 
 
 c. Of the phrases formed with am and auf§, respectively, the 
 former are used when there is direct comparison made, and 
 eminence of degree above others is signified (superlative rela- 
 tive) ; the latter, when general eminence of degree, without 
 comparison, is intended (superlative absolute : compare 142.1) ; 
 im and gum are used with certain adjectives, in special phrases. 
 
100 mDECLINABLES. [363- 
 
 d. Many superlatives form a derivative adverb with the end- 
 ing en§ : see below, 3c. 
 
 3. A comparatively small number of adverbs are 
 formed from adjectives by means of derivative endings : 
 
 a. 2t(^ (our ly, originally the same word with like) forms a 
 number of derivative adjectives from adjectives, nouns, and 
 participles ; and of these a few (fifteen or twenty) nre used only 
 with adverbial meaning : examples are fretltc^, neultcf), fd^U)erIt(i), 
 fid)erli(^, Ireulicf), tDa^rlid^, foIfiUc^, l^offentIi(^. 
 
 h. Six or eight adverbs are formed from adjectives (or nouns) 
 by the ending ItnG§ : thus, BIinbltncj§ blindly, f (^rtttltnQg step by 
 step. The § of this suffix is originally a genitive ending. 
 
 c. The suffix en§ forms adverbs from many superlatives, and 
 from all the ordinal adjectives : thus, beften§ in the best manner, 
 tx\kn§ firstly, geftntenS tenthly; also from iibrig, uBrigen§ more- 
 over. 
 
 The en of this suffix is an ending of adjective declension, to 
 which a genitive § has become farther attached, irregularly. 
 
 d. The simple genitive ending § forms adverbs from a small 
 number of adjectives and participles : thus, Iinf§ o?i tJie left, 
 16crett§ already, anberg otherwise, eilenb§ hastily, iDcrgebeng vainly, 
 3ufel)enb§ visibly; t)oIIenb§ completely is a corruption of boKenS. 
 
 e. A few other derivatives are too irregular and isolated to 
 require notice here. 
 
 364. Adverbs from Nouns. 
 
 1. Besides the few adverbs formed from nouns by the suffixes 
 It(i) and ling? (above, 363.3a,&), there is also a small number 
 formed by the simple genitive ending § ; as, anf ang§ in the begin- 
 ning, flug§ in haste, tftetig [teil§] in part, nad)t§ in the night. 
 
 With these are to be compared the adverbial genitives of 
 nouns, either without or with a limiting word, noticed at 220.1. 
 
 2. A considerable number of adverbs of direction are formed 
 from nouns and prepositions by the suffix n)drt§ (by origin, the 
 genitive case of an adjective tt)drt turned, directed): thus, auf= 
 tt)art§ upward, oftmdrta eastward, l^immelmartS heavenward. 
 
 365. Adverbs by combination. 
 
 1. Combinations of a noun and a limiting word (article, ad- 
 jective, pronominal adjective — even adverb), which, from being 
 adverbial phrases, have become fused together into one word. 
 
367] ADVEKBS. 191 
 
 a. Such are of every oblique case, most often genitives, least 
 often datives, but not infrequently with irregular endings or 
 inserted letters. 
 
 Examples are grofetentl^eil§ [gro^tenteilg] mostly, !elne§tt)eg§ in 
 no wise, bergeftalt in such wise, aHent^alBen everywhere, aKeseit 
 always, jebenfaflS in any event, einmal once, m\mal§ often, abtx^' 
 mal§ again. 
 
 h. Certain nouns are thus used with especial frequency, form- 
 ing classes of compound adverbs : such are ®ing, 5^^/ &(il^^/ 
 9J^aI, Wa% 6eite, %\)t\\ [2eil], 2BeQ, SBeile, 2©eifc. 
 
 2. Combinations of a preposition with a following or preceding 
 noun, or with a following adjective. These are also fused ad- 
 verbial phrases. 
 
 Examples are untertDcg^ on the way, ab^anben out of reach, gu- 
 tDeilen sometimes, iiBer^au^jt in general, tnbeficu meanwhile; 
 bergab dx)wn hill, ftromauf np stream; guerft at first, \mvoa\)i 
 verily, 
 
 3. Combinations of adverbs with adverbs or prepositions^ 
 more proper compounds. These are very numerous, and various 
 in kind ; one or two classes require to be especially noticed : 
 
 a. Combinations with the words of general direction or mo- 
 tion, such as are also used as compound prefixes to verbs; 
 see 298.2. 
 
 h. Combinations of prepositions with the adverbs ba or bar, 
 tt)0 or tDor, and Ine or I)i:r, used commonly as equivalents for 
 the cases of pronouns governed by those j repositions (see 
 154.2,3 ; 166.4 ; 173.2 ; 180), with a demonstrative, an interrog- 
 ative, or a relative value. 
 
 366. Adverbs of obscure derivation. 
 
 Many adverbs which appear like simple words are traceable 
 to combinations analogous with those explained above. 
 
 Examples are jmar to be sure (^\ tcare in truth), nur only (ni 
 n)are were it not), fonft else (\o ne \\i so it be not), );)t\xit to-day 
 rtiu tagu on this day), nie never (m ie not ever), nimmer never 
 (ntc me"^r never more), ni(^t not fne-mil^t no aught). 
 
 367. Original Adverbs. 
 
 Besides the classes already treated of, there remain a number 
 of adverbs which, though in part demonstrably forms of inflec- 
 tion of pronominal and other words, may be practically regarded 
 as original. The most important classes of these are— 
 
192 INDECLINABLES. [367- 
 
 1. The simple adverbs of place or directi n, ab, an, auf, aua, 
 Bei, burc^, in or ein, oB, urn, t)or, juj— these are all of them com- 
 monly employed as prepositions, but retain their adverbial 
 value especially as prefixes to verbs (298.1). 
 
 2. Derivatives from pronominal roots : thus — 
 
 a. from the demonstrative root (in ber)— ba, bar, banti, benn, 
 bort, beflo, bo(i). 
 
 b. from the interrogative root (in tt)er) — tt)te, tPO, tDcnti, tt)ann. 
 
 c. from an obsolete demonstrative root hi — ]^ie, ^m, l)er, I)tn, 
 l^inter. 
 
 3. Farther derivatives from these classes, with adverbial or 
 prepositional meaning : thus, from in, inne and tnnen ; from oB, 
 ober and oBen, iiber and iiBen ; from bann, \oann, and l)in, bannen, 
 tt)annen, and pitmen ; and so on. 
 
 a. In several cases, forms in er and en stand related to one 
 another as corresponding preposition and adverb : thus, iiBer 
 and iiBen, Winter and l^inten, au^er and au^en, unter and unten. 
 
 368. Comparison of Adverbs. 
 
 Adverbs, as such, do not generally admit of comparison: 
 comparative and superlative adverbs, so-called, are for the most 
 part comparative and superlative adjectives used adverbially. 
 
 a. Only oft often forms ofter and i3fteft; and e^e (itself used 
 only as conjunction, ere, or in a few compounds, as e^ebem, with 
 prepositional force) forms efter and om e^eften. 
 
 b. A few words now used only as adverbs have corresponding 
 forms of comparison from other words, adjectives : for example, 
 Qcrn willingly has lieBer, am IteBften, from HeB dear. 
 
 c. Adverbs whose meaning calls for such treatment may, 
 rarely, form a kind of degrees of comparison with meBr more 
 and am meij'ten most, or other qualifying adverbs of similar 
 meaning : thus, mel^r red)t§ mxrre to the right, am meiften DoriDartg 
 farthest forward. 
 
 369. Certain special uses of Adverbs. 
 
 1. Some adverbs qualify prepositions — or, rather, preposi- 
 tional phrases of adverbial meaning : thus, mitten um ben i3eiB 
 midway about the body, baB er Beftdnbe Bi§ auf0 ^lut, B i§ in ben 
 ^ob bte t^e^be that he might maintain his quarrel even to blood, 
 even unto dedth. 
 
371] ADYERBS. 19S 
 
 2. Adverbs are not seldom governed by prepositions: see 
 below, 378. 
 
 3. Adverbs are used elliptically with the value of adjectives : 
 thus, biefer 50^ann l^ier this man here, (SJraber unb bie ^t)preffen 
 bran graves and the cypresses thereon ; — or, in predicative rela- 
 tions, nun tt)ar ber ^benb t)orbet now the evening was past, btc 
 3al^re finb no(^ nidjt urn the years are not yet over, a(le§ foil 
 anberg fein unb Qejc^marfDoII everything is to he otherwise, and 
 tasty, \\i fein 5D^orber mel^r untertt)ege§ is there no longer a 
 murderer on the way ? aller SCSetteif er tt)trb ijergeben^aZi emula- 
 tion becomes futile, id) f a^ D^ebel todi u m !) e r I saw mist far 
 about. 
 
 4. An adverb is often added after a preposition and its object, 
 to complete or to make more distinct the relation expressed by 
 the preposition : see below, 379. 
 
 370. Place of Adverbs, 
 
 1. An adverb precedes the adjective or adverb wliicli 
 it qualifies. 
 
 a. Except genUQ enough, which, as in English, follows the 
 word it Umits. 
 
 2. An adverb qualifying a personal verb is put after it in the 
 regular arrangement of the sentence ; one qualifying an infin- 
 itive or participle is placed before it. 
 
 As to the place of the adverb in relation to other adjuncts of 
 the verb, see 319 ; as to certain adverbial words which have ex- 
 ceptional freedom of position, see 385.4. 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 371. A preposition is a word used to define the relation be- 
 tween some person or thing and an action, a quahty, or another 
 person or thing with which it stands connected. 
 
 a. The distinctive characteristic of a preposition is that it 
 governs an oblique ca^e of a noun (or of the equivalent of a 
 noun) ; and by this it is separated from an adverb : it is a kind 
 of transitive adverb, requiring an object in order to the comple- 
 tion of the idea which it signifies. Many words are either ad- 
 verbs or prepositions, according as they are used without or 
 with such object. 
 
194 INDECLINABLES. [371- 
 
 b. Many of the German prepositions are of late formation 
 from nouns or adjectives, or from adverbial phrases containing 
 such. Some examples of these will be noted below. 
 
 372. Prepositions are most conveniently classified 
 according to the case they govern, as the genitive, the 
 dative, the accusative, and the dative or accusative. 
 
 a. A few govern either the dative or genitive, but their dif- 
 ference of use in this respect is not of consequence enough to 
 found a class upon. 
 
 373. Prepositions governing the genitive are anftatt or ftatt 
 instead of, f)aI6er or :^al6en for the sake o/— with the compounds 
 of l^alb, namely au^erl)al6 without, outside, inner^alb within, oBcr= 
 "ijoib above, unter^alb below— txa^i in virtue of, Idngg along, laut 
 according to, trofe in spite of, urn . . . trillen on account of, unge- 
 a^ki (or oI)nGea(^tet) notwitJistanding, unfern and unmeit 7iot far 
 from, mxikk or mittelft or t)ermittel[t by means of, t)ermofie by dint 
 of, xoa\)xtnh during, m^^m on account of, guf olfle in consequence of, 
 and the compounds of jeit, biefjeit or bicffeit^ on this side of, and 
 jenfeit or jenfeitS on the further side of, beyond (cf. also 152.2). 
 
 Thus, ftatt ber golbnen Sieber instead of the golden songs, um 
 biefer fremben S^ugen l^illen on account of these stranger witnesses, 
 ^enugt:^uung megen ber getobteten [getoteten] S^rifteu satisfaction 
 on account of the slain Christians, jenfeit be§ gorfteS beyond the 
 forest. 
 
 a. Of these prepositions, ldng§, tro^, and gufolge also not in- 
 frequently govern the dative ; some others do so occasionally. 
 
 b. §al6en or '^alber always follows the noun it governs ; um . . . 
 tDilIen takes the noun between its two parts ; ungeQ(f)tet, tnegen, 
 and pfolge may either precede or follow (gufolge precedes a gen- 
 itive, but follows a dative). 
 
 c. These prepositions are of recent use as such, and all evi- 
 dently derived from other parts of speech. §alb is a noun 
 meaning originally side; megen was formerly Don tDcgen, which 
 is still in occasional use. 
 
 d. The adverbial genitives ^Ingefi(%t§ -in presence and ^e()uf§ 
 in behalf, the adverbs tnmitten in the midst, aBfctt§ aside, and 
 some of those formed with vo'dxt^, as (eittx)drt§ sideways, noxhmxi^ 
 northwards, also entlang along, and a few others, antiquated or 
 of rare occurrence, are sometimes used prepositionally with a 
 genitive. 
 
375] PEEPOSITIONS. 195 
 
 374. The prepositions governing the dative are, of more an- 
 cient and original words, au§ out, bet by, mit with, oh above, for, 
 t)on of, guto; of recent and derivative or compound words, 
 nad) after, to, feit siiwe, gleid) like, fammt and neb[t along with, 
 ndif)ft next, binnen within, aujser outside, entgegen against, gegen* 
 iiber opposite, gemdB wi accordance with, gutDiber contrary to. 
 
 a. For prepositions wliich more regularly and usually govern 
 the genitive, but are sometimes construed with a dative, see 
 above, 373a. Of those here mentioned, ob (which is now anti- 
 quated), when meaning 07i account of, is occasionally used with 
 a genitive ; au^er governs a genitive in the single phrase au^er 
 £anbe§ out of the country. 
 
 h. dla^, oleirf), and gemd^ either precede or follow the governed 
 noun : thus, nad) ber (^taht to the city, ber ^ainx nad) according 
 to nature; gemd^ ben Urgefc^id)ten according to the old stories, ber 
 3eit unb ben Umftdnben gemd^ in ax^cordance with the time and the 
 circumstances; jie gte^t fid^ gleic^ einem 2}leere§arme ^in it stretches 
 along, after the manner of an arm of the sea, jie flog, etner ©ijlp^ibe 
 glei(^ she flew like a sylph, ^ntgegen, gegeniiber, and gumiber fol- 
 low the noun ; but gegeniiber is sometimes (by a usage no longer 
 approved) divided, and takes the noun between its two parts : 
 thus, gmei tauten fi^en gegen einanber iiber two ladies sit opposite 
 one another. 
 
 c. Occasionally, by a bold construction, a word which is 
 properly adverb only is construed as if preposition : thus, Doran 
 ben filftnen Slet^en in front of the brave ranks: compare 373c?. 
 
 375. The prepositions governing the accusative only 
 are bur(^ through, fiir/or, (]egGn or gen against, otjite tvith- 
 out, um about, tDiber against; also fonber without, big 
 unto, tiU. 
 
 a. ^en is now nearly out of use, except in certain phrases, 
 like gen ^immel toward heaven, gen SBeften toward the west. 
 ©onber is hardly employed except in a phrase or two, as fonber 
 glei(^en without equal. 53iy usually stands adverbially before a 
 preposition (see 369.1), but also governs directly specifications 
 of place and time : thus, biy 'i}lntiod)ien as far as Antioch, trarte 
 nur bi3 morgen only wait till tomorrow. 
 
 b. Um is very often followed by ber after the noun : see 379a. 
 
 c. From the case of an accusative governed by a preposition 
 requires to be distinguished that of an absolute accusative of 
 
196 mDECLlNABLES. [375- 
 
 place followed by an adverb of direction, as ben QBerg ^inauf up 
 the mountain (see 230.1&). This construction is interesting as 
 illustrating an intermediate step in the process of conversion of 
 adverbs into prepositions. 
 
 376. Nine prepositions govern sometimes the dative 
 and sometimes the accusative— the dative, when they 
 indicate locality or situation merely, or answer the 
 question "where?" the accusative, when they imply 
 motion or tendency toward, or answer the question 
 ** whither ? " They are an on, at, auf upon, I^inter behind, 
 in in, into, neben beside, iiber above, across, unter under, 
 Dor be/ore, jiDifd^eit between. 
 
 Thus, t(^ "ijoik an ben ©c^ranfen, unb retc^e ben C>^Int an einen 
 ^nappen ^mnd I stop at the bari-ier, and hand hack my helmet to 
 a squire; er tag auf ber ^.rbe, unb ^aik ha^ Oftr auf ben 3fta(en 9e= 
 legt he lay on the ground, and had his ear laid on the turf; fie 
 Briiten !)inter bem Dfen they brood behind the stove, er legte \i^ 
 Vinkx eine 2abad§bofc he laid himself behind a snuff-box; er ging 
 tn§ ^an^, unb blieb lange in bemfelben he went into the house, and 
 staid a long time in it; bott liegt er neben einem Stein there it lies 
 beside a stone, fie fe^ten fic^ neben ben 33aum they seated themselves 
 beside the tree; ber 3flad)en f(^Ue^t fid) itber bem ©d^mimmer the 
 abyss closes over the swimmer, iiber biefen ©trom bin x^ einmal 
 gefabren I once crossed over this stream; ber ^abn trieb unter eine 
 ^riide, unter btefer 33ru(fe n)Dbnte eine 9latte tlie boat drove under- 
 neath a bridge, under this bridge lived a rat; im^^ugenblid iDaren 
 fie t)Dr bem gelfen in a moment they were before the rock, er trat 
 t)or bie ^onigtn he came before the queen; ha^ ©eftrirfe rubte 
 3tDif(^en ibren §tinben the knitting-work lay between her Itands, fie 
 f^blupften aroij^en feine Stueige they slipped in among its branches. 
 
 a. The difference of meaning determining the use of the 
 dative or accusative after these prepositions is not always an 
 obvious one ; sometimes a peculiar liveliness is given to an ex- 
 pression by the employment of the accusative : thus, er mad^te 
 eine Deffnung in bie ^rbe he made a hole in (into) the ground, unb 
 fii^te fie an ben 5}lunb and kissed her on the mouth (impressed a 
 kiss), iiber ben 9lanb ber Xiefe gebogen arched over (thrown as 
 arch across) the edge of the abyss; or, the accusative implies a 
 verb of motion which is not expressed: thus, er fticg in ein 
 2[Birtb§baug [SBirt^bauS] ab he got dmn (and entered) into an inn, 
 
378] PEEPOSITIONS. 197 
 
 cr rettctc fi(f) In bte 35urg he saved himself (betook himself for 
 safety) into the castle, fie fteften in bie ^bfte they stand up (rise to 
 a standing posture) ; or, the action is a figurative one : thus, an 
 t^n benfen think of him (turn one's thoughts on him), er fa^ auf aH 
 bic $rad)t he looked upon all the beauty, fie freueten ]\^ iiber bie 
 fd^onenSpfel they were delighted with the beautiful apples; or 
 there are phrases, the imphcation of which seems arbitrarily 
 determined: thus, auf bie befte SBeife in the best manner, iiber 
 taufenb Sa^re after a tliousand years. 
 
 b. It is only by its use of in and into (as also, in colloquial 
 phrase, of on and onto), that the English makes a corresponding 
 distinction ; and even this does not agree in all particulars with 
 the German distinction of in with the dative and with the ac- 
 cusative. Hence the ground of the difference of case is the less 
 easily appreciated by us, and needs to be carefully noted at 
 every instance that occurs. 
 
 c. The accusative and dative with these prepositions have 
 each its own proper value, the one as the case of directest ac- 
 tion, the other as representing the ancient locative (or case de- 
 noting the in relation). 
 
 377. 1. Some prepositions govern a substantive clause, in- 
 troduced usually by ba^, rarely by a compound relative (179) : 
 such are auf, au^er, bi§, o^ne, ftatt or anftatt, urn, ungeacfitet, h)dl)= 
 renb : thus, auf ba^ e§ bir tuofti (^e^e in order that it may go well 
 with thee, au^er mx feine ^Jlitfc^uIbiQen feien except who were his 
 accomplices. 
 
 a. This is closely akin with the office of conjunction ; and bi§, 
 ungeadjtet, and tt)df)renb may be used without ba6, as proper con- 
 junctions: thus, n)dt)renb ton ha blieben while we continued there 
 (compare 439.6c). 
 
 2. The prepositions um, oftne, and ftatt or anftatt may govern 
 an infinitive and its adjuncts, as equivalent of a complete clause 
 (compare 346.1). 
 
 378. An adverb not infrequently takes the place of a noun 
 as object of a preposition. Thus — 
 
 a. Many adverbs of time and place : as, na^ oben upward 
 (toward above), auf immer for ever, fiir ie^t for now, t)on fern 
 from afar, in tt)te fern /low far. 
 
 b. The adverbs b a or b ar, to o or tr ar, and T^ier or l^ie, as substitutes 
 for the oblic[ue cases of pronouns. These ^re compoundeci wjtti 
 
198 INDECLINABLES. [378- 
 
 the governing preposition, forming a kind of compound adverb 
 
 (see 365.3&). 
 
 379. 1. After the noun governed by a preposition is often 
 added an adverb, to emphasize, or to define more nearly, the 
 relation expressed by the preposition. Thus — 
 
 a. The general adverbs of direction, \)m and l^er : as, um un§ 
 fier, um \\)X[ l^er round about us or him, Winter xtjm l^er along after 
 Mm, na^ eiuer 9tic^tun(^ fjin in a single directwn, iiber bag 9)leer 
 l^in across the sea, Don alien ©eiten ^er/rom all sides. 
 
 In these combinations, the distinctive meaning of the adverb, 
 as denoting motion from and toward, is apt to be effaced. Um . . . 
 l^er is the commonest case, and a stereotyped expression for 
 round about. 
 
 b. The same adverbs, in combination with the preposition it- 
 self repeated : thus, um mi(^ lucrum rowid about me, in ben Sorft 
 l^inein into the forest, an^ bem SBalbe l^inaug out of the wood, an^ 
 ber 33ruft ^erau§ forth from the breast, hm6) ®efal)ren l^inburd^ 
 through dangers. 
 
 c. Other adverbs of direction, simple or compound, often ad- 
 ding an essential complement to the meaning of the preposi- 
 tion: thus, t)on nun an from now on, t)on bort an§ forth from 
 there, Don Sugtnb a\i\ from youth up, wad) hnWxik^n toward the 
 middle, fie flingen auf i^n gu they fell upon him, er I)i3rt bie Seinbe 
 l^inter fi(^ brein he hears the enemy (coming on) after him, l^inter 
 58dumen \\tx'oox forth from behind trees, gur hammer T^inein into the 
 room, gum ^l^ore I)inau§ out of the gate. 
 
 2. It may sometimes be made a question whether the adverb 
 of direction belongs to the prepositional phrase, or, rather, to 
 the verb of the clause, as its ^prefix : the two cases pass into one 
 another, 
 
 380. To what members of the sentence a prepositional phrase 
 forms an adjunct has been pointed out already : namely — 
 
 1. To a verb, with very various value : see 318. 
 
 2. To a noun : see 112. 
 
 3. To an adjective: see 146. 
 
 4. Hence, also, to an adverb, when an adjective is used as 
 such. 
 
 381. 1. The rules for the position of a preposition, whether 
 before or after the noun that it governs, have been given above, 
 io Qoiinectioii with the rules for ^overnraeot, 
 
383] CONJUNCTIONS. 199 
 
 2. Between the preposition and its following governed noun 
 may intervene the various limiting words which are wont to 
 stand before a noun — as articles, adjective pronouns, adjectives 
 and participles, with their adjuncts — often to an extent dis- 
 cordant with English usage : thus, an§ fleincn, t)ieredig 3ugcl&au= 
 enen, steniUd) Qleid)en ^afaltftiiden of small, squarely hewn, tolerably 
 equal pieces of basalt; fiir bent ^ranfen Qeletflete ^ni\t for help 
 rendered to the sick man. 
 
 Respecting the combination of the preposition with a following 
 definite article into a single word, see 65. 
 
 [Exercise 33. Adverbs and Prepositions.] 
 
 CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 382. Conjunctions are words which connect the clauses or 
 sentences composing a period or paragraph, and show their 
 relation to one another. 
 
 a. We have hitherto had to do only with the elements which 
 enter into the structure of individual clauses, and among which 
 conjunctions play no part. "When, however, clauses themselves 
 are to be put in connection with one another, conjunctions are 
 required. 
 
 h. If certain conjunctions — especially those meaning and and 
 or — appear to connect words as well as clauses, it is as such 
 words represent clauses, and may be expanded into them : thus, 
 er unb ic^ tt)aren ha — er Wax ba, unb tcf) ioar ha he was there and 1 
 was there, er ift mdcf)tiger al§ ic^ (bin) he is mightier than I (am). 
 
 c. Conjunctions, as a class, are the words of latest develop- 
 ment in the history of language, coming from other parts of 
 speech, mainly through the medium of adverbial use. A word 
 ceases to be an adverb and becomes a conjunction, when its 
 qualifying influence extends over a whole clause instead of be- 
 ing limited to a particular word in it. Almost all conjunctions 
 in German are also adverbs (or prepositions), and their uses as 
 the one or the other part of speech shade off into one another, 
 
 383. Conjunctions are most conveniently classified 
 according to the character of the relations they indicate, 
 and their effect upon the arrangeinent of the clauses 
 ihej introduce, as—- 
 
200 INDECLINABLES. [383- 
 
 1. General connectives, which do not alter the arrange- 
 ment of the clause. 
 
 2. Adverbial conjunctions, causing the inversion of a 
 clause (that is to say, causing its subject to follow, in- 
 stead of preceding, the verb). 
 
 3. Subordinating conjunctions, which make the clause 
 dependent, and give it the transposed order (removing 
 the verb to the end). 
 
 4. The first two classes, in contradistinction from the third, 
 may be called co-ordinating conjunctions. 
 
 384. The general connectives are those signifying 
 and, but, for, and or and either. 
 
 Namely unb and;—dbtx, aEein, jonbern (and sometimes bodf)) 
 hut;— htnn for;— tnimhn either and ober or, 
 
 a. Of the words meaning but, fonbern is more strongly ad- 
 versative than abet, being used only after a negative, and intro- 
 ducing some word which has a Uke construction with the one on 
 which the force of the negation falls, and which is placed in 
 direct antithesis with it: thus, tcetl nic^t eigne 9}^a(!)t, fonbern 
 (^ott, bte ^onige errettet because not their own might, but God, 
 saves kings; er geno§ nt(!)t lange fetne§ 9iu!)m§, fonbern tnarb be= 
 gn)ungen he did not long enjoy his fame, but he was subdu£d; mein 
 IRetter xcax fein 3}Jann, fonbern ein 33a(i) my preserver was no man, 
 but a brook ;~the combination ni(^t nur (or blo^) . . . fonbern an^ 
 not only . . . but also is likewise common : thus, nic^t blo^ jenc 
 fiinbigten, fonbern an^ n)ir not they alone sinned, but also we. 
 %iit\n means hterally only, and is often best so rendered, being 
 more restricted than aber to the introduction of a definite ob- 
 jection. For bod^ as but, see below, 385.5c. 
 
 b. These connectives stand always at the head of the clause 
 whose connection they indicate : except aber, which has great 
 freedom of position, and may be introduced at any later point 
 — without any notable difference of meaning, although often to 
 be conveniently rendered by however. 
 
 385. 1. The adverbial conjunctions are originally 
 and strictly adverbs, qualifying the verb of the clause 
 which they introduce ; and, like any other of the ad- 
 
385] CONJUNCTIONS. 201 
 
 juncts of the verb (431), when placed at the head of the 
 clause, they give it the inverted order, putting the sub- 
 ject after the verb. 
 
 2. No distinct boundary separates the conjunctional use of 
 these words from their adverbial use : they are conjunctions 
 when their effect is to determine the relations of clauses to one 
 another, rather than to limit the action of a verb — and these 
 two offices pass insensibly into each other. 
 
 3. They may be simply classified as — 
 
 a. Copulative (related to the general connective and\ uniting 
 different phrases with no other implication than that of con- 
 tinuation, order, or division : as, aud) also, aufeerbem besides, bann 
 then, ferner further, erften§, 3tt)eitcn§, britteny, firstly, secondly, 
 thirdly, and so on, f c^lie^Iid) finally, meber . . . nod) 7ieither . . . nor, 
 
 M\^ [tetl§] tftetlS [k'M partly partly, Balb Balb 
 
 now .... now. 
 
 h. Adversative (related to but), implying more or less distinctly 
 an opposition of idea, a denial or restriction : as, bod), ieboc^, ben* 
 nD(5^ yet, though, gleidjtDoI)!, befjenunaeac^tet nevertheless; bagegcn, 
 l^ingegen on the contrary, tnbeffen however, t)ielme!)r rather, gnjar 
 to be sure, tDol^l indeed. 
 
 c. Causative (related to for), implying a groxmd, reason, or oc- 
 casion : as, hat}tx, begmegen, be§l()a(6 therefore, alfo accordingly, 
 folglid), mitl^in consequently. 
 
 d. Adverbs of place and time, particularly the latter, some- 
 times assume a conjunctional value : as, nnterbcffen meanwhile, 
 t)OX^zt previously, barauf thereupon. 
 
 4. Although these words in their conjunctional office tend 
 toward the head of the clause, they do not always take that 
 place ; nor are they always conjunctions rather than adverbs 
 when they introduce the clause. Especially ndmli(^ namely, and 
 some of the adversative and causative conjuncti ns — as ho^, 
 iebo(^, inbefjen, gwar, n)O^I, alfo— have a freedom of position like 
 that of aber (3846). 
 
 5. The clause sometimes maintains its normal order, instead 
 of being inverted, after conjunctions of this class : especially — 
 
 a. When the emphasis of the clause, or of the antithesis in 
 two correlative clauses, rests on the subject, so that the con- 
 junction becomes a kind of adjunct of thtj subject : thus, an^ 
 
202 INDECLINABLES. [385- 
 
 bein 55ruber ^at e§ Qetriinf^t thy brother also has wished it, tcebcr 
 er, nod) tc^ tDaren ba neither he nor I were there. 
 
 h. When the conjunction represents a clause which is not fully 
 expressed, or is thrown in as it were parenthetically. Conjunc- 
 tions most often so treated are gmar, iiberbiefe, folQli^, gubem, 
 I)inge9en, and ordinals, as erften§, gmeiten^. 
 
 c. ^0(f) sometimes has its adversative force weakened to a 
 mere "but, and leaves the order of the clause imchanged, like the 
 other words that have that meaning (384). 
 
 386. 1. The subordinating conjunctions are such as 
 give to the clause which they introduce a dependent 
 (subordinate, accessory) value, making it enter, in the 
 relation of substantive, adjective, or adverb, into the 
 structure of some other clause (435). Such a dependent 
 clause assumes the transposed order — that is to say, its 
 personal verb is removed to the end of the clause (see 
 434 etc.). 
 
 2. The conjunctions that introduce a substantive dependent 
 clause are ba^ that, ob whether, and those that have a compound 
 relative value, namely iDte how, toann when, tDO where, and the 
 compounds of too, whether with adverbs of direction, as iDo^in 
 whither, iDo'^er whence, or with prepositions, as representing 
 cases of the compound relative pronoun tDer (180), as h)Dt)on 
 whereof, tDomit wherewith. 
 
 Thus, id) iDeiB, ba^ er I)ler Moax] ob cr nocf) Vxzx bleibt, tft mir un= 
 befannt; fragen 8tc nur narf), tDo'^in er jid) begeben babe I know 
 that he was here ; whether he still remains here is unknown to me ; 
 only inquire whither he has betaken himself. 
 
 3. The conjunctions that introduce an adjective dependent 
 clause are chiefly those made up of prepositions with the ad- 
 verbs ba and tr)0, representing cases of the simple relative pro- 
 nouns ber and tt)eld)er (180), or of words of direction with the 
 same adverbs. The simple conjunctions tt)o, tt)enn, XDann, ha, 
 al§, tt)ie, following specifications of place, time, or manner, also 
 sometimes perform the same office. 
 
 Thus, ha^ 33ett, toorauf er lag the bed on which he laij; tbr 
 OueEen, babin bte tcelfe 33ruft fic^ brdngt ye fountains toward 
 which the drooping breast presses ; ba§ Sanb, tDO bie ©ihonen bliibn 
 the land where the lemons blossom ; bte ^xi, tDte man ben ^rieg fiibvt 
 the way in which the war is carried on. 
 
387] CONJUNCTIONS. 203 
 
 4. The conjunctions that introduce an adverbial dependent 
 clause are > f very various derivation, character, and meaning, 
 namely — 
 
 a. Conjunctions indicating 'place : as, tt)o, ha where. 
 
 b. Time: as, ha, al^, tt)enn, mie, tt)o when, tnbem, tnbeffen or 
 inbe^, tDeil, radljrenb while, nac^bem after, feitbem since, bi§ until, 
 t^t, bet)or 6e/ore. 
 
 c. Manner: as, toie as. 
 
 d Caitse; as, tr)eil, biemeil because, ha since, nun noit? that, ha^ 
 that. 
 
 e. Purpose: as, bamit, ha% uuf ba^, urn bo§ in or(^er i/iai. 
 
 /. Condition: as, menu i/, jo, tt)o, rt)ofern, bafern, fafl§ m case, 
 inbem while; and, with implication of objection, unGcad)tet, ob= 
 glei(^, obiDo^I, ob)(5^on, ob gmar, ob auc^, tDeimQleid), mennfc^on, 
 tt)enn and), tt)iett)o^l although. 
 
 The compounds of ob and menn with filei(^, tt)O^I, and [(^on, 
 meaning although, are often separated by intervening words. 
 
 g. Degree: as, tDte as, Je according as, al§, benn ^/i'an. 
 
 /i. Besides these, there are numerous conjunctional phrases, 
 of kindred value, composed of conjunctions and other particles : 
 as, aU ob as if, in tt)ie fern so far a% je na(i)bem according as, 
 fo balb as soon as, fo lawQ so long as, etc. 
 
 i. (Bo, especially, with following adverb, forms (as in the last 
 two examples) a great number of conjunctional phrases or com- 
 pounds, after which the conjunction al§ as is sometimes ex- 
 pressed, but more often implied : thus, )o lang al§ e§ nur mbQlid^ 
 ift, or fo lang e§ nur mogUc^ ift so long as it is in any way possible 
 (compare 438.3d). 
 
 5. Few of these words are exclusively conjunctions : many 
 are adverbs also, or prepositions, or both ; some, as tudl^renb, 
 ungeac^tet, are participial forms ; some, as fafl§, toni, are cases 
 of nouns ; many are combined phrases composed of a i reposi- 
 tion and a governed case ; as inbem, nai^bem, feitbem. 
 
 INTERJECTIONS. 
 
 387. The interjections have a character of their own, sepa- 
 rate from the other parts of speech, in that they do not enter 
 as elements into the structure of sentences or periods, but are 
 independent outbursts of feeling, or intimations of will, the ut- 
 tered ec^uivalents of a tone, a grimace, or a gesture, 
 
204 INBECLINABLES. [388- 
 
 388. Nevertheless, they are not purely natural exclamations, 
 but utterances akin with such, which are now assigned by usage 
 to the expression of certain states of mind or will. 
 
 389. The interjections most commonly used are — 
 
 1. Of those expressing feeUng — o or ol&, used in a great 
 variety of meanings ; ad), tr)el), expressing painful or disagreeable 
 surprise or grief; p^m, fi, bal), expressmg disgust or contempt; 
 ei, joyful surprise ; ija, a^, wonder, pleasure, and the like ; l^eifa, 
 iud^^e, exultation ; ^em, ^)m, doubt, hesitation ; :^u, horror, shud- 
 dering. 
 
 2. Of those intimating will or desire — ))t, Ifieba, fjoUa, to call 
 attention ; |)ft, the same, or to command silence ; ljii]d), to indi- 
 cate quick movement ; topp, to signify the closing of a bargain. 
 
 3. Here may be best classed, also, the various imitations of the 
 cries of animals and other natural sounds, directions and c^ll- 
 words for animals, and the more or less artificially composed 
 and unintelligent words which are used as burdens of songs and 
 the like : as, ftopfafa, t)it)aGera, tumtebum. 
 
 390. As, on the one hand, the interjections are employed 
 with a degree of conventionality, like the other constituents of 
 language, so, on the other hand, many words that are proper 
 parts of speech are very commonly used in an exclamatory 
 way, quite as if they were interjections. Such are :^ei( hail! gott= 
 loh praise God! beit)al)r Godforhia! fort, tt)eg away! fie^ beJwld! 
 brat) well done! etc.; and the whole series of oaths and ad- 
 jurations. 
 
 a. The ordinary equivalent of our alas, leiber, is an abbrevia- 
 tion of the phrase n)a§ tnir nod) leiber ift what is yet more pain- 
 ful to me (or something equivalent to this), and is capable of 
 being introduced, parenthetically, at almost any point in the 
 phrase — even, when put first, sometimes causing inversion, like 
 an adverb. 
 
 391. The exclamatory or inter jectional mode of expression 
 prevails to no small extent in the practical use of language, 
 when emotion or eagerness causes that usual set framework of 
 the sentence, the verb and its subject, to be thrown aside, and 
 only the emphatic elements to be presented at all. 
 
 Thus, eud) gur ©rbin erfldren! ber t)errdt^ertfc^e [t)errdterif(^e] 
 gfatlftridt declare you my heiress! the treacherous snare! pie^M 
 
393] INTERJECTIONS. 205 
 
 auf! 5tnou§ m§ toeite Sanb! flee! up! out into the wide country! 
 id) derfteV bii^; tDciter! I understand ijou : further! 
 
 The grammatical forms most frequently thus used are the 
 nominative of address (or "vocative : " 214), and the imperative. 
 
 392. Some of the interjections are also brought into a kind 
 of connection with the structure of the sentence, being followed 
 by cases, or phrases, such as would suit a more complete ex- 
 pression of the feehng they intimate. 
 
 Thus, 0, a^, pfui may stand before a genitive expressing the 
 occasion of the exclamation : as in o be§ Sftoren ! pfui ber 6c^anbe ! 
 oh the fool ! fie on the shame ! — some may take a prepositional 
 phrase or a substantive clause after them : as, ad^ ba^ bu ba 
 liegft alas that thou liest there ! pfut iiber ben S^ifl^n fie on the 
 coward! — and nouns used inter jectionally often admit a dative 
 object, signifying that toward which the feeling is directed; 
 thus, §eil, grueling, beinem ©(^ein hail to thy brilliancy, O 
 Spring! mel& mir, '^a^ id) bir Jjertraut woe tome, that I have trusted 
 thee! 
 
 [Exercise 34. Conjunctions and Interjections.] 
 
 WORD-FORMATION, DERIVATION. 
 
 Introductory Explanations, 
 
 393. The etymological part of grammar, as thus far treated, 
 deals with the character and uses of the parts of speech, and of 
 their grammatical or inflectional forms, which are made from 
 simple roots or from stems, chiefly by inflectional endings, but 
 in part also by internal change. 
 
 a. Such grammatical forms (along with the indeclinable 
 particles, which are ultimately of the same character with them) 
 constitute the most essential part of the grammatical apparatus 
 of a language, its instrumentality for the expression of relations 
 of ideas, the means by which its names of beings, qualities, acts, 
 etc., are placed in connection with one another, in order to ex- 
 press the thoughts of the speaker. 
 
 h. Boot is the name given to an ultimate significant element, 
 itself containing nothing that is recognizably formative. From 
 roots, by the ordinary means of derivation, are made stems (or 
 themes, or bases), from which come inflectional forms, and also 
 other stems. 
 
206 DEETVATION. [394- 
 
 394. Another and only less important part of the same 
 grammatical apparatus is the array of means by which stems 
 of declension and conjugation are formed from roots and from 
 each other. These means are of the same character with those 
 already described, consisting chiefly of suffixes, along with a 
 few prefixes, and supplemented by methods of internal change. 
 
 395. There is no fundamental diversity between the two in- 
 strumentalities. The suffixes and prefixes of inflection and of 
 derivation are equally, by origin, independent words, which 
 were first uttered in connection with other words, then 
 combined with the latter, and finally made to lose their 
 independence and converted into subordinate elements, des- 
 ignating the relations of other more substantial and significant 
 elements. 
 
 a. The working-out of grammatical apparatus, by the reduc- 
 tion of words once independent to the condition of endings of in- 
 flection or derivation, has been a part of the history of inflective 
 languages, from their beginning down to modern times. Of 
 many of the affixes formed in this way, as well as of some that 
 are much more ancient, the origin can still be distinctly traced ; 
 but their history is to a great extent obscured by the effects of 
 linguistic change and corruption. Compare what is said above 
 of the derivation of the ending tc, forming the preterits of the 
 New conjugation (246.3), and of the suffixes lic^, irdrt^, etc. (363-4). 
 
 h. The difference between the two classes of endings lies in 
 their mode of application, and in the frequency and regularity 
 of their use. Certain suffixes of derivation are so regularly ap- 
 plied to whole classes of themes, and produce derivatives so 
 analogous with forms of inflection, that they are conveniently 
 and properly treated along with the subject of inflection. Such 
 are the endings er and eft of comparatives and superlatives 
 (133 etc.), and those which form the infinitive and participles of 
 verbs. 
 
 396. Among modem languages commonly studied, the 
 German is the one which most fully and clearly illustrates the 
 processes of word-formation ; and the subject ought; therefore 
 to receive the attention of every advanced German scholar. 
 
 397. But no known language (not even such exceptional 
 ones as the Sanskrit) has preserved so much of its primitive 
 structure that we can carry back the analysis of its vocabulary 
 to the actual beginning. By the help, especially, of a careful 
 
400] PEINCIPLES. 207 
 
 and searching comparison of related languages, the processes of 
 word-combination can be traced up until we discover of what 
 sort are the ultimate elements of speech, although we are by 
 no means certain of being able to point them out in their very- 
 form and substance. 
 
 Principles, 
 
 398. The words of German, as of other related languages, 
 are traceably derived, in good part, from roots. 
 
 399. The means of derivation, through the whole history 
 of development, have been chiefly suffixes or derivational 
 endings — with some aid from prefixes. 
 
 a. The almost exclusive use of suffixes rather than prefixes, 
 as means both of inflection and of derivation, is a characteristic 
 feature of the family of languages to which the German (with 
 our own) belongs. The few prefixes employed have retained 
 much more distinctly the character of independent words, form- 
 ing proper compounds with those to which they are attached ; 
 that character has been lost only by the inseparable prefixes 
 (307) and one or two others (see below, 411.11). The negative 
 un is the only German prefix of really ancient character and 
 obscure derivation. 
 
 400. Besides this, there have come to be in German two 
 other specific auxiliary methods of internal change, affecting 
 the vowel of the root or primitive word. These are — 
 
 1. The modification of vowel (14), or change of o, o, u, an into 
 a, 0, ii, au, respectively: thus, 9Jlann, 9JJanner man, men; %n^, 
 Sii&e foot, feet; 9)^au§, Tlm)^ mouse, mice; alt, alter, dlteft old, 
 elder, eldest; ^orn, l^ornlein corn, kernel; {)anoe,l)dnQt I hang, he 
 hangs; floQ, ftoQe I flew, I might fly; xotl) [rot], rotften [roten] red, 
 redden. This modification is by the Germans called Umlaut 
 change of sound. 
 
 a. This is a euphonic change, coming from the assimilation of 
 a hard or guttural vowel to a soft or palatal one (e, i) closely 
 following it — although finally applied by analogy, in many single 
 cases, where no such cause had been present. It is of compar- 
 atively recent introduction, although, as the examples show, 
 shared in part by the English. It is quite unknown in one 
 branch of Germanic speech, the Moeso-Gothic ; and, on the 
 other hand, most highly developed in the Scandinavian tongues. 
 
208 DEEIVATION. [400- 
 
 b. In the present condition of the language, the cause of the 
 modification is generally no longer to be seen, the assimilating 
 vowel having been lost. 
 
 c. Some derivative words having vowels which are really the 
 effect of modification are now, usually or always, written with 
 the simple vowels e (for d or o) or t (for u). Again, some words 
 show a modified vowel as the mere result of an irregular varia- 
 tion of utterance, without etymological reason. 
 
 2. The variation or gradation of radical vowel : as in fingen, 
 fang,gefungen sing, sang, sung; merbe, n)irb,tt)arb, n)urben,gett)orbett, 
 from merben become; Breeze, Bri(!)t, Brad), geBrod)en, 33rud), from 
 Bred^en break. This variation is by the Germans called Ablaut 
 divergence of sound. 
 
 a. This second mode of vowel change is also, like the other, 
 originally of euphonic character, one of the accidents attending 
 the phonetic development of language, under the combined in- 
 fluences of quantity, accent, combination, addition of suffixes, 
 and the like. But it is much more ancient, being one of the 
 characteristic peculiarities of all the Germanic languages ; and 
 its specific causes and mode of evolution are in part obscure. 
 
 b. The sphere of action of the gradation of radical vowel is in 
 the inflection of the older verbs of the language, and the forma- 
 tion of their earliest derivatives. 
 
 401. The modes of consonantal change which accompany 
 the processes of word-formation are too various and irregular 
 to be systematically set forth here. Some of them will be 
 noticed belowj in connection with the derivatives whose forma- 
 tion especially calls them out. 
 
 402. To carry back the historical analysis of German words 
 to the farthest point attained by the aid of the languages kin- 
 dred with the German, would take the pupil into regions where 
 he is a stranger, and would be unprofitable. Such study requires 
 a knowledge of the older dialects, and belongs to a higher stage 
 of progress. Only the processes of derivation whose results 
 are traceable in the existing language will be set forth ; and 
 those words will be treated as "primitive" which have no 
 German etymons, or more original words whence they are 
 derived, even though evidence from other languages may not 
 only show them to be derivatives, but also exhibit the earlier 
 forms from which they came. 
 
404] DERIVATIVE VERBS. 209 
 
 DERIVATION OP VERBS. 
 
 403. Primitive Verbs. Verbs to be regarded as primitive 
 are— 
 
 1. The verbs of the Old or strong conjugation, nearly two 
 Aundred in number (264-7), which constitute the most important 
 body of primitive roots in the language. 
 
 a. Several verbs of this conjugation, however, are demon- 
 strably derivative : thus, {rf)reiben (111.2) write, from Latin scribo; 
 |)reifen (ni.2) praise, from ^rei§ value (which comes from Lat. 
 pretium), etc. Others are doubtless of the same character; 
 since, down to that period in the history of the language at 
 which the mode of inflection of the New conjugation was in- 
 troduced, all verbs, whether recent or older, were inflected ac- 
 cording to the Old conjugation. 
 
 2. Many verbs of the New or weak conjugation: as, "^aBctt 
 Jiave, fagen say, reben talk, Ueben love, leben live. 
 
 a. A number of the verbs of the New conjugation formerly 
 be?^nged to the Old, having changed their mode of inflection 
 under the influence of the tendency to extend a prevailing 
 analogy and reduce more irregular to more regular forms. 
 Others, if originally derivative, have lost the evidence of it. To 
 the root of some there is a corresponding noun, and it may ad- 
 mit of question which is the more original, verb or noun. 
 
 b. All verbs whose root, or conjugation-stem, is of nore than 
 one syllable are to be classed as derivative : even though, as in 
 the case of f^meic^eln flatter, flettern climb, the original from 
 which they come is no longer to be traced. 
 
 404. Verbs derived from Verbs. 
 
 I. By internal change of the root itself : 
 
 1. By change (generally, modification or Umlaut) of the root 
 vowel, a class of causative verbs are formed, taking as their 
 direct object what was the subject of the simple verb: thus, 
 ^aUzn fall, YdUtn cause to fall, fell ; ixinUn drink, trdnfen cause to 
 drink, drench; fi^en sit, je^en set; Ueoen lie, legen lay; faugen suck, 
 jdugen suckle; faftren go, fii^ren lead. 
 
 a. As some of the examples show, this class of derivatives 
 has its representatives in English also, but they are much more 
 numerous in German. 
 
210 BEBIVATION. [404- 
 
 5. By change of the final consonant, with or without accompa- 
 nying change of vowel, a few verbs are made, with various 
 modification of the meaning of the simple verb : thus, T^angcn 
 hang, "^enfen execute hy hanging; Biegen hend, biiden how; netgen 
 incline, nirfen nod; tt)a(^en wake, watch, metfen awaken, arouse; 
 efjen eat, d^en corrode, etch. 
 
 n. By additions to the root : 
 
 1. The suffix el forms a few diminutives, as Ia(^en laugh, Id(^eln 
 smile; lieben hve, Uebeln dally, flirt; franfen he sick, frdnfeln he 
 sickly or ailing. 
 
 a. But most of the diminutive verbs in eln are derived from 
 nouns and adjectives : see below, 405.11.1. 
 
 2. The suffix er forms a few iterative, desiderative, or caus- 
 ative verbs, as Happen flap, flappern rattle; lad^en lau^h, Idcfjern 
 make inclined to laugh; f olgen /oWoiw, folgern infer, conclude. 
 
 a. But most verbs in ern, as in eln, come from nouns and ad- 
 jectives ; and those which appear to come from verbs are rather 
 to be regarded as formed in imitation of such, or after their 
 analogy. 
 
 3. The addition of ^ gives in a few cases intensive force : as 
 in^bren hear, ]^or(^en hearken; fd^narren rattle, fc^nari^en snore, 
 snort. 
 
 4. 3r or ter. This is properly a French ending, representing 
 the er or ir of the infinitive of French verbs ; and it forms 
 German verbs from French or Latin roots : thus, ftubiren [flu= 
 bieren] study, max]^mn [marfd^ieren] march, fpagieren expatiate, 
 go abroad for pleasure or exercise, regteren rule. 
 
 a. But a few verbs in iren [ieren] are formed, in imitation of 
 these, from German nouns : as buc^ftabiren [bn(^ftaBteren] spell, 
 (from 33ud)ftaBe letter), fc^attiren [f(f)attteren] shade (from ©(flatten 
 shadow). 
 
 b. At a certain period, about the middle of the last century, 
 the German language was well-nigh swamped by the introduc- 
 tion of a multitude of such foreign verbs in iren. The greater 
 part of them have been cast out from dignified and literary use, 
 but they are still rife in low colloquial and humorous styles. 
 
 c. The syllable ir or ter of these verbs receives the accent ; 
 and they therefore admit no prefix ge in the participle: see 
 243.3a. 
 
405] DERIVATIYE VEEBS. 211 
 
 in. By prefixes to the root : 
 
 1. By the inseparable prefixes Be, ent or em^, cr, QC, t)cr, and gcr. 
 For the derivative (or compound) verbs formed by means of 
 
 these prefixes, see above, 302 etc. 
 
 2. By separable prefixes. 
 
 Verbs formed by means of such prefixes have no real right 
 to be regarded as derivative : they are compounds, rather : see 
 296 etc. 
 
 Bemark. — Derivative verbs in German coming from other 
 verbs directly are quite rare ; and, of those usually regarded as 
 so derived, some admit of explanation as denominatives, or as 
 coming from nouns and adjectives. 
 
 405. Verbs derived from Nouns and Adjectives. 
 
 Verbs from nouns and adjectives are commonly called denam- 
 inatives. They constitute in German, as in the other related 
 languages, the great mass of derivative verbs. The relation of 
 the verbal idea to the meaning of the primitive word is of the 
 most varied character. Verbs from adjectives usually signify 
 either, as intransitives, to be in or to pass into the condition 
 denoted by the adjective, or else, as transitives, to reduce some- 
 thing to that condition. Verbs from nouns signify either to 
 supply with that which the noun denotes, or to deprive of it, or 
 to use or apply it, or to treat with it, or to be like it, and so on : 
 for examples, see below. 
 
 I. By the simple addition of the endings of conjugation : 
 
 1. From nouns, more usually without modification of the 
 vowel of the primitive word : as, fu^en set foot, Jliid footing (f^uB 
 foot); :^aufen Iwuse, dwell {^an^ house); graicn graze ((S5ra§ grass); 
 altern grow old, age (^^Uter age); buttern make or turn to butter 
 (53utter butter); prunfen make a show (^ruiif show); arbeiten work 
 (%xb^\t labor): sometimes with modification of the vowel: as, 
 p^ixQtn plough {''^^nc^ plough) ; bammern hammer {^ammtx hammer); 
 ftiirgen fall or hurl headlong ((^turg fall). 
 
 a. Karely, a verb is formed from a noun in the plural : as, 
 bldttern turn over the leaves of, etc. (53Idtter leaves, from 53Iatt). 
 
 b. Nouns (and adjectives) ending in the unaccented syllable 
 en reject the e of that syllable in the derivative verb : thus, 
 reanen rain (^legen rain), fiffncn open (offen open). 
 
 2. From adjectives, usually with modification of the vowel : 
 thus, rotten [roten] redden (rot§ [rotj red), [tdcfen strengthen 
 
212 DERIVATION. [405- 
 
 (ftar! strong), tbbten [toten] Mil (tobt [tot] dead), Qeniiaen suffice 
 (Qcnug enough), cinbern alter (anber other), du^ern utter (au^er 
 out) ; rarely, without modification : as, na^en draw nigh (naft 
 nigf/i), alien grow old (alt oZ(Z). 
 
 a. A number of derivative verbs are formed from adjectives 
 in the comparative degree: thus, nd()ern conie nearer (ndl^er 
 nearer, from xiQi% mtnbern diminish (minber less). 
 
 n. By derivative endings, forming stems of conjugation : 
 
 1. The ending el forms from both nouns and adjectives (with 
 modification of their vowel) verbs whicli have a diminutive, dis- 
 paraging, or reproachful meaning: thus, fiinfteln treat in an 
 artificial or affected manner (^unft art); altertl^iimeln [altertiimeln] 
 he foolishly or affectedly fond of antiquity (^Itertl^um [^Itertum] 
 antiquity); fliigeln subtilize, he over-critical (flug knowing); from» 
 meln affect piety, cant (\xomm pious). 
 
 a. Compare derivatives formed from verbs by the same 
 ending, 404.II.1. 
 
 2. The endings jc^, g, and eng form a few verbs : f d) forms only 
 l^errfe^en rule (.£)err master) and f eilf d)en chaffer (fell cheap) ; g forms 
 bugen to thee and thou (bu thou), and one or two others ; eng forms 
 faulengen play the sluggard (f aul lazy), etc. 
 
 3. The ending ig is properly one forming adjectives (below, 
 415.9) ; but it is sometimes attached both to adjectives and to 
 nouns in order to the formation of a special theme of conjuga- 
 tion, by analogy with the numerous verbs derived from adjec- 
 tives ending in ig : thus, reinigen purify [xnn pure); enbigen end, 
 terminate (@nbe end). 
 
 4 The ending ir or ier forms a few verbs from German nouns : 
 see 404.II.4a. 
 
 m. By prefixes (either with or without derivative endings) : 
 1. The inseparable prefixes (except ge) form a very large 
 number of denominative verbs, generally without any ac- 
 companying derivative ending, but occasionally along with 
 such. In these denominatives, the prefixes have a force anal- 
 ogous to that which belongs to them in composition (see 307) : 
 thus — 
 
 a. 33e forms transitives, denoting especially a furnishing, 
 making, or treating: thus, befeelen endow with a soul ((geele 
 soul); begetftern inspirit (©eifter spirits, from ^eift)j befreien /ree. 
 
406] DERIVATIVE VERBS. 213 
 
 liberate {]xd free); hm\6)ttn enrich {xd^tx richer, f rom reicE)) ; Be* 
 f d^onigen beautify (fd^on beautiful) ; Benac^ric^ttflen inform [ila^^ 
 xi^t news). 
 
 b. @nt forms especially verbs signifying removal, deprivation, 
 and the like: thus, tni^txmn withdraw (fern far); entblo^en strip 
 (Uo^bare); zni1)anpkn behead {i0an)i)i head); entfrdften enervate 
 (^raft power); ent^^eUtgen desecrate fteiliQ holy); enttDaffnen dis- 
 arm (2Baffen weapon). 
 
 c. (^x forms transitives, intransitives, and reflexives, chiefly 
 from adjectives, and signifying a passing into, or a reduction 
 to, the state signified by the adjective : thus, er{)arten grow hard, 
 er!)drten make hard (^art hard); ermatten tire (matt weary); er= 
 gdn^en complete (ganj entire); erniebrigen humble (niebrtg low); 
 eriofen release (lo^ loose); ertoeitern extend (roeiter wider, from 
 iDeit); erfldren explain (flat clear); — but sometimes with more 
 irregular meaning, from adjectives or nouns : thus, eroBern 
 conquer (ober superior) ; erinnem remind (inner interior); erQrun=» 
 ben fathom, explore ((S^runb bottom). 
 
 d. 3Ser has nearly the same value and office as er, but is more 
 prevailingly transitive in effect: thus, t)erdnbern alter (anber 
 other); Dereiteln frustrate (eitcl vain); t)ergnuGen gratify (gcnug 
 enough); uxlamtxw lengthen (Idnger longer, from lang); t)erglafen 
 vitrify, glaze ((Sla§ glass); t)erfilbern plate with silver (©ilber 
 silver) ; tjeratten become antiquated (alt old). 
 
 e. 3er forms a very few derivatives: as, jerffeifd^en lacerate 
 (Sleif^ flesh) ; gergliebern dismember ((S^Iteber limbs, from ®Ueb). 
 
 2. A small number of denominatives are formed with the 
 separable prefixes : such are abbad^en unroof {^a^ roof); au§- 
 fernen remove the stone or kernel of (£ern kernel); ein!er!ern 
 imprison (,^erfer prison); umarmen embrace (%xm arm); an]- 
 muntern cheer up (munter cheerful); auSmeiten widen {mxtwide). 
 
 406. Verbs derived from Particles. 
 
 A few verbs are derived from other parts of speech by the 
 same means as from nouns and adjectives. 
 
 Such are emporen excite, arouse {tmpox ahft) ; begegnen meei 
 (gegen afifains^); ern)iebern an8ii;er (mkhn again) ; t)erntd)ten, jer- 
 nid)ten annihilate (nic^t not); t)erneinen deny (nein no); bejaften 
 affirm Qa yes); dd)sen groan (ad) ah!); jaiK^jen exult (Jud^, iud)T^c 
 hurrah!). 
 
214 DERIVATION. [407- 
 
 DERIVATION OF NOUNS. 
 
 407. Primitive Nouns. 
 
 1. Primitive nouns are in part monosyllabic words which 
 contain no evident sign of their really derivative nature, and of 
 which the original roots are no longer traceable in German. 
 
 Such are gjJann man, ^au§ house, ^aum tree, ^inb child, 35ol! 
 people, ^vi!^foot. 
 
 2. In part they are words of more than one syllable, the 
 evident products of composition or derivation, containing 
 elements more or less closely analogous with those by which 
 other recognizable derivatives are formed, but coming from 
 roots of which they are the only remaining representatives. 
 
 Such are DfJame name, ^naBe hoy, ^lufle eye, ®rbe earth, SSater 
 father, ^oii^ter daughter, Staffer water, ^ogel bird, ^Jabel needle, 
 (Segel sail 
 
 a. Some of the words in both these classes are traceable by 
 comparison of the kindred languages to earlier roots from 
 which they are descended: thus, 5!J?ann is usually (though 
 doubtfully) referred to a root man think (the same with meinen 
 think, mean); ^inb comes from the root gan generate; gu^ is 
 identical with Latin pes, Greek pous, coming from pad walk; 
 5^ame goes back to gna Ajtiou? ; ^o(!)ter to duh draw the breast, 
 milk, and so on. 
 
 408. Nouns derived from Verbs. 
 
 I. By variation or gradation of vowel (^Blaut : see 400.2) alone, 
 without added ending. 
 
 Thus, 33anb volume, 33unb bond, from Binben bind; ©i^ seat, 
 ©a^ sediment, @a^ settler, from fi^en sit; 3u(i draft, from jie'^en 
 draw; %x\ii step, from treten tread; ©|)rud} speech, from jprec^cn 
 speak; ©prung spring, from fpnnoen spring. 
 
 a. All these words originally had endings of derivation, which 
 have become lost by phonetic corruption. They are prevailingly 
 masculine. 
 
 b. In words thus derived appear sometimes irregular altera- 
 tions of the root, especially of its final consonant, as the 
 examples in part show. 
 
 c. The relation cf meaning of such derivatives to the idea of 
 action, state, or quality expressed by the verbal root is very 
 various ; but they signify in general either the act or quaUty 
 
408] DERIVATIV.E NOUNS. 215 
 
 itself, or the result of the action, or the person or thing that 
 acts, or to which the state or quality belongs. 
 
 II. By brief and obscure endings, relics of earlier fuller forms, 
 and no longer producing distinct classes of derivatives with 
 definable modifications of the radical meaning. Such endings 
 are — 
 
 1. %t, be, t (ft, ft), b: thus, 35urbe burden, from Bciren hear; 
 8(^arte notch, from jc^cren shear; ^d^xt passage, from fal^ren go; 
 <Sd)rift document, from fd}reiben write; ^rac^t dress, from tragen 
 ivear; 33runft heat, from Brennen burn; ^unft art, from fennen 
 know; ^unft coming, from fommen come; 33ranb combustion, from 
 brennen burn. 
 
 2. ^, which forms a very large number of derivatives : thus, 
 ^inbe tie, from binben bind; Sprac^e language, from f^re(i)en 
 speak; (SJabe gift, from geben give; gllefle^!/, from ftiegenj^i/. 
 
 a. The derivatives of this class also share in the gradation of 
 radical vowel, and the irregular alterations of the final con- 
 sonant of the root, which characterize the older words of the 
 language. They are of as various meaning as those of the 
 preceding class. Their gender is prevailingly feminine — ex- 
 ceptions being appellations of males (persons and animals), and 
 a few that are of anomalous character. 
 
 III. By endings of more distinct form, and more uniform and 
 definable meaning. 
 
 The most important of these we will take up in alphabetical 
 order, for the sake of more convenient reference. 
 
 1. (^i. This suffix is of foreign origin, being derived from the 
 Latin and French ia, ie. It was used originally only to form 
 derivatives from nouns (see below, 410.2), but has come also to 
 form from verbs ending in eln and em abstract nouns of action, 
 often with a disparaging or contemptuous implication: thus, 
 ©c^meic^elei flattery, from fd)metc^eln flatter; 2:dnbelet trifling, 
 from tdnbeln trifle; ^lauberei chit-chat, from plantittnl chatter ; 
 3auberei witchcraft, from ^anbtxn practise magic. 
 
 a. Words formed with ei are feminine, and take the accent 
 vipon this syllable, as is required by the derivation of the suffix. 
 
 2. ©I. This suffix forms a considerable class of masculine 
 derivatives, denoting generally an instrument, quite rarely an 
 actor: thus, §ebel lever, from i)c1)tn raise ; '^tdd cover, from 
 beden cover; 8(^ldoel mallet, from f(f)Iagen beat; 6(^IiiffeI key, 
 from f(f)lte§en lock; gliigel wing, from ^mtnfly.'' 
 
216 DEEIVATION. [408- 
 
 a. But a great many nouns in the language ending in el are 
 from lost or unknown roots, and therefore have the value of 
 primitive words (407.2) ; some of these are feminine or neuter : 
 as are also some others, whose gender is determined by their 
 signification. 
 
 3. ®n. Besides forming the infinitives of all verbs (237.1a), 
 which, when used as ordinary nouns, are neuter (340), en is the 
 suffix of derivation of a considerable class of masculine nouns, 
 as 35iffen bit, from bei^en Ute; (^xdbm ditch, from Qxdbtn dig ; . 
 ©d)aben harm, from f(!)aben injure. 
 
 a. Of the numerous words of obscure etymology in eti, a few 
 are neuter, but none are feminine. 
 
 4. ®r. This suffix forms numerous masculine nouns denoting 
 an actor; thus, Steiter ri^der, from reiten ride; Tlakx painter, 
 from malen paint; Xanjer dancer, from tanjen dance; 33d(!er 
 baker, from baden bake. With these are closely akin a few 
 names of instruments, as 33o^rer auger, from bol^ren bore; gel* 
 ger pointer, from geigen point. 
 
 a. Of the older words ending in er, and requiring to be 
 reckoned as primitives (407-2), many are feminine or neuter. 
 
 b. J®r also forms classes of derivative nouns from nouns : 
 see 410.3. 
 
 5. Sing forms from verbs chiefly masculine nouns denoting 
 the recipient of the verbal action : thus, i^mhlim^ foundling, from 
 ^nhm find; 2t^xlinQ pupil, from Itl^xm teach ; (BmQiinQ suckling, 
 from f dug en suckle. 
 
 a. For the derivatives in ling from nouns and adjectives, see 
 409.II.4, 410.6. 
 
 6. 9^i§ [ni§]. This suffix is chiefly used in German to form 
 abstract nouns from verbs ; much less often, like the cor- 
 responding English ness, to produce similar derivatives from 
 adjectives (see 409.11.5). Such abstracts come especially from 
 derivative verbs and those compounded with inseparable 
 prefixes, as be, er, t)er ; sometimes seeming to be formed from 
 the participle rather than the simple verbal root. Like all 
 abstract nouns, they may admit of use also as concretes, or 
 pass wholly over into such. Examples are gcugni^ testimony, 
 from geugen testify; §inberni^ hindrance, from l^inbern hinder; 
 S3egrdbni| burial, frombegraben bury; @retgnt§ occurrence, from 
 ereignen occur; 33erl^dltni^ relation, from t)er6allen stand related; 
 
408] DERIVATIVE NOUNS. 217 
 
 (^t^ianhm^ confession, from gefte^en (geftanben) confess; (SJefattQ* 
 ni6 prison, from gefangen imprisoned. 
 
 a. The greater number of nouns in nt^ [nt»] are neuter, but 
 a score or more of them are feminine, especially such as have 
 retained more fully their abstract meaning. A few, as @rf|)arni^, 
 (Jrfenntrti^, are feminine when used abstractly, but neuter as 
 concretes. 
 
 7. (Sal, fel. These are two different forms of the same 
 original sufBx, which at first and more properly formed nouns 
 from nouns, but whose existing derivatives are to be referred 
 almost exclusively to verbal roots, and are akin in meaning 
 with those in rii|. ©el is only used in concretes. Thus, (B^id- 
 fal fate, from f^ttfen send; ^xx']ai error, from trren wander; 
 Ueberbleibfel remnant, from iiBerbleiben remain over; iRcit^fel 
 [Sldtfel] riddle, from ratten [raten] guess. 
 
 a. Derivatives in |al and jel are neuter, excepting two or three 
 in fal (^rangfal, 9J^uI)fal, iriibfal), which may also be used as 
 feminine ; and bet ©topfel stopper. 
 
 8. Ung. This suffix is nearly equivalent in meaning and ap- 
 plication with our ing forming verbal nouns (infinitives in ing), 
 but is peculiar in that it is hardly used except with derivative 
 and transitive verbs. The nouns it forms admit an object (ob- 
 jective genitive : 216.27i) nearly as regularly as the verbs from 
 which they come. Many of the nouns in ung, hke other 
 abstracts, pass over into concrete use ; and such as come from 
 reflexive verbs have an intransitive force. Examples are giil^rung 
 leading, conduct, 33elel)rung instruction, (Srfinbung invention, 35er= 
 gebung forgiveness, 3Bcmer!ung remark, 33ebeutung meaning, ^e= 
 megung mx)tion, ^eigimg affection— from fii^ren lead, bele^ren 
 instruct, and so on. 
 
 a. The derivatives in ung are feminine without exception. 
 
 9. Besides the suffixes above detailed, there are a few of in- 
 frequent use : such are anb (properly the old participal ending), 
 in §eilanb Savior, from !)eilen heal; — id)t, in ^el)rtd}t sweepings, 
 from !e!)ren sweep, etc. ;— at^^ [at], in Sierat^ [3istat] ornament, 
 from gieren decorate; — enb, in ^ugenb virtue, from taugeu be of 
 value ; — and one or two others, of too little consequence to -be 
 worth noting, ©cftaft (410.7) and t{)um [turn] (410.8) also form 
 from verbal roots two or three derivatives, as 2Bauber](^aft, 
 25^adi3tl)um [2Ba^glum], 
 
218 DERIVATION. [409- 
 
 409. Nouns derived from Adjectives. 
 
 1. 1. That the adjective, of either number and of any gender, 
 is' capable of use directly as a noun, still retaining its adjective 
 declension, was pointed out above (at 129), and needs no further 
 notice. 
 
 2. A few nouns are derived from adjectives without a suffix, 
 being identical with the adjective theme, but being declined as 
 independent (neuter) substantives: such are SfJotl) [3tDt] red, 
 ©riin green, 9ie(i)t right, (S)ut property, goods, 
 
 n. Nouns derived by the aid of suffixes. 
 
 1. ^. The suffix e forms feminine abstracts (convertible into 
 concretes) from primitive adjectives, the vowel of which is 
 always modified if capable of it. Thus, ®ro§e greatness, ^iitc 
 goodness, Streue truth, ^ief e depth ; from gro^ great, etc. 
 
 2. §cit. This suffix is ^he same with our head and hood (in 
 Godhead, manhood, etc.), and forms feminine abstracts both 
 from nouns (see below, 410.5) and from adjectives. Thus, grei* 
 ):\t[i freedom, ^Blinb'^eit blindness, ^ibtxntjdi stupidity ; from frei 
 free etc. 
 
 3. ^eit is originally the same suffix with l^eit, taking the place 
 of the latter after most primitive adjectives ending in el and er, 
 and after all those formed by the suffixes Imr, ig, 1x6) and jam. 
 Thus, (Jitelfcit vanity, 33itter!eit Utterness, ^an!6ar!eit gratitude, 
 ^xUiqUM cheapness, §ofIi(i)!eit courtesy, ©^arfamfcit economy; 
 from eitcl vain, etc. To many adjectives, the additional ad- 
 jective suffix tg (415.9) is added, with fcit after it, instead of, or 
 along with, fcit alone: thus, from ficin small we have both 
 0einl^eit and ^leintgfett; from juJ3 sweet, ©ii^igfeit; from ftanb= 
 );)a\i steadfast, 6tanbl^afttgfeit; from ixt\x[Q^ faithless, 2:reuIo{ig!eit. 
 
 4. Sing forms a few masculine personal nouns from adjectives : 
 thus, grcmbling stranger, Siingling youth; from fremb strange, 
 iung young. For derivatives with ling from verbs and nouns, 
 see 408.111.5, 410.6. 
 
 5. 5^t^ [ni§] (see 408.III.6) forms only four nouns from ad- 
 jectives ; namely, ginfltintB darkness, (Bc^eintnijj secrecy, SBilb* 
 nt^ wilderness, (SleicC)nife likeness. 
 
 6. ©^aft is chiefly employed in forming nouns from noims 
 (see 410.7); only a few adjectives admit it, as ^emetnf(f)aft 
 community, (5Jcf angenjcf)af t imprisonment, ©igenfd^aft pecuKarif?/; 
 from gemetn common, etc. For the derivation etc, of fc^aft see 
 below, 410.7. 
 
410] DERIVATIVE NOUNS. 219 
 
 7. %t[^ from %f)t\l [%t\X] part, forms fractional numerals from 
 ordinals ; see 207.2. 
 
 8. ^l^um [turn]., like fd)aft, is a suffix applied chiefly to nouns; 
 see below 410.8. A few adjectives take it, as 9teid)t'5um wealth, 
 (^XQtni^nm property ; from reic^ rich, eigen oivn. 
 
 9. Yet rarer suffixes are uncj (compare 408.III.8, 410.9) in 
 x^t\tnr\Q fortress, from feft strong; — ic^t, in ®idi(^t thicket, from 
 bid thick; — ut^ [ut] in ^(rmut^ poverty, from arm poor; — enb in 
 Sugetib youth, from jung young. 
 
 410. Nouns derived from Nouns. 
 
 1. (J^en, lein. These are equivalent suffixes, forming from 
 nouns (always with modification of the vowel of the latter, if it 
 be one admitting modification) neuter diminutives : thus, ^m§^ 
 rfien little Iwuse, Wdnn^tn little man, mannikin, ^nciblein little hoy, 
 58u(^Iein little hook. 
 
 a. These suffixes correspond to the English diminutive end- 
 ings kin and ling (in gosling, duckling, etc.). (S^l)en belongs more 
 to the northern dialects of German, lein (often shortened in 
 popular use to el or le) to the southern ; but in the literary lang- 
 uage their respective use is mainly determined by considera- 
 tions of euphony, and many words admit the addition of either. 
 
 h. The words formed by these suffixes often add to their 
 meaning as diminutives, or substitute for it, an implication of 
 intimacy or tenderness. Some of them have a well-established 
 value as independent words : such are grdulein young lady, Miss, 
 Wdh^tn girl, Wdnn^tn and 2BeiB(^en 'male and female of an 
 animal species. 
 
 2. @t. The foreign origin of the suffix et was explained above 
 (408.III.1). As added to nouns, it indicates especially the state, 
 condition, or occupation of a person ; also sometimes the place 
 where an occupation is carried on : thus, 3dgerei sportsmanship, 
 from 3dger hunter; ^xndtxdprinting-estahUsliment, from Cruder 
 printer. In a few words it has a collective force : thus, 3leiterei 
 cavalry, from 9teiter rider. 
 
 a. As it is itself accented, this suffix was added most easily to 
 unaccented terminational syllables, as el and er ; and there are 
 but few words — as ^btet ahhacy, 35ocitei hailiwick — in which it is 
 appended to radical syllables. Being oftenest used after er, it 
 has come to assume er in many c'&s s as a prefix to itself, form- 
 ing a kind of compound suffix erci, which is freely used with 
 
220 DERIVATION. [410- 
 
 words accented on the final: thus, ©fladerei slavery^ ^inberci 
 childishness, S^elmerei roguery; from ©flat) slave, etc. 
 
 6. Especially in its recent derivatives, ei is apt to convey a 
 disparaging impUcation : for example, 3urt[teret lawyer's doings, 
 as compared with 3uri§))rubeng jurisprudence. 
 
 3. @r. a. Besides the numerous derivatives which it forms 
 from verbs (408.111.4), cr makes many names of a personal 
 agent from nouns expressing the thing dealt with or acted upon : 
 as, (BariQn singer, from 6anQ song; ©deafer shepherd, from 6d)af 
 sheep ; Partner gardener, from ©arten garden. 
 
 h. It is also added to names of countries and towns, to indicate 
 a native or inhabitant of the same : thus, ©d^tDeijer Switzer, 
 33erUner inhabitant of Berlin, geipgiger man from Leipzig. 
 
 These nouns are then frequently employed as uninflected ad- 
 jectives: see 415.5. 
 
 c. For the same purpose, it is sometimes combined with Latin 
 endings, forming compound suffixes, as aner and enjer : thus, 
 ^merifaner America?!, ^tl^enien}er Athenian. 
 
 d. After nouns, as after verbs, it is in a few cases irregularly 
 converted into net: thus, ©locEner hell-ringer, from ^lodfe hell; 
 ^arfner harper, from §arfe harp. 
 
 e. It forms a small number of mascuhnes answering to fem- 
 inmes in e : thus, 2Bitttt)er [2Bittt)er] widower, from SBittlDe [SGSittDe] 
 widow; dauber cock-pigeon, from Xaxxhz dove. 
 
 4. 3n (sometimes spelt inn). This sufiBx forms feminine from 
 masculine appellations: thus, ^irtin shepherdess, from §irt 
 shepherd; ^ijniflin queen, from ^onifi king; greunbin fcTiiale 
 friend, ^bc^in female cook, fiotDin lioness, grangbfin French 
 woman, 33erlinertn woman of Berlin. It is also added to titles 
 to signify the wife of the person to whom the title belongs : as, 
 $f arrerin pastor's wife, ^rofeff orin Mrs. Professor. 
 
 3n usually requires modification of the radical vowel, but 
 there are (as the examples show) numerous exceptions. 
 
 5. §cit, like our head and hood, forms abstracts, and a few 
 collectives, from nouns as well as from adjectives (409.11.2): 
 thus, (Siott^eit Godhead, ^mhtitxt childhood, %))ox1cint folly, 9)^enfd^= 
 l^eit humanity, @etftli^!eit clergy. 
 
 6. StnQ forms a few masculine personal names from nouns, as 
 from verbs (408.III.5) and adjectives (409.11.4) : such are ^dl^r* 
 ling yearling, giiid^tling fugitive, ©unftUng favorite. 
 
411] DERIVATIVE NOUNS. 221 
 
 7. a. ^^aft is the same with our ship (in lordship, worship, 
 etc.), and is derived from ]^a^tr\ shape, create; it signifies pri- 
 marily the shape or make of anything, then its character, office, 
 rank, and the like: thus, ^xtnnh\d)a^i friendship, ^efanntfc^aft 
 acquaintance, 55ormimbf(^aft guardianship. All its derivatives 
 are of the feminine gender. 
 
 b. It forms also a number of collectives: as, ^riefterj(^aft 
 priesthood, ®tenerf(^aft body of servants, (SJefeII](i)aft company, 
 Sanbf(^aft landscape. 
 
 8. ^!^um [turn], our dom (in kingdom, wisdom, etc), is also a 
 noun, of obscure derivation, but of meaning and application as 
 a suffix nearly akin with those of fc^aft (above, 7). Its deriv- 
 atives are neuter, with only two or three exceptions (namely 
 3rrtl)um, 9letc[)t^um, and, according to the usage of some, 33e* 
 tDet§tl)um and 2[Bad)§t^um), which are masculine. It forms nouns 
 signifying character, rank, or authority, which then, in a few 
 cases, come to mean that over which authority is exerted : thus, 
 3f?tttertftum chivalry, ^apftt^^um papacy, g^rtflentftum Christendom, 
 ^oniotl^um kingdom, giirftent^um principality. 
 
 9. Suffixes forming a few isolated words are x\^ in ®dnf erid^ 
 gander, from ^an§ goose; ga^nrid) ensign, from gal^ne banner, 
 etc. ; UHQ in one or two collective words like SBalbuttQ woodland, 
 from 2SaIb forest; atft [at] in §eimat^ Iwme, from ^eim home. 
 5^tB [ni§] (408.III.6) appears to form a derivative or two from 
 nouns, as in 33unbnt& covenant, from 33unb tie; also jal (408.111.7), 
 as in 9Jlu^fal distress, from 5Jlii^e toil. 
 
 411. Nouns formed by means of prefixes. 
 
 I. A very large number of nouns contain as their initial 
 elements the verbal prefixes, both separable and inseparable 
 (297). For the most part, however, they are not formed as 
 nouns by means of those prefixes, but are derivatives, accord- 
 ing to the methods explained above (408), from verbs com- 
 pounded separably or inseparably. The only exceptions are, a 
 considerable class formed by Qt (below, II.l), and an occasional 
 anomalous case like ^Inp'^e rising ground, from ^b1)t height. 
 
 n. The proper prefixes forming noims are very few in 
 number, namely as follows : 
 
 1. ®e. T^is common prefix forms a large number of deriv- 
 ative nouns, both from nouns and from verbs, having in general 
 a collective or frequentative character. Thus — 
 
222 DERIVATION. [411- 
 
 a. Collectives from nouns, generally with modification of 
 vowel, sometimes with other more irregular vowel changes : 
 such are ^eftrau(?^ shrubbery, from ©traud) shrub ; ®etr)ol! cloud- 
 mass, from 2BoIfe cloud; (^ebtrg or ®ebir(^e mountain-range, from 
 SBerg mountain; (^z^zhn plumage, from ^ttm feather. 
 
 b. A few collective or associative personal appellatives, from 
 nouns or verbs, in which (je has nearly its original meaning 
 (307-5) of with; thus, ^efpiele playfellow, from ipielen play ; 
 ^efd^rte companion, from \d\)xtn go; ©eliatter godfather, from 
 SSater father; (Sef(f)n)i[ter brothers and sisters, from (5(f)tt)efter 
 sister. 
 
 c. From verbs, nouns signifying either the means or the effect 
 of the verbal action : thus, (S^e^or sense of hearing, from l^oren 
 hear; (^txot1:\t weapon, from tt)el)rcn defend; ^ebet prayer, from 
 bitten ^fc; ^zmalht painting, from ma\zu paint. 
 
 d. From verbs, frequentative or intensive abstracts, or nouns 
 significant of the verbal action : thus, (^ejprdd^ conversation, 
 from fprec^^en speak; ©efpott mockery, from fpotten mock; (^e= 
 iprdnge pageantry, from prangen make a show; (SJetofe din, from 
 tofen roar. 
 
 Eemarks. e. These are the leading uses of the prefix ge ; but 
 in not a few of the derivatives it forms, its effect is too indistinct 
 or various to be brought under any classification. 
 
 f. As the examples show, the words formed with ge exhibit 
 the gradation as well as the modification of vowel, and are 
 either without suffix, or take one of the simpler suffixes (408.11.), 
 especially e. In many words, this e may be either added or 
 omitted. 
 
 g. Excepting the class under b, above, which are masculine, 
 the nouns formed with ge are nearly all neuter. Masculine are 
 only about a dozen (©ebrauc^, ^ebanfe, ©efafleti, ©e'^alt, (^enit^, 
 ®eru(^, (^efang, ©efc^marf, ^eftan!, ©etrinn, ^eminnft [@ett)inft]); 
 feminine, the same number ((SJeberbe, ^ebiibr, ^eburt, (^ebulb, 
 (i^efaftr, ^emetnbe, ^eniige, ^ej(f)t(^te, CS5ef(^tt)ul]t, (S5eftalt, ©emalt, 
 ^etDdbr). 
 
 7i. Afew nouns, as ^IM luck, happiness, ^laube belief, contain 
 the prefix ge abbreviated to a simple g. 
 
 2. Wi^. This prefix is the same with the English mis, and 
 has a similar office. Its value is rather that of a compounded 
 element than of a prefix. It takes always the principal accent, 
 and does not affect the gender of the nouns to which it is 
 
414] DEEIVATIYE NOUNS. 223 
 
 prefixed. Thus, ^Jli^Qriff mistake, 5)Ziffetl^at mwdeed, ^Jli^Qunft 
 disfavor, ^J^tpeT^agen discomfort. 
 
 3. Un is, as iu English, the negative prefix. It is used with 
 nouns more often than in our language, always taking the ac- 
 cent, without affecting the gender ; it either signifies actual 
 negation, or impUes something unnatural, repugnant, or inju- 
 rious. Thus, Unre(^t wrong, Unbanf ingratititde, Ungliid mis- 
 fortune, Unfutn nonsense; Unmenfc^ unnatural monster, Ungeftalt 
 misshapen form, Unt^at misdeed. 
 
 4. Ur. This is, as has been already pointed out (307.4:), the 
 same word originally with the inseparable prefix er, and ulti- 
 mately identical with au§ out. In a few words it still has a mean- 
 ing akin with that of er : thus, Urtfteil [Urteil] judgment (ert^eilen 
 [erteilen] assign), Urlaub leave (txiavihiw permit), Urfunbe document, 
 Urfprung origin, and so on. But in most of the derivatives which 
 it forms it has an intensive force, with the distinct implication 
 of originality or primitiveness : thus, Urfa(f)e cause (original or 
 fundamental thing), UriDelt primitive world, UrBilb archetype, 
 Hrflrojiuater greatgrandfather. 
 
 a. Ur always takes the accent, and it leaves unchanged the 
 gender of the word to which it is prefixed. 
 
 5. ^rg is identical in derivation and meaning with our prefix 
 arch, and denotes what is eminent or superior in its kind. In 
 respect to accent and gender, it is like the three prefixes last 
 treated of. Thus, ©raenQcl arc/t angel, ©rgl^ersoG arch duke, ^rgbieb 
 arch-thief. 
 
 6. %\\\, originally the same with the inseparable prefix ent 
 (307.3), appears in the present language only in 5lnttD0rt answer 
 (from SSort word) and ^ntli^ countenance. 
 
 412. From other parts of speech than those treated above, 
 nouns are only with the greatest rarity formed directly, or 
 otherwise than through the medium of derivative adjectives or 
 verbs. Such words as D^iebenmfl lowland, from nieber (adverb) 
 down, and ^nnung guild, from in in, are anomalies in the 
 German system of word-derivation. 
 
 DEEIVATION OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 413. Primitive Adjectives. 
 
 Primitive adjectives, Uke primitive nouns (407), may be 
 divided into two classes : 
 
224 DEKIVATION. [414- 
 
 1. Simple monosyllabic adjectives, the evidences of whose 
 originally derivative character are effaced : thus, gut goodf lang 
 hng, arm poor, l^art hard, Qxm green. 
 
 2. Adjectives containing an evident element of derivation, and 
 analogous with those derived from known primitives, but com- 
 ing from roots which are now lost : thus, Irage lazy, tjdkx cheer- 
 ful, eben even, bunfel dark. 
 
 a. Some of these, as of the "primitive" nouns (407.2a), admit 
 of being traced to more primitive roots by the researches of 
 comparative philology. 
 
 414. Adjectives derived without Suffix or Prefix. 
 
 Adjectives coming from verbal roots by simple gradation of 
 the radical vowel (Ablaut), without a suffix (hke nouns : see 
 408.1.)> ^^^ very few in German : examples are brac^ fallow, from 
 Bred^en breakup; glatt smooth, from Qkiknslip; hid thick, from 
 the root of gebeil^eti thrive; ^M fledged, from fliegcn fly. 
 
 415. Adjectives derived by Sivffix. 
 
 As the various endings forming adjectives are, almost without 
 exception, used in derivation from different parts of speech, it 
 will be more convenient to treat all the uses of each one to- 
 gether, taking the suffixes up in their alphabetical order. 
 
 1. 33ar. This suffix is regarded as a derivative from the verb 
 bdren bear, carry. It was of infrequent use in ancient German, 
 and only as attached to nouns. 
 
 a. Examples of its use with nouns are btenftbar serviceable 
 (servwe-bringing), \x\x^ihax fruitful (fruit-bearir\^), \\xx^i^ax ter- 
 rible, Qangbar current, fid^tbar visible. 
 
 b. In modern usage, it forms a large class of derivatives from 
 verbs (almost always transitive), having the meaning of our ad- 
 jectives in able, or indi?ating capability to endure the action of 
 the verb : thus, e^ar eatable, gente^bar enjoyable, f^eilbar [tetlbarj 
 divisible, unbett)o^)nbar uninhabitable, unfe^lbar incapable of 
 failing. 
 
 c. Very rarely, it is added to an adjective: thus, offcnBar 
 evident, from offen open. 
 
 2. @n, ern. The suffix en forms (from nouns) adjectives de- 
 noting material or kind: thus, golben golden, tooUtn woolen, trben 
 earthen, eid|en oaken. To words ending in er, only n is added : 
 thus, fupfern of copper, filbern of silver, lebern leathern. Out of 
 
415] DERIVATIVE ADJECTIVES. 225 
 
 the frequency of this combination has grown in recent use the 
 form erit, which was perhaps at first applied only to nouns form- 
 ing a plural in er: thus, plgern wooden, from ,§ol3 (pi. ©biger) 
 wood — but is now used indiscriminately, requiring modification 
 of the vowel of its primitive : thus, Bleiern leaden, tpnern of clay 
 CXfjon), ftd!)Iern of steel (©tat)!). 
 
 3. @n, enb. These endings, forming respectively the past 
 participle of verbs of the Old conjugation, and the present par- 
 ticiple of all verbs, are proper adjective sufiixes, but need only 
 be mentioned here, as their uses form a part of the subject of 
 verbal conjugation, and have been already explained (see 349 
 etc.). 
 
 4. %t, eft. These are the endings by which are formed, from 
 simple adjectives, adjective themes of the comparative and 
 superlative degree (see 133 etc.) : also, ft forms ordinal numerals 
 from cardinals (see 203). 
 
 5. (Jr. The patronymic nouns formed by the suffix er from 
 names of countries or towns (410.36) are very commonly used 
 also with the value of adjectives. When so used, they are not 
 subject to declension, but are treated as if they were com- 
 pounded with the noun which they qualify. Thus, 33erliner 33Iau 
 Berlin blue, \iCi^ ©tra^burfier ^Jliinfter tlie Strasburg catJiedral, ber 
 Seipstger 3}leffe of the Leipsiofair. 
 
 6. (5t forms the past participle of verbs of the New or weak 
 conjugation : see 246, 349 etc. 
 
 7. §aft. This suffix is regarded as derived from ^aben have, 
 or ^aften cling, indicating primarily the possession or adhesion 
 of the quality designated by the words to which it is attached. 
 
 a. It forms derivative adjectives especially from nouns sig- 
 nifying quality: thus,tugenbl)att virtuous, funbl)aft sinful, (c^rerfl^aft 
 frightful, ftanbl)aft steadfast; but also, not infrequently, from 
 names of persons and things : thus, mannl^aft manful, meifterl^af t 
 masterly, letb^aft bodily. 
 
 b. It is added to only a few verbal roots : as in tt)of)nl^aft 
 resident, fc^ma^ftaft loquacious. 
 
 c. Only three adjectives admit it: namely, bo^l^aft malicious, 
 franfftaft six^khj, n)at)rf)aft true. 
 
 d. To '^aft is sometimes added the further ending tg, as in 
 Ietb!)aftig, tt)af)rt)aftiG ; and this addition is always made before 
 the suffix !eit, forming abstract nouns (409.11.3) : thus, ^ugenb* 
 "^aftlgtext virtuovsness. 
 
226 DERIVATION. [415- 
 
 8. 3^t forms adjectives only from concrete nouns, especially 
 such as denote material: thus, fteintcf)t stony, bornitf)t thorny^ 
 f aljid^t salty. Its office is hardly distinguishable from that of i(| 
 (below, 9) ; and, in present use, its derivatives are almost super- 
 seded by those in ig, and are but seldom met with. Only t^ort(^t 
 foolish is in familiar use, and is also peculiar in exhibiting the 
 modification of vowel, and in being formed from a personal ap- 
 pellation (%):}0x fool). 
 
 9. 39- This suffix is the same with our y (in stony, holy, easy, 
 etc.), and forms, from every part of speech, a very large number 
 of German adjectives, which are constantly increasing by new 
 derivatives. Thus — 
 
 a. From nouns, of every class : thus, md(i)tio mighty, giinftig 
 favorable, fc^ulbtfl guilty, burftig thirsty, blutig bloody, mdfferig 
 watery, hxdtbpfiQ thickheaded, langarmig longarmed. 
 
 h. From verbs : thus, fdumig dilatory, nac^giebig yielding, ge= 
 fallig obliging. 
 
 c. From adjectives, in a few cases only: thus, giitig kind, Doflig 
 complete; and from the possessive and other pronominal ad- 
 jectives, as meirtig mine, etc. (159.5), jelbig self-same (169.3), jenig 
 yon (168), einig only, some (189). 
 
 d. From indeclinable words, namely prepositions, adverbs, 
 and adverbial conjunctions of various kinds : thus, uorig former, 
 from t)or before; iibrig remaining, from iiber over; jefeig present, 
 from \t^t now; :^eutig of to-day, from ^eute to-day; bortig of that 
 place, from bort there; abermalig repeated, from abermal^ again; 
 be^faHftg relating to the case in hand, from be^faES in that case. 
 
 e. The addition of tg to other adjective endings before the 
 suffix fett has been noticed above (409.II.3) ; also to f)aft in form- 
 ing adjectives (above, Id) ; to adjectives and nouns in forming 
 derivative verbs (405.11. 3) ; and to certain nouns in forming 
 derivative adjectives (below, 15e,/). 
 
 /. 3g added to the suffix jal of certain nouns (408.III.7), along 
 with modification of the vowel (written e instead of d), forms a 
 combination having the aspect of a separate suffix, felig ; thus, 
 tniiftjeUg painful, from ^Jlii^fal distress ; triibf dig afflictive, from 
 Sriibfal affliction. And the combination is in fact treated as an 
 independent suffix, by being added to words which do not form 
 derivatives in ] al : thus, gliitff dig blissful, from ^liicf happiness ; 
 feinbfdtg inimical, from feinb hostile; rebfdig talkative, from reben 
 talk. 
 
415] DERIVATIVE ADJECTIVES. 22? 
 
 g. A number of adjectives in ig are from lost roots, and so 
 have in the present language the value of primitive words: 
 thus, jelig happy, u|)))ig luxuriant. 
 
 10. 3jrf). This is the same with our English suffix ishi and is 
 used in much the same way. 
 
 a. It forms adjectives from noims of different classes : thus, 
 especially from proper names of persons, places, and peoples : 
 as, lutftertfc^ Lutheran, preu^ifd^ Primsian, baierijd) Bavari^an, 
 jpanijc^ Spanish;— ivom appellations of places, persons, and 
 animals : as, :^immli]c^ heavenly, \iah\\\6) townish, finbif c^ childish, 
 biebij^ thievish, bicl)teri)(^ poetical, l^ixnhx]^) doggish;— and from a 
 few abstracts or verbal nouns: as, aBergldubijcf) superstitious, 
 argtDO^nifd) suspicious, neibijc^ envious. 
 
 b. It often takes, in adjectives derived from the classical 
 languages, the place of our endings ic, ical, al, ian, etc. : as, 
 ftiftorifd) historic or historical, !ritif(^ critical, logifi^ logical, inbiji^ 
 Indian. 
 
 c. In a few words, ijd) has a somewhat disparaging sense as 
 compared with Wd), much as in the corresponding Eniilish ad- 
 jectives: thus, finbifd) childish and ttnblid) childlike, tDcibijc^ 
 womanish and tt)eibUd) feminine. 
 
 d. The use of ifc^ with proper names of places and with 
 foreign words is attended with some irregularities of detail, in 
 respect to the form of the theme to which the suffix is appended : 
 these cannot be dwelt upon here. 
 
 11. 2ei forms indeclinable adjectives from numerals and 
 words related with numerals, which, before it, take the ending 
 er: thus, einerlei of one sort, mam^txkx of many sorts, aflerlei ofaU 
 sorts. 
 
 The lei is by origin the genitive of a feminine noun, meaning 
 sort, and the preceding er is the proper ending of the adjective 
 qualifying it: hence the treatment of its derivatives as in- 
 declinable words. 
 
 12. Sid). This suffix corresponds with our like, ly (in godlike, 
 godly, etc.), and, like these, forms a very large number of 
 deriv itives. It is historically the same word with the adjective 
 like (German gleid)) : compare 363.3a. 
 
 Sic^tis also added to adjectives, perhaps as a mere variation 
 
 of lilf). 
 
 a. It is added to nouns of various classes (usually with mod- 
 ification of their vowel) : thus, mannlid) manly, Ddterlic^ fatherly. 
 
228 BEEIVATION. [415^ 
 
 fiinftli^ artful, ^tx^M) hearty, qIMIx^ happy, id^rlid) yearly, qeift.- 
 U(^ spiritual. 
 
 h. It forms from other adjectives (always with modified 
 vowel) adjectives that have in general a diminutive meaning : 
 thus, rotftlic^ [xbiM}] reddish, jduerlii^ somewhat sour, Idnglid; 
 longish. But some of its derivatives are free from the diminutive 
 implication ; and a considerable number (363.3a) are used only 
 in an adverbial sense, the ending having the same value as the 
 English ly in similar derivatives from adjectives. 
 
 In a few words— as fold), tueld), our such, which— it is greatly 
 corrupted. 
 
 c. It is appended to many verbal roots ; and either in an 
 active sense (especially with intransitive verbs) — thus, fc^dblirf) 
 harmful, hztiaxxlid) persistent, fterblic^ mortal, erfreuUci^ agreeable 
 — or, yet more often, in a passive sense: as QlaubUd^ to be 
 believed, credible, t)erdc^tlt(f) contemptible, begreifli(| comprehen- 
 sible, unfdglid) unspeakable. Of this class of passive derivatives, 
 many are in use only with the prefix un : e. g. there is no f dglic^ 
 speakable. 2\d}, as thus used, is closely equivalent with bar 
 (above, lb), and it is in part a matter of arbitrary custom, or 
 determined only by euphony, which suffix shall be employed ; 
 in other cases, derivatives are formed with both, with a more or 
 less distinct difference of meaning. 
 
 13. ©am is our some (in wholesome, noisome, etc.), and is sup- 
 posed to be ultimately the adjective same (now lost in German). 
 It forms derivatives — 
 
 a. From nouns, mostly of an abstract character : thus, furd)t= 
 \am fearful, gemaltfam violent, miiftfam laborious. 
 
 b. From verbal roots : thus, aufmerffam attentive, folfifam 
 docile, lenffam manageable. 
 
 c. From a few adjectives ; thus, einfatn lonely, Qemeinfam com- 
 mon, langfam slow. 
 
 14 %, besides one or two isolated adjectives, like bid)t thick, 
 close, from the root of Qebeil)en thrive, forms the class of ordinal 
 adjectives from numerals below twenty (203). 
 
 15. There are certain words forming classes of derivative 
 adjectives which have not yet (like Bar, ltd), jam, above) lost 
 their independence of form and meaning sufficiently to be 
 reckoned as adjective-suffixes, although approaching very near 
 in value to such. The most noticeable of them are — 
 
416] DEEIVATIVE ADJECTIVES. 229 
 
 a. 2d§ loose, our less, forming numerous adjectives of depriva- 
 tion : thus, enblog endless, "^erslo^ heartless, treuIo§ faithless. 
 
 These adjectives, like those ending in l^aft, always add ig 
 before feit: thus, %x^nio\\Q,hii faithlessness. 
 
 b. 35oII fidl, our ful, in thankful, fearful, etc. : examples are 
 Ietbt)oII sorrowful, gebanfentioE thoughtful. 
 
 c. 9teid) rich: examples are Uebretd) gracious {2khthve), Qt\\U 
 rei(i) witty, full of esprit. 
 
 d. %a^ compartment, division, forms multiplicatives with 
 numeral words, cardinal or indefinite (204) : examples are ge^n- 
 fad) tenfold, Dielfac^ manifold. 
 
 e. gait fold is used in the same manner with fac^. But 
 multiplicatives with fait simply are antiquated and unusual; 
 they now regularly take the additional adjective ending ig 
 (above, 9), before which the vowel of fait (except in two or three 
 words, as mannlfifalttj) is modified : thus, geI)nfaItiQ ten-fold, t)iel- 
 fdltig manifold. 
 
 f. ^rtig is, like fdlticj, an extension of a noun, %xim,anner, kind, 
 by the adjective suffix ig, and forms a considerable class of 
 derivatives denoting sort or manner : thus, nebelartig cloudlike, 
 frembartig of strange fashion. Other similar formations are 
 f ormig, from the foreign noun gorm form (Lat. forma) : thus, 
 infelformig island-shaped; — miitftig [miitig] from g}^ut^ [9Jlut] 
 mood, disposition : as, fnebmutl)ig [friebmiitig] disposed to peace ; 
 —md^ig, from ^a^ measure: as, rec^^tmd^ig lawful; etc. 
 
 416. Adjectives derived by Prefix. 
 
 The prefixes forming adjectives are, in general, the same with 
 those forming nouns (411), namely ge, mife, un, ur, erg, together 
 with Be. 
 
 1. 35e forms a very few adjectives, as Berett ready, Bequem 
 convenient. 
 
 2. a. (S5e aids to form past participles (243.3) ; and sometimes 
 from nouns which do not furnish any other of the parts of a 
 derivative verb: thus, geftiefelt booted (provided with boots), 
 geljfirnt horned, gefittet mannered, geftirnt starred. 
 
 b. It also forms, either without suffix or with ig, a class of 
 adjectives from verbs: thus, gene'^m acceptable (nel)men take), 
 geml^ certain (roiffen know), geldufig current (laufen run), ^etpdrtig 
 expectant (tpavten wait). 
 
230 DERIVATION. [416- 
 
 c. (S)c is prefixed to a few simple adjectives without note- 
 worthy change of their meaning : thus, f|ere(^t righteous, (^etreu 
 faithful, geflretiQ severe. ®Ieid) like contains the same prefix ab- 
 breviated. 
 
 The other prefixes have the same value in adjectives as in 
 nouns: thus — 
 
 3. Wx^ forms such adjectives as mt^Qiinftig grudging, m\^= 
 trautjd) distrustful. 
 
 4. Un forms negative adjectives, as un!lar unclear, ungliicfUd^ 
 unhappy, 
 
 a. That some of the adjectives formed with un have no cor- 
 responding positives has been noticed above (415.12c). 
 
 h. According to some authorities, the words formed with un 
 always have the principal accent on that prefix : others except 
 compounds of participles, as unbeloftnt unrewarded, and of 
 verbal derivatives with the suffixes bar, Ii(^, fam, as unbenf'bar 
 inconceivable, unenblid) unending, unbulb'fam intolerant. 
 
 5. Ur forms directly only a very small number of adjectives, 
 from other adjectives, adding to the latter an intensive mean- 
 ing, or an implication of primitiveness : thus, urplo^licf) very 
 sudden, uralt of primitive antiquity. 
 
 6. ^rj is prefixed, in a half -humorous way, to a few adjectives, 
 with intensive force: thus, ergbumm excessively stupid, ergfaul 
 very lazy. 
 
 Derivation of the other Parts of Speech. 
 
 417. Of the remaining parts of speech, the adverbs are the 
 only ones which are to any extent formed in classes, by means 
 analogous with those above explained ; and they have been al- 
 ready sufficiently treated (363 etc.) under Adverbs. 
 
 The derivation of the rest, so far as it is capable of being 
 shown, is a matter for the lexicon to deal with, under each 
 separate word. 
 
 WORD-COMBINATION, COMPOSITION. 
 
 418. A compound word is one that is made up ot two 
 (or more) independent words, each of which maintains 
 in tlie composition its separate form and meaning. It 
 is ijaade one word hj constanej^ of combination in prac- 
 
419] COMPOUND WOEDS. 231 
 
 tical use, by the absence of inflection except in the last 
 member, and by being placed under the dominion of a 
 single principal accent. 
 
 a. Thus, SuttQfrau is distinguished from junge grau young 
 woman by the adjective j;ung being made indeclinable and 
 receiving a marked accent. By this means a unity of form is 
 given to the word, to which a unity of idea is then further added 
 by attribution of the meaning virgin, which naturally grows out 
 of the other, but yet is not the same with it. 
 
 b. As will appear hereafter (422.26 etc.), other members of a 
 compound than the final one sometimes take an ending of de- 
 clension, but irregularly and superfluously, and without liability 
 to further variation in the inflection of the compound. There 
 are also a few words which are arbitrarily written together as 
 if compounds, while both their parts are declined in full, and 
 they are not in fact of a different character from many colloca- 
 tions of words which the language writes separately : such are 
 berfelBe and berienige (168, 169), ^ol^erpriefter high-priest, etc. 
 (422.1a). 
 
 c. All derivation and inflection begin with composition. The com- 
 pound becomes in practical use an integral representative of the idea 
 signified by it, its origin is more and more lost sight of, and it becomes 
 liable to such alterations of form as more or less disguise its derivation : 
 thus, 3ungfrau has been in popular use abbreviated to 3ungfer; and 
 3ungl)err (iunger ^err young sir), in like manner, to 3uufer. And if the 
 final member of the compound happens to be one that in practice is ad- 
 ded to a large number of words, forming a considerable class of com- 
 posite words, it may be turned into an ending, of derivation or inflection. 
 Thus, britter jl^eit [Xdi] became the compound 2)vittt^ett [2)rittei(] 
 third part, and this was contracted into S)ritte( ; and, the same being 
 done with the other ordinal numerals, tel became a "suffix," forming 
 fractionals from ordinals (207.2). The conjugational ending ten, in 
 iDir l^otten we had, represents in like manner an originally independent 
 conjugational form, taiumis (yet older dadamasi) we did, which has gone 
 through a like process of abbreviation. Composition therefore forms, 
 in the grammatical treatment of a language, an appropriate transitional 
 subject between inflection and derivation on the one side, and colloca- 
 tion or arrangement on the other. 
 
 419. Compounds are very much more numerous in German 
 than in English, and the liberty of forming new ones, after the 
 model of those already in use, is much more freely conceded 
 than with us. In making practical acquaintance with the Ian- 
 
232 COMPOSITION. [419- 
 
 guage, therefore, we are constantly meeting with them, of every 
 class — from those in which the final member has almost ac- 
 quired the value of a suffix (see above, 415.15), or in which the 
 fact of composition is otherwise disguised (as in ^utigfer and 
 3un!er ; or in f olci) and m\^, see above, 415.12), to the chance 
 combinations which each speaker or writer forms as occasion 
 arises, and which are not to be found explained in any dic- 
 tionary, however complete. 
 
 a. Compounds are often also formed in German of a length 
 and complexity unknown in English : thus, 5euert)erji(i)erunQ§= 
 fief ellfc^ aft fire insurance company, 5^Drbfeef(^ifffa^rt North Sea 
 navigation, Suftrbftrenfd}tt)inbfu(^t bronchial consumption, 9{eid)§= 
 Dberpoftamt^geitunfigf d)reiber editor of the imperial general postoffice 
 journal. Such, however, are for the most part met with only 
 in technical and official language. 
 
 6. The parts of a compound — especially if it be a long and 
 cumbrous one, or Uable to an incorrect division — are sometimes 
 separated by hyphens: thus, Seuert)erft(^erunfi§=gefeflf(f)aft, or 
 8euer=t)erfi(^erimQ§=9efeIIf(^aft. No rules are to be definitely laid 
 down respecting this division, it being mainly left to the taste 
 and choice of individual writers. Usage is also much at variance 
 as regards the employment of capital letters for the separated 
 parts of a compound noun — some writing, for example, geuer* 
 58erft(^erung§=®efeUf(f)aft. The preferable method is to avoid as 
 much as possible the multiplication of capitals. 
 
 c. Where two or more compound words having the same 
 final member would follow one another, it is the usage in 
 German often to omit that member except in the last word, 
 noting the omission in the other cases by a hyphen appended 
 to the former member : thus, alle ©Dnn= unb Sefttage eine§ Sciftre^ 
 on all the Sundays and holidays of a year, in biefer baum= imb 
 queHenleeren @inobe in this treeless and waterless desert, t)on ber 
 fonn= unb fefttagiflen ©pagierfafirt of the promenade usual on Sun- 
 days and holidays. A similar liberty is even taken with words 
 of foreign origin : thus, al§ Df= unb ^efenfit)tt)affe as offensive 
 and defensive weapon ; but it is not to be approved or imitated. 
 
 Composition of Verbs. 
 
 420. The importance of compound verbs in the general 
 grammatical system of German has rendered necessary their 
 treatment under the head of verbal conjugation (296-313). 
 
421] COMPOUND NOUNS. 233 
 
 Only a brief recapitulation of the different classes, therefore, is 
 called for here. 
 
 1. Verbs are compounded with the inseparable 
 prefixes be, ent or emp, er, (;e, \)cv, ^er ; being conjugated, 
 in general, in the same manner as when simple, but 
 losing the prefix ge of the past participle; retaining, 
 also, their proper accent. See 302-7. 
 
 2. Verbs are compounded with a considerable number 
 of separable prefixes, simple and compound — which 
 prefixes, however, stand before the verbal form, and 
 are written with it as one word, only in the infinitive 
 and participles : or in the personal forms of the verb 
 also, when the sentence has the transposed arrangement. 
 The prefix always has the principal accent. See 
 298-301. 
 
 a. A few of the separable prefixes, however — namely, burc^, 
 l^inter, iiBer, urn, unter, and miber or mieber— form with some verbs 
 inseparable compounds. See 308-11. 
 
 3. Verbs are compounded with nouns, adjectives, and 
 adverbs ; either closely, forming compound stems which 
 are conjugated like simple roots, or loosely, forming 
 stems which are conjugated after the manner of verbs 
 with separable prefixes. See 312-313. 
 
 a. There is no fixed line separating compounds of the latter 
 character from verbal phrases, and some combinations are 
 treated indifferently as the one or the other : thus, ^an! fagen 
 or banffaQen express gratitude, ©talt finben or ftattfinben take 
 place. 
 
 Composition of Nouns. 
 
 421. With few exceptions (422.6& etc.), compound 
 nouns are made up of a noun with a preceding limiting 
 word. The final noun determines the gender and mode 
 of declension of the compound ; the preceding member 
 of the compound has the accent. 
 
234 COMPOSITION. [421- 
 
 1. Exceptions as regards gender are — 
 
 a. Names of towns, which are neuter (61.2c), even when they 
 are compounds whose final member is masculine or feminine : 
 thus, ba§ SSittenberg (ber ^Berg), ba§ aJlagbeBurG (bte 33urg). 
 
 h. Many compounds of ber 9Jlutl^ ^wi] mood, spirit, which 
 are feminine : for example, bic ^nmutft [^^iimutl grace, bte ^e= 
 muti) [^ernut] humility, bie SSe^mul!^ [SSeftmut] sadness. 
 
 These are, by origin, feminine abstracts from compound ad- 
 jectives, which have lost their suffix of derivation. 
 
 c. A few special words : thus, bic ^nttDort aiiswer (ba§ SBort 
 word), ber ^itttt)Ocf) Wednesday (literally mid-week, from bie 
 2Bo(i)e week), which has taken the gender of the other names of 
 week-days (61.2a) ; bie D^eunauge lamper-eel (Uterally nine-eyes, 
 from ba§ ^uge eye) ; and ^bfc^eu horror is masculine, and ®egen= 
 tf)eil [(^egenteil] opposite is neuter, while 6d)eu fear and 2:l)eil 
 [^eil] part are now respectively used in general as feminine and 
 masculine. 
 
 422. The varieties of compoimd nouns are — 
 
 1. Nouns made up of a noun and a preceding qualifying ad- 
 jective: thus, S3ot(monb /u?Z moon, ^\iz\\km precious stone, ^od)- 
 gett wedding (lit. high time), ^urgtDeiie pastime (Ut. short while). 
 
 a. A very few nouns are written as compounds of this class, 
 although the adjective is declined as an independent word: 
 thus, .^ol)erprtefter high-priest, gangetoeile tedium, ©el^eimerratft 
 [(^i1:itmzxxai]privy -counsellor (alBo :^aiigtDetle,(S5e^etmrat]^ [©e^eim* 
 rat], as proper compounds). 
 
 2. Nouns made up of a noun and a preceding limiting noun : 
 thus, 53u(!)brurfer bookprinter, @e((i)td^tf(^rei6er historian (ht. 
 history -writer), ©c^ufle'^rer school-teacher, ^onbfc^uJ) glove (lit. 
 hand-shoe), 2BetngIa§ wine-glass, 33aumtt)Dne cotton (lit. tree-wool), 
 Sagbleben life by hunting, (Jic^Baum oak-tree. 
 
 a. The relation of the first noun to the second is oftenest that 
 of a genitive dependent on it ; but it may stand in various other 
 relations, often such as could not be expressed by any simple 
 case, without the use of words of relation ; or, the two words 
 may be in apposition with one another. 
 
 b. Often the first noun is put formally in the genitive case : 
 thus, ^bmQf)o):}n king's son, 2ar\h^mann countryman, 3[Birtl)§^au§ 
 CIBirt§l^au§] inn (Ut. host's house). 
 
422] COMPOUND NOUNS. 235 
 
 c. And even, by irregular imitation of such forms, the first 
 noun takes an § or e§ which does not properly belong to it as 
 an independent word: thus, (^eburtStag birthday, ;^ieBe§Brief 
 hveletter. 
 
 d. The first noun sometimes takes a plural ending : thus, 
 S3Uber6u(^ picture-book (lit. pictures-book), SSorterbud) dictionary 
 (lit. words-book), ^Iciber)d)ranf clothes-press, SSaifen^au§ orphan 
 asylum (lit. orphans' house), ^ageBucE) journal (lit. days-book). 
 
 e. These endings of declension are introduced in part for their 
 meaning, in part for euphonic reasons; and insertions of a 
 similar kind are occasionally made quite arbitrarily : as, ^](?^er= 
 mittmorf) Ash- Wednesday, §)etbelbeere heath-berry. 
 
 3. Nouns made up of a noun and a preceding verbal root 
 having the value of a qualifying noun or adjective : thus, (5ing= 
 t)OGel singing-bird, ^-Brennglag burning-glass, ©djreibfeber writing- 
 pen, ©tubirsimmer [Stubtergimmer] study-room,^(il\vi^i covetous- 
 ness (lit. desire of having). 
 
 4. Nouns made up of a noun and a preceding particle, with 
 qualifying force : thus, ^u^enfeite outside, 3nlanb inland, ^u§= 
 lani final sound (of a word), Wximm]^ fellow-creature, SSorfteil 
 [^Sorteil] advantage (lit. excelling part). 
 
 5. Nouns made up of an infinitive and words dependent upon 
 it: thus, ha§ ^nx\\(i)']dn the being by one's self, ba§ Sujpdtfommen 
 the coming too late. These are unusual cases, and not employed 
 in dignified style. 
 
 6. Compounds of a different and peculiar character, which 
 designate an object by describing some peculiarity belonging 
 to it, and which may be called possessive or characterizing 
 compounds. Such are — 
 
 a. A noun with preceding limiting word : as, ^al^Ifopf bald- 
 head (a person or thing having a bald head), 33lauftruTnpf blue- 
 stocking (person wearing such), ©c^reiftal^ bawler (lit. scream- 
 neck), 33ierecf square (lit. four-comers). 
 
 b. An adjective with preceding qualifying word: as, ber 
 Dlimmerf att the greedy-gut (Ut. never satiated), ha§ Smmergriiu the 
 evergreen. 
 
 c. A verb with a following object, or other limiting word or 
 phrase: as, Xaugenic^tg good-for-nothing, ©torenfrieb kill-joy 
 (lit. disturb-peace), (^tellbidiein rendezvous (lit, make thine ap- 
 
236 COMPOSITION. [422- 
 
 pearance), (5))rtngtit§felb romp (lit. jump into the field), ^eT^raug 
 closing dance (lit. turn-out). 
 
 d. One or two more anomalous cases : as, (SJarau^ end (lit. all 
 over). 
 
 Composition of Adjectives. 
 
 423. Compound adjectives are always made up of an 
 adjective with a preceding limiting or qualifying word. 
 Their treatment, as regards declension, use as adverbs, 
 and the like, is the same with that of simple adjectives. 
 The first member of the compound takes the accent. 
 
 424. The varieties of compound adjectives are — 
 
 1. Adjectives made up of two adjectives, of which the former 
 either is co-ordinate with the latter— as in taubftumm deaf and 
 dumb, !aiferIic^=!ontglt(ij imperial-royal — or, much more often, 
 limits it in the manner of an adverb : as, l^ellblau bright-blue, 
 tobtfran! [totfranf] deadly sick. 
 
 2. Adjectives made up of an adjective (usually a participle) and 
 a preceding adverb : as, tBO'^lebel right-noble, worshipful, tt)o'f)I= 
 meinenb well-meaning, jogenannt so-called, meitaugfe^enb far- 
 looking. 
 
 3. Adjectives made up of an adjective and a preceding 
 limiting noun : as, f (^neetDei^ snow-white, troftbebiirfttG needing 
 consolation, ei§!alt ice-cold. 
 
 a. A very frequent form of this compound is made up of a 
 participle and its dependent noun : as, !^cilbrtngenb salutary (lit, 
 health-bringing), |)fli(^tt)ergef(en duty-forgetting, gottergeben god- 
 devoted. 
 
 b. The noun in such compounds, as in compounds with a noun 
 (422.26-e), often takes the form of a genitive or a plural : thus, 
 leben^fatt tired of life, loBen^lDurbig praiseworthy, ^offnung§t)Dll 
 hopeful, riefengro^ gigantic (lit. giant-great), !inberlo§ childless 
 (lit. children-less). 
 
 4. Adjectives made up of an adjective and a preceding verbal 
 root, having the value of a dependent noun : thus, merf tDiirbtg 
 remarkable (lit. worthy of noticing). 
 
 This form of compound is rare and exceptional, the infinitive 
 being generally used, instead of the simple verbal root, 
 
425] COMPOUND ADJECTIVES. 237 
 
 5. Adjectives formed by appending a suffix of derivation, es- 
 pecially ig (415.9), to the combination of a noun with a preceding 
 limiting word (which combination is not itself in use as a com- 
 pound noun) : thus, t)ierfu§ig four-footed, Qro^l)er3ig great-hearted, 
 Soc^naftQ supercilious (lit. high-nosed). 
 
 Compositimi of Particles. 
 
 425. 1. The modes of formation of compound particles have 
 been already sufficiently explained and illustrated, under the 
 head of the different kinds of particles (see especially 365). 
 Such particles are, in part, cases of compound words, analogous 
 with those just treated of ; in part, phrases composed of inde- 
 pendent and fully inflected words, which have simply run to- 
 gether into one by frequent usage ; in part, they are combina- 
 tions of particles. 
 
 2. a. Compound particles of the last class, and those of the 
 second which are made up of a governing preposition and its 
 governed case, are accented on the final member: thus, t) Driver' 
 previously, l^ertior' forth, gubem' besides, uberl)aupt' in general, 
 Bcrgab' down hill. 
 
 h. Such, on the other hand, as are originally cases of com- 
 pound words, or phrases composed of a noun and a preceding 
 limiting word, are accented on the first member : thus, l)tm'mcl= 
 tt)drt§ heavenwards, t)ie('mal§ often, fet'neSmeQg in no wise, bcr'- 
 geftalt in such wise. 
 
 c. A few are accented on either the first or second member ; 
 and either indifferently, or according to a difference of meaning : 
 thus, alfo' or arfo accordingly^ c\'\Da or d\v a' perchance ; ciii'mal, 
 when ein means distinctly one, rather than a; bar'um, tDar'iim, 
 l^ier'mit, when the emphasis rests on the pronominal element — 
 and so on. 
 
 d. There are occasional irregular exceptions to these rules of 
 accentuation, which may be left to the dictionary to point out. 
 
238 'CONSTRUCTION OP SENTENCES. [42& 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF SENTENCES. 
 Introductory Explanations. 
 
 426. 1. A SENTENCE is a combination of words having 
 completeness in itself as the expression of a thought. 
 
 2. It is composed of a subject, designating that of 
 which something is asserted (inquired, desired), and a 
 PREDICATE, expressing that which is asserted (inquired, 
 desired) of the subject. 
 
 a. That a thought cannot be signified or communicated without the 
 combination of a subject and a predicate is not claimed (compare 391) ; 
 but only that this combination is its full and regular mode of expression, 
 the norm to which all expressed thoughts may be reduced, or of which 
 they are to be regarded as variations. 
 
 h. The further division of the predicate, as above defined, into predicate 
 and copula (the latter being always a person of jcin he: compare 316.1a, 
 remark) — for example, of er Uebt he loves into er ift liebenb he is loving— 
 though of value in the logical analysis of expression, is unimportant in 
 grammatical analysis, and has no bearing upon the construction of the 
 sentence. All verbs except feiit he (and even that, in some of its uses) 
 contain the copula combined with a more or less complete predication 
 of some action, state, or quaUty ; some require more than others a 
 complement, to fill out their idea and make a significant predication : a 
 few (316.1), so especially as to be called "verbs of incomplete predica- 
 tion;" a transitive verb is in itself less complete than an intransitive, 
 and so on. 
 
 c. The completeness of a sentence composed of subject and predicate 
 is a relative one — namely, as compared with a word, or a phrase not 
 containing those two elements. A noun by itself suggests an object of 
 thought ; a noun with qualifying adjuncts implies certain things as 
 standing in certain relations to one another, an object as invested with 
 quaUties : so also a verb by itself, or with adjuncts, calls up an intel- 
 ligent conception in the mind ; and either, in certain circumstances, has 
 all the value of a complete expression, because the mind of the hearer 
 or reader understands, or intelligently supplies, whatever is wanting. But 
 we do not feel that anything is really said until a verb and its subject 
 are combined, until something is predicated of something. 
 
 d. A sentence may signify only a small part of the thought which is 
 in the mind of the speaker, and which he sets out to express ; it may 
 require to be set in connection with other sentences in order to perform 
 
427] SENTENCES. • 239 
 
 its full office, as much as a word witli other words to form a sentence. 
 And, in the development of language, a means is found by which in- 
 dividual sentences are so combined as to form a higher unity— by which, 
 instead of being merely set side by side, they are twined together into a 
 complex sentence or period. This means is the conversion of independent 
 sentences into dependent clauses, having the formal as well as logical 
 value of parts of a sentence (see below, 435 etc.). For the simple sen- 
 tence still remains the norm and unit of complete expression : the de- 
 pendent clauses have value only as they enter into the structure of such 
 a sentence, in the quality of adjuncts either to its subject or to its pred- 
 icate. They themselves, then, though containing a subject and a 
 predicate, are incomplete, because they distinctly imply a relation to 
 something else, which requires to be also expressed. 
 
 427. Sentences are of three fundamental kinds, as- 
 sertive, interrogative, and optative (or imperative). 
 
 Thus, assertive, bu Itel)ft mi(^ thou lav est me ; — interrogative, 
 Uebft bu mid) lovestthoume? — optative, Itebe bu mi(^ love thou me! 
 
 a. Of only the first of these can it be truly said that it in- 
 volves the predication of something of a subject. The relations 
 of the three to one another are best developed by reducing 
 them to the common form of dependent clauses, expressing 
 what is affirmed, inquired, or desired by some defined speaker. 
 Thus, we say of another, er be'^auptet, bafj bu il)n Hebft he asserts 
 that thou lovest him; er fraflt (mill tDtffen), oh bu i^n IteBeft he asks 
 (wants to know) whether thou lovest him; er tjerlangt, ha^ bu il^n 
 iiebeft he requires that thou love him. "When, now, we come to 
 speak in our own persons, we change id) be^aupte, 'tia^ bu mid) 
 Iiel)ft Imaintain that thou lovest meinto bu lieBft mid) tlwu lovest me, 
 the assertion of the assertion being usually a quite unnecessary 
 formality ; id) mid mijfen, oB bu mid) liebcft I wish to know whether 
 thou lovest me becomes liebft bu mid) lovest thou me ? the wish to 
 know being intimated by arrangement and tone ; and id) t)er= 
 lauQe, ha% bu mic^ liebeft I require that thou love me is changed 
 into lieBe bu mid) love thou me ! the desire or demand being ex- 
 pressed by arrangement, tone, and appropriate verbal form. 
 That is to say, the usage of language has established modes of 
 expression by which the speaker can signify his desire to know, 
 or his request or command, directly, without putting it 
 necessarily, as he may do optionally, into the form of an asser- 
 tion. 
 
 6. All these kinds of sentence alike consist of a subject and a 
 predicate (save that the subject of the imperative sentence is 
 
240 CONSTEUCTION OF SENTENCES. [427- 
 
 often omitted as superfluous, when of the second person, or 
 representing the individual to whom the request or command 
 is directly addressed). And the assertive sentence is properly- 
 assumed as the norm or standard, of which the other two may 
 be treated and explained as variations. 
 
 c. The formal construction and logical office of the three 
 kinds of sentence do not always correspond. A variety of 
 modes of expression (338) may be used as intimations of a com- 
 mand ; a question may be expressed (432.16) in the form of an 
 assertive sentence ; and an assertion may be implied in the 
 asking of a question. 
 
 d. The direct assertive force of an assertive sentence may be 
 variously and greatly modified, either by the mode and tense 
 of the verb or by adjuncts, so that the statement is made un- 
 certain or hypothetical to any degree — yet without affecting 
 the grammatical character of the sentence. A negative sentence 
 is only one variety of the assertive, in which, of two opposite 
 and mutually exclusive things, one is affirmed by the denial of 
 the other. 
 
 428. 1. The subject of a sentence is always a sub- 
 stantive word — that is to say, either a noun, or one of 
 the equivalents of a noun (113) — along with such ad- 
 juncts (109 etc.) as may be attached to it for its limita- 
 tion and qualification. 
 
 2. The bare predicate of a sentence is always a 
 personal form of a verb, since this alone has predicative 
 force (232, 314) ; it may be accompanied by the various 
 modifying adjuncts (314 etc.) which it is capable of 
 taking. 
 
 429. The arrangement of the sentence, as thus con- 
 stituted, is subject to stricter and more intricate rules 
 in German than in English : which rules will now be set 
 forth. 
 
 a. The differences in construction be'.ween the two languages 
 are in good part of comparatively modern growth ; some of the 
 peculiar rules which now domineer German sentences were 
 only tendencies and preferences a few centuries ago. 
 
 h. Hence, in archaic style, as well as in poetry, the rules are 
 much less strictly observed than in ordinary prose. 
 
430] EBGULAR ORDEE, 241 
 
 Begular or Normal order of the sentence. 
 
 430. 1. In its ordinary and normal arrangement, tlie 
 German sentence, like the English, requires the sub- 
 ject to be stated first, and to be followed by the pred- 
 icate. 
 
 a. This rule has reference to the simple assertive sentence ; 
 such a sentence, as explained above (427.&), being taken as the 
 standard from which the other forms are deduced. For the 
 arrangement of the interrogative and optative sentences, see 
 below, 432. 
 
 6. Taken in connection with the rules already given as to the 
 order in which the adjuncts of a noun and verb are respectively 
 arranged (110-12, 319), this rule determines the whole order of 
 the normal sentence ; but it is desirable to call especial attention 
 to the peculiarities which distinguish the German order. 
 
 2. No one of the adjuncts of the predicate verb is 
 ever allowed to stand between it and the subject. 
 
 Thus, for English he truly loves justice, and never willingly 
 commits a wrong, the German must say er Uebt treulid) ha§ ^t^i 
 unb beae!)t nie tDilUg ein Unred)t. 
 
 a. Earely, a word or phrase is found inserted between the 
 subject and the verb. Such a one, however, is never an adjunct 
 of the predicate, but one of the conjunctions having exceptional 
 freedom of position (385.4,5), or an asseverative particle, or a 
 phrase of parenthetical force. The words oftenest met with 
 in this position are abcr, ndmltd), alfo, tnbeffen, and jeboift. 
 
 3. Since the infinitive (348.2) and the participle (368) 
 are regularly preceded by whatever limits them, and 
 since (319.2) the word most closely combined in idea 
 with the verb as sharing in its predicative quality is 
 put farthest from it, it results that in sentences contain- 
 ing a compound tense, or a simple form of a separably 
 compounded verb, the non-personal part of the verb 
 (prefix, participle, or infinitive) stands at the end of the 
 sentence ; and the same place is taken by an infinitive 
 dependent on the verb of the sentence, or by a word, 
 other than a prefix, separably compounded with it, or 
 forming with it a verbal phrase. 
 
242 CONSTRUCTION OF SENTENCES. [430- 
 
 Thus, ct Blttfte mit SBol^lgef alien auf ben em^orf^auenben 
 ©ol^n ber ^rbe l^ernieber he looked down with complacency 
 upon the upgazlng son of earth, bu 1^ aft gtoar ni(!)t !IuQ, aber bod) 
 natiirlic^ unb na^ tinblic^er SOSeife gei) ati b e It thou hast acted, not 
 wisely, indeed, but yet naturally, and in childish fashion, \tjx 
 tt) e r b e t euc^ fo Blutig eurer ^lad)i ntd)t iib e rl^ e b e n you will not 
 presume so cruelly upon your power, id) tDtll mein Seben al§ ein 
 ^efd)en! au§ curer §anb e m|) f an g en I will receive my life as a 
 gift from your hand, [^ naf)m ni(^t§ mel^r t)on ber l^tnter mtr lies' 
 genben Sbene n) a I) r I perceived nothing more of the plain that 
 lay behind me. 
 
 a. Where there is more than one non-personal part of the 
 verb in the sentence, the prefix stands before the participle, or 
 the infinitive, or the participle and infinitive ; and the participle 
 stands before the infinitive : thus, [^ gebe e§ auf, i^ ^abt e§ auf* 
 gegeben, ic^ njerbe e§ aufgeben, \6) merbe e§ aufgegeben l&aben, c§ 
 tt)trb aufgegeben tuorben fein — since each element is prefixed to 
 that to which it is added as a limitation (314&). 
 
 b. In the greater nimiber of sentences, therefore, the two 
 parts of the verb, the personal and non-personal, form as it 
 were a frame within which are set all the verbal adjuncts, ac- 
 cording to rules of arrangement (319) which are (except the one 
 requiring the personal pronoun to come first) on the whole 
 somewhat loosely observed, and liable to manifold variation. 
 The three fixed points in the normal order of the sentence are 
 the subject, the personal verb, and the non-personal part of the 
 verb (if there be one present). 
 
 Inverted order of the sentence, 
 
 431. To arrange all sentences in tlie manner above 
 described would result in an intolerable monotony. The 
 German enjoys the same privilege as tlie English, and 
 with even greater freedom, of putting at the head of the 
 sentence any other member of it than the subject — for 
 the general purpose of attaining a euphonious variety ; 
 or, more often, in order to lay an emphatic stress upon 
 the member thus removed from its proper place. But, 
 when any part of the predicate is thus put in the place 
 of the subject, the latter is no longer allowed to stand 
 
431] INVEETED ORDER. 243 
 
 before the verb, but is put next after it instead. This 
 is called the inversion of the sentence. 
 
 Thus, in normal order, ein Sanbmanu brac^te fcincn ^inbern an§ 
 ber Slabt fiinf $firfid)e a countryman brought his children from 
 the citij five peaches : — inverted, with no other change of mean- 
 ing than as regards emphasis, fiinf gjfirfii^e Brac^te ein Sanbmann 
 f einen ^inbern au^ ber ©tabt ; or, again, au§ ber 6tabt brac^te ein 
 Sanbmann feinen ^inbern fiinf ^firfid)e ; or, feinen ^inbern bra(i)te 
 ein Sanbmann au§ ber ©tabt fiinf ^firfic^e. 
 
 a. This arrangement is styled inverted, because, when the 
 sentence consists of only three members, its effect is completely 
 to invert their regular order : thus, er liebt mid) he loves me : 
 inverted, mi(^ liebt er ; er ift gut he is good : inverted, gut ift er. 
 In all cases, too, the term is appropriate as denoting an inver- 
 sion of the natural order of the two essential elements of the 
 sentence, the personal verb and its subject. 
 
 h. The same inverted order, as occasioned by the same cause, is in 
 English sentences also more or less usual, only not imperative, except 
 in certain special phrases : thus, we say always "hardly had he gone, 
 when. . .," but either "thus was it," or "thus it was ;" and "slowly 
 and sadly we laid him down," but "few and short were the prayers we 
 said." In such phrases as "said I," "replied he," " added they, " in- 
 terjected in the midst of a quotation of some one's words, the inversion 
 (made aUke in English, German, and French) is best explained as falling 
 under the principle here stated, since the part of the words already 
 quoted is logically the object of the verb in the interjected phrase. 
 
 c. The only words (other than the subject) which are allowed 
 to stand at the head of the sentence without causing its inver- 
 sion are the general connectives (384), meaning and, hut, for, and 
 eitJier or or. Even the co-ordinating adverbial conjuncticms 
 (385) invert the sentence in their conjunctional use, as when 
 proper adverbs. 
 
 d. As will appear below (438.3/), an adverbial clause, if 
 placed at the head of the sentence of which it forms a part, has 
 the same inverting force as a simple adverb. 
 
 Even an adjective phrase belonging appositively to the sub- 
 ject, if placed at the head of the sentence, inverts it, being 
 treated as if it were an adverbial adjunct of the predicate (as it 
 often logically is so) : thus, etnfttDetlen Berubiflt, 309 tiun bag ^nx 
 5^i!o|)oli§ t)Drit6er being for the time tranquillized (i. e. since it was 
 so), the army now marched past Nikopolis; gart unb ebcl ent= 
 fproffen, tt)ud)§ bie toniolic^e ^lume l^eruor the royal flower , having 
 
244 CONSTEUCTION OF SENTENCES. [431- 
 
 tenderly and nobly sprung forth, continued to grow (I e. after 
 spmnglng fortli). 
 
 e. It is not usual, nor in good style, to remove to the head of 
 the sentence more than a single connected member of the pred- 
 icate : which may, however, consist of any number of words : 
 thus, not feinen ^inbern au§ ber ©tabt hxa^)it em fianbmann fiint 
 $fir]ld)e ; —but bort, !)inter biefen genftern, dertrdumf \^ ben erften 
 ^raum yonder, behind those windows, I dreamed my first dream; 
 iefet (c^nell, el)' bie ^ranbuttfi tt)ieberfel}rt, Befie!)It ber SiiuQling jic!) 
 (S^ott now quickly, ere the surge returns, the youth commits himself 
 to God. 
 
 f. The members of the predicate most often placed at the 
 head of the sentence for emphasis, with consequent inversion, 
 are the object (direct, indirect, or remote), and the various ad- 
 verbial adjuncts ; less often a predicate noun or adjective (316) ; 
 least often one of the non-personal parts of the verb. No part 
 of the predicate, however, is exempt from such treatment, and 
 even — 
 
 g. The personal verb itself is sometimes placed first in the 
 sentence by inversion, with the effect of emphasizing the pred- 
 ication — that is to say, of strengthening or impressing the 
 general force of the assertion made. In such an inversion, the 
 verb is usually followed by boc^ though; much less often by \a 
 surely : but neither of these particles is absolutely necessary. 
 
 Thus, jinb boc^ ein tDunberlid) 35oI! bie 2Bet6er surely women are 
 a strange race of beings! 'tiab' id) bi(^ boc^ mein' ^age m^i gefelien 
 surely I never saw you in my life! ^a, fo finb jie! fc^redt fie alleg 
 gleic^, tt)a§ eine Xiefe !^at ! Yes, that is the way with them! every- 
 thing that Jias any depth straightway terrifies them. 
 
 h. In general, the inversion of the sentence affects the ar- 
 rangement only of the personal verb and its subject. If, how- 
 ever, the subject be a noun, and there be a personal pronoun in 
 the sentence as object of the verb, the pronoun generally 
 remains next the verb, and is put between it and the subject. 
 
 Thus, ha t)erlie§ mid) ber OJiann (S5otte§ in tiefem ©taunen then 
 the man of God left me in deep astonishment, banad) fd)IanG fid) 
 ber Sange urn fie bcibe in einen ^'rei§ after that, the tall fellow 
 twined himself round about both of them. 
 
 The same thing is customary in the interrogative and^ the 
 optative sentence (432) : thus, mt ))abtn eu(^ bie fd)onen Spfel 
 gefc^medt how did the beautiful apples taste to you? i)ett)al)re bid) 
 ber §immel may Heaven preserve thee! 
 
432] INYEETED ORDER. 245 
 
 A similar transfer of the pronoun from its proper place is 
 usual also in transposed clauses : see 439.1. 
 
 i. When, of two co-ordinate clauses following one another, 
 the first is inverted, the second usually retains its normal order, 
 even though the word or phrase which caused the inversion of 
 the one logically forms a part of the other also : thus, barauf 
 blieb er fi^en, unb id) Qing fort thereupon he remained sitting and 
 I went away. 
 
 432. Interrogative and Optative sentences. 
 
 1. In German, as in English, an interrogative sen- 
 tence is ordinarily arranged in the inverted order, or 
 with the subject after the verb. In a direct question 
 (one requiring "yes" or "no" as an answer), the verb 
 conies first of all ; in an indirect question, the inter- 
 rogative word (pronoun, pronominal adjective, or parti- 
 cle), or phrase involving such a word, comes first. 
 
 Thus, mirb bie junQe ©d)opfuncj aufprcn will the ijoimg creation 
 cease ? I)dlt fie mirf) nti^t mc^r does it not longer confine me ? — voo 
 \\i er where is he? voa^ fud)t K)r lohat seek ye ? tt)el(^e§ 58ud) ^at er 
 Qelefen lohat hook has he read ? mit tt)effen @elb "ijat er e§ gefauft 
 with whose money has lie bought it ? 
 
 a. When the interrogative word or phrase is itself the sub- 
 ject of the verb, the sentence necessarily retains its normal 
 order: thus, tDcr l)ai mir ba§ Gctl)au who has done that to me ? 
 tDcfjen ^ud) Ue^t l^ier whose hook lies here? 
 
 h. Often, however (also as in English), a sentence is made 
 interrogative by the tone with which it is uttered, while it has 
 the construction of an assertive sentence: thus, ii)x f^tueiot? bie 
 Dlinae IDtrlen nur guriid? tjou are silent? the rings only work 
 backward? ba§ foH bie ^Intmort fein auf metne S^age? that is to 
 he the answer to my question ? 
 
 Often or usually, an interrogative sentence so constructed 
 has a somewhat different force, implying "is it possible 
 that . . . !" or "do you mean that . . .?" or the like. 
 
 c. An exclamatory sentence sometimes^ has the interrogative 
 form : thus, tt)ie ]d)6u ift ber ^JZorgeu ! tt)te fdjetnt bie Sonne fo 
 waxm nnb milb 1 how heautifid the morning is! how warmly and 
 gently the sun shines t 
 
246 CONSTEUCTION OF SENTENCES. [432- 
 
 2. The optative or imperative sentence takes, as in 
 English, the inverted arrangement: that is to say, in 
 the second persons, singular and plural, of the im- 
 perative, and in the various persons of the subjunctive 
 used optatively or imperatively, the subject follows the 
 verb, instead of preceding it. 
 
 Thus, ]pnd) h\i, unb lt)lr "^oren do thou speak, and we hear, jud^' 
 ^r ben reblidien ©eminn seek tJiou (lit. let him seek: 153.3) for 
 honest gain ! moQC nic ber Stag erf ^einen ynay tlmt day never ap- 
 pear ! tt)dre e§ ^m nur nic^t jo bunfel would that it only were not 
 so dark here! moc^f aud) bod) bie ganje 2BeIt un§ !)oren would tlmt 
 even the whole world might hear us! o U)dr^ i(^ nie QeBoren that 
 I had never been born ! Compare 243.1, 331. 
 
 a. But in the third person singular of the present subjunctive 
 (as already pointed out : 331.1&), the subject may also stand 
 before the verb, and more frequently does so : thus, Jeber fommc 
 tt)lc er ift let each one come as he is, 
 
 433. Conditional dauses. 
 
 A clause of a sentence is very often inverted in 
 German to express the conditionality of a statement — 
 that is, to add the meaning of if. 
 
 Thus, :^atte er oerufen, fo fatten jie iftn gefunben luid he cried out 
 (if he had cried out), they would have found him, !^ at t) on eu(^ 
 ieber fetnen 9ling t)on fetnem 35ater if each of you has his ring 
 from his father, er^ebet ein Sloift fid) if a quarrel arises, l^at ber 
 ^egrabene fic^ fi^on erl^obcn if the buried one hath already arisen, 
 Iicj3 er un§ ^ier ^uriid if he left us behind here. 
 
 a. This mode of signifying the conditionality of a sentence is 
 (as the first example shows) not unusual also in English, in the 
 past subjunctive tenses had and were, in the conditional clause 
 (protasis) of a complete hypothetical period (332.1) ; and it is 
 not wholly unknown under other circumstances : but in German 
 the construction is a very common one, with all the different 
 tenses of verbs of every -class. 
 
 b. The same construction is frequent in the conditional clause 
 
 (protasis) of an incomplete hypothetical period, after an al§ 
 representing the omitted conclusion (apodosis: see 332.26): thus, 
 er Be^anbelte fie, al§ tuaren fie fetne Untertl)anen he treated them as 
 
435] TRANSrOSED ORDER. 247 
 
 [he would treat tlwm] if they wliere his own subjects; cr nidfte mit 
 bem ^Dpfe, ttl§ tDoUe er fagen : 6d|on red^t he nodded his head, as 
 if he meant to say " quite right ! " 
 
 c. E-arely, of two succeeding conditional clauses, only the first 
 is inverted : thus, voax e§ bann SBinter, unb ber ©rf)nee lag rings 
 um^^er if then it was winter, and the snow lay about : compare 
 431i 
 
 _ [ExEECiSE 23. Normal and Inverted Sentences.] 
 
 Transposed order of the sentence. 
 
 434. The two modes of arrangement heretofore ex- 
 plained belong to independent or principal sentences 
 or clauses (excepting only the inverted conditional 
 clauses, treated in the last paragraph). The German 
 construction, however, is most peculiar in that it has a 
 special mode of arrangement for dependent (sometimes 
 also called subordinate or accessory) clauses. In these, 
 namely, while the other members of the sentence remain 
 in their normal order, the personal verb is removed 
 from its proper place to the end of the clause. This 
 removal is called transposit'on, and the resulting ar- 
 rangement is styled the transposed. 
 
 Thus, in normal order, ber 2ag neigt ji(^ gufetnem Snbe; but, 
 transposed, mir fefteii, bafe ber ^ag jld) gu feinem ^nbe wnc^iwe see 
 that the day is drawing to its close; — bie ^dmmcrung Ucrljiillt 
 tt)ie ein buftiger ©(^leier bie §H)en unb ^ftdler; but, bie ^dmme= 
 rung, mUjt trie ein buftiger ©d)Icier bie C)i3^en unb Sadler Der- 
 IjixUt the twilight which envelopes like a misty vail the heights 
 and valleijs ; —hk ©onne ftatte il)re 33a5n boHenbet; but, al§ bie 
 ©onne i^re S3al)n boKenbet 1:jattt when the sun had finished its 
 course. 
 
 a. The name " transposed order or arrangement" is abbrevi- 
 ated, for the salie of convenience, from "arrangement with 
 transposed verb," which would be more fully and truly 
 descriptive. 
 
 435. Dependent clauses, 
 
 • 1. A dependent clause is one which enters, with the 
 value of a substantive, an adjective, or an adverb, into 
 the structure of some other clause* 
 
248 CONSTEUCTION OF SENTENCES. [435^ 
 
 2. Dependent clauses are of three kinds, according 
 to tlie parts of speech wliicli they represent — namely, 
 substantive clauses, adjective clauses, and adverb 
 clauses. 
 
 436. 1. A svhstantive dependent clause is one wliicli 
 has the value and construction of a noun. 
 
 2. Such a clause is introduced by ho!^ that, oB whether, 
 the compound relative pronouns and pronominal ad- 
 jective trer, tra^, and Xod6)vc (179), or the compound 
 relative conjunctions (386.2) iDie, toantt, tDO and its 
 compounds, etc. 
 
 3. A substantive clause stands in various constructions: 
 thus — 
 
 a. As subject of a verb : as, b a ^ cr bic ^cf anbten befreite, ift 
 IXoax Qiit that lie has released the ambassadors is, to-be sure, well; 
 iDann btefe ®rfcf)cinung jicf) jutrug, tDelc^e ^raft ben ©InBrud) 
 beftxmmtc, ift tief in ba§ i)un!cl bcr SSorgcit oe^iillt wheii this event 
 happened, what power determined the inroad, is deeply hidden in 
 the darkness of antiquity. 
 
 b. As object of a verb : thus, fie fragten, o b fie rcc^t toii^te, tt) c t 
 i^r 9Jlann U)dre they asked whether she really knew who her 
 husband was; i(f) tt)ill fe^en, tDO e§ licgt I will see where it lies; 
 ni(^t§ !ann iftm mieber erfc^cn, tt)a§ er terloren ))at nothing ean 
 make up to him what he has lost. 
 
 c. In apposition with a noun or its equivalent : thus, mit ber 
 gntfdjulbigung, ba^ er gum ^riege Berebet tDorben fei with the ex- 
 cuse, that he had been persuaded into the war; be§ (^eful^Ic§, b a^ 
 ni(^t§ im SeBen rc(J)t gefc^dl^e, tDcnn c§ 6IoB gefdidbe of the feeling 
 that nothing in life was d^ne properly if it was simply done; — 
 after e§, as preceding indefinite subject (154.4) : thus, gwcifeHjaft 
 Hieb e§ je^t, tt) eleven 2[Beg man einf c^Iagcn. f oKe it remained dx)ubt- 
 ful now, which road one was to take; — after other neuter indefin- 
 ites, pronominal and adjective (see 179.5): thus, allcm, ma§ ba 
 blul)t to everything that blossoms; — explaining a preceding ba 
 that represents a demonstrative pronoun-case governed by a 
 preposition: thus, bie§ trug o^ne 3tt)etfel (b a gu) bei, b a ^ nur bil* 
 ligea t)cvlangt murbe this doubtless contributed to the i^esult that 
 nothing um^easonable ivas demanded ; fiebai^tenur barauf, mie 
 
437] ADJECTIVE CLAUSE. 243 
 
 fic bie 9J^enfd^en in§ 35erberben locfen fonnte she thought only of how 
 she could entice men to destruction : see below, d. 
 
 d. As governed by a preposition : thus, o^nc ha^ er em ^Ia§ 
 not^ig ftatte without needing a glass; l)arret t^r, bt§ ha^ ber red)te 
 3i\nQ ben SJlunb eroffne are you waiting till [the time that] the righh 
 ring shall open its mouth ? aufecr toer f cine 9Jlitf cf)ulbtgen f eten ex- 
 cept whoever were his accomplices. 
 
 Only a few prepositions thus govern a substantive clause 
 directly, and s ^me of these (377.1), the ba^ being omitted, have 
 assumed the character of conjunctions: thus, bt§ bie Slutl^en 
 [gluten] fid) Derliefen till the floods should subside;— in general, if 
 such a clause is to be placed under the government of a prepo- 
 sition, it is anticipated by a t) a in combination with the prep- 
 osition, and itself follows, as if in apposition with the ba : see 
 just above, c; and compare 346.2a. 
 
 e. As dependent on a noun: thus, bie§ Waren bie ^anpt=' 
 urjac^en, h a^ fie nirgcnbg greunbe fal)cn obcr oeiDannen these 
 were the chief reasons [for the fact] that they nowhere found or 
 made friends. 
 
 f. A substantive clause not infrequently stands in dependence 
 upon a noun or a verb, by a pregnant construction, where a 
 simple substantive could not stand without a preposition, or 
 even sometimes more than that, to explain its relation to the 
 noun or verb : thus, er erlag bem ©d)mcr3e, ha^ foli^ Ungliirf in 
 feinen Sagen eintrdtc he broke down under his grief [at the fact] 
 that such a misfortune should occur in his time; [^ banfe (^ott, 
 ha^ id) meine ©ofine miebergefunben ftabe I thank God that I have 
 found my sons again; forgt, ha^ fie nid)t an§ meiner hammer 
 fommt take care that she does not leave my room. 
 
 g. A conditional clause after al§ (compare 4336) is sometimes 
 used with the value of a substantive clause : thus, bie anmut^ige 
 [anmutige] 3:dufd)unG, al§ fei e§ bie eigene feifteng, bie in alien 
 biefen ^n'^dngen mitfc^tt)eBt the pleasing illusion that (lit. as if) it is 
 our own personality which fl/)ats in all these appendages. 
 
 [Exercise 24. Transposed Order. Substantive Clauses.] 
 
 437. 1. An adjective dependent clause is one which 
 belongs to and qualifies a noun (or its equivalent : 113). 
 
 2. Such a clause is introduced by a relative pronoun, 
 ber or ipeld^cr (or a prepositional phrase containing such), 
 
250 CONSTEUCTION OF SENTENCES. [437- 
 
 or bj a relative conjunction — namely, the compounds of 
 ha and tDO with prepositions or with adverbs of direc- 
 tion, and the simple conjunctions Wo, tvtnn, tvann, ha, aU, 
 iuie (compare 386.3). 
 
 Thus, ein SSunf^, ben au(^ \d) in meinen Siinglinfl^iafiren l^atte 
 a wwh which I also had in the years of my youth; bag etnaige 
 3JZd6rc^en, n)eld^e§ er geprt l^atte unb gu ergd^Ien \m)^k the only 
 story which he Jiad heard and knew haw to tell; ben 9)lenf(^en, fiir 
 beffen SSertfjeibigung [S^erteibigung] ifire 6tammDater fampften 
 the man in whose defense their ancestors fought ; ij^r Ouellen 
 haijxn bte welfe 33rul"t fic^ brdngt ye fountains toward which tJie 
 drooping breast presses; einen SSertrag, ID o n a ^ bie ©nec^en einen 
 frieblic^en ^urc^gug eriaubten a treaty by which the Greeks oer- 
 mitted a peaceable transit; ha^ 9anh, tt)o ber 58runnquelf beg 
 ^laubcng entjprang the land where the fountain of faith first 
 sprang up ; tn ber ^legenseit, tt) e n n bag ^elta iiberfc^toemmt ift in 
 the rainy season, when the delta is inundated. 
 
 a. Any simple qualifying adjective may be converted by 
 means of a relative pronoun into an adjective clause : thus, ber 
 gute 9Jlann the good man into ber SJZann, ml^a gut ift the man 
 wlio is good; — and, on the other hand, the German often puts 
 into the form of an attributive adjective (especially a participle), 
 with modifying adjuncts, what we more naturally express in 
 English by an adjective clause : thus, er befiegte bie gu unt)orfi(^tig 
 unb in eingclnen ^btl^eilungen [^^Ibteilungen] borbringenben !Ror= 
 mannen he vanquished the Normans, who were pressing on too 
 incautiously and in isolated divisions. 
 
 The order of the parts of such a compound adjective is the 
 same with that of an adjective clause : thus, bie S^ormannen, 
 ml^^ gu unt)or]i(^tig unb in eingelnen ^bt^eilungen [^Ibteilungen] 
 borbrangen. 
 
 b. The German not infrequently uses an independent clause, 
 introduced by a demonstrative pronoun, where our idiom re- 
 quires an adjective clause, with a relative: thus, ba ift einer, 
 ber !ann tncl^r alg \^ there is one — he can do more than I (for ber 
 mcl)r alg id) !ann tvho can do more than I). The difference of ar- 
 rangement shows 1 lainly enough what such a clause Uterally 
 means. 
 
 c. An adjective clause is often employed, as in English, not so 
 much to describe or qualify a noun, as to add to the sentence, 
 in a more intimate way than by a simple connective, something 
 
438] ADVEKBIAL CLAUSE. 251 
 
 relating to a noun : thus, bie nationale Seibenfd)aft tt)affnete \\^ 
 oegen t^n; ber er unterlag, nac^bem . . ., the national passwn 
 armed itself against him ; to which he succumbed, after . . . — in- 
 stead of unb biefer unterlag er and to this he succumbed. Or, what 
 has logically a different value, as of a ground or reason, is cast 
 into the shape of a descriptive clause : thus, be^l^alb BefdjloB ber 
 ^aifer, bem baran lag, fc^neU su jetnem ©o'^ne gu fommen accord- 
 ingly the emperor, who was desirous of getting quickly to his son, 
 resolved . . . — ^instead of ba e§ iftm baran lag since he was desirous. 
 
 [Exercise 25. Transposed Order. Adjective Clauses.] 
 
 438. 1. An adverbial dependent dause is one which 
 performs the part of an adverb, by qualifying a verb, 
 an adjective, or another adverb. 
 
 2. It is introduced by one of the subordinating con- 
 junctions mentioned and classified above, under Con- 
 junctions (386.4). 
 
 3. a. An adverbial clause, in most cases, qualifies a verb. 
 
 Thus, as adverb of place, tt) o in ber 2Stlbntg alleS f (^tt)teg, t)er^ 
 na^m ic^ ha% ©eldute tuieber where in the wilderness all was silent, 
 I heard the pealing again ;—ot TIME, al§ nun bie 5}^orgenbdmme^ 
 rung begann, bcru()rte (Sloaft ben Sc^Iummernben when now the 
 morning twilight began, Eloah touched the slumberer ; t))' e§ giDOlf 
 fc^lug, jaBen [ie \mt Dorljcr before it struck twelve, they sat as &e- 
 /ore;— of MANNER, bu magft allc§ fdjauen, tx)ie id) bir gcfagt l^abe 
 thoumayest belwld everything as I have told it thee; e§ rajdjelt mit 
 ben Sften, 'tia^ mcin ^aul tod tcirb it rustles with the branches in 
 siwh wise that my liorse becomes frantic; — of cause, id) Blieb urn 
 fie, tueil fie freunblid) gcgen mid) xoax I hung about her, because 
 she was friendlij towaixl me; — of purpose, ber mu§ mitgeften, 
 bam it xo'xx ben Self en megfd)affen he must go along, in order that 
 ive may get the rock out of the way; — of condition, menu hn mir 
 bienen millft, fo !omm mit if you would like to serve me, then come 
 along; obglcid^ fie il)m na^e maren, tonnten fie i^n bod) m^i er= 
 bliden although tJiey were near him, they yet could not espy him; 
 —of DEGREE, j e l^eifeer e§ ift, befto me!)r frier' id) the hotter it is (in 
 proportion as it is hotter), so much the colder am I. 
 
 h. An adverbial clause qualifying an adjective is usually one 
 of degree or manner, introduced by mie or al§, as or than, or by 
 
252 CONSTRUCTION OF SENTENCES. [438- 
 
 fo ba^: thus, foI(i)e 33ebinGimgen, tt)te er fie t)or3uf(^lagen getDagt 
 ^at such conditions as he has dared to propose; ein ©tab, leic^t urn* 
 fa^t, jo ba§ feme ^Bemeciungen einigen ©ptelraum ^aben a staff 
 lightly grasped, so that its movements have some play; icf) "^abe fo 
 l^elle ^lugen ba§ tc^ burc^ bte gange SBelt fe{)en !ann //lai^e so dear 
 eyes that lean see through the whole world; ba§ ifl beffer, al§ \d) 
 t)on i^m ertoartet I)atte that is better than I had expected of him. 
 
 Where a fo is present, it strictly qualifies the adjective as an 
 adverb, and is itself qualifi 'd by the adverbial clause. 
 
 c. An adverbial clause qualifying an adverb is for the most 
 part either introduced by ba^ as correlative to fo, or it follows 
 a demonstrative adverb of the same kind with that by which it 
 is itself introduced, and correlative to the latter : thus, fie !^ob 
 ha§ eine ^ctu fo ))o^ empor, ba§ er eg burc^aug ni(^t ftnbcn fonntc 
 she lifted one leg so high up that he could not find it at all; cr 
 fonnte f(^on b a, mo bie 33rurfe aufftorte, ben T^cEen %aQ erbliden he 
 could already see the bright day at the point where the bridge 
 ended; tiur barum, tucil eine ©eele t)or^anben ift only for the 
 reason that a soul is present; er fpottete ber 3bee ii b e r a 11, it) o 
 fie nx^t feineg (5inne§ mar he mocked at ideas in all cases in which 
 they were not of his way of thijiking; \^ fann fie erft bann 
 fteEen, m e n n bie ©riec^en anbere an^Uefern / can only furnish 
 them at the time when the Greeks deliver up others. 
 
 In the 1 itter class of cases, the preceding adverb is often 
 superfluous, and the adverbial clause logically qualifies the 
 rer( 
 
 d. Out of the frequent use of fo with a following adverb in 
 the principal clause, and limited by a succeeding adverbial 
 clause introduced by al§ — for example, er ifl f o b a 1 b gefommen, 
 al§ i^ iftn rief he came as soon as I called him — has grown a 
 very common construction in which the adverbial clause is it- 
 self introduced by fo and the adverb (often combined into one 
 word), and the al§ is usually omitted (compare 386.4i) : thus, 
 in ^frifa, f o m e i t mir e§ fennen in Africa, so far as we know it; 
 fob alb ber DJlenfc^ fid) bem ^rucfe ber au^erften ^ot:^ plot] ent* 
 munben \^CLi as soon as man has relieved himself of the pressure 
 of extreme need; fo lang^ ein 51ug' noc^ meinen, ein ^zxiv.0^ 
 brec^en fann, fo lange mallt auf @rben bte (S^ottin ^oefie so long 
 as an eye can yet weep, a heart yet break — so long walks upon 
 earth the goddess Poetry. 
 
 e. A similar construction is sometimes made with an adjective, 
 predicative or attributive : thus, aber f o g r o ^ e n D^tu^m bicfcr 
 
 "^ d. 
 
438] ADVEBBIAL CLAUSE. 253 
 
 6icg an^ ben ^itgcrn bxa^k hut, great as was the fame this 
 victory brought to the pilgriins, or however great fame this victory 
 brought, etc. — literally, .so great fame as it even brought. 
 
 In both these classes of cases, the imphcation of the omitted 
 al§ is clearly shown by the transposed arrangement of the 
 clause ; and they are thus readily distinguished from the cases 
 where job alb, fo lange, etc., have simply their literal meaning. 
 
 /. If an adverbial clause, or an inverted conditional clause 
 (4336), be put at the head of the sentence, the principal clause 
 takes the inverted arrangement, just as after a simple adverb 
 (431)": thus, tt) ie er ha^ ^orte, ftanb er auf when he heard that, he 
 arose; lue n n bie (^raSbcrfe in ©taub gerfallen ift, flafft ber erpr= 
 tete 33oben auf when the covering of grass has fallen into dust, the 
 hardened earth cleaves open; e^e jie gur 5^atur guriidfeftrt, !ommt 
 fie gur ^lanier before it returns to nature, it becomes mannerism; 
 tuell mir bie§ febr miBbebaGte, banfte ic^ i^m gang furg as this was 
 very disagreeable to me, I thanked him quite curtly. 
 
 g. After a prefixed adverbial clause, the principal clause is 
 very often introduced by a particle — fo, ba, or the like; 
 especially fo — correlative to the conjunction of the former, and 
 rendering easier the inversion : thus, tt) e n n ba§ ift, f o fann \^ 
 bid) brauc^ett if that is the case, (then) I can make use of you; 
 al§ er bie ^anh guriitf^oG, ba ftob fid) bie ©(^o(le when he with- 
 drew his hand, (then) the clod rose. — A f o stands in like manner 
 as correlative to the imphed tt)enit if of an inverted conditional 
 clause: thus, faitn eud) ba§ tiiifeen, f o tuiH ic^ eud) gem bieneiyf*-..^^ 
 tlmt can help you, (then) I will gladly serve you. /^ 
 
 And the inversion of the principal clause comes so to depend 
 in appearance upon the correlative particle, that, when the 
 particle is omitted, the clause not very infrequently retains its 
 normal order: thus, ^^dtte er ben grieben getDiinfc^t, e§ iDtire feinetn 
 9lei(^e t)ort^cil'^aft [t)ortctII)aft] getrefen (for todre e§, or fo tt)dre e§) 
 had he wished peace, it would have been advantageous to his 
 realm. 
 
 h. An independent clause is often employed in German where 
 our usage requires a dependent adverbial clause. Thus, for 
 example, usually in a clause after one containing fautti hardly : 
 as, faiittt tear ber 35ater tobt [bt], fo fomttit ein ieber ttiit feiuem 
 Sting hardly was tlie father dead, when ("lit. then) each one comes 
 with his ring. 
 
 i. An adverbial clause, like an adjective clause (437c), is 
 sometimes made use of to add something to the sentence — 
 
254 CONSTKUCTION OF SENTENCES. [438- 
 
 thus, bo^ ^liinberten diUQC an§ llbermutl) [Ubermut] ; n)c§l&alb 
 bic 3iifiiftr aufprte uub ^Jlangel entftanb yet some, out of wanton- 
 ness, committed pillage : on which account the supply ceased and 
 want arose — or to make an antithesis — or for other purposes 
 not wholly accordant with the office of a simple adverb, 
 
 [Exercise 26. Transposed Order, Adverbial Clause.] 
 
 439. Additional rules respecting dependent clauses in general. 
 
 1. In the transposed, as in the inverted (431/0 order of the 
 sentence, a personal pronoun as object of the verb not in- 
 frequently stands before the subject: thus, bafiir, ba^ tl^nen 
 bie ^riftlic^en ^ird)en in ^alaftina etngerdumt tuerben ioKten on 
 condition that the Christian churches in Palestine should be placed 
 in their possession; eln Sanb, too ft (^ alleg in SiiCe borfinbet a land 
 where everything is found in abundance; ai§ iDenn fie i !^ m ber 
 ^ob Qcraubt ti'dtk than if death had snatched Iter from him. 
 
 2. When a clause ends with two or n;ore infinitives, of which 
 the last is used in place of a participle (240.1c), the transposed 
 verb is put next before instead of after them : thus, tt)etl id) nic^t 
 5ab e gc'^en fonnen because I have not been able to go; benn iftr 
 mi^t, ba^ \i)X mid) l^aht ermorben laffen moHen for ijou knmu that 
 you Imve wanted to have me murdered. Compare 348.2a. 
 
 By imitation of this construction, the transposed verb is also 
 sometimes placed before a participle and infinitive, or two 
 participles. 
 
 3. a. In a dependent clause, the transposed auxiliary (^aBen 
 or f ein) of a perfect or pluperfect tense is very frequently omit- 
 ted, and has to be inferred from the connection : thus, frii!^cr 
 al§ i^r fiebac^t (^attet) earlier than you had thought, ha^ T^ie unb 
 ba ein ^(urflid)er gemefen (ift) that here and there has been one 
 happy man, inbem er glt)ei ntd)t (!)at) briiden mogen as he had not 
 wished to do injustice to two, n)a§ 5cuer§ SSut^ [SBut] tftm au(^ 
 geraubt (ftaBe) whatever the fire's fury may have taken from him. 
 
 b. Much more rarely, the transposed copula (a form of fein 
 be) is in Uke manner omitted : thus, ba^ mir e§ iinmer uncrfldrt 
 (ifl) that it is ever unaccountable to me, n)enn be§ f^ragenS t()r nic^t 
 miib' (fetb) if ye are not weanj of asking, bie 2Bege, auf n)eld)en ha^ 
 S3efte gn '^aben (ift) the ways in widch the best is to be had. 
 
 4 a. An exclamation often has the arrangement of a 
 dependent clause : thus, n)er mit cud) ttJanberte if one could but go 
 
439] DEl>Em)ENT CLATTSES. 2l55 
 
 with you! (lit. [how happy he] who should etc.) ; xok er \\^ tt)inbet 
 Jww he twists himself! 
 
 b. A question may be asked in the same manner : thus, oB fie 
 hJD^l ^orcf)t [I wonder] whether she is perhaps listening? 
 
 5. Whether a dependent clause shall be placed within the 
 framework of the one upon which it depends, or outside that 
 framework, is determined mainly by rhetorical or euphonic 
 considerations ; but it is much more usually placed outside : 
 thus, ha^ allererfte, tt)a§ ]ie in biefer 2BeIt Morten, al§ ber ^ecfel t)ott 
 ber ©c^ad^tel genommen murbe, in bei* jie lagen, \oai ba§ 2Bort: 
 „3innfolbaten!" the very first thing that they heard in this wo7'ld, 
 when the cover was taken from the box in which they lay, was the 
 word " tin soldiers ! "—not waS fie in biefer SSelt, ala ber i)e(fel t)on 
 ber ^^a^kl, in ber fie lagen, Qenommen tDurbe, ftorten, which would 
 be excessively awkward. But, as the example shows, clauses 
 qualifying the subject of a sentence have to be brought in 
 before the predicate — unless, indeed, as is often done, the prin- 
 cipal clause is inverted. 
 
 6. In general, no sentence in Germin takes the transposed ar- 
 rangement, as a dependent clause, unless it be grammatically as 
 well as logically dependent — that is to say, unless it be introduced 
 by a word (conjunction or relative pronoun) which gives it dis- 
 tinctly and formally a dependent character. Many a clause is 
 logically dependent (especially as a substantive clause) without 
 being so formally : thus, id) bd(5^te, e§ tDdre urn befto QottUc^er (or, 
 ha^ e§ urn befto flottIid)er rodre) I should think it was so muck 
 the more divine (or, that it was etc.). 
 
 Exceptions are — 
 
 a. A clause following another dependent clause, and implying 
 the same subordinating word by which the former was intro- 
 duced : thus, {)iegu !am, b a ^ bie ^TonxQt t)on Sictlien mil C>ofrdn!en 
 fdm^fen marten, ber Dlorben gu fern lag, unb ©panien fic^ !aum ber 
 nd^eren f^etnbe ertDe'^ren fonnte to this was added, that the kings of 
 Sicily had to contend with court intrigues, [that] tJie north lay too 
 far away, and [tJiat] Spain coidd hardly defend herself against 
 nearer enemies. 
 
 b. The cases explained above (438.3c?,e), where al§ is omitted 
 after fo followed by an adverb or adjective. 
 
 c. A number of words (adverbs, prepositions, and so on) which 
 were formerly construed with substantive clauses introduced 
 by ba^ tJmt — or, in part, are sometimes still so construed — have 
 
^5Q CONSTEUCTION OP SENTENCES. [439^ 
 
 now won the character of conjunctions (compare 382c), and 
 themselves introduce a dependent clause directly, the t^a^ being 
 omitted : thus, bi§ until (for 6i§ ba§ as far as the time that), 
 ungeac^tet although (for ungeac^tet ha^ it being disregarded that), 
 nun now (for nun ba^ now that), and others : compare 377.1. 
 
 d. It may be remarked here that an inverted conditional 
 clause (433) is really an adverbial dependent clause, both logic- 
 ally and formally — as much so as if it were introduced by mnn 
 if, and had the transposed order of arrangement ; only its de- 
 pendence is shown in another and pecuhar manner. 
 
 Summary of the Bales of Arrangement. 
 
 44.0. For the convenience of both teacher and learner, the 
 leading rules respecting the arrangement of clauses, those 
 which it is most important to commit to memory and keep con- 
 stantly ready for application, are presented below in summary. 
 Eeferences to the fuller statements above are added. 
 
 441. 1. There are tliree modes of arranging the 
 sentence in German : 
 
 a. The normal, or regvlar (430) ; 
 
 b. The inverted (431-3) ; 
 
 c. The transposed (434:-9). 
 
 2. The first two belong to independent clauses, the 
 third to dependent (434). 
 
 3. Their character is determined by the position of 
 the bare predicate, or the personal verb : 
 
 a. In the normal arrangement, the personal verb im- 
 mediately follows the subject ; 
 
 h. In the inverted arrangement, it precedes the sub- 
 ject ; 
 
 c. In the transposed arrangement, it is at the end of 
 the clause. 
 
 442. The order of the normal sentence is— 
 
 1. The subject; 
 
 2. The bare predicate, or personal verb ; 
 
443] EULES OF AKRANGEMENT. 257 
 
 3. The various modifying adjuncts of the predicate, 
 as objects, adverbs, predicate noun or adjective ; 
 
 4. Finally, the non-personal part of the verb (if there 
 be one) — namely, prefix, participle, or infinitive : and, 
 if more than one be present, they follow one another in 
 their order as here mentioned. 
 
 Among the modifying adjuncts of the predicate, stand- 
 ing after the personal verb, or between it and the non- 
 personal part of the verb — 
 
 a. A personal pronoun directly dependent on the verb 
 regularly comes first ; 
 
 h. An accusative object precedes a genitive, and more 
 usually follows a dative ; 
 
 c. An adverb of time ordinarily comes before one of 
 place, and both before one of manner ; 
 
 d. A predicate noun or adjective, especially an ob- 
 jective predicate, usually comes last. 
 
 More special rules would be too liable to exceptions to be 
 worth giving. 
 Examples of a normally arranged sentence : 
 
 1. 2. 3. 4. 
 
 cr fd^irft; 
 
 er \&i\di ha^ ^u(^ ; 
 
 er \)Cii mir 'txx^ 33u^ Qcfi^tcft ; 
 
 mcin Sreunb tDtrb mir 'ba^ 33uc^ balb nac^ §aiife gunicfgefcfiirft ^aBcn : 
 that is, he aends; he sends the hook; he has sent me tlie hook; 
 my friend will soon have sent the hook hack home to me. 
 
 443. The order of the inverted sentence is the same 
 with that of the normal sentence, except that the sub- 
 ject comes next after the personal verb, instead of next 
 before. 
 
 The inverted order is followed — 
 
 1. When any adjunct of the predicate verb is put in 
 the place of the subject, at the head of the sentence 
 (431ay); 
 
258 CONSTRUCTION OP SENTENCES. [443- 
 
 2. Rarely, for impressiveness ; with the personal verb 
 first, and usually with boc^ or [a surely, somewhere after 
 it (431^); 
 
 3. In interrogative sentences, or when a question is 
 asked (432.1); 
 
 4 In optative or imperative sentences — that is, when 
 a command or desire is expressed (432.2) ; 
 
 5. Often in conditional sentences, or to give the mean- 
 ing of if (433). 
 
 Special rules, a. The general connectives, meaning 
 and, but, for, or or (384), are the only words which, save 
 in rare and exceptional cases, are allowed to precede 
 the subject without inverting the sentence. 
 
 h. In an inverted sentence, a personal pronoun as ob- 
 ject is often put before the subject (431A). 
 
 Examples of inverted sentences : 
 
 1» tnir ftat er ba§ 35ud) flef(^irft ; 
 
 ha^ ^ud) l)at er mir Qefc^lrft ; 
 
 QejcE)i(!t ^at er mir ba§ 33uc^ : 
 that is, he has sent me the book— with varying emphasis, first on 
 me, then on the hook, last on sent. 
 
 2. Ijat er mir bocf) ba§ 33u(^ gefdiicft: 
 that is, surely he has sent me the hook. 
 
 3. 'i)at er mir ha^ 33u(^ flefd^icft ? 
 tt)a§ ^ai er mir gef^idt ? 
 
 ttjem ^t er ha^ 33ud) gej^icft ? 
 that is, has he sent me the hook? what has he sent me? to whom 
 has he sent the book ? 
 
 4. jd^ide er mir ba§ 33u^ ! 
 that is, let him send m£ the book! 
 
 5. fd^idt er mir ba§ 35ud), jo Iftut er mo^l : 
 that is, if he sends me the book, he does well. 
 
 h. 5at mir mein greunb ha§ 33ud) gefdiidt? 
 that is, has my friend sent me the book ? 
 
444] RULES OF ARRANGEMENT. 259 
 
 444. The order of the transposed clause is the same 
 with that of the normal sentence, except that the per- 
 sonal verb is removed from its proper place to the very 
 end of the clause. 
 
 The transposed order is followed in dependent dauses — 
 that is to say, in such as, being introduced by a sub- 
 ordinating word (relative pronoun or conjunction), are 
 made to enter as members into the structure of some 
 other clause (435). 
 
 Such a clause has the value either of a noun, an ad- 
 jective, or an adverb, and is accordingly reckoned* as 
 a substantive, adjective, or adverbial dependent clause 
 (436-8). 
 
 1. A substantive dependent clause (436) is either the 
 subject or object of a verb, or in apposition with or de- 
 pendent upon a noun, or governed by a preposition. 
 
 It is introduced by \io!^ that, ob whether, or a compound 
 relative pronoun or particle (386.2). 
 Example of a substantive dependent clause (objective) : 
 
 t(^ tt)eiJ3, baf3 er mir ba§ 33u(^ gefc^idt ftat : 
 that is, I know that he has sent me the hook. 
 
 2. An adjective dependent clause (437) belongs to and 
 qualifies a noun. 
 
 It is introduced by a relative pronoun or a relative 
 particle (386.3). 
 
 Example of an adjective dependent clause : 
 
 'tiOi^ 33u(^, n)e((^e§ er mir gefdjicft %ai : 
 that is, the book which he has sent to me. 
 
 3. An adverbial dependent clause (438) qualifies usually 
 a verb, sometimes an adjective or an adverb. 
 
 It is introduced by a subordinating conjunction of 
 place, time, manner, cause, purpose, condition, or degree 
 (386.4). 
 
260 CONSTRtJCTION OF SENTENCES. [444r 
 
 Examples of an adverbial dependent clause : 
 
 aU er mir ba§ 33u^ fc^ldte ; 
 U)enn er mir ha^ ^gud) Gcjd)icEt l^at : 
 that is, when he sent me the hook; if he lias sent me the hook, 
 
 Sjoedal rules, a. In a transposed sentence, a personal 
 pronoun as object is sometimes put before the subject, 
 if the latter be a noun (439.1). 
 
 h. If the sentence ends with more than one infinitive, 
 the transposed verb is put next before instead of after 
 theiji (439.2). 
 
 Examples : 
 
 a. oB mir mctn Sreunb ha^ 33ucE) gef(^ic!t ^at; 
 
 h. mW er mir ba§ 33u(^ nii^t \)Cii \6)\dtx[ tDoUen: 
 that is, whether my friend has sent me the hook; hecause he has 
 not wanted to send me the hook. 
 
 Concluding Bemarks, 
 
 445. It must not be supposed that the rules of arrangement, 
 as drawn out in the preceding pages, are always and every- 
 where strictly observed, even in prose. The demands of eu- 
 phony, the suggestions of style, even sometimes the arbitrary 
 and unexplainable choice of a writer, lead to their not infrequent 
 violation. A few cases of such violation, of sufficiently prevalent 
 occurrence to constitute exceptional classes, have been pointed 
 out above ; but to show in detail the different degree of obli- 
 gatory force belonging to the different rules, and how and 
 under what circumstances their neglect is permitted, would re- 
 quire a treatise. 
 
 446. The construction of sentences has been taken up and 
 treated here only on its grammatical side. To treat it on its 
 rhetorical or stylistic side — to explain how and to what extent 
 clauses may be put together so as to form admissible or har- 
 monious sentences and periods — is not the duty of a grammar. 
 There is, in theory, no limitation to the expansion of a simple 
 sentence ; for both its subject and predicate may involve a 
 variety of modifying adjuncts in the shape of words, phrases, 
 
447] RHETOKICAL CONSTRUCTION. 261 
 
 and clauses ; and each part of these clauses may take on further 
 clauses as adjuncts — and so on, ad infinitum. The usages of 
 the language, gradually established under the influence of a 
 regard for euphony and for convenient intelligibility, practi- 
 cally set bounds to this indeflnite expansion. But the bounds 
 are very differently drawn in different styles of composition, in 
 every language, and the variety in German is notably greater 
 than in most other languages. Between the style of simple nar- 
 ration and that excessive involution and intricacy in which 
 many German writers love to indulge, there is an immense in- 
 terval. It is because poetry is intolerant of involved periods 
 that German poetry is, upon the whole, decidedly easier to the 
 learner than German prose. No one, of course, can put together 
 German periods which shall be tolerable — much less, elegant — 
 after study of the rules of construction in a grammar ; familiar- 
 ity with the language as spoken and written, the acquisition of 
 what seems an instinctive feeling for the harmony of construc- 
 tion, but is in fact an educated habit, the product of much read- 
 ing and hearing, can alone enable one to compose such sentences 
 as Germans compose. 
 
 RELATION OF GERMAN TO ENGLISH. 
 
 447. 1. A part, and the most essential part, of our 
 English language — namely, that derived from the Anglo- 
 Saxon — ^is of near kindred with the German. 
 
 a. That other and very' important part of our language which 
 is more directly akin with the French and Latin was brought in 
 and grafted upon the Anglo-Saxon in consequence of the con- 
 quest of England by the Normans, in the 11th century. The 
 Normans were of Germanic (Scandinavian) race, though they 
 had been settled in France long enough to have substituted the 
 French language for their own. Thus our Germanic blood is 
 purer from intermixture than our Germanic speech. 
 
 2. This part akin with German includes, along with the most 
 frequently used and familiar words in our vocabulary, nearly 
 the whole of the grammatical apparatus of English— that is to 
 say, all its endings of inflection (393), most of its endings of der- 
 ivation, its suffixes and prefixes (394-5), and the larger part of 
 it^ indeclinable particles, or w^ords of relation, 
 
262 EELATION OF GERMAN TO ENGLISH. [448- 
 
 448. Kindred in language, as elsewhere, implies 
 descent from a common ancestor : the English and 
 German are modern dialects of one original language. 
 
 a. That is to say, there was a time when the forefathers of 
 the English-speakers and those of the German-speakers formed 
 together a single community, of uniform speech. By its division, 
 under historical causes, into separate and independent com- 
 munities, and by the consequently discordant changes which 
 these communities have wrought each upon its own speech, the 
 various dialects now spoken have gradually come to exhibit the 
 differences which characterize them. 
 
 6. Thus, the Englishman and the German both use the words 
 sinQj sang (jing', fang) in the same sense, because each has 
 received them with this sense by uninterrupted tradition — 
 going down from father to son just as language goes nowadays 
 — from ancestors who lived together and differed in their talk 
 no more than we ourselves and our immediate neighbors. Thus, 
 on the other hand, the one says slay, slew, and the other fd)laG^ 
 fc^Iug (strike, struck) — ^words originally identical in pronuncia- 
 tion and meaning, though now different in both — because these 
 words have, in the course of their tradition, become differently 
 altered in the on^ and the other line, in the same manner as 
 words ar& altered nowadays. 
 
 449. The English and German are joint members of 
 a group or sub-fam ly of dialects called the Germanic 
 (often also "Teutonic"); which, again, is a member of 
 a larger family, called the indo-european (also " Indo- 
 Germanic," or "Aryan"). 
 
 450. The Indo-European family includes most of 
 the languages of Europe and southwestern Asia. Its 
 divisions are — 
 
 1. The Germanic (4:51) ; 
 
 2. The Slavic (Eussian, Polish, Bohemian, Servian, 
 Bulgarian, etc.) and Lithuanic; 
 
 3. The Celtic (Welsh, Irish, Gaelic, etc.) ; 
 
451] GEEMANIC BRANCH OF INDO-EUROPEAN FAMILY. 263 
 
 4. The Italic (Latin, etc. ; and, as modern represen- 
 tatives of the Latin, the Italian, French, Spanish, etc.) ; 
 
 5. The Greek (ancient and modern) ; 
 
 6. The Persian (Zend, Modern Persian, etc.) ; 
 
 7. The Indian (ancient Sanskrit, Pali, Prakrit; 
 modern Hindi, Bengali, Marathi, etc.). 
 
 a. The resemblances and differences of these languages are 
 of the same kind with those of the English and German, and 
 due to the same causes. If, where we say six and the German 
 fed^§, the ancient Koman said sex, the ancient Greek hex, the 
 Hindu sliash, and so on, it is all for the same reason for which 
 both the Germans and we say sing and sang (above, 448&). 
 Only, in this wider family, of races whose separation is much 
 more ancient, the remaining correspondences are proportionally 
 fewer and less conspicuous, the discordances more numerous 
 and deeper. 
 
 6. Although relationships for the languages here named have 
 been surmised, and are often claimed, on a yet wider scale (for 
 example, with the Hebrew and the other "Semitic" languages), 
 they have not been demonstrated. 
 
 451. The divisions of the Germanic branch of this 
 great family are as follows ; 
 
 1. The Low- German, occupying the lowlands of northern 
 Germany. To this division belong — the English, as modern 
 representative of the Anglo-Saxon, which was carried into 
 England, and made to displace the Celtic, by the invading 
 tribes from the northern shores of Germany, in the fifth 
 century ; the Dutch, or literary language of the Netherlands ; 
 the ancient Saxon and Frisian, no longer cultivated ; and the 
 various dialects now spoken among the people in northern 
 Germany, whose literary language is the cultivated High- 
 German, or " German." 
 
 2. The ITigh - German, occupying central and southern 
 Germany. The only existing cultivated dialect of this division 
 is the one which we know as "the German" language; its 
 history will be given with a little more fulness farther on 
 (462 etc.). 
 
 3. The Scandinavian, occupying the peninsulas of Denmark 
 and Sweden and Norway, with the island of Iceland (colonized 
 
264 BELATION OF GERMAN TO ENGLISH. [45L 
 
 from Norway in the ninth century). Its languages are the 
 ancient Icelandic or Old Norse, and the Norwegian, Swedish^ 
 and Danish. 
 
 These are all the divisions represented by existing languages. 
 Besides them, however, is to be noticed — 
 
 4. The Gothic, represented by parts of a Gothic version of 
 the Bible made in the fourth century of our era in the dialect 
 of the Goths of Moesia (generally called, therefore, the Moeso- 
 Gothic), by their bishop Ulfilas. Of all the extant monuments 
 of Germanic language, this is by two or three centuries the 
 oldest, and therefore of the highest value in all inquiries into 
 the history of the whole Germanic family of languages. 
 
 452. 1. The more immediate connection of English 
 is with the Low-German languages ; but its relation to 
 the German is very near^ as compared with that to the 
 other European tongues, and the correspondences of 
 word, grammatical form, and meaning, between the 
 two are numerous and striking. 
 
 2. These correspondences — besides their intrinsic 
 interest, and their value as historical evidences bearing 
 upon the development of both languages, the relations 
 of the races speaking them, and the growth of ideas 
 and institutions among those races — have also a prac- 
 tical value, as a help to the scholar to whose attention 
 they are brought in retaining the meaning of the Ger- 
 man words he is endeavoring to learn. 
 
 3. It is the proper duty of a German-English dictionary to 
 point out in detail the English words which are to be regarded 
 as identical, or of kindred elements, with German words (a duty 
 sought to be fulfilled in the vocabulary to the author's German 
 Reader). But no small part of the correspondences are readily 
 to be discovered by the scholar himself, especially if his 
 researches are guided at first by a judicious and enlightened 
 teacher. 
 
 4 The varieties of difference, both of form and meaning, 
 which distinguish German words from their English correspond- 
 ents, are much too great to allow of their being set forth here. 
 To exhibit with fulness even the more important among them, 
 
454] PROGEESSION OF MUTES. 265 
 
 and explain their reasons (so far as these admit of explanation), 
 would be the work of a professed comparative grammar of the 
 Germanic languages. There is, however, one set of differences 
 which are so regular in their occurrence, and which are of such 
 prime importance for one who undertakes to compare German 
 words with EngUsh, that they may not be passed without 
 notice. 
 
 TJie Law vf Progression of Mutes. 
 
 453. In regard to their mutes, the Germanic lan- 
 guages show a very peculiar set of changes as compared 
 with the other branches of the family ; and a part of 
 the Germanic languages themselves show, as compared 
 with the rest, another and similar, though less complete, 
 set of changes. These changes were first clearly es- 
 tablished and illustrated by the great German gram- 
 marian, Jacob Grimm ; and their statement is generally 
 called, after him, Grimm's Law — or also the law of pro- 
 gression or rotation of mutes (in German, the £aut* 
 t)erj(^tebimg pushing of sounds out of place), 
 
 454. The original mute letters of the Indo-European 
 languages are nine in number, and of three classes — 
 lingual or ^-mutes, palatal or A:-mutes, and labial or 
 p-mutes : each class containing a surd mute (t, k, p), an 
 aspirate (th, kh,pJi — more originally dh, gh, hh), and a 
 sonant (dy g, b). Thus — 
 
 surd. 
 
 lingual mutes t 
 
 palatal mutes k 
 
 labial mutes p 
 
 a. These aspirates are to be understood as uttered in the way 
 they are written— that is to say, with an h or aspiration audibly 
 following the mute letter which begins them : and not, for in- 
 stance, as we are accustomed to pronounce our th and ph. These 
 last are not aspirated mutes, but spirants, simple continuable 
 sounds, which have grown out of the aspirates, but are phonet- 
 ically of quite another character. Any aspirate in the Germanic 
 languages which had become a spirant was no longer liable to 
 the law of progression, 
 
 aspirate. 
 
 sonant. 
 
 dh or th 
 
 d 
 
 gh or kh 
 
 9 
 
 hh or ph 
 
 b 
 
266 RELATION OF GERMAN TO ENGLISH. [455- 
 
 455. It is found now that, as a general rule, in tlie 
 great body of the Germanic languages (Gothic, Scan- 
 dinavian, Low-German), each of these mutes has been 
 pushed forward one step in its own class, the surds hav- 
 ing become aspirates, the aspirates sonants, and the 
 sonants surds; while, in the High-German languages 
 (including the "German"), each has been pushed for- 
 ward two steps, the surds having become sonants, the 
 aspirates surds, and the sonants aspirates. 
 
 456. 1. This rule would in strictness require an 
 
 lingual labial palatal 
 
 original t, th, d p, ph, b k, kJiy g to have become 
 English thj d, t ph, b, p kh, g, k and 
 German d, t, ih b, p, ph g, k, kh; 
 but to the regularity of this result there are many ex- 
 ceptions : 
 
 a. Original p and k, in whole classes of words, at their first 
 change were converted into the spirants / and h, instead of 
 the aspirated mutes ph and kh, and so remained unaltered by 
 the second change. 
 
 6. The High-German dialects in general took the second step 
 of progression less completely and less strictly in the labial and 
 palatal than in the lingual series. In the two former classes, 
 some dialects, at a certain period, were more faithful to the 
 requirements of the rule than were others ; but, in the modern 
 German, the authority of these other dialects has prevailed. 
 Thus, for Bin he the older monuments give pirn [p for h) — and 
 so in a great number of other cases. 
 
 c. In the lingual series, the German has converted the aspirate 
 th, regularly required as the correspondent of English t, into a 
 sibilant, f or 3. 
 
 2. Hence, the actual correspondence between Eng- 
 lish and German, so far as concerns the law of progres- 
 sion, is in general as follows : 
 
 lingual labial palatal 
 
 to English th, d, t /, by p h, g, k correspond 
 German b, t, f,,^ h,\ h, f,p Ij, g, I 
 
459] CORRESPONDENCES OF LETTERS. .267 
 
 Even these correspondences, however, do not hold strictly in 
 all cases : thus — 
 
 a. A mute is often protected from alteration by combination 
 with another letter: thus, d by n or I: as in ganb land, tt)anbern 
 wander, ©olb gold;—t by s, h (ch, gh),f: as in 6teln stone, §aft 
 haste, ^Jlad)i night, ^xa\i craft. 
 
 h. Even the oldest English and German (the Anglo-Saxon and 
 the old High-German) have their irregular exceptions to the 
 rules of correspondence; and these exceptions have become 
 much more numerous in later times, as each language, in the 
 course of its history, has suffered anomalous changes in some 
 of its words and letters. 
 
 457. Below are given examples of the more important cor- 
 respondences between German and English consonants — those 
 which result from the law of progression, and a few others. 
 
 458. Lingual series. 
 
 1. ^ in German answers regularly to English th: thus, ba§ 
 that, benfen think, hid thick, bod) though, ^ur[l thirst, brei three, 
 S3ab hath, ^ruber brother, (Jrbe earth. 
 
 a. The most important exception is that of a b after n or I, as 
 noticed above (456.2a). 
 
 2. % (or t^^ : see 37) in German answers regularly to English d: 
 thus, ^ag day, tief deep, %dh death, i:^un do, Ilebte loved, ©ott^eit 
 godhead, felten seldom, 2Bort word, unter under. 
 
 a. Excepted especially is a t after f, ^, \, which (as noticed 
 above, 456.2a) usually corresponds to an English t. 
 
 3. The lingual sibilants in German, §, \\, §, g, often correspond 
 to English t: thus, h(x^, ba^ that, l)eife hot, e§ it, au§ out, Befjer 
 letter, gu^/oo«, ix^dtwo, gu to, '^txitide, '^al)\ tale, 3oIl to??. 
 
 a. But the sibilants are also in numberless cases the represen- 
 tatives of original sibilants, and are therefore found alike, or 
 with but slight variations, in German and English : thus, fing 
 sing, jo so, bte§ this, (Stein stone, (5d)am shame, Sdjnee snow, 
 f(5^elten scold. 
 
 459. Labial series. 
 
 1. a. 33, in German, when initial, regularly answers to English 
 J): thus, $gab bath, ^ruber brother, ^lut blood, ^]ebovcn born. 
 
268 RELATION OF GERMAN TO ENGLISH. [459- 
 
 6. In the middle of a word, or as final, it is usually represen- 
 ted in EngUsh by f orv: thus, ab off, of, l)arb half, taub deaf, 
 2Bei6 wife, lieb lief;—%aubt dove, fterben starve, jieben seven 
 ^nabt knave, iiBer over, ^^khn fever. 
 
 2. ^ in German answers, with very few exceptions, to English 
 p: thus, \)a\\tn pass, ^i^ pitch, "^laQt plague, ©pie^spi^, jpringen 
 spring. 
 
 3. a. 5, like 5, agrees with English / when initial : thus, f aHett 
 fall, 5i]c^^7i, ^n^foot, fUegenyfi/, \vdfree. 
 
 b. Elsewhere in a word, it usually corresponds to English p : 
 thus, tief deep, ©d)Iaf sleep, auf up, reif ripe, frf)affen s/iape, l^elfen 
 help, merfen i^arp, offen open. 
 
 4. ^f is a peculiar German combination, occurring with great 
 frequency in words anciently derived from the Latin, as rep- 
 resenting a Latin p : thus, ^flanjc plant (Lat. planta), $f orte 
 dx)or (Lat. porta), ^feil arrow (Lat. pilum), ^feffer pepper (Lat. 
 piper), ^funb pound (Lat. pondus). But it is also found in a 
 good many words of Germanic origin : thus, ^pfel appZe, ^f(i(^t 
 i)Zigf7i<, ©(S^nepfe snipe, ppfen /top, $fro|)f prop. 
 
 460. Palatal series. 
 
 As a general rule, the letters of this series — ^namely, q, f, 5/ 
 also n! and ng — are the same in German and English : thus, 
 ©ott god, \)tm\]tn forget, griin green, ^aQtn wagon ;— Mi cold, 
 bid f/iic/c, tntrfen work, flax clear, ^nabc knave;— ^aat hair, §cr§ 
 Tieari;— jinfen ^nfc, fingen sing. 
 
 Exceptions, however, of a more irregular kind, are very 
 numerous. Thus — 
 
 a. English ch is found not infrequently where the German 
 has !: thus, ^inn chin, ©trerfe stretch. 
 
 b. German ^ is variously represented in English, by k, gh, 
 tch, etc. : thus, 33u(f| book, ho^ though, leic^t light, ^ec^ pitch. 
 
 c. An original g, which the German has retained, has very 
 often undergone manifold corruption or loss in Enghsh : thus, 
 2:ag day, liege, liigc lie, mag may, 2Beg way;—Qnqtl hill, Siegel 
 tile, S5ogeI/oii;Z;— folgcn/oZtow, 33alg bellows, <BoxQt sorrow, borgen 
 borrow; — and so on. 
 
 d. §, as has been pointed out, is in German very often a mere 
 orthographical device for signifying the long quantity of the 
 neighboring vowel. Of course, where it has this character, 
 uothinsr corresponding with it in English i^ to be Jool^e^ for. 
 
462] mSTOEY OF GEKMAN. 269 
 
 461. Into the discussion of the general tendencies and the 
 special causes which have led to the harmonies and dis- 
 crepancies of German and English words, and have produced 
 either classes of correspondences or single and apparently- 
 anomalous cases of difference, we cannot here enter : such sub- 
 jects would be in place in a historical grammar of German, or 
 a comparative grammar of the Germanic languages in general. 
 
 BRIEF HISTORY OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 
 
 462. The German language is, as has been seen, one 
 of the dialects of the High-German sub-division of the 
 Germanic division or branch of the Indo-European 
 family of languages. 
 
 a. Every cultivated or literary language is, in the same way, 
 by origin one of a group of more or less discordant dialects — 
 one to which external circumstances have given prominence 
 above the rest. 
 
 h. Since unity of speech cannot be maintained over a wide 
 extent of country, or through a numerous community, except 
 by aid of the unifying influences of high civihzation and lit- 
 erature, it is only a matter of course that Germany, at the 
 beginning of the historical era, was filled with a variety of 
 dialects — many of which are yet far from being extinct. 
 
 c. Germany was first brought to the knowledge of the rest of 
 the world by the Eomans, whose attempts to conquer the 
 country, as they had conquered Gaul (France), proved in vain, 
 partly owing to the stubborn resistance of the German tribes, 
 partly because of the remoteness of the country, and the decay 
 of the aggressive force of the Roman empire. Later, nearly all 
 the European provinces of the empire were overwhelmed, one 
 after another, by roving hordes of Germans ; but these nowhere 
 estabhshed themselves in sufficient numbers to maintain their 
 own speech. Thus the dialects of the Goths, the Vandals, and 
 other noted German races, became extinct, by the absorption of 
 those races into the communities of other speech among whom 
 they settled. 
 
 d. The introduction of Roman Christianity, civilization, and 
 letters into Germany (beginning in the fifth century), the estab- 
 lishment of the Prankish empire under Chlodowig over nearly 
 
270 EELATION OF GERMAN TO ENGLISH. [462- 
 
 all the German tribes (about the end of that century), and its 
 yet more brilliant renewal under Charlemagne, three centuries 
 later (A. D. 742-814), produced in the country a state of things 
 favorable to a unity of customs, institutions, and language. It 
 remained then for circumstances to determine which of the 
 many existing dialects should win such importance in the eyes 
 of all the German peoples as to be accepted by them as their 
 literary language. 
 
 463. The history of tlie Higli-German dialects falls 
 into three periods: 
 
 1. The Old High' German period (5I(t^0(^beutf(^), down 
 to the twelfth century ; 
 
 2. The Middle High- German period (3J?itte(I)od^beutf(i)), 
 covering four centuries, from the beginning of the 
 twelfth to the time of Luther ; 
 
 3. The New High-German period (S^eu^odjbeutfd^), 
 from the Reformation down to our own days. 
 
 464. 1. The Old High-German period commences 
 with the eighth century; from which, however, only 
 fragments have come down to us. 
 
 a. As the oldest of these is regarded the Hildbrandslied, a 
 pre-Christian poem, in the alliterative verse which appears to 
 have been the original form of poetic expression of the whole 
 Germanic race. 
 
 2. The literature of this period is chiefly Christian, 
 and consists of versions from the Latin, collections of 
 words or glosses, paraphrases and comments of Scrip- 
 ture, and the like. 
 
 a. The most noteworthy productions of this class are Otfried's 
 Krist (A. D. 868), a harmony of the four Gospels, in the first 
 rhymed verse; a prose version of Tatian's harmony of the 
 Gospels, of about the same period; the works of the monk 
 Notker (about A. D. 1000) and his school, especially his prose 
 version and explanation of the Psalms ; Williram's (about A. D. 
 1075) prose paraphrase and explanation of Solomon's Song. 
 
465] HISTOEY OF GERMAN. 271 
 
 6. Besides these, there are a few songs, forms of imprecation, 
 and other like remnants of a more popular and native class of 
 productions. 
 
 3. The leading Old High-German dialect was the 
 Frankish, as being the language of the ruling race and 
 dynasty; but there was no prevailing literary dialect 
 accepted through the whole country ; each writer used 
 his own native idiom. 
 
 a. Other dialects represented in this period are the Aleman- 
 nic and Swabian, and the Bavarian and Austrian. 
 
 465. 1. In the Middle High-German period, tlie 
 literary dialect was the Swabian. 
 
 a. Because it was the court-language of the empire under the 
 Swabian emperors, Conrad and Frederick Barbarossa and their 
 successors (A. D. 1138-1268). 
 
 h. The grand difference distinguishing the language of the 
 Middle period from that of the Old, is the reduction of the 
 former full and distinct vowels of the endings of words to 
 the indifferent and monotonous e. Thus, gebe I give was in the 
 first period gihii, geben to give was geban, gijc^en to fishes was 
 viscum, blinbe^ blind (neut. sing.) was hlindaz, blinben (gen. pi.) 
 was blindono, and so on. In this respect the Middle and New 
 High-German stand nearly upon the same level. 
 
 2. The literature is abundant and various, and of a 
 very high order of merit. 
 
 It may be divided into — 
 
 a. The works of the Mlnnesdnger (love-singers)^ of whom more 
 than three hundred are more or less known. Some of the 
 most eminent among them were Hartmann von Aue, Wolfram 
 von Eschenbach, Heinrich von Ofterdingen, Walther von der 
 Vogelweide, and Gottfried von Strassburg. They wrote songs 
 of love and chivalry, epics (chiefly founded on French and 
 Provengal subjects), didactic poems, fables — almost everything 
 excepting dramas. 
 
 b. The popular legendary epics, new workings-up of stories — 
 half-mythical, half-historical — which had long been current 
 among the German races, and even in part belonged to the 
 whole Germanic race. Their authors are unknown. Chief 
 
272 RELATION OF GERMAN TO ENGLISH. [465- 
 
 among them is the Lay of the Nibelungen (^^ibelungenlieb), a 
 magnificent poem ; others are (SJubrun, and the lesser tales 
 which make up the §elbenbu(f) (Book of Heroes). 
 
 c. The works of the 2}leifterfdn9er (master-singers). These 
 were poets by trade, organized into guilds, and carrying on their 
 handicraft in a very regular and very uninteresting manner, in 
 the fourteenth and fifteenth centuries (and later), after the 
 decay of the national literature which had flourished under the 
 Swabian emperors. Their productions have mostly gone into 
 merited oblivion. 
 
 466. During the time of literary depression which occupied 
 the last century or two of the Middle period, the foundations 
 were laying for the New. The wearing-out of the feudal system ; 
 the rise of the cities to importance and wealth ; the awakened 
 sense for Art, both in architecture and in painting ; the estab- 
 lishment of universities ; the impulse given to classical learning 
 through Europe in consequence of the capture of Constantinople 
 by the Turks ; the invention of printing, which put literature 
 within the reach of a vastly increased class — all these circum- 
 Btances prepared the way for a national culture which should be 
 as much wider and deeper-reaching than that of the preceding 
 period, as this than that of the first. And whereas in the Old 
 period literature had been the property chiefly of the church 
 and the priests, with complete diversity of dialects ; and, in the 
 Middle, the property of courts and the great, with acknowledged 
 pre-eminence of the court-dialect ; so now it was to be shared 
 in by the great body of the people, and to possess for its use 
 something like a true national language. 
 
 467. Tlie New High-German period begins with the 
 grand national movement of the Reformation, and es- 
 pecially with the writings of Luther. 
 
 a. The dialect which Luther used was not a continuation of 
 the Swabian, which had long since sunk into insignificance, 
 while each author had again begun to write in his own idiom ; 
 nor was it the precise spoken language of any part of the 
 country : it was, as he himself states, the language of public 
 affairs in Saxony, and used by the various courts throughout 
 Germany. It had grown up in - measure on paper, in learned 
 and literary use, and united in itself some discordant dialectic 
 elements. 
 
469) HISTORY OF GERMAN. 273 
 
 6. It was the nationality of Germany that created the pos- 
 sibility of a national language ; it was the excited and receptive 
 state of the national mind at the time of the Reformation, the 
 inherent force and vigor of style in the writings of Luther and 
 his coadjutors, the immense and immediate circulation which 
 they won among all classes of the people, and the adoption of 
 his version of the Bible as a household bock through nearly 
 the whole country, that gave to the particular form of speech 
 used by him an impulse toward universality which nothing has 
 since been able to check or interfere with. It has become more 
 and more exclusively the language of education and learning, of 
 the courts, the pulpit, the lecture-room, the school, the press : 
 and in the large towns and cities it has to some extent extir- 
 pated or deeply affected the old popular dialects, which are 
 now hardly met in purity except among the rude country 
 population. Thus — 
 
 468. The language of Luther, not a little modified 
 in spelling, utterance, and construction, and greatly 
 enriched by new formations and additions, is now the 
 speech of the educated in all Germany (both High- 
 Germany and Low-Germany), and therefore entitled to 
 be called the German language. 
 
 a. To illustrate the alteration which it has undergone during 
 the three centuries and a half of its existence, is here added 
 Luther's version of the Lord's Prayer, as given in his first 
 edition of the German New Testament (1522) : Vnstx l^ater stin 
 tiem ?l^imel, IBtin IXamt ^tjo f^t^liQ; IBt^n 3ancD feomej ©egn 
 ^ilU gescfjefje auff JSvUtti toie gnit irem IB^s^ntl j Unstx UQlicf) 
 SSrott Qtb unnslieuttj santrberflifi uns uttsere Sci[jullre, totetoMt 
 unsrrnn Scfjullrifiern betBeben ; mnnti fure uns nitt mn Vtx^ 
 sucJUTtfi; Sonlrern triose uns bon Iretn Ufiel ; 3ienit tregti ist tras 
 Hegcj^j ttittr trie IS^rafft, unntr trie J^erUcfeest in IStoicfeest. ^mzn* 
 
 b. The former dialects not only still subsist in Germany 
 among the uneducated, but their influence more or less affects 
 the Uterary speech, especially as regards its pronunciation ; so 
 that the educated even, from different parts of the country, do 
 not speak precisely alike. 
 
 469. To give any history of the language, its cultivation, and 
 its literature, during this its modern period, will not be 
 
274 HISTORY OF GERMAN. [459- 
 
 attempted here : even to mention the names of the principal 
 writers who have distinguished themselves by their contribu- 
 tions in German to literature and science would require pages. 
 Such are their merits that to possess no knowledge of German 
 is to be cut off from one of the most important sources of 
 knowledge and culture within our reach. 
 
GERMAN WRITTEN CHARACTER. 
 
 275 
 
 GERMAN WRITTEN CHARACTER. 
 The German written letters are as follows : 
 
 Cap. 
 
 a 
 
 Bmall. equiv't. 
 
 <^ a 
 
 Cap. 
 
 Bmall. 
 
 equiv't. 
 
 i 
 
 Cap. 
 
 small, eqniy't. 
 
 ^ 
 
 / 
 
 h 
 
 ^ 
 
 J 
 
 k 
 
 ^ 
 
 / 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 c 
 
 ^ 
 
 / 
 
 I 
 
 ^/ 
 
 
 M 
 
 /^P 
 
 J' 
 
 d 
 
 m 
 
 #^ 
 
 m 
 
 ^ 
 
 It? 
 
 V 
 
 / 
 
 tf- 
 
 € 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 n 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 W 
 
 ^ 
 
 / 
 
 f 
 
 ^ 
 
 <* 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 X 
 
 / 
 
 / 
 
 9 
 
 F 
 
 / 
 
 P 
 
 / 
 
 r 
 
 y 
 
 r 
 
 / 
 
 h 
 
 / 
 
 / 
 
 ? 
 
 / 
 
 / 
 
 z 
 
 ^ 
 
 / 
 
 i 
 
 ^ 
 
 ?r 
 
 r 
 
 
 Z' 
 
 sz 
 
 The general peculiarity reqmring especial notice in this char- 
 acter is the prevalence of angular instead of rounded strokes 
 among the small letters. Owing to this, i is distinguished from 
 c only by its dot ; also u from n only by the round stroke above 
 the former (which stroke, however, is omitted as unnecessary 
 when the u is modified). Further, e is distinguished from n 
 only by the strokes being made much closer together. For the 
 same reason, the a, g, o, q are not entirely closed at the top. 
 
 The use of the forms of small s corresponds precisely with 
 that of the two forms of the same letter in printed text : the 
 first is to be everywhere written for j, and the other for §. 
 
 For S2 is written a peculiar character (as shown in the table), 
 instead of a combination of those for s and z. Special forms of 
 combination of ss and si are also sometimes made. 
 
276 GERMAN WRITTEN CHARACTEB. 
 
 Examples : 
 
 
 
 'X^^^<p^. 
 
 
 t^f!t^ 
 
 ^^^^ff^» 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 »*^ 
 
 7- 
 
 '^/^*. 
 
 1^5- 
 
 
 ^^^^^^^ii^e^. 
 
 
 ^'^ .^/^^^ t^^<f^t^-ff^/^-V^^ 
 
 
 ■e^*** 'V^^^^^^j 
 
 -CHi^-a^-^f^^i^^^i/ ^^^ ^ 
 
 ^*^*^ 
 
 «f c^i5^^^^ ^^f^i^f^^f^ ^i^tX^H^y. 
 
 -tz-n^-v-^ 
 
 7 
 
 ^^^ii'^ff 
 
 '^■V^ ^; 
 
 ^y/ 
 
 ^^^^^^y**^^i/% 
 
GERMAN WRITTEN CHARACTER. 277 
 
 ^^^^*j 
 
 /7J^ ^^^ *1t>/ff^ Hf*'^^^ e>^>k^ 
 
 /M -6 ^ et>^ <A^ ^^^ *^* Jj^^*^ 
 ^* -^^^^^ ^^^^ -A^ff^P^j ^^^^ ^x;-^^ 
 
 ^eine. 
 
 ^S«^^ ttJ.'^S^^ ^^W^^ c-^*^ ^^^^* 
 
 a* «Jd.^ M^/j^ 
 
 — ^^i^ff^ Jif^ 
 
 
 ^^St*-^^^ #^i^#^ i^^^^^ 
 
 /iS*» 
 
 AA^-a^ff^^^ ^^^iht2^ff-^f^^ /pp* <^^^^^*^y 
 
 
 ^^^^ .^, 
 
 -^iX^^Jf^ 
 
 
 ^T^^^i^^ t/iif t*^^ 
 
 Ooet^e. 
 
278 
 
 IIST OF IRBEGULAR VERBS. 
 
 ALPHABETICAL LIST OF IRREGULAR YERBS, 
 
 Including all the Verbs of the Old or Strong Conjugation. 
 
 Explanations. — In the following table are given the principal 
 parts of all the verbs of the Old or strong conjugation, together 
 with the preterit subjunctive ; also the second and third singu- 
 lar indicative present and the second singular imperative, 
 whenever these are otherwise formed than they would be in 
 the New or weak conjugation. Forms given in full-faced type 
 (thus, geBiff en) are those which are alone in use ; for those in 
 ordinary type (thus, bdrfft, bddt) the more regular forms, or 
 those made after the manner of the New or weak conjugation, 
 are also allowed ; forms enclosed in parenthesis are especially 
 unusual, poetical, or dialectic ; where two forms are given, the 
 one placed first (above the other) is the more usual or approved 
 one ; a subjoined remark gives additional explanation, if any 
 is needed. 
 
 The forms of the modal auxiliaries, as well as of the other 
 irregular verbs of the New conjugation, are included in the 
 List. They are distinguished by being put in ordinary type 
 throughout. 
 
 No verb is given in the list as a compound. If it is used only 
 in composition, hyphens are prefixed to all its forms, and an 
 added note gives its compounds. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 pres't indie, sing. 
 
 pret. indie. 
 
 pret. subj. 
 
 Imper. 
 
 past part. 
 
 f&aaen hake Ue.% Udi Inif Bfttc 
 usually of New conj., especially when transitive. 
 
 
 
 geftatfcn 
 
 sl^ftten Mn\i, =6iert 
 
 only in gcbircn hear, bring forth 
 
 sftat sftftte 
 
 ', (formerly gcBcren). 
 
 =ttcr 
 
 sBoven 
 
 »elfeett hiu 
 
 
 Mft 
 
 blfTe 
 
 
 fieibiffen 
 
 Serflcn hide 
 
 Mteft, ^itfit 
 
 ibatfi 
 
 l&atfle 
 
 h\t^ 
 
 ge^orgett 
 
 JBetftcn hurst 
 
 fcirftcft, btrft 
 
 Barfl 
 borft 
 
 Borftc 
 &&rftc 
 
 Blrfl 
 
 gcfcorftcn 
 
 93ie<)en hend 
 
 
 l>0d 
 
 f>Hc 
 
 
 
 ^tbo^m 
 
 JBlcten offer 
 
 (Bcutft, bcut) 
 
 iboi 
 
 f>Mc 
 
 (Bcut) 
 
 ^ihf>Un 
 
 »lttt)ett hind 
 
 
 
 }>ata> 
 
 ^(int>e 
 
 
 ^chwti^m 
 
 JBltten heg 
 
 
 
 hai 
 
 ibftte 
 
 
 
 geibeten 
 
 S^lafen hlow 
 
 aia(fe)ft, ftlftft 
 
 dlied 
 
 Ibliefe 
 
 
 
 geblafen 
 
 JBlciften remain 
 
 
 UU1> 
 
 U\tU 
 
 
 ^tbiUhtn 
 
 SBleidjen hleadh 
 
 as intransitive, of either conj. ; 
 
 61t(^ bltd)c 
 
 ; as transitive, of New only. 
 
 gcblt(!^en 
 
LIST OF lEREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 279 
 
 imper. pait part. 
 
 — ^et>taten 
 
 gcbrannt 
 
 — Meftctt 
 
 — gcbac^t 
 sblrB sbor^en 
 
 only in wcibcrBcn perish ; which as transitive, destroy, is usually of New conj., 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 pre«'t indie, sing. pret. indie. 
 
 pret. subj. 
 
 SBtaten roast 
 
 Britft, brat brlct 
 
 Bricte 
 
 fBteihcn break 
 
 branntc 
 
 btftcOe 
 
 SBvenncn burn 
 
 brenntc 
 
 S3rtnctcn brin.g 
 
 except in gcbci^cn thrive. 
 
 brac^tc 
 
 obsolete. 
 
 'Mef)c 
 
 iJcnfen think 
 
 ba(^tc 
 
 bac^tc 
 
 s'bcthcn 
 
 =birbjt, =blrbt =bar6 
 
 '.iiivhe 
 
 ^ingcn engage 
 ^ve^^cn thresh 
 
 brifc^cft, brifc^t 
 
 slujiefictt (;breu^t) 
 
 only in tjerbrle|cn vex, 
 
 ^ringen press — — 
 
 <Dilrfen be permitted barf, barfft, barf 
 
 men eat iffeft, Iftt 
 
 l^aJjwtt go fal)tft, fft^ti 
 
 $e(f)ten ^i?A< 
 
 fi(^it)ft fi^t 
 
 bang 
 (bung) 
 
 brofd^ 
 brafc^ 
 
 burfte 
 aft 
 
 Cneng 
 
 (bungc) 
 
 brofc^c 
 brif(^c 
 
 barftc 
 
 ful)te 
 flelc 
 
 Hcttge) 
 fd(f)te 
 
 brlfc^ 
 (;breu^) 
 
 wanting 
 
 16 
 
 gcbungen 
 gcbrof(i)en 
 sbYotfen 
 
 OeMrunoen 
 
 geburft 
 
 gefal)tcn 
 OefaUen 
 ecHmen 
 
 
 
 defo<f)ten 
 
 forms of New conj. occasionally occur, 
 
 only in bcfet)Icn command, cmpfe^Ien comm,end; fe{)len/ai7 is another word, 
 
 ^in^en find — — fan^ fanbe defunt>en 
 
 ^Ud\im twine fll*(t)ft, flidjt ft0<f)t n<»**e flic^t flcftoditett 
 
 ^ieihm apply — —- fllft ftiffe dcftiffen 
 
 antiquated excopt in fic^ beflei^cn exerf one's self. 
 
 '^lieQcn fiy 
 %lic^m flee 
 %lU^tn flov 
 gragcn ask 
 
 (fleugft, fteitv30 
 (flcuc^ft, fleu^t) 
 (flcu^eft, fle4t) 
 
 frug 
 
 frftgft, fragt 
 properly a verb of the New conj. only. 
 
 f^rrcffett devour fviffeft, ftlfet ftrafe 
 
 f^tletm /ree^e ftrot 
 
 ©ftteit /ermen^ gor 
 
 also spelt gi^ren etc., with ^, 
 
 ®j]feinfl^t>e fllcftft, aieftt Qah 
 
 fllbft, Q\bt 
 
 ®eficn go — — ging 
 
 ISeUm be worth flUtft, flUt gttlt 
 
 only in Bcrgeffcn/or^re/. 
 
 ^gcu^cfl, geu^O fidft 
 
 ®ie6en 
 
 cginnen — - 
 
 only in bcglnnen begin. 
 
 tQdnn 
 
 noae 
 
 frftgc 
 ftafee 
 
 gore 
 
 flittfle 
 
 gaite 
 golte 
 
 sgdnne 
 soiinne 
 
 Cflcug) 
 (fleu^) 
 (fleu^) 
 
 fHft 
 
 
 g«t 
 
 (geu^) 
 
 0efl0l)en 
 geftoffen 
 
 gefragt 
 
 flcfrouctt 
 QCQehen 
 gegdlten 
 
 flegoffcn 
 sQonnen 
 
280 
 
 LIST OF IRKEGULAB VERBS. 
 
 Infinitive. pres't indie, sing. pret. indie. pret. mbj. 
 
 Qleidten resembU flli* gti(i^e 
 
 usually of New conj. when transitive, make similar. 
 
 imp«r. 
 
 (Bleiten glide 
 ®limmen gleam 
 ®tahcn dig 
 ©tclfcn gripe 
 iggfeen have 
 J^oltcn ho'd 
 ^amcn hang 
 
 
 giitt 
 gtomm 
 gtttb 
 fltlff 
 
 ^atte 
 
 glttte 
 glomme 
 
 Httc 
 
 lllno ftlttge 
 
 put part. 
 
 gegtt(^cn 
 
 gcglittcn 
 gcglommctt 
 degraben 
 geotiffen 
 
 ge:^a6t 
 
 sometimes confounded in its forms with ^ingcn hang (trans.). New conj. 
 
 ^<iuen h,ew 
 j^eben raise 
 
 _ ^eiften call 
 
 ^eifen chide 
 Bennett know 
 
 I^Ufft, ftllft 
 
 ^tc6 
 l|ob 
 
 liff 
 
 fanntc 
 
 ttomm 
 
 I)dbe 
 f)ube 
 
 Jjttlfe 
 l)a(fe 
 
 fiffe 
 
 fcnntc 
 
 flommc 
 
 ^ilf 
 
 forms of Old conj. very rare except from feeflcmmcn oppress. 
 
 SilUhtn cleave fIo6 flobc 
 
 ^litnmen climb flomnt flommc — 
 
 j^Ungen sound 
 
 Hang 
 
 IlSngc 
 nangc 
 rarely of New conj., especially when transitive. 
 
 gc^aucn 
 0el^0ben 
 
 gcfiffen 
 gefannt 
 gcftommen 
 
 gcfloBen 
 
 geftommen 
 
 getlungctt 
 
 ^neifen pinch 
 ^nei^en pinch 
 .^dttt tttCtt com£, 
 ^ornien can 
 SttUMn creep 
 S^hxtn choose 
 S^a'btn load 
 gdffC tt let 
 gttttf ctt >«»i 
 
 Seil)en Zend 
 gefCtt read 
 ISiegett lU 
 
 (fSmmjl, !6mmt) 
 fann, fanntl, fann 
 (frcuii^ft, freu^t) 
 
 I&bfi, labt 
 
 liefelt, Heft 
 
 only in wcrltcren lose. 
 
 fniff 
 
 fnlpp 
 
 fatn 
 
 fonnte 
 
 1X0^ 
 
 for 
 
 luD 
 
 Heft 
 
 Hef 
 
 nti 
 
 la» 
 lag 
 
 tl0X 
 
 fniffc 
 
 fnippc 
 
 f&me 
 
 fonnte 
 
 fore 
 
 mbc 
 
 Hefte 
 
 Hefe 
 
 Wiit 
 
 Hel^e 
 
 Iftfe 
 
 sldre 
 
 gcfniffen 
 
 gcfntppctt 
 
 - defommett 
 
 wanting gefonnt 
 
 geforen 
 
 delal»m 
 
 - 0e(affen 
 
 - gclattfen 
 
 fleHUm 
 
 - geHe^en 
 gelefen 
 delegen 
 sloven 
 
 Hed 
 
 sHttden 
 
 slang siftnge — 
 
 sinngen 
 
 only found in gclingcn succeed, mi^IingenyatZ ; used in third person only, 
 
 j^dftfien extinguish Ilf(^cft, lifc^t lofc^ lofcf^c lif^ gelofc^cn 
 
 the forms of New conj. preferably limited to transitive meaning. 
 
 SiiA^tn lie 
 
 (leugfl, Icugt) 
 
 Idge 
 
 (Icug) 
 
 log 
 
 SFIalflen grlnb mai^ffl, maf>It muM mfl^tc 
 
 the forms of Old conj. now in use only in the participle. 
 
 avieiben shun ntleJ> ntieJ>e 
 
 SRelfen milk (mllfll, mllft) molf molfc (mtif) 
 
 gelogen 
 gema^len 
 
 gemiet»en 
 
 gemolfen 
 
LIST OF IKREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 281 
 
 Infinltire. 
 
 pres't indie, sing. 
 
 pret. indie. 
 
 pret. subj. 
 
 imper. 
 
 past part. 
 
 aReffen measure 
 
 tnlffcft, mlfet 
 
 maft 
 
 mft^e 
 
 mlfe 
 
 ^etneffen 
 
 ajtogen may 
 
 mag, magft, mag 
 
 mo(^tc 
 
 moiijte 
 
 wanting gcmo^t 
 
 ajJuffen must 
 
 mu^, mu^, mu& 
 
 mu^tc 
 
 mu|tc 
 
 wanting gemu^t 
 
 "^Iclintcn take 
 
 ttimmft, nimmt 
 
 ttal^m 
 
 nftl)me 
 
 nlmm 
 
 Qcnommin 
 
 ^Wcnnen nam^ 
 
 
 nanntc 
 
 nenntc 
 
 
 
 genannt 
 
 only in genefcn recover, get weU. 
 
 sna» 
 
 =nafc 
 
 — • 
 
 snefen 
 
 sntefeen 
 
 obsolete, exc 
 
 jept in gcnie^en enjoy 
 
 snofi 
 
 -.noffe 
 
 (sncu^) 
 
 sn0ffen 
 
 q^fcifCtt whistle 
 
 
 ^fiff 
 
 »»fiffe 
 
 
 
 flc^flffen 
 
 qUHeflen cherish 
 
 
 
 Pfjog 
 Bflaa 
 
 Pflogc 
 
 
 
 gcpflogcn 
 
 forms of the New conj. are occasionally met with. 
 
 
 QcptUUn 
 
 SlucUcn gus'i qutflft, qutttt quoQ 
 
 usually of New conj when transitive, swell. 
 
 quoffe 
 soak. 
 
 quiU 
 
 gequoUcn 
 
 m&atm avenge 
 
 forms of Old 
 
 (rD(i)) (rcitc) 
 
 L conj. very rare, except the participle. 
 
 
 gcro^ctt 
 
 maiden advise ratf)ft, xm ttet^ rlet^c 
 
 New conj. forms mostly limited to the sense h^ld council. 
 
 gcrat^cn 
 
 fHeihcn rub 
 
 
 tUh 
 
 tUhc 
 
 
 aetUhcn 
 
 fHeifiCn tear 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 tm 
 
 
 gerifTen 
 
 mclten ride 
 
 
 titt 
 
 tUie 
 
 
 
 Qetitten 
 
 9fienncn run 
 
 —— 
 
 rannte 
 (renntc) 
 
 renntc 
 
 
 gerannt 
 (gerennt) 
 
 {RlccDctt smell 
 
 (rcu(^fl, rcui^t) 
 
 t0d| 
 
 td<!)e 
 
 (reuc^) 
 
 0evod)en 
 
 fHittQcn wring 
 
 
 tang 
 tttttfl 
 
 v&nQC 
 tume 
 
 —— 
 
 geruttden 
 
 aiinnen run 
 
 — 
 
 ttttttt 
 
 v&nm 
 v^nne 
 
 
 gevomten 
 
 atufen ca'l 
 
 very rarely ( 
 
 Df New conj. 
 
 tlcf 
 
 ticfc 
 
 
 oetttfett 
 
 SttUfen drink 
 
 f&um, fauft 
 
 foff 
 
 faife 
 
 
 
 flefoffen 
 
 ^amm suck 
 
 
 fog 
 
 foge 
 
 
 
 gcfogen 
 
 forms of New conj. occasional: sometimes confounded with fSugen su<:kle. 
 
 Sdftaffen create ft^uf fd)iife gcjciiaffen 
 
 generally of New conj. when meaning be bufsy, or procure. 
 
 <^^aUcn sound fc^oE fd^otte geic^otten 
 
 8f(^el)en sfdjlcljt .=T<ftoI> sfdjftije sfdie^en 
 
 only in gef;^c^en happen: 
 
 'Bdiei'^en part ^c^ieb 
 
 of New conj. when transitive, disjoin. 
 
 used in third person alone, 
 jc^icbc 
 
 gefcf^ieben 
 
 <S(f)einen appear 
 
 ®cl)elten scold 
 
 @(^eren s'lear 
 <S(f)ic{>en shcve 
 
 ed)int>en fay 
 
 ^(fllagcn strike 
 
 f(S^lerft, fct)lert 
 
 (f(i^cu|efl, ^(^cu^t) 
 
 fdjlftfff, fd)l.ift 
 f<Dlaort. fcDliiflt 
 
 frfjictt 
 fdialt 
 
 fdjotr 
 
 frfjllcf 
 f<ftJtt9 
 
 fd)iene — 
 
 |cf)dltc 
 
 fdidbe 
 fdjoffe 
 f(f) unte 
 fcf)(iefe 
 f<<)ltt9e 
 
 f(^ilt 
 f(J)ter 
 
 0efd)olten 
 gefdfoven 
 
 Oefdioffen 
 
 0cfd)unden 
 
 Ocf(f)(afcn 
 
282 
 
 LIST OF lEREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 Infinitive. prcs't indie, sing. 
 
 pret. indie. 
 
 pret. 8ubj. imper. 
 
 past pwt. 
 
 @(^Iei(i)ett sneak 
 
 miiti 
 
 \m^^ — 
 
 deftfiUdien 
 
 e<ftleifen whet fc^Iiff fc^iiffc 
 
 in other senses than whet, sharpen, properly of New conj. 
 
 gcfc^Iiffen 
 
 &<Hleifi€n siu 
 
 ^miH 
 
 mm — 
 
 fiefcftUffen 
 
 ©dlUefen «?tp 
 
 f<IJloff 
 
 fcDldffe — 
 
 gefdiloffen 
 
 ©djlleften shut (jc^Icufeejl; \mm fcDlofe 
 
 tdjloffe (f(^Icu^) gcfd)(0ffen 
 
 Si^Uneen sling 
 
 |(f)lanfl 
 
 fcDlftttflc 
 
 flcf<J)aingctt 
 
 edjtnei^en smite — 
 
 fcftmlfe 
 
 frfjmiffe — 
 
 flcfdimlffen 
 
 ^^mclitn melt f(^mtls(cf)t, fc^miljt fd^mclj f^moljc fci^mtl 
 usually and properly of New conj. when transitive. 
 
 a gcfc^mcljcn 
 
 &d\nau1>ett snort 
 
 (®(»)ttlcben) 
 
 fc^nob 
 
 fc^nSbc 
 
 gefc^nofccn 
 
 ©djncibcn cut 
 
 fc^nitt 
 
 fdjttltte — 
 
 0ef<f)ttittett 
 
 ^dttauJ)en screw 
 
 f(i^rob 
 
 fd^robc 
 
 gcfc^roben 
 
 r @<f)rctfctt be afraid fi^rtcfft, f(^rictt \^tat 
 ' "g* — of New conj. as transitive, ^pAfew. 
 
 ft^rSfe florid 
 
 gefc^rodcn 
 
 @cl)teilben wnTe — — 
 
 jOttUh 
 
 fdjtlcbe 
 
 eemtieUn 
 
 @(f)teien cry 
 
 frfiric 
 
 fdjHec 
 
 Oefd)tieen 
 
 ecDteiten «<ncte 
 
 f«titt 
 
 fcDHttc — 
 
 ficfdnrlttm 
 
 @cl))t)ftten suppurate (fc^retcrfl, f(^tt)iert] 
 
 1 fdltt»dr 
 
 fdltodire 
 
 TdittJttte 
 
 oef(()tt>o«en 
 
 regularly of New conj. as transitive, silena 
 
 |<Dtt»ie8C 
 
 flef<fttolcfiett 
 
 ^ai\»eUen swell f(^wiafl, f(i>njiat 
 of New conj. as transitive. 
 
 fc^TOOtt 
 
 fcbaollc fdjwia gcf^aollen 
 
 @d|kt>immen swim 
 
 fdtlvatnttt fd)tt>dmtne — 
 
 0efd)kt>ommen 
 
 ®(l)to>inbm vanish 
 
 
 fdjttiftnbe 
 
 f(()kputtt)e 
 
 fief(()tt)un^en 
 
 @(4tt)in0en swing fdltvano fd)U>anoe 
 
 \S)W\nQen furnish with wings is of the New conj. 
 
 0efd)tt>un0en 
 
 @d)ltidtett «wear 
 
 fdjIVOY 
 
 fdltvute 
 
 0ef(l)t«0ven 
 
 ge^cn «e« nenft, ffcHt 
 
 frt^ 
 
 fft^e fie^ 
 
 oefe^cn 
 
 ^n 6e Mn, Mft, ift k. 
 
 tvav 
 
 te»fttr« fcl 
 
 gelDcfen 
 
 ©cnbcn «cnd 
 
 fanbtc 
 fenbetc 
 
 fenbete 
 
 gefanbt 
 gefenbet 
 
 ®lebm6oi7 
 
 fott 
 
 ficbetc 
 
 gefotten 
 
 gingcn «tnf7 
 
 fattfl 
 
 fftttge — 
 
 flefMttflen 
 
 ©infCtt stnfc 
 
 fant 
 
 fftnfe — 
 
 gefunfett 
 
 ^innm think 
 
 fann 
 
 fonnc 
 
 fannc 
 
 fafee — 
 
 gcfonnen 
 
 _gj^ett*« 
 
 f«ft 
 
 flcfeffm 
 
 ©oaen shall foU, foH^ foff 
 
 foUte 
 
 folttc wanting gefollt 
 
 rarely of the New conj. 
 
 fplc 
 
 fplec 
 
 gefpiecn 
 
 ^pinnen spin — 
 
 Spann 
 
 \ponne — 
 ip&nnt 
 
 eef»»0ntteit 
 
 ^iifUi^cn split — 
 
 fpUB 
 
 fpUfie 
 
 gefpltffen 
 
 ^^pV^Oim speak f^tld)ft, fM*l 
 
 f^rad) 
 
 \pv&aif f|>ti<^ ^e^ptoOtcn 
 
LIST OF IKREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 283 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 pres't indie, sing. 
 
 pret. indie. 
 
 pret suiij. 
 
 imper. 
 
 past part. 
 
 ^pxitfitn sprout 
 
 (fpreuleft, fpreu^t) ^ptofi 
 
 T^tdfTe 
 
 (fprcu^) 
 
 flcl^tDfTcn 
 
 e^tringen spring 
 
 
 
 f>>tan0 
 
 f^Jtranee 
 
 
 6e\pvunQcn 
 
 <Stccf)cn prick 
 
 f«<D(4, fU*t 
 
 ftdd) 
 
 ftftcfie 
 
 ftlcf) 
 
 geft0<l)cn 
 
 BUden stick fttcffl, fticft jlaf ftafc 
 usually of New conj., especially when transitive. 
 
 Pit! 
 
 gcftorfcn 
 
 gt^hen stand 
 
 
 
 ftattb 
 ftttttb 
 
 ftattbe 
 Itunbe 
 
 
 
 fiefttttt^eti 
 
 eUfflcn steal 
 
 fticDlft, fUel^U 
 
 W 
 
 ftdrne 
 ftadie 
 
 ftieDl 
 
 0eft0l)len 
 
 gteigen ascend 
 
 
 
 ftleg 
 
 mcfle 
 
 
 deftiegen 
 
 ^Utifen die 
 
 mvm, ^itht 
 
 ftata 
 
 fttttbe 
 ftat^e 
 
 ftltl^ 
 
 fleftotaen 
 
 <SiUf>en disperse 
 
 
 ftob 
 
 ftd^e 
 
 
 fleftoOm 
 
 @«ttfCtt stink 
 
 
 ffanf 
 Cftunf 
 
 ftftnfe 
 ftitnfe) 
 
 
 geftunten 
 
 ^t0ficn pmh 
 
 fid6(ef3t, fidfet 
 
 ftiefi 
 
 fticfee 
 
 
 geftofeett 
 
 ®ttei(f)en stroke 
 
 
 itvim 
 
 fttljfte 
 
 
 oefttidjen 
 
 Strcttcn stHve 
 
 
 fitltt 
 
 fttltte 
 
 
 gefttlttctt 
 
 2;i)uit do — — 
 
 — > the pret.- indie. tt)at is common 
 
 tl)at t^ate 
 
 L in dialectic German, < 
 
 3specially as auxiliary. 
 
 %ta^m carry 
 
 traflit, tv&qi 
 
 ttUQ 
 
 tuttfle 
 
 
 
 octragen 
 
 Xtt^cn hit 
 
 tm% um 
 
 ttaf 
 
 it&U 
 
 tHff 
 
 gettoffcn 
 
 2:veil>cn drive 
 
 
 ttUb 
 
 tviebe 
 
 
 Qcitiehen 
 
 3:tcten tread 
 
 ttiitSt, itiit 
 
 itat 
 
 it&U 
 
 mtt 
 
 gettetm 
 
 atlcfen dHp 
 
 mm, tteuft) 
 
 troff 
 
 ttoffc 
 
 (trcuf) 
 
 gctroffen 
 
 ^tinUn drink 
 
 — — 
 
 itant 
 Cttttttf 
 
 tirftttfe 
 ituttfe) 
 
 
 gcttunfen 
 
 Z^tuaen deceive 
 
 
 iV0e 
 
 Itdflc 
 
 
 
 g^itogen 
 
 SSI(i(()fen grow 
 
 n)ic^(fc)fl, wii^fl 
 
 t»nm 
 
 to)u*fe 
 
 
 gett)ad)fen 
 
 aSSftden wngh TOog 
 
 sometimes of New conj. ; compare ^wegcn 
 word. 
 
 njcgc 
 and ttjicgcn 
 
 ;, which 
 
 gemogen 
 are the same 
 
 SSafdien wash 
 
 ruMc^lOfl, ttjifc^t 
 
 ttJUfdl 
 
 wttfdie 
 
 
 gekt>af(f)en 
 
 aS^eticn weare 
 
 
 mob 
 
 mobc 
 
 
 
 gcmotcn 
 
 smegen =n?og :^icoge swogcn 
 
 only in feeiuegen, which is of New conj., except in the sense induce. 
 
 SSeidien yield luid^ lutd^e 
 
 of New conj. when meaning so/?en (as trans, or intrans.) 
 
 Sfteifen show 
 SJBcnfccn turn 
 
 S&cthm sue 
 
 SESet)>en become 
 Fcr^cn throw 
 
 SSiegen weigh 
 
 — tolled 
 
 ttjanbte 
 
 itjcnbctc 
 
 
 tpavb etc. 
 tt>atf 
 
 ttJlcfe 
 
 wcnbetc 
 
 tttuvbe 
 lv(i¥lie 
 
 tDutfe 
 tviivfe 
 
 luogc 
 
 lt>i«ft 
 
 tt»itf 
 
 gcwtc^en 
 
 getviefen 
 
 gewanbt 
 gewcnbct 
 
 geuiovlben 
 
 getDOV^en 
 getttotrfen 
 
 the same word with toftgcn and swegen : wlegen rock is of New conj. 
 
 gcwogcn 
 
 S&itt^cn wind 
 
 toant) 
 
 toantt — - gclpun^en 
 
284 
 
 LIST OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 pres't Indic. sing. 
 
 pret. indie. 
 
 pret. Bubj. 
 
 imper. 
 
 past part. 
 
 st»innm — 
 
 only used in gewlnncn win. 
 
 t\o(tnu 
 
 stvunne 
 
 ~ 
 
 det90ttnen 
 
 2Biffen know 
 
 wei^, wti^t, »cl^ 
 
 wu|te 
 
 v>mt 
 
 
 
 gcnju^t 
 
 ^ "^oaen will 
 
 roiU, iDittft, Witt 
 
 n^ottte 
 
 rcotttc 
 
 
 gewottt 
 
 3eir)en accuse 
 
 
 
 Sie^ 
 
 jicUc 
 
 
 
 flejieftcn 
 
 3i«Jjctt ^'"O"' 
 
 {m^% Itn^t) 
 
 300 
 
 S^de 
 
 (aeu(i^) 
 
 flejdgeii 
 
 3tDin0en .force 
 
 
 
 %t»am 
 
 jtt»anfle 
 
 
 
 OeslDuttden 
 
EXERCISES. 
 
 FIRST SERIES. 
 
 EXERCISE 1. 
 
 AKTICLES AND NOUNS OF 1st DECLENSION, 1st CLASa 
 [63-65 and 68-80.] 
 
 Vocabulary. 
 
 ber iBater 
 
 ihefaik&r 
 
 ber 33rubcr 
 
 the brother 
 
 bie abutter 
 
 the mother 
 
 bie jtoc^ter 
 
 the daughter 
 
 ber ?e^rer 
 
 the teacher 
 
 ber @d)uler 
 
 the pupil 
 
 ber %m 
 
 the apple 
 
 ber SSoget 
 
 the bird 
 
 ber ©arten 
 
 the garden 
 
 bag 3in^n^er 
 
 the romti 
 
 bag SO^effer 
 
 the knife 
 
 ber $?oP 
 
 the spoon 
 
 bag ^tofter 
 
 the cloister, monastery bag ©ebciube 
 
 the building 
 
 ber (Sngtcinber 
 
 the Englishman 
 
 bag S5og(ein 
 
 the little bird 
 
 utib 
 
 and 
 
 bag 3«abc^en 
 
 the girl 
 
 (Present tense of the verb 
 
 {)aben have, see 
 
 239.) 
 
 1. ^er S3ruber be§ ^aterg. 2. ^ie ^od^ter ber SD^iitter. 
 3. (Sinen Server beg SOf^dbc^enS. 4. ^ie ^ebaube be§ ^Hofter^. 
 5. ^lelBogtein beg J^^idbc^eng. 6. 2)er ^ater ^t bie ^ipfel. 
 1. $at ber ©c^iiler ein SlReffer? 8. SDer Sel^rer \(\i bie SO^effer 
 ber ©driller. 9. ^er,Sel)rer ^ai ein Bintmer. 10. ^ag ^lofter 
 !^at einen Garten. 11. ^ie Wab6)txi §aben bie Wz\\tx unb bie 
 Soffet. 12. ^er S3ruber ^at ben ^(pfel be§ ©c^iilerg unb tia^ 
 ^effer be§ ©nglduberg. 13. S[)ie SJiutter :^at einen SSoget. 
 14. ^ie Qimmer unb (Smarten beg S^lofterg. 15. $aft bu eine 
 ^oc^ter? 16. 3c^ ^abe einen SBater unb eine SJJutter. It. S)ie 
 ©ngldnber ^aben ©drten unb ©ebaube. 
 
286 IXERCISES. 
 
 n. 
 
 1. A father's daughter. 2. To the Englishman's brother 
 and father. 3. The mother's brother. 4 To the gardens of 
 the monastery. 5. Of the birds of the garden. 6. Of the 
 buildings of the monasteries. 7. The knife and spoon of 
 the teacher. 8. The little bird of the pupil. 9. The English- 
 man's gardens and buildings. 10. The teachers of the mon- 
 astery have pupils. 11. I have a brother and a father. 
 12. Have you the apple ? 13. The pupil has the apple and 
 the Englishman's knife. 14. The pupils have apples, and 
 the teacher has the knife. 15. I have the girl's little birds. 
 16. We have the teacher's room. 17. The monastery has 
 gardens and buildings. 18. We have brothers, mothers, and 
 fathers. 19. Have they the spoons ? 20. The Englishmen 
 have the spoons and they have the knives. 
 
 EXERCISE 2. 
 
 KOUNS OF 1st declension, 2nd CLASS. 
 
 [81-86.] 
 
 Vocabulary, 
 
 ber ®o^n 
 
 the son 
 
 ber f^reunb 
 
 thefriend 
 
 ber ©aft 
 
 the guest 
 
 bie maQb 
 
 the maid 
 
 bie ^anb 
 
 the hand 
 
 ber ^u§ 
 
 thefoot 
 
 ber ^rm 
 
 the arm 
 
 ber ®c^u^ 
 
 the shoe 
 
 ber S3aum 
 
 the tree 
 
 bie l^ruc^t 
 
 thefruit 
 
 U?> %\)itx [Zm'\ 
 
 the animal 
 
 ber 2:{)eil [^eit] 
 
 the part' 
 
 ber 5Ro(f 
 
 the coat 
 
 bie @tobt 
 
 the city 
 
 ber 9fJlng 
 
 the ring 
 
 ber O^rring 
 
 the earring 
 
 aber 
 
 hut 
 
 in (prep. taMng ( 
 
 iative) in 
 
 (Present tense of the verb fein he^ see 239.) 
 I. 
 
 1. ^ie ^afte finb Sreunbe ber Wwiitx. 2. ®er So^n ift ber 
 (^aft beg greunbeg. 3. ^ie greunbe beg Se^rerg finb ^riiber. 
 4. ®ie SO^agb ^at bie Siucfe ber greimbe. 5. ®ie ^f)iere ^aben 
 git^e, aber vo'xx '^aben §anbe, 5lrme imb gii^e. 6. !^er ©o^n 
 be§ greunbeg ^at einen ^()eil be§ ^Ipfelg in ber* §anb. 
 7. ^ie greunbe finb in ber (Stabt. 8. ^er 9iing ift in bem 8im=* 
 
 * See 66.3. 
 
EXEKCISES. 
 
 m 
 
 mer ber SO^dgbe. 9. SDie O^rringe finb in ben §anben ber ^oc^* 
 ter. 10. ^er Garten beg ^ater§ ift in ber ©tabt. 11. Qn bent 
 (Garten finb 33dnme nnb griic^te. 12. ©inb bie (Sc^ul;e be§ 
 @afte§ in bent dimmer? 13. ^ie Ttag^h ^at bie ©c^n§e nnb 
 D^Dcfe in ber §anb. 14. ^ift bn ber ©o^n be§ greunbeg? 
 15. 3c^ bin bie Wao^h be§ 2e§rer§. 11. SSir finb grennbe be§ 
 ^afte§ unb n)ir Ijaben grennbe in ber ©tabt. 
 
 n. 
 
 1. The fruits of the trees. 2. To the trees in the gardens. 
 3. To the teacher's friend. 4. Of the shoes of the maids. 
 5. The animal's feet. 6. The hands ; of the foot ; the arms 
 and the hands. 7. A part of the fruit. 8. The guest of the 
 teacher is the pupil's friend. 9. The son's friend is the 
 father's guest. 10. The guests are in the garden. 11. In 
 the garden (there) are animals and trees. 12. I am a friend 
 of the guest. 13. The pupils' coats and shoes are in the 
 maids' hands. 14. The maids have the daughter's room. 
 
 15. The daughter has the maid's rings and earrings. 
 
 16. Have the animals hands and feet? 17. The birds and 
 the animals have feet, but we have hands, feet, and arms. 
 18. The trees are in the city's gardens. 19. Art thou the 
 son's teacher ? 20. I am a friend of the father. 21. Thou 
 art in the garden, but we are in the mother's room. 22. The 
 pupil's coat is in the teacher's room. 
 
 EXERCISE 3. 
 
 NOUNS OF 1st declension, 3ed CLASS. 
 
 [87-90.] 
 
 Vocabular'i/, 
 
 ber ^am 
 
 the man 
 
 ha^ SSclb 
 
 the woman 
 
 bag tinb 
 
 the child 
 
 bag ^aii8 
 
 the house 
 
 ha^ S3ud^ 
 
 the book 
 
 ha^ S3Ub 
 
 the picture 
 
 ta^ ^elb 
 
 the field 
 
 tia^ %^ai 
 
 the valley 
 
 ber Salb 
 
 iheforest 
 
 ha^ mtih 
 
 the dress 
 
 ha^ 2)orf 
 
 the village 
 
 bag S)arf) 
 
 the roof 
 
 ha^ ?anb 
 
 the land, country 
 
 ba^ @c^Io§ 
 
 the castle 
 
 cin 
 
 one 
 
 gttjei 
 
 two 
 
 brei 
 
 three 
 
 t)ier 
 
 four 
 
 (Present tense of the verb gebcn give, see 236.2.) 
 
288 EXERCISES. 
 
 1. 5Da§ 2Bet6 tft bie Tlntttx hex ^tnber. 2. ^er Wlam gtBt 
 bem ^Hnbe* ein ^ud^. 3. ^ie ^D^dnner ftnb in bent getbe unb bie 
 SSeiber finb in ben |)anfern. 4. ^a§ §au§ be§ ^ater§ ift in bem 
 SDorfe. 5. ®a§ S3ilb beg .gaufe^ ift in bem ^ud^e be§ ^inbe§. 
 6. SDie ^inber beg SDorfeS finb imf SBalbe. 1. ®eg greunbeg §aug 
 ift in bem X^ale, aber bag ©d^tog beg $8aterg ift in bem SSalbe. 
 8. §aft bu bie ^ilber ber ©c^Ioffer? 9. Sf^ gebe ben ^inbern 
 bie ^ilber. 10. ^at ber Wawn ein gelb? 11. ^ie brei gelber 
 ht^ SO^anneg finb in bem ^t)a(e. 12. 2Bir geben bem tinbe ha§> 
 ^leib nnb bie (Sd^nt)e. 13. ©ie geben ben ^dnnern ^uc^er nnb 
 SBilber. 14. ^ag SSeib f)at bie griid^te. 15. SDer ^ann §at brci 
 ^inber, gtDei (So^ne unb eine 3:od^ter. 
 
 n. 
 
 1. The castles and villages of the country. 2. To the 
 roofs of the houses ; of the man's fields. 3. Of the men's 
 clothes. 4. In the woods and to the valleys of the country. 
 5. Are the men in the village ? 6. The women and children 
 are in the village, but the men are in the fields. 7. Are the 
 fields in the valley ? 8. The fields are in the valleys. 9. I 
 tave three houses in the village and a castle in the forest. 
 10. Have ye a picture of the castle ? 11. I have a picture 
 of the village. 12. Givest thou a book to the child ? 13. I 
 give the children books and pictures. 14. The man gives 
 the women a picture of the house in the valley. 15. We 
 give the child two dresses and a book. 16. In the book are 
 pictures of the castles of the country. 17. I have four 
 children, three daughters and one son. 18. The friend's 
 house is in the city, but the fields are in the village. 
 19. Art thou the child of the woman ? 20. I am the friend 
 of the woman. 21. The child's dress is in the woman's 
 room. 22. The woman gives the child the dress and the 
 shoes. 
 
 222.1a. t65. 
 
EXERCISES. 
 
 289 
 
 EXERCISE 4. 
 
 NOUNS OF THE 2nd DECLENSION. 
 
 [91-95.] 
 
 Vocabulary. 
 
 ber ^ilrfl 
 
 <^e prince 
 
 bie giirftin 
 
 the princess 
 
 ber @raf 
 
 the count 
 
 ber ^mht 
 
 the boy 
 
 ber @tubent 
 
 the student 
 
 ber Offisier^ 
 
 the officer 
 
 ber ©efeae 
 
 the comrade 
 
 ber ^reu^e 
 
 the Prussian 
 
 ber ^ranjoje 
 
 the Frenchman 
 
 bie ^ranjoftn 
 
 the Frenchwoman 
 
 ber ^err 
 
 the gentleman 
 
 ber ®atte 
 
 the husband 
 
 bie ^rau 
 
 the woman, wife 
 
 bie @c^tt)efter 
 
 the sister 
 
 bie iBIume 
 
 the flower 
 
 bie Ut)r 
 
 the watch 
 
 
 nic^t 
 
 not 
 
 
 (Possessive pronouns mein mine, bein thine, fein his, unfer our, euer your, 
 it)V their or her, declined like etn : see 159.2.) 
 
 1. ^te Srau ift eine granjoftn unb i^r (Satte ift etn ^reuge. 
 2. !5)ie ©D^ne ber giirftinnen finb Offtgiere. 3. ©tub bie ©tuben* 
 ten beine greunbe? 4. Qc^ bin nid^t ber grennb be§ (Stubenten, 
 aber er ift mein (^efeUe. 5. 2)er ^ater be^ S^^naben ift ein (^raf. 
 6. ^er ^raf gibt feinem (Sot)ne eine U§r. t. ^d) gebe meinen 
 ©(^n)eftern jtrei U^ren. 8. §aben bie granen Q3(nmen in i^ren 
 §anben? 9. ^c^ i)aht eine ^lume in meiner §anb, aber bie 
 granen ^aben bie tinmen ber S^^naben. 10. S<^ ^^^^ ^i^ ^ilber 
 ber giirften nnb ber giirftinnen be§ Sanbe§. 11. ^er SSater be§ 
 Solbaten ift Dffigier*. 12. (Sr ift im ©c^Ioffe be§ giirften. 
 
 13. ^ie gilrften nnb ^rafen finb feine grennbe nnb ©efellen. 
 
 14. Tltim ©o^ne finb bie ©d)iiter be§ granjofen. 15. S)ie 
 gran5ofen finb nid^t bie grennbe ber ^ren^en. 
 
 ^ n. 
 
 1. The boy's father is a count and his mother is a prin- 
 cess. 2. My companions are the count's sons. 3. The 
 students are Frenchmen, and their companions are Prus- 
 sians. 4. My mother is a sister of the princess. 5. The 
 gentleman's son is an ofl&cer*. 6. He is a Prussian, but his 
 
 ♦ See 66.8. Offijier is 1st decl., 2f1 p.l«i?s. 
 
290 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 wife is a Frenchwoman. 7. The student gives his sisters 
 books and flowers. 8. Has he your watch ? 9. He has the 
 officer's watch. 10. We are Frenchmen, but the Prussians 
 are our friends and companions. 11. The student's friend is 
 the officer's son. 12. The gentlemen are friends of the prince. 
 13. Are the women in your house ? 14 They are not in my 
 house, they are in their garden. 15. Our maids are French- 
 women. 
 
 /-^.^ 
 
 /— ' 
 
 EXERCISE 5, 
 
 NOUNS OP MIXED DECLENSION, PKOPER NAMES, ETC. 
 [96-108.] 
 
 Vocabulary. 
 
 hex 9^a(^Bar 
 
 the neighbor 
 
 ber ^Setter 
 
 the cousin 
 
 bcr 25octor 
 
 the doctor 
 
 ber ^rofe[for 
 
 the professor 
 
 ber ''Rame 
 
 the name 
 
 t>a^ ©tubiurn 
 
 the study 
 
 bic ®ef(f|id)te 
 
 the history 
 
 S)eutjd^tanb 
 
 Oenrmny 
 
 ©c^mibt 
 
 Smith 
 
 abutter 
 
 Miller 
 
 ^riebrid^" 
 
 Frederick 
 
 Maxi 
 
 Charles 
 
 ©o^{)ie 
 
 Sophy 
 
 and} 
 
 also 
 
 ja 
 
 yes 
 
 nein 
 
 no 
 
 ber ^aufmann 
 
 the merchant 
 
 bie ^aufleutc 
 
 the merchants 
 
 (Present tense of the verb Ueben Zove, like, see 236.) 
 
 1. SleBft bu beine ^a^haxn? 2. Qi^ Hebe bie ^inber meineS 
 S^ad^barS, aber \6) liebe mehien D^ac^bar nic^t. 3. ^2)ie ©tubenten 
 lieben i()ren ^rofeffor, aber fie lieben i^re Stubien md)t. 4. ^te 
 2)octoren finb greunbe beg §errn SJiiitter. 5. ®er 9^ame beg 
 ^imben ift griebric^. 6. ^c^ ^^^^^^ ^^^ Seamen griebricl^ nic^t. 
 1. ^er ^ater griebric^g ift ein greuub beg ^octorg. 8. "i^a^ 
 ^n^ ^arlg ift ehie (Sefc^i^te SDeutfc^Ianbg. 9. $evrn 
 ai^iiHerg $aug ift in ber ©tabt. 10. Wdm ^ettern finb im 
 §anfe beg §errn (Sc^mibt. 11. §aft hn bag S3nc^ ©opl^ieng? 
 12. 3«r nnb (Sophie ^at nteine ^iid)er. 13. Unfere grennbe finb 
 ntc^t ^anfknte, fie finb ^rofefforen. 14. SDie Seamen ber ^ro= 
 fefforen finb (Si^mibt nnb SJiiiCCer. 
 
EXEECISES. 
 
 291 
 
 n. 
 
 1. Are your cousins merchants? 2. No, but my son is a 
 merchant. 3. Mr. Miller's son has Frederick's book. 4. 
 Frederick is in Mr. Smith's house. 5. Charles gives his 
 brother a history of Germany. 6. Charles is in Germany 
 with the professor's brother. 7. Does Charles love his 
 studies ? 8. He loves his studies and his professors. 9. My 
 neighbor's name is Smith. 10. Sophy's father is my cousin, 
 and Sophy is my cousin's daughter. 11. The doctor's sons 
 are also doctors. 12. The names of his sons are Charles 
 and Frederick. 13. Do you like the name of Charles ? 14. 
 I love Charles, but I do not love his name. 
 
 
 
 EXERCISE 6. 
 
 
 
 ADJECTIVES OF 1st DECLENSION. 
 
 
 
 
 [114-122.] 
 
 
 
 
 Vocabulary, 
 
 
 fc^on 
 
 heauUful 
 
 ^ rot^ [rot] 
 
 red 
 
 bunt 
 
 variegated, gay flein 
 
 little, smaU 
 
 frlfd^ 
 
 fresh 
 
 arm 
 
 poor 
 
 neu 
 
 new 
 
 liaBtirfi 
 
 ugly 
 
 gut 
 
 good 
 
 xoaxm 
 
 warm 
 
 fleipg 
 
 industrious 
 
 1 Ueb 
 
 dear 
 
 grofe 
 
 big 
 
 gtiidUcfi 
 
 happy 
 
 griiu 
 
 green 
 
 bie greube 
 
 pleasure 
 
 blau 
 
 blue 
 
 bie (SItern 
 
 the parents 
 
 bie Wii6) 
 
 the milk 
 
 bie Seute 
 
 the people 
 
 I 
 
 1. !5)er Staufmann ^at fc^one ^pfel unb bunte S5Iumen. 2. SDie 
 ^inber liebeu frifc^e Wiii). 3. SDer Se!)rer gibt ben ©c^iileru 
 neue, fc^one ^iic^er. 4. 3n hzn ^iicl^ern finb fc^one, bunte ^itber. 
 5. ^ute ^iuber finb bie greube \i)xc§> £ef)rer§. 6. ©inb bie 
 ^iuber if)reg ©oljueg tjiit unb fteigig ? 1. Qn bent Garten finb 
 gro^e, griine ^iiume unb blaue unb rot^e [rote] tinmen. 8. ^d) 
 I)abe blaue Q3(umen unb h\i ^a]i rotf)e [rote]. 9. ^ie §au[er armer 
 Seute finb !(ein unb fjcifttic^. 10. ^ute grauen geben avmen 
 Stinbcrn fcf)bne, marme ^(eibcr. 11. ^ie (Sttern guter, flei^igcr 
 ^naben finb gliic!iic^. 12. 2icbe§ ^inb, bu bift arm, aber bu bift 
 gliicftic^. 13. 2)ie ©tubenten f)aben rot^e [rote] unb blaue diode. 
 14. S)eutfc^laub ^at gro^e, fc^bue (Stable. 
 
292 
 
 EXEKCISES. 
 
 n. 
 
 1. Good, industrious children are the joy of their parents. 
 2. The mother gives her children warm fresh milk. 3. In 
 the garden are beautiful red apples and little blue flowers. 
 4. Poor little children have ugly dresses. 5. The professor's 
 sons are big ugly boys. 6. The child is good and industri- 
 ous. 7. My garden is large and beautiful. 8. I have blue 
 and red flowers and big apples. 9. I give warm clothes and 
 red apples to poor little children. 10. The trees of my 
 garden are large and green, but my house is small and 
 ugly. 11. In the town are beautiful large houses and green 
 trees. 12. The teachers of industrious, good boys are 
 happy. 13. Good teachers love their pupils and good 
 pupils have happy teachers. 14 The merchants have gay 
 new ribbons. 15. Dear friend, you have beautiful good 
 daughters. 16. The cities of Germany are large and hand- 
 some. 17. My children have good books and gay pictures. 
 18. Have you fresh milk ? 19. I have fresh warm milk. 20. 
 Good teachers have good pupils. 
 
 EXERCISE 7. 
 
 ADJECTIVES OF 2nd DECLENSION. 
 
 [118-128.] 
 
 Vocabulary. 
 
 ^od) 
 
 high 
 
 niebrig 
 
 low 
 
 att 
 
 old 
 
 !ronf 
 
 sick 
 
 tt)ei§ 
 
 white 
 
 fcf| tears 
 
 black 
 
 ebel 
 
 noble 
 
 reidi 
 
 rich 
 
 barm'^erijig 
 
 charitable 
 
 unartig 
 
 naughty 
 
 trage 
 
 lazy 
 
 - Pbjrf) 
 
 pretty 
 
 gotben 
 
 golden, gold 
 
 fttbcrn 
 
 silver 
 
 ha^ 53rob 
 
 the bread 
 
 ber SBein , 
 
 the wine 
 
 bie %a\\t 
 
 the cup 
 
 felir - 
 
 very 
 
 (S)iefer this, jcncr that, declined like ber, see 165.) 
 
 1. liefer ^aum ift fe^r f)Ofi). 2. ®er ^o^e, fc^line 33aum ift 
 in bem gro^en Garten meine§ rcicljcu 9Zac^bar§. 3. SDiefe guten, 
 
EXERCISES. 293 
 
 ftei^igen ^tnber finb bie ©d^iiter be§ atten Sc^rer§, 4 ^d^ c3cbe 
 biefem alten, franfen SOhinne guten, rotten $3ein uiib iDeigeg 
 ^rob. 5. SSir lieben bag luei^e Q3rob, aber tt)ir Ijaben imr 
 fc^marjeg. 6. 3ft 'i)a§> IjiiOfd^e ^inb imartiG ? 1. ^iefeS Ijubfdje 
 93Zabc^eii ift unartig uiib trdge, aber jene IjdfeUc^en ^iiiber finb gut 
 imb Peifjig. 8. S)er (^raf ift eiu ebler 3[Raun ; er ift fet)r reid) uub 
 l}at fc^pne, mj^igiijlDffer, aber er ift gut uub barmljer^ig. 9. (Seine 
 gute_gra3i^3^*b?n armeu, franfeu ^inbern gute§ ^rob unb 
 luarme ^Hetbei?. --i^-^yrc^ §au§ biefe§ alten 90^anne§ ift eiu nieb^ 
 rige§, !(eiue§ §au§ in einer grofsen, fc^oueu (Stabt. 11. ©r ift 
 fet)r arm, aber er ^at gtrtc; flei^ige ©ofjue. 12. !J)iefer gute (So^n 
 gibt feiner armeu SO^utter eiu neu5§, U)arme§ S^leib uub eine 
 golbene Uf)r. 13. §aben biefe armeu Seute filberue Sliffet? 
 14. 9^ein, fie ijahcn gute Soffe(,aber nic!^t filberue. 15. ®er fleine 
 (Sot)u jeneg reic^en ©rafeu ^at feine frifc^e MM) in einer filber:^ 
 nen ^affe. 
 
 n. 
 
 1. I love these pretty little children. 2. The old father of 
 these little children is a poor sick man. 3. My charitable 
 mother gives the poor man warm clothes and good black 
 bread. 4. Do you love this red wine ? 5. No, but I love that 
 good fresh milk. 6. My rich cousin has a very pretty house 
 in the beautiful valley. 7. That high white castle is the 
 castle of his noble friend. 8. We have a little low house, 
 but our trees are highland beautiful and our new garden 
 is very large. 9. This happy man has very good, hand- 
 some sons. 10. These pretty little girls are his daughters. 
 
 11. My rich neighbor has silver spoons and gold watches, 
 but his children are naughty and lazy and he is not happy. 
 
 12. My little son has a silver cup and a silver spoon. 13. 
 This pretty little girl gives her poor, sick brother her gay 
 pictures and her pretty books. 14. My neighbor's trees are 
 high and beautiful, but I have a beautiful high tree in my 
 little garden. 15. I love the beautiful green forest and the 
 gay flowers and the little birds, but I do not love this great 
 ugly city. 
 
294 EXERCISES. 
 
 EXERCISE 8. 
 ADJECTIVES USED AS, SUBSTANTIVES AND AS ADVERBS. 
 
 
 ( 
 
 j;P?:i30.] 1 
 
 
 
 V 
 
 -Vocabulary. 
 
 
 has, 5(ugc 
 
 the eye 
 
 bo« §aar 
 
 the hair 
 
 bag 2)orf 
 
 the village 
 
 bie ^utte 
 
 the hut 
 
 tie ©d^leife 
 
 the bow 
 
 fd)Ie(f|t 
 
 bad 
 
 etttjaS 
 
 something 
 
 tiid^tg 
 
 nothing 
 
 ijlel 
 
 much, many 
 
 gans 
 
 whole, quite 
 
 bunfel 
 
 dark 
 
 ^ctt 
 
 bright, light 
 
 Ui^« 
 
 left 
 
 rcddt 
 
 right 
 
 hh^ 
 
 pale 
 
 nur 
 
 only 
 
 (Preterit tense of l^aben have, see 239.) 
 
 1 '^er 5lrme ift ber ^ruber be§ Df^eid^en. 2. ^ie (^uten (ieben 
 Ott^ ' ^ute, aber bie ©d^led^ten lieben nur ba§ (Sc^Iec^te. 3. 5Die 
 (Sd^l^ne ^atte eine jcl^one rot^e B^ofe in ber fc^i3nen §anb. 4. 
 §atteft bu ein gan^eS §au§ ? 5. 9^ein, aber ic^ l)atte brei gnn^ 
 fd)i3ne gintmer im $aufe meine§ ^ater^. 6. ®r giOt bemStleinen 
 ettDii^ (S(i)one§, aber er gibt bem ^(ten nic^t^. 1. 2)iefe ^nme ^at 
 bunfleg §aar unb bunfelblaue 5tngen. 8. §at fie ein bunf(e§ 
 ober ein ^eHeg ^leib ? 9. (Sie 1)at ein bun!eIrot()e§ [rote§] Meib 
 mit blaplauen (Sd^Ieifen. 10. ^a§ ^inb '^atte ein ganj !(eine§ 
 SSogtein in ber Sinfen. 11. ^er 5(rme ^at nur eine gan^ nicb= 
 rige §iitte, aber ber 9^eic!^e I)at ein fc^oneg ©c^Iofi unb biele 
 gelber unb 2)orfer. 12. SSir fatten tiiele* bunfelrot^e [rote] 
 dlo\tn, aber fie fatten nur irei^e. 
 
 n- 
 
 1. The rich and the poor are brothers. 2. I love good, 
 but they love evil. 3. Has your little brother dark eyes ? 
 4 No, he has bright blue eyes and quite golden hair. 5. 
 His coat is dark green, but mine "j" is quite black. 6. This 
 whole great building is a monastery. 7. Had he anything 
 pretty in his right hand? 8. He had nothing new; he had 
 only a pale blue flower. 9. "We had many dark and light 
 
 * See 192. f 159.5. 
 
EXERCISES. 
 
 295 
 
 dresses, but this pretty girl had only wholly black dresses. 
 10. The beauty has black hair and dark blue eyes. 11. 
 The little one is pretty, but he is very naughty. 12. The 
 whole village is very poor and ugly, but this little hut is 
 quite pretty, 13. We love the good and the beautiful. 
 
 EXERCISlfjC) 
 COMPAKATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 [133-142.] \'^*)'\'^^' \U^ ' 
 Vocabulary. 
 
 (Sttgtanb 
 
 England 
 
 (Suro|)a 
 
 Europe 
 
 gran!reid^ 
 
 France 
 
 bie @(^tt)ei3 
 
 Switzerland 
 
 bic ?iUe 
 
 the lUy 
 
 bag 3Seitc^cu 
 
 the violet 
 
 !tug 
 
 clever 
 
 ftotg 
 
 proud 
 
 alt 
 
 old 
 
 iwng 
 
 young 
 
 m 
 
 sweet 
 
 oft 
 
 often 
 
 nodf (adv.) 
 
 stm 
 
 al6 
 
 than 
 
 ^ 1. 5Deine ^(umen ftnb fd^on, atier meine Dftofen ftnb nod§ fifjoner. 
 2. ®te fi^onften Otofett finb in unferem (Smarten. 3. %tx %xo\ i'ft 
 reic^er al§ ber ^rofeffor, aber ber ^^aufmann ift am alterreic^ften. 
 4. ^ie @o^ne be§ ^rafen ftnb fcl^oner uub ftoljer aB meine 
 ©b^ne, aber meine (So^ne finb nm beften unb am Hiiijften. 5. ^Oii 
 ber ^raf aucf) jiingere <Sb()ne ? 6. (Sv I^at nnr brei ©of)ne ; ber 
 Slltefte ift Df filler, ber ^iingere ift ©tnbent, aber ber Qiingfte ift 
 nocl^ jn ,§anfe. Y. ^Die 3fiofe ift fc^oner al» bie Sitie, aber \>^^ SSeit:= 
 d^en ift bie fd)onfte ber 331nmen. 8. ^ie 5lrmen finb oft gliic!licf)er 
 at§ bie 3^eic^en, aber bie ^nten finb am at(ergliic!licl)ften. 9. ^^ie- 
 fe§ ayjabc^en ift i^iet btaffer al§ i^re ©c^mefter. 10. 3a, fie ift 
 !ran!, aber bie fleine ift noct) !ran!er. 11. ©iefer ^nabe ift ^i)c^ft 
 unartig, er ift t)iel fcl^lec'^ter at§ feine jiingeren ^riiber. 12. ^leine 
 ^naben finb oft artiger al§ ditere. 13. Qd^ liebe meine gi^eunbe 
 fe^r, aber irf) liebe am meiften * meine ^riiber unb meine 
 ©(tern. 14. grantreic^ ift !(einer al§ ^eutfc^lanb, aber bie 
 ©c^meij ift \iQi^ !(emfte Sanb ($uropa'§. 15. granfreid) unb 
 ^eutfd^tanb finb gro^e unb reid^e 2dnber, aber ^ngtanb ift am 
 allerreid^ften. 
 
 *See 363.26. 
 
296 EXERCISES. 
 
 n. 
 
 1. This child is larger than his brother, but Charles is 
 the largest 2. Charles is better than the older pupils, but 
 Frederick is the most industrious of the boys. 3. These 
 younger boys are cleverer than the older ones. 4 The 
 reddest apples are the prettiest, but these green apples are 
 sweeter than the red ones. 5. These flowers are very bright 
 and pretty. 6. Yes; but the pale red roses are prettier, and 
 these blue violets are the prettiest flowers in my garden. 
 7. The rose is the most beautiful flower, the lily is the 
 proudest; but the violet is the prettiest of all. 8. England 
 is a smaller country than Germany, but the Englishmen are 
 prouder and richer than the Germans. 9. Is Switzerland 
 larger than England? 10. No; Switzerland is still smaller 
 than England. 11. These poor children are sick and un- 
 happy, but the smallest one is the most unhappy. 12. She 
 is poorer and sicker than her brother, and she is also the 
 youngest. 13. The biggest of these girls is ugly; but 
 the younger is prettier, and the youngest is the prettiest. 
 14. She is quite beautiful. 15. We love our friends more 
 than our teachers. 16. I love the rose more than the lily, 
 but I love the violet most. 
 
 EXERCISEVIO/ 
 
 PEKSONAL PKONOUNS. 
 
 [149-156.] 
 
 Vocabulary. 
 
 mlt (prep, with dative) with Don (prep, with dative) of, from 
 
 bag @tii(f the piece tie glajc^e the bottle 
 
 (Preterit tense of fein 6e, 239.2.) 
 
 L 
 
 1. Stebt btefcgraut^re^inber? 2. ^a, fie liebt ftc unb fie 
 Itebett fie. 3. ©ie lieben S^re ©o^ne, ahtx fie lieben ©ie nid^t. 
 4. (^tbt 3!)nen 3^r 35ruber bie§ ^u^ ? 5. 9^ein, meine ©c^trefter 
 gi6t e§ mir. 6. §atte er bie geber? 1. ®r ^atk fie in ber 
 §anb. 8. SSarft bu im Garten ? 9. ^^ wax mit i^m im (Garten. 
 
 10. §aben (Sie bie ^ilber Don Q^ren ^inbern in biefem ^nc^c? 
 
 11. 3^ ^abe fie barin. 12. 3d) gebe fie Q^nen. 18. Uaxl, bu bift 
 
EXEKCISES. 297 
 
 ein fci^tei^ter ^nabe, aber ©opf)ie unb griebrid), i^r feib gute 
 ^inber. 14. 2Bir fiiib (Sc^meftern unb tDir lieben un§. 15. Sd^ 
 gebe euc^ biefe gtpei 5ipfel 16. ©inb ©ie fein ^ruber ? 
 17. 3d) Un e§. 18. $atteft bu ben Soffel? 19. 3c^ ^atte 
 xf)n in ber recr)ten §anb. 20. ^ibt er bir ein ©tiicE bon 
 feinem 93robe? 21. @r gibt mir ein ©tiic! babon nnb and) eine 
 giafdje 3Sein*. 22. ®a§ 9[)^ab(^en n)ar mit mir in ber ©tabt, 
 nnb i^r ^rnbcr n^ar anc^ mit nn§. 23. ®r tnar gliidlii^, nnb 
 Wix rtjaren e§ au(i). 24. (S§ n)aren t)iele Sente in ber ©tabt. 
 
 n. 
 
 1. Dost thou love me, my brother ? 2. I love thee and 
 thou lovest me. 3. Does his sister give him the flowers ? 
 /- 4. She gives them to him. 5. Was your sister in the garden 
 ' too ? 6. She was with me in the garden. 7. Children, were 
 you good and industrious ? 8. We were so. 9. I have a 
 picture of you in my book. 10. No, it is not in it; it is in 
 my hand. 11. This picture is not a picture of me, it is a 
 picture of my mother. 12. There were many pupils in the 
 school. 13. Were you a pupil of the old man ? 14. I was. 
 15. I have a picture of the Englishman in my room. 16. I 
 was in your room, but it was not in it. 17. Have you the 
 apple ? 18. I have it and a piece of bread also. 19. Do 
 you love her or me ? 20. I love her, but I do not love you. 
 21. Your friends love you and you love them, but I do not 
 love you. 22. I have your pen and I give it to you. 23. 
 Were these boys with you in the monastery? 24. They 
 were with us, but we do not love them. 25. Have you the 
 bottle of wine in your hand ? 26. I have it in it. 27. That 
 girl has my ring. 28. No, she hasn't it ; your brother has it. 
 
 EXERCISE 11. 
 POSSESSIVE AND DEMONSTEATIVE PEONOUNS. 
 
 [157-171.] 
 
 Vocabulary, 
 hex Ol^cim Ihe uncle ber S5ormunb the guardmn 
 
 ble Xantt the aunt baS jttjeater the theatre 
 
 bag ^ferb ihe horse ber ^unb the dog 
 
 ber S3rief the letter ha^ ^piti the game 
 
 * 2ie.5a. 
 
298 
 
 1. 6tnb bte SDlcintier Sreunbe t)on Q^nen? 2. ®er tft mein 
 Ofjeim, unb jener ift rnetn ^ormunb. 3. ©inb biefe jtuei ^ferbe 
 bie feinigen ? 4. ®a§ ift mein ^ferb, aber jeneg tft ein ^ferb beg 
 $errn ©d)mibt. 5. ©ein ^ferb ift grofser ai§> ba§ meinige, aber 
 bag 3§rige ift am grogten. 6. SSaren ©ie in ber ©tabt ? 1. ^c^ 
 tt)ar in Berlin mit bent (S^rafen unb einent greunbe beffelben. 
 8. ©eine greunbe finb nic^t bie nteinigen. 9. SSir maren im 
 ^^eater mit feiner ^ante unb beren ^itbfc^er ^^oi^ter. 10. !5)a§ 
 ift ein fc^bneg ^^eater. 11. Unfere S^inber unb bie unfereg ^ad^^ 
 barg finb ©(filler ieneg Tlanm^. 12. Tldm ^inber finb bie 
 greunbe ber feinigen. 13. (Sie finb in berfelben ©c^ute unb ^aOen 
 immer biefelben ^iic^er unb biefelben ©tnbien. 14. Wnn §unb 
 unb ber meineg D^eimg raaren mit mir im SSalbe. 15. SD^einer tvav 
 gan§ unartig, aber ber feinige ift ein ()iibfrf)er, artiger $unb. 
 16. ©inb bie ^tnei ^riefe bein ? 17. ^er ift mein, aber jener ift 
 ber beinige. 18. SDag^inb bie ^riefe meineg D^eimg. 
 
 n. 
 
 1. Were you in Berlin with your brother ? 2. I was in 
 BerHn with my friends and those of my brother. 3. Our 
 friends are always the same. 4. I love his and he loves 
 mine. 5. Is this your dog or that of your uncle ? 6. My 
 uncle's dog is much handsomer than that. 7. Had you your 
 horses or your guardian's ? 8. We had my guardian's, his are 
 much better than ours. 9. This is my horse, but that is my 
 brother's. 10. This boy was in the forest with our neighbor 
 and his son. 11. He (that one) is a pretty little boy. 12. 
 Have you my letter or my aunt's? 13. I have our letter 
 and yours and hers. 14. I give you them. 15. That is his, 
 but I have also a letter from my mother. 16. I have a pic- 
 ture of her (the same). 17. I do not like dogs. 18. Yours 
 are bad, but your uncle's are the worst. 
 
 ^ It,!, Yll 
 
J'^-O^ 
 
 (oaJ-j^) exeecises. 299 
 
 EXERCISE 12. 
 mrEEROGATIVE, RELATIVE, AND INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
 
 
 / 
 
 [172-195.1\ 
 
 Vocabulary, 
 
 
 geftern 
 
 ber abater 
 ber ^aijer 
 ®ott 
 
 yesterday 
 
 now 
 
 the painter 
 
 the Emperor 
 
 Ood 
 
 ^eute 
 
 berii^mt 
 
 bag ®etb 
 
 ha^ S^atl^auS [9tat^aug] 
 
 ta^ portrait* 
 
 to-day 
 famous 
 the money 
 1 the town-hall 
 the portrait 
 
 1. 2Ber ift btefer $0?ann? 2. ©r ift berfetbe,t ber geftern ^ter 
 ttjar. 3. SSem gebeu ©ie ben ^^rief , '^tw ©ie in ber §anb IjaBen ? 
 4. 3c^ gebe i^n bemienigen, ben ic^ am meiften Hebe. 5. SSer 
 !ein (S^elb ^ai, ift gtiicflic^er aB berjenige, ber feine greunbe %at 
 6. SDer, ber mic^ nic^t liebt, ift nic^t mein greunb. T. SSa§ fiir 
 ein Wamx ift fein ®aft? 8. (£r ift ein jnnger WoXtx, beffen 
 ^ilber fe^r beriif)mt finb. 9. ©inb feine ^ilber fdjbner aB bie 
 be§ altcn Waltx^, ber geftern ^ier xoax ? 10. 2)er ift anc^ ein 
 beriif)mter Wa\tx, aber ber fiingere ift am beriif^mteften. 11. 
 2BeIcf)e ^ilber finb Don Sfjrem grennbe ? 12. ^a§ portrait be§ 
 ^aifer§, inelc^eg im 9^atr)^au§ ift, ift Doni^m. 13. SSelc^ ein 
 fc[)one§ Q3ilb ! 14. SSeffen finb biefe ^ferbe ? 15. (5^ finb bie 
 ^ferbe be§ jnngen Dffi^ier^, ber je^t in nnferem §anfe ift. 
 16. 28er foIcl}e ^ferbe f)at, ift ein ^Uic!lic!)er. IT. SSer gtbt nn§ 
 a((e§, mag \mx \)(\im\ ? 18. SE)er gnte ©ott gibt un§ a((e§, n)a§ unr 
 ^aben. 19. (Sibt bcin ^ormnnb bir ettna§(Sd)bne§? 20. ©r gibt 
 mir immer tiiele fdjone (Sad[)en, aber er gibt mir '^eute nid^t^ 
 9^eue§. 
 
 n. 
 
 1. From whom is this letter ? 2. The letter which you 
 have in your hand is from my sister who is now in 
 Germany. 3. In -which city is she ? 4. She is in the same 
 city in which I was. 5. Whom do you love? 6. I love 
 those who love me and who are my friends. 7. He who 
 
 * Pronounced, and often written, ^^ortriit. f 434. 437« 
 
300 
 
 EXEKCISES. 
 
 has no friends is unhappy. 8. Whose horses have you ? 
 9. I have the horses of my uncle who is now sick. 10. He 
 is at the house of the doctor whose best friend he is. 
 11. What sort of pictures have you in your book ? 12. That 
 is a picture of the painter whose portraits are so famous, 
 and this is a picture of our good Emperor whom we love 
 so much. 13. What a pretty book! 14 Whoever has 
 money gives something to the poor who have nothing. 
 
 15. This good man gives all he has to the poor and sick. 
 
 16. What does he give them? 17. He gives them warm 
 clothes which rich people give to him. 18. He who has no 
 friends is more unhappy than he who has no money. 
 19. Those who do not love me are not my friends. 20. Whose 
 children are we? 21. We are the children of God, who 
 loves us and who gives us all we have. 22. Some have 
 much money and some have no money. 23. Several of my 
 friends were in our house to-day. 24. We have many fine 
 pictures in our town-hall, but the portrait of the Emperor 
 is the finest. 
 
 EXERCISE 13. 
 
 CAKDINAL AND OKDINAL NUMEEALS. 
 
 [196-203.] 
 
 Vocabulary. 
 
 bcr ^ag the day 
 
 ba§ 3a^r the year 
 
 bie 3JJinute the minute 
 
 bic SBod^e the week 
 
 3anuar January 
 
 9Rar5 March 
 
 9Jfai May 
 
 3uli July 
 
 (September September 
 
 9'Jot)ember November 
 
 bie 9Jiar! warfc (coin worth 24 cts.) 
 
 ber Wonat 
 
 the month 
 
 bie @tunbe 
 
 the hour 
 
 ber @eburt«tag 
 
 the birthday 
 
 bie 53ibUott|e! 
 
 the library 
 
 ?^ebruar 
 
 February 
 
 5tt)rit 
 
 April 
 
 3uni 
 
 June 
 
 STuguft 
 
 August 
 
 October 
 
 October 
 
 2)ecember 
 
 December 
 
 1. §eute tft ber fiinf unb ^mangigfte Wcix^, Ci^i^^f)n ^unbett 
 fteben unb ac^tjig. 2. SDa§ Sn^r ^nt 12 Womtt, ieber Womi 
 
EXERCISES. 301 
 
 ^ai 30 ober 81 ^age, jeber Xac^ Ijat 24 (Stunben, itnb jebe (Shmbc 
 i)at 60 ar^iuuten. 3. Wdx^^ ift ber britte monai be§ 3a[)re^. 
 4, ■ efterii iDiir ber 16te 3:at3 b,e§ 9teii 9[)toiiat§ be§ 25fteu 3al)re§ 
 meineg Sebeiig. 5. 9[)?ein (^etuirt^tag ift ben 9teu gebruar, 
 ber beine ift ben 29ften ^^(ut3uft. 6. SSie uiele ^iid)er ^aben ©ie 
 in ^i)XQX ^ib(iot()e! ? 7. ^d) ijahc ungefdftr 2450 S^iic^er, aber 
 ntein Oljeim ^at t)iele 3:anfenb ^iicl^er in feiner ^ibliot^e!. 
 8. SSir finb brei ^riiber, ^Boijut eine§ ^ater§, ber erfte ift 20 
 Sa^re alt, ber 2te ift 18 3al)re nit, ber 3te ift in feinem 16ten 
 3a^re. 9. SSir maren ben 25ften Quli 1878 mit unferen 10 ^in^^ 
 bern in Berlin. 10. ^ie brei alteften ber Sl^inber finb ^naben, 
 \)a§> t)ierte unb fiinfte finb ^IRcibcl^en, nnb bie fiinf anberen finb 
 nnc^ ©o^ne. 11. ®er ^eic^e ^at 1,000,000 maxl* aber fein 
 armer 9^acf)bar t)at fein (S^elb. 
 
 n. 
 
 1. Yesterday was the 16th of July, 1887. 2. Was yester- 
 day your birthday? 3. No, my birthday is the 19th of 
 November, and my sister's birthday is the 6th of February. 
 4. I have three sisters, the first is 25 years old, the second 
 is 22, and the third is in her 20th year. 5. June is the 6th 
 month of the year. 6. The year has 12 months, 52 weeks, 
 and 365 days. 7. The Emperor's birthday was the 22nd of 
 March. 8. He is 90 years old, and his son is 48. 9. In the 
 city's library are 52,973 books. 10. Have you much money? 
 I had many thousand marks, but now I have only 57 marks. 
 
 11. My guardian is very rich ; he has 5,787,320 marks. 
 
 12. Whose are these seven children? 13. Two are my 
 brother's children, and the other five are mine. 14. July 4th, 
 1776. 15. Oct. 17th, 1519. 
 
 EXERCISE 14. 
 
 SIMPLE FORMS OF VERBS. 
 
 [231-237.] 
 
 Vocabulary, 
 like Uebcn conjugate : like geben conjugate : 
 
 njo^ncn dwell, live fel^en see 
 
 malen paint lefcn read 
 
 * 211.2. 
 
3(^2 EXERCISES. 
 
 faufcn hay fru^er formerly 
 
 njiinfcl^cn vyish, ward ber ^ut the hat 
 
 toeit (conj.), becaiise alS (conj.), when 
 (See 386.46, 434.) 
 
 1. SSer gab gotten ha^ SBuc^ ? 2. Qdi gab e§ i^tn, trett id) i^n 
 liebte. 3. SSo tDoI)nen 3§re greunbe ? 4. (Sie mo^nten frii^er in 
 ber ©tabt, aber fie tDo^nen je^t l^ier im SSalbe. 5. 2Ba§ fauftc 
 bie grau, al§ ber S^aufmann ^ier wax ? 6. ©ie !aufte 9ftocfe unb 
 §iite fiir i^re ^^inber. 1. 2Sa§ fiir ein S3uc^ lefen ©ie ? 8. (Sr 
 liegt eine ^efc^ic^te Don 2)eutfd£)Ianb. 9. ®ib fie mir, icl^ lefe fie 
 aud^. 10. 2Sa§ fagte er, al§ (Sie e§ i^m gaben? 11. (Sr fagte 
 nic^tg, tueit ic^ if)n nic^t fa§. 12. 2Sa§ fie^ft bu, ge(iebte§ ^nb? 
 13. 3d§ fe^e jtDei fcljon gemalte ^ilber. 14. 2Ser malte ha§> '^ox^ 
 trait Don S^^^itt Skater? 15. !5)er junge 93laler, ber in nnferem 
 §aufe tvo^nt, malte e§. 16. (Sage mir \va§^ bu miinfi^eft, unb id^ 
 gebe e§ bir. IT. ^ib mir nid^t§, id) ^abe aEe^ tva^ id^ tt)iinfrf)e. 
 18. SSa§ fur ein ^ilb malten ©ie ? 19. 3d^ malte ein ^ilb \)on 
 bem §aufe ujorin id^ Wo^m, 
 
 n. 
 
 1. Love me because I love you. 2. Why did you give her 
 your picture ? 3. I gave it to her because she loved me. 
 
 4. What did you say to the merchant when you saw him ? 
 
 5. We bought books and pictures. 6. What sort of books 
 are you reading ? 7. I am reading the history which my 
 uncle gave me. 8. Eead it and give it to me. 9. This 
 painter lived seven years in Berlin, but now he lives in our 
 city. 10. He paints very beautiful pictures. 11. He painted 
 the portrait of the Emperor which you saw in Berlin. 
 12. This rich man bought the j^icture which I saw. 13. We 
 saw the Emperor the 15th of February 1879, when we were 
 in Berlin. 14. What did he want ? 15. He wanted nothing 
 more, he bought all he wanted. 16. I am cold because I 
 have no hat. 17. Buy a hat while the merchant is here. 
 18. I do not buy a hat because I have no money. 19. Give 
 
EXEKCISES. 
 
 303 
 
 me money. 20. I have three loved and loving daughters. 
 21. Thou mayest love, he may live, you might paint, he 
 might see, we may read, give, he might buy, we might 
 see, you may paint. 
 
 EXERCISE 15. 
 SIMPLE AND COMPOUND POEMS OP THE AUXILIAEIES. 
 
 [238-244.] 
 Vocabulary. 
 
 ber ©cnerat 
 
 the general 
 
 ber ®otbat 
 
 the soldier 
 
 ber ^ru^Ung 
 
 the spring 
 
 ber ^erbft 
 
 autumn 
 
 ber @ommer 
 
 summer 
 
 ber SBinter 
 
 winter 
 
 blc 3a^re§5eit 
 
 the season 
 
 ha^ better 
 
 the weather 
 
 fatt 
 
 cold 
 
 ^eiB 
 
 hot 
 
 fu^t 
 
 cool 
 
 3ufrieben 
 
 contented 
 
 tobt [tot] 
 
 dead 
 
 njenn, conj. 
 
 if, when 
 
 JU, adv. 
 
 too 
 
 gu,prep. (with dative or inf 
 
 1. S)tefe ^inber ttiurben fran!, tnetl fie feine tDarmen f^Ieiber 
 l^atten. 2. (jDa§ SSetter ttiirb je^t fii^tejJMub bie ^inber merben 
 gefunb. 3. ^nt @ommer ift ha§> SSetter fel^r ^ei^, aber tm Qtxh]t 
 tDirb e§ !uf)tcr, imb tm SSinter ift e§ am aderfalteften. 4. ®er 
 Srii^ting ift feljr fc()on gemefen, aber ber ©ommer ift bie fcl^onfte 
 Sal^re^jeit. 5. 3Barum ift ber alte Tlann fo berut;mt ? 6. @r ift 
 berii'^mt, iueit er ein grower (General gelDefen ift. 1. ^d) tv'dxt* 
 and} <SoIbnt gelDorben, iDeiuif ic^ nic^t !ranf getrefeu wave. 8. ®er 
 arme Slnahc Uiarb immer frdnfer, imb er ift je^t tobt [tot]. 9. ^d) 
 ijahc tiiele grcimbe geljabt, ader bu bift mein befter greunb, 10. 
 !5)er alte d)laUv I)at biele greunbe iinb 33e!amite gel^abt, al§ er reic§ 
 imb beriif)mt mar. 11. Sejjt ^ai er feine Sreunbe, tt)ei( er arm 
 geUHirbeii ift. 12. (£§ ift gut reid) 511 fein, aber e§ ift beffer gute 
 greunbe gu ^aben. 13. (Set gut unb bu tt)irft gliidlic^ feiu. 
 
 14. !J)u bift !(eiu, meiu ^tiub, aber bu mirft jeben ^ag gri3ger. 
 
 15. ^er S3ater be§ ^uabeu ift eiu reidjer ^ann getuefeu, unb 
 biefer J Uilrb t)iel ^elb ijaimi, ineuii er citter ift. 16. (5ie ioer- 
 hQU morgeu fec^^ 5D^ouate in !ti3er in geiuefeu feiu. 
 
 *332.1. t386.4/. 434. tl66.1. 
 
304 EXEBCISES. 
 
 n. 
 
 1. Tou were, they became, she miglit have, we had, they 
 might become, we may have been, had you had? they had 
 become, we shall be, we should have had, you shall have 
 been, he shall be, she had had, I have been, thou mightest 
 have been, we may have had, to have had, to have been, to 
 have become. 2. Be diligent, become good, have all that you 
 want. 3. It becomes warmer in the spring. 4. We were too 
 hot in summer* and we are too cold in winter. 5. We have 
 had beautiful weather to-day, but to-morrow will be more 
 beautiful. 6. If I were rich, I should be happy. 7. Be diligent 
 ftnd good, and you will become rich and happy. 8. I have 
 been very happy, but I am become poor and old, and I have 
 no friends. 9. I shall have been happy if you have been 
 my friend. 10. Why did this man become so rich ? 11. He 
 has been a poor soldier, but he became a famous general. 
 
 12. His sons will also be soldiers when they are older. 
 
 13. He would have been happier if he had had a son. 
 
 14. It is good to be a famous general, but it is better to be 
 a good man. 15. It is good to have money, but it is better 
 to have good friends. 16. The children would be happy if 
 they had warm clothes. 17. The weather becomes warmer 
 every day. 
 
 .Ok EXERCISE lie. ) 
 
 VERBS OF THE NEW CONJUGATION. 
 [245-250.] 
 
 y^^ 
 
 le^ren teach 
 
 lerncn learn 
 
 fc^tdeti send 
 
 f^ielen play 
 
 reben talk U a. b ^ 
 
 i)oxtn hear 
 
 fagen say, tell 
 
 lob en praise 
 
 ieBen live ^s ^- . v. 
 
 reifen journey, go by travelling 
 
 arbeiten toork 
 
 geigeit show 
 
 foufen buy 
 
 bring en bring 
 
 fennen know (be acquainted with) 
 
 ntorgen to-morrow 
 
 bort there, yonder 
 
 lange, adv. long 
 
 *e6M. 
 
EXEBCISES. 305 
 
 (L §a6en bte ^tnber gut gearBettet? 2. !5)er Secret to6t fie, 
 iSeu fie gut arbeiteu. 3. @r ^at fie alle§ gete^rt U)a§ fie geterut 
 fjabeu. 4. ^(i) lobe \^n, meil er bie .^Tiuber f o bieleg gele^rt Ijat. 
 5. SDie ^iuber tnerbeu im (^arteu fpieleu, tvtnn fie jmei ©tunbeu 
 gearbeitet ^abeu. 6. ©age mir, tt)ag bir §err (Sd)mibt gefagt ^at. 
 t. 3c^ rebete lauge mit it)m, uub er lobte meiueu gutcu ^Setter, 
 ber uacf) 5(meri!a gereift ift. 8. S)er reifte uacl) 5(meri!a, U)etl er 
 fo arm tuar, aber er I}at Diet gearbeitet, uub er ift jet^t reic^ ge= 
 IDorben. 9. @r '^at eiu grofee^ $au§ gefauft uub iDirb iu 5(meri!a 
 leben. 10. ®r fjai feiuem better eiu ^ilb baijou gefc^ic!t, luelc^eg 
 er mir gejeigt I)at. 11. (Sr Ijtitte e§ bir gejeigt, iueuu bu bort 
 gemefeu mareft. 12. §orteu ©ie ma§ ber ^rofeffor fagte? 
 13. kx ^ai bie 33ilber gelobt, bie ic^ i§m gejeigt I)abe. 14. @r 
 liebt auc^ bie fc^oueu ^ilbcr, uub I)at t^iete babou gefauft, at§ er 
 uac^ $ari§ reifte. 15. 3eigcu ©ie i()m auc^ meiue ^iid)er, uub 
 fageu ©ie mir, \m§> er baDou beuft. 16. ^r ^itt bie ^43itc^cr 
 gelobt, tuenu er fie getauut I)atte. 17. Qc^ feuue beu ^rofeffor 
 uic^t. 18. 2Ba§ brad)te er bir gefteru? 19. (^t ^at mir uicf)t§ 
 gebrac^t, aber er mirb mir morgeu etma§ ©c^bueg briugeu. 
 20. ^r fauute meiue ©Iteru, al§ fie iu ^erliu lebten, 
 
 n. 
 
 1. What did you buy when you were in the city ? 2. I 
 bought books and sent them to my uncle. 3. Have you 
 read the books which you bought ? 4. I had read many 
 of the books, and I shall have read them all. 5. Did the 
 professor teach you much ? 6. He taught me all that I 
 have learned. 7. Have you talked with him ? 8, No, but I 
 heard all he said. 9. The professor had travelled much 
 and he bought many books and pictures. 10. He has 
 showed me his whole library, and he told me where he 
 bought the books. 11. He would not have journeyed to 
 Paris if he had not been rich. 12. Did you hear what the -^ 
 children said when they where playing in the garden ?/^ 
 13. They had played in the garden, but they were working 
 when I was in the garden. 14. Show them the pictures 
 
 i 
 
306 EXERCISES. 
 
 which your brother brought you. 15. When they have 
 worked two hours I will show them the pictures. 16. He 
 talked with the children, and showed them pictures of the 
 country in which she had lived. 17. Tell me with whom 
 you have talked. 18. We were talking with Mr. Smith, but 
 he said nothing. 19. I know him, but I do not like him. 
 20. It is better to work than to talk. 21. I shall bring you 
 a new book to-morrow. 
 
 EXERCISE 17. 
 
 MODAL AUXILIARIEa 
 
 [251-260.] 
 
 I. 
 
 1. SSittft bu na^ $ari§ ? 2. ^^ ntoc^te na^ ^ari§ retfen, 
 aber id^ fann e§ nic^t. 3. 2Btr fonnten nic^t nac^ ^arig, tueil tt)ir 
 nacf) 33erlin l)aben reifen miiffen. 4. Qc^ mag ni(i)t a((em reifen, 
 aber ic^ tperbe e§ je^t miiffen. 5. 2Ba§ !)at er bem 9}Zanne 
 gefagt? 6. (Sr burfte nic^t mit i^m reben, tueil er eiii fc^Iecl^ter 
 Mann fein foil. Y. 3d) foUte mit i^m reben, aber id^ i)aht e§ 
 nid^t getnollt. 8. (5r foil noc^ fjkx fein, man mill i^n gefe^en 
 l^aben. 9. S^onnen bie Slinber 2)entfc^ ? 10. ^d) l)abe e§ il)nen 
 geleljrt, aber fie mogen e§ nicl)t. 11. (Sie miiffen arbeiten, n^enn 
 fie lernen mollen. 12. Tlan fann alle§ \va^ man mill. 13. ^a§ 
 9Jiabd^en ^ai nic^t fpielen !i3nnen, meil e§ l)at arbeiten miiffen. 
 14. SDie ^inber biirfen nic^t reben, fie follen arbeiten. 15. ^arf 
 tc^ fpielen ? 16. dlt'm, mein ^inb, bn follft jet^t arbeiten, aber 
 bu tt)irft fpciter fpielen !i3nnen. 17. ©r Wu\^tt nicljt Wa§> er nn§ 
 fagen follte. 18. ^c^ foil ha§> ^ud) lefen nub id) mag e^nic^t. 
 19. SSir mu^ten bie fc^onen Spfel faufen, al^ ber ^^aufmann fie 
 mir geigte. 
 
 n. 
 
 1. Why do you go toBerlin?__2. I am obliged to go to-^^^^^ 
 Berlin, but I should like to goto Paris. 3. I do not likeTo 
 travel. 4. These poor children cannot learn anything, 
 because they have to work. 5. They want to learn German, 
 
EXERCISES. 
 
 307 
 
 but they cannot. 6. We should like to give them some 
 money. 7. This boy is said to be very lazy ; he is not to 
 play in the garden, because he was not willing to work. 
 8. He played when he should have worked, and he must 
 now work when he might have played. 9. Do they know 
 what he said ? 10. They do not know it, because they could 
 not hear him. 11. We had to live in the town, but we shall 
 now be able to live here. 12. I am to show you the book 
 which you are to read. 13. May I show it to the children? 
 14. No, you must not show it to them, because they ought 
 not to see it. 15. I wanted to show it to him, because he 
 knows German. 16. He would have been able to read it. 
 17. You ought not to have read the book. 18. I could not 
 but read it, it was so pretty. 19. One must not read every- 
 thing that one wishes. 20. The child claims to have read 
 the book, but she could not (do it). 21. Do you know what 
 she wanted to say to him ? 22. 1 know it, but I may not say 
 it to you. 23. Children, you must be very industrious. 
 24. You do not like to learn, but you will be obliged (to 
 do it). 
 
 EXERCISE 18. 
 
 VEKBS OF THE OLD CONJUGATION. 
 
 [261-273.] 
 
 Vocabulary, 
 
 laufen 
 
 fommen 
 
 fpred)cn 
 
 brec^en 
 
 triufen 
 
 fingen 
 
 geuug 
 
 ber %iVitx 
 
 run 
 
 come 
 
 speak 
 
 break 
 
 drink 
 
 sing 
 
 enough 
 
 the plate 
 
 foUcn 
 
 get)en 
 
 riifen 
 
 binbcu 
 
 finben 
 
 beigcn 
 
 tiie 
 
 bag Jieb 
 
 1. SSa§ fiir Sieber ^aljcn Siei ge 
 
 faU 
 
 go 
 
 call 
 
 bind 
 
 find 
 
 bite 
 
 never 
 
 the 
 
 song 
 
 mgen ? 
 
 2. 2Bir fatigeu bte 
 
 gfs^ 
 
 arum 
 
 £ieber, bie vo'xx in bie[em a (ten !iWc()^ gcfnnben ()aben. 3. 
 fingen 3^re (Scf)mefternnid)t? 4. ®t^-^"inb nocf) nic^t gefommen, 
 unb fie fonnen nid^t fingen. 5. SBariQrUef \>a^ £inb, al^ xoxt e^ 
 
308 EXERCISES. 
 
 fallen? 6. (S§ tft gelaufen, lueil bcr §unb e§ gebtffen '^at. 
 T. SSerben <Sie ben §unb nid^t fc^lagen ? 8. 9^em, er bi^ haa 
 ^'uxh, meit e§ i^n jc^Iug. 9. ©r beifet nur bie Stiuber, 
 njeld^e if;n gefc^Iagen ^aben. 10. Sf^ufen (Sie ben S^naben nnb 
 binben ©ie i^m bie §anb, bie ber §mib gebiffen ^cit 11. 5DZein 
 ^inb, iDa§ f)aft bn getr)an ? 12. Qcf) ^abe ben teller gebrod^en, 
 ben mir bie Sc^mefter ^ah. 13. SBie f)a]t bu il)n gebroc^en? 
 14. Qc^ ftel, nnb ber better brad^. 15. !J)n mcireft nic^t gef alien, 
 inenn bn nic^t gelanfen i)attt\t 16. SSarnm famen ©ie nic^t, nl§ 
 id) ©ic rief ? 17. ^cl^ fprnd^ mit meinem better nnb fonnte nic^t 
 fommen. 18. ®r fommtnie, menn man i^n rnft. 19. ganb beine 
 (Sc^tnefter i[)re ^ante, al§ fie nad^ Berlin ging? 20. ©ie ift ni^t 
 nad) Devlin gegangen, aber bie ^ante tDirb ^u un§ fommen. 
 
 n. 
 
 1. Have you called the dog ? 2. I called him, but he 
 did not come. 3. Why do you call him? 4. I shall 
 strike him, because he has bitten the little girl. 5. She fell 
 and he bit her. 6. Does he always bite the children ? 9. Yes, 
 he is a bad dog ; I have not beaten him enough. 8. The 
 boys fel^down when they were,.goi»g to schooL* 9. They 
 fell because they always run. 10. Children, do not run. j 
 11. Where are the plates? 12. The maids have broken 
 them. 13. Plates always break when they fall. 14. Have 
 you found your knife ? 15. I found it in your room, but 
 now I have broken it. 16. The little boys cannot sing, 
 because they cannot find their books. 17. Do they sing 
 well? 18. The little one sings very beautifully. 19. The 
 teacher gave her this book when she could not find hers, 
 and she sang with the children. 20. I should like to drink 
 some milk, but I find nothing. 21. I will call the maid. 
 22. Sophy, find some fresh milk. 23. The children have 
 drunk the milk, but I have found some good red wine. 
 
 24. He drank the wine, but he ought not to have drunk it. 
 
 25. Call that man ; I want to speak with him. 26. I have 
 spoken with him, but he will not come. 27. I will go with 
 you, and I will speak with him when you have found him. 
 
 ♦66.5. 
 
EXEECISES. 
 
 309 
 
 fe^eit 
 
 legen 
 
 fd)reibcn 
 
 ef[eu 
 
 ber 33ocf) 
 
 bcr ^farrer 
 
 ha^ 3)Httag§e[feti 
 
 EXEHCISE 19. 
 
 PKEPOSITIONS 
 [371-378.] 
 
 Vocabulary, 
 
 set 
 
 lay 
 
 write 
 
 eat 
 
 the brook 
 
 the pastor 
 the dinner 
 
 fifeen 
 Uegen 
 fpringen 
 bie ^riidc 
 bie birdie 
 ber 9^ad^mlttag 
 
 lie 
 
 spring 
 the bridqe 
 the church 
 the afternoon 
 
 1. SSo flnb bie ^iid^er, ton benen trtr fprad^en ? 2. (Sie ticcjeit 
 auf bent ^ifc^e in ntcinem dimmer. 3. (^e^en (Sie in bag 3ininier, 
 iinb legen <Sie bie 33riefe anf ben X\](i) neben bie ^iid)er. 4. SBir 
 lagen unter ben ^ciumen in nteinem ©arten nnb fprac^en Uon 
 nnferen greunben. 5. ©ie !amen in ben (Garten, aU \mx t)on 
 i^^nen fprac^en. 6. ®ie Wao^b 13racf)te einen ^ifcf) in ben Garten 
 nnb fe^te if)n nnter bie 33anme. 1. ©ie fel5te nnfer 3[Rittag§effen 
 baranf, nnb \mx fafeen urn ben 3:ifc^ nnb a^en baUon. 8. 5)ie 
 ^aBen liefen bnrc^ h^n SSalb nnb fprangen iibe» h^n 33acl^. 
 9. (S§ tt)ar !eine ^rilcfe iiber bent 33acf)e. 10. Unmeit bc§ 33nc^e§ 
 fte^t eine !(eine §iitte. 11. 3c^ gclje oft nad) ber §iitte nnb 
 fringe tnein 9l>iittag§efjen ben armen Senten, bie bort tno^nen. 
 12. 5(n tnen fdjreibft bn ? 13. 3d) fdjreibe an hen ^^fnrrer, ber 
 in ber ©tabt tnoljnt. 14. 2)n foKft ben i^rief in bie (Btaht bringen, 
 nnb if)n bent ^farrer geben. 15. 3So moljnt er ? 16. ©t tnol)nt 
 jcnfeitg ber Stabt, ber grogen ^ird)e gegeniiber. 1*7. ^ir finb 
 geftcrn trol^ be§ fjeifeen Setter^ in bie Slirdje gegangen. 18. ®§ 
 wax fe()r \)d% ai§> tr)ir in ber S^ird^e maren ; aber n)af)renb bc§ 
 a)Zittagg ift e0 !ul)t gen^orben. 19. 9?acl^ bent 9??ittag§effen 
 tt)erben tnir nac^ bent SSalbe anf^erljalb ber ^Btaht ge^en. 
 20. 2Bir n>erben binnen einer ©tnnbe ge^en. 
 
 n. 
 
 1. Come into the wood with me. 2. "Why do you go into 
 the wood? 3. We will lie under the trees, and I will read 
 
310 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 the book of whicli we were speaking. 4 The pastor left 
 the book in his room. 5. Go into his house, you will find 
 it on the table. 6. I stood on the bridge over the brook, 
 and the children played around me. 7. The hut of this 
 poor man stood outside of the city, not far from the bridge. 
 8. Do you often go to church ? 9. I go to church every 
 Sunday*, but during the summer I do not go. 10. I can- 
 not go on account of the hot weather. 11. Do you know 
 the Pastor of this church ? 12. He lives opposite to me, 
 and he will come after dinner. 13. Set the apples on the 
 table, and lay the plates and the knives beside me. 14. 
 I will lay an apple on your plate. 15. Did you go into his 
 room ? 16. Yes, he was sitting at his table and was writing 
 a letter to his mother. 17. I laid the books beside him 
 and went out of the room. 18-. I must buy a warm coat 
 on account of the cold weather. 19. We have had very hot 
 weather during this week. 
 
 EXERCISE 20. 
 
 PASSIVE, EEFLEXIVE, AND IMPEESONAL VERBS. 
 
 [274-295.] 
 
 Vocabulary. 
 
 jtd^ freuen r^oice 
 
 regnen rain 
 
 l^ungern he hungry 
 
 fi^ jc^cimen he ashamed 
 
 tabcitt hlame 
 
 bcr 9J?orgen themorning 
 
 bie ^oft the post 
 
 t)or, prep, before, for, on account cif 
 
 fi(^ fiirc^ten he afraid 
 
 bonnern thunder 
 
 biirften thirst 
 tobten [totcn] kill 
 
 tragen carry 
 
 ber 3lbenb th^ evening 
 
 bie 5(ufg abe the task 
 
 ber !3)icncr the servant 
 
 1. SSarum mirb ber ^naht getobt ? 2. (Sr tt)trb getobt, tt)eil 
 feme ^tuftjabe fo c^ut gefc^rieben ift. 3. @eine ^(ufgaben trerben 
 immer gut gefd^rieben, aber bie ber anberen ^naben tuerben 
 gemo^ntii^ fe^r fi^lec^t gefi^rieben. 4. ©te fiird^teu \x6) t)OX 
 
 * 230.2. 
 
EXEECISES. 311 
 
 i^rem Secret, benn fte flnb tmmer t)on t^m gctabett rt)orben. 
 5. 3c^ mocf)te hzn ^rtef lefen, ben bu gefc^riebeu Ijaft. 6. (£r tft 
 fc^on nad) bcr ^oft getratjeii morben. 1. SSir tDoKten in bie 
 ©tabt tjeljen, aber eg reguete unb bonnerte ben ganjen 9^ac^^ 
 mittat3*. 8. giirc^teri Sie fk^ Dor bem Conner ? 9. S^Jein, aber 
 id) freue mic^, uieit e» uid)t me^r regnet. 10. Widj I)ungert '§ ; 
 Qib mir ehi ©tiic! 53rob. 11. Qd) fc^dme mid), meil id) fein guteg 
 ^rob §abe. 12. ©ibt e§ feineu SSeiu im §aufe ? 13. $ier luirb 
 nic^t getrun!en. 14. ©e^en Sie fic§ auf biefen @tu^t man wixb 
 Q^nen etmag WiUf) geben. 15. 9[)^ein Keiner $nnb ift t)on einem 
 fc^lec^ten ^naben getobtet [getotet] morben. 16. 3ft er bom §unbe 
 gebiffen n)orben ? 11. 9^ein, aber er ^t fic^ immer t)or h^n 
 §nnben gefiirc^tet. 18. (Bx \mxh t)on feinem QSater getabelt 
 tt)erben, ttieil er 't>tn $unb getobtet [getotet] i)at 19. ©eftern niurbe 
 in ber Sl'irc^e gefnngen. 20. SStireft hn bort geuiefen, hn I)dtteft ein 
 neneg Sieb ge^ort, tnelc^eS t)on atien gelobt JDorbcn ift. 21. 9J^ir 
 mar nic^t gan§ mol)!, id) burfte mcf)t in bie ^tircl^e ge()en. 22. @§ 
 freut micl^, ©ie ju fe^en. 23. 2)iefer 33rief ift Don il)m gefc^rieben 
 worben unb tuurbe mir bon feinem ^Dicner gebra^t. 
 
 n. 
 
 1. Has the letter been carried to the post ? 2. It has not 
 yet been written, but it will be carried into the city this 
 afternoon. 3. The servant was blamed because the plates 
 were broken. 4 We were very hungry, but nothing was 
 given us. 5. We rejoiced when the dinner was set upon 
 the table by the servant. 6. Seat yourself and eat. 7. This 
 boy is ashamed because he has eaten so much, but we are 
 very glad. 8. How was the child killed ? 9. He was bitten 
 by his dog. 10. I was very much afraid when I saw the 
 big dog with the child. 11. Are you not well ? 12. I always 
 am afraid whenf it rains and thunders. 13. It rains this 
 evening, J but it will not thunder. 14 We could not come 
 because it rained, but it will not rain any more, and I will 
 come to-morrow. 15. I want to see the pictures which 
 have been praised by every one. 16, They were praised by 
 
 * 230.1a. t tt)enn. % 230.2. 
 
312 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 the friends of the painter. 17. Are there no fine pictures 
 in this city ? 18. There are many beautiful paintings in 
 the library. 19. Where were you yesterday when you 
 were called? 20. There was singing and dancing here 
 yesterday. 21. We should have rejoiced if you had been 
 able to come. 22. The children will be very much ashamed 
 when they are blamed by their father. 23. They will be 
 blamed because the exercises which were written by them 
 are so bad. 
 
 
 EXERCISE 21. 
 
 
 
 COMPOUND VEEBS 
 
 }.— SEPAEAELE. 
 
 
 
 [296-301.] 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 Vocd)ulary, 
 
 
 anfangcn 
 
 begin 
 
 
 aufl^oren 
 
 stop^ cease 
 
 auffte^en 
 
 get up 
 
 
 jic^ an^ie^eit 
 
 dress 
 
 aufge^en 
 
 rise (the sun) 
 
 
 untergel)en 
 
 go under, set 
 
 ^inausge^en 
 
 go out 
 
 
 jurudfommcn 
 
 come hack 
 
 ^umadjen 
 
 shut 
 
 
 aufmacf)en 
 
 open 
 
 abreifen 
 
 go or journey away 
 
 mitne^men 
 
 take along 
 
 abf(f)rei6en 
 
 copy 
 
 
 bie 9?ad^t 
 
 the night 
 
 bie @onne 
 
 the sun 
 
 
 ber aJlonb 
 
 the moon 
 
 bie %\^nv 
 
 the door 
 
 
 bo8 genfter 
 
 the window 
 
 bie eifenba^n 
 
 the railroad 
 
 
 ba§3)flittag8cffen</ic dinner 
 
 balb 
 
 soon 
 
 
 fobalb, conj. 
 
 as soon as 
 
 1. SDie Sonne tft untergegangen unb ber Wlonb ge^t auf. 
 2. ^te ^rbeiter, bie ben ganjen ^ag* gearbeitet ^aben, fommen 
 je^t au§ bem gelbe priiS. 3. 93Zac^e bie ^^iir anf, ber ^ater 
 mirb balb 5uriic!!ommen. 4. ^<i) max ^inau^gegangen, aB er 
 Snriidfam. 5. 5Sarum ge^en ©ie je^t ^tnau§? 6. Qc^ n)erbe 
 nid^t ^inaugge^en, ic^ mH nur bie ^T^iire unb genfter jnmad^en. 
 1. 2Bir miiffen ntorgen frii^ anffte^en, n)ex( tnir unfere 5Iufgabe 
 ni(^t abgefc^rteben l^aben. 8. @r \tanh auf, jog fi^ an unb fd^riel) 
 feine ^ufgabe ab. 9. SSirb bie (Sonne balb aufge^en ? 10. Qd^ 
 
 * 230.L 
 
EXERCISES. 313 
 
 toetg nt(^t, e§ fdngt an gu regnen, unb td^ ^abe bte genfter 
 gugemac^t. 11. 3ft beiii ^ater mit ber (Sifenbal)n abgereift? 
 
 12. (Sr reifte geftern ab, aber er ift f)eute guriidgefommen. 
 
 13. SDie 5trbeiter naljmeu i§r SJiittag^effen mit, al§ fie in bie 
 getber §iuau§gingen. 14. SSarum ^aben ©ie ^i)x^n Wiener ni(^t 
 mitgenommen, a(§ ©ie abreiften? 15. Qc^ miiufc^te ii)n mitju- 
 ne^men, aber er tuurbe !ran! unb fonnte nidjt mitge^en. 16. (Sr 
 ift nod^ nicl^t aufgeftanben, tneil bie (Sonne nic^t aufgegangen ift. 
 It. @r fcingt an §u arbeiten, tnenn bie (Sonne aufgeljt, unb ^bxt 
 auf, Ujenn fie unterge^t. 18. 3Sir fitrdfiteten un§ fe^r, aU e§ ju 
 bonnern anfing, aber mv fd^amen un§ je^t, meil tt)ir un§ ge^ 
 fiird^tet ^aben. 19. 3ct) mac^te bie ^f)iiren unb genfter auf, 
 fobalb ber 3^egen auf^iirte. 20. SSen Ujerben (Sie mitnel^men, 
 tt)enn (Sie in bie ©tabt ge^en ? 21. Qd^ ttjerbe eud^ mitne^men, 
 ^inber ; fte^et auf unb jie^et eud^ ^iibfd^ an. 22. SDarf bie ^(eine 
 aud^ mitge^en ? 23. D^ein, fie barf nic^t mit ;* aber tt)ir merben 
 i^^r ttrva^ (Sd)onc» gcben, tucun luiv 5uriicf!ommen. 
 
 n. 
 
 1. When do the workmen come back ? 2. They come 
 back when the sun sets. 3. The sun has already set, and 
 they will soon come back. 4. It is growing cold; shut the 
 doors and windows. 5. The moon will soon rise; do you 
 see it? 6. The rain has begun, and we cannot go out. 
 
 7. Have you copied the letters which you had begun? 
 
 8. Yes, I got up early and copied them. 9. Get up and 
 dress yourself; we must go away. 10. Why did they not 
 take the child along when they went away? 11. They did 
 not take it along, because it had not dressed itself. 12. The 
 servant will go out as soon as it ceases to rain. 13. He will 
 go into the city, and will take along the letters which we 
 have copied. 14. He did not shut the door when he went 
 out. 15. Get up and shut it. 16. My aunt will not go away 
 to-day, because it has begun to rain and she is afraid of 
 the thunder. 17. She went away onf the railroad as soon as 
 it stopped thundering. 18. The night has come, and the 
 
 « a59.a t mit 
 
314 EXEBCISES. 
 
 moon will soon rise. 19. I want to go out. 20. Go, but 
 come back soon. 21 I began to work, but it became too 
 hot and I had to stop. 22. Why did the child not get up ? 
 23. It was not allowed to get up, because it was sick. 
 24 They went out into the forest, and took the books with 
 them which they had begun. 25. They will come back as 
 soon as the sun has set. 26. We must go away to-morrow, 
 but we shall soon come back. p ^ ^p^' <^^ ^ ^ ^^^^^-^ 
 
 EXERCISE 22. 
 
 COMPOUND VERBS.— n^SEPAEABLE. 
 [302-313.] 
 
 Vocabulary, 
 
 ttergeffen forget Derfpred^en promise 
 
 Derfte^en understart^- em^jfaugen receive 
 
 Uerdubern change t)er[u(^en try 
 
 n)egne^mcn(sep.)tofce away Dertieren lose 
 
 iiberje^en translate, set over n)ieber^oIen repeat, bring back 
 
 beja^ten ^^ Derfaufen sell 
 
 fic^ erinnern -f^JJtemter gef alien please 
 
 ha^^tx\pvt^tn the promise bie @ad^e the thing 
 
 fran;5bftf(^ French englifc^ English 
 
 ber !?aben the shop ta^ ®tbidjt the poem 
 
 1. §aben (Ste fc^on t)ergeffen, \va§> ©ie niir Derfproc^eu I)a6en ? 
 2. ^tin, k^ erinnere mtd^ metne§ ^erfprecl^eng* unb id) iT)ieber:= 
 l^ole e^ 3t)neu. 3. 3Sa§ ^at S^iienf biefer ^aufmann Derlauft ? 
 4. (^x ijerfaufte mir 9loc!e unb Sd)u^e fiir meine ^inber unb einen 
 $ut fiir mtc^. 5. 3ft alk§> beja^tt morben, tva§> er Sfjiien t)er' 
 fauft f)ai ? 6. (S§ ift nod) nic^t be^ap morben, tDeil ic^ meui 
 ^etb t)ertoren "^abe, abcr ic^ n)erbe morgen alle^| be5al)len. 
 1. (befallen 3^nen bie ©ac^en, bie ©ie in fctnem Saben gefer)en 
 l^aben ? 8. (£§ gefafft mir olIe§ gan^ gut, aber ic^ mug ba§ ^(eib 
 beranbern, tt)eil e§ ju grog ift. 9. §at l^arl feine franjoftfd^e 
 
 *219.3. t 222.1,16. X 227.I&. 
 
EXERCISES. 315 
 
 ^ufgabe uberfe^t ? 10. (Sr ^at fie iu§ ^eutfc^e unb in! (Snglifd^e 
 iiberfelt. 11. ^axl, ^oU mir ba§ ^ucl) tnicber unb tDieber^oIe 
 mtr betn ^ebic^t. 12. 3*^ ^ei& e§ nic^t mefjr, ic^ ^abe e§ t)er^ 
 geffen. 13. ^ii t?ergi^t aKel ma^ man bic^ le^rt; bu gefaUft mir 
 gar nid^t. 14. 3c!^ ttjerbe t)erfucl^en, jel^t ffcifsiger gu tt)erben. 
 15. §aben Sie bie ^iidjer empfangen, bie er ^ijncn Derfproc^en 
 5at? 16. D^ein, aber ic^ luerbe fie empfangen, fobalb er 5urM:= 
 !ommt. 11. 3c^ tjerftelje gar nic^t, ma§ fie mir gefagt '^at. 
 18. (Sr r)at fie nic^t t)erftanben, meil er nidjt ^eutfc^ fprecl^en 
 !ann. 19."*3cl£) ^aht bzn ^rief nic^t t)erfter)en !i3nuen, '!)tn ic^ 
 geftern empfing, ttieil ic^ nic^t 5)eutfd) lefen !ann. 20. SSir 
 ^aben angefangen, htn ^rief ju ilberfe^en, aber wix l)aimx noc^ 
 mct)t angefangen, i^n ab^nfc^reiben. 21. Qc^ iuerbe bir* ha§> ^uc^ 
 tDegne^men, n)enn bu e§ njieber Derlierft. 
 
 n. 
 
 1. In what shop did they selljjM these books? 2. I 
 forget who sold them to me ; do tll^Pplease you ? 3. They 
 please me quite well. 4 You cannot buy any, because they 
 have all been sold already. 5. I do not want to buy any, 
 for I could not understand them. 6. l^j^^B not under- 
 stand German ? 7. I have quite f orgotti^Prerman, but I 
 understand French. 8. Promise me to learnf German. 9. I 
 will try to learn it, but I cannot speak it at all, I can only 
 translate it. 10. I remember a German book, which I read 
 when I was in Germany. 11. It pleased me, but I do not 
 remember its name. 12. Why did I not receive the letter 
 yesterday ? 13. You did not receive it because I forgot to 
 copy it, but you will receive it to-morrow. 14. Did the child 
 lose his book ? 15. The teacher took it away from him, because 
 he was lazy; but the boy repeated his promise, and the 
 teacher brought him back the book. 16. The merchant 
 wanted to sell me many pretty things when I was in his 
 shop, but I had lost my money and could buy nothing. 
 17. He will lose much money if he cannot sell these 
 things. 18. These things do not please me; I will not 
 pay for them. 19. My cousin is much changed, and hag 
 
 * 222.1,3. 1 348.2. 
 
316 
 
 EXEBCISES. 
 
 quite forgotten me. 20. Children change very quicMy, 
 and easily forget their friends. 21. They tried to 
 translate the poem which they had received, but they 
 could not understand it. 22. I received a German letter, 
 and I understood it quite well. 23. I understand all 
 that I read, but I can not translate it into English. 
 
 Note. It is thought best, before taking up the special uses of the 
 moods, tenses, etc., to give the pupil some exercise in the formation 
 of the German sentence, it being quite impossible to introduce the sub- 
 junctive, infinitive, etc., without making use of longer and more involved 
 sentences than the pupil is as yet prepared for. 
 
 
 EXERCISE 23. 
 
 
 
 NORMAL AND INVERTED SENTENCES. 
 
 
 [430-433.1 
 
 
 %mivita 
 
 ^^Vocabulary. 
 .Mmca ber ^meri!ancr 
 
 the American 
 
 bic SSo^niing 
 
 the dwelling 
 
 bte 9ieftauratton 
 
 the restaurant 
 
 nieub(ireii*Im| 
 
 juMieren] to furnish 
 
 miet^en [mieten] 
 
 hire 
 
 fru!)ftucfen 
 
 ^^^k breakfast 
 
 jpeifen 
 
 eat 
 
 tt)euer [teuer] 
 
 ^^^P dear 
 
 bittig 
 
 cheap 
 
 bcr ^ottig 
 
 ^^T the king 
 
 blc ^onigin 
 
 the queen 
 
 mac^en 
 
 make 
 
 ber ^^Jrdfibent 
 
 the president 
 
 ber §rembc 
 
 the stranger 
 
 bie (Srbe 
 
 the earth 
 
 ber ^rei0 
 
 the price 
 
 eittmat, snjeimat 
 
 once, twice, etc 
 
 lange, adv. 
 
 long 
 
 tt)ot)t, adv. 
 
 loeK, perhaps 
 
 1. ^er grembe milt ftc§ eine f(^one SSo^nung in ber ©tabt 
 miet^en. 2. (Sine SBoljnung ^at er fd^on gefunbett, alier fie ift 
 i^mf 5U tr)eiier. 3. 3c^ Ijaht m berj Sriebrld^ftrage eine fcT^on 
 menbtirte SSoftnuiuj ju eiiient fe^r Ijiltigen ^reife gemict^et. 
 4. SSerben (Sie (angc ^ier WeiCen? 5. ^en ganjen SBinter 
 merbe ic^ in 33ev(in bfeiben, aber im grii^Iing§ tuerbe icf) nad) 
 $ari§ abreifen. 6. SSerben ©ie S^re gantilie nac^ ^ari§ ntit^ 
 ucljmen ? 1. ^eine gran unb meinen cilteften (So^ n)erbe ic^ 
 tDo§l mttne^men, bie anberen aber miiffen in Berlin Meiben. 
 
 * Pronounced, and often written, mob-, f 223.5. % 66.46. § a6.4a. 
 
EXEECISES. 317 
 
 8. <S(^ott ift ^ertin nic|t, aber eine relc^c unb grole ©tabt tft e§. 
 
 9. ^iermal bin tc^ na^ granfreic!) gerelft, ^tDetmat ^a6e ic^ ©ng^ 
 laiib gefe^eu, unb id) 6in auc§ oft in 5lmeri!a gemefen. 10. ^ath 
 tnerbe id^ eine D^eife nm bie (Srbe madden. 11. 2)ie (Entgtanber 
 unb bie 5lmeri!aner reifen fe^r t)iet, t)iet Itjeniger reifen bie 
 2)entfc^en, nnb am attertrenigften bie granjofen. 12. §aft 
 bu ben ^^onig gefel^en, aU bu in ^ari§ luarft? 13. dnnen 
 ^rafibenten l^abe ic^ in ^ari§ gefei)en, nber feinen ."ftimtg. 
 14. ©inen ^\iifer ^aben n)ir in ^eutfd)(nnb, aOer in ©nglanb 
 t)at man nnr eine Slonigin. 15. Qm let^ten 3al)rc, al§» wix in 
 ^ari§ maren, ^aben tuir in einem menblirten ^intmer geluo^nt. 
 16. Sir ^ahtn in nnferem 3inimer gefriifjftiicft, nnb jn 9[^ittag 
 fpeiften tnir in einer S^eftanration. 17. O, mdre* id) in $ari§ ! 
 18. SSarnm finb ©ie nid)t mit nn§ gegangen ? 19. §atte ic^ 
 nnr ^Uva^ ^e(b, fo ginge id) gemi^ nad) |$ari§. 20. §aft bu 
 noc^ nicl^t gefrii()ftiicft, fo !omm' mit mir.^1. Qn biefer 9^eftau= 
 
 ration !ann man fe^r gut unb 5u einem bWgen ^reife frii^ftiicfen. 
 
 iTmctei 
 
 n. 
 
 1. Has your friend hired a beautiful dwell4Bf 2. Beauti- 
 ful it is not, but good and cheap it is said^jp^fbe. 3. Has 
 your brother come back from Paris? ^kYesterday he 
 came with his two friends and his servant. 5. These 
 three Americans have come from France to Germany. 
 6. The queen of England they have already seen, and they 
 wish to see the Emperor of Germany too. 7. In Berlin they 
 cannot see the Emperor now. 8. He went away last month 
 with his whole family to Ems. 9. Have the Americans 
 never had a king in their country ? 10 . Formerly the king 
 of England was also their king, but now there is no king. 
 11. A president they have, but no king. 12. Old our 
 Emperor is, but strong and handsome he is also. 13. Where 
 do the Americans live? 14. In a furnished apartment in 
 Frederick street they live. 15. If they live in Freder- 
 ick street they must pay a good deal. 16. Such a dwel- 
 ling one cannot find for a cheap price. 17. Every thing 
 
 • 831.2. t foK, 257.a 
 
318 EXEBCISES. 
 
 they pay for very dearly. 18. In tlie dearest restaurants 
 they eat, and they buy many beautiful things in the shops. 
 19. Oh, were I only rich. 20. Were we only rich, we would 
 buy every thing we want. 21. Whom do you wish to see ? 
 22. No one do I wish to see, only I want the book* I have 
 lost. 23. If you do not see the stranger, he is not here. 
 24. Last Monday, when I was in the city, I breakfasted in 
 a restaurant. 25. In Berlin I always breakfast in a 
 restaurant in Frederick street. 26. If you came with me, 
 I would show you a much better restaurant. 27. Are you 
 living in a furnished room ? 28. A room I have, but fur- 
 nished it is not. 
 
 EXERCISE 24. \/^{Cdi . 
 
 TBANSPOSED SENTENCES.— SUBSTANTIVE CLAUSES. 
 ^ [434-436.] 
 
 Vocabulary. 
 
 cinlaben ^IkvUe 
 
 befud^en 
 
 visU 
 
 brudten itlf^ 
 txial)Un tea, relate 
 
 Derberben 
 
 spoil 
 
 anne^men 
 
 accept 
 
 bev 35ei-faffcr the author 
 
 ha^ SBerf 
 
 the work 
 
 ha^^exQnuQtn the pleasure .^ 
 
 ha^ @et)eimmg 
 
 the secret 
 
 ber Sftomon the novel 
 
 hex ©ebanfc 
 
 the thought 
 
 bie ©inlabimg the invitation 
 
 unbefannt 
 
 unknown 
 
 befannt known 
 
 einerlei, adv. 
 
 indifferent 
 
 I 
 
 1. §n^en (Ste ben ^f^ontan gelefen, bon bent \^ ^^nm erjaf)!! 
 I^abe ? 2. DZein, irf) fjcibe i^n nt(f)t gelefen ; fennen ©te ben ^er^ 
 faffer beffetben? 3. SSer i^n gefi^rieben 1i)at, ift nitr unbefannt; 
 ober id^ tt)t\%, ba^ er in biefer ©tabt gebrncft n)Drben ift. 4. Qd^ 
 Ijerfpred^e S^^^^i bnfs Sic ben 9^oman ntorgen erljalten foEen. 
 
 5. ^iffen ©le, ob ic^ bejaljlt Ijabe, Wa§> ©ie ntir ber! auf t f)aben ? 
 
 6. Ob @te bejatjit l)aben ober nicljt, ift mir einerlei ; id) tueig, ha^ 
 ©ie oKeS beja^len merben. t. (S§ freut mid^, ba^ fie mid^ ein=s 
 
 * 183. 
 
0* 
 
 EXERCISES. 319 
 
 getaben ^at ; aber fte tt)eif3, baf5 id) ifjre C^inlabung ntrf)t amtel)men 
 fann. 8. SSarum bu bie (Sinlabuug nic^t annimmft, ift mir un^ 
 befannt 9. Stiffen 8ie ntc^t, ha^ ic^ f)eute mlt ber (SifeuOaljtx 
 abreifen merbe? 10. ^er ©ebanfe, bafs bu nic^t mitfommen 
 fonuteft, UerbarO mir ha§> Qan^t ^ergniitjen. 11. ^^at er Sljiieu 
 gefagt, woljin er je^t ge^t? 12. gd^ tierfte^e gar nid)t, tt)a§ er 
 mir gefagt '^at. 13. (£g ift eine grage, ob fie bic^ befu(i)eu follte, 
 obcr bu fie. 14. 2SiiJ3te id) uur, tuo fie tDof)nt, uub tuo id) fie 
 fiubeu fiiuute, fotuiirbe ic^ fie befuc^eu. 15. ^^ ift fein©e^eim= 
 nife, ha^ fie morgen abreifen ixiiU. 
 
 1. Did she tell you that he had gone away ? 2. She told 
 me that he had gone away, but she did not tell me where 
 he had gone. 3. Had he not visite^you ? 4. Whether he 
 visited me, I do not know, but I know that I inyited him. 
 5. Did he give you that of which he spoke ? 6. What he 
 sent is unknown to me, but he knew that I could not 
 accept it. 7. The merchant tells me tha^e has sold all 
 the works of this author. 8. I am rejoiced ^at he has sold 
 them all ; but will he not print this novel again? 9. Whether 
 he will print it or not is not known. 10. I am glad that I 
 have not paid for these books. 11. You told me where you 
 had bought them, and to whom you had given them. 
 12. Whether you read them or not is indifferent to me, but 
 you know that you must pay for them. 13. It delights me 
 that you will visit me. 14. Will you come to-day or to- 
 morrow? 15. When I can come I cannot tell you, but I 
 will come soon. 16. It is a secret who has written this 
 book, but it has been read by every one. 17. The thought 
 that you are certainly coming makes me quite happy. 
 18. It rejoices me that I can accept your invitation. 19. All 
 that we have made is now spoilt. 
 
320 
 
 EXEBOISES. 
 
 EXERCISE 25. 
 
 TRANSPOSED SENTENCES.— ADJECTIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 [437.] 
 
 Vocabulary. 
 
 jlerBcn 
 
 die 
 
 leiben 
 
 suffer 
 
 betuelrtcn 
 
 lament, mourn 
 
 aufgebcn 
 
 give up 
 
 frag en 
 
 ask 
 
 jubringen 
 
 pass (time) 
 
 ber Srbc 
 
 the heir 
 
 bie ^ranf^eit 
 
 sickness 
 
 blc ^offnung 
 
 hope. 
 
 bie ^rembe 
 
 foreign lands 
 
 elnfam 
 
 lonely 
 
 furc^tbar 
 
 fearful 
 
 barum 
 
 therefore 
 
 1. ^er grcmbe, ber g?ftern in unferer (^taht geftorben ift, tvax 
 ein (Snglcinber. 2. (Bv ftarb an einer ^ran![)eit, an ber er fdfjon 
 lange gelitten ^atte. 3. ^er ciltefte (Sot)n be§ (Sngldnber^, 
 toelc^er auc^ fein (Srbe ift, lt)irb r)ierf)er !ommen. 4. SSarnm 
 belDetnen ©ie einen SJJenfc^en, ben ©ie gar nid^t gefannt ^ben ? 
 5. 3c^ beltjeine j^en, ber einfam in ber grembe (eiben nnb fterben 
 mnJ3. 6. Qn ber Qeit, ha ic^ anf Dieifen mar, bin id^ in ©nglanb 
 gemefen. t. Qn Sonbon, mo ic^ einige SSoc^en ^nbrad^te, bin id^ 
 !ran! gertjorben. 8. Sine (Stabt, morin id^ fo fe^r gelitten ^aht, 
 merbe id§ ijie nergeffen fonnen. 9. ^er Wann ift ein Ungtiicflid^er; 
 ber ^at t)tet gelitten. 10. SDer ^i tme__beffe n, bon bem id§ end^ 
 erja^tt ^abe, ift mir nnbefannt. 11. (Sr fprid^t bon einem il^m 
 unbefannten SD^anne. 12. (£r fragte nac^ bem 9}?anne, beffen 
 ^ater fo !ran! ift. 13. ^ie ^ranf^eit, on ber er leibet, ift eine fo 
 furd^tbare, ba^ man alle §offnnng ^at anfgeben miiffen. 14. !Da= 
 rnm ift fein <So^tr, ber ben ^ater nocl) einmal fe^en mollte, an§ 
 $art§ 5uriidfge!ommen. 
 
 XL 
 
 1. The gentleman of whom he was telling you was my 
 Uncle. 2. He died in the house in which we now live. 
 3. He was a noble man and we still lament him. 4. Were 
 you not the heir of him of whom we are speaking ? 5. Yes, 
 
EXERCISES. 321 
 
 I am tlie heir of his name, and I also suffer from the sick- 
 ness of which he died. 6. He was asking about a novel 
 wtiich he wanted to read. 7. It is a book of which I have 
 heard much, but it is written by a man who is quite un- 
 known to me. 8. The poor stranger who died here 
 yesterday was the author of the novels of which so much 
 has been said. 9. He died in a city where he was quite 
 unknown. 10. In the time when he was still rich and 
 happy he lived in Berlin, but when he became poor he 
 went into a foreign land, where he died. 11. He had long 
 suffered from a fearful sickness, and had given up all hope. 
 12. He had no children who will mourn for him. 13. He is 
 an unhappy man, who must live and die so lonely. 
 
 EXERCISE 26. 
 
 TRANSPOSED SENTENCES.— ADVERBIAL CLAUSES. 
 
 [438-439.] 
 
 Vocabulary, 
 
 reltcn 
 
 ride 
 
 jagcn 
 
 hunt 
 
 tocrjammctn 
 
 assemble 
 
 begleitett 
 
 accompany 
 
 fortreiten 
 
 ride away 
 
 fortfein 
 
 be away 
 
 BetBunbern 
 
 admire 
 
 bie 3agb 
 
 the hunt 
 
 ber 3lnfang 
 
 the beginning 
 
 bag (Snbe 
 
 the end 
 
 bic ®efeEf(^afl 
 
 t the ccmpany 
 
 gteicf) 
 
 like 
 
 j(f)nett 
 
 quick 
 
 mitbe 
 
 tired 
 
 t\)t 
 
 ere, before 
 
 tt)ie 
 
 how, as 
 
 ic....,bcfio 
 
 the the 
 
 jo iangc 
 
 as long as 
 
 1. 5lt§ bie ©otine oufging, rttten fie aHe nac^ bem SSatbe. 
 2. ^ie ^a^h mxh anfangen, f obalb bie ^efellfd)aft firf) t)erfammelt 
 l^at. 3. ^6) tucrbc ©ie becjteiten, bamit id) ha§> ®nbe ber S^Qb 
 fe^e. 4. (Sf)e fie 5uriic!!ommen, tDirb e§ gauj biiuM fein. 5. SSenn 
 ©ie miibe fiub, mcrbcu mv fot3leid) wad) ^^aufe ^djzn. 6. SDeu 
 ganjen S^ag waxen fie im SSalbe, imb ai§> fie nad) §aufe !amen, 
 njaren fie fef)r miibe. Y. 2)iefe ^ame ift iiicl^t \d)on, waxuni 
 bettjunbern ©ie fie ? 8. ^d^ beirunbere fie nur barum, meil fie fo 
 
322 EXEECISES. 
 
 fc^on reitet unb etn fo fc^bneg $ferb '^at. 9. SSotlen @te etrt)a§ 
 fc^oneg fe^en, fo fommen ©ie mit mir. 10. (So Initge er fort ift, 
 fo lange mu^ id^ 1)kx bleiben, aber fobalb er §uruc!fommt, barf 
 i(^ fortge^en. 11. ®§ ift ^ter fo fd)on, ba^ ic^ iiic^t fortge^en 
 mitt. 12. 'aSo ic^ je^t bin, ha tDerbe icf) ben ganjeii 3:ag bleibeu. 
 
 13. ;3c^ bin fo ntiibe, ba^ icf) nid)t in bie (^efe((fd)aft gefjen !ann. 
 
 14. (Sriiebtfie gar nid^t, \vk tvh fie geliebt l^aben; er bemunbert 
 fie nnr, meil fie fo fc^on ift. 15. Se mel^r mir i^n fennen, befto 
 meniger lieben mir i^n. 16. S^sft bu nic^t, fo merbe id) 
 nic^t iagen. 17. SSie ber 5llte reitet, fo moc^te auc^ id^ reiten. 
 
 n. 
 
 1. We must ride to the forest before the sun rises. 2. If 
 you want to hunt, then accompany me. 3. Where the 
 forest begins, there the company assembled. 4. They 
 only assembled in orderf to see the hunt. 5. If you 
 want to see the hunt, you must ride fast. 6. When the 
 hunt was at an end, the hunters rode home. 7. Hardly 
 had he come home, when he rode away again. 8. Because 
 he is old he hunts no more. 9. The older I am, the 
 more I hunt. 10. The lady was so beautiful that we 
 had to* admire her. 11. Although she is the wife of my 
 friend, I have never seen her: 12. Where she now is, I do 
 not know, but I will tell you how you can see her. 13. As 
 soon as she came home, I saw her. 14. She is beauti- 
 ful ; but the more I admire her, the less I love her. 
 15. The company is larger than I had thought. 16. As long 
 i*s she is away I cannot visit you, but as soon as she comes 
 back we will come to you. 17. Wlien he visited us we were 
 not at home, but we shall see him before he goes away. 
 18. He rides so fast that we cannot accompany him. 19. As 
 he lived, so he died. 
 
 muffen, 256. f 332.55. 
 
EXEBCISES. 
 
 323 
 
 
 
 EXERCISE 27. 
 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE. 
 
 
 
 [323-328.] 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 Vocabulary. 
 
 
 raecfen 
 
 wake 
 
 fc^Iafen 
 
 sleep 
 
 auftx)acl)en 
 
 aijoake 
 
 befinben 
 
 be (as to health, etc.) 
 
 brennen 
 
 hum 
 
 retten 
 
 save 
 
 iiberteben 
 
 survive 
 
 jufaninienftuqen 
 
 fall together 
 
 ijerle^en 
 
 injure 
 
 ba§ 53ett 
 
 the bed 
 
 hie ^lamme 
 
 ihe flame 
 
 tobt [tot] 
 
 dead 
 
 f(^n)er 
 
 hard, difficult 
 
 pr6^ii6) 
 
 suddenly 
 
 untoo^l 
 
 unwdl 
 
 jeit, prep. 
 
 since 
 
 1. SSie Befinben (Sie ftc^? 2. ^c^ Befinbe ntiif) feit geftern fe^r 
 nnnjol)!. 3. (Sr^ci^len ©ie mir, tt)ie (Sie jic^ t)erle^t ^ben. 4. ^cf) 
 nmr geftern fe()r mlibe nnb ging friif) ju 33ctt. 5. $(o^(ic^ tvad^t 
 id) auf, ic^ fel^e glammen, baS) §au§ Brenut. 6. S<^^ ftel;e auf, 
 n)ec!e meine gran nnb nteine ^inber, nnb fie lanfen au^ bem 
 §anfe. 1. ^i§> n)ir aKe branfeen finb, erinnere id§ mic^, ba§ ic^ 
 bag iiingfte ^Hnb bcrgeffen Ijahc. 8. Qd) iPiK jnruc! lanfen nnb 
 e§ retten, aber ba§ $au§ ftilrjt iiber mir 5nfammen. 9. 9J^an 
 'ijat micl^ gerettet, aber id) bin fcl^mer l^erletjt nnb icl^ iiberlebe e§ 
 getni^ nidjt. 10. ^ein 53rnber mivb tnoljl Derreift fein? 11. Qa, 
 aber er !ommt fc^on morgen 5nriic!. 12. ^]t ha§> ^inb fd)on 
 langefran!? 13. ©» ift feit einer SS^od^e tobt. 14. ^efanb ber 
 Wamx \\d) \d)on lange in 53erlin, aU ©ie il)n fafjen? 15. 511^ ic^ 
 in Berlin tnar, fa^ id) if)n nid)t, aber fpdtcr Ijabe id) if)n gefel^en. 
 16. it'ommt er nic^t, fo gel)e id) gteid) fort. 11. (£t fd)Iaft feit 
 brei (Stnnben, nnb id) !ann if)n nidjt n^eden. 
 
 n. 
 
 1. Have you seen the poor man ? 2. I saw him when his 
 house was burning. 8. What did he do ? 4. He was in the 
 town. 5. Suddenly they tell him that his house is burning. 
 6. He runs back, he calls his wife and his children. 7. But 
 they are asleep, he cannot wake them. 8. He wishes to 
 
324 
 
 EXEECISES. 
 
 save them, but the house falls in. 9. Was no one saved? 
 10. One child was saved, but it is much injured. 11. If the 
 child dies, he will die too. 12. Yes, he will probably not 
 survive his family. 13. Have the children been long asleep? 
 14. They have been sleeping for five hours. 15. They will 
 certainly wake up soon. 16. Were you in the church 
 yesterday ? 17. When you were in the church I was also 
 there. 18. Had he been long unwell when he died ? 19. He 
 had lain in bed for 5 years. 20. Now he has been dead for 
 two years. 21. I am going into the city to-morrow, but I 
 am coming back early. 22. If you go, I shall go along. 
 
 
 EXERCISE 28. 
 
 
 SUBJUNC 
 
 rrVTE AS OPTATIVE, CONDITIONAL AND POTENTIAL. 
 
 
 [329-332 
 
 '■■] 
 
 
 
 Vocabulary, 
 
 
 anfe^ctt 
 
 looked 
 
 au«fe^cn 
 
 look, appear 
 
 tattsen 
 
 dance 
 
 citen 
 
 hurry 
 
 mitfmgen 
 
 si7ig (at the same time) 
 
 anfommen 
 
 airive 
 
 tie mvLfxt 
 
 music 
 
 bie "Stimnic 
 
 the voice 
 
 bcr Siingting the youth 
 
 blc S)ame 
 
 the lady 
 
 ntiibe 
 
 tired 
 
 tpst 
 
 late 
 
 gem 
 
 wUlingly 
 
 bod^, (adv.) 
 
 stiUf nevertheless 
 
 attein (adv. 
 
 and conj.) alone, hut, only 
 
 fonft 
 
 otherwise 
 
 tc6 iSmtm^ 
 
 1. SBareftbunurgefteru f)ier getDefen! 2. SBcire ic^ aii^ 
 Qetaben tuorben, jo tt)are ic^ hod) tiic^t gefommen. 3. SSaren 8te 
 gefommen, fo l)dtten ©ie Diel fc^one Tiu\xt geI)Drt unb ba ^'dtkn 
 %ie auc^ mitfingen fbuneu. 4. ©r fpricl^t, alg fiinge er trie. 5. @r 
 f)at eine fel)r fc^one (Stimme, fonft ficitte man i^n gar nid^t tm^ 
 gelaben. 6. ®er Qungling fte()t an§, al§ mare er fe^r miibc 
 Y. (Sr '^atte gem getanjt, aftein er wax ju miibe. 8. ©r eilt nur, 
 bamtt er friif) ()in!omme. 9. ^omme er, ober fomme er nic^t, e§ 
 ift mtr einertet. 10. Unb tDcire e§ nocl^ fpdter, ie() fame boc^ ju 
 ^^nen. 11. S<^ niod)te gern biefe 33ilber anfe^en, aKein ic^ ^aht 
 !eine Beit. 12. (Site er, fo t)ie( er !ann, er fomntt boc^ ju fpcit an. 
 13. Dt), tDciren biefe ^ilber nur bie meinigen, bann fa^e id) fic 
 
EXEEOISES. 
 
 325 
 
 ben gonjcn 5:Qg an. 14. ^er Qungting fte^t bie iungc ^ame an, 
 aU benjnnbere er fie. 15. @ie trirb i^ nte tieben, fo biel er ftc 
 ond^ ben)unbert. 16. SSir moc^ten fie anii} fe^en, aber fie tft nid^t 
 l^ier. 
 
 n. 
 
 1. Why do you not sing with us ? 2. I would gladly sing 
 too, only I have no voice 
 ought not»to have come 
 
 wise I should not have . _ . 
 
 6. Why are you hurrying so mucnr 7. I am hurrying in 
 order thgjt I may not^rrive toa late. 8. If you arrive too 
 late, youwittja?^ be^leto^an^T^ like to 
 
 dance, butT arn^too tired/ iO.^Oh, were I only^younef acfain, . ^ , 
 ft^^^tn^n I could dance, '^ll. Look at this lady; she looks ^iS if . ' ' 
 she had danced too much. 12. If I were tired I wout3not .C5M-A.^yxi 
 dance any more. 13. How could you have danced if she 
 had not come. 14. This youth is hurrying as if it were 
 very late. 15. He is only hurrying in order that he may 
 hear the beautiful music. 16. Let him hurry as much as 
 he will, he will still arrive too late. 17. I should like to see 
 the beautiful ladies, but they are already gone.f 
 18. Had you only hurried yourself, then you would have 
 seen them all. 
 
 
 EXEHCISE 20. 
 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE OF INDIKECT STATEMENT. 
 
 
 
 [333.] 
 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 Vocabulary, 
 
 
 btc Bettnitg 
 
 the newspaper 
 
 ble Sna^xxdjt 
 
 the news 
 
 ber 5Ir5t 
 
 the doctor 
 
 
 bev @taube 
 
 beliefJaUh 
 
 bebauern 
 
 pity 
 
 
 ent^altcn 
 
 contain 
 
 ^offen 
 
 hope 
 
 
 anttuorten 
 
 answer 
 
 ttJi^tlg 
 
 important 
 
 
 ^cutlg 
 
 of to-day 
 
 befcfiSftlgt 
 
 busy 
 
 
 gcfunb 
 
 healthy 
 
 traurig 
 
 sad 
 
 
 tt)at)r 
 
 true 
 
 ber hunger 
 
 hunger 
 
 tfovt. 
 
 
 ble Sa^r^ett 
 
 the truth 
 
 ♦ foUen 251.6. 
 
 
326 EXERCISES. 
 
 1. ©abcn (Sie ble "^eutige S^itmig getefen? Tlan fagt, fte enU 
 l^atte h)id^ttge 9Mc^ri^ten. 2. 3^ (jabe gelefeit, ha^ ber Slaifer 
 geftorbeu fei, aber ic^ glaube e§ nirf)t. 3. Qcf) fragte meinen ^ater, 
 oh er biefeDlac^ric^t glaube, imb-er mitmortete, er glaube niemal^ 
 \)a^, toa§> er iu ber ^eitumj tefe. 4. (Sr fragte bie ®ame, ob fie 
 mitge^en tvoiic, aber fie antmortete, fie fei fe^r miibe unb biirfe 
 nid^t au§ger)en. 5. (Sie fc^reibt uit§, fie fei nic^t ^u un§ gefommen, 
 lt)ei( fie geglaubt fjabe, baf^ iDir abgereift tDciren; fie bebaure fe^r, 
 ha^ fieuu§ nic^t gefef)en ^abe unb ^offe, wix trerbcn balb gu i^r 
 !ommen; fie fomte m\§> nic^t tuieber befuc^en, tueil fie ^u befc^df* 
 tigt fei. 6. (Sr glaubt, bafj fein 8o§n !rau! fei unb miinfc^t, bag 
 icl^ nac§ bent ^(rjt fcl^icfe. 1. ^er meint, er f)abe ju Diet gearbeitet, 
 barum fei er !ran! geiDorben. 8. ^er ^ebanfe, ha^ er nic^t tnel^r 
 arbeiten !onne, mac^t \i)n fe^r traurig. 9. 2)er ^Irjt glaubt ni(i)t, 
 bag er mieber gefunb tuirb. 10. SSir gaben i^r ha§> ^elb, treit 
 fie un0 erja^lte, ha^ \f)x Tlann geftorben fei, unb bog fie fein 
 G^elb ^abe. 11. (S^lauben ©ie, ha^ fie bie SSa^r^eit fpric^t ? 12. Ob 
 fie bie 2BaI)rf)eit fprid^t, meig id) nic^t, ic^ moUte aber nidjt, bag 
 fie an §nnger ftiirbe. 
 
 n. 
 
 1. Have you heard the great news? 2. They say the 
 Emperor is coming to-morrow. 3. Do you believe that it is 
 true ? 4. My mother said she had read it in the paper, but 
 she did not believe it. 5. The belief that he is coming 
 makes the whole city glad. 6. What news did his letter 
 contain ? 7. He wrote he was still in Berlin and working 
 as usual; he was sending me a book which he had read, 
 and hoped I should read it also ; he did not know when 
 he was coming home, but he hoped he could come soon. 
 8. I came back in the belief that he was very ill, but I find 
 him quite well. 9. I asked him whether he was ill, but he 
 was only tired because he had worked too much. 10. I 
 asked the young man who he was and where he was going, 
 but he only answered he did not know me and would not 
 tell me. 11. I think I am going away to-morrow, but 
 my friend wishes that I remain long^er. 12. His father 
 
EXERCISES. 327 
 
 said he must come home to-morrow; but he says he cannot 
 and will not go away before his friend has arrived. 13. The 
 lady said she was very sorry that he was so sick, and hoped 
 he would soon be better again. 14. The doctor thinks he 
 will soon die, but I think he is not so sick as they believe. 
 15. The story that he is busy and therefore does not come 
 I do not believe. 
 
 EXERCISE 30. 
 
 INFINITIVE AS SUBJECT OR OBJECT. 
 
 [339-343.] 
 
 Vocabulary, 
 
 raud^eii sraoke trinfcu drink 
 
 ^ei^en command, call taffen allcm, cause 
 
 befe^ten orcZer jd^tDeigen hesUent 
 
 *Jor(ejen read aloud (to someone) oerbieten forbid 
 
 fpasieven gel^en go to walk f^ajieren fa^ren go to drive 
 
 t>oi'fa{)ren drive up fa{)ren drive 
 
 ber SSogeu the carriage ber ^utfd^er the coachman 
 
 gefci^rtid) dangerous gornig c^ngry 
 
 kidjt easy toeit far, distant 
 
 1. SDo§ Sefen ^aBe td^ geternt, a6er ha^ ©d^reiben ift mir nod^ 
 fd^tDer. 2. (Srinnern ©ie fic^ feineg (Sd^tDetgeiig, al§ mir i^ 
 fa^en. 3. ^§> ift fd)itier ^u fc()iDeigen, tDenn man ^ornig ift. 4. ©§ 
 ift mir nic^t leic^t, feine (^efd)ic^te 511 glaubeu, aber ic^ tuerbc 
 l)erfuct)en, i[)m gu I)elfen. 5, C^inem folc^en 9)(enfc^eu ^elb ju 
 geben, ift fef^r gefci^rlic^, aber (Sffen uiib ^rinfen barf man il;m 
 geben. 6. ^^ Ijore fingeu. 1. (Sie ^oxtn ben {uiigen "^Dlann 
 fingeit, h^n 3()r ^ruber mitgeOrac^t ^at 8. SSo I)at er ben 
 giingling fenuen gelernt ? 9. (Sr (ernte ir)n in 53cr(in fennen. 
 
 10. ®r lieJ3 if)n jeben Xa^ 5U fict) fommcn nnb leljrte if)n fingen. 
 
 11. (Sr (;ie§ ben fungen 93hnn ^eute fommen unb befall if)m,* 
 un§ etnjag Dorjufingen. 12. (Sr Ici^t fic^ bie ^ebicr)te Oortefen. 
 13. 3c^ mottte fpajieren ge^en, aber er blieO im Garten fi^en unb 
 
 ^ * 222.n, la. 
 
328 EXERCISES, 
 
 iDiinfcl^fe ntc^t Qu§§uget)en. i4. ^r tft ju mnht, fpajteren ju 
 ge§eu, aber er tt)iil gent fpa^ieren fasten. 15. ^axi, la^ beit 
 ^utfd^er rufeu unb ben SBagen borfa^ren, ttJir iDoUen nad^ ber 
 ©tabt fa[)ren. 16. 3Sir ()aben ben ^(r^tnoc^ ju befud^en. 17. S^n 
 gu befuc^en, miiffeit ©ie fe^r tt)eit fa^^ren. 18. 2Bir ^abeti tt)eiter 
 nid^t§ §u fagen, aber er l;ort nicljt auf, un§ ju rufen. 19. ^rinfen 
 unb ^iauc^en finb im ^^eater ijerboten. 
 
 n. 
 
 1. I do not like writing, but I like reading very mucli. 
 2. Why do you not smoke ? 3. The doctor has forbidden* 
 me smoking. 4. To be silent is better than to talk when 
 one is angry. 5. I ordered him to be silent, but he 
 wished to talk. 6. To tell the truth is impossible to him. 
 7. I tried to help him, but he would not tell the truth, 
 and I could not give him anything. We became acquainted 
 with him in Paris. 8. Will you go to drive with me V 9. I 
 rejoice to go with you. 10. I will have the coachman 
 called. 11. When I called him he remained standing and 
 did not come. 12. Do you not hear talking ? 13. I hear 
 talking and singing. 14. Have you heard the children 
 sing ? 15. I tried to hear them sing, but the teacher for- 
 bade me to come into the school. 16. He teaches them to 
 sing and to read aloud. 17. Let Sophy be called; I see her 
 coming and I want to ask her something.f 18. I had her 
 called, but she was reading aloud to her sister and could 
 not come. 19. We will have them work an hour, then they 
 can go to drive with us. 20. Have the carriage come, the 
 children want to go to drive, but I shall go to walk. 
 
 EXERCISE 31. 
 
 INFINITIVE AS ADJUNCT AND WITH PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 [344-348.] 
 
 Vocabulary, 
 
 Benu^cn use lad^en laugh . 
 
 an^orcn listen to fld^ jurflrfjlcjcn withdraw 
 
 * 222.1,1a. 1 227.3a. 
 
EXEBGISES. 329 
 
 Bcrclt ready 
 
 ru^lg 
 
 ^ia 
 
 furj short 
 
 fd^ttjad^ 
 
 weak 
 
 bic ©elegen^eit the opportunity 
 
 bag @d|aufpicl 
 
 the play 
 
 ber ©ete^rtc the scholar 
 
 bie Unitjerfitat 
 
 the university 
 
 amufiren amuse 
 
 amiifant 
 
 amusing 
 
 1. (Sr fagte mtr, er ^a6c feme (^etegen^ett ge'^aBt, mtt g^nen 
 ju fprec^en. 2. ^c^ bin bereit, i^m alle§ ^u er^d^Ien, aber er ift 
 5U sornig, mid^ an^oren gu tDoUen. 3. ^ie§offnuug, halb trieber 
 abreifen gu fbnnen, mac^t fie fe^r gliidtid). 4. ©ie fam nac^ 
 Berlin, um i()re (Slteru ju befudien. 5. ^uftatt nac^ Berlin 511 
 fommen, mare e§ if)r leid)ter geiuefen, gleic^ nac^ §aufe ju ge^eii. 
 
 6. Qc^ iDerbe biefe ©elegen^eit benugeu, um ing 3:^eater ju 
 ge^en. 7. 2Bir mbc^ten nic^t ing ^^eater ge^en, o^ne ha^ @c§au^ 
 fpiel tjor^er gelefeu ju ^abeu. 8. 2)ie geit ift ju !ur§, alg ha^ 
 fie bag (5d)aufpiel lefen fonnen. 9. (Sr fpracl^ baUon, iin§ nad) 
 bem 3:f)eater ju begleiten, aber er mu^te nod^ arbeiten. 10. ^c^ 
 !ann bag Sieb uic^t fiugen ^oren, o^ne §u n^einen. 11. 5lnftatt 
 ntit feinen greunben 'm§> ^(jeater gu ge^eii, ^at er fic^ juriidge^ 
 gogeu, um in feiuem Qii^ttier rul)ig arbeiten gu fonnen. 12. (Sr 
 bentt nur baran, ein grower (SJele^rter gu merben. 13. (Sr tDiinfd^t 
 nad^ ber Unitjerfitat 5U ge^en, unb fein ^ater ift reic^ genug, if)m 
 geit unb ©elegen^eit ba5u ju geben. 14. ^c^ ^abe ben Bfioman 
 gelefen, um mic^ p amiifiren. aber er ift gar nid^t amiifant. 
 15. 5tnftatt 5u tad^en, ^be ic^ i^n nid^t tefeu fonnen, o^ne 5U 
 ttjeinen. 16. Qd^ "^aU i^n tng ^§eater ge^en laffen ttJoEen, aber 
 er ^at nic^t ge(;en fonnen. 
 
 n 
 
 1. Are you ready to go with us to tlie theatre? 2. I have 
 no time to go to the theatre. 3. I have seen this play too 
 often to want to see it again. 4. I cannot see any play 
 without haying read it before. 5. What will you do in 
 order to amuse yourself? 6. Instead of staying here, I shall 
 go to the university in order to see the learned professor. 
 
 7. He. thinks only of seeing learned men and reading 
 learned books, but we think only of amusing ourselves. 
 
330 
 
 EXEECISES. 
 
 8.. Why did lie withdraw instead of going to walk with us? 
 9. He said he was always ready to go to walk with you, 
 but to-day he was too tired to be able to go out. .10. We 
 came in the hope of hearing him sing. 11. I cannot go 
 away without hearing him sing. 12. I have no time to 
 listen to him, but I hope to hear him sing later. 13. You 
 cannot help this poor man without giving him much 
 money. 14. I let him tell his story in order to know 
 whether he spoke the truth. 15. I have no hope of being 
 able to help him. 16. Instead of listening to my story he 
 forbade me to speak. 17. They will not go away without 
 having spoken. 18. We have used every opportunity of 
 helping them, but they are bad enough to be dangerous. 
 19. This novel is too amusing for me to read it without 
 laughing. 20. I had wished to teach him to read aloud, 
 but he had too weak a voice to be able to read aloud. 
 
 
 EXJjJKCISE 32. 
 
 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 
 
 
 [349-359.] 
 
 
 
 
 Vocabulary/. 
 
 
 c^rcn 
 
 honor 
 
 
 t)oIIenbcn 
 
 complete 
 
 fii^rcn 
 
 lead 
 
 
 befprec^en 
 
 talk over 
 
 mitt^cUcn 
 
 communicate 
 
 empfangen 
 
 receive 
 
 gcboren 
 
 horn 
 
 
 ertt»arten 
 
 await 
 
 fcrtig 
 
 finished 
 
 
 ciUg 
 
 hasty 
 
 bcr 3)om 
 
 the cathedral 
 
 SfJom 
 
 Borne 
 
 ^Oltt 
 
 Cologne 
 
 
 
 
 ' 1. SSer rt)kb bte anfommenben (^cifte empfangen? 2. SO^eine 
 5D^utter empfdngt bie §erau!ontmenben. 3. §aft ^u ben an- 
 gefangenen ^rief bollenbet ? 4. (Sobalb \v\x i^n fertig l^aben, 
 foKen ©ie ha§> ^efdjriebene lefen. 4. ©nben ©ie ben ©eftor- 
 benen gefannt ? 6. (Sr tvav mein geliebter greunb. 1. @r ging, 
 ba§ ^hib nn ber .$anb fiiljrenb, in bie .^ircl^e ^inein. 8. SSir 
 gingen and) mit, nm bie fc^on gematten ^ilber jn fe^en. 9. §aben 
 
EXEECISES. 331 
 
 Ste frli^er fo botteubet f c^buc ^ilber gefetien ? 10. ®r fa^ fie. 
 bciDuiiberub an uub ging fdjmeigenb fort. 11. 5(((e ^erfprec^ungeit 
 tjcrcjeffeub reifte er goftern ah. 12. 3Sann incrben bie D^eifenben 
 juriicffommeit ? 13. (Sr fan: eiligft [)ine3efaf}ven, uni ung bie 
 9^ac^rid)t iiitt5utr)et(eu. 14. Uii§ ben empfangenen ^rief t)orIefenb 
 unb mit nn§ bie 9lad)rid)t [)efpred)enb, blieb er lange bei nn§. 
 
 15. ©ie aufge^enbe (Sonne fanb i^n noc^ im ^ette liegen. 
 
 16. ®er im 3a^re 1248 angefangene '5)om ju ^'oln ift erft 638 
 Saf)re fpdter ijodenbet tDorben. 17. ^er arme, in einer niebrigen 
 $iitte geOorene ^nabe, ift fpdter ein berii^mter ^rofeffor ge= 
 iDorben. 18. ^ie tt)einenbe gran ift bie SJ^ntter beg geftern an§ bem 
 brennenben §aufe geretteten ^inbeg. loeld^eg ^ente geftorben ift. 
 
 H 
 
 1. Have you found the lost book ? 2. They have brought 
 it back to me quite spoiled. 3. AVhy does she go weeping 
 into the church ? 4. Her most beloved son is dead. 5. I 
 knew the dead, he was a beautiful boy. 6. The child came 
 running in order to give me the long expected letter. 
 7. Talking over with me the news, he forgot to give me the 
 paper. 8. She looked admiringly at the beautifully 
 painted pictures, but she said nothing. 9. Do you know 
 this much admired lady ? 10. She is the daughter of my 
 beloved uncle, she is a beautiful woman. 11. We 
 remained a week in Kome looking at the great churches 
 and admiring the beautiful paintings. 12. As soon as 
 the expected newspaper arrives, I will communicate to 
 you the news contained in it. 13. Having lost my paper 
 I shall have to read yours. 14. I have found your lost 
 paper. 15. The emperor Napoleon I., born in Corsica in 
 the year 1769, died at St. Helena in 1821. 16. They were 
 not able to save those sleeping in the burning house, 
 because they could not wake them. 17. The traveller 
 arrived too late to see the dying man. 18. Arrived in 
 Cologne I went at once to their house, but I found the 
 house shut and the whole family away. 19. She went away 
 weepuig without having seen her beloved ones. 
 
33 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 
 
 EXERCISE 33. 
 
 
 
 ADVERBS AND PEEPOSITIONa 
 
 
 [361-381.] 
 
 
 
 Vocabulary/, 
 
 
 ber iBerg 
 
 the mountain ba§ ©emitter 
 
 the thunder-storm 
 
 ber ^fab 
 
 the path bie «anf 
 
 the bench 
 
 bic Sotfe 
 
 the cloud bie ©r^ie^ung 
 
 the education 
 
 ta^ @efcl)aft 
 
 business ber ®ter« 
 
 the star 
 
 fteigen 
 
 cZim6 blicfen 
 
 look 
 
 einjiel^cn 
 
 move in auS^ie^en 
 
 move out 
 
 t)erfd)ttjinben 
 
 disappear bitten 
 
 beg 
 
 unterttJegg (adv.) on the way 
 
 1. 9d^ bin untermegg, meine gi^^uube gu 6efu(^en, bte ber 
 ^trd^e gegeniiber tno^nen. 2. grii^er tDo^nten fie auf bent 
 Sanbe jenfeit^ beg gluffe§, aber fie ftnb megen ber (^gie^ung 
 i^rer ^inber in bie ©tabt gegogen unb mo^en je^t unn^eit ber 
 ©c^ule. 3. ^ro^ be§ ^eifeen Setter^ bin id} :^eute fammt meinen 
 ^inbern fpajieren gegangen. 4. SSir gingen tief in ben SBalb 
 l^inein, \6) feljte mid^ unter bie ^dume auf eine ^anf, unb 
 bie ^inber fpielten urn mic^ l^erum. 5. ^lo^Iic^ tnurbe e§ bunfel, 
 td§ fa^ nad^ oben, bie Sonne mar Winter ben fd)tDar§en SSoIfen 
 berfc^ttjunben, unb binnen furger ^t\i fing e§ an gu regnen. 
 6. SSir (iefen eiligft au§ bem SSalbe l)inau§. *l. SBalb aber tt)ar 
 ber ©turm i)orbei, unb bie ©onne !am mieber ^inter ben SSoIfen 
 l^ertior. 8. Qc^ modte auf ben 33erg ^inauf fteigen, urn bie unter^^ 
 ge^enbe Sonne gu fe§en, aber er ttJlinfc^te, long§ be§ gluffeg 
 fpagieren gu ge^en. 9. ^^6) bat i^n, gu mir ^eriiber gu fommen, 
 aber er mollte e§ nic^t. 10. SSir ftanben auf bem fleinen, Icingg 
 be§ S^uffe§ fii^renben ^fabe unb fa^en nac^ oben ^inauf, unb 
 alte Sterne beg §immelg blicften auf ung Ijernieber. 11. ^^c^ 
 faun nict)t an i§rem §aufe Dorbeige^en, o^ne ^inein gu ge^en. 
 12. Sie ^at ntic^ oft eingelaben, ^erein gu fommen, ober id§ 
 mu^te beg (Sefd^ciftg megen in bie Stabt §inein. 
 
 n. 
 
 1. Why does your friend now live outside of the town? 
 2. He has a sick child, and for its sake he has moved out 
 
EXERCISES. 
 
 333 
 
 of the town. 3. They have planted trees along the path by 
 the river, and have set benches under the trees. 4. The 
 horseman who rode past us was riding on a very beauti- 
 ful horse, and two dogs were running round about him. 
 
 5. I looked long after him as he rode away into the woods. 
 
 6. The sun has come out from behind the black clouds, and 
 in spite of the storm the evening will be fine. 7. We will 
 climb up upon the mountain and look down upon the 
 city. 8. When the sun disappears behind the mountains 
 the stars will look down upon us from above. 9c As I went 
 by his house he was looking out of the window. 10. He 
 called me over to him and invited me to come into the 
 house. 11. He said he could not (go) out of the house, and 
 wished to speak to me concerning business. 12. I went in 
 to him and remained with him during two whole hours. 
 
 
 EXERCISE 34. 
 
 
 CONJUNCTIONS AND INTEKJECTIONS. 
 
 
 [382-392.] 
 
 
 
 
 Vocabulary, 
 
 
 
 ber ^affec 
 
 the coffee 
 
 ber Zljtt 
 
 (he tea 
 
 ha^ ^tcifcf) 
 
 the meat 
 
 ha^ ©entuje 
 
 the vegetable 
 
 bic ^artoffel 
 
 the potato 
 
 bag SBaffer 
 
 the water 
 
 bag ^mtv 
 
 the fire 
 
 \ia^ mi 
 
 the wood 
 
 !oc^en 
 
 cook 
 
 bacfen 
 
 bake 
 
 anpnben 
 
 light 
 
 DerBrennen 
 
 hum 
 
 f)oten 
 
 fetch 
 
 gubereiten 
 
 prepare 
 
 fic^ crfciUen 
 
 catch cold 
 
 ^)ftucfen 
 
 pluck 
 
 1. S^ mod^te \>(i^ grii^ftiic! juberetten, affein man ^t \>a^ 
 geuer nocf) nic^t angejiinbet. 2. ^ie Wac(b ift ^inauggegnnc^en, 
 enttueber urn §0(5 511 jiid^en obcr iim (S^emiife §u pf(iic!en. 
 3. 3ii«^ei^ ©tc ici^ Seuer an, unterbeffen tucrbe irf) SSaffer ^oteu 
 uitb ben ^affee mac^en. 4. ^u trinfft immer JIaffee, ic^ bagegen 
 trinfe nnr ^^ce. 5. ^(jo mac^en tt)ir ni(f)t nur ^^affee, fonbern 
 and^ ^5ee. 6. (Sobalb ba§ SSaffer !ocI)t, t^un ©ie bie ^artoffeln 
 
334 EXEKCISES. 
 
 ^\m\n. 1. ^a^ Staffer fod^t ^Wax fc^on, aCtein idj ^abe feitie 
 ^artoffeln, beS^att) merbe ic^ in ben Garten ge^en miiffen. 8. SSo 
 @ie bie ^artoffeln finben merben, tt)ei§ ic^ nic^t, ahtv inbem ©ie 
 fie fuc^en, merbe ic^ ba§ Sleifc^ gubereiten. 9. SSci^renb id^ im 
 (Garten mar, ift bag gleifcl^ ' berbrannt. 10. D Wtf), ha^ 
 e§ tierbrannt ift, je^t tnerbe ic^ nicl^t§ 5U effen ^aUn. 
 11. Obgteic^ e0 Derbrannt ift, merbe ic^ boci) berfuc^en, ein ©tiic! 
 bat) on 5U effen. 12. ^fui be» fc^Icc^ten 5(eifd)e§, iDeg mit il^m. 
 13. SSeber bn noct) ict) n)erben e§ effen fbnnen, aber biefe airmen 
 merben e§ gerne effen. 14. ©eitbem fie fic^ erlciltet l^at, ift fie 
 immer Iran! gemefen, aber beffen nngeai^tet arbeitet fie nad^ 
 tt)ie tjor h^n gan^en XaQ. 15. ^a fie arm unb fran! ift, n)ot(en 
 n)ir i()r (^elb geben, fie tviti e§ aber nic^t ^aben, fonbern fagt, fie 
 tt)olIe lieber fterben, aU ha'^ fie meine §nlfe anne^men ttJoKte. 
 
 n. 
 
 1. Alas for these poor people ! 2. Although the weather 
 is so cold, they have no warm clothes. 3. Not only have 
 they no warm clothes, but they have also no bread and 
 no fire. 4. I should like to give them something, only I do 
 not i;now whether they would accept it. 5. They would to 
 be sure accept no money; nevertheless you can help them. 
 6. Either you can give them potatoes, or you can look for 
 wood and make a fire. 7. I will get some potatoes; mean- 
 time you light the fire. 8. Neither you nor I can cook 
 potatoes without burning them. 9. It is true, I can not 
 cook potatoes; on the other hand I can bake meat ven 
 well. 10. While the meat is cooking, give the children these 
 vegetables, in order that they may have something to eat 
 at once. 11. Since I have caught cold I have not been able 
 to eat anything. 12. Try nevertheless to drink this coffee; 
 besides I have some white bread, which you can eat. 
 13. Alas for me, that I cannot work ! 14. Until I can work 
 again the children will have nothing to eat. 15. Although 
 we have little money, we will nevertheless help you 
 as long as you are sick. 16. Accordingly I will take the 
 children with me, as I promised you. 
 
SECOND SERIES. 
 
 ILLUSTRATIVE SENTENCES I. 
 USE OF THE AKTICLES. 
 
 (66.) 1. SDa§ ^artenfpiel ift ein ^rieg. mmtj, 2. SDte 
 ©eid)i^te jott feme SoOrebuerin fein. ((Sd^.) 3. ^te ^DZenfc^en 
 fiub gefd^affen fiir bie a^cnfc^eii. (5c^.) 4. 5(m ^aum be§ 
 ©c^tDeigen^ ^dngt feine gruc^t, ber gviebe. (®^r.) 5. 2)ie 9teU= 
 gion, biefe ^oc^ter be§ 63inimeB, ift bie getreue ^efd^rtin be§ 
 a^enfc^eit. Wf.) 6. S)ie Surest be§ ^obe§ iftbeg SeDen§ fc^arfe 
 SSiirje. (9lucf.) T. ^ie 93iutter lag auf ben S^nieen Dor bent '^dtt 
 unb I)atte ben ^rm um if)r ftofjiicube^ ^^inb gefcl^Iagen. (§ei).) 8. 
 ^^rdnen ftanben bem atteii Tlanm in ben 5Iugen. (§aiiff.) 9. 
 5((-3 nun ber SD^ai fic^ ju (Snbe ncigte, unb ber SBalb iin erften (^riin 
 ftanb, !am ein 53rief. (^e^.) 10. ^ie (5Iegien ()offe id) auf htn 
 ©onnabenb ju fc^icfen, unb benfe ben ^J}^ontag barauf fetOft 5U 
 fommen. (@.) 11. SSenn id^ nur im SSinter einige 3eit 6ei 3I)nen 
 fein !ann! {(^,) 12. Qn bem ^tamin be» un§ um^lOefannten 
 (Sa(on§, in ber ^^^einftra^e ^0. 21, brannte ein IjeKeg geuer. 
 (^et).) 13. Tldn ^ater fc()ien mit ben ^einigcn in ber (SdjtDci^ 
 nid)t. im beften dnutierftdnbni^ [(Sinl)erftdnbni§] 5U leben. G^auff.) 
 14. ©ie Uerlangen if)ren Oberft, ben Wa^c, ^uriic!. (@d^.) 15. 
 Sidi (efjnte ba§ ^i(b bc» Drcfteg. ha^ fie eben in ber §anb l)ielt, 
 ftidfd)tueigenb an bie 3Sanb. M^ZarUtt.) 16. !5)ie !(eine acf)tidl)rigc 
 ©den ftanb bla§ unb ftumm baOei. (^etj.) It. 2)a§ gtiidlic^e alte 
 ^aar tierbringt bie gtittermoc^en abtnec^fefnb im btii^enben 
 Stalien unb im luftigen ^ari». (?euau.) 18. (Sr luanbelte, in 
 feinen fc^mer5lic§en (^ebanfen uertieft, iiOer bie 9i()cinbrUc!e htm 
 alten ©tragburg 5U. (^ei).) 19. !$)ie ©tabt (ag bereit§ im ©d^tafe, 
 unb and) im §anfe be§ ^ommanbanten tvav fd)on aik^ 5ur 'knijt 
 gegangen. (SSerner.) 20. ©anj cbcnfo ftanb SQ^ic^elangelo 5mifc§en 
 
 d35 
 
336 EXEBCISES. 
 
 ^ergangen'^eit unb gufunft. (®.) 21. ®a0 tvax in ber ^^at 
 (^otteS ginger. (@(^.) 22. ^(^ mug ^nnbert t)on biefen neu 
 brutfen laffen. (®(^.) 23. 3tnfang Wdx^ gie^t ber ^aifer norb= 
 vo'dxt^, tDQ^renb Siemens nad) ^om ^nrMfe^rt. (^. @r.) 24. gur 
 ^orgefd^ic^te biefe§ ^uffa^eg ^ah^ id) golgenbe§ gu bemerfen. 
 (tar^Iee.)' 25. (^§ freut mic^, ha^ ©ie je^t toCftcinbig gered^t^ 
 fertigt bafte^en, fagte er gu (Srflerem. (Sinterfelb.) 26. SDe§ 
 a)iorgen§ ben!' an beinen ©ott, be§ 5(benb§ ben!' nn beinen ^ob. 
 (S^r.) 27. Siebe ma^t ben ^liigften gum S^^arren. (@)3r.) 28. 
 a^ein ^ater beftimmte ntic^, aU id) 20 Qa^re alt unb gut getrac^fen 
 Wax, 5um ©olbaten. (^auff.) 29. (Sr tnar 48 Qa^re alt, at§ er 
 e:arbinat murbe. (§. ®r.) 30. ^ie§ ift IXrfad^e, hci^ id) ben 
 aJ^eifterl" fo tange be^ielt. (@(^.) 31. (Sr iDar jc^on langft SSitt- 
 tner [SSitmer] gemorben. (C^auff.) 32. (Sie finb 6oIbat mie id§, 
 unb ju unferem ^erufe ge^ort nun einmal bie ©efa^r. (Seruer.) 
 (67.) 1. Tlit feftem ©c^ritt ging er tno^l cine ^albe ©tunbe 
 in fetnem Qelte auf unb nieber. ((Sber«.) 2. ^c^ ^atte nie* gebad^t, 
 hai in bem ernften, flillen SJiann ein fold^er Duett \)on §umor 
 fpruble.f (§e^.) 
 
 1 THEME L 
 
 USE OF THE AUTICLES. 
 
 1. Life is an eternal war, and only death brings us peace. 
 2. I do not like history, for it tells only of war and of 
 death. 3. Man was not created for war, but for peace 
 and for happiness. 4. The old woman held the child in 
 her arms, while I was reading the letter. 5. Her son 
 wrote the letter Wednesday and he will come himself Sun- 
 day. 6. He went away in February. 7. In summer my 
 friends are in Switzerland, but in winter they live in 
 Rhine street. 8. Have you seen the picture of little 
 Henry? 9. Old Charles sent it to me, when I was in 
 Southern Germany. 10. I love the good and wise books, 
 and I am now reading Goethe. 11. When I was in Italy I 
 spent several weeksj in old Rome and in beautiful Florence. 
 
 ^Wilhelm Meister, a novel by Goethe. 
 See 332.3. f 333.36. :|:230. 
 
EXERCISES. 337 
 
 12. Italy is tlie most beautiful country on earth. 13. The 
 children go early to bed, and when we came back, they al- 
 ready lay asleep. 14 We have at least a hundred of his 
 letters, in the first we read the following. 15. He was 70 
 years old when the death of his wife made him a widower. 
 16. "VVe visit him twice a week. 17. We always find him at 
 home of a morning. 18. He is the brother of my old mas- 
 ter, and he was formerly a soldier. 19. I have never 
 known so good a man. 20. He has been very ill, but such 
 a man does not fear* death. 21. We passed half the win- 
 ter in Berlin. 
 
 HiLUstbative seistences h. 
 adjectives. 
 
 (115.) 1. 5Iti bemfelljen 5l6enb fanb nod^ em ^Ibfd^teb ftatt, 
 ahcx luir ein brieflic^er. (^e^.) 2. ^ie ganje alte 2BeIt fe^t 
 bie miitterlic^e Siebe iiOer bie Udterlicl^e. (3. ^. 9^.) 
 
 (116.) 1. ®te SSett iDirb alt unb \v\xh tuieber fimg, bod^ 
 Dcr TltnU^ fjofft immer ^erbefferung. (®(^.) 2. ©bel fel ber 
 9J^eufcf), ^^iilfreid) uub gut. (®.) 3. Unermej^Hc^ unb mieublld^, 
 Hegft bu t)or tntr au^gelireitet, alte§, fjeilige^, emige§ SD^eer. 
 {%, (3x,) 4. 3c^ wiii mic^ frei xtnb gliicflid^ traumen. (@(^.) 
 5. SDer 5tlte iijar fremb in biefer ©tabt, er fiiljlte ftc^ emfam. 
 (§au[f.) 6. 5)ocr) r;att' tc^ cinen ^ruber, \>tn ^ruber fc^Iugt Q^r 
 tobt [tot]. (®eiM.) 1. (Bo Utid) ^attt fie ber ^iiitftler felten ge* 
 fe^en.. ((Sbers.) 8. Qn emem ^^al, bei nrmen §irtei!, erfc^teu 
 . . . . em 3}iabcl)en, fc^on imb ttjunberbar. {@(^.) 9. ^ fe^t bie 
 ^rone golben if)r in§ nupraune §aar. (U().) 
 
 (121.) 1. ©0 tDar i{)nen immer gtuetfello0, ha'^ er eine 
 geiftige aRarf)t erften 9^ange§ .... fel. (?aube.) 2. §ilfe ift jebeS* 
 mat \)a^ ^inb eifrigen ^eftreben§. (53en3et=®teruau.) 
 
 (123.) 1. ©in folc()cr bimfeKjaftcr unb uubaterlanbifd^er 
 90?enfcl) ^t §o(^t)erratr} [^rat] begaugeu. (^o^.) 2. ®er grembe 
 erfunbigte fi^ m6) beu ^efi^eru \?er{c^iebener gro^ett ©ebftube. 
 
 *ji(^ fftn^ten t)cc 
 
338 EXERCISES. 
 
 (124.) 1. 0, fonnteft bu in meinem ^nnern lefen, trie ttjentg 
 SSater uitb ©o^ii folc^ einc^ 9flu^me§ \mxti) gemefeu ! ((^.) 2. 
 SSielgoIbene 33itbcr fa^ ic!^ urn mtc^ fc^trebeu. (^%uer.) 3. 3BeIc^ 
 anberer ©c^ulb* tierflagt bicf) bein ©etDtffen ? (®cf).) 4. (Sie Der- 
 lebten ntanc^eu faueren ^ag. (®d|.) 5. SDu ti:)Dtlteft atten biefen 
 (^lan^ berlaffeti ! (@d^.) 
 
 (125.) 1. (Sr tuar beim ^onig 5tDeit)otte ©tunben. (S(^.) 2. 
 SDa moc^t' ic^ ^infinfen auf bie ^iiiee unb rufen : bu unenblii^er 
 lieber ^ater, n)ie ift beine SBelt fo fi^bu ! (^ocfi.) 3. G^i'mftig ift 
 biefe Sage fiir un§ europdifc^en ^tduber. (Berber.) 4. S)u im §im^ 
 met, ^ilf mir armeu, fc^ir)ar5en SO^anu! (Staubius.) 5. ^a, unb 
 bu mirft aud^ ntic^ armen ^riippel nidjt gang Dergeffen. ((Sbers.) 
 
 (l26.) 1. @r bringt fein treu oltengli]^ §er5 ^uriicf. (®c^.) 
 2. (S§ ift ber ^rieg ein ro^, getDaltfam ganbmer!. {B(i).) 
 
 (127.) 1. 2Bir joHen !eine eigene ^buige me()r ^aben, 
 feinen eingeborenen §errn. (<Sd^.) 2. $8ie(e raei^e ©c^mdnc 
 jd^trimmen ftiU auf be§ (Surota§ SBogen. {TlnUn.) • 
 
 (128.) 1. (^eeubigt nac^ langem, berberblidjen (Streit, Wax 
 bie faiferlofe, bie fd)rec!(id)e B^it- (^c^^-) 2. lieber $l)rgo§ unb 
 Saranba ^atte man bie ^Befi^ungen be§ (^riftlic^ ornienifd^en 
 giirften £eo erreic^t. (Sflaumer.) 3. ^a§ ift ein feltfam number' 
 bare§ B^ic^^i^ • ®^ ^^^^^ ^iele, bie ha§> nic^t gefeljen. (®d^.) 
 
 (129.) 1. Siebe bie ^uten mit treuem muii)e [SRute], bann 
 ^aft bu ha§> (^ute. (§ammer.) 2. 3eber ^^iinftler ift ein ^riefter : 
 bag ^ei^t, ein ^erfiinbiger be§ (^ottlic^en. (33urott).) 3. ^er 
 SSeife befommt alk§ t)on ficl^, ber J^or olleS tion anberen. (3. ^. 
 ^.) 4. Df^eic^er, frage nict)t ben 5trmen, tt)ie er arm gen)orben ift. 
 (aJJiitter.) 5. ^er ^rieb ber (Selbfter^altung erlnac^t, ha ic^ etmag 
 ^oftbareres ju er^alten \)aht aB mid). (?eff.) 6. Sd) bring' bir auc§ 
 mag §iibf^e§ mit t)om (S^ni. (@c^.) 1. 6ie treten unter bie gen=^ 
 fter, unb empfangen, ftatt 5IImofen, Budermer!, ^iiffe unb m^ 
 man i'^nen fonft 5trtige§ geben mag. (®.) 
 
 (130.) 1. 9lun trugen un§ ^bie SSeHen ftid unb fanft 
 ^erunter. (tomer.) 2. ©§ ift leii^t ben ^ag, fd)tt)er bie Siebe, am 
 fdjtDerften bie ^(etd^giiltigfeit ju ertragen. (Some.) 
 
 (140.) 1. SDer ©liter ^i3d)fte0 biirfen voix bert^eibigen [Der^ 
 
 *See219. 2. 
 
EXERCISES. 339 
 
 teibigen] gegen (^sietualt. (ad).) 2. ^ItteS (Sdjone ift fanft, ba^cr 
 fhib bie fc^bnften golfer bie ruTjigften. (3. ^. 91.) 3. SDer gag 
 §mifd)en ^erfalleiicii greiuibeii ift gemiifjiilid) bcr gvimmigfle unb 
 um^erfofjiilic^fte. (®(^.) 4. ^apfer ift ber Somenfietjer, tapfererift 
 ber SBeltOc^tuimjer, bodj am tapferfteu ift, toer fid) felbft ()e5mang. 
 (Berber.) 5. (Sin ebter §elb ift, ber fiir§ SSaterlaub, ein eblerer, 
 ber fiir be§ ^anbe§ 3So^I, ber ebelfte, ber fiir bie SD^eufdj^eit 
 fiimpft. (Berber.) 6. 3u ben ^ropen finb bie ©etucidjfe Don 
 frifc^erem ^riin, mit (jriif^cren unb gidnjenberen ^Icittcrn gejiert, 
 aU in h^n nLirblid)crcn (Srbftric^en. (^um.) 1. ®er !(are ^ac§ 
 fc^eint am fc^onftcn in fcinem ru^igen Sauf, ha^ tiefe M^^v 
 om er[)aOenften in fcincr ^etuegung. (@(^.) 8. ^c^ fterbe ! ha^ 
 ift balb gefagt unb Otllbcr noc^ get^an. (®.) 9. 'Diefe jungen 
 SBdume, unb e§ iDaren gerabe bie aIIerfct)onften, be^ielten immer 
 aKe i^re 3rt)eige. (?lnberfon.) 10. Sebe§ bcr a}lenfd)^eit* ermiefene 
 Unred^t rcic^et auf» fiird)terU(^fte fid) felOft. (Berber.) 11. 5ltter^ 
 liebft fc^offen bie golbencn (SDnnen(id)ter burd) ha§> bid^te ^^an* 
 nengriin. (C»ei.) 
 
 (144.) 1. 3c^ bin bod) erfc^redlic^ neugierig mie fie nur 
 au§fe^en mag. (tomer.) 
 
 (145.) 1. Xcx kronen miirbig fein, ift me[)r al§ kronen 
 trogen. (^rouegf.) 2. ^ie Settler finb ben gunben feinb, unb 
 bie gunbe ben ^ettlcrn. {Bpx.) 3. @§ ift bem Tltn\^tn Ieid}ter 
 unb getaufigcr 5U fd)meic^eln al§ 5U loben. (3. ^. 9^.) 4. ®en 
 SSein aber tran! cr gleid) au§ ben gdffern, of)ne ba^ er ein ©Ia§ 
 nott)ig [notig] r)atte. (3. ®r.) 
 
 (146.) i. g(orcn§ ift rcid) an feinen 2Ser!en. (^. ®r.) 2. 
 (Sr fii^Ite fid) nun fo arm an (^nabe, an (^iitern, unb fremb in 
 bem, toa§ er Uon Sugenb auf aB fein (5igent()um [©igentumj 
 betradjten fonntc. (®.) 
 
 (147.) 1. (Sr fannte bie D^amen ber auf bem SSege nad) 
 Valencia licgenben (Stdbte. ((Sbcrg.) 2. 5(u^er ben Don ©panien 
 mitgebrad)tcn (Solbaten, I)atte ^arl bie Oor 9[RaiIanb fiegreid)en 
 ^ruppen bei fic^. (^. (3x.) 3. '^^iefe (Stabt lag auf ber am norb^ 
 lic^ften in§ 30^eer I)ert)orragenben ©pi^e 5lfri!a^, ha, wo je^t ^ 
 ^uni§ liegt. (®rube.) 
 
 *See 222. Vk 
 
340 BXEBGISES. 
 
 THEME n. 
 
 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 1. Who does not love old. friends more than new ones? 
 2. The young man had to* leave the city and go into a 
 strange one. 3. Never had his home appeared to him so 
 beautiful. 4. Now he was alone among strangers, and he 
 felt himself sad and lonely. 5. But he found new friends, 
 good and helpful (ones). 6. He had often dreamed him- 
 self rich and powerful ; now he had become rich, but he 
 was also old and unhappy. 7. He gave us a glass of good 
 beer and a piece of black bread. 8. With the help of eager 
 endeavor he became a very learned man. 9. What a spiri- 
 tual power this man has been. 10. Has he truly committed 
 such a treason ? 11. Several strange men have asked after 
 the owner of this building. 12. Such beautiful maidens 
 appear seldom in our valley. 13. Many a noble man have 
 these soldiers struck dead. 14. O, ye poor shepherds, what 
 a happy year have I passed in your valley. 15. We poor 
 men never see our king. 16. The king is good ; he will 
 surely help thee, poor unhappy man. 
 
 17. Forget not the poor and unhappy. 18. Only the 
 eternal, the unending, is godlike. 19. The true artist must 
 only love the eternally beautiful. 20. Have you brought 
 me anything pretty? 21. You foolish children always 
 want to have something new. 22. The fool does not un- 
 derstand anything, whatever wise thing one* may say 
 to him. 23. The most costly thing which I have to pre- 
 serve is not my own life. 
 
 24. The two enemies look at each f other grimly. 25. 
 I bear more easily the hatred of my enemy than his indif- 
 ference. 26. The noblest man fights, not only for his 
 fatherland, but for humanity. 27. The brave man van- 
 quishes his enemies, but only the bravest can vanquish 
 himself. 28. In the more northern countries the plants 
 are smaller p-nd less beautiful than in the tropics. 29. The 
 
EXERCISES. • 341 
 
 most terrible movements of the ocean are the most sub- 
 lime. 20. The ocean is not always most beautiful when it 
 is quietest. 31. These little trees which have kept all their 
 twigs are charming. 32. I cannot praise a man quite un- 
 known to me. 33. The brother, by three years younger, is 
 taller than the older one. 34 The troops victorious at 
 Tunis now had to go to the city lying on the most north- 
 ern point of Africa. 
 
 ILLUSTRATIVE SENTENCES, HL 
 PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 (152.) 1. SDer $err ^t meiti nod§ nie bergeffen, t^ergig, 
 ntein ^erj, and) feiner nic^t. (©ettert.) 2. 9Hc^t metnet^atben, 
 fonbern mehtcr 8o§ne megen, feufjte idf) in ber finftcrcn Dlac^t : 
 §ei'r, erf)a(te un§ ! (M.) 
 
 (154.) 1. ^a ift ber 9^ing ©eOen (Sieger, fagte id) 
 
 (jaftig unb flecfte if)n in ber 3erftrenung an ben ginger, orbentlic^ 
 frof), i^n tDieber 5n Ijaben. (§et).) 2. ®ie 9Zelfe foil man nic^t 
 t)cr)c^md()en, fie ift be§ (partners SSonne. (®.) 3. ^er ^rief htn 
 hu gefc()rieben, er mac^t mid) gar nic^t bang. (§ei.) 4. 5lC(e§ 
 ging burd) ein gute§ $Beib, melc^e^ nid}t fern iDofjnte. {®.) 5. 
 2)enn mein Siebc^en, fie fc^reibt \va§> id) xijv bic^tete. {(B,) 6. 
 ^er SSifle ift gut, aber 3Sinb nnb SSetter fdmpfen bagcgen. (@ci^.) 
 T. 9JZand)er ift ein 33ofetr)ic^t gemorben, toeil er faf), baf^ man i^n 
 bafiir ^ielt. ((lampe.) 8. §ier ein (Sjemptar be§ 5l(manad§§. 
 §umboIbt fenbet mir beren brei au§ 53ertin. (@(^.) 9. (Sriauben 
 die mir eine grage, t3ie((eid)t mai^t bie ^eantrt)ortung berfelben 
 ^a^ Seitere iiberftiiffig. (®^iet.) 10. (Sd^on fangt e§ an ju bdm= 
 mern. (®eibet.) 11. (£^ regnet ! ©ott fegnet bie (Srbe, bie fo 
 burftigift. ((Sn§Uu.) 12. (S§ trarcn einmal fUnfunbjmanjig 3inn^ 
 folbaten. (^ubeiiou.) 13. (£§ mar aber eine 5Irt bon ^ermirrnng 
 iiber bie 'Dieuerfctiaft gefommen. (?enjolb.) 14. ®a mar e§ fait 
 unb finfter, e§ fc^ricen bie 9taben Dom ^ac§. (abutter.) 15. 'i)ie 
 Seute, melcf)e im ^orfe mDf)uten, a^nten gar nic^tg batjon ; benn 
 eg maren gan^ gemo^nti^e Seute. (?eanber.) 16. 5)er Qa^ ift 
 parteiif(^, aber bie S^iebe ift eg noc^ me^v. (^e(f.) XT. 9?^it meinen 
 
342 ^ EXERCISES. 
 
 5lrBeiten bartn Inn ic^ t)iel beffer gufrieben, a(§ ic^ e§ mit benen 
 im borigcn 3a!)re bin. (@d^.) 18. ^anit tt)dren tt)ir ©!Int)en, 
 iinb Uerbieutcii e§ 511 fcin. (3c^.) 19. 3ft'§ jeuer 2^antn.tu§, ben 
 Supitcr 5u 9kt§ unb ^afel 509 ? (Sr ift e§. (®.) 20. SSer ift 
 ha? fragte er. 3c^ tun e§, antmortete bie Sitonigin. (JBeauber.) 
 (155.) 1. m<^t^ 2Sai:)re§ Idfst * fic^ Don ber 3n!nnft tDiffen. 
 (®c^.) 2. (£r felbft riicfte fic^ ben §tr»eiten gautenil Ijeran. (®^iel.) 
 
 3. DZacI) ber 3uU^9^e^oIution crn)d[)Ite er fid) ^ari§ ^nm SSo^n^ 
 orte. (!^aube.) 4. Unb nnn niiiffen toir nn§ trenneu. SS>aiin inir 
 un§ mieberfeljen — trer nieig e^ ? (®^iel) 5. 9}(an miirbe ein^ 
 onber beffcr feuneit, menn fic^ ntcf}t intnier einer bent anberen 
 gleicl)fte(len moc^te. (@.) 6. Ste f)ielten fic() lauQt feft aneinanber 
 gebriich nnb fc()dmten fic^ ifjrer ^^fjrdnen nicl)t. (§ei).) 1. ^erliere 
 bic^ felbft nnr nid)t, bann Oleibft bn bet jebem 53crlufte reid^ 
 genug. (©ebaucr.) 8. ^er (^eijige gonnt fic^ fclber bie unfc^nlb- 
 igften ^ergniignngen nic^t. (trugge.) 
 
 (156.) 1. kBiegt bie mod' mir an§ ber ©ruft (@d^.) 2. 
 SSer berbnrb mir uneber biefe§ S^apitel ? (toc^.) 3. 2)er grembe 
 irarf bie ©igarre meg, bie i^m Icingft Qu^gegangen Wax. (^e^.) 
 
 4. 9Zun greift mir gn nnb feib nic^t faul. (®.) 
 
 THEME nX 
 PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 1. If you have the ring, do not forget to give it to me. 
 2. I gave it to the child and he put it on his finger. 3. I 
 was very much rejoiced to receive your letter ; if it was 
 not long, it was very well written. 4. The young girl 
 wrote it, and she writes me many letters. 5. Give it to 
 me. I want to read what is f in it. 6. You may read it, 
 but you must not speak of it. 7. Is not this man a 
 I camp ? I have always held him for one. 8. Allow me a 
 question about it. 9. Not this man, but a brother of his is 
 the scamp. 10. I know his history, do not speak to me of it. 
 11. It began to rain and it became so cold and dark that 
 we were afraid. 12. There were many people in th^ 
 
 *See343. 1.5d f fte^t. 
 
EXERCISES. 343 
 
 house, but they only screamed and did ^nothing, for they 
 were very stupid people. 13. They were afraid, and I 
 was * too, but I said nothing of it. 14. He is not contented 
 with his work, but we are. 15. When I asked: is it y(^u? 
 he answered : it is not I, it is we. 16. If you are un-. 
 happy, you deserve to be so. 17. He chose himself a 
 friend who was worthy of his love. 18. But now they 
 have parted, and they are ashamed of their friendship. 
 19. They hate each other and wish never to see each 
 other again. 20. He is a bad man ; he is only a friend to 
 himself. 21. When one loses ones self one has lost every 
 thing. 22. Don't be lazy and don't spoil my work for me. 
 
 ILLUSTRATIVE SENTEIJ-CES IV. 
 POSSESSIVE AND DEMONSTEATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 (169.) 1. ®ie§ grauenfc^irffal ift l^or alien mein§. (®.) 
 2. ^f)ue beiue ^flic^t, ic^ ttjerbe meine t^un. (®.) 3. dJldn ^t^ 
 f)eimniB [-ni^] !ann eucl^ gar nic^t^ nii^en, tr>enn ic^ nic^t gubor 
 t)C[§> cure ^abe. (^e[[.) 4. 3c^ freue mic^ meine§ Seben^ f in biefer 
 ^etjenb, bie fiir folc^e Seelen cjefc^affen ift, wk bie mehte. (®.) 
 
 (160.) 1. ©eitbem ber Honig feinen (So^n bcrloren, t^er- 
 traut ev SSentgcnt bcr (Seiuen ntefjr. (®.) 2. SSarum foKtcn luir 
 nic^t mimfrfjcn, ncOcn ben Unfrigen gn ru^en ? {®.) 3. ^a bin 
 ic^ tDieber ! ®a§ ift meine §iitte ! 3c§ fte^e iDieber auf bem 
 SJ^einigen! (@cf).) 
 
 (161.) 1. "^zx (Srnft, wd6)tv i^m anf ber ©tirn lag nnb au§ 
 ben 5(ngen fc[)aute, gaO iljin haS' ^Infefjcn eine§ ^OZanncS. (^ber«.) 
 2. 3:obt [tot] Iat3 er ha in feinem ^alafte, i^m jn .^auptcu § 
 ftanb ha§> unnoUcnbete (^emiilbe. (^. (Bv.) 3. D^oc)^ jittert i()r ber 
 ©d)rec! biirc^ {ebe Dkrtie. (^eff.) 4. Sturj t)orI)er wax cinein in 
 glorenj ber S^opf al)i3efrf)(agen tDorben. (C). ^v.) 
 
 (166.) 1. (eie finb) meine Slinber nnb bie meiner lieben 
 (Sd^inagerin, antmortete ber ^eiftlic^e. (^^rei.) 2. !I)er Xjat ben 
 ©4ilb, be§ ift bie ^ron', ber tt)irb ha§> Meinob bringen I (U^ 
 
 *t^ot eg. t 219.3. X 222.11. § Antique phrt^se ; at his head. 
 
344 £XE£€ISES. 
 
 3. ^ie SBefc^eiben'^eit ]oUtt bte ^ugenb berer fetn, benen btc 
 
 Qitberen fe^Ien. (53vummer.) 4. Xtx ift'§, \)a§> ift er ! 5)er rettete 
 bie Stonigin. (@(^.) 6. ^iele ijermec^feln gar bie 9}iittel imb ben 
 Q\v^d, erfreuen jid^ an jenen. .oI)ne biefen im 5luge §u befallen. 
 (®f5 6. 9^ur einjelnen ©iinftlingen t^eilte [tettte] er ^teg ober 
 3ene§ gur ^(nfic^t mtt. (^. ®r.) Y. SSaren ba§ bie Sippen,* bie er 
 fo oft gefii^t,* bie§ bie golbigen $aare, bie er fo oft urn feine 
 §anb gemitfelt ? (Srenjel) 8. S)ie betDeine md)t me^r, bie fd)on 
 5ur S^u^e gegangen, bie bett)eine, bie fiirc^ten ben f ommenben ^ob. 
 (Berber.) 9. 5)ie in feiner ©trafje tr»o^nten, fannten i^n atte. 
 (^e^.) 10. ^a, \)a^ roaren bie 5lugen, bie treuen flaren 5tugen, 
 bie er t)orf;er gefe^en. (®piel.) 11. ^a§ tDoUen a((e $eroeii fein, 
 unb feiner ift $err Don fic§. ((S.) 12. ^auer: „©nabige §erren, 
 einen Q3iffen nnb ^rnn!." ©olbat: „©i, ha^ mng immer fanfen 
 nnb frcffen." (@d^.) 
 
 (168-71.) 1. ^emiemgen, ber t>a§> (Sc^reiben ber S^tegier* 
 ung iiberbringt, ftofet er feinen ^olc!^ in bie ^ruft. (^. ®r.) 2. 
 <Bk (bie ^teligion) ift tnie ha§> $DZeer, }e nie()r man baffelbe beob* 
 Oi^tet, befto imenblid^er fc^eint e§. (33rummer.) 3. 5(m meiften 
 fc^abet ber bofe 1Rat§ [^at] bemfelOen, ber i^n gegeben ^at. 
 (@|)r.) 4. D^lotanb ritt l^interm ^ater ^er, tnit beffen ©peer unb 
 ©d^ilbe. (U^.) 5. ^ie Sugenb iiberiDinbet ben (Sturm ber 
 Seibenfd^aften, ^a^ fitter unterliegt bemfelben. {<Bpx4 
 
 THEME IV. 
 
 POSSESSIVE AND DEMONSTRATIVE PEONOUNa 
 
 1. He does not do his duty and I will not do mine. 2. 
 The secret is ours, it cannot be of use to you, and it will 
 never become yours. 3. I rejoice in the beauty f of this 
 country, which seems to be created for me and mine. 4. 
 Each one loves his own (people), his own (possession) 
 best. 5. We travel no more, we live quietly among our 
 own people. 6. He had the appearance of deep earnest- 
 ness, but when I looked into his eyes I saw that he was 
 
 « 439.30. t^iaa. 
 
EXEKCISES. 345 
 
 laugMng. 7. My hands tremble, fear penetrates every 
 nerve, I cannot look liim in the face. 8. What do you 
 fear ; he cannot cut off your head ? 9. The fright has 
 spoiled my pleasure, too. 10. These are my children, the 
 others are those of my brother. 11. This (man) has all 
 the virtues, to this one they are all lacking, even modesty, 
 12. He is always promising to tell us this or that thing, 
 but he really has nothing to say to us. 13. These weep, 
 because they fear death, those because they are not 
 already gone to rest. 14. No, those are not my true friends, 
 those I do not know. 15. These (fellows) want to be the 
 friends of every one,* but not one of them knows what 
 friendship is. 16. That is the one who gave the bad ad- 
 vice to the government, 17. He is the same who brought 
 us the writing. 18. His head will be cut ofL 19, Youth 
 rejoices in life,"!" age contemplates it. 
 
 HiIiUSTRATIVE SENTENCES V. 
 INTEKKOGATIVE AND KELATIVE PEONOUNa 
 
 (173.) 1. 28eg ift ber ©rbenraum ? ^e§ gteigiGen. SSe§ 
 ift bie §errfc^aft ? ®e§ ^erftanbigen. (Berber.) 2. SSa§ Derfiirjt 
 mir bie Qzxt ? ^()atig!eit. 2Ba^ macl)t fte unertraglic^ lang ? 
 TOlfeigsang. ((^.) 3. 3^i5er ift eiti unbraud)linrer SQknn? S)er 
 nid^t befe()ten imb nic^t tjefjorc^en fann. (®.) 4. SSoburd^ tDirb 
 SBiirb' unb ©(iic! er fallen lange 3eit ? S<^ nmm : burc^ niii)t§ 
 me^r aU burc!^ ^efc^eiben()eit. (?ogau.) 
 
 (174.) 1. 3SeIrf^e^3 ^(luje \md)t ilber bie ©d^irffate ber Wtn^ 
 fc^en ? SSetc^e gerccfjte §anb tl^eilt [teilt] bie ©liter be§ Selieng 
 au§ ? (©ngel.) 2. 3Setc^' ein ©efii^l mu^t bu, o grower Tlann, 
 6ei ber ^ere^rung biefer SJ^enge ^aben. (®.) 
 
 (175.) 1. 3Sag inccfen nu§ bem ©djtummer mtc^ fiir fiij^e 
 flange boc^ ? {\X%) 2. SSa^ fiir ein gottlicljer Sllenfc^ miigte ber 
 nid^t merben, ber fic^ entJcft(offc,J immer treu 511 fein I (3acobi.) 
 
 (176.) 1. ^ittft bu, mein ©o^n, frei bleiben, fo lerne voa^ 
 3fie(f)te^ ! (®.) 2. SSer feine ^lage ^at, ber mad^t fid^ ttJeld&c 
 
 * eltte« Seben. t geiiitive case. :|: 332.3. 
 
34G EXERCISES. 
 
 (.^o^eBuc.) 3. ®r tt)trb (^elb tjon tnir borgett, tuenn er fetbft 
 tretc^eg ju tierlei^en ^at (Seff.) 4. SSag fi^t S^r ^ier auf bent 
 naffen ©teiti, 9J^utter Sami^ ? fragte ic^. (^e^.) 5. 2Ba§ tDeint 
 i^r,SJlabc^eti? 223a§ flagt t§r, SSeikr? (»uer.) 6. e:iott, tt)a§ 
 iftba§.^%b fc^on! (§ei).) t. SSa§ bie{e§ 9}Mbc^en loemerHd^ 
 tt)irb, bad^te fie. (grei.) 
 
 (178.) 1. S^aQalie t)atte tierfc^iebene S3(umen bon feltfamer 
 (SJeftalt gebroc^en, bie SSil^elmen boKig unbefannc tDarett, unb 
 ttad^ beren Sf^amen er fragte. (®.) 2. SDie ^elbengro^e, mit ber fie 
 ftarben, na^m fiir ben (S^IanOen ein, fiir meli^en lie ftarben. (@c^.) 
 3. 9^i(f)t an bie (filter §ange bein ^er^, bie ha§> 2ch^n t)ergdnglic^ 
 gieren ! (®(^.) 4. Tlan !annte ben geinb t)ott!ommen, bem man 
 je^t gegeniiber ftanb. (Bdj.) 
 
 (179.) 1. SSer aKgubiet bege^rt, ^at o(te§ oft tierloren. 
 (Sici^tnjer.) 2. ^ie 9}^enfcf)en finb nic^t immer, \va^ fie fc^einen, 
 (Seff.) 3. SSa0 ic^ t)ermod)te, '^ab^ t(^ gem get^an. (®.) 4. 
 SBem fie erfd^eint, loirb au§ fic^ felbft entriicft. SSem fie ge^i3rte, 
 tDarb 5n ^ofi) begliirft. {(§>.) 5. Sa§ t)or oKen ^ingen bir er^ciljlen 
 
 xva§> in ^abt)lon fiir einen fd^onen ©toff icl^ bir gefouft. 
 
 {?eff.) 6. Sc^ tiebe, n^er mir @nteg t^nt. i^d).) 1. SSer fie (bie 
 DZac^ric^t) ^orte, f(^reibt ^Safari, bem begann ber 53oben nnter 
 htn gii^en gu manfen, ber tmrbe bleic^ tDie ber ^ob. (^. @r.) 8. 
 SSen ba§ ©liic! p ftiirjen benft, ber mirb oft erft t)on i^m er^oben. 
 
 ($!ogau.) 9. 2Ser nie fein ^rob mit 3^f}rdnen a^ ber fennt 
 
 euc^ nic^t, if)r ^immlifc^en Wd6^t^ ! (@.) 10. 9^un, licben greunbe, 
 luer ratten [raten] !ann, ber rat^e [rate], (l^eifeiri^.) 11. 2Ba§ 
 bem ^erjen gefallt, ha§> fnc^en bie 5(ngcn. (@^r.) 12. SSeffen 
 2^h^n feinen frent, meffen IXmgang jeber fc^eut, ber I)at nic^t 
 t)iel fro^e 3eit. {^\>v.) 13. 2Ser mir bringt bie Sfron^ er foil fie 
 tragen. (@c^.) 14. 3^ ber ^iittefte^t ein£el)nftul)(. . . ber bar:= 
 onf fi^t, ber ift gtiicflic^. (^ei.) 15. !J)er ift ber §err ber (^be, 
 iDert^re ^tefe migt. (9?ot)ati8.) 16. SSer itn§ bc^a^It, ba^ ift ber 
 ^aifer. (^d^.) 11. ^a ftng er an ^u (anfen, ma§ er lanfen fonnte. 
 (?eanber.) 18. SSa§ i^rer aucl^ •maxkn mag, nnb tro t^r fie trieber 
 fe'^en roerbet, i^r merbet fie in grieben n)ieberfe^en. (^e^.) 19. 
 SSa§ tc^ au(^ in biefem ^a'^re bertoren '^abc, meine (Selbftad^t^ 
 ung ^abe t^ nid^t Derloren. [%xel) 20. SlSev bu an^ feift,* idft 
 
 * 332.5a. 
 
EXERCISES. 847 
 
 njiinfc^c ^etturtg bir. (@(^.) 21. ®a§ ^efte, nja§ bu miffen 
 faimft, barfft bu bem ^uben boc^ nic^t fagen. (®.) 22. ^Itteg ift 
 5u ertrageu,* \m§> nur eiuen ^(ugenblicf bauert. (3. ^. 9ft.) 23. 
 2)n§ SSenige, iua§ cr fprac^, murbe mlt einem tDibrigen 3:on 
 nu§gefto6en. (^c^.) 24. (S^ ift nic^t irbtfc^e mu\\l tt)a§ mic^ \o 
 freubig macljt. (U(}.) 25. (S§ ift nur ein§, tDa§ un§ retten fann. 
 
 (180.) 1. §ier liegt ntir etmaS auf bem ^erjen, iroriiOer 
 ic^ aufgeflart gu fein triiinf^te.f (<S.) 2. SSer n)ei^ ii?orau§ ba§ 
 ^riinnlein quillt, tt)orau§ W'xx trinfeu roerbeu. (9leim.) 3. Sf^ 
 ftel;e i30u bem <a\an!enbette auf, auf ba§ micl^ ber (Sc^mer^ iiber 
 ben ^erluft meiue§ Wanm^ marf. (?e[f.^ 4. Somit eiuer fiinbigt, 
 bamit mirb er gcftraft. (a|3u.) 5. ijod^mutl) [^oc^mut] ift'g, \\)o^ 
 burci§ bie (Sucjel fieleu, morau ber |)oHettgeift ben SJlenfc^en fagt. 
 
 (®Cf).) 
 
 (181.) 1. SScirum bin ic^'§ adetu, ber uucjeliebt, auf eUJtg 
 liebt ? (tlo^.) 2. ©eib mir gegriiBt, befreuubete ©c^aaren, bie 
 mir 5ur 8ee 33et3leiter maren ! (@c^.) 3. S)u ©c^o, ^olbe 
 (Stimme biefe§ Zi)aU, bie oft mir "iJtutuiort gab auf meine Sieber, 
 Qo^anna ge^t ! {<Bd).) 3. Uub ©ie felbft, ber ©ie hen Seiertag 
 an 3^rem ©c()reibtifc^ gu ^eiligen pf(egeu, luie ftetjt e§ mit 
 Q^rem grof5en SScrfe ? (§ei).) 
 
 (182.) CSiu 9ieiter, fo nur ein ^ferb Ijat, foK nid)t $afer 
 ne^men fiir jniei. (@pr.) 2. §eilig ift ha§> (^efe^, fo bem Stiinftler 
 ©c^on^eit gebietet. (@d^.) 3. SSer ba tabelt, ber fiit)It fic^ bem^ 
 jenigen iiberlegen, gegen ben er fict) auf hen 9^icl)terftuf)l fc^t. 
 ((Sberg.) 4. Sebe mol)t, bu ^eilige (Sd)tt)elle, too ba n^anbelt 
 Siebc^en traut. (§ei.) 
 
 THEME V. 
 
 INTERROGATIVE AND RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 1. Who are the happy ? the industrious. 2. "What are 
 the greatest virtues? Industry and modesty. 3. For 
 what did you hold him ; who told you that he was a use- 
 less man? 4. Of what did he command you to speak? 
 
 *84ain.l&. t 832.80. 
 
348 EXERCISES. 
 
 5. "What sweet tones wake me from my slumber! 6. 
 Whose eye watches over the fates of men ? 7. What a 
 feeling of freedom I had, when I came out of the crowd ! 
 8. What kind of feelings did you have when they waked 
 you ? 9. What kind of a man will this boy become, if he 
 learns nothing right ? 10. What can he learn when he 
 has no books? 11. Why does he weep and complain? It 
 he has no books I will give him some. 12. How stupid 
 he is becoming ; he will never learn anything right. 
 13. The gentleman, after whose name you ask, is quite 
 unknown to me. 14. All those whom I loved and with 
 whom I have lived, h^e died. 15. The people among 
 whom I now live, are the children of those whom I knew 
 formerly. 16. He who has lost his friends is unhappy and 
 lonely. 17. What I have bought for you I will give you. 
 18. I love those who love me. 19. I will tell you what it 
 is and to whom it belongs. 20. Tell me what sort of 
 beautiful things you saw in Babylon. 21. What I have 
 seen, that I am unable to tell you. 22. He who brings me 
 the bad news, he must advise me. 23. What he advises, 
 that does not please me. 24. He whom fortune has never 
 lifted up, he will never be cast down. 25. He who has 
 lost his self-respect, has lost everything, 26. Whatever 
 the emperor may pay me, I shall be contented. 27. Who- 
 ever may have come,* I wish to see him. 28. We have 
 lost all that which made us hapi3y. 29. He told us 
 nothing we did not know already. 30. There is only one 
 thing which is not to be borne. 31. It is not my self- 
 respect which I have lost this year. 32. You will soon see 
 the brook of which you have heard, and from which you 
 can drink. 33. The arm-chair in which I was sitting stood 
 beside the sick-bed in which the poor woman lay. 34. It 
 was pride through which she sinned. 35. I, who have 
 lost my husband, have been sufficiently punished. 36. 
 "WHiy am I punished, who am already so unhappy ? 37. 
 Happy man, who hast never yet lost a friend. 38. Was 
 
 • 832.5(1. 
 
EXEECISES. 349 
 
 it you, who gave me the answer to my questions. 39. And 
 you yourself, who have always lived in this valley, why 
 do you now leave it ? 40. You I blame who seat yourself 
 upon a judgment seat. 
 
 ILLUSTRATIVE SENTENCES VL 
 INDEFINITE PRONOUNS AND NUMERALS. 
 
 (185.) 1. Man I)atte if)n getra^It, ot}ne re^t ju toiffen tr)o§ 
 man tijat {^. (3v.) 2. 2Sa§ man ni^t m\% t)a§' eben brand)t 
 man, unb tva^ man meife, fann man nic^t braucl^en. (®.) 3. 
 S)em 9^a(^ften mu§ man ^elfen. (Sd).) 4. (Sin lieOer SSeg mirb 
 einem nid)t lang ; gem ge()t man gemoljnte (Straj^en. {Md.) 
 
 (186.) 1. 9^iemanb lebt fo, iDte er modjte, jeber lebt 
 nur, mie er !ann. (Crtle^jp.) 2. 5((Ier SSett grennb ift 9Hemanbe§ 
 grennb. (@^r.) 3. ^erfc^toffener SJiunb unb offene ^ugen ^aben 
 noc^ Dliemanbem gefc^abet. (<Spr.) 
 
 (188.) 1. Sa, bann fommt ^t\va^ ^effere§, nod^ meit ©(^one* 
 re§! (5luberfeu.) 2. 9?i^t§ SSa^reg la^t fic^ t)on ber Su^unft 
 miffen.* (ed).) 3. 3Ser S^Jic^tg au§ fic^ mad)t, ift Td6)t^. (epr.) 
 
 (189.) 1. ©0 lebte id) etlid^e glnrf(icf)e 3af)re. (Stelanb.) 
 
 (190.) 1. ^r (ber (Solbat) mu^ fic^ af(e§ nel)men, man 
 giebt if)m nid)t§ ; unb jeglic^emf gegtDungen ju neljmen, ift er 
 jeglid^em ein ®reue(. {<B6).) 2. ®a» ift ber grofste ^ort^eil [^or= 
 teil] fiir bie ^[Renfc^^eit, ha^ jeber fiir bie anberen alle§ tl;ue.j 
 (@(^efer,) 
 
 (191.) 1. ^ann mu§ id^ mein Seben laffen, tc^ unb mand^er 
 ^amerab. (U^.) 2. SSer t)iete§ bringt, iDirb monc^em cttva^ 
 bringen. (®.) 
 
 (192.) 1. 3n bunten SBilbern Ujenig ^ar^eit, t)iel Strt^itm 
 [Qrrtum] unb ein Siinfc^en SSa^r^eit, fo mirb ber befte ^ran! 
 gebraut. (®.) 2. ^iete§ miinfc^t fic^ ber 9J?enfd), unb bo(^ be* 
 barf er nur menig. (®.) 3. Qd) !i3nnte \\)m rcd)t biel SSofe^ 
 bafiir t^un. {B^.) 4. SJ^e^rere neue Xox\^x famen jum fQox^ 
 fc^ein. 1®.) 
 
 *84ai.5d. 1 222.L3 and 857. ;3d3.3a 
 
360 EXEECISES. 
 
 (193.) 1. 5tu§ aii ben fvcmbeu (Sttimmen . . . . finbcit bic 
 (Sc^tDt)feer 3J?anner fid) ()erau§. (@d^.} 2. Qc^ cjrub'^ mit alien 
 \)tn SSiirjIem nu». (®.)' 3. ©ie fuunten mir mit all S^rem 
 guten SSideii nic()t Ijelfeit. (^ei).) 4. 5l(Ie§ beugte jtrf) Dor bent 
 ^ilbe be§ (^elrenjicjten, unb and) S5eit iparf ficl^ nieber. (Corner.) 
 5. (^riifsen ©ie a((e§, ipa§ ©ie nnujiedt. (@c^.) 6. ©inb ba§ ade 
 enre Stinber? fragte ber .^^onig. {^vel) 7. ^ie 9^ac^t ift ein^ 
 getreten, nnb ein jeber tt)nnfd}t ficl^ 5n eigener D^lnfje ©IM. (@.) 
 8. 2Bir ntiiffen jel^t alte filnf 3^^^^^ umlernen, tt^enn W)\x nic^t 
 gan§ au§ ber ^J^obe fommen ir)oI(en. (®.) 
 
 (194-195.) 1. 3Sa§ bent einen recl)t ift, ift bent anberen 
 bidig. (®cf).) 2, ^i§ bag ©ffen fertig Wixh, n)onen n)ir ein§ 
 trinfen. (®.) 3. JJrin! an§ bent befrdn^ten ^ecl^er. @o ! nod^ 
 eing ! (tteift.) 4. ®er SSinter ift ein biifterer (^aft, unb enget 
 einent bag §er5. (®c^.) 5. 3c^ arOeite gar nici^tg, unb- !ann 
 !eine fed^g S^i^^^ ()intereinanber fc^reiben. (^ei.) 6. SSenn ic^ 
 mix felbft !ein ^eufet tndr' ! (®.) 1. ^ir finb in !eine f(^Iec^ten 
 |)anbe gefatten. (®(f|.) 
 
 THEME VL 
 INDEFINITE PEONOUNS AND NUMERALS. 
 
 1. One lives as one can, not as one would like to. 2. 
 People do not always say what they think. 3. What we 
 need, we never have. 4. They have chosen no one yet, 
 but they must soon choose some one. 5. The good man will 
 always help one, even when he is himself unhappy. 6. 
 This man helps no one, he has injured every one.* 
 
 7. One does not need to say anything true, if one only 
 can say something interesting. 8. Each one takes what 
 he can for himself. 9. We have lost many a comrade and 
 this day will again bring death to many a one. 10. They say 
 much evil of the soldier, but the soldier needs little and 
 is contented with little. 11. I haVe known several 
 soldiers ; they were all good men. 12. Of all the pic- 
 
 * einen Sebeiu 
 
EXERCISES. 351 
 
 tures I like only one. 13. Every one admires the pictures, 
 but not all understand them. 14. I buy every year a few- 
 pictures. 15. All these old clothes have gone quite out of 
 style. 16. I love this little village with all its old houses. 
 17. We have drank two glasses of beer already, but we will 
 drink another. 18. I always drink another beer. 19. The 
 one drinks too much, the other will not drink at all. 20. I 
 have not written him a single line ; I am no friend of his. 
 
 rLIiUSTRATIVE SENTENCES VIL 
 FORMS OF DECLENSION. NUMBERS. 
 
 (211.) 1. SSeber t)on SU^afern noc^ SSinbdlatterit Ukh \^ 
 Derfc^ont. (®.) 2. sr)ie 9[)^iitter erfd^tenen, ben <SaugHng im 
 ^trme. (®.) 3. ®ret Zao, imb brei ^ad)t ^at bie ©^^ac^t ge^ 
 !rac^t. mM.) 4. Sni fiibinbifc^en ^Irc^ipet ^at bie ^liit^e [^liite] 
 ber ^afflefia faft brei gug ^urc^meffeu unb tt)iegt iitier 14 ^funb. 
 (^um.) 5. 3m ^Ipril ftub bie 10,000 mann X^alatefta^g auf bie 
 $a(fte ^ufammengejc^moljen. (§. ®r.) 6. Qn ber Wittt UcM 
 fiir bie SBagen mir ber 0taum Uon jmlilf bi§ t)ier5et)n ©c^ritten. 
 (®.) 7. SDiefe ^ame ^at einen Dfjrring Don imgefci^r 3,400 
 ^^der SSertf) Pert] berloreit. (^et).) 8. ^ie grofeeren Simgen 
 ^atkn beim 9ie!tor Don 10 bi§ 11, unb tt)ir fleinen t)on 11 bi^ 
 12 Ufjr ^riijatftnnbe. (toc^.) 
 
 ILIiUSTRATIVE SENTENCES VIIL 
 THE NOMINATIVE. 
 
 (212.) 1. ^D^aria (Stuart mirb aB eiue .^onigin unb ^etbttr 
 fterben ! (@(^.) 2. ©ie jinb \)a§> §oc^fte, Uia§ 9[Rirf)eIangelo aU 
 S3i(b^auer gefc^affen ^at (^. ®r.) 3. (Seine 5(bfi(^t trar, ha^ 
 ^Ittejanbro, fein ©otju obcr 5^effe, ^erjog Uou glorenj iDiirbe.* 
 
 (213.) 1 . Scf) '^ei^e ber reic^fte 5J?nnn in ber getauften SSelt. 
 (®(^.) 2. ^arto§ ift gejonnen, ber Ungliicffeligfte in biefer SSelt 
 
 * 8d3.3e. 
 
852 EXERCISES. 
 
 gu 6Iet6en. {®d^.) 3. S^ WdijU, tt)a§ ha§> ^cffere m\d) biinft. 
 ^<Sc^.) 4. ©ie ^att'* e§ nie t)on i^m erfatjren, ha% fie eine C£f)riftm 
 geOoren fei, itnb feine Qiibin ? ($?eff.) 5. 9lic^t ein iUnh bin ic^ 
 erfc^ienen. (@.) 6. ^a§ Seben ift !ein ^raurn, e§ mirb mir 5um 
 S^raume burd^ bte ©cfiulb be§ S^lenfc^en. (^eu(^ter§kben.) 7. 
 S)ein ^ater ift ^um ©c^elm an mir getnorben. (@c^.) 8. Qm 
 5(c!erbau ift ber SDZenfd^ 511m 9D^enfc{)en geiDorben. (3JJaftno.) 
 
 (214.) 1. ©liicffeliger SD^enfc^, ber ru^ig an ber ©eite be§ 
 Sreunbeg fd^Inmmert, o^ne 5l^nung t)on 33errat^er [^errciter]. 
 (^en3el=@ternau.) 2. SSidfommen, filberner Sli^onb, fc^bner, 
 fliaet ©efa^rte ber 9^ad^t ! [mop.) 
 
 THEME Vn. 
 NUMBEKS AND THE NOMINATIVE. 
 
 1. The small-pox did not spare me. 2. These blossoms 
 are several feet long and weigh many pounds. 3. Mala- 
 testa left Florence with 10,000 men; in April he had only 
 5,000 men. 4 The street is only 30 paces broad and 3 miles 
 long. 5. We remained in the wagon from 2 to 3 o'clock. 
 6. Elizabeth, queen of England and cousin off Mary 
 Stuart, was her bitterest enemy. 7. Carlos, the son of the 
 king of Spain, was a most unhappy prince. 8. The duke 
 appears to be a great hero. 9. Michael Angelo was born 
 a poor boy, but he became the most famous sculptor of 
 Italy. 10. This man is called a Christian, but he will al- 
 ways remain a Jew. 11. He has become the betrayer of his 
 friend. 12. Happy man, who has chosen the highest. 13. 
 Beautiful, unhappy queen, thou didst die like a heroine 
 and a Christian. 
 
 ILIiUSTRATIVE SENTENCES IX. 
 THE GENITIVE. 
 
 (216.) 1. S^e§ giirften ©^a| liegt am ftc^erften tn be0 
 SBoIfeg §anben. (®.) 2. SBet (^ott unb 9J?enf^en finb tjer^a^t 
 
 * 88a7. t ee.4c 
 
EXEBCISES. 353 
 
 be§ §O(:^mutt)0 [^oc^mut^] 3etcf)cn. {md.) 3. ^oUfommene^ 
 mM ift nid)t be§ aRenfdjen £od§ [2o§]. (SSielanb.) 4. ^ie 
 (Sc^rift ift bie jungere @cl)tx)efter ber ©pradjc. {S3en3et=@teruau.) 
 5. ©in grower Zijdi [^eil] unferer gel)ler Id^t ftc^ tierbeffern 
 utib trteber gut madden. (9ftetn^arb.) 6. ®a§ Seben ift ber ©liter 
 l^oc^fteS ni(^t, ber IXebet gri3^te§ aber ift bie 6c§ulb. (®c^.) 1. 
 S)er SSorte finb genug getredjfelt. (®.) 8. Seonarbo er^iett ben 
 ^itet eineg 30ZaIer§ Reiner 5lKer-d3riftIi(^fteti a)kieftat. (§.®r.) 
 9. 5lnbrea bel ©arto* fe^Ite tuenig, urn eiti (^enie erften 9^ange§ 5U 
 l^eigen. (^. ®r.) 10. 9Zad) ^rieg unb ^ranb !ommt (S^otteg 
 (Segeti ing Sanb. (®^r.) 11. ©§ ift an bir, ba§ 3Ser! talenti^oHer 
 ©c^iiter ^u beffern. ((Sbers.) 12. ®ie (Srfenntni^ [(!^r!enntni§] 
 be§ Srrt^unxg [Srrtum§] ift ber erfte ©c^ritt gur SSa^rljeit. 
 (^rummac^er.) 13. SDa finb i^rer Uiete, gro^e nnb Heine, rief fie. 
 (^rei.) 14. (S§ traren i§rer fieben. ((Sber«.) 15. Sieber ©ontt, 
 trie barf unfer einer feinen 5(ngen trauen? (?eff.) 16. SDie 
 fd^onften 3::raume t)on greiljeit iDerben im ^er!er getraumt. (@c^.) 
 li. OTe§ in ber SBelt Id^t fid) ertragen, nur ni djt eine 'iRtiijt bon 
 guten ^agen. {(§>.) 18. D, ha§> ift ein greunb bon unferm §errn 
 9[)^a}or. (!Be[f.) 19. 9^un "^olt mir eine ^anne SBein. (^reiltgrotf).) 
 
 20. ^effer ein Sotl) [Sot] grei^eit, aU 5e^n $funb ©olb. (@pr.) 
 
 21. Qc^ fet^te nti(^ ju ben ^auern unten in ber ©dienfftube nnb 
 tran! ntein ©Ia§ ^ier. {^e^.) 22. ^a§> ©tiic! ^ap^i^ ift eine 
 eite breit unb ^dlt 20 ©tten. (®.) 23. ®a ic^ n).enig ©lauben 
 l^abe, muJ3 ic^ barauf fel)en, mid^ mit ein bigc^en guter 23:>er!e in 
 ben ^immel ^inein^ufc^minbeln.f (^etj.) 24. Qd| gebe jebem 
 brei^ig OTer Sanbeg. {^d).) 25. Qd^ brac^tebie 3^*^}^^ -^^^^^ 
 unb ^iereg ^erbor. (®.) 26. 5lm gtDangigften £)!tober fiel Tla\U 
 x\d)t in bie §dnbe ber (Spanier. ((Sberg.) 
 
 (217.) 1. (£t ftanb ba trie ein S3erbred§er, feine§ SSorteg 
 mdc^tig. i§ei).) 2. SSenn Qtjr mid^ ©uere§ S5ertronen§ miirbig 
 ad)tet, fo mi3get 3T}r mir mit (Surer ©efc^idjte t)ergeltcn. (^auff.) 
 3. !I)ie (Sbelfte bleibt nidjt ber Seffeln frei. (®cume.) 4. Q^r feib 
 unwiirbig be§ :^o^en ®enuffe§ ber (SItcrnfreube, bie if;r euren 
 (Sltem ftatt greube nur Qammer geboten. (3l(^o«e.) 5. Seber 
 ^ittenbe ift fetneg S8eiftanbe§ Ijemig. (Sbere.) 6. ^te ganje 
 
 » dative case, f 846.2. 
 
354 EXEECISES. 
 
 SSeig^eit bon jungen ^^^fen ift feinen ^ag (Srfa^rung mcrt^ 
 [tt)ert]. ("ipfeffel) T. ©a fte^t boit fc^onen ^(umen bie ganje 
 
 (219.) 1. 2Bte biete SO^enf^en !(agt man ber ^oS^elt an, 
 inbe§ man fie nur ber ®nmm^eit anflagen follte. (3acob«.) 2. 
 SSeil i^r mtd^ meineg Sebeng f)abt geftc^ert, fo mH x6) end) bie 
 SSafjr^eit griinblic^ fagen. [Bd).) 3. Q^r gmangt bie S^iitter, ben 
 (S(f)iilbigen be§ 5D^orbe§ to^jufpred^en. (@(^.) 4 9^id§t§ !ann 
 i^ feine§ (Sc§lDur§ entbinben. (5Sielanb.) 5. $D^an not^igte 
 [nbtigte] if)n, feine Untert^anen aller ifjrer ^^fUc^ten ^u enttaffen. 
 ((©c^.) 6. Seben 8ie recl^t \vo% freuen ©ie fic^ be§ 2eben§ unb 
 S5re§ 3Ser!e§. (@(^.) 7. (2cine§ §anbmer!§ fott ficl^ !einer fd^amen. 
 (@pr.) 8. d'g Tjabcn bie (^rofsen biefer SSelt firf) ber ©rbe be== 
 mad^tigt. (®.) 9. 2)er ^erjog !ann fid§ be§ (^ebrange^ !anm 
 enttebigen. (@d^.) 10. (Sr freute fid^ feiner rafd^en ^§at. (@ber8.) 
 11. S<^ fd[}ame mid^ ber Unerfa^ren^eit nnb meiner Qugenb 
 nid^t. {®.) 12. ^arob erbarmt'S ben $irten be§ atten, ^o'^en 
 $errn. (U^.) 13. (^ott erbarme fic^ beg Sanbe§ ! {8d^.) 14. 
 ©ie bebiirfen in ber ^§at ber '3iui)^. (^iubauj 15. (Sin tugenb- 
 l^after 9[l^ann benft nie be§ ^obe§, er ben!t be§ Sebeng. d^M.) 
 16. ^ie SBelt fonnte feiner SSo^It^aten genie^en, nnb be§ (S^eber^ 
 tiergeffen ? (®.) 11. 2)ie ^ienfte ber (^rofsen finb gefci^rlid^ nnb 
 lo^en ber Tln^t, be§ 3rt)ange§, ber (Srniebrigung nid)t, bie fie 
 foften. Wf.) ^ 18. ^d^ meig, ba§ (Sie tm (Srnft fpred^en, unb bod^ 
 ift e§ mir faft, aU* tDoIIten ©ie meiner fpotten. (@ptel.) 19. Sag 
 mid^ ber neuen grei^eit geniegen. (®(^.) 20. @eben! ber Slrmen 
 gu ieber grift. (Slaubiug.) 21. (Sr ad^tete nid^t ber tt)armen 
 ©onne nnb bet> frif d^en Suft. (Hnberjon.) 22. d'g fd^ont ber 
 ^rieg and^ nid^t ha§> jarte ^inblein in ber SStege. (®c^,) 23. 
 SDe§ 50?orgeng ben! an beinen @ott. (@^r.) 
 
 (220.) 1. ^dC) r)abe biefer Stage hen §omer jnr §anb ge- 
 nommen. (®(^.) 2. Seiber itieig ic^ nod^ nid^t, ob id^ $0?ontagg 
 !ommen !ann. ((^.) 3. ^er ^rin^ §atte eine§ ^age§ mit feinem 
 (Sefolge bie (^allerie befnd^t. (.^auff.) 4. gtat)io ftiir§te l^inein 
 in fc^anber^after ©eftatt, bermorreneg §aupte§, jerfel^ten ^lei* 
 be§. (®.) 6. (Sr tpili eilenben gngeg boriiber fUe^en. (@c^.3 6. 
 
 * 433.6. 
 
EXEECISES. 355 
 
 S3ei bent ^farr^ofepffegteber §err {ebe§mat anju^atten, fo oft er 
 beg SSegeg fu^r. (grei.) 1. Seic^ten ^au\§> ift ber 9^ul)m nid)t 
 gu '^aben. (C^erbev.) 8. ©ie^e tDte fc^mebenben ©c^tDungg im 
 Zan^t bie ^atire jic^ bre^en. {Bd).) 9. ^eine ^Irbeiten finb meljr 
 eineg ^ilbl)auer§, al§ eine§ ^olbfc^miebg. (@.) 10. C£'lifaOet^ 
 ift meine§ (Stammer, meineg ^efd)led^t§ unb 9^ange§. (@c^.) 11. 
 S(^ ijaht il)n au^gefd^Iagen, unb nun ift meine§ 33(etben§ t)ier 
 nic^t Idnger. (§et).) 12. Wtt^zv ^at gefd^rieben unb ift rec^t guteg 
 mnt\)^ [mui^], m 13. Sm erften 5lugenblic! mx er SSilteng 
 ab^ufc^reiben. (§ei).) 14. ©ie tranfen be§ foftlic^en SBif^ofg. 
 (5SoB.) 15. ©ebrauc^t ber 3eit, fie flie^t fo f^nell t)on ^innen. 
 C@d^.) 16. ©in fleifeiger ^ann ftirbt niemalg §unger§. {(£taubiu6.) 
 IT. Seib guten mni^ Put^], fprad^ ber ©rei§, 3^r tt)erbet 
 mc^t biefeg Sager§ fterben. (@ru6e.) 18. SSir t^un, 'wa§> unfer§ 
 5tmte§. gort ntit i^nt ! (@c^.) 19. 5)iefe§ §au§ ift nteine§ §errn, 
 be§ ^aifer§. ((©c^.) 20. ^ofe S^nge unb bofe D^ren finb be§ 
 !^eufef§. (®pr.) 21. ©buarbS merb' ic^ nie. (®.) 22. D be§ 
 (^Iiicf(i(^en, bent e§ tjergonnt ift, eine Suft mit eud§ ju at^men 
 [atmen] ! (®d).) 23. ^f"t be§ ^ofemid^t^ ! (Berber.) 
 
 THEME VnX 
 
 THE GENITIVE. 
 
 1. The prince's life lies in the hand of God. 2. Joy and 
 sorrow are the companions of mankind through life. 3. 
 Each one of our faults is hateful. 4. Pride is the greatest 
 of faults. 5. The name of the greatest painter of Italy was 
 Leonardo. 6. He was a painter of the first rank. 7. Italy 
 is the country of painters and of sculptors. 8. The 
 greatest part of his work is* in Paris. 9. The description 
 of these paintings is very interesting to me. 10. There 
 are only a few of them in my country. 11. The friends 
 of my children are also my friends. 12. The young 
 man's dreams were dreams of freedom and of happiness. 
 13. He drank several glasses of beer and ate two pounds 
 of meat as he sat in the bar-room. 14 Get me a bit of 
 
 befinbet ft^ 
 
356 EXERCISES. 
 
 bread. 15. Each one had twenty acres of good land. 16. 
 The first of February he went to Berlin. 17. He was 
 unworthy of freedom. 18. We are weary of this man's 
 stories. 19. The best man never remains free from faults. 
 20. Every young fool is sure of his own wisdom. 21. He 
 is my enemy, for he robbed me of hope. 22. I rejoice 
 in his friendship and love. 23. Why did you release him from 
 his work. 24. They accused him of murder, but the prince 
 has secured him his life. 25. The duke gained possession 
 of his confidence and then forced him to tell him all. 
 26. He is not ashamed of his deeds. 27. The duke took 
 pity on his youth and inexperience. 28. He needed his 
 kindnesses, for he was poor and ill. 29. You can never 
 quietly enjoy your good fortune, unless you remember 
 the poor and wretched. 30. He heeded not the words of 
 his parents, and mocked at their love. 31. Our happi- 
 ness in this world does not reward (us) the trouble which 
 it costs. 32. The young man rejoices in life and thinks 
 not of death, but death does not spare even the youngest. 
 33. In summer we can travel, but in winter we must 
 stay at home. 34 We went one day to see the old man, 
 but we did not find him. 35. With fresh courage he went 
 on his way. 36. Our friends are not all of the same age 
 with us. 37. Your words are more an enemy's than a 
 friend's. 38. This lady is of high rank and noble race. 
 
 39. They were of good courage when we went away. 
 
 40. I do not believe that they will die of hunger. 41. 
 Alas for the friends whom I have lost ! 42. Alas for the 
 happy days which are now past.* 
 
 rLLUSTRATIVE SENTENCES X. 
 THE DATIVE. 
 
 (222.) 1. ^en etgnen ^(aukn foUft bu btr ntd^t laffen 
 rauben ; attetn au(^ rauben foEtft bu feinem fetnen ^taubeii. 
 
 ♦ toorbel. 
 
EXEECISES. 357 
 
 md.) 2. ^onigitt ©opljie e;5ar(otte ^aljlte 3t ^a^x^, aU fie 
 bcr Xoh 1705 il)rem fonigli^en ®ema^(, i^rem eingtgen (Bo^n 
 raubte. (^ofer.) 3. ^em grlebli(f)en getra^rt man gem ben 
 grieben. (@(^.) 4. ^er red^te ^elbenfinn reic^t feft, !u^n unb 
 rur)ig ber ^efa^r bie §anb. (53euset=@ternau.) 5. ®er gute ^ontg 
 telnet bent SSetfen gern fein D^r. (^linger.) 6. Qc^ tnoUte t^r 
 ben ^ogcl njieberbringen. (§ei).) 1. SSenn bn ha§> tijnft, fo n^trb 
 ®ott beinem SJlanne feine ©iinben t)ergeben. (?eanber.) 8. (^e^ 
 fang nnb Siebe in fc^onem herein, fie er^Iten bem Seben htn 
 ^ugenbfc^ein. (@(t).) 9. ^iBer miberfe^t fic^ bem ^efe^I be§ 
 ^ogteg ? (@c^.) 10. SSer fic^ bem ^otljtnenbigften [DZottnen^ 
 bigften] inibmet, gefjt am fid)erften jnm S'l^U. (®.) 11. ^n 
 fannft bir jeben geinb t)erfo()nen nnb t»erbinben. (Sifci^enung.) 
 12. ^lanbe nur, bn Ipft t)iel getf^an, menn bir (S^ebnlb bn ge= 
 tno^neft an. (®.) 13. Qd^ fjabe mir'§ oft t)orgenommen, il)r ^erj 
 ^n reinigen. (@d)tege(.) 14. Saft bir eine .^(einig!eit nic^t ndt)er 
 treten, aU fie tnert^ [mert] ift. Wf.) 15. ®a bn ber SSelt nii^t 
 fannft entfagen, erobere fie bir mit (^etualt. (platen.) 16. (Sr 
 foil mir nid^t lebenbig gel)en. (®.) 11. 2)iefe gaftfreien 50Mnner 
 'fatten bem jnngen SO^anne erianbt, i^re ^itber fo oft ^u befnc^en, 
 alg er immer toollte. (§auff.) 18. Scf) entlie^ ben grennb nnb 
 banfte i[;m. (^auff.) 19. 5ltte ^^onige (:^uropa§ T^ulbigten bem 
 fpanifc^en Seamen. {@(^.) 20. Qc^ folge gern bem eblen ^eifpiet, 
 ha§> ber jiingere giebt. (@(^.) 21. 2Ber 5l((en gefallen tt)i(l, inirb 
 ben 33effcrn immer miftfallcn. (@(i^e(Itng.) 22. Unfer (^^efiil)! fiir 
 bie D^atnr gleidjt ber (Smpfinbnng be§ .^ranfen fiir bie (^efnnb^eit. 
 im.) 23. !J)a§ ©die! I)ilft benen, bie fid) felbft I)elfen. ((Sngel.) 
 24. ^d) (jordje Uergebeiig iljrer ©timme nnb i()rem fommenben 
 gnfstritt. (33o^.) 25. ^f^ fef}e bem ^obe rn!)ig, ober ijielme'^r 
 mit ftitlem ^erlangen entgcgen. (Sietatib.) 26. $DZid)eIangeIo§ 
 gamitie ge^iirte bem I)oI)en 5(bel ber ©tabt nid)t an. (^. @r.) 21. 
 S^Jur bnrd) bie bnnfle ^forte geljt man ber §eimat() [§eimatj 
 5n. (^oltt).) 28. 28er bem §en!er entlcinft, entlauft barnm bem 
 3:enfel nod^ nid^t. {<Bpx.) 29. SSertran bem gnten ©eift and^ in 
 ber fd^Ied^ten ©tnnbe. {md.) 30. (Sine innere S^^ot^menbigfeit 
 [^Zotmenbigfeit] treibt nn§, in attem nad) SSa^rl^eit 5n ftreben, 
 and) menu fie unferen S^eignngen nnb ^iinfc^en entgegenfte^t. 
 
358 EXERCISES. 
 
 (Sielanb.) 31. SBeld^ grci^li^em (Sntf^tuffe gibft bu ^aum ? {®.) 
 32. Qd^ m)e Q^nen ubvigeng nic^t S^iebe ju fte^eit, fonbern ©ie 
 mir. (Sinterfelb.) 33. ®ie 28a^rl)eit ()at ijon je^er nur ben 
 ©c^urfen \v^^ get^an. O^laten.) 34 i)e§ Seben§ ungentifi^te 
 greube Waxh feinem Qrbifc^en §u 3:^ei(. (®(^.) 35. SSer ift ein 
 ^ruber mir ? SDer in ber 92ot[) [9^otJ mir gn §ilfe fommt. (Berber.) 
 36. ©rofeen ©teinen ge^t jeberman au§ bemSBege. (§ippet.) SI. 
 IXnfer fc^neKeg (^Uic! I)at un§ bem §a6 ber SQ^enfc^en b(o§geftettt. 
 (@t^.) 38. 9^o(^ geftern fiinbigt' man ben ^ob euc^ an, unb ^eute 
 tt)irb enc§ plo^Ud) f old^e grei^eit ! {@ci^.) 39. ^em ^ater grau^^ 
 fet'§, er reitet gefc^minb. (®.) 40. (^nten erge^t e§ am (£nbe bod^ 
 gut. (@(^.) 41. (S§ 5iemt bem eblen Tlann, ber grauen SSort 
 p ad^ten. (®.) 42. SSie ge^t e§ bir benn ? SSie ge^t e§ benn 
 beinem $errn ^ater unb beiner gran SO^utter? (?canber.) 43. 
 Wxx ift'g, al§ t)orte t(^ bie Sinben tior bem genfter raufc^en. 
 (Corner.) 44. SSie tvaxh mir, aU ic^ in§ Qnnere ber ^irc^e trat ! 
 (@d£).) 45. ^er eine fprad^, tt)ie n)e§ iDirb mir! (^ei.) 46. 3(^ 
 T^abe mir im ©tiden getobt, nur meinen (Srinnerungen gu leben, 
 unb meinem ^inbe. (§et).) 47. (Sin r)eilenb S^raut mad^ft jeber 
 SSunbe. (9^ot)oU§.) 48. ®em SSerbrec^er gtan^en, mie bem ^eften, 
 ber 9J^onb unb bie ©onne. (@.) 49. (^aftfreunblid^ tout bem 
 SSanberer im frieblid^en ^orfe bie ^benbgtocfe. (^olbertin.) 50. 
 9^un aber !amen bem ^apfte gang anbere ^inge 5U O^ren. 
 (^. ®i'.) 51. 3:^ranen ftanben bem atten Tlanm in 'i)tn 5tugen, 
 oB er mit ^eftigen, bro^nenben ©c^ritten bie (^allerie t)erlieg. 
 (^auff.) 52. 5Im 24ften gebruar ujurbe bem ^aifer bie ^rone auf'§ 
 §aupt gefe^t. (^. ®r.) 53. (Seine gii^e trugen i^n tt)ie ein 
 n)atee§ ^ferb, bem ber S^leiter ben Qng^ti iiber ben §at§ ge^dngt 
 ^at i^etj.) 54. ^ie 9teife nac^ 9^om hot je^t bie ©elegen^eit, 
 bem neuen §errn au§ bem SSege 5U ge^en. (^. @r.) 55. Seic^t 
 fet bir ha§> §er5 ! (@d§efer.) 56. ©ie miffen nid^t, mie t)otl mir 
 ba§ §er5 ift. (^et).) 5t. (Sr ftort mid^, n)ei( id^ i^m bie 5Ingft 
 anfetje. (tod^.) 58. ^d^ jiiubete if)m fein Sid^t an, unb fteltte e§ 
 auf ben ^ifd^. (^etj.) 59. ©ei mir gegrugt, bu ett)ige§ SD^eer ! 
 tt)ie (Sprad^e ber §eimat^ [©cimat] raufd^t mir bein SSaffer. 
 (§et.) 60. (S§ fod im S^ieic^e !eine frembe ^ac^t mir SSurjet 
 faffen. (@d^.) 
 
EXEBCISES. 359 
 
 (223.) 1. SSerfteKung ift ber offenett ©eete fremb. (®(^.) 
 2. SSa[)r^cit ift ber ©eele notr)lt)enbig [notmenbig]. (^e[f.) 3. 
 !5)em iua()ren SSeltaieijen mu^ ber Zoh niemal§ fc^recfUc^ fetn. 
 (aJZeubel^siol)!!.) 4. ^ie §of(i(^!eit tuar bent ©blen, bent ^iirger tpie 
 bent ^auer gemein. (®.) 5. ^f}euer [teuer] ift mir ber greunb, 
 boc^ au6) ben geinb fann id^ nii^en. (@(^.) 6. (Sein §er5 ift 
 itidjt bent ^ol!e geneigt ; trarunt ift al(e SSett bent (^rafen (Sg- 
 mont fo ^oih ? (®.) 1. SSa§ i^n eu(^ inibrig tnac^t, ntad)t i^ 
 mir mertl) [mert]. (@d).) 8. 2)ent ntiiben SSanber^mann ift bod) 
 bie S^ac^t n)it(!ommen. (9?ucf.) 9. ®er tpeltregierenben SKadjt 
 ift !ein eingtger SD^ann unerfe^Iid^. (!i?e[f.) 10. 5lber ba^ tc^ mit 
 ber 3ett i^nt imentbe^rlid^ gen)orben bin, ift itic^t menig. (^e^.) 
 11. Penned) njurben bent Sf^eifenben bie 9}?eilen be§ SSegeg ju 
 lang. (?5rei.) 12. (S§ tDarb mir fc^mer, mid^ Don bem SSeibe Io§=s 
 §umac]^en. (®.) 13. Unfer §errgott !ann'g nid)t alien red^t 
 mac^en. (@pr.) 14. SSie fid^ ber Sut^ enblic^ umfa^ in ber nieb:= 
 rigen SDJanfarbe, marb'g it)m fd^mill unb fnrd^tbar, tt)ie in einer 
 3:obten!ammer [^otenfammer.] (^e^.) 15. (Sinen ^on an§ ber 
 ^e^te 5U bringen, mar mir nnmoglic^. (^eij.) 
 
 (225.) 1. 5(c^, mir ^nm glud^e mirb mein Sle^en er'^ort! 
 (@d^.) 2. Sr)iefer Untftanb, meldfjer bie SO^einigen in gro^e 9^ot^ 
 \j!flot] berfe^te, geriet^ jebod^ meinen 9[Ritbitrgern gum ^ort^eit 
 [^orteil]. m 3. mix gur Suft fi^uf er biefe (S^egenb gum 
 ^arabiefe. (@(^.) 4. §offnung ift Sabfal bem mnnbeften ©erjen. 
 ((S^atis.) 5. 3c^ bin ein Wiener bem ®ebot be§ altergro^ten 
 Wanm^. (@d^tegel.) 6. ^er loniglidje (Sinnefjmer blieb bem 
 SDoctor ber liebfte unb bertrautefte Umgang. (grei.) 1. §ei( htn 
 utibefannten, ^ot)eren 3Sefen, bie mir a^nen ! (®.) 8. 3Sef) bir, 
 t)ertaffene§, armes (Sd^iff! 2Se^ alten ^affagieren. (©run.) 9. 
 ®an! biefen freunblid^ griinen ^ciumen, bie meineg ^er!er§ 
 Tlamxn mir berfteden ! (@d^.) 
 
 THEME IX. 
 
 THE DATIVE. 
 
 1. Death lias robbed the king of all his children. 2. 
 He forgave him and gave him his hand. 3. This youth 
 has devoted himself to the service of God. 4. He op- 
 
360 EXEKCISES. ' 
 
 posed himself to the commands of the king, and now the 
 king has undertaken to punish him. 5. He who reconciles 
 his enemy to himself has done much. 6. I shall conquer 
 the world for myself, or I shall give it up entirely. 7. He 
 who opposes my commands shall not go from me alive. 
 8. He thanked me because I allowed him to see the pic- 
 tures. 9. In vain does one help those who do not help 
 themselves. 10. Nothing pleases him, and none can help 
 him. 11. I wish to be like this noble man, and I will fol- 
 low his example. 12. One cannot run away from death. 
 13. Trust not to others, but help yourself. 14. America 
 belonged formerly to the Spanish kings. 15. He came to 
 your help, and now you trust him no longer. 16. Health 
 has never been my portion. 17. It does not beseem a noble 
 man to explain himself to such a scamp. 18. I feel as 
 if I were* in a church. 19. How is she ? 20. How glad I 
 was when I heard of her happiness ! 21. Tears stood in 
 his eyes as he fell upon my neck. 22. The emperor's 
 head was cut off. 23. We hung a beautiful necklace 
 around the young girl's neck. 24. Quite other things 
 have come to my ears. 25. My heart is too full, I cannot 
 speak. 26. She lighted the old man's lamp and set it on 
 the table for him. 27. This man is quite strange to me. 
 28. To the true philosopher no one is indispensable, al- 
 though his friends are dear to him. 29. Politeness is 
 necessary for the nobleman as for the peasant. 30. The 
 way was too long for the weary wanderer, and it was hard 
 for him to reach the village. 31. It was impossible for 
 him to get away from the boy. 32. I was not inclined to 
 him, but with time he has become dear to me. 33. It was 
 hard for him to see about in the low mansard. 34. For 
 thy honor I have done it. 35. The need of his fellow- 
 citizens became an advantage for him. 36. Alas for me, 
 poor, weary wanderer ! 37. Thanks to my friends, who 
 even in danger remained true to me. 
 
 * See 332. 
 
EXEKCISES. 861 
 
 ILLUSTRATIVE SENTENCES XI. 
 THE ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 (227.) 1. @r t^at eintge frdftige ©c^Idge an bte feftgefugtc 
 §oft()ur. (§et).) 2. ©ie luoKten mic^ auc^ attetn fpred^en. (@c^.) 
 3. St ftirbt ben tangen 9[fiartertob. (Sietanb.) 4. Unb fo 5tef)et 
 ^inaug, t^r ^iingtinge, imb fcimpfet einen guten ^antpf nut gnten 
 SSaffen. (§et).) 5. ^fjrcinen filler ©eljnfnc^t mirft bu tneinen, 
 (@(f).) 6. (Er f^ldft ben ©(^laf be§ (^ererf)ten. (@pr.) t. 3a, 
 bu fonneft nocf) ben ©rant au§ ber (Seele mir. (9lu(!.) 8. (Sr^ebet 
 (^ott, ifjr ar^eere! ^rauft fein Sob! S^r giii^e, rauf^et e§ ! 
 (^leift.) 9. ©ie ntcfte i^m fii^I einen ®ru^ ^u, unb fat) mieber 
 bon i^m meg. (^et).) 10. (Sin §a^n frci^t ben 9[Rorgen n)ad§. 
 (9^u(!.) 11. ^^ mdfjnte nttd^ berlaffen t)on atler SSelt (6d^.) 
 12. ^u fd^iltft bic^ felbft, menu bu bein ^inb f(^t(tft ungejogen. 
 (9lucf.) 13. (Sr rief mit tecl^jenber 3i»^9e* ^ater, mic^ biirftet! 
 (^\op.) 14. (Sie fontmt Don i^rem ^faffen, er fprac^ fie aHer 
 (Siinben frei. (®.) 15. ®en SSotf getiiftete nac^ bem fetten 
 ^iffen. (®.) 16. Wif^ trunbert, ha'^ ic^ babei nid}t nod§ trdger 
 unb eitler gemorben bin. (^eij.) 1*7. ®§ biinft i^n, aU lag er 
 tm gieber. (®.) 18. 2)iefer ^ag biinfte i^m ber glorrei^fte 
 feineS Seben§. (®.) 19. (Sag an, mein ^flitter niertf) [niertj, tt)er 
 ^at bic^ folc^e ©treic^e gelefjrt? (Uf).) 20. ©leic^mo^I beto^te 
 ^eter biefen 99^ann, ttjeil er i^n eine ^unft lefjrte, metcf}e x^m 
 t)iet ^ergniigen ma(f)te. ((Sngclien.) 21. ©ie fonnen benfen, n>tc 
 i(^ iiberrafc^t tdax, aU er mir eine altlid^e SDame t)orfteEte, unb 
 fie feine ©ema^Hn nannte. (^aiiff.) 22. Wan nennt htn ©torc§, 
 tnegen feiner fflnijc unb ^efonnent)eit, ben $t)i(ofop§en unter hen 
 ^ogeln. (aJJaftug.) 23. Tlan ^ie§ i^n nur ben tapferen 2Ba{tt)ar, 
 bort liegt fein ^ut am DfJ^ein. (^feffel.) 24. SSd^renb biefer 
 grd^Iid^en SSocl^e ^orte er nid^t auf, fid) fetbft einen ^errdtf)er 
 [^errdterj ^u fc^elten. ((Sbers.) 25. (Sin (Sfel fdjimpft ben anberen 
 einen Sangor)ren. (@^r.) 26. ^einen 9^eimer mirb man finben, 
 ber ftc^ nid^t ben beften ^iette. (®.) 21. 9[^ad^e nid^t frf)nell 
 jemanben beinen Sreunb. (S:raubiu«.) 28. (Sr iuar ^um (^arbinat 
 gemad^t tt)orbentm Qa^re 20. (^. ®r.) 29. ^ud) hen ©Item ift 
 bie Qtxt rafd^ jur 6aae gemorben. (grct.) 30» (Sd^ergenb erfldrte 
 
S62 EXERCISES. 
 
 er x^n fiir fetnen ^efangenen, unb bertangte al§ Sofegetb ha§ 
 S8erfpre(^en, ein 33ilb fiir il)n gu malen. (^. (3x.) 31. ^\)x \)aU 
 mi(^ ftet§ al§ eine geinbtn nur betrac^tet. (@c^.) 32. SSa^Ie 
 nid^t bie glie^enbe jum greunb, nid^t bie ^letbenbe 5um geinb. 
 
 (229.) 1. ^a ic^ hen 3ftoman log bitt, fo 5«be ii^ tDieber gu 
 taufenb attbern ^ingen Suft. (®.) 2. (Sin laufenber geittb ift 
 feinen 6c^u^ $ult)er luert^ [inert], (^ip^el.) 3. SDie SDurc^^ 
 marfd^e ber granjofen mar man jmar getnoljnt. ((S.) 4. ^er $IRann 
 fonnte in einer SSiertelftunbe ^uxM fein ; ^ant njar e§ gufrieben. 
 (@^iet.) 5. 5nfo traten fie neOeneinanber in bo§ (Stiibd)en nnb 
 blieben beibe ben (^rn^ fd)ulbig." i^ct}.) 6. ©ttt)a§ iRaufd^ l^alt 
 trarm, unb ba§ ^ier ftnb iDir einmal getno^nt (^rei.) 
 
 (230.) 1. Qn biefer ganjen Qtit berlie^ bie ^od^ter fie 
 nid^t einen einjigen 3;:ag. (."pei?.) 2. ©ie blieb ben ^benb ftill nnb 
 feierlidf). (^^rei.) 3. ^jat fie mir nid§t nteineg S5ater§ Siebe fd^on 
 gefoftet? {^d}.) 4. ©o biele ©trome ^lut§ e§ ben SBarbaren 
 gefoftet \)aitt, emige ^onigreid^e in (Suropa gn griinben, fo biel 
 foftete e§ je^t i§ren d^riftlid^en 9^adf)!ommen, einige ©tabte in 
 (Sl)rien jn erobem. (@^.) 5. Qd^ fa^, ba§ er ein paar Mai bie 
 Sippen offnete, unb bann bod^ tt)ieber fd^tDieg. i^ttf.) 6. Siebe 
 ©^arlotte, fagte er, id^ tange ^eute feinen (Srf)ritt, atg nur ntit 
 S^nen. {^tt}.) 1. ©ie fc^erjen mutljig [mutig] :3l)re Qa^re (jin, 
 bi§ \>a^ ein ©lenb fommt, bann gittern Sie ben fReft ber ^age. 
 (Smmerman.) 8. ^a^re lang, S^^i^^i^^^^i^^^ ^^^Q> ^^<^9 ^^^ SJ^umie 
 bauern. (@c^.) 9. SSeifet bu no(^, tnie tt)ir einmal eine (Stunbe 
 lang iiber ben ©a^ ftritten, ber mir fo fe^r gefiel? (^eij.) 10. 
 ^a§> ungliidflicfie SSeib marb gefragt, inomit fie fid^ bie t)ier ^age 
 iiber genci^rt I)abe. (§umb.) 11. 'Sie reifen bie S^ac^t burd§, unb 
 fommen fd^on SJiorgen frii^. (^e^.) 12. ^en ^ergpfab ftieg id) 
 fteil l^inauf. (gbert.) 13. ©r ging mit unfid^eren, langfamen 
 (Sd^ritten ben SSeg ^inab. (^ei).) 14. 9}Junter fci^rt ber gro^e 
 ba^ 2ehtn ^inunter. {Zkd.) 15. §err (5kaf, e§ !ommt ein $aufe 
 \>a§> obere 3:%l ^inab. (U^.) 16. ^§> wax tt)enige S'l'^i^e ^^^^ ^^^ 
 franjofifd^en ^riege. (^etj.) IT. (Sine l^atbe ©tunbe barauf 
 ft)urbe bie ^pr t)on au^en geoffnet. (SBinterfelb.) 18. S5on ®o§s 
 lar ging id^ ben anberen SD^orgen ttjeiter. (-^e^.) 19. (^leid^ 
 
EXERCISES. S63 
 
 barauf trat hex ^ontg ein, tm §ut auf bent §aupte, ben ©tod 
 in ber §anb, offenbar nic^t in gutet Sanne. (^rei.) 20. ©tide 
 §offmmg im ©eficl^t, fa^ er ha attein. (>Sc^.) 21. ©in 5D^ann 
 fte^t oben, Iran! unb blag, bie §aare milb, bag 5Inge nag. (Sbert.) 
 
 22. Qc^ eile fort bor mir ben ^ag nnb I)inter mir bie S^ai^t, 
 
 ben §immet iiber mir nnb nnter mir bie SSetten. (®.) 23. ^anm 
 bie 5ingen au^gerieben, ^inber, tangtneilt i^r eucl^ fc^on. [&.) 24. 
 2)iefe§ gefagt, entblogte ber reblic^e ^ater bie ©c^eitel. (SSo§.) 
 25. SDiefeg nun. auf ben Sao!oon angemenbet, fo ift bie Urfac^e 
 !Iar. (2eff.) 
 
 THEME X. 
 
 THE ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 1. I wish to speak to thee; come with me. 2. Why do 
 yon weep such bitter tears ? Did he not die the death of 
 the righteous ? 3. I dreamed myself happy and gay; but 
 when I awoke, I found myself deserted and alone. 4. Why 
 does he scold the boy as rude ? He is a very good boy. 
 5. He was hungry, but he had nothing to eat. 6. Me- 
 thought I was lying* sick. 7. Who taught you this art ? 
 8. This old philosopher has taught me much, which gives 
 me pleasure. 9. They call her the most beautiful of 
 women, but she seems to me idle and vain. 10. Why did 
 he choose me for his friend if he did not trust me ? 11. 
 Now he reviles me as a betrayer, but I am nevertheless 
 true to him. 12. I still regard him as my friend, but 
 he has declared me his enemy. 13. War made me his 
 prisoner, but he always regarded me as a friend. 14. 
 Now that we are rid of the war, we shall have time for 
 other things. 15. They are accustomed to beer-drinkingf 
 and smoking, but we are tired of it. J 16. If he has read 
 my novel, I am contented. 17. He remained here only a 
 quarter of an hour. 18. It cost the Christians streams of 
 blood to conquer a few small cities in Syria. 19. The visit 
 cost me a whole day, but I shall visit her a couple of times 
 
 ♦833.3. t840. l^aBencefatt 
 
364 EXEBCISES. 
 
 more. 20. Slie was silent a moment, then she said: I will 
 not go a step, if you do not go along. 21. Thirty years did 
 the war last. 22. I climbed up the mountain and remained 
 an hour up there.* 23. They asked me where I had re- 
 mained over the hour. 24. A few moments after I saw 
 the man coming down the valley. 25. The next evening 
 I went away and on the seventh day I arrived at Goslar. 
 26. Hat in hand, he awaited the king. 27. On the moun- 
 tain stands the old, deserted house, the doors and windows 
 shut, the rooms empty, everything cold and sad. 
 
 XLLUSTRATiVJ!! SENTENCES XIL 
 MODAL AUXILIAEIES. 
 
 (253.) 1. ^ic 2:ugenb barf beg 9iu^me§ ntc^t. (SBterattb.) 
 2. (S^ott gebe mlr nur jeben ^ag fo t)iel ic^ barf ^um Seben. 
 (dlaubiug.) 3. !J)arf eine folc^e 93^enf(^enftimme f)ier ertbnen? 
 (®.) 4. ©ie ge^orten ju ber fetnereu %xt (t)on ©pielleuten), 
 tDxe fie fic^ aucl^ Dor giirftetx unb (^rafeu pren laffen burften. 
 ((Sbergj 5. Qd) moc^te gern reifen, aber ic^ barf in biefem 3af)re 
 ntc^t an§ 9^eifen ben!en. (®.) 6. 2)er (3ianb' ift etntg, irbifc^ ift 
 bie gorm; fie blirfen mx derbeffern, [a, mv foKen'§. (9Jaupac^.) 
 
 1. ^n einer fot(f)en ^afc^e barf fcf)on ein Soc^ fein, e§ fcitlt nic^t§ 
 ]^erau§. (^ebel.) 8. ^er (Sd^luiegerbater biirfte i^m nic^t iuieber 
 bor 5(ugen. {®.) 9. ^eine SD^etnung ift gefd^rlic^, fobalb ein 
 jeber bie feinige frei fagen barf. (3ocobi.) 10. (S§ biirfte Wo^l 
 fo fommen, tt)ie \^ gebad^t ^abe. (®..) 11. ©§ biirfte nid^t fcl^mer 
 fein, ha^ nac^5un)eifen. ((SJ.) 12. (£r erjafjtte ]i^ ©ef^id^ten, 
 tt)ie fein grennb SSerner i^n itberrafc^en !onnte, ha^ Waxmm 
 bielCeic^t erfc^einen biirfte. (®.) 
 
 (264.) 1. $8erad§tnng 1)ah^ ic^ nie ertragen fonnen. (®.) 
 
 2. Siebe granci^fa, icf) ^abe bi(^ nocl^ nii^t njillfommen l^eigen 
 fonnen. [^e\\.) 3. (Sin treuer "^atf) [^at], ein triiftenb SSort, 
 fann mand^e ^f)rdne trorfnen. (^ranj.) 4. !5)er Wlann Wax alt, 
 unb fa^ ju e^rnjiirbtg au§, al§ ha^ man btefen 5lu§brud^ beS 
 
 bort obcn. 
 
EXEECISES. 365 
 
 ©efu"^t§ ^cittc ISd^ertid^ ftnben fonnen. (^auff.) 5, S5et metuer 
 armen ©eele, ic^ !ann'§ bergeffeu I)aberi. (?eff.) 
 
 (266.) 1. ^'cin (Sacrament mag Seben bem ^obten tDteber^ 
 geben. (33.) 2. ®^e bie grau e§ ^inbern mod)te, ftie^ er mit 
 bem <Sd)mert fief) burc^ unb buret). (Sietaub.) 3. Si)ie Seute mogen 
 e§ immer iDtffen, ba^ id) nic^tS meljr Ijabe. Wf.) 4. (Sin e^r^ 
 ticker StRann mag fterfen in it)etd§em Slteib er mU, man mu^ i^n 
 lieben. (?eff.) 5. SSo^I mag e§ eud) beangftigen, ic^ glaub'g, t)Dr 
 eurem 9^id§ter ^u erfd)einen. (@c^.) 6. ^ie ^ogte troKen mir 
 tjerjagen unb bie feften ©cutoff er bre^en ; boc^, n^enn e§ fein 
 mag, o^ne ^lut. ('Sc^.) 7. (Sr moc^te au§ einem guten §aufe 
 fein. (?e[f.) 8. 3^^^^ ^eijj ic^ t)iel, bod) mod^t' id) alle§ tniffen. 
 {®.) 9. 3n biefer ^^uuft mbc^t' ic^ tva§> profitiren. (®.) 10. 
 5(uf bie ^erge mod^t' ic^ flicgen, mocl^te fe()'n ein griineg ^^at. 
 (^atler^Ieben.) 11. j[)em ^abe id) bitter tlnred)t get^an in meinem 
 ^ergen, ^ott mag e§ mir bergei^en! (^ouff.) 12. Qd^ tuiinfd^e 
 in gar Dielen 3fiiidfi(^ten, ha^ S^r SSatlenftein balb fertig merben 
 moge. (®.) 13. 5((le gro^en ©ebaube t)erfallen mit ber Qeit, fie 
 mbgen mit ^unft ober o'^ne ^unft gebaut fein. {2c\l) 14. !5;)arum 
 mag, ma§ mid unb !ann, gefd^e^en. (®.) 15. ^eine ^^orr)eit, 
 tt)ie unfc^ulbig fie auc^ fein mag, faun einen gteibrief gegen ben 
 ©pott berlangen. (Sielanb.) 
 
 (256.) 1 . §eut' milffen (Sie mir geftatten, ha'^ auc^ id^ ben 
 Sf^itt mitmad)e. (^rei.) 2. SSiber SSiHen mugte id^ ftet)en bleiben, 
 unb i^r nad)ftarren. (.Corner.) 3. ^n feinem §aufe mu^te alle§ 
 folib unb maffit) fein. (@.) 4. ©in fpanifd^er ,^onig mugte ein 
 red^tgtaubiger ^4^rin§ fein, ober er mu^te bon biefem ^^rone 
 fteigen. {Bd}.) 5. (S§ mu^te nid^t tiieteg barin fte^en, benn fie 
 ttJar im 5lugenblide p (Snbe. (^rei.) 6. ®a§ let^te ^atte Tlon^ 
 bragon auf ,^efe^t be§ §er5og§ t)on ^Itba erbauen miiffen. (@c^.) 
 t. ^i§ je^t mu^t' icf), ber ©rbprinj (Spanien^, in (Spanien ein 
 grember fein. (@ci^.) 8. ^d) mufs Iad)en, menu id) an hen ^on 
 ber Unfe^Ibarfeit benfe, mit bem er fprad). (Sietanb.) 
 
 (267.) 1. ^er partner ^at beftod^en n:)erben fotlen. (@d^.) 
 2. SSer ha§> 9le^te !ann, ber foil e§ mollen. (®.) 3. SS)ie ^or= 
 traitmaler fotten nid^t blo§ barftellen, lt)ie fie einen SD^enfc^en 
 faffen, fonbern Vok jeber i^ faffen miirbe. (®.) 4. ^a^ einfad^ 
 
366 EXERCISES. 
 
 (Sd^one foil ber* tenner fcl^a^en. (®.) 5. tlnb !am^ bte ^bUt 
 fclber in bie ©c^ranfen, ntir foil ber SD^utt) [$D^utJ ntc^t tDeic^en 
 unb nicl^t tt)an!ett. (@(^.) 6. Qc^ gtng iljn gu befui^en, ireil ic^ 
 l^offte, er folle ntir^elfen. (@.) 1. SDanfenb pret§^ id^ metneg 
 ®otte§ (^nabe, ber nicl^t getuoUt, ha^ id^ p eueren SiiB^it fo 
 liegen foUte, tt)te iljr jeljt gu meinen. (@c^.) 8. (S^ fte^t in ben 
 ©ternen gefd^rieben, ha^ Wix atte ^eibe nid^t fi|en bleiben f ollen. 
 (^e^.) 9. (Sin glorreid^er (Smpfang foEte bent jnngen ©ieger 
 bereitet merben. ((Sberg.) 10. S)a Wax e§, tt)o icf) bie gro^e (Snt= 
 bedung nia^te, bie fiirmein gan§e§ Sebenber^angni^Dott trerben 
 f ottte. (^e^.) 1 1 . (Soil einft bie S^ad^melt bid^ mit ©egen nennen, 
 mngt bu ben glnd^ ber S^^itluelt tragen fonnen. OJoupad^.) 12. 
 SDie (£f)axlottt ^aih, ^or' i^, fott n)ir!lic^ in (S^efa^r fein, blinb 
 gu tDerben. (@c^.) 13. (g§ ftammt au§ bem Dlac^Ia^ be§ $tu^ 
 tard^, tct) fann e§ bert)eifen, unb e§ f oK ein ©efcC)en! be§ ^aifer^ 
 Trajan fein. ((Sberg.) 14. ^er ^apfere flreitet fiir ha^ dtt6:)t, 
 fiir ha^ ^eje^, fiir (^ott, unb f ottte e§ fein auf Sebenunb (Sterben. 
 (Sofobg.) 
 
 (258.) 1. Wan mu§ nid^t reid^er fd^einen tt)oIten, al§ man 
 ift. (eeff.) 2. SSitt man einen ^egriff bon ber ^^unft motto' ^ 
 unb feiner ©d^iiter l^aben, fo mu| man ha^ (l^ampofanto bon 
 ^ifa betreten. {^. ®r.) 3. ^(i) felbft moUte fie bitten, mir einigc 
 9[^inuten ju fd^enfen. (^rei.) 4. $8iele be^aupten, baf? fie fid^ 
 nad^ 9[^ontmartre 5uriidEge5ogen ^abe, tt)o man fie nod^ im Sa'^re 
 It 60 gefe^en ^aben tuill. (3fc^o!.) 5. ^Iber \va§> finb benn ha^ 
 fiir SDienfte, bie ber SSirtl) unferem §errn 3)?aJDr tviU ertniefen 
 l^aben ? ($?ef|.) 6. (Sr blieb n)ieber einige 5lugenblidfe fte^^en, tok 
 einer ber einfd^Iafcn mill, (^rei.) 1. ®u riffeft mid^ bon ber 
 ^er^meiflung lo§, bie mir bie 8inne fd^on jerftoren mollte. (®.) 
 
 (259.) 1. ©0 meit ge^t niemanb, ber nid^t mug. (@c^.) 2. 
 golge il)m millig unb fro!) ; millft bu nid^t folgen, bu mugt. 
 (C)erbcr.) 3. Qeber mill gem leben, fattg er nur biirfte. {% % 5ft.) 
 4. ^u gel^ft nun fort; o §einrid§, fount' x^ mit! (@.) 5. Qd^ 
 mitt nidt)t in§ Sodt), ic^ mitt fort unb bi§ uf) fort !ann, fottft bu 
 mid^ berftedfen. (gret.) 6. S5ormart§ muf5t bu, benn riicfmart§ 
 fannft bu je^t nid^t me^r. (©d^.) 1. Wtxn $ferb fc^eute, mie td^ 
 5um @d^(ogt§or l^erein itiottte. (®.) 8. SBo fott td^ l^in ? Qd^ faun 
 
EXERCISES. 367 
 
 \>odj mcE)t betteltt ge^en. (?eanber.) 9. SHwd) bcr atte (^lauBeng* 
 fafe, bag ©ebeti* feliger fei, aU ^Mjmtn, tPoEte mtr nte in htn 
 ^opf. (§et).) 10. (Sie fann nidjt burcf) unb mag nic^t guriic!. {@c^.) 
 11. 2Ba§ foil ntir ha^? SSo^u fott bag alTeg ? ((S.) 12. 2Sa§ 
 fonnte fie aud^ bafiir, baf? id) nidjt auc^ ber 9J?utter ai)nlicr) fa^. 
 (|)e^.) 13. ^a§ :^atte er gar nid}t gefonnt, aud^ njenn er gemoKt 
 l^atte. (?aube.) 14. ^d) !ann bie (Srsie^er nid^t loben, bie f oId)C 
 (S^egenftanbe nid)t Dor i()reu 5lugeu tiertjeimlic^ten. Um S3cr5ei5^ 
 ung ! tt)ie fatten fie \)a^ foKen ? unb trie l)dtten fie e§ gefonnt ? 
 (®.) 15. 92id)t beinen 5Irm btog trill id), and) bein ^uge. (@t^.y 
 16. SSolten ©ie tt)ieber einen $Iat^ in meinem (S:Dntoir, ober 
 n)oIIen ©ie, tt)ie e§ ben 5Infc^ein ^at, noc^ mel)r? (^ret.) 11, ^s^ 
 l^abe bie 9}?enfc^en nie tierftanben imb noc^ tDeniger beneibet, 
 bie eine 5Irt (SI)re barein fe^en, gu fagen : magft bu mi^ ttid)t, 
 mag id^ bid^ au^ nid^t ! (§e^.) 
 
 THEME XL 
 
 MODAL AUXTLIAHIES. 
 
 1. May these players aj^pear before you ? 2, I should 
 like to see the players, but I must not think of it. 3. No 
 one is allowed to tell his opinion freely to the king. 4. 
 "Who dares try to improve the laws ? 5. It may be as you 
 say, but it will be hard to prove it. 6. I have never been 
 able to advise him. 7. "Who could think such an outbreak 
 of feeling laughable ? 8. I may possibly have seen him al- 
 ready. 9. He may be rich, but he is not an honorable man. 
 10. I should like to appear soon before my judge, but, if 
 it may be, not alone. 11. I should like to do him no wrong, 
 but I do not want to see him. 12. I do not demandf to see 
 the queen, however beautiful she may be. 13. The French 
 have driven out their emperor, may God forgive them for 
 it ! 14. To-day I must read your Wallenstein, J whether it 
 be finished or not finished. 15. I was obliged to allow 
 
 840. t barnac^; 346.2. % A play by Schiller. 
 
368 EXEKCISES. 
 
 him to read my new book. 16. We had to take the ride 
 too, or to stay at home alone. 17. I could not help weep- 
 ing when I saw the poor Spanish prince. 18. He cannot 
 have been an orthodox prince, for he was obliged to de- 
 scend from the throne. 19. This painter had to paint his 
 portrait on command of the king. 20. Everything in his 
 house ought to have been massive and solid, for he was 
 very rich. 21. He ought to love the right, but he does 
 fiot. 22. This portrait painter shall paint me a portrait 
 of my wife. 23. Every rich man ought to cherish art 
 and to help artists. 24. I was to have visited you, but 
 I could not. 25. How am I to make a great discovery? 
 26. If I am to paint his portrait, he must visit me every 
 day. 27. The young victor is, I hear, in great danger. 
 28. The gardener is said to have been bribed. 29. If 
 I am to believe his story, he must prove it. 30. I must 
 have the Plutarch, even if it should be very dear. 31. I 
 do not wish to appear richer than I am. 32. We wanted 
 to help her, but we did not want to give her money. 33. 
 She claims to have eaten nothing to-day. 34. The land- 
 lord claims to have given her something, but we cannot 
 believe what he says. 35. We must help her, even if she 
 should deceive us. 36. I was on the point of giving her 
 something when you came. 37. We gave her something, 
 for we had to. 38. You may go with him, but I may not 
 (go) too. 39. What am I (to do) here ? 40. I cannot (go) 
 back and I am not allowed (to go) forward. 41. I should 
 like (to go) into the house, but we must (go) away. 42. 
 If you like tho horse, I will give it to you. 43. I should 
 like to praise your teacher, but I cannot. 44. I dare not 
 (go) away, although I want to. 45. I do not like him and 
 he does not like me. 46. Do you know English ? 47. I 
 do not know it and I do not like it. 
 
EXEECISES. S6& 
 
 ILLUSTRATIVE SENTENCES XHX 
 THE PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 (279.) 1. Sf^ingg urn i§n i^er tuurbe gemeitit, gefungen imb 
 gebetet, aljer 5lntinou§ \a^ unb ^orte nic^tg t)on attebem. ((Sber§.) 
 2. (Sine SSelt fi^mtngt fi(^ in etrigen ^reifen urn bie anberen. 
 5(uf jeber mirb gefcimpft iinb gerungen unb geliebt unb ge^offt. 
 (^od^.) 3. SSo mx erfd^ienen unb pocfjten an, luarb nic^t gegriifet 
 nocl^ aufget^n. {B^.) 4. ^i§ gum le^ten ^lut^tropfen n)irb 
 gefcimpft. (^. ®r,) 5. Qn Seipgig tear (^d beina^e tobt [tot] 
 gefc^Iagen tnorben. (®rube.) 
 
 (280.) 1. ^(m 10. 9hit)em()er 1483 n^arb p (^i§Ieben etnem 
 ormen ^ergmanne §an§ Sntf)er ein ©o^ntein geboren, ba§ am 
 folgenben 3:age getauft unb 9Jiartinu§ genannt luurbe. (@rube.) 
 2. Hub tt)ie bie fittlic^en, fo luaren bem ^oI!e and) bie geiftigen 
 gortjc^ritte auf bie) em SScge Derfagt. (®ermnu§,) 3. Unb fo 
 raarb mir ha§> SSerfprec^en abgenommen, ha^ id) nac^ 9l)tain§ fot* 
 gen fottte. (®.) 4. .^cilt er bie 9[)Zebai((e fiir ci^nlid^, bie Arbeit 
 fiir gut, fo ift tjielleicl^t ber Pal^ fiir SSittig gefunben unb ber 
 ^unftfc^ule unb bem jungen Tlanm gebient. ($?en)alb.) 
 
 (281.) 1. Wan ^cilt micf) ^ier gefangen, toiber attc SSolfer* 
 re^te. (@(^.) 2. gur tobt [tot] X)oh man mid) auf. (@.) 3. ©§ 
 flingelte, bie 3^f)iir offnete fic^, bie ^ertr)anbtfd)aft erfc^ien. (^rei.) 
 
 4, (So iDeit mar id^ geftern gefommen, al§ man mic^ abrief. (®.) 
 
 5. §ier giinbete fid) frol) ha§> fd^one Sid^t ber SBiffenfd^aft, be§ 
 freien j[)en!en§ an. (®.) 6. 5lu§ ©tiefeln mac^en fid) leic^t ^an^^ 
 toffeln. m 
 
 (282.) 1. 3d^ iDerbe eben gum SRittag^effen gerufen. {@d^.) 2. 
 gerrara marb, mit 9fiom unb mit glorenj, t)on meinem ^ater 
 t)iel gepriefen. (®.) 3. ^nrc^ eine l^intere ^forte fii'^r' id^ end), 
 bie nur burci) einen Wann tiert^eibigt [tierteibigt] njirb. (@^.) 
 4. Seonarbo'g (SJemcitbe im ©aale be§ ^a(afte§ ift nie boHenbet 
 iDorben. {^. ®r.) 5. Dttilie erinnerte fic^ jebeg SSorte^, n)a§ ge* 
 fproc^en marb. (®.) 6. Wx^t e^er benf ic^ biefe§ ^att ju 
 brauc^en, bi§ eine '^f)ai get^an ift, bie untt)ibcrfter)Iid) ben §odf|* 
 berrat^ [^oc^uerrat] bejeugt. {^^.) 7. SDie ^ud)bructer!unft 
 
370 EXERCISES. 
 
 ttjar fd^on iiber ^unbert ^a^re erfunben; beffenungead^tet erfi^ieti 
 ein ^uc^ nod^ al§ em §eiltgeg. (@.) 8. SDer ^rief tft ja er* 
 l&rod^en 1 S)a§ !ann mo^I fein. (S?e[f,) 
 
 THEME Xn 
 THE PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 1. When I was in Europe there was fighting in France. 
 
 2. Wherever we appeared there was singing and dancing. 
 
 3. On the 12th of August the Pope was found dead in his 
 bed. 4. Luther is called the greatest son of Germany. 
 6. The right of preaching* was denied him by the 
 Pope, and he was called an enemy of God. 6. If he 
 goes to Leipzig he will be killed. 7. He was told that 
 there was fighting in Leipzig, but he would go. 8. A 
 place was found for Wittig in the art school, and he was 
 helped f . 9. The place was given him because his work 
 was considered good. 10. The door opened and I was called 
 away. 11. This medal was given my father by the artist, 
 and it has been much praised. 12. The painting was be- 
 gun by Leonardo, but it was never finished by him. 13. 
 Science and free thought were denied to the people. 14. 
 He was led through a back door into the hall of the palace. 
 15. The letter had been found in his hands, but it had not 
 been broken open. 16. The painting had been finished 
 before Leonardo went to Rome. 17. When the child was 
 baptized, the relations appeared. 
 
 ILLUSTRATIVE SEKTENOES XIV. 
 REFLEXIVES. 
 
 (286-87.) 1. ©ine m^ ber anberen alfo berl^etrat^eten [*ra* 
 teten] ftd^ aHe i^re Sugenbfreunbinnen. {^et}.] 2. (S§ ftredft fid^ 
 eine ©kite bt§ m^ ^inttuerp. (@d^.) 3. 2)od^ toie Derge^t ft^ 
 
 * 845. t babur(i^ ge^olfeiu 
 
EXERCISES. 371 
 
 ^rant unb (Se^nen; id) \mu}k mic^, an btc^ §u fd^reiden. 
 ((Sottj^eb.) 4. @§ ^nben bie ^rogen biefer SSelt fid) ber (Srbe be^ 
 mac^tigt. (@rf).) 
 
 (288.) 1. X^onnt'* ic^ boc^ in beinem ^^au gefunb tnic^ hattnl 
 (®.) 2. Qf^ ttjitt mid) frci unb gliidlic^ traumen. {<B6).) 3. ^a 
 mitt id^ mid^ mieber gefunb ober t)ottig rafenb gaffen. (®.) 4. 
 DZiemanb fc^Inmmert ftc^ fromm. (@^r.) 5. ^e§ ©onntag^ in 
 ber 9[Rorgenftunbe mie rtianbert'^ fid) am D^^ein fo fc^on. {aRiilter.) 
 6. S3on eurer ga^rt fe^rt'^ fid) nic^t immer it)ieber. (@cf|.) 7. ©S 
 giemt fi(^ nic^t, ba§ ic^ bcin ©(^ulbner bin. ($?e[f.) 
 
 (289.) 1. ^(^ erinnere niic^ mit grenben meiner ^ngenb. (®j 
 2. ©T ttjnnberte fid) aucl^ iiber hm Sauf ber SSelt, benn er ^atte 
 bie ganje franjbfifc^e 9f^et)oIution eriebt. {^xtl) 3. Qd^ f)aht 
 mic^ iibcr gernon)'^ 5tu§fef)en mirffid) erfc^roden, fo t)eraltet er^ 
 fd)ien er mir. {Bd}.) 4. ^ein (Sf)renmann mirb fid) ber ©c^mac^ 
 bequemen. (@d).) 5. ®er red^te ©c^iiler lernt au§ bem ^e!ann= 
 ten ha^ Unbefannte entmideln, unb na^ert fid) bem ^Zeifter. (@.) 
 6. ^6) tvxii mid^nic^t ber 9k(^enfc^aft entjie^en; bie 9fiid)ter finb 
 e§ nur, bie ic^ t)erlDerfe. {Bd).) 
 
 (290.) 1. ©n innger Slater n)iinfc^t fid) ai^aufe. (@pr.) 2. ^c^ 
 ^aht mir biefen 9[)tenfd)en ^um ^iele gemac^t, ^ah^ mir t)orge=s 
 fe^t, i^n nid^t auf5ugeben, alfo r)ab' id) if)n gerni^. (@(^.) 3. 
 28ag fid^ ber ^ett getraut, ha^ fonntet Q^r nic^t magen ? {B^,) 
 
 ILLUSTRATIVE SEnSTTENCES XV. 
 IMPEESONALS. 
 
 (292.) 1. D lt)ie ift e§ tali gcn)orben, unb fo traurtg, ob^ unb 
 leer ! {^aUtx^khtn.) 2. ©§ regnet ! (^ott fegnet bie ©rbe, bie fo 
 burftig ift. ((Snslin.) 3. ^er SSinb ge'^t fait unb mic^ froftelt 
 burd^ ben ^elj. (^rei.) 4. Wit ben 3fif)^^e^i Q^^^H ^^ ^^^' ^^^ 
 ^anbe dottig §u Ibfen. (§um.) 5. $D^ir o^nt ein ungliidffeliger 
 51ugenblicf. (@(f|.) 6. §einrid^, mir grant t)or bir! (®.) 1. 
 ^o^nen f fie un§, eg reuet fie morgen. (Sielanb.) 8. ^id) hixnlt, 
 
 * 831.2. t332.1d. 324.4. 
 
372 EXEECISES. 
 
 icl^ tuet^ a\i§> metd^en gefjieru uufeve ^ugenb feimt. ($!eff.) 9. 
 ^ief baiiert mid^ euer. (35oB.) 10. (Sie finb ungerec^t, ttienn ©ie 
 eineti fotd^en ^erbacl)t au^fpredjen, unb mir 5iemt nic^t, i§n ^u 
 ertragen. (^^ret.) 11. ^ud) braucl)te e§ eigeutiid) immer ^wti 
 SKeufcl^en, eiiien, ber'g jd^e, unb eiiien, ber'g befc^rieOe.* (®.) 12. 
 3e^t treibt e§ mic^ unmiberfte^Iic^ in ^i)xc 9Jd§e, unb id) mu^ 
 S^nen fagen, tDte ey in mir au^fie^t. (^rei.) 13. W\v i)at 'oon 
 biefen Sl^bnigen unb ©(^(ac^ten unb Sl^riege^t^aten nur getrdumt. 
 (@d^.) 14. 5ll§ er mieber in bag §e(Ie trat, gidnjte e§ feud)t in 
 feinen 5tugen. (^ret.) 15. ®em 9}liiffiggdnger fel)!! eg ftetg an 
 8eit sunt ^f)un. (^iicf.) 16. SSenn e§ Hopft, fo !ann eg ein @Idu= 
 biger jein. (@berg.) It. §orc^, 9}?art()e, braufjen po(^t eg ! (®eibl.; 
 18. (Sinen fiirc^terlic^en JftMeg giOt eg. {®.) 19. 5(u(^ im Sager 
 gibt eg ber braDen SDtdnner genug. (^d^.) 20. 5([ier einen f(^o^ 
 neren (§engft) faun eg nidjt geben, rief ber ^rinj. (@ber«.) 21. 
 SOfJir tt)ar eg ©rnft niit meiner ©eligfeit. (@c^.) 22. 2Bem ju 
 tDoI}! ift, ben getliftet immer nac^ ncuen ^ingen. (3. ^r.) 23. 9^un 
 tv\x]i bu begreifen, n)ie mir tvax, aU ic^ nac^ Saf)ren ber ^ren- 
 nung if)n guerft mieberfa!^. (^e^.) 24. Wix ift 5U SOZut^e [3[I^ute], 
 begann ber doctor, alg mdre ic^ r)ier nicl^t fremb. (grei.) 25. 
 Wix ift, atg oO id) bie §dnbe auf g §aupt bir legen foUt' ! (^et.) 
 26. SSie tvaxh mir, alg ic^ in'g ^nnere ber ^iri^e trat ! (®c^.) 
 21. 5Iug (S^oburg mirb gefc^rieben, ha^ bie granjofen in tnenig 
 ^agen barin einriiden merben. (@(^.) 28. ®cnn gcmalt tt)urbe 
 in ^enebig tt)ie iiberalt ancT^ im fitnf5el)nten 3ar)rr)unbert. (^. ®r.) 
 29. SSir bebattiren [==tieren] iiber ben ^egriff beg D^ec^teg nnh ha 
 tt)irb juraeilen orbentlic^ berniinftig gefprDd)en. (@d).) 30. Wtvi\]t* 
 eg fo rafc^ gel^orc^t fein? ((^(^.) 
 
 (294-95.) 1. (^g Idfet fid) im ©injelnen iiber bie ©c^rift 
 nic^tg fagen. (@d^.) 2. ^g mu^te ein anberer 3Seg gefunben 
 merben. (^. ®r.) 3. ©g tvax ber S^^iefe ©otiatf) ein ganj gefd^r- 
 lid^ SO^ann. (Staiibiug.) 4. ®g r)at if)n nie in bie grembe gejogen. 
 (33of)tau,) 5. (5g foU mic^ trunbern, mag biefeg ^u(^ eigentlid^ 
 ent^alten mirb. [^06).) 6. ©g furd^te f bie (Spotter t)a§> Wltn^ 
 fd^engef c^te^t ! m 
 
 •332.5(2. t331.c 
 
EXEECISES. 373 
 
 THEME Xm. 
 
 REFLEXIVES AND IMPEESONALS, 
 
 1. She did not dare to take that way. 2. The en- 
 emy have gained possession of the whole city. 3. This 
 man has worked himself dead tired. 4. The poor old 
 woman dreams herself young and beautiful again. 5. 
 Do you remember the morning hour when we wandered 
 together by the Rhine ? 6. We were wondering about 
 your journey. 7. He drew near to me, and I rejoiced in 
 his friendly words. 8. He was really frightened at the 
 news, for ho remembers the French Eevolution, and he 
 fears to experience another. 9. I do not trust myself to 
 write to him. 10. I wish for myself no better judge than 
 he is. 11. When we went out it was raining, and later it 
 snowed. 12. It became cold and he was chilly. 13. I am 
 horrorstruck at his treason, but I am deeply sorry for 
 him. 14. You will regret having spoken out such a sus- 
 picion. 15. It is not suitable for me to describe it to you. 
 
 16. You have certainly not seen that; you have dreamed it. 
 
 17. I pity the poor king, but I pity more his unhappy 
 l^eople. 18. There is need of several good men in the camp, 
 for there is always a lack of soldiers. 19. There was knock- 
 ing, and Martha went to the door. 20. How she felt when 
 she saw him again ! 21. She felt as if he were not a stran- 
 ger to her. 22. There are many who debate over the idea 
 of right, but there are few who understand it. 23. There 
 was no one who spoke sensibly about it. 24. In the church 
 there was singing and praying, and I felt as if I must sing 
 too. 25. It was told him that he must obey quickly, 
 
 26. It delights me to hear what he says about the writing. 
 
 27. I wonder what is written from France. 
 
 ILLUSTRATIVE SENTENCES XVL 
 PERSON AND NUMBER. 
 
 (321.) 1. SSir oben unb tfir unten fotteu ein0 fein tn bcr 
 Stebe. (®5rre«0 2. ^a^ tarn e0 mix nun ^elfen, ^a^ bu unb 
 
374 EXEKCISES. 
 
 mein SSater emft greunbe ttjaren ? (?eff.) 3. ^rin§ ^arto§ unb 
 i(^ begegnen biefett TOttag itn§ tm SBorgemad^ ber ^onigtn. (®d^.) 
 4. 2)er ha unb i(^, tDtr ftnb au§ (Sger. (@(^.) 5. D bu, ber bie 
 ^tmmet fd^uf ! (Mop.) 6. ^u, ber auf ben SSoIfen t^ront in 
 ber ^1a6)t (5lrnbt.) t. SStr anberen, ble \vh t)on ber ^efettfd^aft 
 Qb^ngen, mliffen un§ nac^ i§r bilben. (®.) 8. SSciret i^r auii) 
 bei un§, bie i^r mic^ feme liebt: o fo bauten mir ^ier §)iitten ber 
 greunbfci^aft un§. (Mop.) 
 
 (322.) 1. (Sr fomo^I at§ ber ^erjog jeigten fi(^ milbe nnb 
 5ugangli(^. (^. @r.) 2. (£in §arfner mit feiner ^oc^ter gingen 
 t>or mir ^er. (®.) 3. D^ic^t Siebe bto^, au(^ 3orn unb $eftig= 
 !eit trdgt eine bunfle ^inbe bor ben 5Iugen. (O^tenfd^Iager.) 4. 
 9Zoc]^ ©tanb, nod^ filter tt)irb gefpart. (SBielanb.) 5. ©efa^r 
 unb $rei§ unb aud^ ber fRu^m fei mein. (®.) 6. (Sd^on^eit, 
 9^eid^tl)um [Dteid^tum], ®f)r' unb dJladjt finft mit ber B^it in 
 obe D^ac^t. (33o§.) t. ^aneben tvo^nt bie fromme ^ilgerfd^aar. 
 (®.) 8. ^arauf fam be§ 3Sege§ eine d^riftenfc^aar, bie auc^ 
 guriicfgebtieben mar. (U^.) 9. (Sin ^rupp SKdnner ftanb am 
 ®ren§ftein. {$vtl) 10. (Sine 5ln5a5I (Solbaten fatten fid§ ge= 
 fe^t. (®.) 11. 3c§ griff fogleicb nad^ bent ^eutel, in melc^em 
 eine gute 9[^enge ((S^olbftiicfe) fic^ befanben. (®.) 12. ©in 
 l^alb §unbert foId)er ^emerfungen madden einen ^^^ilologen. 
 (geff.) 13. ^a fommen ein $aar au§ ber ^iidje. (@(^.) 14. ^a§ 
 finb meine Sflid^ter. (^c^.) 15. ©§ maren nur ^unbert 3:^aler, 
 fagte ber ^tlte. {^xtl} 16. ^a, ha^ tnaren bie 5(ugen, bie treuen, 
 flaren ^ugen, bie er t)or()er gefe^en. (@piel.) 17 (Sure foniglid^e 
 SO^ajeftat finb au^er fic^, unb fc^einen tief bemegt. (@(f|.) 18. 
 (Suer (Sjceffen^ ^aben 3^re ^ienerfd^aft iiberrafc^t. (®.) 19. ^er 
 gerr ^ebodma^tigte l^aben bie le^ten 9^ad§te tt)enig gefc^tafen, 
 fagte ^art (^ret.) 
 
 THEME XIV. 
 
 PEESON AND NUMBER. 
 
 1. He and I will help you, for we were friends of your 
 father. 2. I, who am poorest of all, cannot help you. 3, 
 
EXERCISES. 375 
 
 • 
 Charitable man, thou who helpest every one, help me also. 
 4. You and the prince are to * meet me to-morrow in the 
 ante-chamber of the queen. 5. The Duke and Prince 
 Charles went into the hall first; my father and I followed 
 them. 6. The king and queen met us and showed them- 
 selves kind and gracious. 7. Beauty, riches, and friend- 
 ship have deserted me, but my self-respect I have not lost. 
 8. A troop of pilgrims met us on the way. 9. A crowd of 
 men had remained behind, and a pair of them had seated 
 themselves. 10. A couple of gold pieces were found in 
 the bag after he had gone. 11. There were a number of 
 gold pieces in the bag when I gave it to him. 12. Those 
 were the thalers which the old woman gave me. 
 
 ILLUSTRATIVE SENTENCES XVIL 
 TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE. 
 
 (324.) 1. ^a§ Staffer raufc^t^ \>a§> SSoffer f^moU, etn gifd^er 
 fag baran. . . . Unb tt)ie er fi^t, imb mie er laufc^t, t^eilt [teilt] 
 fid^ bie S^ut^ [glut] empor ; au§> bent betregten SSaffer raufd^t 
 em feuc^teg SSeiO IjerDor. (®.) 2. 5(B ii^ ^ai)n mir mac^e 
 burcl^g ©etrii^I, ha tritt ein bxaim' ^o^emeriDeib mtc^ an, fagt 
 mic^ in§ 5(uge fc^arf unb fpridjt. (@d^.) 3. ®te trauernbe ®er^ 
 mania fragt feit Sa^ren, wami fo(( bie red^te Qt'it fommen. {%xtl) 
 4. Qc^ liebe ^^thha felt ^mx Qa^ren, feitbem icl^ fie juerft in ©. 
 fennen lernte. (®^te(.) 5. ©ie fennen mic^ bort feit Uielen Sal)- 
 ren aU einen reblic^en ^iirger. (^^ret.) 6. 9}Zorgen ift fie meine 
 gran unb iibermorgen ge^e \^ mit i^r fort. {$?e[f.) 1. 5lbcr id^ 
 ge^e ^erum, fie aufjufuc^^en, unb fomme mieber, fobatb ic^ fie 
 finbe. (®.) 8. ®a§ (Sct)tog erfteigeu U^ir in biefer 9lac()t, ber 
 ©d^liiffet bin id) mad)tig. SflMr ermorben bie filter, reifjen 
 bic^ au§ beincr Slammer. {@(^.) 9. 33erlag bic^ barauf, fagte 
 er, ic^ fomme eud) nac^. (^etj.) 
 
 (325.) 1. Unb alg i^ traurig burrf) bie (Sale ging, ha fa^ id^ 
 ^erjog §anfen in einem ^xttx tx)einenb fte^n.f {®(^.) 2. (Seit 
 
 *iotten. t 343.1.5, 
 
376 EXEECISES. 
 
 o(^t ^agen unb langer fel^tte e§ ntir fotDo'^t an Suft unb Sonne 
 al§ an ^efunb^eit jn meinen ^efcf)aften. (@d^.) 3. S)er gmeitc 
 (Sto(f be§ ^orber^anfeg mar feit Dielen Sci^t:en nnbeltjo^t. 
 f^ret.) 4. SSa§ er f^un tDottte an biefem ^age, ftanb jeit SD^ona^ 
 ten tt)ie eine nnabanbertic^e S^of^ttjenbigfeit [9^ottt)enbig!eit] t)or 
 feiner ©eete. (^eij.) 5. ^er giii^ft nac^^er berfc^affte mir in bret 
 ^agen, it)a§ tc^ gn SSien in brei^ig nid^t eriangte. (@c^.) 6. (Sr 
 felbft bertraute mir, tva§> id^ gmar langft anf anberem 2Beg fd^on 
 in (Srfa^rnng brac^te. ('Sd^.) 
 
 (326.) 1. (£r fommt ntir nic^t juriic!, tnie er gegangen. {^dj.) 
 2. ^ie Hcicfje gran au§ ber grembe ift in bcr Slac^t geflorben. 
 (^rei.) 3. SSag ic^ tjermoc^te, ^ah' id) gent getf)an. (Bdj.) 4. 
 ®a ^aben ^ingemorfne SSorte tnid^ bele^rt, ba^ feine ©eete feft 
 ber SSnnfdfj crgriffen ^at, bid) gn befi^en. (®.) 5. ©inige $D^onate 
 Derftrid^en, e^e an§ 9}labrib eine Stntmort !am. (@c^.) 6. ^ift bu 
 nid^t me'^r HJJinifter? S^ bin'§ gen)efen, n)ie bn fie^ft. (6d^.) 
 1. Qd^ ^abe fie gefannt, in Valencia, 13 or ^manjig ^a^i^en. (^au[f.) 
 8. Tlit fiinf (^efeHen mar er an^ge^ogen, mit gmeien fe^rte er 
 jnriic!. (@Ber8.) 
 
 (327.) 1. SSa§ ber 5Ib|d)eu ber gan^en nieberldnbifd^en S^a^ 
 tion nid^t bermoi^t ^citte, inar bent geringfd^ci^igen 33etragen beg 
 Slbely gelungen. (®c^.) 2. .3ii^ Sc|miebe ging ein junger $elb, 
 er '^atte ein gtite§ (Sd)tt)ert befteKt. (U^.) 
 
 (328.) 1. Qc^ bringe bie le^ten SSorte meiner grennbin, bie 
 ©ie ni(i)t oljne ^f^ii^rnng lefen trerben. (@.) 2. ©r mirb anf mid^ 
 flnd^en, menn id§ i^m ha§> ^ucl) nid^t balb bringe. ($?eff.) 3. (£§ 
 mirb tt)of;( (^elb im Coffer fein, bacl)ten bie Sentc. (!i?eanber.) 4. 
 SJJan mirb nngefd^r anf eben bie 5lrt berfa^ren fein. (Stn!el^ 
 ntann.) 5. ^^x (Sc^reiben fod 5ng(eid§ ntein ^ebitit) fein, mit 
 bem id§ mid^ einfteHe, fobalb id§ e§ er^alten.* (®.) 6. 28er im- 
 mer finftere SJ^iene mad^t, ^at balb bie (^nnft berloren. (®.) T. 
 liefer gebrnar ift alfo ^^ingegangen, o^ne ©ie gn mir ^n bringen, 
 nnb idf) !)abe, ermartenb nnb ^offenb, balb ben SSinter iiberftan^ 
 ben. ((S(^.) 8. Unb menn eg (bag llnterne:^men) glitcft, fo ift eB 
 ijergeben. {B^,) 9. SSenn id& geftorben bin, finbet er htn 
 
 *439.a 
 
EXEKCISES. 377 
 
 (Sd^tiiffet in ntelner SKeftentafc^e. (^ret.) 10. graulein, er (ber 
 SBrief) ift unfe^Ibar jerriffen, tt)enn ©ie ftc^ nic^t balb anber§ 
 erflaren. (?e[f.) 11. ^enn bu btc^ aufric^teft, bift bu mit ein 
 paar ©d^ritten bort. (^. ®r.) 
 
 THEME XV. 
 
 TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE. 
 
 1. My friend and I were walking slowly through the 
 city. 2. Suddenly a strange man stands before him, he 
 looks at him, says something to him, and they both leave 
 me. 3. I try to follow them, but they are soon lost in the 
 crowd. 4. I have been seeking them for two hours, but I 
 do not find them. 5. As soon as I find them, I will bring 
 the man to you. 6. Do you know the man? 7. I have 
 known him for years. 8. She has been my wife for two 
 weeks. 9. Had you known her long when she became your 
 wife ? 10. I had known her twenty years, and I had loved 
 her since the first day. 11. As soon as she asks me I shall 
 tell her the truth. 12. If I see that man now I shall mur- 
 der him. 13. He had not been long in the prison, when 
 his friends murdered the keeper and freed him. 14. The 
 duke wrote me, what he wanted in * Vienna. 15. I pro- 
 *cured for him everything which he had been wanting. 16. 
 Have all your friends gone away? 17. One went yester- 
 day, the other will go to-morrow. 18. Several months have 
 passed since his letter came. 19, He went to Vienna, but 
 he did not do all that he promised. 20. I knew the minister 
 in Madrid. 21. As soon as he came into the church I knew 
 him. 22. He had been minister, but he was so no more. 
 23. "We had brought him the letter as soon as we had re- 
 ceived it. 24. He had cursed us because we had not 
 brought it sooner. 25. The young hero cannot receive his 
 sword until he has ordered it. 26. You will weep when 
 
 *5U. 
 
378 EXERCISES. 
 
 you hear tlie last words of my friend. 27. I presume they 
 are very interesting. 28. In February my friend will 
 probably come, thought L 29. If I do not find him soon, 
 I am lost. 30. When he is dead, I have not a single friend. 
 
 ILLUSTRATIVE SENTENCES XVHL 
 SUBJUNCTIVE AS OPTATIVE, CONDITIONAL AND POTENTIAL. 
 
 (331.) 1. SSe^ eu^, i()r ftotjen fallen ! mz tone fiiBer £Iang 
 burc^ eure Manim mieber ! (U^.) 2. ^a§ tDotte @ott nic^t, ha^ 
 bu bag bollbringft ! (®rf).) 3. Q3ilben mv un§ ein, mx W'dxtn 
 auf ber (Sifenba^u ; plauberii iDir trie in einem ^oupe. ($?ett3alb.) 
 4. 3Ser ©ebnib i)at, ber irarte. ((Sberg.) 5. WoQt nie ber ^ag 
 erfc^einen, wo be§ ran^en ^riet3e§ §prben biefeg ftitte Zljai 
 bnrd)toIien ! {<Bd^.) 6. jS)iirft' id) njoljl bie^mnt mi(^ entfernen ? 
 (®.) 1. ^Ic^ ! lieber, guter WHamx, mljni (Sr * niic^ n)o^I anf feineu 
 SSagen. (aJJu^kr.) 8. Qd^ fei, gemd^rt mir bie 33itte, in eurem 
 ^unbe ber britte. (®(^.) 9. SSir mbgcn bie SSelt fennen lernen, 
 trie mir luoEen, fie trirb immer eine ^ag= unb 5^a(^tfeite ^aben. 
 (®.) 10. Unb tt)er ber SDic^tfunft ©timme nic^t tjernimmt, ift 
 ein ^arbar, er fei and), incr er jei. (®.) 11. ^ie ginfternig 
 [=ni§] fei noc!^ fo bicftt, bem Sic^te triberfte^t fie nic^t. {<B)?x.) 
 12. (@r fagte) ha^ niemanb treber (S^efcingni^ [^ni§] noc^ San-. 
 be^Dermeifung jn fiirc^ten I}abeu foKte, er ^citte fic^ benn eine§ 
 politifc^en ^erbred)en0 fc^ulbig gemacl^t. (@c!^.) 13. Tlan foE bie 
 alten ©c^nr)e nicl^t fortroerfen, man ^ahz benn neue. (^^r.) 14. 
 SDie (Sonne fin!t, hdh teud)ten mir bie ©terne ; o, mcirft bu ^a, 
 (®.) 15. grommer '^tah ! o '^citt' ic^ nimmer mit bem ©c^trerte 
 bid) tiertaufcl^t. (@(^.) 
 
 (332.) 1. (^emiffe 9}^enfc^en fatten ^ugenben, menn fie @elb 
 :^atten. (3. ^. m 2. QatV id) bicf) frii^er fo gerec^t erfannt, e§ 
 mare ^iete§ ungefd^e^'n gebtieben. (@d^.) 3. SSenn mir aEen 
 l^elfen Ibnnten, bann maren mir ^n beneiben.f (i^eff.) 4. SSenn 
 ©ina ^ter mcire, fagte er ganj taut ju fic§, fie mad|te ein ^ebid^t, 
 
 * 158.3. t843.ni,l&. 
 
EXERC5ISES. 379 
 
 ober au(^ gtuet. (^e^.) 5. ^onnt id) bod^ ^tn 5tu§gaitg finbett, 
 a^, tr)ie \n^lV i(^ mt^ begtiicft ! (®c^.) 6. SSie ftiinb'g urn euc^, 
 §og' id^ mein §eer jurM. (®d^.) 1. ®u.!ottnteft ^ott banfen, 
 unb bi(^ t)or ber SSelt gro^ mad)en, tDenn bu in beinem Seben 
 eine fo ebte ^^t get^an ^atteft, tr)ie bie ift, itm tuelc^er tDtllen ic^ 
 gefangen ft^e. (®.) 8. Wix^V kf) je^n 9teic^e mit bent "iRMtn 
 fc^anen, i^ rette mid^ ntd)t mit be§ grennbe§ Sebcn. (@(^.) 9. 
 (Sinb auc^ bie alten ^iic^er nic^t gnr §anb, fie finb in nnferen 
 gerjen eingefd^rieben. (®cf|.) 10. IXnter ben a^^enfc^en tvxxh 
 man nic^t beffer, iDenn man nic^t f(^on gut nnter fie fommt. 
 (3. ^. 9i.) 11. SSenn biefer ftarle %xm enc^ nic^t ^ereingefit^rt, 
 i{)r fa^et nie ben IRaud) Hon einem franfifdjen famine fteigen. 
 (®(^.) 12. D fonnt ic§ bod) ben ©treit in ber S^atur t>erfo§nen, 
 unb 5ur ^ertrciglidjfeit bie 9[)^enfd)en auc^ getDo^nen ! [Md.) 13. 
 ptten ttiir'y mit frifc^er Xi)ai bollenbet! {@(^.) 14. §atte 
 i(^ boc^ immer gefdjiniegen ! (®.) 15. @r trar fo ftolj hax^ 
 auf, al§ nienn bie (Smpftubung fein gemcfen trcire. (@.) 16. 
 S^ommt, fe^t euc^, tijut, al§> loenn i^r gu §aufe mcirt! (®.) lY. 
 Ueberm * |)errfcf)er i^ergi^t er nur ben Si^iener ganj unb gar, aB 
 tijar^ mit feiner SSiirb' er fd)on geboren. (@c^.) 18. ^er ©d}tu^ 
 (be§ ^riefe§) mar ganj, ai§> menu er i§n felbft gefd)rieben f)atte. 
 (®.) 19. d^ gilt bie Seben^pfltc^t ^u erfiillen, a(§ ob man emig lebe, 
 unb mieberum, aU ob man ftiinblid) ftiirbe. (^luerboc^.) 20. ©ie 
 nidte nur leife, al§> ob biefer SSunfd) i^r gefatle. {(S6ev«.) 21. Q3ete, 
 al§ :§iilfe fein 5lrbeiten. ^Irbeite, al§> ^iilfe fein ^eten. (@^r.) 
 22. i)a§> tjerfc^tog mir hen 9J2unb, unb l)dtt' icf) ben ^ob be§ 
 $8erbrec^er§ barum (eiben miiffen. (^offmami.) 23. '2)a§ fRecl^t 
 gur ^rone mar nidjt erbtid^, unb bod^ f)atte ein langere§ 2then 
 feine§ SSaterS bie 5Infpriid^e feine§ einjigen ©oljneg me^r 
 befeftigt, unb bie §offmmg ^ur Sl\one gefic^ert. (®.) 24. 33ei 
 langerem Seben bei grogen f aiferg, mare er (ber ii!reu55ug) ge:= 
 mi6 nid^t in biefem SO^af^e bereitelt morben. (9?aiinter.) 25. Unter 
 fed^§ 5tugen mad)t man bie biimmften ©treic^e, bie man unter 
 bieren gar nid)t §u ©tanbe hxad)tt. (^e^.) 26. ^a§ ift ein Sreunb, 
 ber fid^ fiir i^n tobtfd^Iageti tie^e. (Seff.) 2t. 3lber fageu @ie 
 
 •65, 
 
380 EXERCISES. 
 
 felBft, §err; m§> ^atte e§ ge^otfen? (§c^.) 28. (g§ ift !etn 
 9lRenfc§ fo arm, ha^ er nic^t fterben !5nnte. (triiger.) 29. 2Setc|er 
 XXnban!6are ^dtte ftc^ nic^t p entfc^ulbigen getpu^t! (?eff.) 
 
 30. ©eftern ^Ibent) entftanb auf einmal ein leb^after grieben§= 
 ruf. S^^i^iefern er gegriinbet jet, mii§ ftc^ balb ^etgen. (®.) 
 
 31. Or)ne Siebe t3mge bie t^iecifc^e SSett ju ©runbe. (3afob§.) 
 
 32. (El, ^aia, tt)arum mare benit ha§> fo unglaubltc^ ? (?eff.) 33. 
 ©0 mbd^f ic§ leben, ba^ \(i) iydtit, raeitn icl^ fc^eibe, gelebet mtr 
 5ur Suft imb anberen nic^t gu Seibe. (9lucf.) 34. ^ie greube 
 iiberrafcl^t un§ oft auf einer ©pur, tt)o trir fie uic^t ertrartct 
 ^citteu. (SStelattb.) 35. ^c^ tuiiufc^te, ha^ bei S^ueu iu Weimar 
 bie (^efc^afte beffer ge^en mbgeu, al§> bei mir. (@c^.) 36. SSarum 
 fottten tvxx nic^t miinfc^eu, ncbeu ben Unferigen gu ru^en, unb 
 menu e§ aud^ nur fiir ein 3ar)rr)unbert iudre. ((S.) 31. ^er 
 SD^^eufd^ ift frei gefd)affeu, ift frci, unb \mx' er iu S^^etten geboren. 
 (@(^.) 38. 3Ser bu aud^ feift, ic^ tt)iinfcl}e 9!ettung btr. (®.) 39. 
 SSie fe'^r aud^ euer 3uu're» miberftrebe, geljorc^t ber Q6t unb 
 bent (^efe| ber ©tunbe. (®(^.) 40. 9lur eine§ meig ic^ fic^er, 
 ic^ merbe ungtii(ili(^, tnie biefe 3SaI)l aucl^ auSfcittt. (^^rei.) 
 41. IXnter alien Umftanben mugte er ber^inbern, ba^ bie ©tabt 
 in frembe (^ettjalt fame. (^. ®v.) 42. SBon ben giiBen 5ie^t er 
 bie ©c^u^e bel)eub, Damit er ha^ ^dc^Ieiu burc^fd^reite. [<BA),) 43. 
 S^er^ei^en mir, bamit man un§ Uerjei^e. (©eiime.) 44. ®er alte 
 9JZeufc^ in un§ foil fterben, bamit eine neue 3:ugenb in un§ em^ 
 porfeime. (C^erber.) 45. (Ettva^ fiird^ten unb ^offen unb forgen 
 muB ber 9}?enfc^ fiir ben fommenben forgen, ha^ er bie ©cl^mere 
 be§ ^afein§ ertrage, unb ha§> ermiibenbe (^leid^maj^ ber ^age. 
 (@d^.) 46. Ser einmal liigt, bent glaubt man nid^t, unb menu 
 er and) bie 3SaIir^eit fpricl)t. (@pr.) 41. SSie grof3 bid) auc^ bie 
 ^onigin gu mac^en berfpric^t Iran' i^rer ©c^mei^etrebe nid^t. 
 (@(^.) 48. garret i^r, bi§ bag ber recl)te 9f^ing htn 9JJunb 
 eroffne ? (?eff.) 49. ©d^ictt einen fid^eren 33oten i^m entgegen, 
 ber auf ge^eimen 2Beg i^n ^u mir fiil)re. (@*.) 50. ^u finbeft !ei^ 
 nen, ber fic^ feineg S^ac^barn p fd)amen braud^e. (®.) 51. (S§ift 
 unmoglii^, \>a% ein unb berfelbe Tltn\^ biefer SSelt unb gugkid^ 
 ^ott biene. (Slaubiug.) 52. Qd^ mar nid§t fo eingenommen, hai 
 
EXERCISES. 
 
 381 
 
 icl^ nid^t (lemcrft T)dtte, \vk nur uicutgc t^n (Sinn bcv garten 
 3Sorte fii^tten. ((^.) 53. ^em t()dttgen SlRenfc^cn fommt e§ bar= 
 anf an, \)a^ er ba§ Sf^ed^te t()ue; ob bag 9fted)te gefc^e^e, foil i^n 
 nid^t fiimmern. (@.) 
 
 THEME XVI. 
 SUBJUNCTIVE AS OPTATIVE, CONDITIONAL AND POTENTIAL. 
 
 1. He who has anything to say, let him speak. 2. Let 
 him rejoice who hears the voice of poetry. 3. May war 
 never appear to this peaceful valley. 4. May he never 
 finish what he has begun. 5. Come when you can; be it 
 morning or evening, you will be welcome. 6. Let him 
 think what he will, I shall still love him. 7. Let us sit 
 down and chat until he comes back. 8. May the world 
 never become worse than it is already. 9. He has not 
 been guilty of any crime, unless it be of a political one. 
 10. I will bless him, unless he opposes me. 11. O, that I 
 were not guilty of this crime ! 12. Would that I had 
 never beheld this man ! 13. Had we not exchanged 
 peace for war. 14. We should not have been afraid, had 
 we not been guilty. 15. Had you known the world better, 
 you would never have trusted this man. 16. He would 
 not be imprisoned here had he not done that noble deed. 
 17. Had I been able to help him, I should have felt my- 
 self happy. 18. How could I have saved myself, if his 
 strong arm had not led me out ? 19. If I can find the 
 outlet, I will thank God. 20. He will make a poem if 
 he hears of this noble deed. 21. 0, that all had remained 
 undone ! 22. If we could but help everyone ! 23. He 
 knows that poem as if it were written in his heart. 24. 
 She nodded, as if she understood everything. 25. They 
 acted quite as if they were at home here. 26. He is as 
 proud as if he were forgetting that he was not born with 
 this rank. 27. He certainly would have worked well, 
 only he was ilL 28. O, that he had lived longer, then my 
 
382 EXERCISES. 
 
 hopes would not have been frustrated. 29. A longer life 
 of the great emperor might have secured the crown to 
 his son. 30. No; it certainly would not have helped him. 
 
 31. I should not like to suffer the death of a criminal. 
 
 32. He may have written the letter himself; but that 
 would be incredible. 33. I should like to know why busi- 
 ness does not go better. 34. They will certainly come, 
 were it only for a few hours. 35. We shall surprise them, 
 especially if they have not expected us. 36. However un- 
 grateful he may be, he will know how to * excuse himself. 
 37. Whoever he may be, and whatever he may do, she will 
 excuse him and love him. 38. Man was created that he 
 might work and pray. 39. Man must fear and sorrow, so 
 that he may not love life too much. 40. He wishes to be 
 rich that he may help everyone. 41. He will find not one 
 who does not obey the law. 42. He had to wait until the 
 city should come into his power. 43. It does not matter 
 to me whether they forgive me; I only hope that I may 
 not need to be ashamed. 
 
 ILLUSTRATIVE SENTENCES XIX. 
 SUBJUNCTIVE OF INDIRECT STATEMENT. 
 
 (333.) 1. (Sr fiil^Ite, ba^ er ein anberer SJJenfd^ 511 tDerben be* 
 gtime. (®.) 2. S5)u follteft nid^t beiifen, id^ fei iiber dlai^t em 
 geiglincj iinb ein ^errcit^er [^errater] gemorbeu. {§e^.) 3. 
 ^^orncr f^reibt mir, ha^ er 14 ^age l^ier §u§ubringen ^offe. 
 (Scf).) 4. SJteinft bu, id) fei ein ^inb ? m 5. S^ ^efte^e bar^ 
 auf, boB ficl^ ber Sorb entferne. (@d^.) 6. (Sie berlangen ifjren 
 Oberft, ben dJla^, jnriicf; er fei ^ier auf bent (Sc^Io^, de^anpten 
 fie, bu ^alteft i^n mit B^^^l^' ^nb menn bn xijn nic^^t Io§ge(ift, 
 tt)erbe man i^n mit bcm ©d^tnerte §n befreien n)iffen. {^^.) 
 7. (£r erblicfte bie nftc M(\(\h, bie iftm mit gang t)erftortem (^e^ 
 ftd^t pfliifterte, fie fud^e iljn feit einer ^albeu ©tunbe, er miiffe 
 
 * 343.111,2. 
 
EXEEdSES. 383 
 
 ^eimfommen. (^c^.) 8. ^ie ©ignorie* eutfc^utbigte flc^, ber $apft 
 laffe $0iicf)elangelo ntcl^t fort; fobalb man f enter '^aO^aft iDerbeii 
 fonne, miirbe ha§> SSer! abgeliefert merbcn. (^. ®r.) 9. 2)en 
 SBorfcl^Iag, Uo§> feine <So^ne nac^ bem 9}ZorgenIanbe abjufenben, 
 tnieg ber .(l^aifer al§ unpaffenb guriic!, bettn er ^abe, obgleid) im 
 ftebenunbfec^jigften Qa^re be§ 5IIter§, noc^ Siraft gemig, ftc§, 
 tt){e e^ fcin ^eruf er^eifc^e, an bie ©pil^e ber S^riften^eit 511 
 ftellen. (9^aumer.) 10. ^on entfcf)eibenber SSlcr)ttg!eit tt)ar e§, 
 tuelc^en (Sutfcl)IuJ3 ^aifer griebricl^ in biefem 5(ugeubltc! ergreifen 
 ttjerbe. [dtanxmv.) 11. (Sr baif)te nicl^t ouber§, al§ ba^ ber 
 ©c^aiifpieler ba§ 3:()eater auffuc^en merbe. (@.) 12. (^§> ge^t bie 
 9iebe, baft e§ if)m Suft bereite, fterben gu fe^en. (Sberg.) 13. 
 ^ennoc^ erfcl^rerfte bie ^^ac^ric^t, ba^ ber ^rieg erflcirt fei. (grei.) 
 14. ®ie ^ermut^ung [^ermutung], ba§ ein SSalb^iiter ^ier feine 
 SBo^nung ^abe, gab ic^ auf. (^et).) 15. 2Benigflen§ finbe ic^ e§ 
 ntc^t billig, ha^ Ottilie aufgeopfert tuerbe. {®.) 16. SSer 
 fpric^t i^m ah, bci'^ er bie SO^enfcl^en fenne, fie gu gebranc^en 
 iDiffe ? (®d^.) 17. ^Ifo befa^f er un§ gn t^un nnb bir gn met* 
 ben, e§ fei bein ©ofjn ^on (S^aefar, ber fie fenbe. {<Bd).) 18. Tlan 
 fii^Ite, baJ3 o^ne bie gi^ei()eit aiU^ tjertoren fei. (§. ®r.) 19. ©r 
 fagte bem ganbernben 5tmtmann ^eimlic^, er moc^te boc^ ber 
 ©a(^e ein (E'nbe ntacf)en. (®.) 20. ^d) tt)oI(te, fie tjatten taufenb* 
 ntal 9kc^t, bn aber lebteft noc!^. (?aube.) 21. SSie fe^^r tnnnfcfjte 
 ic^, ha% (Sie in biefen 3;:agen bei un§ trciren. (®.) 22. ©alabin 
 
 antttjortete : ^er ^aifer mlige bebenfen, ba^ e§ iDeniger 
 
 (If)riften gcibe at§ ©aracenen, nnb baJ3 nic^t gro^e Sanbftrecfen 
 nnb unfid)ere ^eere bie Mac^t ber kitten trennten nnb fc^neKe 
 $iilf§leiftnng t)err)inberten. SDennocl^ tnode er, gegen (Srnenernng 
 be§ griebeng, 3:t)rn§, 3:ripDti» nnb ^Intioc^ien, luelc^e ©tcibte bie 
 Sfjriften nod) befdJ3en, nid)t angreifen. (9Jaumer). 23. 90^ir melbet 
 er an§ Sinj, er tdge !ran!. [B6).) 24. (£r fragte fo angfttic^, ob 
 S^r ntc^t berfeljrt wnret. m 25. Sd^ fixrc^te, Dberft Antler, 
 man f)at mit enc^ ein fc^dnbtic^ ©piet getrieben. (@(^.) 26. ^ 
 tnollte nic^t fommen nnb n)ir mn^ten bod^, er Xoax anf bem SSege. 
 (®.) 27. ^a§ ic^ i^ren 9^amen nie ge^ort ^atte. I (Self.) 28. 
 
 ♦ Governing body of Florence in the 16th century. 
 
384 EXEEOISES. 
 
 ha% er feiii (^emiit^ [(^emiit] lute feme ^imft an beinen Se'^ren 
 bilbe ! (®.) 29. <Sie tDii^te nic^t, wa§ fie geboren fei ? (5ie ^citte 
 e§ nie Don ir)m erfa^ren, ha^ fie eine dfjriftin geboren fei, unb 
 fetne Qiibin? ^ie. {?eff.) 30. SSa§ fagft bn U? fragte er be^ 
 troffen. 5((§ td^ gn SSei^na^ten l^ier wax, "^atte id^ ni^t me^r 
 an bid^ geba^t ? (^e^.) 
 
 HiLUSTRATIVB SENTEN-CES XX. 
 CONDITIONAL TENSES. 
 
 (334-36.) 1. SSenn id) nur an mic^ f eft ft benfen biirfte, tt)iirbe 
 id^ mic^ ^artnacfig lueigern, beine (^ab^ an^une^men. {(B.) 2. 
 SSiirben fo oft neue ^eifpiele jur SSarnimg bienen, ioeun bie 
 SSarnung atterer ^eifpiele gefrud)tet ^(itte? ((Sngel.) 3. ^ie 
 gliicfUc^ tDiirbe manc^er teben, n)enn er fic^ urn anberer Seute 
 ©acl^en fo toenig befiimmerte, a(§ urn feine eigenen. (^id^tenberg.) 
 4. ^u tierbienteft, ^remierminifter im Sanbe 5U fein ; e§ miirbe 
 bann too^t gan^ anberg im gangen ^urfiirftent^um [^tum] fte^en 
 (3|d^o!fe.) 5. Tlan glaubte bie ^o^men ^um ©c^meigen 5U brin* 
 gen, menn §ug'en§ * Ser)re buret) ben greunb fefter Derbammt 
 n)iirbe. (®rube.) 6. (^efe^t, Seanber tniirbe burc^ fie glii(i(ic^ — 
 njerbe ic^ fein gi'euub bfeiben fonnen ? M.) 1. Xk boppelten 
 SSinbungen ber @c^tangen n^iirben ben ganjen 2^xh tierbectt 
 leaden. (?e[f.) 8. ^iefe§ ©ingen, 331umenmalen nub ^omobie* 
 fpielen miirbe mi(f) nic^t einen 5tugenblirf gliicflic^ madden fonnen, 
 (^e^.) 9. (Sr freute fi(^ baxan in ber ©offnung, ta^ ber %xnf)^ 
 ling batb atte§ nod^ reic^lic^er beteben miirbe. (®.) 10. !I)ie Un* 
 tu^e nnb Ungemil^ett, n)ie td^'^ ^ier finben tt)urbe, ^at mir 
 untern>eg§ alien §nnger Dertrieben. (§e^.) 
 
 THEME XVn. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE OF INDIKECT STATEMENT, AND CONDITIONAL 
 
 TENSES. 
 
 L He asked me whether I had become a coward. 2. I 
 answered I was not afraid of him, and would soon show 
 
 •i05. 
 
EXERCISES. 385 
 
 him that I was no child more. 3. Max wrote he did not 
 demand that I should deliver the work now, but he hoped 
 to receive it as soon as it was finished. 4. When I found 
 him he excused himself ; he had been looking for me also, 
 and could not find me. 5. They say the emperor will send 
 his sons alone to France; for he is * in his 76th year, and haa 
 not strength enough to put himself at the head of the 
 army. 6. The prince told me that war had been declared, 
 and that everything would be lost without the emperor. 
 7. The emperor answered: he wished for peace and would 
 like to make an end to the war. 8. But he could not 
 forget that the French themselves had begun the war. 
 9. He would not lead back the army unless the enemy 
 should give up all the German cities which they had 
 possessed before. 10. I do not think it just that the 
 French should pay so much. 11. I thought they still 
 lived there. 12. Did you believe I was afraid ? I believed 
 he was lying sick at Berlin, and did not know that he 
 was on his way to England. 13. O, that he would soon 
 appear ! 14. What do you say ? I had ordered you to do 
 that? I never did so. 15. If you heard my warnings 
 you would be happy. 16. We would not take your gifts 
 if we were richer. 17. I should like to be rich, then I 
 would help everyone. 18. If you had only concerned 
 yourself with your own affairs, you would be rich already. 
 19. Such a hope would not make me happy. 20. A wise 
 king would not have condemned the teaching of Huss. 
 21. They did not know how they would find it here. 22. 
 He wrote me in the hope that they would soon arrive. 
 
 ILLUSTRATIVE SENTENCES XXL 
 THE INFINITIVE AS SUBJECT AND OBJECT OP VERBS. 
 
 (341.) 1. (Sin (Sffen tutrb gegeben auf bent ©c^to^. (@(^.) 2. 
 S)a§ 2e6en ber grau ift eiu eiuigeg ^e^en unb ^ommen, ober 
 
286 EXEBCISES. 
 
 §ebett uttb ^ragen, ober ^eretten unb (Sd^affen fiir ^nbere. ((S.) 
 3. grei tDttt id^ fein im §anbeln imb tm 5)i(^ten. ((S.) 4. Hn§ 
 (Sntbeorett, 9JJiffen, ^erlieren, DHc^t^^aben getcu^nt ber §tmmet 
 feine (^elteOten. (^abater.) 5. D, fegne, §err, mein SSer!, meiti 
 9^eben unb mein ®en!en. (. * .) 6. Qe^t rebe tntr Reiner mel^r 
 t)on 33Iei0en, t)on ^erOergen ! (@(^.) 
 
 (342.) 1. ©terben ift tiid^tg, bod^ leben unb uid^t fe'^eu, ba§ 
 ift ein IXnglM. {Bd}.) 2. SO^enfc^enliebe iiben, l^ei^t gut fein. 
 {(Sberg.) 3. UnreC^t letben fc^meid^elt grofeen ©eelen. (@d^.) 4. 
 (£r Itebte bie ^ferbe unb e§ t^at i^m melj, bie ebten ^^lere 
 [^tere] tobten §u fe^en. ((Sbers.) 5. ^ie braunen, flugen 5lugen 
 gu malen mar nic|t§ Seic^teg. ((Sberg.) 6. ^^ begriff e§ freilid^, 
 ober mid§ bariiber gu troften, moKte mil tro^bem nic^t gelingen. 
 (^ei).) 1. (S§ ift fo elenb betteia gu miiffen. (®.) 8. (S§ 
 fd^merjte niic^ leb^aft, biefe fc^onen Sac^cn t)er!aufen gu fe^en. 
 (®.) 9. (£§ t^erftanb fid) t)ou felbft, ba^ trol^ aEem einem fold^en 
 SP^anne §u t^un gegeben trerben mugte. (^. ®r.) 
 
 (343.) 1. 5Iner!ennen t^un mir bie 9^ic^tig!eit ber Sorberung. 
 (®.) 2. 99?ir mar's, al§ tf^at' fein ^luge l^inab in§ ^erj mir 
 fe^en. mMcv.) 3. ^er (^(Mlic^e, ber ^e^aglic^e, ^at gut 
 reben. (@.) 4. SSem ba§ fe^It, ber ^at gut im 3Sin!e( filjen unb 
 ttjeife bie ^df)feln §ucfen. (§e^.) 5. ^enn od^, bie 9}?enfc^en lieben 
 lernen, e§ ift ha^ ein^ige ma^re ©lite!, (platen.) 6. ©rfa^rung 
 unb Uebung im Ungliict lernt fd^meigen. (^ebel.) 7. ®ie i8atat>ier 
 :^atten i()m biefe ^nfeln erobern ^etfen. (<Sci^.) 8. Qd^ banfe bir, 
 ^ott, ba§ bu mic^ if)n ^aft fe^en laffen. (®.) 9. DftmalS lie^ er 
 t^ in ben ^igianfaat berufen. (Sbers.) 10. 5lIIe§, tt)a§ ber^aifet 
 iiber feine ©iege fc^reiben ta^t, ift ertogen. (^rei.) 11. Qd^ l^ore 
 ben SSagen borfa^ren. Sebc mo^t. {^ttj.) 12. ^a ()ie6 ber 
 ®o!tor mi(^ bleiben. (@ber8.) 13. (Sd^nett mirft bu bie 9^ot^^ 
 menbigfeit [9^otmenbig!eitl berfd^minben, unb "^zdjt in Itnred^t 
 fic^ t)crmanbe(n fe^en. (®(^.) 14. ^^ fiil)le iunge§, f)eilige§ 
 SebcnSgliidf ueugtii^eitb mir burd^ D^eri) unb 5(bern rinnen. (®.) 
 15. SBon ^uQ^ttb auf l)ab' id) gelernt ge^ord^en. ((^.) 16. (So 
 bitte id^ iSie mir 4 ©tik! bon ber griinen ^apete au§ granffurt 
 fommen ju laffen. (<^c^.) It. S)er ^raf !§at mid^ fi^en fe^en. (®.) 
 
EXEKCISES* 387 
 
 18. Wan ^attc ha^ ^offerd^en in ber Wxik be§ 8tmmer§ fte^en 
 gelaffen. (®.) 19. ®ag ^etgt nic^t (^ott t)ertrauen, ba§ :^ei6t 
 (^ott berfuc^en. (@(^.) 20. ©tiff ! jagte fie, ^aft bu nid^t flopfen 
 fjoren ? (ipe^.) 21. S^^ ^<^^e nie fiirc^terlid^er fluc^en ^iiren, oI§ 
 (Sie Iad)en. ($?e[f.) 22. SSir fatten feit me^reren 3Sod)en t)ou 
 einem ^aume fprec^en geI)ort, beffen ©aft eitte naf)renbe WM) 
 \]t (§um.) 23. Sa§ fingen, (befell, (a^ raufc^en, unb ftimmeit 
 munter brein. ( ) 24. ©prec^en 8ie nic^t baDon, lieber 
 greunb, e§ ift mir ti3btUc!^ [totlic^], tnemt ic^ bariiber fpred^en 
 Ijoren mu^. (!^inbau.) 25. ^u(^ in Tld^tv. f}bvt man (Snc^ §erren 
 ni^t befonberg preifen. (@(^.) 26. S^om fi^eren ^ort lagt'^ 
 fi(^ gemiit^lic^ [gemiitlii^] ratljen [raten]. (@c^.) 21. 2a^ f(ie^, 
 iuag fic^ nic^t ^Iten Icijst. (Hrubt.) 28. Safet fic^ an§ einem 
 SDemifd) benn nid)t§ macl)en ? (?eff.) 29. SSer blieb nid^t fte^en, 
 menn biefe 33eiben lancjfam burd) bie ^romenabe tpanbelten? 
 (^aiiff.) 30. ®ie ^raut tt^ar auf ifjrem $Ia^ mitten an ber langen 
 ^afet fil^en geblieben. (^ei^.) 31. ®er ^erjocj SQZilon fc^Iafen 
 lag. (U^.) 32. 9^eben fic^ I)atte fie einen ()o^en ^orb fte^en. 
 (®.) 33. Qd^ ^b' im tiefften ©runbe ber (2ee(e ru^'n ein Sieb. 
 (9?u(f.) 34. Segt mid^ ^^n, \vo fein Siebenber fommt iDeinen. 
 (Berber.) 35. (Inblic^ ber^tpeifelte er an bem ©elingen feiner 
 5(rbeit, marf ben nnoottenbeten ^rief in bie ^ifte, nnb legte fid^ 
 fd^Iafen. ((Sber«.) 36. £'ommt, laj^t nn§ ge^'n fpagieren in htn 
 t)ie(griinen SSalb. (O^ife.) 3t. 9lie Dergi^t ber griiljUng tDieber^ 
 gufommen. {Zkd.) 38. ^er 5l(te lub 5(bam ein, ben ad^ten ^la^ 
 im gu^rmer! einjunetjmen. (Sberg.) 39. Qljr 5(uge gebot t)er^ 
 ftcinbig gn reben. (®.) 40. Sleraunu§ befoljl feiner ^od^ter, i'^m 
 einen ^ed^er SSein ju reic^en. (eber§.) 41. ^ie le^ten SSorte 
 9^utf)'§ fatten i^m gn ben!en gegeben. (^berg.) 42. SDem freien 
 SD^anne l^at ®ott empor jn fd)anen eriaubt. {^M.) 43. (S§ lebt 
 ein (S^ott, 5u ftrafen nnb jn rcicl^en. ((2c^.) 44. Xcn grennb ju 
 erfennen, muf^t bu erft einen ©c^effel (Salj mit i()m gegeffen 
 l^aben. (@pr.) 45. ®en ^rei§ be§ 2Sett(auf§ ju getninnen, barfft 
 bu nic^t fte()n nnb bid^ befinnen. {@Ieim.) 46. ^ier ^retter 
 braud^t'§ nur, biinn nnb fc^mat, ein miibe§ 9[Renfd^ent)er5 ju 
 betten. (Srager.) 47. ®r ift thtn auSgegangen, mit ein n)enig 
 
388 E^RSISES. 
 
 S3attb gu ^anbeln. (3. ®r.) 48. Unb bocl^, ber Qube rt)arni(^t 
 gu retten, unb ^atte berbient, ma§ i^m broI)te. (@ber§.) 49. 2Be^ 
 ntg ober nicl^tS fte^t ^u gemmnen. (^. ®r.) 50. ^er getter 
 bleibt bettter (5^nabe ju Derjet^en. (®.) 51. j?aum fd^eint eg gu 
 gtauben. (®.) 52. 3c| blicfte in ben unfauberlid^en glur ^inein, 
 e§ njar !eine 9}^enfd^enfeete brinnen 5U fe(}en ober §u Ijoren. (§ei).} 
 53. 5Da0 53efte, n)a§ man bon t§m (ernt, ift nicl^t mitjut^eilen 
 [4eilen]. (®.) 54. ®ie 3^^^ tnurbe i^m nic^t (ang, benn aud^ er 
 l^atte Diet gu ben!en. (§ei)J 55. Safari fd^etnt mit ber S^atnr 
 nte p t^un ge'^abt ^u l^aben. (§. ®r.) 56. 3Ser e§ je^t ntd^t 
 nterft, ha^ bie SCenien etn poeti]d)e§ ^robuct ftnb, bem ift nic^t 
 gn ^elfen. (@c^.) 5T. Sangfani !onnnenbe§ ©liicf pflegt cm Icings 
 ften 5U bleiOen. (Berber.) 58. ^ariiber fc^Iief id^ ein, unb al§ td^ 
 emad^te, glaubte id^ eOen nur getrdnmt p I)aben. (@.) 59. §ier 
 gilt'g, ntein (Sot)n, bem Sl\ii)er tt)o§l ju bienen. (Sd^.) 60. (Seine 
 Sartlic^feit gegen feine ^inber I)inberte ifjn nid^t, fie in guter 
 guc^t gu fatten. ((SruBe.) 61. SO^an mu^te fi(^ l^iiten, feine biel^ 
 beutigen 5Cu§briic!e nic^t fiir eine ^eiDdfjrung ju ne^men. (3?au!e.) 
 62. @r fnnb Sotten bef(^dftigt, bem ^Uten ju^ureben. {(§>.) 63. ®r 
 befann fid^ nid^t (nnge, bon feinen im gelbe fte^enben ^eeren 
 fogleic^ ai^t^eljntaufenb Tlann ab^ubanfen. (®d^.) 
 
 ILLUSTRATIVE SENTENCES XXIL 
 THE INFINITIVE AS ADJUNCT, ETC. 
 
 (344.) 1. ^er S^^^tfjum [3rrtum] ift biet tetc^ter p er!ennen, 
 al§ bie 2Bar)rr)eit 5U finben. (®.) 2. Si)a§ ©ie mit eintgen 
 ^artieen au§ bem (S^eKini* anfangen tt)erben, ift mir lieb 5U ^oren. 
 (S(^.) 3. ©auerlid^ Wax ba^ SSaffer, gefunb §u trinfen. (®.) 4. 
 ©ie ift f(^on jugleic^ unb fc!^rec!(ic^ an5ufe()en. ((Sd^.) 5. S<^ 
 bin nid^t jung genug, bor ©o^en mid^ 5U neigen, unb ^ro^ mit 
 %xo\} 5U bcinbigen, alt genug. (®.) 6. ^d) wax geftern fo un- 
 borfidC)tig, ein pnar .^apitet im ^erobot gu (efen. (§et).) Y. ^er 
 5l(te, ber anii) fonft fc^mer 5U lenfcn wax, ^attt fid^ feft gemei^^ 
 
 * The life of Benvenuto Cellim : see 66 Ac, 
 
EXERCISES. 389 
 
 gert. (^etj.) 8. (Sure S5erfof}nung mar etn h)entg ju fi^neH, al§ 
 ba§ fie bauer^aft ^citte feiit foKett. (®.) 9. ^te ^naben marett 
 5U jung, iim felbft eine ^oKe 5U fpieten. (^. (Sr.) 
 
 (345.) 1. S3orgefterti ^atit id^ eine ^Ibe §offnung, ©ie biet- 
 letd^t §ier 5U feljen. {B^.) 2. @ein plo^Iid^er SSunfc^, glorenj 
 gu t)erlaffen, i)attt bieKeid^t aber noc^ anbere (^riinbe. (^. ®r.) 
 
 3. 5(uf ber golterban! I;atte er ha§> ^et^t guriirfgeiDonnen, fic§ 
 felbft 5U ad^ten. (@ber8.) 4. Qd^ bin in ber Sage, mir in ber 
 grembe al§> ^ienenber erft Qittranen nnb gnte ©efinnnng er^ 
 iDerben 5U miiffen. (grei.) 6. ^ie iible (Smpfinbung, tro| ber reb:* 
 lid^ften SO^ii^e ^uriicfgnbteiben, berbarb i^m ha§> ^afein. (@berg.) 
 6. ©ie grb^te ^erebtfamfeit befteljt in ber Slnnft 5U fd^meigen. 
 (C)ippet.) 1. ^ie $f(irf)t 5U beffern gibt nn§ ha^' ^fJec^t ju tabeln. 
 (@(^efcr.) 8. ®ann ^be id£) bie ^flid^t, i^n 5U rcic^en. (gvei.) 
 
 (346.) 1. ®ie SSeiber lieben bie 6tar!e, ofjne fie nad^p* 
 a^men, bie 9[)^anner bie ga^tljeit, oTjne fie ju ermiebcrn. (3. % 'St.) 
 2. Ttan^^txUi I)aft bn berfciumet ; ftatt ^n ^anbeln, ^aft ge;= 
 troumet, ftatt 5U ben!en, I)aft gefd^miegen. (®.) 3. D^atnr gab mt§ 
 S5erftanb, urn red^t 5U benfen; nm red^t jn ^anbeln, gab fie un§ 
 ha^' §er5. (531umauer.) 4. ©ie begniigten fid^ bamit, bie nmliegen^ 
 ben Mofter p pliinbern. (@c^.) 5. ©ie tarn gar nid[}t baju, gegen 
 t^^n ben ©rant unb 3^1^^ augjntaffen. (5(uerBac^.) 6. ^d^ fonnte 
 midf) nid^t baran getDo^nen, mir bie fromme Stugnftine fo ju 
 benfen. (3f(^of!e.) 
 
 (347.) 1. Sd^ meine0 ^ruber§ ^inber nid^t erfennen ! ($?e[f.) 
 2. S^ eine§ 9[^anne§ 33ilb in meinem S3ufen tragen ! (@d).) 3. 
 Sieber, tanfenbmat lieber, ^ettelbrob effen nnb in ber Stnnft 
 (^rogeg erreid^en, at§ tm (S^Iiicle praffen unb fc^melgen. ((Sber«.) 
 
 4. 53arm^er§iger ©ott — biefe ©tunbe nur iiberteben unb bann 
 bic^ preifen, emig. (.^et).) 5. ©ie fprai^ : nur au§ bem ^ater= 
 lanb nid^t reifen! [Md.) 6. SDer fteine $aul tft l^iniiberge* 
 laufen unb ^at gerufen : ^ufmad^en, liebe 9[^utter, oufmad^en ! 
 ^Oer bie SJluttcr ift nid^t aufgemad^t. (toc^.) 
 
 (348.) 1. ^nfitten in bem (^IM, ^a\>a trieber p umarmen 
 unb mein ©c^mefterd^en, norf) biet reijenber, al0 td^ fie mir bor* 
 gefteUt, in (gmpfang 5U ne^men, ha^i^i^ i^ l^unbertmal baran. 
 
390 EXEECISES. 
 
 (§e^.) 2. §ter hai ic^ i^n, ft(^ meberjufe^ett, 5i§ i$ tm Stanbc 
 getDefen fein iDiirbe, au§ ber ©c^Iud^t, tDO ein ^iemlic^ reid^Iid^er 
 Ouell gum H}^eere f(o^, unb tt»o roir bercitg eiuen furgen §alt 
 gemad^t fatten, abermaB 2Baffer gu l^olen. ((Spiel.) 3. 5ld^, ^rei= 
 lid^ tuerben fie i^ti I)abett umbringen tDotteti. (2cf[.) 
 
 THEME XVm. 
 
 THE INFINITrVE. 
 
 1. I am accustomed to this eternal coming and going, 
 and standing still is hard for me. 2. The selling of all these 
 beautiful things pained me much. 3. I have no time for 
 painting or reading, I must accustom myself to working. 
 4 To suffer wrong is a misfortune, but to do wrong is a 
 greater one. 5. To do without is easier than to beg. 6. 
 To remain quiet and to hide myself was quite impossible. 
 7. It pained the child to see such a noble animal killed, 
 and I did not succeed in comforting him for it. 8. He 
 can well be contented, for he has already all that he 
 wants. 9. We taught him to obey his parents and to love 
 all men. 10. He bade me come to him and helped me 
 write my letter. 11. You will soon see the wagon drive up 
 and the doctor go away. 12. I saw him go away, and I 
 felt all my hopes disappear. 13. I heard the emperor tell 
 of his victories, and he thanked God that he had let him 
 conquer* this country. 14. He had seen his only son killed 
 in this war. 15. We had her buy several pieces of the 
 green carpet. 16. I hear laughing and singing, who is it ? 
 17. Now they are coming, I hear a knocking. 18. She 
 caused work to be done for the poor in her house, and I 
 heard her charity praised everywhere. 19. Yes, we have 
 also heard her praised. 20. She does not suffer herself 
 to be hindered by her illness. 21. Nothing bad can be said 
 of her. 22. Nothing can be made of this man. 23. Why did 
 
 * 439.2. 
 
EXEECISES. 391 
 
 you remain sitting at the table ? 24. I had a good friend 
 sitting beside me, and I wanted to talk with him. .25. "When 
 we went to walk together he often remained standing, in 
 order to look after the people. 26. He invited me to go to 
 drive and allowed me to take my sister with me. 27. He 
 commanded me to speak, but to speak sensibly. 28. He 
 did not forget to offer his guest a cup of wine. 29. Wo 
 have come to visit you, will you allow us to come again ? 
 30. Spring comes to make us happy again. 31. Your 
 story is not to be believed. You have not heard the whole; 
 the best still remains to be told. 32. There is not one soul 
 to be saved out of this house. 33. You have only to 
 command, we will do anything. 34 He is accustomed to 
 going to sleep over his book, and I take heed not to wake 
 him. 35. Nothing now hinders us from going away. 36. 
 What hindered you from seeing the emperor? 37. I was 
 busied in helping the old man, and did not believe I could 
 leave him. 38. Everything you say is pleasant to me. 39. 
 Truth is hard to find, but it is still harder to recognize it, 
 when one has found it. 40. I am too young to read 
 Herodotus. 41. He was too old to find new friends, but 
 he was still too young to die, therefore he lives lonely and 
 alone. 42. I have no wish to blame him, but I have also 
 no wish of seeing him again. 43. The hope of improving 
 him gives me the courage to blame him. 44. I had not 
 time enough to earn his confidence for myself. 45. He 
 had not the courage to avenge his father, so he lost the 
 right of respecting himself. 46. He has the misfortune to 
 have survived all his friends. 47. They praise the virtues 
 of this great man without imitating them. 48. Instead of 
 telling me the truth he was silent, and I went away with- 
 out recognizing him. 49. I did not think of blaming 
 him. 50. They had to content themselves with drinking 
 some water. 51. I eat his bread and live in his house ? 
 Never ! 52. Better be quite poor than not to live in one's 
 fatherland. 53. Oh, to avenge my emperor I then I can die 
 
392 EXERCISES. 
 
 liappy. 54. I have no wish to survive my emperor, who 
 was killed in the last war. 65. I hope never to leave the 
 country where I was born, and where all my friends have 
 lived and died. 
 
 ILLUSTRATIVE SENTENCES XTOTT. 
 PAKTICIPLES. 
 
 (350.) 1. ^tht l^anbelnbe Station blent ftd^ unb anberen 
 ^olfern. ((Sotjinger.) 2. S)u bift fein ©c^iiler me^r, fonbern ein 
 iDerbenber SO^eifter. (<5berg.) 3. ^ann folg' i<i) ber roeibenben 
 $eerbe. (®.) 4. SSarum follte td§ einen tanjenben Z^ct befurfien? 
 (^auff.) 5. ^eftern mu^te id^ mic^ munbern, tt)ie (Sie fid^ nad^ 
 einer fd^led^tfd^Iafenben ^aii)t, unb unter SSolfen t)on 'Zabah 
 xauiS), no(^ fo gan§ gut unb bei §umor ^ielten. (0(^.) 6. ®a§ 
 ^ud^ miirbe ntir bei htn t)or§abenben 5trbeiten gute 2)ienfte 
 tf}un. (@d§.) 
 
 (351.) 1. SDer ^id^ter fd^meigt Don taufenb burd^gettjetnten 
 ^ag^ unb 9^ad£)ten. (®.) 2. ^a§ 93^dbd^en ftanb mit gerungenen 
 ^anben. (^^rei.) 3. !5)er geiftreid^e, ^eitere Qtaliener trar liberaH 
 ein gern gefe^ener (^aft. (^berg.) 4. ®a§ bolle, au^gefuttte 
 Seben, foraie bie Ieict)te (Srmiibung nad^ gett)aner 5(rbeit, bte§ 
 alle§ mar gemig fc^on. ((Sbcr3.) 5. ^ie ^ftic^ten ber §au§frau 
 !ann tiielleid^t eine gemtet^ete [gemietete] §anb erfiiUen, bie 
 ^flic^ten ber 30fJutter nie. (Sujom.) 6. SDer ^onig faun nic^t affe 
 Derbiente 9}Zdnner fennen. (?eff.) 
 
 (352.) 1. 5(uc^ bitte ic^ mir burd^ Gulping ba^ SSerseid^mg 
 ber t)on mir ein^ufenbenben ^iidfier 5uruc!fc^ic!en §u laffen. (@4) 
 
 2. SllU k^ mic^ luegen eine§ angufaufenben Sanbgut§ fur bid^ 
 erfunbigte, inarb fogteid^ ein 50Zann berufen, ber mir berer ge^n 
 antrug. (3fc^o!!e.) 3. ^ie D^ac^a^^mung ift angeboren, ha^ ^a^'^ 
 gual^meube trirb nid^t leid^t erfannt. (®.) 
 
 (353.) 1. ©ic^ felbft getreu mar er ein (Sd^affenber, ein ^or* 
 mart^ftrebenber bi§ gu feinen U^ttn ^agen. (^enjatb.) 2. SDiefe 
 SSorte mirften it)ie frciftige 'iSr^enei auf hQxi ©enefenben. (Sbers.) 
 
 3. ^er gal^renbe ftieg manc^mal bie neben i^m ©i^enbe an, bag 
 
EXERCISES. 393 
 
 fie aud^ r)m5orc^e auf ha^, \m§> man fage. (?(ucrBacf).) 4. ^^ Un 
 ved§t tierlangenb nac^ ber ^Tu^fii^rung S^i^er Ijielfac^en ^been, 
 unb erinarte rec^t balb ettt)a§ babon. (@d).) 5. Unb tnenti ic^ 
 in bie S^i'^ii^f^ f^^^ "^^'^^ lacl^enb erfc^ien fie mir ! (€>awff-) 
 
 (354.) 1. 5(uf Sl^iinftigeS rec^ne nic^t, unb ^aijV md)t auf ^er* 
 fprod)ene§, !(ag^ an ^erIorene§ nid}t, unb ben!^ ni(^t an ger- 
 bro^ene§. [Md.) 2. ^erorbuet ift im encjlif^en (^efe^, ba§ 
 jeber 5Inge!Iagte burc^ @efcI)tt)orene t>on (Seine^gtei(f)en foil ge* 
 tic^tet n)erben. (@c^.) 3. (Sie befam tdgltc^ ettrag gefd)cn!t. (^.) 
 4. 3f§ IDu^te ©te bei il)m, unb fiiljlte ntirf) nid)t ganj ijon i^m 
 getrennt. (^rei.) 5. (Sr befam il)ren 5(nfur)rer gcfangen. (@(^.) 
 
 (356.) 1. ^ie SSette fc^manft unb fUe^t unb fc^i^eat, unb 
 beugt ftc!^ fcl^dumenb nieber. (@.) 2. (^uten 5lbenb, TOe ! fagte 
 t(^. ©ie nicfte nur tierbroffen mit bent ^opfe. (^ei}.) 8. SJ^einen 
 SBater? ftammelte U(rld), unb fd)aute bem 5lnberen bleic^ unb 
 fragenb in§ 51ntli^. ((Sberg.) 
 
 (357.) 1. ^on einem fo langen SSege fomntt ntan immer 
 ermiibet an. (®.) 2. 9^eben i^m reitenb, erijielt er au§ feinent 
 SRunbe 5Iu§!unft ilOer atte ^unfte. (^. ®r.) 3. -Da lag bie gran. . 
 in einem armltd)en ©arge bon tofjen ^(an!en gebettet. (Sbers.) 
 4. ©ie ^atte grauen in ber .^irc^e t)or folc^en ^itbern !nieenb 
 beten gefe^n. ((^orre^.) 5. gril^ aber Wax in bie ^ircl^e gegangen 
 unb ftanb neOen feinent gi^eunbe an bie '^f)nx gebriidt. (§et).) 6. 
 ^a inarf fic^ ber ©chiller tueinenb an bie ^ruft be§ Wti]kx^. 
 ((gbers.) 1. ^a erfdjien ploWid), alien unerujartet, ber berfc^oKene 
 93?eifter. (§e^.) 8. ^(It getuorben bet ununterbroc^ener ^efc^cif^ 
 tigung mit ber ^Tunft, tDar e§ iljm unmoglid), fid) ber 0en)ot)nten 
 ^^atigleit ganj gu entl)alten. (^. @r.) 9. (So Wax er ein paar 
 ©tragen n»cit gegangen, al§ er, urn eine ©de biegenb, eine Wdn-^ 
 nergeftalt t)or fic^ erOIirfte. (§e^.) 10. ^ie nja^re greube wan^ 
 belt auf ber (Srbe, tuie bie ma^re SSei^^eit, bon tuentgen gefel^en, 
 bon ber 3fiuf)e begteitet. (@to(berg.) 11. @on)ie bieglamme be§ 
 Sid^t§, and) umgetnenbet, ^inaufftra^It, fo, tjom ©d^idfat gebengt, 
 ftrebet ber C^ute empor. (Berber.) 12. SO^lod^teft bu begtiidt unb 
 n^eife enbigen be§ 2eben§ Sf^eife. ((^.) 13. ^^eitne^menb [teilnel^* 
 tnenb] an f einem guge, § off ten fie bie §errfcl^aft tnieber ju er^ 
 
394 EXEECISES 
 
 langen. (^, ®r.) 14. S8on ha ftd^ bxrect nnd^ Often tnenbenb, unb 
 im Zi)aU beg 5lnio marfc^irenb, tDiirbe er Slorenj am rafd^efteu 
 errei^t l^aben. (^. ®r.) 15. ^od^ enbfic^, nngetrieben burd^ 
 meineii D^eim, angelocft burd) greunbe, bte fi(^ Dor mir in bie 
 SScIt ^inaugbegeOen, waxh ber (Sntfc^Iu^ sefagt. (@.) 
 
 (359.) 1. ^ine ^tugel tarn geflogen; galt'g bir ober gait e§ 
 mir? (U§.) 2. (Sgmont fam anf ben 9}?ar!t geritten. (®.) 3. ^a 
 fommt einmat gefprungen fein jiingfter (Sbelfnab. (U^.) 4. ®a§ 
 nenne id^ gefc^Iafen. (Corner.) 5. (SoKft aud^ nic^t lange fiagen 
 . . nur frifd^, nur frifc^ gefnngen, unb aKe§ mxh n^ieber gut. 
 (e:^ami[fo.) 6. S^ic^t (ang gefeiert, frifd^ ! ®ie 9}?auerfteine ^er- 
 bei ! ^en ^ait, ben 9J?brtet jugefnijren ! {2>d).) 1. ^f^ofen anf 
 ben SSeg geftreut, unb be§ §arm§ Dergeffen ! (§oIti).) 
 
 (358.) 1. (St unterric^tete fie t)on ben au^erorbentlid^en 
 ©(^icffalen il^rer langft al§ tobt [tot] 6en)einten ^ante. (3fd)o'ffe.) 
 2. (£r begab fic^ anf ha§> i^m t)om ^urfiirften gef(^en!te Sanbgut. 
 (®rube.) 3. 5l((e geinbe ber t)om ^aifer ^ur ©riinbung unb 
 ^ultur feineg unermegHc^en 9fteic§e§ begonnenen ^f^eformen 
 erttjarteten nad^ feinem ^obe eine altgemeine ^egenretiolution. 
 (^fc^offc.) 4. 2Bo ber ©trom eine ^anbban! iibrig la^t, ha liegen 
 mit offenen 9f^adt)en, unbemegtid^ mie gel^ftude ^ingeftrecft, oft 
 hthtdt mit ^ogeln, bie ungefd)tad^ten S^orper ber ^ofobile. 
 (^um.) 
 
 THEME XrX. 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 1. We ought not to wake these sleeping children. 2. If 
 we do not wake the sleeping ones, they will not be ready 
 for the intended journey. 3. I said many a consoling word 
 to the weeping maiden, but she did not cease to lament 
 her lost friend. 4. Nothing can bring us back the lost 
 ones. 5. I have not yet received the letters sent in by 
 you, but I hope they will bring us the wished-for news. 
 6. Instead of giving me the promised present, the traveller 
 gave me nothing. 7. Tired by the long journey, he re- 
 mained q^uiet the whole day. 8. Who is the one sitting 
 
EXERCISES. 395 
 
 next you ? 9. I saw her coming into the church weeping 
 and wringing her hands. 10. Kneeling before the picture, 
 and praying, she tries to forget her unhappiness. 11. The 
 few words spoken by the judge taught the accused that 
 he had nothing more to hope. 12. He knew himself to 
 be parted forever from his friends and his home. 13. 
 Accompanied only by a few friends, he left Florence, and 
 turning toward the North, he soon reached the army. 14 
 Marching directly to Florence the army apj^eared 
 suddenly, unexpected by everyone, before the city. 15. A 
 man came running into the city, and brought the news 
 that the enemy so long feared by all would soon reach the 
 city. 16. Then one saw the women and children come 
 weeping and complaining into the market-place. 17. 
 Arrived in England, I asked after the sonof my long lost 
 but always warmly loved friend. 18. I hoped to find 
 him on the estate bought by his father and given by him 
 to this son. 19. But the son, enticed by bad friends, had 
 sold the estate inherited from his father and had betaken 
 himself to the city. 20. Turning around the corner, and 
 going a couple of streets further, I soon reached the house 
 hired by him. 21. Kiding beside me, he' begged me to 
 take part in his expedition. 22. On this way we met 
 many riding and driving. 23. It is impossible for a man 
 grown old in uninterrupted employment to abstain 
 entirely from his accustomed activity. 24. The children 
 came springing to me, and brought me the letter sent 
 by you. 
 
VOCABULARIES. 
 
 ABBBEVIATIONS. 
 
 accus. accusative. 
 adj. adjective. 
 adv. adverb. 
 art. article. 
 conj. conjunction. 
 dot. dative. 
 dem. demonstrative. 
 determ. determinative. 
 /. feminine noun. 
 gen. genitive. 
 impers. impersonal. 
 indec'L indeclinable. 
 insep'le inseparable. 
 inteij. interjection. 
 irdr. intransitive verb. 
 irreg. irregular. 
 
 m. masculine noun. 
 
 n. neuter noun. 
 
 N. New or weak conjugation. 
 
 num. numeral. 
 
 0. Old or strong conjugation. 
 
 vers, personal. 
 
 vl. plural. 
 
 poss. possessive. 
 
 ppl. past participle. 
 
 prep, preposition. 
 
 prow, pronoun. 
 
 pronH. pronominal. 
 
 reflex, reflexive. 
 
 rel. relative. 
 
 sep'le separable. 
 
 tr, transitive verb. 
 
 EXPLANATIONS. 
 
 Verbs of the Old or strong conjugation, and of the New or weak if 
 irregular, are so noted (by an added , or irreg. ^ respectively). Their 
 forms are to be sought in the list of irregular verbs. Verbs taking 
 fein as an auxiliary have an f added after them; to this an 1^ is added if 
 the verb takes either jein or l^aben. 
 
 Nouns have the sign of their gender appended, and. the endings of 
 their genitive singular (except of feminines) and nominative plural. 
 
 Adverbs in -ly derived from adjectives and having the same form 
 with them (79) are not separately entered. 
 
 References are made to the grammar by paragraph and division, as in 
 the grammar itself. 
 
398 
 
 GEEMAN-ENGLISH 
 
 I. GERMAN-ENGLISH YOCABULARY. 
 
 aB, odu. and sep'le prefix, off, away. 
 
 a^tlltnfctt^ tr. dismiss with thanks, 
 discharge. 
 
 5l6cnb, rn. -b§, -be. evening, eve. 
 sglorfe, /. curfew. 
 
 after, conj. but, however. 
 
 aBermalS, odi^' again, once more. 
 
 aB^iingen, 0. intr. depend, be de- 
 pendent. 
 
 abliefertt, tr. deliver, consign. 
 
 aftnel^men, 0. tr. take off or away, 
 remove, gain or obtain from 
 
 ttBrcifCtt, irdr. |. journey away, 
 
 depart, go away. 
 ttbrufen, 0. tr. call away. 
 Ebft^eu, m. -eiieg. abhorrence, 
 
 loathing. 
 ^M^tctl, m. -b6, -be. departure, 
 
 leave. 
 aM(t)(^0Cn/ 0. tr. strike off, cut 
 
 off. 
 ttftft^reiben, 0. tr. write off, copy; 
 
 write and refuse. 
 abfentien, {reg. or irreg.) tr. send 
 
 off or away, despatch. 
 $l6ftd)t, /. -ten. view, aim, inten- 
 tion, plan. 
 ttbflirc^ett, 0. tr. refuse, deny. 
 abtuei^fetn, irdr. \) or I change, 
 
 alternate. 
 %^fel, /. -tn. shoulder. 
 %fi^i, num. eight, f^t^n, eighteen. 
 
 '-m, eighty. 
 a^ten, tr. have regard for, respect; 
 
 esteem, consider, value. 
 af^tja^ng, odj. eight-year-old. 
 
 %dtv, rn. -x^, 3lct!er. cultivated 
 field, acre. sBttU, m. agriculture. 
 
 %t^t\, m. -Ig. nobility. 
 
 %bcr, /. -rn. vein. 
 
 al^nen, tr. have presentiment of, 
 forebode, suspect. 
 
 li^nli^, adj. {or adv.) like, re- 
 sembling. 
 
 ^^nung, /. -gen. presentiment, 
 foreboding. 
 
 aU, indef. pron. and pron'l adj.: col- 
 lectivdy, all, entire, whole ; dis- 
 iributivdy, every, each, any, alL 
 alleS, all, everything, everyone: 
 see 193. 
 
 alletn, adj. (or adv.) alone, single, 
 only. conj. only, but. 
 
 allel}em, adv. all that. 
 
 attcrt^riflti^, adj. most Christian 
 (title assumedbythe French Icings). 
 
 attgemein, adj. common to all, 
 general. 
 
 flttjUtliel, adv. all too much. 
 
 5llmttnttt^, n. -d}^, -d^e. almanach. 
 
 5ttmofcn, n. -n^, -n. alms, charity. 
 
 ClS, conj. as ; as being, in character 
 of ; after comparative, than ; after 
 negative, other than, except, but; 
 with past tense, when, as ; before 
 inverted clause, as if. — uft, 
 as if. 
 
 olfo, adv. and conj. thus, accord- 
 ingly, therefore. 
 
 alt, adj. (or adv.) old, aged, ancient. 
 sCnglifr^, adj. Old English. 
 
 fitter, n. -erS; -r. age, old-age, 
 epoch. 
 
VOCABULABY. 
 
 399 
 
 'd\i\i^,(idj. (or adv.) elderly, oldish. 
 
 5lmcri!tt, n. America. 
 
 5lmcrif ttttcr, m. -rg, -r. American. 
 
 ttmcrifanif^, adj. American. 
 
 5lmt, n. -te«, lemter. office, 
 charge, place, smanit, wi. bailiff, 
 steward, 
 
 ttmiifant cidj- amusing. 
 
 amiiftcrcn, tr. amuse. 
 
 an, adv. and seple prefix, on, 
 along, up. prep.: of position {with 
 dat. or accus.), at, by, against, 
 along ; of time, on, upon, at ; in 
 other relations, in respect to, in 
 the way of, in, at, to, by, of. 
 
 anbet, pron'l adj. other, else ; 
 different ; next, second: see 194, 
 193. 3c, 203.1a. 
 
 anbctd, adv. otherwise, else, diffe- 
 rently. 
 
 Oncrfcnncn, {irreg.) ir. recognize, 
 acknowledge. 
 
 ?lnfong, m. -gg, -cinge. beginning. 
 
 anfangcn, 0. tr. set about, begin, 
 xmdertake. intr. begin, originate. 
 
 5Cnfu^rcr, m. -x^, -r. leader. 
 
 ttltgcfiorcn, adj. (or adv.) inborn, 
 hereditary. 
 
 tLn^tf^OVCXlf'irdr. belong, appertain. 
 
 ongcltlb^ncn, tr. accustom, inure. 
 
 ttllgrcifcn, 0. tr. lay hold on, 
 seize, assail. 
 
 ^Ingjl, /. 2(engfte. anxiety, fear. 
 
 (ingfilii, adj. {or adv.) anxious, 
 distressed. 
 
 an^ttltCtt, 0. tr. hold on to, stop, 
 detain, intr. stop. 
 
 anIlOten, tr. listen to, hear to the 
 end. 
 
 anlaufen, tr. purchase, buy. 
 
 anflagen, tr. complain against, 
 accuse, charge. 
 
 anfommen, arrive, come; {voith auf 
 and accus. ) depend on, eg !omntt 
 i^m uicl)t barauf an, it is a 
 
 matter of no consequence to 
 him. 
 
 onfuntigcn, tr. announce, notify. 
 
 aniocfen, tr. allure, entice, tempt. 
 
 annel^men, 0. tr. take on, take, 
 accept, 
 
 an|)0^en, intr. knock (at the door). 
 
 Slnfl^ein, m. -u^. appearance, 
 semblance. 
 
 anfel^en, 0. tr. look on or at, re- 
 gard. 
 
 5lnfc^en, n. -ng, aspect, look. 
 
 %nftdbt, /. -ten. view, sight, opin- 
 ion. 
 
 5lnf|iru^, m, -d^eg, -iid^e. address, 
 claim. 
 
 anfiatt, prep, {with gen.) instead, 
 in place. 
 
 anfio^eit, 0. tr. push against, strike 
 against, intr. stumble, offend. 
 
 5lnttt^, n. -^eg, -^e, face, visage. 
 
 antragen, 0. tr. lay before some 
 one, propose, offer. 
 
 dttttCtbcn, 0. ir. drive on, impel. 
 
 nniXtUn, 0. tr. tread on ; com- 
 mence ; approach, accost. 
 
 5(nttlI0rt, /. -ten. answer, reply. 
 
 antttJOrtcn, tr. answer, reply. 
 
 anDertrauen, tr. confide, trust. 
 
 anlDenbeit, {reg. or irreg. ) tr. turn 
 or apply to something, apply, 
 employ. 
 
 ^(nja^I, /. number. 
 
 anjtel^en, 0. tr. draw on, attract. 
 refi. dress one's self, 
 
 ttltjuntcn, tr. kindle, light up. 
 
 5l|jfel, m. -% 5tepfe(. apple. 
 
 %pxi\, m. -U. AprU. 
 
 ?(r6ctt, /• -ten. work, labor ; re- 
 sult of labor, performance. 
 
 arbeitcn, tr. or intr. work, labor, 
 toil, 
 
 ^rficitcr, m. -rg, -r. workman. 
 
 3lrc^i|icl, n. -18. archipelago. 
 
 %xvn, m. -meg, -me. arm. 
 
400 
 
 GEEMAN-ENGUSH 
 
 arm, adj. (or adv.) poor, needy, in- 
 digent, unfortunate. 
 
 ormCttift^, adj. Armenian. 
 
 artnlt^, adj. {or adv.) poor, needy; 
 mean, paltry. 
 
 %Xtf /. -ten. kind, sort, manner. 
 
 crtig, adj. (or adv. ) well behaved, 
 good, obedient, polite, pretty. 
 
 SlrgCttCi, /. medicine, physic. 
 
 Slrjt, m. -te8,-tc. doctor, physician. 
 
 airmen [atmcn], intr. breathe. 
 
 ttUt^, adv. or conj. also, too, even. 
 after iDer, tt)a§, :c. ever, soever. 
 
 ttuf, adv. and sep'le prefix, up, up- 
 wards; upon, open. prep, (with 
 dat. and accus. ) upon, on, onto, 
 unto, to ; after, on, toward, 
 against, auf Uttb nicbcr. Tip and 
 down. 
 
 SlttfftaBe,/. -ben. task, problem. 
 
 aufgcbCtt, 0. tr. give up, resign. 
 
 aufgc^cn, 0. intr. f. go up, rise. 
 
 auf$eben, 0. tr. heave up, lift up, 
 raise. 
 
 auf^iiten, irUr. stop, cease, finish. 
 
 auffldren, tr. clear up, explain, 
 brighten. 
 
 OUfmtt^cn, tr. open, reflex, get up, 
 rise. 
 
 aufo|)fern, tr. offer up, sacrifice. 
 
 aufrt^ten, tr. set up, erect. 
 
 ?lufftt^, m. -^eg, -cii^e. something 
 set up, composition, essay. 
 
 OUfflC^en, 0. intr. I stand up, 
 rise ; get up. 
 
 auffudien, tr. seek out, look up, 
 search for. 
 
 ttUftl&Ult, 0. tr. open. 
 
 ttUfttlttJ^cn, intr, f. wake up, 
 awake. 
 
 5lu9C, n. -ge§, -gen. eye. in0 ^ugc 
 f off en, fix the eyes upon, uiltct 
 diet %U^tn, tete-a-tete. 
 
 ^Ugenblitf, m. -!eg, -fe. moment, 
 instant 
 
 5Cugufl, m. -t§. August. 
 
 OUgBrcitcn, tr. spread out. 
 
 5lu0brud), m. -d}^, -iid)e. outbreak. 
 
 ^U0bru(f, m. -d^, -iicfe. expres- 
 sion; phrase. 
 
 augfoHctt, 0. intr. |. faU out, 
 turn out, result. 
 
 Wulfit^rung, /. carrying out, exe- 
 cution. 
 
 ou^fuflcn, tr. fill out or up. 
 
 5tu^gan9, m. -ng8, -gange. issue, 
 event, outlet. 
 
 ttuSge^cn, 0. intr. f. go out, go 
 forth or away. 
 
 ouSgtttben, 0. tr. dig out. 
 
 tluSfunft, /. -iinftc. information, 
 
 CUSlttffcn, 0. tr. let out, let go; 
 omit. 
 
 auSxtibtn, 0. tr. rub out, rub open. 
 
 augfj^ta^cn, 0. tr. strike out, re- 
 ject. 
 
 au0fC^Ctt, 0. intr. look, appear. 
 
 au^ett, adv. out of doors, outside. 
 
 ttU^cr, prep, {with dat. ) outside of, 
 beside, except, au^et ftt^, beside 
 one's self. conj. except, unless. 
 ttU^cr tltt§, except that. 
 
 (iu^er, adj. outer, external. 
 
 auftcr^olfi, prep, {with gen.) out- 
 side, beyond. 
 
 ttUfecrorilcntUc^, adj. extraordinary. 
 
 OUgftire^cn, 0. tr. speak out, pro- 
 nounce. 
 
 aulflO^en, 0. tr. thrust out, expel, 
 utter abruptly. 
 
 ttttSt^cilen [steilcn], tr. deal out, 
 distribute. 
 
 aud^tel^en, 0. tr. draw out, extract, 
 undress, intr. \. move out, re- 
 
 95ttff), rri. -(^c8, -ad^t. brook. 
 JBttjftlcin, n. -ng, -n. brooklet. 
 baifen, 0. or K tr. bake. 
 6a)ien, tr. or intr. bathe. 
 
VOCABULAEY. 
 
 401 
 
 ©ttl^n,/. -nen. path, road, way. 
 
 bttltl, adv. soon, quickly. 
 
 93anb, n. -be^, -be. bond, fetter. 
 
 $antl, n. -beg, -anber. ribbon. 
 
 Biinbtgen, tr. control, subdue. 
 
 bang, adj. {or adv.) anxious, fear- 
 ful, eg ift or tt)irb einem bang, 
 one is or becomes fearful or 
 afraid. 
 
 95ttnf,/. -anfe. bench. 
 
 Sartor, in. -ren, -ren. barbarian, 
 savage. 
 
 Barmftcrjtg, ac|/. (or oc^u.) merciful, 
 charitable. 
 
 a^arm^crjigfeit,/. charity. 
 
 Satabter, w. Batarian. 
 
 Baucn, /r. build. 
 
 95aucr, m. -rg or -rn, -r or -xn. 
 peasant, rustic. 
 
 Saum, m. -me§, -aume. tree. 
 
 (eiingfltgen, tr. make anxious, 
 alarm. 
 
 Seanttoortung,/. -gen. answering, 
 reply. 
 
 Setter, m. -r§, -r. beaker, goblet. 
 
 kbauern, tr. pity, grieve for. 
 
 kterfCtt, ^r. cover. 
 
 bebcnfen, (irreg.) tr. think upon, 
 consider. 
 
 ficburfen, {irreg.) inir. {with gen.) 
 or tr. stand in need of, need, re- 
 quire. 
 
 93cfcl^l,m.-l«,-Ie. command, order. 
 
 Ibefel|len, O. tr. commend; com- 
 mand, order. 
 
 befinben, 0. reflex, find one's self, 
 be (in respect to health, etc). 
 
 6cfreien, tr. make free, free. 
 
 befreunben, tr. befriend, befreutts 
 
 bet, friendly, allied. 
 (egeBen, 0. reflex, betake one's 
 
 self, repair; occur. 
 begcgncn, intr. (with dat.) f. meet. 
 bcgel^en, 0. tr. go about; commit. 
 Begel^ren, tr, desire, covet. 
 
 kginnen, 0. tr. begin. 
 
 (egleiten, tr. accompany, escort. 
 
 Seglcitcr, m. -rS, -r. companion, 
 escort. 
 
 bcgliirfen, tr. give happiness to, 
 make happy, bless. Beglitlft, 
 blessed, happy. 
 
 begititgen, reflex, content one's self, 
 be satisfied. 
 
 Bcgrcifcn, 0. tr. comprehend. 
 
 Segriff, m. -ffg, -ffe. comprehen- 
 sion, idea. 
 
 Bc^aglil^, adj. {or adv.) pleasing, 
 comfortable. 
 
 Befallen, 0. tr. hold on to, keep, 
 retain. 
 
 Bel^au|)ten, tr. maintain, assert^ de- 
 clare. 
 
 Bel^ent), adj. {or adv.) handy, nim- 
 ble, quick. 
 
 Bet, sq)'le preflx and adv. near, by, 
 beside, prep, {with dat.)hy, near; 
 at, in, with, among; at the house 
 of. 
 
 Beibe, adj. both, the two. 
 
 Betna^e, adv. near, about, almost. 
 
 Seif^Jtei, n. -Ig, -le. illustration, 
 example. 
 
 Bei^en, 0. tr. bite. 
 
 Seiftanb, m. -b§. assistance, help. 
 
 Befannt, adj. {or adv.) known, 
 noted, acquainted; as noun, ac- 
 quaintance. 
 
 Befommen, 0. tr. get, obtain, re- 
 ceive. 
 
 Befrdnjen, tr. adorn with a gar- 
 land, crown. 
 
 Befummern, tr. afflict, trouble, con- 
 cern. 
 
 BeleBett, tr. enliven, revive. 
 
 BcleBren, tr. teach, inform, correct. 
 
 Belo^nen, tr. reward, recompense. 
 
 Bemiidltigen, reflex, {with gen.) take 
 possession of, get into one's 
 power, seize. 
 
m 
 
 CERMAN-ENGHSH 
 
 Betnetfett^ tr, remark, observe. 
 
 ©emcrfung,/. -gen. remark, ob- 
 servation. 
 
 Bcitfiiicn, tr. envy. 
 
 BettU^en, tr. turn to use, use. 
 
 BcoBdt^teit^ tr. observe, watcli. 
 
 Bequemen, tr. make convenient. 
 reflex, accomodate one's self, sub- 
 mit. 
 
 Sercbtfamfeit [SctCbW, /. elo- 
 quence. 
 
 Bcteit, cidj. ready, prepared. 
 
 BctCttcn, tr. make ready, prepare. 
 
 Bctcit^, cidv. already. 
 
 jSBerg, rn. -geg, -ge. mountain. 
 sUlttltn, m. miner. ?|)fttll, m. 
 mountain-path. 
 
 S5ctttf, m. -fg, -fe. calling, voca- 
 tion, office, profession. 
 
 Bcrufcn, 0. tr. call upon, summon. 
 
 Beritimt, past ppl. of Bctiil^men, 
 famous, renowned. 
 
 Bcft^ttfttgcn, tr. busy, employ, oc- 
 cupy. 
 
 JBcft^ttftigung, /. -geit. employ- 
 ment, business. 
 
 JBeft^cil^cnftcit /• discretion, mod- 
 esty. 
 
 Bef^retBen, 0. tr. describe. 
 
 Beftnnen, 0. reflex, bethink one's 
 self, reflect. 
 
 Beft^ett/ 0. tr. possess. 
 
 Scft^cr, in. -rg, -r. possessor. 
 
 iScft^ung,/. -gen. possession, prop- 
 erty. 
 
 BcfonJier^, adv. in particular, 
 especially. 
 
 Scfonncnl^cit, /. -ten. discretion. 
 
 Bef|ire$en, 0. tr. speak about, talk 
 
 of, discuss. 
 Bcffcr, adj. {or adv. : comp. of gut), 
 
 better. 
 Bcffcrn, tr. make better, improve, 
 
 correct. 
 Befie^en^ 0, tr* corrupt, bribe. 
 
 BefleBen, 0. tr. stand up, endure* 
 inir. stand firm, insist. 
 
 BefteUen, tr. arrange, order. 
 
 Befiimmen, tr. fix, determine, de- 
 sign. 
 
 BcfircBcn, re/lex. exert one's self, 
 endeavor, as noun, endeavor, ef- 
 fort. 
 
 Befu^cn, tr. go and see, visits call 
 upon. 
 
 Betett, intr. pray, offer prayer. 
 
 Bettad^ten, tr. dwell upon, con- 
 sider, look at, regard. 
 
 Betragen, 0. tr. amount to. reflex, 
 behave, as noun, bearing, con- 
 duct. 
 
 B etrcff cn, 0. tr. befall, surprise. Bc« 
 troffen, surprised, taken aback. 
 
 ajctt, n. -tte§, -tte or -iter or 
 -tten. bed. 
 
 95ctteIBrob, n. bread obtained by 
 begging. 
 
 Bettein, intr. ask alms, beg. 
 
 Betten, tr. make the bed, bed. 
 
 Settler, m. -r8, -r. beggar. 
 
 Beugen, tr. bend, bow, incline. 
 
 Setttel, w. -U, -t. small bag, 
 money bag, purse. 
 
 Beuottmtti^ttgen, tr. bestow full 
 power upon. SeHottmtt^ttgt, 
 
 (past ppl. as noun) plenipoten- 
 tiary, agent. 
 
 Betnegen, 0. and JV. ti\ induce; 
 move, stir, agitate. 
 
 Setuegung, /• - gen. movement, 
 agitation. 
 
 Betoeinen, tr. weep over, bewail. 
 
 BetDCifcn, 0. tr. point out, show, 
 prove. 
 
 BetDUnBern, tr. admire. 
 
 Beja^len, tr. pay. 
 
 Bejeugen, tr. bear witness to, testify. 
 BejtDingcn, 0. tr. subdue, van- 
 quish. 
 l8iBliat§Cf, /. -fen. library. 
 
OEEMAN-ENGtISH 
 
 403 
 
 Biegeit/ 0. ir. bow, bend. 
 38tcr, n. -reg, -re* beer. 
 bteten, 0. tr. bid, offer. 
 ISBilil, n. -beS, -cr. picture, image. 
 
 ff^mtt, m. sculptor. 
 Bilt)en, tr. shape, form, build, 
 
 train. 
 fiittig, adj, (or adv.) reasonable, 
 
 fair, just ; cheap. 
 IStnbe, /. -en. something bound 
 
 on, bandage. 
 Btnben, 0. tr. bind, tie, confine, 
 
 constrain. 
 (tnnen, adv. within, prep, (with 
 
 dot. or gen.) within, inside of. 
 6i0, adv. and prep, as far as, until, 
 
 till, to. conj. (for bi§ ba^) till 
 
 the time that, till, until. — na^, 
 
 as far as. — ju, until. 
 3SBt0(^en, n. -n^, -n. little bit, 
 
 Httle. 
 S3if^0f, m, -% -ofe. bishop; 
 
 bishop (a kind of drink). 
 JBtffcn, m. -n§, -n. bit, morsel. 
 fditit, /. -ten. request, prayer. 
 Bitten, 0. tr. ask, request, beg. 
 Bitter, cidj. {or ado.) bitter. 
 BIa§, adj. (or adv. ) pale. 
 fdhii, n. -tte«, -atter. leaf ; leaf 
 
 of book, page. 
 Bltttt, adj. (or adv.) blue. 
 BleiBctt, 0. intr. f. continue, stay, 
 
 remain. 
 Bleit^, adj. (or adv.) pale, pallid, 
 
 faded. 
 BUtfen, tr. glance, look. 
 Blinil, adj. (or adv.) blind. 
 Blot, ^dJ' i'^'"' <^<^v-) bare, stripped, 
 
 destitute, mere. Bfo^fietteit, tr. 
 
 expose, lay open. 
 Blitl^en, irdr. bloom, blossom, 
 
 flower. 
 Slumc, /. -men. flower, blossom. 
 ^Ittmcttmttlcn# w. flower paint- 
 ing. 
 
 93lut, n. - teS. blood; race, 
 ^lut^tro^jfcn, m. drop of blood. 
 mmt bit], f. -t^cn. blossom, 
 
 bloom. 
 95oten, m. -ens, -oben. bottom; 
 
 ground, floor ; garret. 
 95ol^CniCr, w. -r6, -r. Bohemian, 
 
 gypsy. sttlCtB, n. gypsy- woman. 
 93dW^/ ^- ~f "/ ~^tt» Bohemian. 
 Botgeit, tr. borrow, lend. 
 Bo0 or Bbfc, adj. (or adv.) bad, 
 
 evil, wicked, angry, malicious. 
 SBof etc i^t, w. villain, scamp, rascal. 
 93u0!^eit, /. badness, wickedness, 
 
 anger. 
 Soten, rn. -n6, -en. messenger. 
 SrantJ, m. -be§, -dnbe. fire, con- 
 flagration, brand. 
 Brttttt^en, tr. use, employ ; be in 
 
 want of, need. 
 BrttUen, tr. brew. 
 Btaun, adj. (or adv.) brown. 
 BtdUfen, i^tr. move on tumultu- 
 
 ously, roar. 
 iiBtaut, /. -ante, bride; (in Oer- 
 
 many betrothed). 
 Bteit, cidj. (or adv.) broad, wide. 
 Bremen, 0. ir. break. 
 Btennen, (irreg. ) tr. or intr. bum. 
 Srett, w. - tte^, -tter. board, plank. 
 Srief, m. -fc§, -fe. letter. 
 Bricflit^, adj. (or adv.) by letter, 
 
 written. 
 Bringen, (irreg.) tr. bring, fetch. 
 93roi, n. -beg, -be. bread, loaf of 
 
 bread. 
 93nirfc, /. -en. bridge. 
 ^ruter, w. -x%, -iiber. brother. 
 Sriinnlein, n. -n8, -n. little 
 
 spring. 
 
 93rui!, /. -iifte. breast. 
 
 ^uBe, m. -en, -en. boy, youth. 
 
 S5ut^, n. -t^eg; -iic^er. book. 
 
 »tt(i^brurfetfun|t, /. art of book- 
 printing. 
 
404 
 
 VOCABULABY. 
 
 SBuntl, m. -be§, -unbe. bond, tie; 
 
 league, compact. 
 fiUnt,cidj. (or adv.) many colored, 
 
 gay, variegated, bright. 
 iSBurgcr, wi. -rg, -r, townsman, 
 
 burgher, commoner. 
 lEBufen^ m. -n§, -n. bosom, breast. 
 
 ^arbtnal, m. -I^/ -le. cardinal. 
 
 ^Wi^f ^' -ten, -ten. (/. stin.) 
 christian. 
 
 G^l^rificnftcit /• Christendom. 
 
 €^rijtCttfc^ttttr, /. band of christi- 
 ans. 
 
 (^rifHit^, adj. (,or adv.) christian. 
 
 G^igarre, /. -reiu cigar. 
 
 6^ontotr, n. -re§, -re. counting 
 house, office. 
 
 @iOU|)e, n. railway car or car- 
 riage. 
 
 ha {or llttr), o,dv. there, then, at 
 that place, under those circum- 
 stances, after rdative, -ever, -so- 
 ever, in composiiion with preps, 
 see 154.3, 166.4, 180 
 
 tiaBci, ado. thereby; by it or them 
 or that: see 154.3, 166.4, 180, 
 and bei. — fcin, be present, take 
 part. 
 
 2>at^, n. -(^e§, -cid^er. roof. 
 
 bafitr, adv. therefor, for it or that 
 or them: see 154.3, 166.4, 180, 
 and fiir. 
 
 bagegen, adv. against it or them 
 or that: see 154.3, 166.4, 180, 
 and gcgen. 
 
 htifitX, adv. thence, therefore. 
 
 ^amc, /. -men. lady. 
 
 bamtt, conj. in order that. 
 ilammern, intr. become dusk. 
 JDttnf, m. -M, gratitude, thanks. 
 iJttnfcn, tr. thank. 
 bann, adv. then, at that time. 
 Hv, see ta. 
 
 tiaran, adv. at or on it or that of 
 
 them: see 154.3, 166.4, 180, 
 
 and an. 
 tliirauf, adv. thereupon, upon or 
 
 on it or them or that: see 154.3, 
 
 166.4, 180, and anf. 
 baraul, ad^). out of it or them or 
 
 that: see 154.3, 166.4, 180, and 
 
 anf. 
 baretlt, adv. thereinto {^^accus. 
 
 with in), into or to it, etc. : see 
 
 154.3, 166.4, 180, and in. 
 btttin (brin, or barinncn), adv. 
 
 therein (= dat. with in), in it, etc. : 
 
 see 154.3, 166.4, 180, and in. 
 tldtob, ad'\ on account of it, etc. : 
 
 see 154.3, 166.4, 180, and 
 
 oh. 
 tmtficUctt, tr. set forth, exhibit, 
 
 represent. 
 batum, adv. therefore, about it, 
 
 etc. : see 154.3, 166.4, 180, and 
 
 urn. 
 lJtt0, see bcr. 
 
 £)afein, n. -n§. being present; ex- 
 istence. 
 ba^e^cn, 0. intr. f. stand there. 
 baucrftaft, adj. {or adv.) lasting, 
 
 enduring. 
 bauern, intr. last, endure. 
 babon, adv. thereof; of or from it, 
 
 etc. : see 154.3, 166.4, 180, and 
 
 t)on. 
 ha^U,adv. thereto, to or for it, etc. : 
 
 see 154.3, 166.3, 180, and gu. 
 bcfiatticrcit, intr. debate. 
 December, m. -rg. December. 
 1- tJCtlt, poss. adj. thy, thine. 
 2. bcin (or ticincr), gen. sing. o/bu. 
 betnig, poss. pro. thine. 
 Uenfcn (irreg.) tr. or intr. think; 
 
 think of, call to mind. 
 ttCItlt, adv. then, in that case. tS 
 
 fet — tafi, unless, conj. than 
 
 (for aU), beginning a clause, for. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 405 
 
 ticnno^f conj. even in that case, 
 notwithstanding. 
 
 ber (bie, ba§), demonstr. pron. and 
 adj. this or this one, that or 
 that one, etc.; as emphatic 
 pers. pron, he, she, it, they. 
 def. article, the. rel. pron. who, 
 which, that; rarely ^ he who, 
 that which, etc, 
 
 Dcricnigc (bieienige, ba^ienige), de- 
 term, adj. and pron. that or that 
 one, those. 
 
 bcrfctftc (biefetbe, bo^fclbe). determ. 
 adj. and pron. the same; he, she, 
 it, etc. 
 
 ^CrtOif^, m. -f(^e6, -jd^c. dervish 
 (IVIohammedan monk). 
 
 bclftttlft {or bC^^ttlb), adv. or conj. 
 therefore. 
 
 tieff enungeat^tet, adv. or conj. never- 
 theless. 
 
 ilCJIO, adv. so much the (before a 
 comparative) ; JC . . . Jjcflo, the 
 . . . the. 
 
 beutf^, adj. German, as noun: m. 
 a German; n. the German lan- 
 guage. 
 
 ^Ctttft^Ittttll, n. Germany. 
 
 bit^t, adj. {or adv.) thick, dense. 
 
 ttl^tcn, tr. produce as the result of 
 thinking, compose {especially as 
 poetry), invent. 
 
 ^i(^tcr, m. -r§, -r. poet. 
 
 ^i^tfun ft,/, art of poetry, poetry. 
 
 tit, seettx, 
 
 titntn, intr. {with da,(.) serve, be 
 of service to, assist. 
 
 Wiener, m. -r§, -r. servant. 
 
 ^icncrfl^aft, /. servants {collec- 
 tively). 
 
 ^tenjl, m. -tc§, -te. service, em- 
 ployment. 
 
 ^ien^ttg, m. Tuesday. 
 
 ilic0 (biefer, biefe, biefeS), dem adj. 
 pron. this or that, this one or that 
 
 one; the latter, sinaf, adv. this 
 time. 
 
 ^ing, n. -ge6, -ge. thing, matter. 
 
 bitCCt, adj. {or adv.) direct. 
 
 tot^, adv. and conj. though, yet, 
 nevertheless, however; after all, 
 at least, surely; sometimes simply 
 but; or only for emphasis. 
 
 doctor, rn. -r^, -reu, doctor. 
 
 ^Olk, ^' -^^^, -c^e. dagger. 
 
 2)0m, m. -meg, - me. cathedral. 
 
 bonncrtt, intr. thunder. 
 
 ^Onncrjttt0, m. Thursday. 
 
 tlO|)|)C(n> tr. double. 
 
 tojljielt, adj. {or adv.) double. 
 
 ^orf, n. -fe§, -ovfer. village, ham- 
 let. 
 
 tott, adv. there, in that place, 
 yonder. 
 
 ttau^en, adv. outside, out of 
 doors. 
 
 txt^tn, tr. turn, twist. 
 
 iirci, num. three, sjc^lt, thirteen. 
 '-m, thirty. 
 
 brinncn, see iitttinncn. 
 
 iiritt, num. adj. third. 
 
 txof^tn, tr. or intr. {with dai.) 
 threaten, menace. 
 
 tltb^ncn, intr. roar, ramble, groan. 
 
 brurfcn, tr. print. 
 
 briiden, tr. press, clasp, jam. 
 
 bu, pers. pron. thou. 
 
 tuxnm,adj. {or adv.) stupid, dull. 
 
 ^umm^cit,/. -ten. stupidity. 
 
 tunf el, adj. {or adv. ) dark, gloomy. 
 
 biinfcl^ttft, adj. {or adv.) arro- 
 gant. 
 
 titnfcn, intr. {with dat.) seem, ap- 
 pear; seem or appear to. 
 
 Biinn, adj. {or adv.) thin, slender. 
 
 tlUt(^^ adv. and seple or insep'le 
 prefix, through, throughout, prep. 
 {with accus.) through; through- 
 out, during; by means of, by. 
 
 tlur^ttU0, adv. throughout 
 
406 
 
 GEKMAN-ENGLISH 
 
 2>ttr(^mttrf^, m. -fc^eg, -arfd)e. 
 marclaing through. 
 
 ^Urc^mcff cr, m. -r§, -r. diameter. 
 
 iiurt^ft^rcitcn, 0. tr. step through, 
 walk through. 
 
 t^ttx6)tohtn, tr. rage through. 
 
 tiur^tuetnen, tr. weep through. 
 
 IlUtfcn, (irreg.) tr. be permitted or 
 allowed, feel authorized, dare, 
 need: see 253, 
 
 turfien or burficn, intr. or impers. 
 thirst, be thirsty. 
 
 burfttg, adj. {or adv.) thirsty. 
 
 buffer, ctdj. {or adv.) gloomy, ob- 
 scure, dusky. 
 
 tbtn, adj. {or adv.) even, level, 
 plain, adv. evenly; usimlly, just, 
 exactly, precisely, sfo, adv. in 
 like manner, likewise. 
 
 ^htnt, /. -en. even or level tract, 
 plain. 
 
 @(^0, n. -c^og. echo. 
 
 ^dt,f' -!en. edge, corner. 
 
 ttiti, adj. {or adv.) of noble birth; 
 noble, exalted, sfnahc, tn. page. 
 
 Clle, adv. sooner, earlier, conj. 
 sooner than, before, ere. 
 
 Cllcr, adv. sooner, earlier, rather. 
 
 ®^tC, /. -ren. honor, glory, good 
 repute. 
 
 elftren, tr. honor, respect, esteem. 
 
 ^^rcnmtttttt, ra. man of honor. 
 
 e§rlt(^, adj. {or adv.) honorable, 
 honest. 
 
 Clrtoitrilig, adj. {or adv.) worthy 
 of honor, respectable. 
 
 ti, interj. why! oh ! 
 
 eifrig, adj. {or adv.) eager, ardent. 
 
 Cigcn, adj. {or adv.) own, belong- 
 ing to one's self; real; odd. 
 
 ©igent^um [4nm], n. -m§, -umer. 
 
 property. 
 eigenttil^, adj, proper, true. adv. 
 
 properly speaking, really. 
 
 cilcn, irdr. \ or ij, or reflex, hurry, 
 
 hasten. 
 ciUg, adj. {or adv.) hasty, quick, 
 
 hurrying. 
 
 1. tin, adv. and seple prefix, in, into, 
 corresponding as prefix to in as 
 prep.; in composition with ad- 
 verbs, into, or in with accus. 
 
 2. tin, num. one; a person, they, 
 one. 
 
 3. cin, indef. article, an, a. 
 etnanber/ indecl. pron. one an- 
 other, each other. 
 
 einbttten, tr. {with reflex. pr(m. in 
 dat.) form in one's mind, imag- 
 ine, fancy. 
 
 etncrlei, adj. of one sort, the same, 
 indifferent. 
 
 Cinfa^, adj. simple. 
 
 etngebortn, adj. inborn, native. 
 
 tini^, adj. {or adv.) one, united, 
 accordant, in pi. some, a few. 
 
 Cinlabcn, 0. tr. invite. 
 
 ^inltttung, /. -gen. invitation. 
 
 einmal, adv. once, one time; once 
 for all. 
 
 Ctnnc^mcn, 0. tr. take in, receive, 
 accept; take possession of, capti- 
 vate, prepossess, etngenemmeit, 
 prejudiced. 
 
 C^innc^mcr, m. -x^, -r. collector. 
 
 etttritlfen, intr. f. move in, enter. 
 
 tin\av\,adj. (^orodu.) lonely, alone. 
 
 Cinfc^lttfen, 0. irdr. f. fall asleep. 
 
 einfj^rcificn, 0. tr. write in or 
 down, inscribe. 
 
 etnfcnbeit, tr. send in, remit. 
 
 ^inftt^t, /. -ten. insight, intelli- 
 gence. 
 
 cinfi, adv. one time, once (in the 
 past); some day (in the future). 
 
 Cittflcttcn, tr. put in. reflex, pre- 
 sent one's self, appear. 
 
 ctntretcn, 0. intr. f. step in, 
 enter. 
 
VOCABTJLAEY, 
 
 407 
 
 C^tnUcrjlantmi^ [m§], n. -ffe§,-ffe. 
 
 understanding, agreement. 
 
 einjeln^ (^dj. single, individual. 
 
 CtnjtCl^cn, 0. tr. draw in or on. 
 inir. move in. 
 
 cinjig, adj. (or adv.) only, single, 
 sole, unique. 
 
 ^IHnH^n, /. -nen. railroad, rail- 
 way. 
 
 tiki, adj. vain. 
 
 ®(C9tC, /. -ten. elegy (plaintive 
 poem). 
 
 tltnti, adj, {or adv.) miserable, 
 wretched. 
 
 clf, num. eleven. 
 
 ©item, pi parents. sfrcuilC, /. 
 parental joy. 
 
 ®m|lftttt0, m. -gg. reception, in — 
 nt^mtn, receive. 
 
 Cmjlfttngcn, 0. tr. receive, accept. 
 
 ©nUlpintlUng,/. -gen. feeling, sen- 
 sation. 
 
 CXttpOXf adv. and seple prefix, aloft, 
 upward, on higli. sfcimcn, spring 
 
 tip. sf^ttucn, look up. sflrckn, 
 
 strive upward, st^cilcn, reflex. 
 
 divide itself upward. 
 (Snte, n. -be§, -ben. end, issue, 
 
 conclusion, am — , in or at the 
 
 end, finally, ju — , at an end. 
 
 — ntttt^cn, {withdat.) put an end 
 
 to, stop. 
 Ctttligcn, tr. stop, finish. 
 cnt^n^, fiidj. (or adv.) final, con- 
 cluding, last. 
 CngC, adj. [or adv.) narrow. 
 (gngd, m. -U, -I angel. 
 en gen, tr. narrow, contract. 
 (^n^imttv, m. -rg, -r. (/. stin) 
 
 inhabitant of England. 
 englif^, adj. {or adv.) English. 
 Cttts, inseple prefix, forth, from, 
 
 out, away: see 307.3. 
 entfiefiren, tr. {orintr, xoith gen.) do 
 
 without. 
 
 entBtntien, 0. tr. unbind, set freey 
 release, absolve. 
 
 entMiJ^en, tr. denude, uncover. 
 
 ©ntberfung, /. -gen. discovery, 
 disclosure. 
 
 entfcrncn, tr. put far off, remove. 
 reflex, go off, withdraw. 
 
 entgegen, adv. and sep'le prefix. 
 against, toward, j^rep. {with 
 dative preceding) against, to 
 meet, sfiel^en/ stand against, 
 oppose. 
 
 ent^ttlten, 0. tr. hold away; hold 
 in, contain, reflex, keep from, 
 abstain. 
 
 entlttjlen, 0. tr. let go, permit to 
 leave, dismiss, absolve. 
 
 entlttttfcn, 0. intr. I run away, 
 escape. 
 
 entlebigen, tr. set free, deliver. 
 
 tniiodtXif tr. entice or allure away; 
 elicit. 
 
 cntrUden, tr. carry away, trans- 
 port. 
 
 entfttgen, intr. {with dat.) renounce, 
 give up. 
 
 entft^eibcn, 0. {or N.) tr. decide, 
 determine. cnlfd)eiJlCntJ, deci- 
 sive. 
 
 cntf^lie§cn, 0. tr. disclose, reflex. 
 make up one's mind, decide. 
 
 ©ntf^lu^, m. -ffeg, -iiffe. resolu- 
 tion, resolve. 
 
 Cntf(^uIti9Cn, tr. exculpate, ex- 
 cuse, reflex, excuse one's self. 
 
 C^ntfC^en, n. horror, dread. 
 
 entjicjen, 0. Mr. f. arise, spring 
 forth, originate. 
 
 entto Ctcr, conj. either {followed by 
 
 uber or). 
 
 enttntlfeln, tr. unwrap, unfold; de- 
 velop, solve, explain. 
 
 entjtel^en, 0. tr. withdraw, remove 
 or take away. 
 
 tXf P^rs. pron, he. 
 
408 
 
 GEKMAN-ENGUSH 
 
 tXs, insep'le prefix, see 307.4. 
 erBarnten, tr. move to pity, reflex. 
 
 pity. 
 etBauett, tr. build up, erect. 
 
 1. ^Xhe, m. -en, -en. heir, in- 
 heritor. 
 
 2. @rBe, n. -be^. inheritance. 
 etBU^^ cidj' {or adv.) hereditary. 
 txhiidtn, tr. catch sight of, per- 
 ceive. 
 
 (EtBlJnnj, wi. hereditary prince. 
 
 crBrcd)Cn, 0. tr. break open. 
 
 C^ri^e, /. -ben. earth, ground; 
 world. ©tbcntttUm, m. earth, 
 surface of earth, sflrit^, wi. zone, 
 region. 
 
 erfal^ren, 0. tr. come upon, make 
 experience of, learn. 
 
 C^rfttftrung, /. -gen. experience. 
 in — BringCtt, learn by expe- 
 rience, learn. 
 
 etflnben, 0. tr. find out, invent. 
 
 CtftCUCn, tr. give pleasure to, glad- 
 den, reflex, {with gen.) enjoy, re- 
 joice at. 
 
 etfutteit/ tr. fill; fulfil, perform. 
 
 tX^e^tn, 0. Mr. I go on, fare, 
 happen. 
 
 crgreifcn, 0. tr. lay hold of, seize 
 upon. 
 
 txf^dhcn, cidj. {or adv.) elevated, 
 lofty, subUme. 
 
 erl^alteit, 0. tr. obtain, receive; 
 keep, preserve. 
 
 erl^eBen, 0. tr. heave up, lift, ele- 
 vate; extol. 
 
 Ctl^cif^cn, tr. require, demand. 
 
 Cr^iircn, tr. hear, hear of; grant. 
 
 crittttcrn, tr. remind, reflex, {with 
 gen.) remember, recall. 
 
 ©rinncrung, /. -gen. remem- 
 brance, memory. 
 
 erialten, reflex, catch cold. 
 
 erfennen, {irreg.) tr. perceive, rec- 
 ognize. 
 
 erfcnntni§ \^n\S\, /. -ffc percep- 
 tion, knowledge. 
 
 %xitX, m. -rg, -r. balcony. 
 
 CtflatCtt/ tr. make clear, explain ; 
 declare, announce. [inquire. 
 
 erfuntligen, reflex, make inquiries, 
 
 etiattgcn,, tr. reach after, obtain, 
 reach, attain. 
 
 eriauben, tr. allow, permit. 
 
 CXhhtU, tr. live to see, experience, 
 have happen to one. 
 
 Ctliigcn, 0. tr. produce by lying, in- 
 vent, eriogen, fabricated, false. 
 
 Crmortcn, tr. murder. 
 
 Ctmiibcn, tr. weary, tire. 
 
 ^rmittiung, /• weariness, fatigue. 
 
 ©rncucrung, /. -gen. renewal, 
 renovation. 
 
 ©rnictJtigung, /. -gen. lowering, 
 humiliation, abasement. 
 
 C^tttH, m. -teg. earnestness, grav- 
 ity, seriousness. 
 
 Crnfi, cidj' {or adv.) earnest, seri- 
 ous, grave. 
 
 tXObtxn, tr. overcome, conquer. 
 
 CroffllClt, tr. open, reveal, disclose. 
 
 tX(\\lidtn, tr. quicken, revive, re- 
 fresh. 
 
 ettett^en, tr. reach, arrive at. 
 
 etf^etnen, 0. intr. f. shine forth, 
 come in sight, appear. 
 
 Ctft^rcrfcn, 0. (or N.y Mr. f. {or 
 reflex.) be frightened or startled. 
 
 crfj^rcrflil^, adj. {or adv.) fright- 
 ful, dreadful. 
 
 crfl, adj. first, adv. firstly, at first. 
 
 crftcigcn, 0. tr. ascend, climb. 
 
 txioncn, Mr. sound forth. 
 
 Ctttttgcn, 0. tr. endure, bear. 
 
 ertoa^en, Mr. f. awake, be 
 aroused. 
 
 ettna^len, tr. elect, select, choose. 
 
 tXtOaxttn, tr. wait for, expect. 
 
 crtocifcn, 0. tr. show, prove, 
 render. 
 
VOCABTJLAKY. 
 
 409 
 
 CrttJCtBctt, 0. tr. procure by effort, 
 
 earn, gain. 
 erhlicbcrn, tr, give back; return, 
 
 answer. 
 erjal^Ien, tr. relate, recount, tell. 
 C^rja^Iung,/. -gen. tale, story. 
 
 etjiel^en, 0. tr. educate, train. 
 
 ^rjic^cr, m. -rS, -r. educator, 
 teacher. 
 
 C^rjicftung, /. education, training. 
 
 t§,pers. pron. it: see 154.3,4. 
 
 C^fcl, m. -U, -I ass, donkey. 
 
 cffcn, 0. tr. eat. as noun, meal, re- 
 past. 
 
 etltC^, pron. adj. {chiefly in pi.) 
 some, sundry. 
 
 etttiad, indef. pron. {indeclinable) 
 something, somewhat, used ad- 
 verbially, in some measure, a 
 little, rather: see 188. 
 
 1. CUer, poss. adj. your, yours. 
 
 2. CUCr, gen. pi. of iu. of you, your. 
 @ur0^a, n. -Qg. Europe. 
 CUrO|ittif^, adj. European. 
 
 etotg, adj. {or adv.) everlasting, 
 
 eternal. 
 ©yem^tttr, n. -re§, -re* specimen, 
 
 copy. 
 ^CCllCttJ, /. -gen. excellency. 
 
 fal^ren, 0. intr. f or I}, fare, go, 
 drive, be drawn in a wagon; go 
 in a boat, sail. tr. drive, row. 
 fpttjicren fn^rcn, take a drive. 
 
 ^tt^rt, /. - ten. journey, voyage, 
 drive. 
 
 foacn, 0. intr. I fall 
 
 foils, conj. in case, if. 
 
 f alf(^, adj. {or adv.) false. 
 
 ^amilit,/. -ien. family. 
 
 ^tt§, n. -ffe§, -affer. vat, cask. 
 
 fttffcn, tr. hold, contain; lay hold 
 of, grasp, seize; comprehend, 
 conceive. 
 
 fttfl, adv. almost, nearly. 
 
 fttUi, adj. {or adv.) decayed ; lazy, 
 indolent. [{French). 
 
 i^auteuil, n. -(g, -(g. armchair 
 
 §c6ruar m. -rg. February. 
 
 ^Clicr, /. feather, pen. 
 
 fcl^Icn, intr. {with dot.) fail, be 
 wanting (to), be deficient; be in 
 fault, err. c0 fc^lt ttJl . . . {im- 
 pers.) there is a lack of . . . 
 
 ^cftlcr, wi. -rg, -r. fault, defect; 
 error. 
 
 feicrlit^, adj. {or adv.) ceremoni- 
 ous, festive, solemn. 
 
 f cicrn, intr. make holiday, tr. cele- 
 brate, solemnize. 
 
 ^Cicrtag, m. holiday. 
 
 ^Cigling, m. -gg, -ge. coward. 
 
 f eitt, adj. {or adv. ) fine, delicate. 
 
 fetnti, adj. hostile, inimical. 
 
 Sfctnll, m. -beg, -be. (/. stilt) 
 enemy, foe. 
 
 ^tlti, n. -beg, -ber. field, plain. 
 
 %tU, m. -fen, -fen. rock, clitt. 
 sfiurf, n. piece of rock, cliff. 
 
 ^eitflcr, n. -rg, -r. window. 
 
 fern, adj. {or adv.) distant, far off, 
 remote. 
 
 fcrtig, adj. {or adv.) prepared, 
 ready, finished. 
 
 ^Cffel, /. -In. fetter, chain. 
 
 fcfl, adj. {or adv.) fast, firm, 
 strong. 
 
 SeH, n. -teg, -te. festival 
 
 fcflgcfugt, past p'ple of fcflfiigcn, 
 
 fast joined. 
 
 feu^t, adj. {or adv.) moist, damp. 
 
 gcucr, n. -rg, -r. fire. 
 
 iJicber, n. -rg, -r. fever. 
 
 finten, 0. tr. find, discover; (ioi<^o6- 
 ject. pred ) deem, consider, think. 
 
 i^ittgcr, rn. -rg, -r. finger. 
 
 flnflcr, adj. {or adv.) dark, ob- 
 scure. 
 
 §tnftctnife [sni5], /. -ffc» dark- 
 
410 
 
 GERMAN-ENGLISH 
 
 8fif(!^cr, m. -rg, -r. fisherman. 
 
 Jlammc, /. -men. flame. 
 
 gfttf(^C,/.-f(^en. bottle. 
 
 flel^en, tr. (or intr. with dot.) im- 
 plore, entreat, as noun, suppli- 
 cation, entreaty. 
 
 3f(etft^, n. -f(^e6, -fd)c. flesh, 
 meat. 
 
 ffet^tg, adj. {or adv. ) industriotis. 
 
 fftcgcn, 0. intr. f or fj, fly; rush. 
 
 ffte^en, 0. intr. \, flee, escape. 
 
 f[te§en, 0. intr. ] orl), flow, run. 
 
 Slitter taOt^Cn,pZ. honeymoon. 
 
 Sforcnj, n. Florence. 
 
 SIu^, m. -d)zQ, -iidje. curse. 
 
 Kuc^en, intr, {with dat.) curse, 
 swear. 
 
 ^lur, /. -ren. field; floor; hall. 
 
 §lu§, m. -ff eg, -iiffe. river. 
 
 glutfi [glut], /. -tf)en. flood, 
 wave, tide. 
 
 folgcn, intr. f. {with dat.) follow; 
 imitate. fotgctltJ, following. 
 
 'goiter, /• -t'U. instrument of tor- 
 ture. sBanf, /. rack. 
 
 ^orbcrung, /. -gen. demand, 
 claim. 
 
 ^orm^ /. -men. form. 
 
 fott, cidv. and sep'le prefix, forth, 
 forward, onward; away, gone, 
 off. sfcin, he away. 
 
 fortrcitcn, 0. intr. f, ride away. 
 
 ^ortfd^riti, m. ~tte§, -tte. forward 
 step, progress, improvement. 
 
 forttOCrfcn, 0. tr. throw away. 
 
 ^ta^t/f. -gen. question. 
 
 fragen, intr. or tr, {K or 0.) ask, 
 question. 
 
 franfifj^, adj. Frankish. 
 
 ^tttttfrci^, n. -d^g. France. 
 
 ^ranjofc, m. -en, -en. French- 
 man. 
 
 ^ratljoftn, /. -innen. French- 
 woman. 
 
 ftttlljoftfc^, adj. French. 
 
 ^xan, /. -auen. woman, wife, 
 lady. 
 
 ^rttUCnft^trffttl, n. woman's fate. 
 
 ftci/ 8idj, {with gen.) {or adv.) free; 
 exempt. sBticf, m. charter, pri- 
 vilege. 
 
 ^Xti^tit, /• -ten. freedom, liberty. 
 
 fteili^, adv. to be sure, certainly. 
 
 ^reitttg, m. Friday. 
 
 frcml), adj. (or adv.) strange, for- 
 eign, not one's own, unfamiliar, 
 unusual, as noun, stranger, for- 
 eigner. 
 
 grcmtC, /. foreign country, re- 
 gion away from one's home. 
 
 ftcffcn, 0. tr. eat {said of animals, 
 not men), devour. 
 
 grcttte,/. -ben. joy, pleasure, de- 
 Hght. 
 
 frcutig, adj. {or adv.) glad, joy- 
 ous. 
 
 fteuen, tr. give pleasure to. reflex, 
 be glad, rejoice. 
 
 Steunb, rn. -beg, -be. friend. 
 
 fteunblil!^, adj. {or adt;.) friendly, 
 kind. 
 
 SreunJlf(^ttft, /. -ten. friendship. 
 
 griciJC, m. -beng, -ben. peace. 
 
 §ricticn|!ruf, m. report of a peace. 
 
 frietlUd), adj. {or adv.) peaceable, 
 peaceful. 
 
 ^rtctltif^, in. -cf)g. Frederick. 
 
 frilt^, adj. {or adv.) fresh; gay, 
 lively. 
 
 ^riji,/. -ten. period, time. 
 
 frol^, adj. {or adv.) glad, joyous, 
 happy. 
 
 ftomm,adj. {oradv.) pious. 
 
 froflcht, impers. {with accus.) freeze 
 or shiver, be chilly. 
 
 Sfrut^t,/- -iid^te. fruit. 
 
 frud)ten, intr. bear fruit; be of 
 profit. 
 
 frtt^(c), adj. {or adv.) early; in 
 early morning; speedy. 
 
VOCABULAEY. 
 
 411 
 
 frul^Ct, 0^3' (or adv.) earlier, 
 
 sooner. 
 ^rii^Uttg, m. -gg, -gc. spring. 
 frill^flUifen, intr. breakfast. 
 ful^icit^ tr. feel, touch; be con^ 
 
 vinced of. 
 fullrett, tn carry, bring; lead, con- 
 duct, drive. 
 ^U^rtoerl, n. -U, -fe. vehicle, 
 
 wagon. 
 fiinf, num. five, sjc^lt, fifteen, sjig, 
 
 fifty. 
 i^unfll^en, n. -n^, -n. little spark. 
 int, prep, with accus. for; in behalf 
 
 of; instead of; before dbjec, pred. 
 
 as. 
 Sfurc^t, /. fear. 
 fur^tbar, adj. (or adv.) fearful, 
 
 terrible. 
 .f itr^tCtt, tr. be afraid of, fear, reflex. 
 
 be afraid, become frightened. 
 flirt^tcrlic^, adj. {or adv.) fearful, 
 
 terrible. 
 ^iirfl, m. -ten, -ten. prince. 
 gfurflitt, /. -nnen. princess. 
 guft, m. -ufeeg, -iiBe. foot, strttt, 
 
 m. footstep. 
 
 ®tt6e, /. -ben. gift, present. 
 
 gaffen, intr. gape, stare, look with 
 astonishment. 
 
 ©oncttc, /. -ten. gallery. 
 
 gttltj, adj. entire, whole, complete. 
 adv. wholly, quite. 
 
 got, adj. (inded.) finished, com- 
 plete, done. adv. completely, 
 quite, absolutely; very, exceed- 
 ingly. wUh negative, not at all. 
 
 ©orten, m. -m, -drten. garden. 
 
 ©tirtnet, m. -r«, -r. gardener. 
 
 @ofl, m. -teg, -afte. guest, visitor. 
 sftet, adj. liberal to friends, hos- 
 pitable, sfreunblilft, hospitable. 
 
 ®attt, m. -ten, -ten. husband. 
 
 ge, insep'k prefiXf see 307.5. 
 
 ©cBtiuilC, n. -c§,-C. building, edi- 
 fice. 
 
 ^thtn, 0. tr. give, bestow, imp. t$ 
 gifit, etc. there is or are. 
 
 ®ibtX, m. -rg, -r. giver. 
 
 ©cBct, n. -tg, -te. prayer. 
 
 gcbtetcttf 0. tr. order, command, 
 bid. 
 
 gebotctt, past pple (of geBaren). 
 
 born. 
 
 ®tM, n. -tg, -te. commandment, 
 bidding. 
 
 gcbtttUC^cn, tr. {rarely intr. with 
 gen.) use, employ. 
 
 @e6urt0tag, m. birthday. 
 
 ©cbttttfc, tn. -!eng, -fen. thought, 
 idea. 
 
 gcbcnfcn, {irreg.) intr. {genVy with 
 ace. , less often with gen.) think of, 
 remember. 
 
 ©ciJicdt, n. -teg, -te. poem. 
 
 ©cbriingc, n. -geg, -ge. crowd, 
 throng. 
 
 ©eUttlb, /. patience. 
 
 ©Cftt^t, /. -rcn. danger, risk, 
 peril. 
 
 gcfii^rlit^, adj. {or adv.) danger- 
 ous. 
 
 ©cftiftrte, m. -ten, -ten. com- 
 panion. 
 
 ©cfii^rtin, /. -innen. companion. 
 
 1. gefatten, 0. {with dat.) suit, 
 please, meet the approbation of. 
 
 2. gefttUcn, past pple o/foBcit. 
 gcfttngcn, past pple of fangcn, 
 
 caught, captured, imprisoned. 
 as noun, prisoner, captive. 
 ©cfiingni^ [sniS], n. -ffeg, -[fe. 
 
 prison. 
 
 ©Cfolgc, n. -geg, -gc. following, 
 escort, retinue. 
 
 ©Cfufti, n. -teg, -te. feeling, sensa- 
 tion, sentiment. 
 
 gegen, prep, (with ace.) against, 
 opposed to; over against, oppo- 
 
412 
 
 GEEMAN-ENGUSH 
 
 site to. stCtlOluttOtt, /. coTinter- 
 
 revolution. 
 ©egcnftanb, m. -H, -anbe. object, 
 
 topic, subject. 
 gegcniikt, adv. opposite, prq). 
 
 (wUhdat.) opposite, over against, 
 gel^etm, adj. (or adv.) private, 
 
 secret. 
 @c^cimni§ [mB], n. -[fe«, -ffe. 
 
 secret, mystery. 
 gel^en, 0. tr. |. go, move, walk. 
 
 impers. {with dat.) go or fare 
 
 with, be (in health etc.). 
 gel^Or^en, intr. {with dat.) listen 
 
 to, obey. 
 {^el^Otcn, ii^r. {with dat.) belong to, 
 
 appertain to. 
 ®cifl, m. -te8, -ter. spirit, mind. 
 geifitg, adj. {or adv.) relating to 
 
 the mind or spirit, spiritual, 
 
 mental. 
 getflU^, adj. {or adv.) spiritual; 
 
 clerical, as noun, clergyman, 
 
 minister. 
 fieiflreit^, adj. [or adv.) spirited, 
 
 witty, clever. 
 getjig, adj. {or adv.) avaricious, 
 
 covetous. 
 geliiuftg, adj, {or adv.) current, 
 
 fluent, voluble, easy. 
 @c(tl, n. -beS, -ber. money, coin, 
 
 cash. 
 ©elcgcnl^cit, /. -ten. opportunity, 
 
 occasion. 
 gele^rt, adj. learned, as noun, 
 
 learned man, scholar. 
 geltngett, 0. Mr. \. {withdal.; used 
 
 in 3d pers. only) prove success- 
 ful, turn out as desired. t§ gCs 
 
 lingt einem, etc., one succeeds 
 
 or prospers, as noun, success, 
 
 prosperity. 
 gcloben, tr. promise, vow. 
 gelten, 0. intr. {used in 3d pers. or 
 
 impersonally) have value; {with 
 
 dat.) concern, have to do 
 with. 
 
 gelit^en, tr. or intr. (with dat. or 
 accus.) usuattyin 3d pers, desire, 
 hanker. 
 
 ©Cmttl^I, m. -te§, -le. spouse, con- 
 sort, husband. 
 
 ©cma^Hn, /. sinncn. spouse, wife. 
 
 (^emdttJe, n. -beg, -be. painting. 
 gemetn, adj. {or adv.) (wUh dat.) 
 
 common, belonging in common 
 
 to; public. 
 ©Cmiife, n. -\t%, -fe. vegetables. 
 ©cmutft b\ii] , n. -tt|e«, -t^er. soul, 
 
 spirit, disposition. 
 gCttlut^lit^ [siitti^], adj. {or adv.) 
 
 good natured ; comfortable, 
 
 cozy. 
 genetgt, see nctgcn. 
 ©Citcrtti, m. -leg, -ak. general. 
 gencfcn, 0. intr. \. get well, re- 
 cover. 
 @cnie, n. -leg, -leg. genius. 
 gcnicftcn, 0. tr. {less often inir., 
 
 with gen.) enjoy; use as food or 
 
 drink, eat. 
 genug^ adv. enough, sufficiently; 
 
 us&l as indecl. noun, enough, 
 
 plenty. 
 ©cnuft, m. -ffeg, -iiffe. enjoyment, 
 
 pleasure. 
 geraDe, adj. straight, direct, even; 
 
 erect; plain, adr. directly, just, 
 
 precisely. 
 
 gcrttt^cn [sratcn], 0. intr. f. get, 
 
 come, fall; turn out, happen. 
 
 gere^t, adj. (or adv.) righteous, 
 upright, just, right. 
 
 gcrc^tfcrttgt, past pple from 
 tCC^tfcrtigcn. justified, vindi- 
 cated. 
 
 geringflfta^ig, adj. depreciating, 
 contemptuous. 
 
 ©cmittttitt, /. Germany (person^ 
 ijkd). 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 413 
 
 gCttt, ctdv. with pleasnre, gladly, 
 willingly, mot^te — , would like. 
 e0 — if^nn, like to do it. c§ — 
 l^aben, be fond of or like it. 
 
 ©cfttng, m. -g§, -cinge. song, sing- 
 ing. 
 
 @Cf(!^ttft, n. --t§, -te. business, af- 
 fair. 
 
 9Cf(ftc^cn, 0. inir. f. (impers.) 
 happen, come to pass, befall, 
 take place, be done. 
 
 ©Cft^cnf, n. ~U, -fe. gift, present. 
 
 @cf(^i^te, /. -ten. story, tale, 
 history. 
 
 @ef(^tc^t, n. -m, -ter. species, 
 race, family. 
 
 geft^hlinb, adj. {or adv.) swift, 
 rapid, quick. 
 
 ©efctt or sUtfTn. -en, -en. comrade, 
 companion; ai)j)rentice. 
 
 @cfcUftf)ttft, /. -ten. company, so- 
 ciety; party. 
 
 (Scfc^, n. -^eg, -^e. law; rule. 
 
 ©Cfif^t, n. -t^, -te or -ter. sight; 
 (pZ. -ter) face, visage; {pi -te) 
 vision. 
 
 gcftnncn, 0. intr. f. be minded, 
 intend, purpose. ^cfonncn, 
 minded, disposed. 
 
 ©cfinnunfi, /. -gen. state of mind, 
 disposition, intention. 
 
 ©Cftttit, /. -ten. appearance, as- 
 pect; form, shape, figure. 
 
 gcftttttcn, tr. allow, permit. 
 
 fiCflcrn, adi\ yesterday. 
 
 0Cfunb, adj. (or adv.) healthy, 
 sound, well. 
 
 ©cfuniJfteit, /. health. 
 
 fiCtreu, adj. {or adv.) true, faithful. 
 
 ©etlJOt^g, n. -fe§, -fe. anything 
 growing; plant. 
 
 gelua^ren, tr. warrant, guarantee, 
 assure; grant. 
 
 @ettltt^rmi0, /. warranting, grant- 
 ing. 
 
 ©ehlttit, /. -ten. power, force, 
 might. 
 
 gCtDaltfam, adj. {or adv.) forcible, 
 violent. 
 
 gCtninncn, 0. tr. win, gain, obtain. 
 JU — fte^en, be to be gained. 
 
 gCtt)i§, adj. {or adv.) sure, certain, 
 undoubting; certain, some. 
 
 ©etniffcn, n. -n§. consciousness; 
 conscience. 
 
 ©emitter, n. -rg, -r. thunder- 
 storm. 
 
 gelDO^nen, tr. {or intr. with gen.) 
 be accustomed to. getOOl^nt, 
 wont, used to. 
 
 getnb^nen, tr. accustom, habituate. 
 
 gehlb^nlifi, adj. {or adv.) ordinary, 
 customary, usual. 
 
 ©etoitl^t, n. -U. turmoil, tumult. 
 
 ©IttltJ, w. -ge^. lustre, splendor. 
 
 glanjen, intr. shine, glitter, glisten. 
 
 ©IttI, n. -je§, -a[er. glass, tumbler. 
 
 ©laube, m. -ben^, -ben. belief 
 faith. 
 
 glauben, tr. believe; think. 
 
 @laukn^fa^, n. article of faith. 
 
 ©IttUbiger, m. -x^, -r. creditor, 
 
 gleic^, adj. like, resembling; alike, 
 equal ; direct, adv. similarly, 
 equally; directly, at once. 
 
 gteit^en, 0. inir. {with dat.) he like, 
 equal, resemble. 
 
 ®(ei^gultijj!cit, /• indifference. 
 
 @(et^ma§, n. uniformity, propor- 
 tion. 
 
 glei^fietten, reflex, put one's self 
 on an equality, equal, rival. 
 
 gleic^tDO^t, adv. nevertheless. 
 
 ®Io(fc, /. -fen. beU. 
 
 glorreit^, adj. glorious. 
 
 ®lnd, n. -feS. luck, fortune; good 
 fortune, happiness. 
 
 glutfen, intr. \ or ^. {impers. 
 with dat.) turn out well, suc- 
 ceed. 
 
414 
 
 GEKMAN-ENGLISS 
 
 glitrfU^, «(?/. {or adv.) happy, 
 
 fortunate. 
 fllurffclig, adj. highly blessed, 
 
 bUssful. 
 ©ntttC, /. -en. grace, favor, 
 
 mercy. 
 gniibig, adj. {or adv.) gracious, 
 
 propitious. 
 @oftl, n. -beg. gold. 
 golbcn, adj. golden. 
 goH)i9, adj. golden. 
 ©Oltlfi^mieb, m. goldsmith. 
 ©Olbflttrf, n. gold-piece. 
 0Onnen, tr. grant willingly, not 
 
 @Ott, rn. -tteg, -otter, god; God. 
 
 0OttU^, adj. {or adv.) god-like, di- 
 vine. 
 
 @d^e, w. -en, -en. idol, false 
 god. 
 
 graven, 0. tr. dig. 
 
 ©tttf , m. -fen, -fen. count, earl. 
 
 ©riifln, /. sinncn. countess. 
 
 ©ram, m. -meg. grief, sorrow, 
 dislike. 
 
 griifeli^, adj. {or adv.) horrible, 
 ghastly. 
 
 grauen, intr. {impers. with dai.) 
 cause horror, fill with dread, 
 make to shudder. 
 
 graufen, i^r. {impers. wUh dat.) 
 excite horror in, horrify. 
 
 grcifen, 0. tr. gripe, grasp, 
 seize. 
 
 @rci0, m. -fe8, -fe. old man. 
 
 ©rcn^C, /. -sen. boundary, limit. 
 
 ©rcnjjicin, wi. boundary stone. 
 
 ©reuci, m. -Ig, -t. horror, outrage. 
 
 grimmig, a,dj. {or adv.) wrathful, 
 furious, fierce. 
 
 gtofe, adj. {or adv.) great, large, 
 big, huge, tall; eminent, grand. 
 
 ©ruft, /. -iiftc. cave, hollow; se- 
 pulchre, tomb. 
 
 gtttJl/ adj. (or adv.) green. 
 
 ©riin, n. -ncg. green color, green, 
 ness, verdure. 
 
 ©runtJ, rn. -beg, -iinbe. ground, 
 bottom; grounds, reason, cause. 
 Jtt — gC^Cn, go to destruction. 
 
 gtunticn, tr. lay the foundation of, 
 found, establish. 
 
 griinblitt), adj. {or adv.) deep, thor- 
 ough. 
 
 ©riintlttng, /. foundation. 
 
 ©rufe,m. -feeg,-iiBe. greeting, sal- 
 utation. 
 
 grit^en, tr. greet, salute; bow to. 
 
 ©uliieit, m. -ng, -n. florin (coin of 
 various values). 
 
 ®m%f. favor, grace, goodwill 
 
 gitnfiig, adj. {or adv.) favorable. 
 
 ©unfiling, m. -gg, -ge. favorite. 
 
 gut, adj. {or adv.) good, proper; 
 kind. adv. well. 
 
 ®ni, n. -teg, -liter, property, pos- 
 session, goods; estate. 
 
 ^aar, w.-reg, -re, hair {used coUec- 
 
 tively or singly). 
 l^ubcn, {irreg.) tr. have, possess; as 
 
 avx'y, have, gem — , like. 
 
 niitftig [niitlg] — , need, want. 
 l^ab^aft, adj. having possession, 
 
 with gen. and ttierben, get pos- 
 session of. 
 ^afcr, rn. -rg. oats. 
 ^a^n, rn. -ncg, -nen or -dt)ne. 
 
 cock. 
 I^ttlft, adj. half. adv. half, by halves. 
 
 sjtoet, etc. half past one, etc. 
 l^ttlfecr or sben, prep, {with gen.) on 
 
 account of, for the sake of. 
 §alfte, /. -en. half. 
 §tt«e, /. -Hen. hall. 
 §ttl0, rn. -feg, -olfe. neck ; throat. 
 
 sbanti, ri. necklace. 
 ^ttlt, rn. -teg, -te. hold; halt, stop. 
 I^alten, 0. tr. hold, keep, retain; 
 
 contain; esteem, think. 
 
VOCABtJLAET. 
 
 its 
 
 §ttlttl, J- -cinbe. hand. 
 
 l^anbeln, intr. act, behave; trade, 
 carry on commerce, mit CttDdl 
 — , deal in something, 
 
 ^aniltoerf^ n. handicraft, trade. 
 
 I^angen^ 0. intr. hang, depend. 
 
 j^dngettf i'"'- cause to hang, sus- 
 pend. 
 
 ^(ltl§, infh. -fen§. Hans, Jack. 
 
 partner, w. -r«, r. harper. 
 
 ^ttrm, m. -meg. harm, hurt, in- 
 jury; sorrow, grief. 
 
 l^atten, intr. wait, Hnger in expec- 
 tation. 
 
 5 art, ci'dj. (or adv.) hard; stiff. 
 sltacftg, adj. stiff-necked. 
 
 ^tt^, m. -[[e§. hatred, enmity. 
 
 P§n^, «(??■. (or adv.) ugly, hateful. 
 
 l^a^ig, adj. (or adv.) hasty, hurried. 
 
 ^ttUfe, m. -fee, -fen. heap, pile; 
 mass, company of people. 
 
 ^ttU|lt, n. -te§, -aupter. head; 
 chief, leader. 
 
 ^auB, n. -feg, -aitfer. house, ju 
 >^aufe, at the house, at home. 
 not^ ^(iU\t, to home, home. 
 
 ^ttU0frttU, /. housewife. 
 
 l^eben, 0. tr. heave, lift, move. 
 
 ^eer^ n. -re§, -re. host, army. 
 
 ^CCrtJC, /. -ben. herd, flock. 
 
 l^efttg^ adj. {or adv.) vehement, vio- 
 lent, impetuous. 
 
 ^Cftigtcit, /. vehemence, impetu- 
 osity. 
 
 ^eil, n. -te6. health, prosperity; as 
 exclamation, hail! 
 
 ^eitcn, tr. heal, cure. 
 
 f^tiii^fOdj. {or adv.) holy, sacred. 
 
 I^etligen, tr. hallow, make or keep 
 sacred or holy. 
 
 ^Cimot^ [sttt], -t^en. /. home. 
 
 I&cimfommen, 0. intr. f. come 
 home. 
 
 i^etmlic^, adj. (or adv.) private; se- 
 cret 
 
 ^Cinri^, m. -cf)6. Henry. 
 
 l^cife, adj. {or adv.) hot. 
 
 I^eiten, 0. tr. bid, command; call, 
 name, intr. be called or named^ 
 mean, signify. 
 
 fitiitV, odj. {or adv.) clear, bright, 
 cheerful. 
 
 %t\ts, rn. -ben, -ben. hero. 
 
 iclbcngrofec, /. heroic greatness. 
 sfinn, wi- heroism. 
 
 ^Clbin, /. sinncn. heroine. 
 
 l^elfen, 0. intr. {with dat.) help, 
 aid, assist. 
 
 l^ett, adj. {or adv.) {of sound) clear, 
 distinct; {of light or color) light, 
 clear, bright. 
 
 ^Cttgfi, wi. -te§, -te. stallion, 
 steed, 
 
 ^enfer, m. -rg, -r. hangman, exe- 
 cutioner. 
 
 j^Cr, ddv. and sepHe prefix, hither, 
 this way, toward the speaker or 
 the point had in view or con- 
 ceived {opposite of llin, hence). 
 ttttl . . • ||Ct, round about. 
 
 l^eraB^ adv. and seple prefix, down 
 hither, down. 
 
 I^etan, adv. and sep'le prefix, on 
 hither, near. 
 
 ^Cranfommcn, 0. intr. \. come on 
 or near, approach. 
 
 ^erau^, adv. and seple prefix, out 
 hither, out. • 
 
 ftcraugfttflen, O. intr. f. fall out. 
 
 ^CtttU^flntlcn, 0. tr. find out. re- 
 flex, find one's way out, stand 
 forth. 
 
 l^erBet, adv. and seple prefix, near 
 by hither, this way. 
 
 §Ctbfi, rn. -teg, -te. autumn, fall. 
 
 I&erein, adv. and seple prefix, in 
 hither, inward (toward the 
 speaker). 
 
 ^ercinfuftrcn, tr. lead in. 
 
 ^crcinfommcn, 0. intr. f. come in. 
 
416 
 
 GEEMAN-ENGLISH 
 
 Herntetiet, ctdv. and seple prefix. 
 down hither, downward, from 
 above. 
 
 ^ttoB, m. -g, -oen. hero. 
 
 ^crr, rn. (-rren or) -xxn, -rrcn {or 
 -rrn). master, lord; gentleman; 
 {in address) sir; {before a name) 
 Mr. Ijcr ^Crr, the Lord, ^ctts 
 gott, in. the Lord God. 
 
 ^Crrf^ttft, /. -ten. lordship, do- 
 minion; master and mistress, 
 employers; person or persons 
 of rank. 
 
 ^crrfc^cr, m. -r8, -r. ruler, lord. 
 
 l^etitbct, adv. and sepUe prefix, over 
 hither, to this side. 
 
 I^erutn, ado. and sq)le prefix, round 
 about, around. 
 
 lerunter, adv. and sep'le prefix. 
 down hither. 
 
 I^erdor, odv. and seple prefix, forth 
 or forward hither, forward, 
 forth, out. 
 
 lemorftrtngen, {irreg.) tr. bring 
 forth or out. 
 
 l^crdortogctt, intr. jut forth, pro- 
 ject. 
 
 ^etj, n. -genS, -gen. heart; cou- 
 rage, spirit. 
 
 l&crjUt^, adj. {or adv.) hearty, cor- 
 dial. 
 
 ^crjog, m. -g§, -oge. duke. 
 
 I^euttg, adj. {or adv.) of today; 
 modern. 
 
 l^icr, adv. here, in this place. 
 
 lier^er, adv. hither, to here. 
 
 ^ilfc, same as ^itlfe. 
 
 ^immcl, m. -18, -(. heaven, sky, 
 heavens. 
 
 l^tmmltf^, adj. {or adv.) heavenly, 
 celestial. 
 
 5ill, adv. and sepHe prefix, hence, 
 that way, away from the 
 speaker or point had in view 
 or conceived (ppposUe to f^tt, 
 
 hither); sometimes simply along; 
 
 gone, lost, too — l^tn, whither. 
 
 — fcitt, be gone or away or lost. 
 fiinah, adv. and sep'le prefix, down 
 
 thither, down. 
 l^tnauf, adv. and sep'le prefix, up 
 
 thither, upward. 
 ^inaufftral^len, intr. shine up or 
 
 out. 
 I|tnau0, adv. and sep'le prefix, out 
 
 hence or thither, forth. 
 ^inttU06cgcben, 0. reflex, betake 
 
 one's self away, go forth. 
 lirtttUlgC^cn, 0. intr. [. go out or 
 
 forth. 
 ]^ittttU§3tel|en, 0. tr. pull out. intr. 
 
 f, march out. 
 l^inDern, tr. hinder, prevent. 
 I^inein, adv. and sep'le prefix, in 
 
 thither, in. 
 lincingc^cn, 0. intr. f. go in 
 
 thither. 
 |itteinf(^toinbcln, reflex, cheat or 
 
 swindle one's self in, get in by 
 
 cheating. 
 l^ingellen, 0. intr. f. go there or 
 
 away; pass on, elapse. 
 I^tttl^or^en, tr. listen. 
 |infommen,0. Mr.f. come forth or 
 
 away, get (to somewhere or 
 
 something). 
 l^tnlegen, tr. lay away or down. 
 JinnCtt, adv. hence. 
 I^tnftttfen, 0. intr. f. sink down. 
 itnftreifen, tr. stretch, extend. 
 l^tntet/ adj. hinder, back. adv. and 
 
 sep'le prefix, behind, back, in the 
 
 rear. 
 ^VXXi\stX,adv. and sepHe prefix, over 
 
 thither, over (from this side), 
 
 across. 
 I^iniibcrlttufcn, 0. intr. f. run 
 
 across. 
 fiinnnitX^adv.aridsep'le prefix.down 
 
 hence, down thilier, down. 
 
VOCABtJLAEY. 
 
 411 
 
 ^tntoerfen, 0. tr. throw away or 
 down. ^tngchJOrfcn, casually 
 thrown out, chance. 
 
 ^ixi, m. -ten, -ten. shepherd. 
 
 fot^, ctdj. (as declined, ^o^er, etc.) 
 high, tall, lofty, great. 
 
 ^od)mut$ [smut], »^- arrogance, 
 pride. 
 
 ^Ot^toertttt^ [stttt]/m. high trea- 
 son. 
 
 1^ off en, tr. hope, expect, look 
 for. 
 
 ^Offnung, /. -gen. hope, expecta- 
 tion. 
 
 §i)fli(^fcit,/. courtesy, politeness. 
 
 ^Oft^iit,/. door of the courtyard. 
 
 1^0^, see ^0^. 
 
 I^dl^nen, tr, scorn, scoff at. 
 
 ioliJ, o^j' {or adv.) favorable, 
 propitious, gracious ; pleasing, 
 lovely. 
 
 I&olen, tr. fetch, bring. 
 
 ^oUc, /. -en. hell. 
 
 ^ottengei^, fn. infernal spirit. 
 
 §ol5, n. -geg, -ge or -otjer. wood, 
 timber. 
 
 I^Ot^en, irdr. hearken, listen; tr. 
 give ear to, hsten to. 
 
 §OtbC,/. -ben. horde, troop. 
 
 pren, intr. or tr. hear, give ear to; 
 hearken. 
 
 J&iiBfd), adj. {or adv.) pretty. 
 
 I^ulbigen, intr. {withdat.) pay hom- 
 age to. 
 
 ^itlf e, /• helpy- aid, assistance. 
 
 ^iilfclciflung, /. rendering of 
 help. 
 
 I&ulftcit^, adj. {or adv.) helpful. 
 
 ^umor, rn. -r^. humor. 
 
 ^untl, rn. -be^, -be. dog. 
 
 ^Untert, num. hundred, 
 
 hunger, w. -r^. hunger, appetite. 
 
 I^ungern, intr. (or tr. impers.) hun- 
 ger, be hungry. 
 
 gut, rn, -te«, -iite. hat. 
 
 I^itten, tr. {rardy intr, with gen.) 
 
 have heed, watch, r^ex. guard 
 
 one's self, beware. 
 filter, wi- -r8, -r. guardian, 
 
 keeper. 
 giittc, /. -ten. cottage, hut; tent, 
 
 tabernacle. 
 
 tc^, pron. I. 
 
 ^tCC, /. -cen. idea, notion, con- 
 ception. 
 
 t^r, 1. nom. plu. of Iju, ye, they. 
 2. dai. sing, of fit, fern, to her or 
 it. 3. poss. adj. {for Sdpers. sing, 
 fern.) her or its. 4. poss. adj. {for 
 Sdpers. plu.) their; ^^X, (in ad- 
 dress) your. 
 
 tl^tig, poss. pron, her, its; theirs, 
 ^^rtg, your. 
 
 im = in iicm. 
 
 immct, odv. ever, always, continu- 
 ally; yet, still. 
 
 in, prep, {with dat. or accus.) in, 
 into, to, at, within. 
 
 inbem, conj. in or during that, 
 while. 
 
 intlC^ or sffcn, adv. meanwhile 
 conj. while. 
 
 innct, odj' inner, interior; as neu- 
 ter nouny inner self, heart. 
 
 inncr^alfi, prep, (with gen.) inside 
 of. 
 
 ^nfcl, /. -tn. isle, island. 
 
 intntefern, conj. as far as. 
 
 ittlif (^, ctdj- {or €idv.) earthly, mor- 
 tal. 
 
 ttgenti, odv. ever, soever. 
 
 ^rrtftum [stum], m. -m«,-iimer. 
 error, mistake. 
 
 ^taticn, n. -ng. Italy. 
 
 ^tttUf net, m. -rg, -r. Italian. 
 
 jtt, part, of assent, yea, yes. 
 ^agb, /. -ben. chase, hunt; hunt- 
 ing party. 
 
418 
 
 GERMAN-ENGLISH 
 
 jftgen, intr. f or 1^. huiit, chase. 
 tr. hunt. 
 
 ^tt^r, n. -reg, -re. year, if^mtitxi, 
 n. century. 
 
 Sttl^rcSjeit/. -ten. season. 
 
 3jimmer, m. -r8, -r. sorrow, grie^ 
 misery, lamentation. 
 
 SanUttt, m. -r«. January. 
 
 \t, adv. always, ever, jc ... |C or 
 JC . • . bcfto, {before compara- 
 tives) so much the . . . or the . . . 
 the. 
 
 iel> (jeber, jebe, jebeS), pron. each, 
 every, either, see 190. 
 
 ietertnann, m. every man, every 
 one. 
 
 jjebeiSinal, adv. each time, every 
 time. 
 
 ittio6i,adv, however, notwithstand- 
 ing, yet. 
 
 fCfiKd), pron. every, each, see 190. 
 
 je^cr (je ever and ^cr hither), Hon 
 jel^er^ from always to here or 
 now, always. 
 
 .^etnanb, pron. some or any one, 
 somebody. 
 
 jcn (jener, jene, jene8), pron. yon, 
 yonder, that, the former, see 
 163. 
 
 jenfcitS, prep, (with gen.) on the 
 other side of, beyond. 
 
 fc^t, a(^u. at the present time, 
 now. 
 
 ^iO^anntt, /. Jane, Joan. 
 
 ^uie, m. -en, -en. Jew. 
 
 ^itDin, /. -inn en. Jewess. 
 
 Nugent), /. youth, time of youth; 
 young people, youth, sfreuitttn, 
 /. friend of youth, sfrfjcin, m. 
 light of youth. 
 
 3ul!, m. -m. July, srcuolution,/. 
 l-evolution of July (1830). 
 
 Suni, m. -ni«. June. 
 
 jun0 CM??. ;or a(iu.) young, youth- 
 ful : new, recent. 
 
 ^ungc, m. -eng, -en. young one, 
 
 youth, stripling. 
 ^iittgUng^m.-gg^-ge. young man, 
 3'^outh. 
 
 ^ttffce, m. -ee6. coflfee. 
 
 ^aifcr, m. -r«, -r. emperor, slog, 
 
 a(^". emperorless, without an 
 
 emperor. 
 ^ttlf, m. -!e§, -fe. lime, chalk. 
 fttit adj. (or adv.) cold, frigid. 
 ^amerab, fn. -bs or -ben, -ben. 
 
 comrade, companion. 
 ^ttmtll, m. -ne8, -ne. chimney, 
 
 fireplace. 
 hammer, /. -rn. chamber, room. 
 
 s^tXt, ni. chamberlain. 
 ^ttm^f, m. -pfeg, -ampfe. fight, 
 
 contest, struggle, battle. 
 fttmUfcn, intr. fight, struggle. 
 ^ttlinc, /. -nen. can, tankard, 
 
 pot. 
 ^a^itel, n. -1§, -t. chapter. 
 Stttt, rn. -Ig. Charles. 
 ^ttrtcnfllicl, n. game of cards, card 
 
 playing. 
 ^ttrtoffcl, /. -In. potato. 
 ^aitx, wi. -rS, -r. tom-cat 
 ^ttuf, m. -fe^, -ciufe. purchase, bar- 
 gain. 
 faufcn, tr. buy, purchase. 
 ^ttuflcute, see ^ttufmann. 
 ^ttUfmttnn,m. -nne§ (rarefy -anner, 
 
 generally ^anffeute). merchant, 
 
 tradesman. 
 tanm, adv. hardly, scarcely, but 
 
 just. 
 ^e^lc/.-Ien. throat. 
 ttimtn,intr. germinate, shoot forth, 
 
 develop. 
 fctn, pron. no, not one, not any, 
 
 no one. see 195,2. 
 better, rn. -r§, -r. cellar. 
 fcitncn, (irreg.) tr. know, be ac- 
 quainted with. 
 
TOCABULAET. 
 
 419 
 
 tenner, tn. -X^, -r. knower, con- 
 noisseur. 
 
 ^Crfer, wi. -r^, -r. prison, jail, dun- 
 geon. 
 
 ^ttU, /. -ten. chain, fetter, 
 bond. 
 
 ^tnil, n. -beS, -ber. child. 
 
 ^ittbletn, n. -nS, -lu little child. 
 
 ^ir^C, /. -d)en. church. 
 
 ^i^t,f' -ten. chest. 
 
 tlagcn, intr. or tr. mourn, bewail, 
 lament, complain. 
 
 ^(ang, m. -ge§, -ange. sound, 
 ringing, clang. 
 
 fJttt, adj. {or adv.) clear, bright, 
 fair; evident. 
 
 ^lar|ett, /. clearness, brightness. 
 
 ^\t\tSp n. -be^, -ber. garment, arti- 
 cle of clothing, dress, raiment. 
 
 fleitt, (idj. {or adv.) little, small; in- 
 significant, petty. 
 
 ^Ictnigfcit, /. -ten. trifle. 
 
 ^leinoti^ n. -be§, -bicn {or -be), 
 ornamental or precious thing; 
 jewel. 
 
 fling ein, intr. tinkle, ring the bell. 
 
 flo|)fen, intr. beat, knock. 
 
 ^(ofter, n. -r@, -lifter, cloister, 
 monastery, convent. 
 
 Hug, adj. {or adv.) prudent, 
 shrewd, sagacious, clever. 
 
 ^nak, m. -ben, -ben. boy. 
 
 ftnCJ^t, m. -te§, -te. servant, vas- 
 sal. 
 
 ^nic, n. -e8, -c. knee. 
 
 fniecn, intr. kneel. 
 
 fo^en, tr. or intr. cook, boil. 
 
 Coffer, rn. -X9, -r. coffer, trunk. 
 
 ^0ffctd)en, n. -m, -n. little trunk. 
 
 fibin {or (Siitn), n. -n«. Cologne. 
 
 ^ommonbttnt, i^- - ten, -ten. com- 
 mander. 
 
 (ommen, 0. intr. f. come, ap- 
 proach, arrive ; occur, come 
 about. 
 
 ^ombbic,/. -{en. comedy, sf^itelett, 
 
 n. comedy-acting. 
 
 ^bmg,m. -gg, -ge. king. 
 
 ^bmgin,/. -innen. queen. 
 
 fbniglil^, adj. {or adv.) kingly, 
 royal. 
 
 ^bntgret^, 71. kingdom, realm. 
 
 fbnnett, {irreg.) tr. can, be able, 
 have power; he permitted; know, 
 understand, see 251, 254. 
 
 ^O^lf, rn. -fe§, -bpfe. head. 
 
 ^oxh, in. -be§, -brbe. basket. 
 
 ^br^ICr, rn. -r§, -r. body ; sub- 
 stance; corpse. 
 
 fofibar, adj. {or adv.) costly. 
 
 fojien, tr. cost. 
 
 fbftUc^, adj. or adv. costly, pre- 
 cious; delightful, delicious. 
 
 ftd^Clt, intr. crack, crash. 
 
 ^tttft /• -Cifte. strength, vigor; 
 power, force, 
 
 frdftig, adj. {or adv.) strong, vigor- 
 ous, powerful, mighty. 
 
 fttt^cn, intr. crow. 
 
 ixmt, adj. {or adv.) ill, sick, dis- 
 eased, as noun, sick person, in- 
 valid. 
 
 ^tttnfcnktt, n. sick-bed. 
 
 ^ranf^cit, /. -ten. illness, sick- 
 ness, disease. 
 
 ^xant, n. -teg, -autcr. herb. 
 
 ^retlittti, n. -ties, -t)e. credentials. 
 
 ^Xti§, m. -feg, -je. circle. 
 
 ^rCUJ, n. -geS, -ge. cross, crucifix. 
 sjUg, rn. crasade. 
 
 BxtU^CX,rn. -r8, -r. kreuzer (small 
 coin). 
 
 freu^tgeit, tr. crucify, pple as noun, 
 the crucified one. 
 
 Wcg, m. -geS, -ge. war, ^tiegcg^ 
 t(jttt, /. deed of war, 
 
 l^rofobil, n. {or m.) -leg, -le. croco- 
 dile. 
 
 ^rone, /. -nen. crown. 
 
 ^ru|J|JCl, rn. -Ig, -I cripple. 
 
420 
 
 GERMAN-ENGLISH 
 
 ^utf)C, /. -d^en. kitchen. 
 
 ^Htl f. -In. ball, bullet. 
 
 ful^r, adj. {or adv.) cool. 
 
 fu|n, adj. (or adv.) bold, daring, 
 intrepid. 
 
 ^ultUt/ /. culture, civilization. 
 
 tUttintCtlt, tf. grieve, trouble, con- 
 cern, reflex, concern one's self, 
 care. 
 
 jfitnfttg, adj. (or adv.) to come, fu- 
 ture. 
 
 ^Unft, /. -iinfte. art, skill; art (as 
 distinguished from science). 
 sf^ulc, /. art-school. ^ 
 
 fiunftlcr, m. -rg, -r. artist. 
 
 ^Ur,/. -ren. choice, election; right 
 of electing, sfiirft, m. Elector 
 (i. €. one of the princes formerly 
 entrusted with the election of 
 the German emperor), sfiirftcits 
 t^Um [stum], n. electorate (ter- 
 ritory of an Elector). 
 
 fnX], adj. {or adv.) short, brief. 
 
 fuffen, tr. kiss. 
 
 ^iiftc, /. -ten, coast, shore. 
 
 ^Utf^Cr, m. -x^, -v. coachman, 
 driver. 
 
 iSaBfal, n. -leS, -le. refreshment, 
 comfort. 
 
 lad^en, intr. {rardywith gren.) laugh, 
 laugh at. 
 
 la^erlit^, adj. {or adv.) laughable, 
 ridiculous. 
 
 Satien, m. -n^, -n or -ciben. shop, 
 staU; shutter. 
 
 fittge, /• -en. situation, position. 
 
 Ha^tX, n. -V^, -V. couch, sickbed; 
 fig. sickness ; camp, encamp- 
 ment. 
 
 fittnti, n. -be§, -be or -an^ev. land, 
 ground; territory, region, coun- 
 try; country (as distinguished 
 from city), auf tcttl gatltlC, in 
 the country, agut, n. country- 
 
 place, sfirerfe, /• stretch of land, 
 
 region. gttniJcStJcrtuetfung, /. 
 
 banishment. 
 
 1. Itttig, adj. {or adv.) long, ex- 
 tended, protracted; high, tall. 
 
 2. lanjj {or longc), adv. long, a 
 long while; by far, see 230.1a. 
 
 Sangenol^ren, m. a long-eared one. 
 langetuetien {or langtucilen), tr, 
 
 bore, tire, reflex, be bored. 
 
 Idng0, prep, {with dat, or gen.) 
 along, see 373a. 
 
 longfam, adj. (or adv.) slow. 
 
 Ittngji, adv. very long (already), 
 long since, a great while ago. 
 
 Ittffcn, 0. tr. let alone, leave; let, 
 permit, allow, suffer; {often with 
 another verb in infin. ) cause, make, 
 effect, bring about, have; in im- 
 perative, let. e0 liifet fl^, it can 
 be; it may be, it is possible, see 
 343.5d 
 
 SttUf, inn. -\t^, -cinfe. course, career. 
 
 laufen, 0. intr. \or ]). run, move 
 rapidly. 
 
 Saunc,/. -ncn. humor, mood, tem- 
 per. 
 
 Ittttt, adj. {or adv.) loud, aloud. 
 
 SttUt, ini. -teg, -te. sound, tone. 
 
 leBen, intr. live, exist; dwell. 
 
 fickn, n. -ng, -n. life, hving; an- 
 imation. 
 
 gcBctt^gliilf, n. happiness of Ufa. 
 
 gekng|ifli(t)t /• duty of life. 
 
 lebentlig, adj. {or adv.) living, alive. 
 
 leb^aft, adj. (or adv.) Uvely, viva- 
 cious. 
 
 \t^^tn,intr. be parched with thirst, 
 pant. 
 
 Iccr, adj. (or adv.) empty, vacant; 
 vain. 
 
 Icgcn, tr. lay, put down, place. 
 refl X. lay one's self down. 
 
 le^ncn, tr. or intr. lean, incline, 
 rest. 
 
VOCABUIARY. 
 
 421 
 
 Sel^nfiu'^T, m. easy chair, arm-cliair. 
 
 fUt^Xt, /. -ren. doctrine, teaching; 
 theory; apprenticeship. 
 
 lel^ren, tr, teach, instruct. 
 
 ficl^tcr, w^- -r8, -r. teacher. 
 
 fiei6, rn. -be§, -ber. body; waist. 
 
 Ici^t, adj. {or adv.) light, easy. 
 
 itlh, adj. {ojily predicatively) disa- 
 greeable, painful. tSi^uimix—, 
 I am sorry, I regret. 
 
 fieib, w. -beg. harm, hurt, pain; 
 sorrow. 
 
 leiben, 0. tr. suffer, endure, bear; 
 intr. suffer, as noun, suffering, 
 misfortune. 
 
 8cii>enftl)ttft, /. -ten. passion. 
 leitietf interjectional adv. alas, un- 
 fortunately. 
 Ict^cn, 0. tr. lend. 
 Icifc, cidj- (or adv.) not loud, soft, 
 
 low, gentle. 
 lenfen, tr. (or intr.) turn or bend 
 
 in a desired direction, direct, 
 
 manage, influence. 
 lernen, tr. (or intr.) learn. 
 lefcn, 0. tr. read. 
 Ic^t, odj. (or adv.) last, latest, 
 
 final. 
 leu^ten, intr. shine, give light, 
 
 beam. 
 Scute, pi people, folks. 
 fiil^t, n. -m, -ter or -tc. light, 
 
 brightness; candle. 
 licb, odj. (or adv.) dear, beloved; 
 
 attractive, pleashnt. — ^abett, 
 
 hold dear, love. — fcin, be 
 
 agi*eeable or pleasant (to some 
 
 one). 
 fiieftt^cn, n. -n§, -n. little love, 
 
 darling, sweetheart. 
 fiic6e, /. love. 
 lithtn, tr. love. 
 lieber, (idv. rather, sooner, more 
 
 willingly. 
 fiict># n. -be«, -bsr. song, lay. 
 
 Hcgen, 0. intr. ^ or f. lie. 
 
 fiilte, /. -ieu. lily. 
 
 fiiniJC, /. -ben. linden, lime- 
 tree. 
 
 lint adj. left. 
 
 linU, adv. to the left. 
 
 CiH^C, /. -pen. lip. 
 
 8ob, n. -be§. praise. stcJittcrin, /. 
 praiser, panegyrist. 
 
 \ohtn, tr. praise, commend; pro- 
 mise. 
 
 Cot^, n. -d)e§, -ocl)er. hole; dun- 
 geon. • 
 
 Siiffcl, m. -% -t spoon. 
 
 (O^ncn, tr. reward, recompense. 
 
 SOO0, n. -feS, -fe. lot; destiny. 
 
 Io0, CK^. (or adu.) loose, released, 
 set free; with fcin or luerbeu, 
 governing accus. loose from, rid 
 of. as sepHe prefix to verbs, loose, 
 free. 
 
 SbfegcliJ, n. ransom. 
 
 lb fen, tr. set loose, loosen. 
 
 lo^geben, 0. tr. set loose or free, 
 release. 
 
 loSma^en, tr. make loose, loosen; 
 disengage. 
 
 lolrct^Cn, 0. tr. tear loose, tear 
 away. 
 
 l0i§f|)rc^cn, 0. tr. declare free, re- 
 lease; acquit, absolve. 
 
 iiot^ [got], n. -tf)e§, -tf)e. lead; 
 half an ounce. 
 
 SottJC, m. -en, -en. lion. gbttJCm 
 ficgcr, wi- lion-conquerer. 
 
 IJuft, Z'. -iifte. air; breeze, breath. 
 
 (itgen, 0. intr. lie, speak falsely. 
 
 Suflp /. -iifte. pleasure, delight; 
 inclination, fancy. — |aben, 
 have desire, like. 
 
 Ittfltg, adj. {or adv.) merry, gay; 
 amusing. 
 
 ma^en, tr. make, produce; cause; 
 do, perform. 
 
422 
 
 GEKMAN-ENGUSH 
 
 9Jlttt^t, /. -a6)it, miglit, power, 
 
 force. 
 mii^tig, adj. {or adv.) mighty, 
 
 powerful, (loith gen.) capable of. 
 SRiitl^en, n. -n§, -ll, girl, maiden. 
 SKttgb, /. -agbe. maid, maiden. 
 aUtti, m. -aieS. May. 
 Pttilanil, n. -b8. Milan. 
 9Kttinj, n. -jeg. Mayence (city). 
 Pajept, /. -ten. majesty, 
 
 Majesty. 
 WlayoXf rn. -xi, -re. major. 
 SWttI, n. -leg, -te or -filer, token, 
 
 sign, mask; point of time, time, 
 
 turn. 
 malen, tr. paint. 
 Wt^XtX, in. -r8, -r. painter, 
 
 artist. 
 man, indef. pron. one, people, 
 
 they, see 185. 
 mattt^, indef, pron. , in sing, many 
 
 a, many a one; in pi. many, see 
 
 191. 
 mant^txlti,adj. inded. {or adv.) of 
 
 various sorts, diverse, in many 
 
 ways. 
 mttn^mal, adv. many times, 
 
 often. 
 Wtaniif m. -nne6, -firmer, man; 
 
 husband. 
 Wdnntx^tWU f- figure of a 
 
 man. 
 SWttltfttrilC,/. -ben. mansard (curb- 
 roof). 
 Maxt,f- -!en. mark (a coin, worth 
 
 about 25 cts). 
 aWtttft, m. -teg, -orfte. market, 
 
 market-place. 
 marft^icrcn, intr. march. 
 Tlaxitxtoti, m. death by torture. 
 Sflarj, m. -geg. March. 
 ^aUxn,pl measles. 
 3Ktt^, n. -^eg, -^e. measure; 
 
 standard, scale, proportion. 
 mdfftt), adj. {or adv.) massive. 
 
 SWaucr, /. -rn. wall, sftcln, m, 
 
 stone for building. 
 9RaU0, /. -fiufe. mouse. 
 2Rcbttittc, /. -en. medal. 
 9Kcet, n. -reg, -re. ocean, sea. 
 mcl^r, adj. {or adv.) more, generally 
 
 indeclinable, but pi. nte^re or me^s 
 
 rere, more than one, several. 
 
 after negative, any longer. 
 Sfleile, /. -len. mile, (a German 
 
 mile equals nearly 5 English 
 
 miles). 
 mtin, poss. adj. my, mine. 
 mttnctt, tr. or intr. think, suppose; 
 
 mean, signify. 
 mcinig, poss. pron. my, mine. 
 SJlcinuilfl, /. -gen. opinion. 
 mcijl, (idj. most, adv. mostly, for 
 
 the most part. oni -Cll, most, 
 
 above all others. 
 3!lcificr, «*. -rg, -r. master, chief, 
 
 leader. 
 meltiett, tr. mention, notify, an- 
 nounce. 
 SUcngC, /. -en. multitude, crowd. 
 9Rcnf(^, m. -fcfjen, -fd^en. man, 
 
 person, human being. 
 9Rcnf(^cn: sgef^lcdjt, n. human 
 
 race, sl^crj, n. human heart. 
 
 Aithe, /. philanthropy, sfeele, /. 
 
 human soul, sfiimme, /. human 
 
 voice. 
 a^cnfl^ftcit, /. humanity. 
 mcrfcn, tr. mark, stamp; note, 
 
 perceive, observe. 
 mcffcn, 0. tr. measure. 
 SWcffct, n. -r§, -r. knife. 
 meuMiren [sieren], tr. furnish. 
 SUtene, /. - en. mien, expression 
 
 of face, air, look. — ma^ett, put 
 
 on a look, 
 mict^en [4tn], tr. hire, rent 
 anU^, /. milk. 
 mill* (or mitbc) adj. {or adv.) mild, 
 
 meek, gentle; benevolent 
 
VOCAB0LABY. 
 
 423 
 
 9Rtlbc, /. gentleness, mercy. 
 
 5!Jinion, /. -neu. million. 
 
 9Winiftcr, m. -i-g, -r. minister. 
 
 ailinutc, /. "ten. minute. 
 
 mi^faUen, 0. Mr. {vMh dat.) dis- 
 please. 
 
 mit, adv. and seple prefix, along, 
 along with; at the same time; 
 likewise, also. prep, (with dat.) 
 with, along with, by. 
 
 mitBrtngen^ {irreg.) tr. bring along 
 (with one), come bringing. 
 
 SKitfiurger, w^. fellow citizen. 
 
 mitgcftcn, 0. intr. f. go along, go 
 too. 
 
 mitma^en, tr. join in making or 
 doing. 
 
 mitne^mcn, 0. tr. take along with 
 one. 
 
 mitftngcn, 0. intr. join in sing- 
 ing, sing too or with others. 
 
 SKittag, m. -g§, -ge. midday, 
 noon. 
 
 Sfltttag0effen, n. midday-meal, 
 dinner. 
 
 mutt, /. middle, midst. 
 
 S!ttttet n- -% ~t middle; means, 
 instrument. 
 
 mitten, adv. (followed by prep.) 
 midway, in the midst. 
 
 mtttl^etlen [stcilcn], tr. communi- 
 cate, impart. 
 
 aHitttUOi^, m. -6)^, -d)e. Wednes- 
 day. 
 
 SWitttJClt, /. one's own age or time, 
 contemporaries. 
 
 SRotie, /. -ben. mode, fashion. 
 
 mogen, (irreg.) intr. or tr. may, 
 might, be permitted or allowed; 
 like, choose, care, desire, see 
 251, 255. 
 
 9Konat, m. -t«, -tc. month. 
 
 Monti, m. -be§, -be. moon. 
 
 aWontttg, m. -g§, -ge. Monday. 
 >, m. -beS, -be. murder. 
 
 SWorgcn, m. ^itg, -n. mom, morn- 
 ing; east, orient; morrow. 
 fian'O, n. the East, the Orient. 
 sjiunbC, /. morning-hour. 
 
 Woxtti, m. -U, -I mortar. 
 
 tnittie, adj. (or adv.) tired, weary. 
 
 Mn^t, /. -^en. toil, labor, pains. 
 
 SKumie, /. -en. mummy. 
 
 S^unb, m. -beg, -be or-iinbe or 
 -iinber. mouth. 
 
 muntcr, adj. (or a<!i;.) lively, brisk, 
 cheery, gay. 
 
 SJluftf, /. -!en. music 
 
 miiffcn, (irreg.) tr. or intr. must, be 
 under necessity of, be compelled 
 or obliged, be unable to help, 
 have to, cannot but. see 251, 
 256. 
 
 tnitfftg, adj. (or adv.) unemployed, 
 idle, sgang, m. idleness, sloth. 
 sgjingcr, m. idler. 
 
 SRut^ mnt], m. -ttjea. mood, dis- 
 position; courage, spirit, mettle. 
 
 mut^ig [mutig], adj. (or adv.) spir- 
 ited, courageous, daring. 
 
 Wntttv, /. -iitter. mother. 
 
 miittcrU^, adj. (or adv.) motherly, 
 maternal. 
 
 Ittt^, adv. and sep'le prefix, atter, 
 afterward, behind; in accord- 
 ance, conformably, nad) unb 
 nod), little by little; nad) ttJie \)ov, 
 afterwards as before, still. 
 
 prep, (with dat.) after, behind; 
 
 according to, after the manner 
 
 • of; for, about; at, by; with names 
 
 of places, to, toward, for. — often, 
 
 upward, etc. 
 
 ntt^ttl^men, intr. (with dat.) or tr. 
 imitate, copy. 
 
 ![Ra^ttftmnng, /. -gen. imitation, 
 
 mimicry. 
 9laii\hav, m. -v8 or -xn, -rn. neigh- 
 bor. 
 
424: 
 
 GERMAN-ENGLISH 
 
 9la^!ommc, m. -en, -eit. succes- 
 sor, descendant. 
 
 9la^loi m. -ffe6, -affe. thing left 
 behind, residuum; heritage. 
 
 JWttt^mittttg, m. -g§, -ge. after- 
 noon. 
 
 JWtt^rit^t, /. -ten. intelligence, 
 news. 
 
 mil^fllllTCIt, inir. (with dat) stare 
 after. 
 
 ^tt^t, /. -ad^tc. night, sfcitc, /. 
 night side, dark side. 
 
 nac^tuetfen, 0. tr. point out, show, 
 prove. 
 
 9lat^toclt, /. after world or age, 
 posterity. 
 
 tlfX^f adj. {with dat.) nigh, near, 
 close. 
 
 9l(il^er /. nearness, proximity, 
 neighborhood. 
 
 naletlt/ if. bring nearer, reflex. 
 draw nigh, approach; resemble. 
 
 niilrcn, tr. nourish, support, nii^s 
 tcnb, nourishing, nutritive. 
 
 9lrtmc {or scn), m. -m, -n. 
 
 name. 
 9larr, rn. -rren, -rren. fool. 
 Ittt^, odj. {or adv.) wet. 
 9latton, /. -nen. nation. 
 9lainv, /. -ren. nature. 
 nthtn, odv. beside, prep, {with dot. 
 
 or accus.) beside, by the side of, 
 
 by, with; along with, besides. 
 9lcffe, m. -en, -en. nephew. 
 ne|tnen, 0. tr. take, seize; take 
 
 away; receive, accept. 
 ttetgen, tr. bend, bow. reflex, bow. 
 
 9CttCi9t,incUned; favorable, well 
 
 affectioned. 
 JRcigUng, /. -gen, inclination; 
 
 affection, attachment. 
 tiein, indecl. no, nay. 
 filtitt, /• -!en. pink, carnation. 
 tlCnncn, {irreg.) tr. name, caU; 
 
 speak oi 
 
 9lerb, m. -ueg, -t)e, or Jlctbe, /. 
 -tien. nerve. 
 
 nctt, adj. {or adv.) neat, pretty, 
 nice. 
 
 neu, adj. {or adv.) new, fresh, un- 
 used; recent, modern. 
 
 neugtertg, adj. {or adv.) curious. 
 
 ncuglii^Cnil, adj. {or adv.) newly 
 glowing. 
 
 neutt, num. nine, sjcl^tt, nineteen. 
 '-m ninety. 
 
 1li(^t, indef. pron. naught, nothing- 
 ness. Q^v.not. — cinmtti, not 
 even, no^ — , not yet. — nut 
 
 .... fonbcrn m^, not only 
 
 .... but also. 
 tti^tS^ indef. pron. indecl. naught, 
 
 nothing, adverbially, in no wise, 
 
 not at all. 
 nidCtt, intr. nod. 
 nic, adv. never, at no time. 
 nicber, adj. nether, lower; low, 
 
 base. adv. andsep'lepreflx. down, 
 
 downward. 
 nicbcrtcugcn, reflex, bend down. 
 niciicrlttniift^, adj. {or adv.) Neth- 
 erlandish, Dutch. 
 niciJCrfe^en, ^. set down. r^ex. sit 
 
 down. 
 nicilcrtlJCrfeit, 0. tr. throw down, 
 
 prostrate. 
 nictirig, adj. {or adv.) low; 
 
 humble. 
 niemaB, adv. never. 
 9Iicmttnil, indef. pron. nobody, no 
 
 one, not any one. see 186. 
 
 1. no^, adv. still, yet, further. — 
 ni^t, not yet. — cttt, one more, 
 another. — etttmal, once more. 
 
 2. ttO^, conj. {after negative, espHy 
 metier) nor. 
 
 IRortl, m. -beg, -be. north. stoiirtS, 
 
 adv. northwards. 
 9lortien, »^. -ng. north, northern 
 
 region. 
 
V0CABULAE7. 
 
 425 
 
 ttor))It$, odj, (or adv.) northerly, 
 northern. 
 
 9l0t^ ['^Oi], /. -ot!)C. need, neces- 
 sity; want; trouble, misery. 
 
 nbt^ifi [nbtig], {with dat) adj. {or 
 adv ) needful, necessary. 
 
 nbtligCtt [nbtigcn], tr. constrain, 
 force, compel. 
 
 JlOt^ttJCnilig [mU], (^j- necessary, 
 indispensable. 
 
 *WotJCmber, m. -x%, -r. Novem- 
 ber. 
 
 nun, ddv. now, at present. 
 
 nur, odv. only, simply; but just, 
 scarcely. 
 
 9lu§,/. -iiffe. nut. sbtttUn, adj. nut- 
 brown. 
 
 nu^cn (yr nii^cn, intr. {wUhdat.)he 
 of use to, profit. 
 
 nu^Ut^, ddj. {or adv.) useful. 
 
 Of\, adv. over, above, conj. whether, 
 if; aU —, as if. 
 
 oBcn, adv. above, aloft, on high. 
 nac^ —, upwards. 
 
 Obct, adj. upper, higher. 
 
 Obctfl, trh. -te§ or -ten, -te or -ten. 
 colonel. 
 
 oBglett^, conj. although, though. 
 
 CctoBer, w. -r8, -r. October. 
 
 bllC or olj, adj. {or adv.) vacant, 
 deserted, desolate, waste. 
 
 VttitX, conj. or, otherwise, else. 
 
 off en, adj. {or adv.) open; public; 
 frank, sincere. 
 
 Offenbar, adj. {or adv.) plain, evi- 
 dent. 
 
 Dfflctcr {or sjicr), m. -r«, -re. offi- 
 cer. 
 
 oft, adv. often, frequently. svudU, 
 adv. oftentimes, repeatedly. 
 
 Cl^etm, rn. -m§, -me. uncle. 
 
 0|ne, prep, {with accus.) without; 
 but for, except, save. — J)tt§, 
 but that, save thart 
 
 Ofit, n. -rcg, -rctt. ear. sting, m. 
 
 earring. 
 ort)entlt(^, adj. (or adv.) orderly, 
 
 regular, proper. 
 Drt, rn. {or n.) -te8, -te or Orter. 
 
 place, spot, region. 
 Often, m. -ng. east; eastern land. 
 Ottilie,/. -ien«. OttiHa. 
 
 $aar, n. -res, -re. pair, couple; 
 ein ^aot {or paat), a couple, 
 
 two or three, a few. see 322.2a. 
 ^ttlaft, m. -t§, -cifte. palace. 
 ^ttntoffcl, m. -Ig, -L slipper. 
 ^tt^ier, n. -r8, -re. paper. 
 ^aifl, m. -m, -dpfte. pope. 
 SParatieS, n. -fee, -je. paradise. 
 ^ortei,/. -eien. party, faction. 
 |iartetif((), adj. {or adv.) factious, 
 
 partial, partizan. 
 ^ttttie, /. -ieu. party, company; 
 
 part, portion. 
 p)ttf!o0ter, m. -r§, -re. passenger. 
 ^elj, rn. -geg, -ge. fur, furred 
 
 coat. 
 ^fab, «*• -beg, -be. path, track, 
 
 way. 
 ^f ttff e, rn. -en, -en. priest, parson 
 
 {used generally contemptuously). 
 starrer, rn. -rg, -r. parson, min- 
 ister. 
 ^ftttr^of, m. parsonage. 
 ^fertl, n. -beg, -be. horse. 
 i^lfiegen, 0. or N. tr. {or intr. with 
 
 gen.) wait upon, nurse, cherish; 
 
 enjoy, be given to. intr, be 
 
 wont, be used to. 
 mWJ- -ten. duty 
 llfliilfen, tr. pick, pluck. 
 ^forte,/. -ten. door, gate, portal; 
 
 port (of ships). 
 p\m,inierj. fie! 
 ^funb, n. -beg, -be. pound, 
 ^^ilolog, m. -gen, -gen. philolo- 
 
 gist. 
 
426 
 
 GERMAN-ENGLISH 
 
 ^$ifofo||]&, m. -^^en, -p^en. phi- 
 losopher. 
 
 ^ilgcr, rn. -r8, -r. pilgrim, sft^attt, 
 /. band of pilgrims. 
 
 ^Ittgc, /. -gen. plague, torment, 
 calamity. 
 
 ^(anf e, /• -fen. plank, board. 
 
 ^la^, m. -^eg, -d^e, place, seat; 
 situation. 
 
 |ilau))ern, intr. chat. 
 
 illo^lif^, adj. {or adv. ) sudden. 
 
 Illunbern, tr. plunder, pillage. 
 
 flO^en, intr. knock. 
 
 iioetif^, adj. (or adv.) poetical. 
 
 iloUtif^, adj. {or adv.) political. 
 
 ^ort, m. -teg, -te. port, harbor. 
 
 portrait ^' -te§, -te. portrait. 
 sinaler, m. portrait-painter. 
 
 ^ofl,/. -ten. post, post-office. 
 
 ^rat^t, /• -ten. splendor, pomp. 
 
 SPriifiilcnt, m. -ten, -ten. president. 
 
 ^taffen, intr. carouse, riot. 
 
 ^Xti§, m. -je8, -je. price, cost; 
 prize, reward ; praise, glory. 
 
 Iltetfen, 0. tr. praise, commend. 
 
 ^tcmiermittiflcr, m. prime-minis- 
 ter. 
 
 ^reu^e, m. -en, -en. Prussian. 
 
 ^ricflcr, rn. -x^, -v. priest. 
 
 ^rinj, m. -jen, -jen. prince. 
 
 ^rinjcfftn,/. -innen. princess. 
 
 Ilribat, adj. {or adv.) i)rivate. 
 sflttltbC,/. private lesson. 
 
 ^rotlUCt, n. -tg, -te. product. 
 
 ^rofcffor, m. -v^, -ren. profes- 
 sor. 
 
 ^iroftttcrcn, intr. profit, gain. 
 
 ^romcttttbe, /. -en. promenade, 
 walk. 
 
 Quitter, n. -r«, -r. powder, gun- 
 powder. 
 
 ^unft, m. -tg, -te. point. 
 
 Ouctt, m. -HeS, -He, (yr OntUt, f. 
 -en. spring, well, source. 
 
 quetten, 0. intr. ^ or f. flow forth, 
 burst out, gush. 
 
 9taBe, m. -en, -en. raven. 
 
 Ma^C, f. revenge. 
 
 9la(^en, m. -m, -n. throat, jaws. 
 
 ttt^en, tr. avenge. 
 
 IRong, w. -ge§, -onge. rank, class. 
 
 taft^, adj. {or adv.) impetuous, 
 swift, speedy. 
 
 tttfcn, intr. rave, rage, tttf cnti, furi- 
 ous, raving, mad. 
 
 diatfi [Mai], m. -tf)eg, -dt{)c. coun- 
 sel, advice; counsellor. s^nu§, n. 
 town-hall. 
 
 tttt^en [ratcn], 0. intr. {mth dat.) 
 give advice or counsel, advise; 
 guess. 
 
 raubett, tr. take by violence (from, 
 dat.), rob of. 
 
 9lau(er, m. -x^, -r. robber. 
 
 9{ttU(ft, m. -c^eS. smoke. 
 
 tauten, intr. smoke. 
 
 tttUl^, adj. {or adv.) rough, harsh, 
 coarse. 
 
 IRaum, m. -meg, -duntc. room, 
 space, place. — geBett, give waj'^, 
 yield. 
 
 9JttUf^, m. -fc^eg, -dnjd^e. noise, 
 rush ; sudden enthusiasm, in- 
 toxication. 
 
 rauf^en, intr. ^ or f. move with a 
 sound like rushing water, rustle; 
 roar, rush. 
 
 (Ret^enft^ttft/. reckoning, account. 
 
 Xt^\itXi,tr. reckon, calculate, count, 
 estimate, deem. 
 
 tct^t, adj. {or adv.) straight, direct; 
 right, just; correct, true, real; 
 {with dat.) suitable, convenient; 
 right (not left). adverbially, 
 really, actuallj"^; very, quite. 
 
 9lc^t fi. -teg, -te. right, justice, 
 — ^aBen, be in the right. 
 
 te^tgliiufiig, adj. orthodox. 
 
VOCABULAET. 
 
 427 
 
 ttd^tS, odv, to the right. 
 
 9lctie, /. -ben. speech, talk, dis- 
 course. — fte^en, stand talk, 
 (voifh dat.) answer, be accounta- 
 ble to. 
 
 tebeit/ irdr. or tr. speak, talk, con- 
 verse. 
 
 rebli^^ adj, (or adv.) honest, fair. 
 
 ^Reform, /. -en. reform. 
 
 9iC9Cn, m. -nS. rain. 
 
 ^Icgicrung, /. -gen. government. 
 
 regnen, intr. impers. rain. 
 
 rci^, adj. {or adv.) wealthy, rich; 
 copious. 
 
 9iti^, n. -C^e8, -d)e. empire, realm, 
 kingdom. 
 
 XtiH^tn, intr. reach, extend, tr. hold 
 out, present, offer. 
 
 rei^Itt^^ cidj. (or adv.) abundant, 
 copious, plentiful. 
 
 9lcit^t§um [stum], m. -m%,- iimer. 
 riches, wealth. 
 
 Ut\f)t,f. -en. row, series, line. 
 
 Utimex, rn. -rS, -r. rhymer. 
 
 Xtin, adj. {or adv.) clean, pure. 
 
 rctnigcn, tr. cleanse, purify. 
 
 9lcifc, /. -fen. journey, voyage. 
 
 tcifcn, intr. f or I), journey, travel, 
 take a journey. 
 
 tei^en, 0. tr. tear, snatch away. 
 
 rcitcn, 0. intr. I) or \. ride, go on 
 horseback. 
 
 better, rn. -r8, -r. rider, horseman. 
 
 retjen, tr. incite, excite; charm, at- 
 tract, rcijcnb, charming. 
 
 Uttiox {or stiox), m. -r§, -oren. 
 rector (principal of a school). 
 
 ^Religion, /. -nen. religion. 
 
 9itfi,m,. -te8, -te. residue, remnant, 
 remainder. 
 
 ^leftttUrtttion, /. -nen. restaurant. 
 
 Xttitn, tr, save, rescue, deliver. 
 reflex, save one's self ; run away. 
 
 IRettung, /. -gen. rescue, deliver- 
 ance. 
 
 teuett, tr. or intr. rue, repent, re- 
 gret. c0 rcuct mid), I repent. 
 
 9leboIutton, /• -nen. revolution. 
 
 9l^cin, m. -ne§. (river) Khine. 
 
 fbxildt, /• Rhine-bridge. 
 Xi^itn, tr. set jight; direct; judge, 
 
 censure. 
 (Rit^tcr, m. -r§, -r. judge. sflul^I, 
 
 m. judgment-seat. 
 
 Oii^tigfeit, /. rightness* correct- 
 ness. 
 
 (Ricfc, m. -fen, -fen. giant. 
 
 0ltng,m. -ge§, -ge. ring. 
 
 tittgett, 0. tr. wring, twist, intr, 
 struggle, strive, contend. 
 
 ttng0, adv. around, about. — um* 
 ^tX, adv. round about, all 
 around. 
 
 rinncn, 0. intr. Ij or f. run, flow, 
 course. 
 
 IRitt, m. -tteg, -tte. ride. 
 
 flitter, rn. -r§, -r. chevalier, 
 knight. 
 
 IRocf, m. -deg, -ocfc. coat, petti- 
 coat. 
 
 XOi), adj. (or adv.) rude, raw, 
 rough. 
 
 (RoMe, /. -len. roll, scroll ; role, 
 part. 
 
 9tam, n. -ni§. Eome. 
 
 tHoman, m. -ne§, - nc, novel, ro- 
 mance. 
 
 9Jofe, /. -fen. rose. 
 
 9lO^, n. -ffeg, -ffe. horse, steed. 
 
 XOi^ [tot], adj. {or ad>\) red. 
 
 JRiirfcn, rn. -nS, -n. back, rear. 
 
 tiitfen, tr. jerk, pull; move, push. 
 
 MdW, /• -ten. regard, respect, 
 consideration. 
 
 riirftnartd, adv. backwards, back. 
 
 tufcn, 0. intr. call out, cry. tr. 
 call, call to. 
 
 iRu^e, /. rest, repose, tranquillity. 
 
 rul^en, intr. rest, repose. 
 
 HU^ig, adj. {or adv.) quiet, tranquil. 
 
423 
 
 GERMAN-ENGLISH 
 
 SJill^rUttg, /. moving, touchiDg; 
 
 emotion. 
 lRu|m, m. -meg. fame, glory. 
 
 Saal, m. -te§, -ak, hall, saloon. 
 
 @(l^C,/. -en» thing, matter, affair, 
 concern, business, pi. things, 
 goods. 
 
 Sacrament, n. - m, -te. sacra- 
 ment. 
 
 ©aft, m. -te§, -cifte. sap, juice. 
 
 ^H^, /• -en. talk, saying; legend, 
 tradition. 
 
 fagen, tr. say, tell, relate; speak, 
 utter, declare. 
 
 ©ale, see Saal. 
 
 Salon, ni. -itg, -n§. salon, saloon, 
 
 parlor. 
 Salj, n. -jeS, -3c. salt. 
 fammt, prep. {wUh dat.) along 
 
 with, together with. 
 
 SaniJ, m. -beg. sand. sBanf, /. 
 
 sandbank. 
 fanft, adj. {or adv.) soft, gentle, 
 
 mild, smooth. 
 
 Saracene, in. -en, -en. Saracen, 
 
 Mussulman. 
 Satg, m. -geg, -cirge. coffin. 
 ©a^, m. -5eg, -a^e. proposition, 
 
 sentence. 
 fancr, adj. (or adv.) sour, tart, 
 
 acid; disagi-eable, peevish. 
 faUCrU(!^, adj. (or adv.) tart, acid, 
 
 sourish. 
 faufcn, 0. intr. drink (said of the 
 
 lower animals), guzzle. 
 Sttnglmg, m. -gg, -ge. nursling, 
 
 baby. 
 S(^aar [S^ar], /. -ren. troop, 
 
 band, crowd. 
 f(!^aben, intr. {with dat.) harm, in- 
 jure, hurt. 
 f^affcn, 0. tr. shape, form, create, 
 
 make. 0. or N. procure, obtain, 
 
 provide. 
 
 f^amen, reflex, be ashamed. 
 f^anblit^, adj. {or adv.) disgrace- 
 ful, shameful, infamous. 
 
 ©t^ar, see S^aar. 
 
 ft^arf, adj. {or adv.) sharp, keen, 
 
 cutting; severe. 
 Sc^a^, rn. -^e§, -ci^e. treasure. 
 ft^d^en, ir. treasure, value. 
 fr^aubcr^ttft, adj. {or adv.) awful, 
 
 horrible. 
 fc^autn, intr. look, gaze, see. tr, 
 
 look at, behold, see. 
 f^dumen, intr. foam, froth. 
 S^anf|licl, n. -l^, -k. spectacle, 
 
 sight; play, drama. 
 St^anf|liclcr, rn. -r^, -r. player, 
 
 actor. 
 S^effcl, m. -tg, -I. bushel. 
 f(!^etben, 0. intr. f. part, separate; 
 
 go away; die. 
 ft^eincn, 0. intr. shine; seem or 
 
 appear. 
 S^citcl, /. -In. crown (of the 
 
 head). 
 S^elm, m. -me§, -me. rogue, 
 
 knave. 
 fc^eltcn, 0. tr. or intr. reprove, 
 chide, scold ; revile as, call re-. 
 proachfuUy. 
 ft^Cnfcn, tr. pour out for drinking; 
 
 make a present of, give, grant. 
 St^CnfjiuBc, /. tap-room, bar, 
 
 room. 
 ft^CtJCn, intr. joke, jest, make 
 
 fun. 
 ft^euen, tr. be shy of; avoid, shun; 
 
 shy (of a horse). 
 f^ttfen, tr. cause to happen; uslp 
 
 send, despatch, forward. 
 S^frffal, n. -Ig, -te. fate, destiny, 
 
 lot. 
 ft^te^en, 0. intr. or tr. shoot. 
 S^iff, n. -ffeg, -ffe. ship. 
 S^itb, w. -beg, -be or-ber. shield; 
 coat of arms; sign, signboard. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 429 
 
 fe^im|lten, tr. insult, abuse, call 
 names. 
 
 St()Ittd)t /. -ten. battle. 
 
 S^lttf, m. -feg. sleep. 
 
 ft^lttfcn, 0. Mr. sleep. 
 
 ©t^lttg, m. -geS, -age. stroke, 
 blow; shock. 
 
 f^lagen, 0. tr. or Mr. strike, bit, 
 beat ; knock ; defeat. 
 
 (Sc^Itttige, /. -gett. serpent, snake. 
 
 f^le^t, cidj- (or adv.) bad, base, 
 mean. 
 
 S^Tctfc, /. -fen. knot, bow. 
 
 {(^lie^cn, 0. tr. shut. 
 
 ©t^loi n. -ffe§, -offer, lock; 
 citadel, castle, si^ov, n. castle- 
 gate. 
 
 ©^(Ut^t, /. -ten. ravine, gorge. 
 
 S glummer, w. -x^, -r. slumber. 
 
 ftdlummern, intr. slumber, sleep. 
 
 @d)Iu^, m. -ffe§, -iiffe. closing; 
 close, end, conclusion. 
 
 ©djlilffcl, w. -tg, -t. key. 
 
 (S^ntttt^, /. abuse, outrage ; dis- 
 grace, shame. 
 
 f^tnal, adj. (or adv.) narrow, 
 slender. 
 
 f^mei^eln, intr. {with dat.) caress; 
 flatter. 
 
 S^mctt^elretie, /• flattery. 
 S^mcrj, m. -jeg or -seu§, -jen. 
 
 pain, ache ; sorrow, distress. 
 f^mcrjen, intr. smart, pain. tr. 
 
 crimpers, (with dat.) pain, grieve, 
 
 afflict 
 f^merjHl^, adj. (or adv.) painful. 
 S^micll, m. -beg, -be. smith. 
 Sj^mictC, /. =cn. smithy, forge. 
 fdinett, adj. (or adv.) quick, 
 
 speedy, swift, rapid. 
 \ii)On, adv. already, even. 
 Won, adj. (or adv.) beautiful, 
 
 handsome, fine, noble. 
 f^Onen, tr. (or intr. with gen.) treat 
 
 ■with consideration, spare. 
 
 <S(ftbnfteit, /. beauty. 
 
 (S^ranfc, /. -en. railing, barrier. 
 
 pi. lists (at tournaments), in tlic 
 
 — tt fommcn, enter the lists. 
 Street, m. -c!c§, -de. fright, 
 
 terror. 
 ft^rcdU^, adj. (or adv.) terrible, 
 
 frightful. 
 f^rcikn, 0. tr. write. 
 Sdireibttf^, m. writing-table. 
 fdircten, 0. intr, cry, cry out, 
 
 scream. 
 Shrift, /. -ten. writing; some- 
 thing written, scripture. 
 <S^ritt, rn. -tteS, -tte. step, stride, 
 
 pace. 
 ^^U^, m. -'^eS, -^e. shoe. 
 (S^ulb, /. -ben. debt; fault, 
 
 crime. 
 ft^ulbig^ adj. (or adv.) owing, in- 
 debted for (with accus.); culpable, 
 
 criminal, guilty of or lacking in 
 
 (with gen) 
 (S^uliincr, m. -r§, -r. debtor. 
 (S^ulc, /. -len. school. 
 <S filler, in. -x^, -r. pupil, scholar. 
 S^urfc, rn. -en, -en. rascal, 
 
 knave, villain. 
 ^M, m. -ffeS, -iiffe. shot; 
 
 charge (of a gun). 
 ft^tnat^, adj. (or adu.) weak, feeble. 
 @d)Uitt9crin,/. -nnen. sister-in-law. 
 S^lUttii, m. -\m or -nen, -cine 
 
 or -nen. swan. 
 ft^tuanfcn, intr. ]^ or f. stagger, 
 
 totter ; waver. 
 ft^ttJttrj, adj. (or adv.) black. 
 fc^tDcBettf intr. sweep (through the 
 
 air), soar, hover, float. 
 ft^tDCigCn, 0. intr. keep silence, be 
 
 still, not talk, hold one's peace. 
 
 as noun, silence. 
 St^tDCtj, /. Switzerland. 
 f^tuelgcn, intr. gormandize, 
 
 revel, carouse. 
 
430 
 
 GERMAN-ENGLISH 
 
 Statuette, /. -Icn» threshold. 
 fi^tneUen, 0. intr. f. swell, heave. 
 f^tOCt/ odj. {or adv.) grievous, 
 
 sore, burdensome, heavy; hard, 
 
 difficult. 
 <Sd)toCtt, n. -teS, -ter. sword. 
 (S^ttJcficr, /. -rn. sister, sdjctt, 
 
 n. little sister. 
 (Sc^tUiegcrDtttcr, m. father-in-law. 
 f(^tt)immen, 0. intr. Ijor \, swim, 
 
 float. 
 f^lningcn, 0. tr. or intr. swing; 
 
 wave, brandish, rejiex. swing 
 
 one's self. 
 f^ttlbttn, 0. tr. or intr. swear, take 
 
 oath to, vow. 
 fc^tnitl, ctdj. {or adv.) sultry, hot 
 
 and close. 
 ©t^tuung, m. -geS, -iinge. swing, 
 
 rotation, swinging motion. 
 Sc^tDur, m. -re§, -iire. oath, vow. 
 fc^tO^^, adj. of Swytz (a Swiss 
 
 Canton). 
 fC^§, num. six. sjcl^n, sixteen, sjig, 
 
 sixty. 
 Sec, m. -ee§. -een. lake. /. -een. 
 
 sea, ocean. 
 Scele, /. -ten. soul. 
 SegCl, n. -U, -I sail. 
 Scgcn, rn. -n6, -n. blessing. 
 fcgncn, tr. bless. 
 fe^en, 0. tr. or intr see, look. 
 
 glance, perceive ; look, appear. 
 fcl&ttCn, reflex, long, yearn, feel 
 
 eager desire, as noun, longing, 
 
 yearning. 
 <SeftnfUt^t, /. eager desire, yearn- 
 ing. 
 \t\\X, (tdv. very greatly, very much, 
 
 much. 
 
 1. fcin, 0. intr. f. be, exist. eS ift, 
 there is, etc. ciucm gut — , be 
 fond of one. an citicm — , 
 depend on one ; be one's turn. 
 
 2. f cin, poss, adj, his, its. 
 
 3. fcin, gen. of er or e6. 
 {etne0glei(t)en, inded. adj. or pron. 
 
 of his kind, such as he. 
 f etnig, poss. pron. his, its. 
 fcit, prep, {with dat.) since, from (a 
 
 given time till now), during. 
 
 conj. since, since the time that. 
 
 shtm, ddv. since then, since. 
 
 C071J. since, from the time that. 
 <^eiit, /. -ten. side ; party ; page. 
 fclbct, adj. inded. self, myself, etc. 
 
 see 155.5. 
 fclbfl, adj. inded. self, etc. see 
 
 155.5. adv. even. 
 <BtW : sat^tung, /. self-respect. 
 
 ::er^altung, /. self-preservation. 
 fclig, adj. {or adv.) blessed, happy, 
 
 blissful. 
 Seligtett, /. happiness, bliss, sal- 
 vation. 
 fcltfam, adj. {or adv.) unusual, 
 
 strange, wonderful. 
 fcnticn, {irreg. or reg.) tr. send. 
 September, m. -rg, -r. September. 
 fc^en, tr. set, place ; lay down, 
 
 lay. reflex, sit down. 
 fcufjcn, intr. sigh, groan. 
 ft^, re/lex. pron. himself, herself, 
 
 itself, themselves ; one another. 
 
 see 155.3,4. 
 fitter, adj. {or adv.) safe, sure, se- 
 cure. 
 ft^etn, tr. make sure, secure, 
 
 guarantee. 
 fie, pers. pron. {Sd sing.) she, her, 
 
 it; (3d pi) they, them; Sie, 
 
 you. see 153.4. 
 ftcbcit, num. seven, sjcftn {or fith 
 
 3C^n), seventeen, sjig {or fieh 
 
 m), seventy. 
 Sicg, m. -geg, -ge. victory, con- 
 quest. 
 Sieger, rn. -r8, -r. victor, cod^ 
 
 queror. 
 ftegreid), adj. victorious. 
 
VOCABtJLAEY. 
 
 431 
 
 IlIBctIt, (tdj. (or adv.) silver. 
 ftngen, 0. tr. or intr. sing. 
 finfcn, 0. intr. \, sink, fall. 
 ^inn, m.-nueS, -niic or nuen. sense, 
 organ of perception ; mind ; 
 intent, meaning, import ; dispo- 
 sition, character. 
 ftttn^/ «(?/• {or adv.) related to 
 manners or morals ; social, 
 moral. 
 fi^en, 0. intr. sit. 
 8natie, m. -en, -en. slave. 
 fo, adv. so, in this manner or de- 
 gree, as. fo . . . aU (or mie) . . . 
 as ... as .... fo cilt, such a. 
 used as rel. pron. see 182.1. 
 fo : fbaiti, adv. so soon. conj. as 
 soon as. sglet^, adv. immedi- 
 ately, at once, slange, conj. as 
 long as. soft, conj. as often as. 
 stoic, adv. as. stO0^(, adv. as 
 well, fo tOO^l ... aU. ., as 
 well . . . as . ., both . . . and. 
 <So^n, m. -ne§, -o^ne. son. 
 So^nletn, n. -n§, -n. Httle son. 
 fol4 pron'l adj. such, cill folt^Ct, 
 
 such a. 
 (Sotbat, w. -ten, -ten. soldier. 
 foliti, (Ji'dj. (or adv.) solid, respect- 
 able. 
 foUen, (irreg.) tr. shall, should ; 
 owe, ought ; be to, be intended 
 to ; be said to. see 251, 257. 
 ©ommcr, rfi. -rS, -r. summer. 
 fonlJCrn, conj. but (stronger than 
 ttbcr, and usually after negative). 
 Sonnaknti, m. -bS, -be. Satur- 
 day. 
 Sonne, /. -nen. sun. 
 fonnen, irdr. expose to the sun, 
 
 air, sun. 
 Sonnenlt^t, n. sunlight, sunbeam. 
 ©onntttfi, wi. -g«, -ge. Sunday. 
 fonit, adv. else, otherwise, besides; 
 at other time, heretofore. 
 
 So^l^te, /. -ien§. Sophia. 
 
 "SotgC, /. -gen. care, anxiety, sor- 
 row. 
 
 fotgen, intr. care, take care, make 
 provision; feel anxiety or sorrow. 
 
 S^ianicn, n. -n^. Spain. 
 6|)anter, m. -x^, -r. Spaniard. 
 f|ianif(^, adj. {(yr adv. ) Spanish. 
 fjlOten, iT. spare, save, lay up. 
 fjlttt, adj. {or adv.) late, tardy, 
 
 slow. 
 fijajictcn, intr. \) or I walk (for 
 exercise or pleasure), go abroad. 
 — gCl^Cn, take a walk. — fol^ten, 
 take a drive. — rcitcn, take a 
 ride. 
 Sneer, m. -re§, -re. spear. 
 f^eifen, intr. eat, take food. 
 S^iel, n. -leg, -te. play, game, 
 sport ; playing, acting ; gam- 
 bling ; trick. 
 f|lielen, tr. or intr. play ; play 
 
 (music) ; gamble ; act. 
 S|JteUente, pi. actors, musicians. 
 SJli^e, /. -sen. point, peak, head. 
 SJjott, ni. -tte§, -tte. mockery, 
 
 derision, scorn, ridicule. 
 f|)Otten, intr. (with gen.) mock, 
 
 scoff at, ridicule. 
 S^JtOt^e, /. -rf)en. speech, lan- 
 guage. 
 f^tedien, 0. intr. or tr. speak, talk, 
 say, utter ; speak to, address. 
 frei — , pronounce free, absolve. 
 f^ttngen, 0. intr. f or t). spring, 
 
 leap, jump. 
 f|)tut)eln, intr. or tr. bubble, gush. 
 S|)Ut, /. -ven. track, trace ; way. 
 Stttb, m. -beg, -dbe. staff. 
 Stttbt, /. -cibte. city, town. 
 (Stamm,m. -ammeg,-dmme. stem, 
 
 stalk ; stock, race, tribe, 
 ftammein, intr. or tr. stammer. 
 fiammen, intr. f. originate, pro- 
 ceed, descend. 
 
432 
 
 GERMAN-ENGLISH 
 
 8tant), in. -be§, -cinbc. standing ; 
 state, position, rank in life, ju 
 — C brtngen, bring about, ac- 
 complish, im — C fcitl, be pre- 
 pared, be able. 
 
 ftaxt, o,dj. {or adv.) strong, stont, 
 vigorous ; mighty. 
 
 Static, /• -en. force, strength. 
 
 flatt, prep, (with gen.) instead of ; 
 for. 
 
 fiattftnbcn, 0. intr. take place. 
 
 ^tdttl, 0. or N. intr. stick, remain 
 fast ; lie hidden, tr. set ; hide. 
 
 fiel^en, 0. intr. t) or ]. stand, be 
 upright ; be situated, be ; stand 
 still, stop, tuic ficftt'0? how are 
 you ? how goes it ? 
 
 fietgen, 0. intr. f. step up; rise, 
 ascend, climb, get up or in; 
 sometimes descend, climb down. 
 
 flcil, adj. {or adv. ) steep. 
 
 Stein, m. -:ie§, -ne. stone, rock. 
 
 ftellen, tr. place, put, set, fix ; ar- 
 range, reflex, give one's self the 
 appearance, act as if, appear. 
 
 flerbcn, 0. intr. die. 
 
 Stern, TO.-ne8,-tie (or-nen). star. 
 
 flctS, ddv. steadily, ever, always. 
 
 Sticfel, m. -I§, -L boot. 
 
 flitt, ctdj- {or (idv.) still, silent, 
 quiet, calm, tranquil. imStitten, 
 secretly, sfdltueigenb, silent. 
 
 Stimme, /. -en. voice. 
 
 flimmcn, intr. or tr. give voice, 
 sound ; harmonize, agree, trcin 
 ftimmen, join in, join in singing. 
 
 Stirn, /. -nen. forehead, brow. 
 
 Stoif, n. -(feg, -ocfe. stick, staff, 
 cane ; trunk, stock ; story (of 
 a house). 
 
 StofF, m. -\\t%, -ffe. stuff, matter, 
 material. 
 
 flb^nen, irdr. groan. 
 
 flo(j,a(i/. (or adu.) proud, haughty, 
 arrogant. 
 
 Stor^, m. -6)t%, -tx6)t, stork. 
 flbten, tr. stir up, disturb, trouble. 
 fiO^en, 0. intr. or tr. push, thrust, 
 
 strike. 
 firafen, tr. punish, chastise. 
 Sttttfee, /. -§en. street. 
 ftreHen, irdr. strive, struggle, en- 
 deavor; aspire. 
 fireifen, tr. stretch, extend. 
 Strei^, in. -^t^, -d^e. stroke, 
 
 lash; trick, prank. 
 Streit, ra. -te§, -te, contest, com- 
 bat, conflict. 
 jlreitcn, 0. irdr. contend, struggle, 
 
 fight; argue, debate. 
 fireuen, tr. strew, scatter. 
 Strom, rn. -meg, -ome. stream, 
 
 river. 
 Stiib^en, n. -w^, -n. little room. 
 Sttirf, n. -dt^, -dt. piece, part, 
 
 fragment, bit ; piece, play. 
 Student, in. -ten, -ten. student. 
 Stubium, n. -mS, -ien. study ; pi 
 
 studies. 
 Stul^I, »w. -Ie§, -ii^te. chair. 
 fiumnt, o,dj. {or adv.) dumb, mute, 
 
 silent. 
 Stunbe, /. -ben. hour ; lesson (of 
 
 an hour's duration) ; distance of 
 
 an hour's walk. 
 fiiinilU^, adj. {or adv.) hourly. 
 Stnrm, m. -meg, -iirme. storm. 
 flUrjen, intr. f. fall headlong, 
 
 tumble, rush. tr. overthrow, 
 
 ruin. 
 fUC^en, tr- seek, search for, try to 
 
 find or obtain, aim at. 
 Siib, in. -beg. south, sintliftft, adj. 
 
 South-Indian. 
 
 Siinte, /. -ben. sin. 
 
 fitnbigen, intr. sin, commit a 
 sin. 
 
 fn§, adj. {or adv.) sweet, delight- 
 ful. 
 
 Stjricn, n. -ng. Syria. 
 
VOCABULAEY. 
 
 433 
 
 Xdbat, rti. -!§, -!e. tobacco. 
 stdU^, n. tobacco-smoke. 
 
 tatein, tr. blame, censure, re- 
 proach. 
 
 ^ttfcl, /. -In. table. 
 
 ^tt0, m. -ge8, -ge. day. 
 
 tiiglt^, adj. {or adv.) daily. 
 
 talentDott, adj. {or adv.) talented. 
 
 ^annc, /. -nen. fir-tree. Xanntni 
 Qtun, n. green of the firs. 
 
 ^ttnte, /. -ten, aunt. 
 
 ^ttnj, m. -geg, -ansc dance. 
 
 tanjett, intr. or ir. dance. 
 
 Sa^et w- -te§, -te. carpet. 
 
 ^ojlCtC,/. -ten. tapestry, hangings. 
 
 ta|)f er, adj. {or adv.) brave, valiant, 
 bold. 
 
 2^ilft^e, /. -en. pocket, pouch. 
 
 Stttffc, /. -en. cup. 
 
 tdUfett, tr. dip, immerse ; baptize, 
 christen. getttttft, baptized, 
 christian. 
 
 taufent), num. a thousand. sUlttl, 
 adv. a thousand times. 
 
 better,- m. -x^, -r. plate. 
 
 2eufcl, m. -Ig, -t. devil. 
 
 2ft al, n. -Ie§, -ciler. valley. 
 
 ^ftaler, m. -r8, -r. dollar, thaler 
 (about 73 cts.) 
 
 %W, /• -ten. deed, action. 
 
 tftiitig, adj. {or adv.) active, busy. 
 
 XWl^ttii, /. -ten. activity, effi- 
 ciency. 
 
 Xf^m [%m], m. -aue0, -ane. dew. 
 
 Xitakv, n. -r«, -r. theatre. 
 
 %Mtt, m. -eeS, -ee. tea; tea- 
 party. 
 
 Sfteil [XtW], m. or n. -Ie§, -te. 
 part, portion, share, jam — , 
 partly, cincm 3tt — tucrticn, 
 fall to one's share. 
 
 tfteilncftmcn [ttiU], 0. intr. take 
 part, participate, be interested. 
 
 tfteucr [icttcr], adj. {or adv.) dear, 
 beloved; expensive. 
 
 Xf^kx [Xkx] , . n. -res, -re animal, 
 creature. 
 
 tfttcrif(ft [tiers], adj. {or adv.) ani- 
 mal. 
 
 XiiOX, n. -re§, -re. door, gate. 
 
 Xiox, rn. -ren, -ren. fool, simple- 
 ton. 
 
 Xf^OX^tit, f. -kn. folly. 
 
 ^ftrfinc, /. -en. tear. 
 
 2ftron, m. -neg, -ne or -wen. 
 throne. 
 
 tftronctt/ iri/r. sit on a throne, be 
 enthroned. 
 
 tftun, 0. tr. do, perform ; make ; 
 put. intr. act, behave ; carry on, 
 conduct, irnpers. matter; be. 
 see 242.3. 
 
 Xf^nx, f. -ren. door. 
 
 ticf, adj. {or adv.) deep, profound, 
 low. 
 
 Xtcfc, /. -fen. depth, profundity, 
 deep place. 
 
 Xtfct), m. -fcf)e8, -fd)e. table. 
 
 Xitel, rn. -U, A. title ; claim. 
 
 Xijittn^m. -nS. Titian (the painter). 
 sfotti, m. hall for the paintings 
 of Titian. 
 
 Xo^kx, f. -orf)ter. daughter. 
 
 XoH, m. -be§, -be. death. 
 
 tobt [tot], a(^*. {or adv.) dead, as 
 nown, dead or deceased person. 
 
 toUtn [toten], tr. kill, slay, put 
 to death. 
 
 Xobtenfammer [XoU], n. cham- 
 ber of death. 
 
 tbiltUlft [tiitliJ^], adj. {or adv.) 
 deadly, mortal. 
 
 tobtfjijlttgen [tots], tr. strike dead. 
 
 Xon, rn. -neS, -one. tone, sound. 
 
 tonen, intr resound, sound forth. 
 
 triige, adj. {or adv.) inert, indo- 
 lent, lazy. 
 
 tragen, 0. tr. or intr. carry, bear, 
 bring ; wear ; support, endure ; 
 produce, yield. 
 
434 
 
 (GERMAN-ENGLISH 
 
 StanI, m. -n!e8, -an!c. drink, 
 beverage. 
 
 ttauen, in^r. {with dat) trust, have 
 confidence in, confide, reflex. 
 trust one's self, venture. 
 
 txautxn, intr. mourn, grieve, 
 lament. 
 
 Xvaum, m. -mt%, -dumc. dream. 
 
 trdumett, intr. or tr. dream, fancy. 
 
 traumlo^, adj. dreamless. 
 
 trauttg, odj. {or adv.) mournful, 
 sad, melancholy. 
 
 iraut, adj. {or adv.) beloved, dear. 
 
 ixtxhtn, 0. tr. drive, impel ; carry 
 on, perform, ein S|liel -, play 
 a trick. 
 
 trcnncn, tr. separate, divide, part. 
 reflex, part. 
 
 Strcnnung, /. -gen. separation. 
 
 trcten, 0. intr. f. tread, step, pro- 
 ceed, enter, eincm no^c —, 
 come near to, affect. 
 
 treu, adj. {or adv.) true, faithful, 
 trusty. 
 
 %X\t^, m. -beg, -be. drift; im- 
 pulse, instinct. 
 
 trinfcn, 0. tr. or intr. drink. 
 
 trorfen, adj. {or adv.) dry. 
 
 troifnen, tr. or intr. Ijor \. dry, 
 dry up. 
 
 frolic, /. -cn. tropic. 
 
 ^rojlfeit, m. -itg, -n. drop. 
 
 trofien, tr. comfort, console. 
 
 Xxoi^, m. -geg. defiance, disdain ; 
 stubbornness. 
 
 tro^, prep, {with dat. or gen.) in 
 defiance of, in spite of, notwith- 
 standing, sbcm, adv. in spite of 
 that, notwithstanding. 
 
 Xrunf, m. -M. drink, draught. 
 
 Xxu^p, m. -ppe§, -ppe. troop. 
 
 ^U^, n. -c^eg, -iic^er. cloth, linen; 
 kerchief. 
 
 Sttgcnb, /. -ben. virtue. 
 
 tttgent^aft, adj. {or adv.) virtuous. 
 
 Ue^el, n. -t6, -t evil, ill, misfortune. 
 
 itbcn, tr. practice, exercise. 
 
 uhtXf adv. and seple {or insep'le) 
 
 preflx. over, above ; in excess. 
 
 tie !^tit —, during the time, see 
 
 230.1a. 
 prep, {with dat.) over, above, 
 
 higher than ; in the process of; 
 
 while, by reason of. {with a^cus.) 
 
 over or above ; across ; beyond ; 
 
 after, by way of ; respecting ; 
 
 over, more than. 
 itbcraU, adv. everywhere. 
 itkrMngen, {irreg.) tr. bring over, 
 
 deliver. (sep7e) bring over, 
 
 carry over. 
 itberflufftg, adj. {or adv.) super- 
 fluous, unnecessary ; plentiful. 
 u6cr]^0U|Jt, adv. in general, 
 
 altogether. 
 itbetlaffett, 0. tr. {sep'le or insep'le) 
 
 leave over, turn over, relinquish, 
 
 resign, make over, cede. 
 ubetlebctt, tr. outUve, survive. 
 
 1. iificrlegcn, tr. {seple) lay over, 
 turn over, (inseple) turn over in 
 mind, consider. 
 
 2. iibcrlcgen, see itkrliegeit. 
 
 itberliegen, 0. intr. {seple) lie oyer, 
 be deferred, {insep'le) be superior 
 to, surpass, itftetlegen, with dat 
 superior to. 
 
 iikrmorgcn, adv. day after to- 
 morrow. 
 
 iiklTttft^cn, tr. surprise, startle. 
 
 itberfe^en, tr. (seple) set over or 
 across, {inseple) translate. 
 
 itkrfte^en, intr. {sepHe) stand over 
 or out. {inseple) last over, last 
 through, outlast, endure, live 
 through. 
 
 itbertninben, 0. tr. overcome, con- 
 quer, subdue. 
 
 iibtig, adj. {or adv.) left over, left. 
 — ilciiicn/ be left. 
 
VOCABULAEY. 
 
 435 
 
 u6rt0en0, adv. for the rest, more- 
 over. 
 
 UeBung, /. -gen. exercise, prac- 
 tice. 
 
 Ufer, n. -x^f -r. shore, coast, 
 bank. 
 
 U|r, /. -retl. hour ; clock, watch. 
 after numerals, o'clock. 
 
 Um, adv. and seple prefix, around, 
 about ; around about or over. 
 
 prep, {with accus.) around, 
 about; near to; respecting, con- 
 cerning, {after verbs of asking) 
 for. {with comparativef denoting 
 arrCt of difference) by. before ju 
 and an infinitive, in order, so as. 
 urn .... ^cr, {with accus. be- 
 tween) round about, uui .... 
 toittcn^ {yyith gen.) on account 
 of. 
 
 UmaXTMtt^tr. throw the arm about, 
 embrace. 
 
 Umbrtngen, {irreg.) tr. cause to 
 lose one's life, destroy, kill. 
 
 Umgang, m. -gg. going around ; 
 roundabout way ; society, com- 
 pany. 
 
 urn 9 eb en, 0. tr. {insepUe) sur- 
 round, environ, enclose. 
 
 Itni^Ct, adv. around, round about. 
 
 Umterneit, intr. leam over again, 
 learn in a different way. 
 
 Umltegen, 0. intr. f. lie around or 
 about, umncgenti, surrounding, 
 neighboring. 
 
 Umfcl^cn, 0. intr. look about, re- 
 flex, look about one's self. 
 
 Umftant), tn- -beg, -cinbe. circum- 
 stance. 
 
 Umtoenbett, {irreg. or reg.) tr. 
 turn about, reverse, invert, intr. 
 turn, turn back. 
 
 Itns, neg. prefix, same as English un-. 
 sQ6dnberli(^, adj. unalterable. 
 sanfeJ^nltf^, adj, inconsiderable, 
 
 insignificant, stttttg, adj. rude, 
 naughty. sBefttnnt,<w^i. unknown. 
 ssBetoegJit^, adj. immovable. sBc 
 mol^nt, adj. uninhabited. sBtaUt^s 
 Bat, useless. 
 
 Unt, conj. and. 
 
 unsllttnfbttr, adj. thankless, scnlls 
 Ii(^, adj. endless, scntbc^rlii^, 
 indispensable, setfttftrenftcit, /. 
 inexperience. sCrmcfeUri, adj. 
 immeasurable. sCrfc^Ut^, adj. 
 indispensable, scrtriiglit^, adj. 
 unendurable. stttOIXXUt, adj. un- 
 expected, sfe^lbttt, adj. infalli- 
 ble. sfc^IBttrtctt, /. infallibility. 
 sgcac^tct, prep, {with dat. or 
 gen.)in spite of, notwithstand- 
 ing, conj. although, sgcftt^r, 
 ado. about, nearly, not far from. 
 sgClicBt, adj. unloved, sgcmif^t, 
 adj. unmixed, sgcrc d)t, adj. un- 
 just, unfair. sgcf(^e()en, adj. 
 not happened, undone. sgCs 
 f^Ia^t, adj. uncouth, unwieldy. 
 sgCtUi^^Cit, /• uncertainty, sge? 
 JOgcn, adj. illbred, rude, un- 
 mannered. sgtaublilJ), adj. in- 
 credible. 
 
 Unglucf, rn. ill-luck, misfortune, 
 unhappiness. 
 
 Ultsglutflid), adj. unfortunate, un- 
 happy, sgtiirffelig, adj. unlucky, 
 unfortunate, miserable. 
 
 Unibcrritttt, /. -ten. university. 
 
 unsmbgtid), adj. impossible, spa^s 
 fcnb, adj. unsuitable. stcd)t, n. 
 wrong, error ; injustice, injury. 
 *ru^e, /. disquiet, anxiety. 
 sfauftcrlid^, adj. not neat or 
 clean, dirty, /ft^ultltg, adj. in- 
 nocent. 
 
 1. unfcr, poss. pron. our, ours. 
 
 2. unfer, gen. pi. of i^. 
 
 unferig (unfrig), poss. pron. our, 
 ours. 
 
436 
 
 OEHMAJJ-ENGUSH 
 
 Unsfit^er, cw^i- uncertain, unsafe. 
 
 Itnten, odv. below, beneath. 
 
 UXdtX, adv. and sep'le prefix, below, 
 beneath, under ; among, amid. 
 prep, (with dot. or accus.) 
 under, beneath, below ; less 
 than, inferior to ; among, amid, 
 between; during. 
 
 Untcrtcffen, adv. during this time, 
 meantime. 
 
 untergc^cn, 0. intr. f. go down, 
 descend, set ; fall, perish. 
 
 ItntcrliCftCn, 0. intr. {sep'le) lie 
 under. {insepHe) succumb, yield, 
 be worsted. 
 
 Untemc^mcn, 0. tr. undertake, at- 
 tempt. 
 
 tttttcrri^tcn, tr. instruct, teach. 
 
 ttntcrt^an, m. -nen or -n§, -nen. 
 subject, dependent. 
 
 UnttXtOt^^, adv. on the way, under- 
 way. . 
 
 UnsUntcrBrO^en, adj. uninter- 
 rupted. sUtttcrliinilif^, adj. un- 
 patriotic. stierfO^nH^, adj. im- 
 placable, irreconcihable. $tlOilens 
 titi, adj. unfinished, incomplete. 
 s^DOtfit^ttg, adj. destitute of fore- 
 sight, imprudent, sfticit, adv. 
 not far distant, prep, {mth gen.) 
 not far from, near, stoitierfle^' 
 li^, adj. irresistible. stUO^I, adj. 
 unwell, not well. stUUtbtg, adj. 
 unworthy, derogatory to {with 
 gen.) 
 
 Urfat^e, /. -ci^en. cause, motive. 
 
 JBtttcr, m. -r«, -ater. father, slonb, 
 n. native country, fatherland. 
 
 tJcitcrUj^, adj. {or adv.) fatherly, 
 paternal. 
 
 I55ct(^cn, n. -n«, -11. violet. 
 
 SBenciig, n. -g«. Venice. 
 
 Her* insep'le prefix, see 307.6, 
 405.IU.ld 
 
 bera^ten, tr. despise, disdain. 
 
 95crtt(fttun9, /• contempt, scorn. 
 
 bcraltcn, intr. f. grow old. UCU? 
 ttltct, grown old, aged. 
 
 HcriinilCrn, tr. change, alter. 
 
 iJCtbcrgcn, 0. tr. hide, conceal. 
 
 Ucrbcffern, tr. make better, im- 
 prove. 
 
 JBerficlfcrung, /. -gen. improve- 
 ment, reform. 
 
 tietbteten, 0. tr. {with dot.) forbid, 
 interdict. 
 
 tierbtnben, 0. tr. bind up, tie up ; 
 bind together; lay under an obli- 
 gation. 
 
 !|JcrBrC^en, 0. tr. break ; trans- 
 gress, as noun, transgression, 
 crime, guilt. 
 
 JBcrirct^cr , tn. -rs, -r. criminal, 
 
 transgressor. 
 
 tierbrcnncn, {irreg.) tr. or intr. j. 
 bum up, destroy by fire ; scorch, 
 scald. 
 
 tJCrbringcn, {irreg.) tr. pass away, 
 spend. 
 
 fStX^iat^t, m. -tg. suspicion. 
 
 tiertiammen, tr. condemn, damn, 
 sentence, ppl. used as noun, 
 condemned one. 
 
 tiertieifcn, tr. cover up, conceal. 
 
 ticrbcrficn, 0. intr. f. spoil, be 
 ruined, perish. N. tr. spoil, des- 
 troy, ruin, as noun, ruin, de- 
 struction. 
 
 tjerberBItt^, adj. {or adv.) destruct- 
 ible ; destructive, pernicious. 
 
 Dettltenen, tr. earn, gain ; deserve. 
 berbtent, deserving. 
 
 tJCrbric^cn, 0. tr. fret, vex. bet* 
 broffcn, averse; wearied, dis- 
 gusted. 
 
 liSere^rung, /. reverence, venera- 
 tion. 
 
 ISBcrein, m. -ii8, -ne. union, com- 
 bination. 
 
VOCABULABY. 
 
 437 
 
 tICtCitcTn, tr. make vain, frustrate, 
 
 render futile. 
 tJerftt^rCtt, 0. intr. I) or f. proceed, 
 
 conduct one's self. 
 ticrfatten, 0. mtr. f. fall in, de- 
 cline, degenerate, decay. tJCt* 
 
 faUcn, dilapidated, ruinous. 
 JBcrfttffcr, rn. -x^, -r. author, 
 
 composer. 
 iSBcrgttngcn^cit, /. the past, time 
 
 past. 
 tierpnglil^, adj. {or adv.) tran- 
 sitory, perishable. 
 tietgeben, 0. tr. give away; forgive, 
 
 pardon. 
 htX^thtnB, adv. in vain, vainly. 
 ncrge^Ctt, 0. Mr. j. pass away, 
 
 elapse, as noun, error, offense. 
 
 ticrgttngcn, gone by, elapsed, 
 
 past. 
 Uetgcltcn, 0. tr. pay back, return, 
 
 requite, recompense. 
 tetgeffen, 0. tr. (or Mr. with gen.) 
 
 forget. 
 ticrgniigcn, tr. satisfy, gratify, 
 
 please, as noun, satisfaction, 
 
 enjoyment, delight. 
 nergbnncn, tr. grant cheerfully, 
 
 not grudge, allow. 
 
 tierl^angniftdott [sniguoH], adj. (or 
 
 adv.) momentous, fateful. 
 
 Derl^aH <^^i- (^^ ^^0 lifted, hate- 
 ful, abhorrent. 
 
 bCtlftctmUl^cn, tr. keep secret, con- 
 ceal. 
 
 tlcrl^cirttt^Ctt [statett], tr. give in 
 marriage, reflex, marry, get 
 married. 
 
 llCtltntlCrit, tr. hinder, prevent. 
 
 tietiagen, tr. chase away, expel. 
 
 lierittufen, tr. sell. 
 
 tietflagen, tr. accuse ;^complain of. 
 ^etllagt (as noun), the accused. 
 
 JBerfitntiiger, m. -rg, -r. herald, 
 proclaimer, haxbinger. 
 
 ticrlutjcn, tr. make short, shorten. 
 Ucrlangen, Mr. long, desire, tr. 
 
 desire, require, demand, as 
 
 noun, longing, desire, wish, 
 
 demand. 
 ticrlttff en, tr. leave, quit; forsake, 
 
 desert, reflex, {with auf) confide 
 
 one's self to, trust in, rely or 
 
 depend upon. 
 tJCrlcbcn, tr. live, spend, pass. 
 Ucrlei^cn, 0. tr. lend out, let; 
 
 confer, grant. 
 tlCtlc^cn, tr. injure, harm, hurt, 
 
 wound ; hurt the feelings of. 
 
 uetlictcn, 0. tr. lose, ucrlorcn, 
 
 lost, ruined. 
 
 liBcrlufl, m. -t8, -te. loss, detri- 
 ment. 
 
 Ucrmogen, {irreg.) ir. have power 
 to, be able to, can. as noun, 
 ability ; property. 
 
 JBcrmut^ung [=utung], /. -gen. 
 
 supposition, conjecture. 
 
 HCtttCi^mcn, 0. tr. become sensible 
 of, perceive ; hear, understand. 
 
 Dcrniinftig, adj. {or adv.) reason- 
 able, sensible. 
 
 tJCrortincn, tr. order, decree; 
 ordain. 
 
 HOcrriit^er [4tt], m, -r«, -r. 
 
 traitor, betrayer. 
 
 tJCrreifcil, intr. ]. go on a journey, 
 travel off, set out. 
 
 bcrfttgcn, tr. refuse, deny. 
 
 ticrfammeln, tr. {andreflex.) assem- 
 ble, collect, gather. 
 
 ftcrfiiumen, tr. forget, omit, ne- 
 glect, miss. 
 
 tJCtfc^affcit, tr. procure, obtain, 
 furnish. 
 
 Detf^attcn, 0. or K. Mr. f, die 
 away. ticrft^oHcn, vanished. 
 
 tierf^tetien, adj. {or adv.) different, 
 various, diverse, pi. various, 
 sundry. 
 
438 
 
 GEKMAN-ENGUSH 
 
 Derf^Kc^en, 0. tr. shut up, close, 
 lock Tip. tjctf^loffen, shut, 
 locked up ; closed. 
 
 tJCrf^nttt^Ctt, tr. disdain, despise. 
 
 tjcrf^otten, see tJcrft^aHcn. 
 
 DCrfrfloncn, tr. spare, exempt. 
 
 tJCrfc^tainiien, 0. intr, \. vanish, 
 disappear. 
 
 tCrfcl^tClt, tr. wound, hurt. 
 
 Derfc^cn, tr. misplace ; displace, 
 transfer, put (into a state or 
 condition). 
 
 t^tx[oi^Xitn,tr. reconcile, propitiate; 
 expiate, atone for. 
 
 JBcrfo^nung, /. -gen. reconcilia- 
 tion, expiation. 
 
 Iierfliret^cn, 0. tr. promise, as 
 noun, promise. 
 
 95cr|^reiung, /• -gen. promise. 
 
 HOerDanH, m. -beg. understand- 
 ing, intelligence, intellect. 
 
 llCrfidntJig, adj. {or adv.) under- 
 standing, reasonable, judicious. 
 
 tietfleifen, tr. hide, conceal. 
 
 tietfielien, 0. tr. understand, reflex, 
 (impers.) understand itself, be a 
 matter of course, {with ttUf) 
 understand, know well. 
 
 Ucrflettcn, tr. displace, reflex, dis- 
 semble. Derftellt feigned ; 
 sham. 
 
 tterjlorctt, tr. disturb, trouble, 
 derange. 
 
 ticrjitcij^en, 0. tr. spread over. 
 iriir. f. glide away, elapse. 
 
 UCrfUt^cn, tr. attempt, try, en- 
 deavor. 
 
 ticrtttttft^cn, tr. exchange, barter; 
 mistake, confound. 
 
 ticrt^eibigcn Nciiitgcn], tr. de- 
 fend, vindicate. 
 
 tJCrticfcn, tr. deepen, reflex, be 
 lost or absorbed. bCtticft, deeply 
 engaged, lost, absorbed. 
 
 ^crtrttgli^f eit, /. tolerance. 
 
 tJerttttUen, tr. entrust, confide. 
 intr. {with dat.) trust to, confide. 
 Hertraut, trusted, trusty, fami- 
 liar, intimate. ^txtxautn, n. 
 trust, confidence. 
 
 tiertreibcn, 0. tr. drive away, ex- 
 pel, exile. 
 
 titVtoan1itln,tr. change, transform, 
 convert. 
 
 JBcrtUttttiltft^ttft, /. -ten. relation- 
 ship, kin. collectively, relations, 
 kindred. 
 
 tJCrhlCt^fcItt, tr. exchange; con- 
 found. 
 
 UcrtDCrfen, 0. tr. throw away, re- 
 ject, repudiate. 
 
 ^crtuirrung, /. -gen. complica- 
 tion, confusion. 
 
 ticrtnorren, old pple. entangled, 
 confused. 
 
 !55cr3ci^ni§ [mB], n. -ffeg, -ffe. 
 note, list. 
 
 bcrjcifteit, 0. tr. forgive, pardon. 
 
 iKcrjCi^ung, /. pardon, forgive- 
 ness, 
 
 ticrjtticifcln, intr. despair. 
 
 ^Uerjtoeiflung, /. despair, dec- 
 peration. 
 
 ^Better, m. -r8, -rn. male 
 cousin. 
 
 \S\t\, adj. {or adv.) much, many. 
 siJCUtig, adj. ambiguous, sfad^, 
 adj. manifold, various, sj^riitl, 
 adj. very green, slci^t, adv or 
 conj. perhaps, maybe, smttf, adj. 
 many times, smc^r, adv. much 
 more, rather, sooner. 
 
 tJier, num. four, sjcl^lt, fourteen. 
 
 JBicrtel, n. -t§, -t quarter. 
 SBogel, m. -U, -oget. bird. 
 UBiiglein, n. -n8, -n. little bird. 
 ^O^ip m. -m, -ogte. governor, 
 
 prefect, etc. 
 Jgolf, n. -!eg, -i3I!er. people, nation. 
 
VOCABULAET. 
 
 439 
 
 sing, used collectively, folks, 
 people. 
 f&OlUxVtfilt, n. right of nations, in- 
 ternational law. 
 * tioff, adj. (or adv.) full, filled ; 
 complete, whole, entire, seple 
 or insep'le prefix, full. 
 HoQenben, tr. bring to a close, 
 end, complete, finish. tJOttctt? 
 bet, completed, finished, per- 
 fect. 
 t\otii^,adj. {or adv.) full, complete, 
 
 entire. 
 tioUtommtn,adj. {or adv.) perfect, 
 
 complete. 
 tiOtifimtiQ,adj. {or adv.) complete, 
 
 entire, total. 
 Hon, prep, {with dat.) from, of, 
 among, by, with ; concerning, 
 about, by ; on, upon. — fe(6ft, 
 of itself. 
 Iior, adv. and seple prefix, before ; 
 formerly, prep, {with dat. or 
 accus.) before (in place or in 
 time), in front of, ere ; in sight 
 of ; for, on account of ; from, 
 against, more than, above, of 
 time, ago: e. g. Jjot cincm ^tt^rc, 
 a year ago. 
 tlOtbei, adv. and sep'le prefix, along 
 by, past; past and gone, over, 
 done with, t^tfittl, 0. intr. \. go 
 past, pass by. 
 JKortlCrftttUS, n. front part of the 
 
 house. 
 UOrfoftrcn, 0. intr. \. go or drive 
 
 before or in front, drive up. 
 IKorgcma^, n. -c^g, -ad^er. ante- 
 chamber. 
 SDorgcf^it^tc, /. previous or ante- 
 cedent history. 
 Uorgcficrn, adv. day before yester- 
 day. 
 Hor^a^en, {irreg.) tr. have before 
 one or in view, intend, 
 
 t\OVfitX, adv. and sep'le prefix, be- 
 forehand, before, previously. 
 
 dorig, adj. former, preceding, 
 last. 
 
 iJOrlcfcn, 0. tr. read before or for 
 any one, read aloud ; lecture. 
 
 ^ormtttag, m. forenoon. [dian. 
 
 liSormunD, m. -beg, -iiiiber. guar- 
 
 Dorne^nten, 0. tr. set before one's 
 self ; intend, propose ; under- 
 take. 
 
 9)orf(^Cttt, m. -Its* coming to light, 
 appearance, gum — foiumcn, 
 come to light, appear. 
 
 ajorf^tttj, m. -gg, -age. offer, 
 proposal. 
 
 iJOrfc^cn, tr. prefix ; set over, 
 ai)point; put before (one's self) 
 as an object, propose, intend. 
 tlOtftngCtt, 0. tr. or intr. sing before 
 
 or for one {dat.), sing aloud. 
 ttOtjietten, tr. put before; intro- 
 duce, present ; personate, re- 
 present ; plead, {with refiex. dat. ) 
 put before one's mind, imagine, 
 fancy. 
 95ort^cil [stcil], m. -U, -le. advan- 
 tage, profit. 
 tlOru6cr, adv. and sep'le prefix. . 
 across before or in front, along 
 by, past ; over, finished, done. 
 sffiel^cn, 0. intr. \. fly past, rush 
 past. 
 DOtttiatt0, adv. forward, on, in 
 advance, ffttcbett, i'dr. strive 
 onward or forward. 
 
 tottt^, adj. {or adv.) awake. 
 ttia^en, intr. wake, be awake; 
 
 watch. 
 til tt^ fen, 0. intr. I wax, grow, 
 
 increase. 
 ttiader, adj. {or adv. ) gallant, brave, 
 
 clever. 
 SBaffe,/, -fen. weapon. 
 
440 
 
 GERMAN-ENGUSH 
 
 ttmgett, tr. hazard, risk, dare. 
 SBttgen, m. -ng, -n or -agett. 
 
 wagon, carriage ; car. 
 SBal^l/ /• -len. choice, selection, 
 
 election. 
 tDfi^klt, tr. choose, select, elect. 
 tua^nen, tr. believe erroneously, 
 
 be mistaken in believing ; fancy, 
 
 imagine. 
 tOd^X, adj. (or adv.) true, real. 
 to'df^Vtn'ii, prep, {with gen.) during. 
 
 conj. while, whilst. 
 
 SBttftr^cit,/. -ten. truth. 
 
 SBa(t), m. -beS, -dtber. forest, wood. 
 
 sl^utct, tn. forester. 
 SSttni),/. -anbe. wall. 
 tUttnJlCln, irdr. \ or 1^. go, walk, 
 
 proceed. 
 tnanbern, intr. f or If, wander, 
 
 rove ; travel. 
 SSanberer, m. -r§, -r. wanderer, 
 
 traveller. 
 SBonbcrgmann, m. wanderer, 
 
 traveller (on foot). 
 toanitn,intr.]orl). stagger, totter, 
 
 waver, flinch. 
 toantt, odv. (interrog.) when? at 
 
 what time ? 
 
 conj. when ; at what time. 
 to arm, adj. (or adv.) warm. 
 SBttritttng, /. -gen. warning, 
 
 caution. 
 tOavUn, irdr. wait, stay, await ; 
 
 (with -ouf) wait for, await ; wait 
 
 on, serve. 
 to arum, adv. (or conj.) for or on 
 
 account of what or which, why, 
 
 wherefore. 
 toaB, pron. interrog. or relat. what, 
 
 that which ; whatever ; why, 
 
 for what, /or cttOttg, something, 
 
 somewhat ; how. — fiir, what 
 
 sort of, what kind of. — aut^, 
 
 — immer, — nut, whatever. 
 
 see 175-6, 179. 
 
 SSttffcr, n. -x9, -r. water. 
 
 tOC^fcln, tr. or intr. change, ex- 
 change. 
 
 toetfen, tr. wake up, wake, arouse. 
 
 tociJer, conj. neither (withfoUmmn^ 
 no^, nor). 
 
 1. 9Scg, m. -ge§, -ge. way, path, 
 road, route ; mode, manner, 
 means. 
 
 2. tlAt^,adv. and sep'le prefix, away, 
 off; gone, interjec. be gone, 
 away, snc^mcit, 0. tr. take 
 away, stoerfcit, 0. tr. throw 
 away. 
 
 toegen, prep, (with gen.) on account 
 of, because of, for. 
 
 1. tOCl^, adj. (or adv.) sad, painful. 
 
 2. aSc^, n. -f)e8, -^ -I)e or -f)en. 
 woe, pain, distress, grief. — t|un, 
 (withdat.) give pain to, distress. 
 
 SBcifi, n. -be^, -ber. woman, wife. 
 toei^en, 0. intr. f. give way, lose 
 
 ground, flinch, yield ; (with dot.) 
 
 yield to, turn out for. 
 toeitien, intr. pasture, feed. 
 Xon%txn,tr. refuse, deny, object to. 
 SBct^nat^t, /. gen'lly in pi. sfctt, 
 
 Christmas. 
 tocil, conj. because, since, as. 
 SBetn, rn. -ne§, -ne. wine. 
 toettten, intr. weep, cry. 
 toetneritt^, adj. (or adv.) incUned 
 
 to weeping, whining. 
 tOCife, adj. (or adv.) wise, sage, 
 
 prudent, as noun^ wise man, 
 
 sage. 
 SSetSl^eit /. wisdom, knowledge. 
 tOCife, adj. (or adv.) white. 
 tOCit, adj. (or adv.) wide, broad, 
 
 large, far, far off, distant. 
 tOCitcr, adv. farther, further; 
 
 besides. 
 toe(c^, interrog. or relat. adj. or 
 pron. which, what, that, indef. 
 pron. some, any. 
 
VOCABULAKY. 
 
 441 
 
 fl&tUc, f. -ten. wave, billow. 
 
 JBcIt, /. -ten. world, earth, uni- 
 verse, society, ^bc^tuinger, rn. 
 conqueror of the world, slauf, 
 m. course of the world. stcgiCs 
 rcnU, cidj' world-governing. 
 stDCife, ctdj. philosophic, as 
 noun, philosopher. 
 
 tneniieit, {reg. or irreg.) tr. turn, 
 turn about, direct, apply. 
 
 toenig, ci^dj. {or adv.) little, not 
 much; few, not many, ein — , 
 a little, a bit. 
 
 tOCnig|iten0, adv. at least, at any 
 rate. 
 
 toeitn, conj. when ; usually, if, in 
 case. $Q(ett^, although. 
 
 tOtV, pron. interrog. or rdat. who, 
 he who, whoever. — ttUt^, 
 — nur, whoever, see 173, 179. 
 
 toetticn, 0. intr. f. become, come 
 to be, grow, as auxiliary, see 
 240.2,4, 275-77. — ^n, {with 
 dot.) turn to, become, etttem — , 
 fall to one's share, be given to 
 one. impers. with pred. adj. begin 
 to be or feel. 
 
 toerfen, 0. tr. throw. 
 
 SBcrf, ri. -fe8, -fe. work, deed, 
 production. 
 
 teicrt^ [tticrt], adj. {or adv.) with 
 gen. (of) or dnt. (to) worthy, 
 worth; dear, beloved, deserving. 
 
 SBert^ [ttJcrt], m. -i\)t^, -t^e. 
 worth, value, price. 
 
 SScfcn,n. -n8,-n. being, existence; 
 creature, living thing. 
 
 SBcflcntttfd^C, /. vest-pocket. 
 
 3Better, n. -r§, -r. weather ; storm. 
 
 tnidltig, adj. {or adv.) weighty, im- 
 portant. 
 
 SBic^tigfcit, /. -ten. importance, 
 consequence. 
 
 toiffeltt, tr. wrap up, roll, envelop. 
 
 toitier^ odv. and sep'le w insep'le \ 
 
 prefix, against, gain -, with -; 
 prep, {with accus.) against, con- 
 trary. 
 
 toitierfe^en, reflex, {with dot.) {in- 
 sepHe) set one's self against, op- 
 pose, resist, tr. {seple) seat one's 
 self again. 
 
 tQttierfle^en, 0. intr. {with dot.) 
 withstand, resist, oppose. 
 
 mibctflteben, intr. {with dot.) strive 
 or struggle against, oppose, re- 
 sist, be reluctant. 
 
 tuibmen^ tr. dedicate, devote, re- 
 flex, devote one's self. 
 
 tUtlirtg, adj. {or adv.) contrary; 
 repugnant, offensive, odious ; 
 cross. 
 
 luie, adv. {interrog.) how? in what 
 way? in what degree or measure? 
 how! 
 
 conj. {relat.) how, efc. ; of man- 
 ner and degree, as, like as, like ; 
 such as, as if; of time, as, when. 
 — Ottli^, — nur, however, how- 
 soever. 
 
 tuiciict, adv. and sep'le or inseple 
 prefix, again, anew, once more. 
 
 totCbcrbrtngcn, {irreg.) tr. bring 
 back or again, restore. 
 
 ttitebergeben, 0. tr. give back, 
 
 restore. 
 tOietter^Olen, tr. {sep'le) bring or 
 
 fetch back, {insep'le) say again, 
 
 repeat. 
 tutetierfe^ren, intr. f. turn back, 
 
 return. 
 toiclJCrfommcn, 0. intr, f. come 
 
 back again, return. 
 tuietierfe^en, 0. tr. see or meet 
 
 again, as noun, meeting again. 
 
 out — , till we meet again I 
 
 au revoir. 
 tUtetierum, adv. over again, again, 
 SSicge, /. -gen. cradle. 
 toiegcn, 0. tr, weigh ; lift 
 
442 
 
 GERMAN-ENGLISH 
 
 SBtcn, n. -ttS. Vienna. 
 
 SBtefe, /. -en. meadow, pasture. 
 
 toiltl, adj. (or adv.) wild, fierce, 
 savage, unruly. 
 
 SBiKc or SBittcn, m. -n§, -n. will, in- 
 tent, design, purpose, um .... 
 tOttten, (with gen.) for the sake 
 of, on account of. 
 
 toittfommen, adj. (or adv.) wel- 
 come. 
 
 aBiitli, m. -beg, -be. wind, sfilats 
 tctlt, pi' cMcken-pox. 
 
 SStnilung, /. -gen. winding, coil. 
 
 SBinfel, m. -Ig, -I. comer, angle, 
 nook, 
 
 SBinter, m. -r§, -r. winter. 
 
 tnir, nom. pi. of i^. we. 
 
 toirfcn, tr. work, produce, do, 
 perform, operate. 
 
 iQtrfH^, adj. (or adv.) actual, real. 
 
 SBirtft mixt], m. -i\)t%, -t^e. host, 
 
 landlord. 
 miff en, (irreg.) tr. know, be aware 
 
 of; loith injin. know how. as 
 
 noun, knowledge, learning. 
 SBiffenft^ttft, /. -ten. knowledge ; 
 
 science. 
 SBttttiicr mittotv], m. -r8, -r. 
 
 widower. 
 
 mo adv. (interrog.) where? in what 
 place? conj. (relat.) where ; in 
 which, at which, on which, etc. 
 of time, at which (time), when. 
 (for too compounded with prep's, 
 instead of lottg, tucr, etc. see 
 173.2, 180.) s^cn (^v. (inter- 
 rog.) or conj. (rdat.) whence, 
 from whence, sl^ilt, adv. or 
 conj. whither, what way. sju, 
 adv. or conj. whereto, to what 
 purpose. 
 
 SBo^e, /. -d^en. week. 
 
 SBoge, /. -gen. wave, billow. 
 
 1. toOl||(, adv. well, in good manner 
 or degree ; ojiien used to make a 
 
 statement less definite, indeed, 
 perhaps, probably, I presume. 
 etc. mir ifl — , I feel well. Uhtn 
 (Sic — , farewell, sbefanitt, adj. 
 well known, st^ttt,/. good deed, 
 kindness, benefit. 
 
 2. S8o^(, n. -te«. weal, welfare, ad- 
 vantage. 
 
 tOOl^nen, intr. dwell, live, reside. 
 
 SBo^nort, m. dwelling place. 
 
 SBoinuitg, /. -gen. dweUing, lodg- 
 ing, residence, house. 
 
 SBoIf, m. -feg, -olfe. wolf. 
 
 SBolfc, /. -en. cloud. • 
 
 tDOtten, (irreg.) tr. will, be willing; 
 intend, desire, wish ; be on the 
 point, be about ; claim, assert. 
 see, 251, 258, 259. 
 
 aSonne, /. -en. joy, pleasure, 
 bUss, rapture. 
 
 toots, same as tOO. 
 
 UBort, n. -teg, -te or -orter. word, 
 term ; expression, speech. 
 
 tounti, adj. (or adv.) wounded, 
 sore, hurt. 
 
 SSl^untie, /• -ben. wound, hurt. 
 
 aSunbcr, n. -rg, -r. wonder, 
 miracle. 
 
 iOUnt)Crbttr, adj. (or adv.) wonder- 
 ful, miraculous. 
 
 tuuntierit, reflex, wonder, be aston- 
 ished or amazed. 
 
 SSuttfi^, m. -fc^eS, -itnfd^e. wish, 
 desire. 
 
 tniinf^cn, tr. wish, desire, long. 
 
 SBiirilC, /. -en. worth; dignity, 
 high rank or office. 
 
 ttluriJig, adj. (or adv.) worthy, 
 deserving. 
 
 SBiirjc, /. -en. spice. 
 
 SS^irjcI, /. -In. root. 
 
 Xtnit, /. -ten. xenium (name 
 given to satyrical epigrams by 
 Goethe und Schiller), 
 
VOCABULABY. 
 
 443 
 
 S(i% f' -Ifctt* number ; figure. 
 
 ja^Icn, tr. tell out; pay off. 
 
 ja^ten, tr. tell over, count, number. 
 
 3ft^n, m. -neg, -at)ue. tooth. 
 
 Jtttt, «d/. (or adu.) tender, soft, 
 delicate ; slender, frail. 
 
 ^ttrtl^cit, /• tenderness, softness. 
 
 jcirtli^, cidj- {<yr adv.) tender, fond. 
 
 SaviiWtiU /• tenderness, fond- 
 ness. 
 
 jaubetn, intr. delay, linger, hesitate. 
 
 ge^tt, num. ten. 
 
 Sti^tn, n. -n«, -It. token, sign, 
 mark ; signal ; miracle, wonder. 
 
 ^ti^tn,tr. show, point out; dis- 
 play, reflex, show one's self, 
 appear. 
 
 3ei(e, /. -ten. line, row. 
 
 ^tii, /. -ten. time, season. 
 
 gcitung, /. -gen. tidings, news ; 
 newspaper. 
 
 Stli, n. -teS, -tc. tent. 
 
 gets insep'le prefix, see 307.7. 
 
 gCtfitC^cn, 0. intr f. or tr. break 
 asunder or in pieces, shatter. 
 
 jerfatten, 0. intr. \. fall to pieces, 
 crumble, become ruined ; fall 
 out.' jcrf alien, p'ple, decayed, 
 ruinous ; not on good terms, at 
 variance. 
 
 jerfc^cn, tr. tear, mangle. 
 
 jetrctftcn, 0. tr. tear in pieces, 
 rend asunder, intr. f. be torn 
 asunder. 
 
 jerfloren, tr. destroy, ruin, demol- 
 ish. 
 
 gerflrcuttng, /. -en. scattering; 
 diversion, amusement; absence 
 of mind. 
 
 Jtel^en, 0. tr. draw, pull ; attract ; 
 extract, obtain, bring ; bring up. 
 reflex, draw or move slowly, 
 march ; stretch, extend, intr. f. 
 proceed, move; march, go on 
 an expedition. 
 
 3icl, n. -\%, -le. end, limit ; goal, 
 
 aim, object. 
 jicmcn, intr. (with dat,) beseem, 
 
 become, suit, be fitting for. 
 Jtemltt^, cidj. {or adv.) suitable, 
 
 proper; moderate, tolerable. 
 jictcn, tr. adorn, ornament. 
 dimmer, n. -r«, -r. room, aparte- 
 
 ment. 
 3inn, n. -nneg. tin. sfolbttt, w. 
 
 tin-soldier. 
 Jtttetn, intr. tremble, quake. 
 ^orn, ni. -ne^. anger, wrath. 
 jornig, adj. {or adv.) angry. 
 jU, adv. and sep'le prefix, to; 
 
 together, closed ; with adj. or 
 
 adv. too, overmuch, in excess. 
 prep, {with dat.) to, unto ; in 
 
 addition to, besides ; at, in, by; 
 
 in order to, for ; on, in ; with 
 
 preceding, dat., toward, as sign 
 
 ofinfin., to, in order to. 
 jukrcitcn, tr. prepare, make 
 
 ready. 
 jubringen, {irreg.) tr. with accus. 
 
 and dat. bring to, offer, present; 
 
 with accus. only, pass (time), 
 
 spend. 
 3utf)t, /. -ten. training, dis- 
 cipline. 
 jUcfen, intr. \) or \. move with a 
 
 quick motion, throb, quiver, 
 
 flash, tr. shrink, shrug. 
 Surfer, m. -rg, -r. sugar, stuett 
 
 n. sweetmeats, confectionary, 
 
 candy. 
 JUCrfl, adv. at first. 
 jufa^ren, 0. intr. f. {wUhdat.) dniye 
 
 or ride to, come in, approach. 
 3Ufluflern, tr. whisper. 
 jufriebcn, adj. {or adv.) at peace, 
 
 content, pleased. 
 Sug, m. -geg, -iige. drawing, pull; 
 
 impulse ; draught, breath ; ex- 
 pedition, 
 
4M 
 
 GERMIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 JupngTi^, adj, (or adv.) access- 
 ible, affable. 
 gugeften, 0. intr. [. {with dat) go 
 
 to, approach ; go on, proceed, 
 
 happen, come to pass. 
 3U0CI^ ''^- "^^r ~f' rein, bridle. 
 gUglctt^, ddv. at the same time. 
 JUgreifen, 0. Mr. {with dot.) take 
 
 hold of, seize ; lay hold, fall to. 
 ^Ufunft, /. time to come, future. 
 juma^cn, tr. make to, shut, 
 
 fasten. 
 gunge, /. -gen. tongue; language, 
 
 speech. 
 JUtetien, intr. {with dat.) address; 
 
 exhort, urge ; try to console or 
 
 pacify. 
 3tttU(f , adv. and sep'le prefix, back- 
 ward, back ; behindhand, in the 
 
 rear. 
 JuriilfblciBcn, 0. intr. f. remain 
 
 behind. 
 jururfgetdittttcn, 0. tr. win back 
 
 again. 
 JUritdfe^rCtt, intr. f. turn back, 
 
 return. 
 glttitrffommcn, 0. irdr. \. come 
 
 back, return. 
 JUriirff^irfcn, tr. send back. 
 JUritrffein, 0. intr. \. be behind 
 
 hand or back. 
 §ttrttrfllCrtttngett, tr. demand back. 
 
 juriirftocifcn, 0. tr. send back, re- 
 ject. 
 
 JUriirfjic^en, 0. tr. draw back, 
 withdraw, reflex, move back, 
 retreat, withdraw. 
 
 JUfammen, adv. and sep'le prefix. 
 together, in company, jointly. 
 
 jufammenf^mcljcn, 0. intr. f. 
 melt together, run together, 
 dwindle away. 
 
 jttfammcnjiurjcit, intr. f. tumble 
 together, collapse, fall in. 
 
 JUtrauen, tr. {with dat.) entrust to, 
 confide in. as noun, trust, con- 
 fidence. 
 
 jUDOr, adv. before, formerly. 
 
 JUtQCKeit, adv. at times, occasion- 
 ally. 
 
 gtUttng, m. -geS, -dnge. compul- 
 sion, coercion, force. 
 
 Jttlttnjig, num. twenty. 
 
 Jtuat, adv. or conj. to be sure, in- 
 deed. 
 
 gtoerf, m. -cfe§, -(fe. aim, end, 
 design, purpose. 
 
 jhiei, num. two. smaU, twice. 
 
 }ttietfetto0, adj. {or adv.) doubt- 
 less. 
 
 JtOCifcIn, intr. doubt. 
 
 gtUCig, rn. -ge«, -ge. twig, branch 
 
 Jtllingen, 0. tr. force, compel 
 
 3tt)0(f, num. twelve. 
 
n. ENGLISH-GERMAN YOCABULART. 
 
 a, an, indef. art. ein, einc. 
 
 able, adj. fal)ig. 
 
 able ! to be — , !onueu (irreg.): see 
 
 254. 
 about, prep, urn (accus.), iilicr (ac- 
 
 cus. or dat). adv. ^erum, uinl^er; 
 
 ungefal)v. round aboat, urn .... 
 
 l)erum. 
 above, adv. obcn. prep. lUcr. 
 abstain, Mr. fid) cutI)aUcu 0. 
 
 (from, (?af.). 
 accept, <r. ainic^nteii 0. tr. 
 accompany, tr. licfllciteu. 
 accordingly, adv. nlfo. 
 account: on — of, prep. tDcgcn 
 
 (gen.), \)0V. 
 accuse-, tr. auftngcn (of, gen.). 
 accustom, tr. gcuio()ncn (to, an). 
 accustomed, adj. getuoljiit {govern- 
 
 imj accufi. with fciii). 
 acquainted: be — with, fcuucu 
 
 (irreg.) tr. become — with, ten- 
 
 ncn tcrncn. 
 acre, 9l(!er, m. -v^, 9tccfcr. 
 act : — as if, t^nn nt« 0. 
 activity, 3:i)Qtigfcit, /. 
 admire, tr. bcnjnnbcvn, 
 advantage, ^^ovtl)eiI 
 
 -% -Ic. 
 advice, Stot^ [^at], 
 
 -atl)e. 
 advise, tr. ratten [rotcn] 0. Mr. 
 
 (dat.). 
 aflkir, <Ba^e, f. -d)tn ; @e|d^aft, n. 
 
 -t«, -tc. 
 
 
 m. 
 
 afraid : be — , fid) filrd^ten (of, 
 
 nor). 
 after, prep, nad} (dat). one .... 
 
 another, nad)cinanbci:. adv. and 
 
 conj. nad)bem. 
 afternoon, 9?ad)nnttag, m. -gs, 
 
 -ge. 
 
 afterwards, adv. no(^^er, baronf, 
 
 barnad). 
 again, adv. tuieber, nod^ einniat. 
 
 come — , mieberfommen 0. 
 
 Mr. \. 
 age, ?ntcr, n. -r8, -r. 
 alas, m<er;. iuel)! 0.6) \ 
 alive, ad>. Icbcnbig. 
 all, adj. all (see 193), gan;;. 
 allow, tr. erlanben. Mr. (daf.)taffcn 
 
 0. be — ed, biirfcn : see 253. 
 alone, adj. or adv. allein. all — , 
 
 gan,^ allein. 
 along, prep, enttang (grew.). 
 already, adr. jd)on, bereit«. 
 also, adv. and), nod). 
 altliough, conj. obglcic^, obfc^on. 
 always, adv. innner, ftet^. 
 America, 'iltnicvifa, n. -a«. 
 American, "Jlincvitaner, m. -v«,-v ; 
 
 5lmerifanerin, /. -innen. 
 American, adj. anieritanifd). 
 among, prep, nnter {dat. or accus.). 
 amuse, tr. aniiifiven. be - d, fid) 
 
 amiifircn. 
 amusement, 3Seignugen,n. -n«,-n, 
 amusing, adj. aniiifant. 
 an, see su 
 
446 
 
 ENGLiSH-GimMAN 
 
 and, conj. unb. 
 
 angry, adj. gornig, 
 
 animal, 3:1) ier [Xkx], n. -re«, 
 
 -re. 
 another, adj. ein anber, nod^ ein : 
 
 see 198.30. 
 answer, tr. and intr. ontworten 
 
 (dat). 
 answer, 5tnttt)ort, /. -ten. 
 antechamber, 3Sorgemac^, n. -d^e«, 
 
 -dc^er. 
 any, ady. irgenb ein. not—, !ein: 
 
 see 195.2. — one, 3ebei% 3eber- 
 
 mann. — thing, dtwa^, ma^, 
 
 oUeg. not — thing, 9^i(f)tg. 
 appear, intr. erfc^einen 0., Qug= 
 
 jel)en 0., fcl)einen 0. 
 apearance, 5tnfel^en, n. -n§, -n. 
 apple, 5lpfet, m. -Is, ^lepfel. 
 April, ?rpril, m. -I8. 
 arm, 3(rm, m. -meg, -nte. -chair, 
 
 ?e^nftu^I, m. 
 army, §eer, n. -reg, -re. 
 aroond, prep, um (accws.), um . . . 
 
 ^eriint. 
 arrive, intr. anfommen 0. f. 
 art, ,(?un[t, /. -iinfte. -school, 
 
 ^unftfd^ule,/. 
 artist, ^iinftler, m. -rg, -r. 
 as, ad \ ot^, tt)ie ; fo. as if, atg ob. 
 
 as soon as, fobatb. 
 ashamed : be — , ftd) fd)Qmen. 
 ask, fr. frag en. — after, fid) er= 
 
 funbigen na6). 
 asleep, adv. im ©c^fafe. be — , 
 
 |ci)(afen. 
 assemble, tr. tierfammefn, jam= 
 
 ntetn. intr. ftd) tterfammetn. 
 at, prep, an, ^u, bei, um. — home, 
 
 in §aufe. — twelve o'clock, nm 
 
 gttjolf Uf)r. — an end, ^,u Gnbe. 
 
 — all, ganj unb gar. not — all, 
 
 gar nid)t. — least, menigfteng. 
 Angnst, Stnguft, m. -tS. 
 aunt, 2:antc, /. -ten. 
 
 anthor, 5>crfaffer, m. -r«, -t* 
 antnnin, iperbft, m. -teS, -tc. 
 avenge, tr. rcic^en. 
 await, tr. ermarten, marten auf. 
 awake, tr. mecfen. intr. trwadjcn, 
 
 aufmaci^en. 
 away, adj. meg, fort, be — , fort 
 
 fein. 
 
 back, adj. l^inter. adv. gururf; 
 
 riicfmarts. 
 bad, adj. {adv. -ly) fd^Ied^t, boje. 
 
 — fortune, Ungliicf, n. 
 bag, ^^eutel, n. -l^, -I 
 bake, tr. bacfen 0., bratenO. 
 baptize, tr. taufen. 
 bar-room, ©c^enfftube, /. -ben. 
 be, intr. fein 0. \., merbcn 0. \., 
 
 bleiben, 0. f. be (as to health), 
 
 fid} befinben 0. there are, etc. 
 
 eg gib t, etc. 
 bear, tr. iragen 0., ertragen 0. 
 beautiful, adj. {adv. -ly) fc^on. 
 beauty, ®i1)bn^eit,/. -ten. 
 because, conj. meit. 
 become, intr. merben 0. f. 
 bed, ^ett, n. -tteg, -tte or -tten. 
 
 to -, ^u «ette, ing S3ett. 
 beer, ^ier, n. -reg, -re. 
 before, prep, ijor {accus.or dat.). 
 
 conj. beoor, e^e. adv. t>orber. 
 beg, tr. bitten 0., betteln. go beg- 
 ging, bettetn ge'^en. 
 begin, intr. anfangen 0. 
 t^eginning, 5lnfang, m. -gg, -ange. 
 behind, prep. Winter {accus. or 
 
 dat.). 
 behold, tr. erbticfen. 
 belief, ©laube, m. -eng, -en. 
 believe, tr. gtanben. 
 belong, intr. ge^oren, ange^orcn 
 
 (to, dat.). 
 bench, 33an!, /. -an!e. 
 beseem, impers. jiemen {dat), fid) 
 
 giemen. 
 
VOCABULAKY. 
 
 U7 
 
 beside, prq). ncoen (accus. or dat). 
 
 adv. and}. 
 best, adj. (or adv.) be ft 
 betake one's self, ftd^ begeben 0. 
 betrayer, ^erriitljer [4er], m. -rg, 
 
 -r. 
 better, adj. (or adv.) beffer, 
 better, tr. Derbcffern. 
 bid, tr. I)eit3eu 0., befet)ten 0. (dat). 
 bi?, o,dj. grof3, birf, t)od^. 
 bind, tr. binben 0. 
 bird, 5>oge(, m. -tg, -oget. little — , 
 
 5>ogIeiu, n. -tt§, -n. 
 birthday, ©eburt^tag, m. 
 bit, ©tiicf, n, -(fg, -cfe ; 33igc^cn, n. 
 
 -xi9, -n. 
 bite, <r. bei^en 0. 
 bitter, ad/, (odu. -ly) bitter, grim= 
 
 mig. 
 blaek, adj, fc^iuarg, 
 blame, tr. tabetn» 
 bless, tr. fegnen. 
 blood, ^lut, n. -teS. 
 blossom, 53(utt)e [i8(ute], /. -tfjen. 
 blue, adj. hlau. 
 book, ^nd),n. -d)e8, -iid^er. 
 bom, geboren. 
 both, adj. beibe, atle beibe. 
 bottle, §Iafcf)e, /. -fdjen. 
 boy, ^uabe, m. -en, -en. 
 braye, adj. (adv. -ly) tapfer. 
 bread, 33vob, w. -beg. 
 break, tr. bred) en 0. intr. t)tV' 
 
 bred)en, 3erbred)en 0. — open, 
 
 erbrec^en 0. 
 breakfast, griif)ftu(f, n. -dg, -de. 
 breakfast, intr. frut)ftuden. 
 bribe, tr. beftec^en 0. 
 bridge, 53rude, /. -den. 
 bright, adj. l)eU. 
 bring, tr. bringen (irreg.). — back, 
 
 tDicberbringen 0., njieber^olen. 
 broad, adj. breit. 
 brook, 53ad), m. -d^eg, -M)e; 
 
 ©riinntein, n. -n8, -n. 
 
 brother, 35rnber, m. -r«, -ilber. 
 building, ©ebdube, n. -beg, -be. 
 bnm, /r. brennen (irreg.). Mr. Der* 
 
 brennen (irreg.). 
 business, @cfd)dft, n. -t§, -te, 
 busy, adj. bcfc^aftigt. be — or 
 
 busied, fid) bejdiaftigen. 
 but, conj. ober, fonbern, atlein, boc^. 
 
 nothing — , nid)tg atg. 
 buy, tr. fanfen. 
 by, prep, bei, neben. a/^er passive, 
 
 bnrc^, tjor. longer — three feet, 
 
 nm brei gu^ Idnger, etc. 
 
 call, <r. rnfcn 0., nennen (irreg.), 
 
 tiei^en 0. — away, abrufen. be 
 
 called, l)ei§cn. 
 camp, Imager, n. -rg, -r. 
 can, (irreg.) fijnnen : see 254. 
 carpet, Sapete, /. -ten. 
 carriage, Sag en, m. -ng, -agcn or 
 
 -n. 
 carry, tr. tragen 0. 
 cast down, <r. ftiirjen. 
 castle, Bd)io^, n. -ffeg, -offer. 
 cathedral, S)om, m. -meg, -me. 
 catch, tr. fan gen 0. — cold, \\6) 
 
 erfditen. 
 cause, mir*. laffen : see 343.1. 56, d. 
 cease, intr. anfpren. 
 certainly, ad>\ getui^. 
 change, tr. dnbern, tierdnbern. intr. 
 
 fid) uerdnbern. 
 charitable, adj. borm^er^^ig. 
 charity, 53armt)er5igfeit,/. / Sobl^ 
 
 tt)dtigfeit, /. 
 Charles, ^arl, m. -Ig. 
 charming, a^j. (adv. -ly) rcigcnb, 
 
 ollerliebft. 
 chat, intr. ^tonbern. 
 cheap, adj. bitlig. 
 cherish, tr. fc^dljen. 
 child, ^inb, n. -beg, ~ber. 
 chilly : be — , froftein, impers. vMh 
 
448 
 
 ENGLISH-aERMAN 
 
 choose, tr. voa\)len. 
 
 Christian, Sfirift, m. -ten, -ten; 
 
 (5l)ri[tin, /. -innen. 
 church, ^ird)c, /. -cf)eiu 
 city, @tabt, /. -abte. 
 claim, make — to, ttjotten: see 
 
 258. 
 clever, adj. flug. 
 climb, tr. fteigen 0., ^inauf* 
 
 fteigen. 
 cloister, ttofter, n. -r8, -oflcr. 
 clothes, clothing, tieibcr, pL 
 cloud, 2Bo(fe,/. -fen, 
 coachman, tntjc^er, m. -r8, -r. 
 coat, 9Jo(f, m. -deg, -ocfe. 
 coffee, taffee, m. -eeg. 
 cold, acZ/. {adv. -\j) iaU. catch — , 
 
 fic^ erfdlten. 
 Cologne (the city), ^otn, n. -n8. 
 colored, adj. bunt. 
 come, intr. fommen 0. j. — back, 
 
 juriidfommen, guriicffeliren. — 
 
 forth, ^ert>or!ommen. —to one's 
 
 help, einem ju C^utfe fommen. 
 
 — out, l)inau§fommen. 
 comfort, tr. troften. 
 command, tr. ^eigen, befeljien {dat.) 
 
 0., gebieten {dat.) 0. 
 command, S3efe^(, m. -U, -le. 
 commit, tr. bege^cn 0. 
 communicate, tr. mitt^eiten [4ei* 
 
 ten] (to, daf.). 
 companion, ©efa^rte, m. -en. 
 company, ©efeUfd^aft, /. -ten. 
 complain, intr. flag en. 
 complete, tr. tJoUenben. 
 complete, adj. {adv. -ly) tooEig, 
 
 tiollenbet. 
 comrade, tomerab, m. -ben, -ben ; 
 
 ©efett, m. -en, -en. 
 concern one's self, ft(^ befiimmern. 
 concerning, prep, ntegen {gen.). 
 condemn, tr. Derbammen. 
 confidence, SSertrouen, n. -n§. 
 conquer, tr. erobcrn. 
 
 consider, tr. betraci^ten. — as, IjaU 
 
 ten fiir 0. 
 console, tr. troften. 
 contain, tr. ent{)atten 0. 
 contemplate, tr. betrac^ten. 
 content, adj. gufrieben. 
 content one's self, fid^ begnitgen. 
 cook, tr. tod) en. 
 cool, adj. {adv. -ly) fii^I. 
 copy, tr. abfci^reiben 0. 
 corner, @de, /. -den. 
 cost, tr. foften. 
 costly, adj. foftUc^, foftbar. 
 count (earl), @raf, m. -fen, -fen. 
 countess, ©rafin, /. -innen. 
 country, ?anb, n. -be§, -cinber. 
 
 natiye — , 25aterlanb, n. 
 couple, ^aar, n. -reg, -re. 
 courage, 9JJutt) [3}?nt], m. -t^e§; 
 
 Xa^ferfeit, /. 
 cousin, 35etter, m. -r§, -rn ; ^ou-- 
 
 fine,/, -nen. 
 coward, geigting, m. -g§, -ge. 
 create, fc^offen 0. 
 crime, SSerbrec^en, n. -ng, -n. 
 criminal, SSerbrec^er, m. -r^, -r. 
 crowd, ©ebrange, n. -eg, -e; 
 
 3}?enge, /. -gen; ©d^aar, /. 
 
 -ren. 
 crown, ^rone, /. -nen. 
 cup, Xaffe, /. -ffen ; ^ed^er, m. 
 
 -rg, -r. 
 curse, tr. flrn^en intr. {with dat. m- 
 
 auf). 
 cut, tr. fc^neiben 0. — off, ah' 
 
 j(|lagen 0., abfc^neiben 0. 
 
 dance, intr. tonjen. 
 danger, @efat)r, /. -ren. 
 dangerous, adj. gefci^rlid^. 
 dare, intr. \x6) ttjagen ; biirfen : see 
 
 253. 
 dark, adj. bnnfel. 
 daughter, 2;od^ter, /. -od)ter. 
 day, 2;ag, m. -geg, -ge. 
 
VOCABULAEY. 
 
 449 
 
 dead, adj. tobt [tot]. 
 
 dear, adj, \\t^, wert^ [n)ert], t^euer 
 
 [teuer]. 
 death, iob, m. -beg, -be. 
 debate, infr. bebattieren, ^x6) \ixtU 
 
 ten 0. 
 deceiye, tr. betriigen 0. 
 December, S)eceTnber, m. -r8. 
 declare, <r. erfldren. 
 deed, %\)ai, f. -ten. 
 delight : it delights me, e8 freut 
 
 deep, ac?;. tief. 
 
 deliyer, tr. abUefern. 
 
 demand, tr. tierlangen. 
 
 deny, tr. tjerfagen. 
 
 descend, tr. {or intr.) !^erab= or ]^in= 
 
 unter^fteigen 0. 
 describe, tr. befc^reiben 0. 
 description, 33e|c^reibung, /. 
 
 -gen. 
 desert, tr. oerloffen 0. 
 deserre, tr. tjerbienen. -ing, ber^ 
 
 bient. 
 devote one's self, ftd) tDibmen. 
 die, intr. fterben 0. |. 
 difficult, adj. f(f)tt)er. 
 diligent, adj. (adv. -ly) ftei^ig. 
 dinner, 3}fittagge[fen, n. -n^, -n. 
 direct, adj. (adv. ,-ly) birect, 
 
 geraben 3Beg§. 
 disappear, intr. »erfc!^tt)inben 0. 
 discovery, (Srfinbnng, /. -gen; 
 
 (Sntbecfung, /. -gen. 
 distant, adj. entfernt, fern, lueit. 
 divine, adj. gottlic^. 
 do, tr. (or intr.) t{)nn 0., ma6)cn. 
 
 — without, entbe^ven. how — 
 
 you —1 njie gef)t c% 3l)nen? 
 doctor, %vit, m. -te«, Heqte; 
 
 2)octor, m. -r§, -ren. 
 dog, ^nnb, m. -beS, -be. 
 door, X()ur,/. -ren. 
 down, adv. ^ernnter, ^inunter, 
 
 ^erab, ^inab : see 362.3, 379.1. 
 
 draw near, intr. fi6) ndljtvn (to, 
 
 dat.). 
 dream, Xxanm, m. -meg, -dnme, 
 dream, intr. {or tr.) trannten. 
 dress, ^leib, n. -beg, -ber. 
 dress, tr. !(eiben. intr. fid) an^ 
 
 jjie^en 0. 
 drink, tr. trinfen 0. 
 drive, tr. {or mir.) fal)ren 0., fii'^^ 
 
 ren. — (for pleasure), fpa^ieren 
 
 fa^ren. — by or past, Dorbet 
 
 fa^ren (an). — out, tr. tierjagen. 
 
 — up, t)orfal)ren. 
 duke, ^er^og, m. -geg, -ge or 
 
 -oge. 
 during, prep, tcd^renb {gen,), 
 duty, ''WW, /. -ten. 
 dwell, intr. n)o()nen. 
 dwelling, 2So()nnng, /. -geiu 
 
 each, pron. adj. jeber, ein ieber. — 
 
 one, jeber : see 190. — other, 
 
 einanber ; fid), nng, etc. : see 
 
 155.4. 
 eager, adj. {adv. -ly) eifrig. 
 ear, O^x, n. -reg, -ren. -ring, 
 
 Ol^rring, m. 
 early, adj. frii^. 
 earn, tr. geratnnen 0. 
 earnestness, (Srnft, m. -fteg. 
 earth, ©rbe, /. -ben. 
 easy, adj. {adv. -ly) Ieic!^t. 
 eat, tr. e[fen 0., fpeifen irdr. 
 education, (Srjiet^ung, /. 
 either, conj. meber, enttt)eber. 
 
 either . . . . or . . ., entmeber . . . 
 
 ober . . . 
 emperor, ^aifer, m. -rg, -r. 
 employment, 53ef(^dftignng, /. 
 
 -gen. 
 empty, adj. h\it, (eer. 
 end, (Snbe, n. -eg, -n. at an — , ^n 
 
 (Snbe. 
 endeavor, intr. f\6) beftreben, t3er= 
 
 [idjen. 
 
450 
 
 ENGLISH-GERMAN 
 
 endeavor, 53eftreben, n. -nS. 
 enemy, geinb, m. -be«, -be* 
 England, ©ngtanb, n. -b8. 
 EngUsh, adj. englifd^. 
 Englishman, (Suglcinber, m. -r8, 
 
 -r. 
 enjoy, <r. \\6) freuen (gen.), ge* 
 
 itie^en 0. (gen.), fro^ werben 
 
 (gen.). 
 enough, adv. germg. 
 entice, in loden, antocfen. 
 entire, adj. gan^. {adv. -ly) ganj 
 
 unb gar, uoUig. 
 especially, adv. befonberS. 
 estate, @ut, n. -teg, -iiter; :2anb= 
 
 gut, n. 
 eternal, ad/, (adu. -ly) ett)ig. 
 eyen, adu. felbft, aucf). — if, felbft 
 
 njenn, ouc^ iDenn, obg(eid). 
 evening, 2tbenb, m. -b§, -be. 
 every, jebeu (190). every one, eiu 
 
 jeber, alle, aU^^ (193.3), 3eber» 
 
 mann (187). everything, olles 
 
 (193). everywhere, adv. 
 
 liberalt. 
 evil, a^i. bo8. 
 evil, bag 53bfe, 33o8l)eit, /. 
 
 -ten. 
 example, 53eif^iet, n. -Ig, -le. for 
 
 — , sum ^eifpiel. 
 exchange, tr. uertaufc^en. 
 excuse, tr. entfci^ulbigeu. 
 expect, tr. ertuarten. 
 expedition, ^uq, m. -geS, -iige. 
 experience, t. eriebeu. 
 explain, tr. erffaren. - one's self 
 
 to anyone, einem dlttt fte^eu 
 
 0. 
 eye, 5luge, n. -g, -u. 
 
 lace, (5)efTrf)t, n. -tg, -ter. 
 
 IkU, intr. fallen 0. — together, 
 
 aufontmenftiirgen. 
 family, ^amilie, /. -ien. 
 famous., adi. berii^iUu 
 
 far, ac?j. (or adv.) n)eit. not — , 
 
 unmeit. not — from, prep, un* 
 
 tt)eit (gren.). 
 fate, @d^icffa(, n. -Ig, -le. 
 father, 5Sater, m. -rg, -ater. 
 
 — land, 35aterlanb, n. 
 fault, ^el)ler, m. -rg, -r. 
 fear, ^urc^t, /. 
 fear, tr. fiirc^ten, fid^ fiird^ten 
 
 (t)or). 
 fearful, ad;, furd^tbar. 
 February, gebruar, m. -rg. 
 feel, intr. fid) fii'^Ien, fi(^ beftnben 
 
 0., fein (w)i</i c?af.) ; see 292.4. 
 feeling, ©efiibt, w. -leg, -le. 
 fellow-citizen, 9)iitburger, m. -rg, 
 
 -r. 
 fetch, tr. l^oten. 
 few, adj. wenig, menige. a — , 
 
 einige (pi), nid)t tjiele. 
 field, ^etb, n. -beg, -ber. 
 fight, intr. fampfen. 
 find, tr. finben 0. 
 fine, acZ/. fein ; fd)bn. 
 finger, finger, m. -rg, -r. 
 finish, tr. toottenben. 
 finished, adj. fertig, tjoltenbet. 
 fire, ^euer, n. -rg, -r. 
 first, adj. erft. adv. erft, suerjlt, 
 flame, glamme, /. -men. 
 Florence, ^^lorenj, n. 
 flower, 33Iume, /. -men. 
 follow, tr. folgen (dat). 
 foUowing, adj. folgenb. 
 fool, %\)ov, m. -reg, -ren. 
 foolish, adj. bumm. 
 foot, gu§, m. -ffeg, -iiffe. 
 for, conj. benn. prep, fiir {accus.\ 
 
 IM (dat.), feit (dat.), uor (da/. c«r- 
 accws.). 
 forbid, tr. Derbieten 0. 
 force, tr. jttjingen «^. 
 foreign, adj. fremb. — land, Ut 
 
 ^rembe. 
 forest, 2BaIb, m. -beg, -iitbcr. 
 
TOCABULARY. 
 
 451 
 
 foreyer, adv. auf ctuig. 
 
 forget, tr. tiergeffen 0. 
 
 forgive, tr. dergeben 0. 
 
 former, adj. {adv. -ly) frut)er. 
 
 fortune, ©lucf, n. -cfe«, -cfe. 
 
 forward, adv. oortucirts. 
 
 four, num. t)ier. 
 
 France, gvanfreic^, n. -d^g. 
 
 Frederick, gviebrid^, m. -d)^, 
 
 free, <r. befreien. 
 
 free, adj. {adv. -ly) frei. 
 
 — thought, ®eban!enfrei^eit, /. 
 freedom, ^rei^eit, /. 
 
 French, adj. franjbfifd^. — man, 
 granpfe, m. -fen, -fen. 
 
 — woman, ^rangbfin, /. -innen. 
 fresh, adj. frifd^. 
 
 friend, grennb, m. -beg, -be. 
 friendly, adj. {or adv.) freunbli^. 
 friendship, greunbf(i)aft, /. -ten. 
 fright, @c^re(f, m. -de8, -de. 
 fHghtened : be — , erfc!^re(f en, fic^ 
 
 erfc^recfen (iiber). 
 from, prep, tjon, au^ {dat); dnt. 
 
 case: see 222.1,3. 
 fruit, f^rnc^t, /. -ucf)te. 
 frustrate, tr. tjereitetn. 
 full, adj. X)oU (of, gen.). 
 furnish, tr. nteublieren. 
 further, adj. {or adv.) n)elter. 
 
 game, @piet, n. -teg, -Ic. 
 garden, ©orten, m. -n6, -cirten. 
 gardener, ©artner, m. -rg, -r. 
 gay, adj. fro^r (i^ coZor) bunt. 
 general, @cnera(, m. -I§, -ale. 
 genius, ®enie, n. -leg, -leg. 
 gentleman, §err, m. -rrn, -rren. 
 German, adj. beutfd^. noun, ber 
 
 2)eutfd)e, e<c. 
 Germany, 5)pntfrf)(anb, n. -b8. 
 get, #r. ^oten, »erf(i)Qffen. away, 
 
 fid^ (oSmac^en (oon). — up, auf* 
 
 ftet)en 0. 
 gift, ®aht, /. -beiu 
 
 girl, aJJabd^en, n, -n§, -n. 
 
 give, tr. fc^enfen, geben 0. —one's 
 
 hand, bie ^anb reic^en. — up, 
 
 tr. entfagen 0. {dat.), auf geben 0. 
 glad, adj. gliicflic^. be — , fic^ 
 
 fveuen. 
 glance, intr. blicfen. 
 glass, ©lag, n. -feg, -ofer. 
 go, intr. get) en 0. — along or 
 
 too, mitgel^en. — away, fort:= 
 
 ge^en, abreifen. — out^ aug= 
 
 ge^en, ^inaugge^en. 
 God, @ott, m. -tteg, -otter. 
 godlike, adj. gotttid^. 
 gold, @otb, n. -beg. — piece, 
 
 ©otbftM, n. 
 golden, adj. gotben. 
 good, adj. gut. a — deal, t)iet. 
 
 — fortune, ©liid, n. -cfeg. 
 government, ^iegierung, /. -gen. 
 gracious, adj. gudbig. 
 great, adj. gro^, t)oc^. 
 green, adj. griin. 
 grim, adj. {adv. -ly) grimmig. 
 grow, intr. njad)fen 0. ; tuerben 0. 
 guardian, ^ormunb, m. -beg, -be. 
 guest, @aft, m. -teg, -afte. 
 guilty, adj. frfjulbig. 
 
 hair, §aar, n. -reg, -re. 
 
 half, adj. {or adv ) t)atb. — an 
 
 hour, eine ^atbe @tunbe. 
 hall, @aat, m. -teg, -dte. 
 hand, §anb, /. -dnbe. on the 
 
 other—, adv. bag eg en. 
 handsome, adj. fc^on. 
 hang, tr. or intr. ^dngen. 
 happiness, ©tiicf, n. -deg. 
 happy, adj. gtiidtic^. 
 hard, adj. ^art, fd)tt)er. 
 hardly, ado. fanm. 
 hasty, adj. {adv. -ly) ^aftig, eitig. 
 hat, |)ut, m. -teg, -iitc. 
 hate, tr. t)offen. 
 hateful, adj. {or adv.) ge^dffig. 
 
452 
 
 ENGLISfl-GEEMAN 
 
 hatred, ^a% m. -ffeg» 
 
 hare, tr. ^aben (irreg.). haye to, 
 
 miiffen : see 256. hare (a thing 
 
 done), laffen: see 343.1,56,d. 
 helpers, pron. er ; berjenige, ber. 
 
 — who, 113 er. 
 head, Mopl m. -feg, -o^Jfe; 
 
 @pi^e, /. -^en. 
 health, @ejunbt)eit, /. 
 healthy, adj. gefunb. 
 hear, tr. l^oren. 
 heed, tr. aditen (j/en.). take—, fic^ 
 
 l^iiten. 
 heir, (Srbe, m. -ben, -ben. 
 help, tr. ^etfen 0. (dat), gu ^iilfe 
 
 fommen (c^ai.)- 
 help, C^iitfe, /• 
 helpfal, ac?/. t)ulfreic^. 
 Henry, ^einric^, m. -c^g. 
 her, pers. pron. [te. poss. pro/i. 
 
 \\)x, ber i^rige. 
 hero, §elb, m. -ben, -ben. 
 heroine, ^elbin, /. -innen. 
 hide, tr. tjerbergen 0. 
 hi^h, adj. l}od) (t)o^er etc.). 
 him, it)n. — self, felbft. 
 hinder, tr. ^inbern. 
 hii-e, tr. ntiet^en [mieten]. 
 his, poss. pron. fein, ber feinige. 
 history, ©efc^id^te, /. -ten. 
 hold, tr. fatten 0. 
 home, ^eimat [=mat], /. -en. at 
 
 — , lu §aufe. 
 honor, (S^re, /. -ren. 
 honor, tr. e^ren. 
 honorable, adj. e^rtid^, el^ren- 
 
 ^aft. 
 hope, intr. ^ off en. 
 hope, ^offnung, /. -gen. 
 horrorstrnck : be — , grauen (im- 
 
 pers. with dot.). 
 horse, ^ferb, n. -be8, -be. 
 hot, adj. t)ei^. 
 hour, @tunbe, /. -ben. 
 house, ^au«, w. -jeg, -aufer. 
 
 how, adv. itiie. — erer, adv. n)le 
 
 and) ; bod). 
 humanity, 3)lenf(^t)eit, /. 
 hundred, num. t)unbert. 
 hunger, hunger, m. -rg. 
 hun^y : be - , '^nngern {impers. 
 
 with accus.). 
 hunt, tr. jag en. 
 hunt, 3agb, /. -ben. 
 hunter, Sciger, m. -r«, -r. 
 hurry, intr. eilen. 
 hurry, (Sile, /. 
 husband, Wann, m. -nc8, -dnner; 
 
 @atte, m. -en, -en. 
 hut, §utte, /. -ten. 
 
 I, pers. pron. ici). 
 
 idea, 33egriff, m. -p, -ffe. 
 
 idle, adj. trcige, faul. 
 
 if, conj. tt)cnn. as — , a(8 ob. 
 
 ill, ac?/. franf. 
 
 illness, ^ronffieit, /. -ten. 
 
 imitate, tr. nad)a^nten (dat.). 
 
 important, adj. widjtiQ. 
 
 impossible, adj. unnioglid). 
 
 imprisoned, adj. gefangen. 
 
 improve, tr. oerbeffern, beffern. 
 
 in, prep, in {dat. or accus.): see 
 
 376. 
 inclined, adj. geneigt. 
 incredible, adj. unglaubUci^. 
 indifference, @Ieid)gu(tig!eit, /. 
 indifferent, adj. g(eid)gu(tig, einer^ 
 
 lei {indeclinable). 
 indispensable, adj. nnentbe^rtit^. 
 industrious, adj. flei^ig. 
 industry, S^citigfeit, /. 
 inexperience, Unevfa^reul)eit, /. 
 inherit, tr. erben. 
 injure, tr. fd^abcn (dat), uerle^en. 
 instead of, prep, ouftatt, ftatt 
 
 (gen. or injin. with jn). 
 intend, intr. t)orboben; fld^ (dat.) 
 
 t)ornef)men, beabfidjtigen. 
 interesting", adj. intereffant. 
 
VOCABULAEY. 
 
 4:53 
 
 into, prep, in (accus.): see 376. 
 invitation, ©intabung, /. -gen. 
 invite, tr. eintobeu 0. 
 it, pers. pron. e§ ; 'ba^, baSjenige. 
 Itoly, Stalien, n. -lens. 
 
 January, 3attuar, m. -rg. 
 jew, 3ube, m. -ben, -ben. 
 journey, W\\t, / -fen. 
 journey, inir. reifen. — away, 
 
 abreifen. 
 joy, i^renbe, /. -ben. 
 judge, 9Jid)tei% m. -r^, -r. 
 judgment-seat, 9?id)terftu^l, m. 
 July, 3uU, m. -Us. 
 June, 3nni, m. -nig» 
 just, oc?;. biEig. 
 
 keep, tr. be^alten 0., er^atten 0. 
 
 — from, \\^ ent^alten. 
 keeper, ^iiter, m. -rg, -r. 
 kill, tr. tobten [toten]. 
 kind, adj. freunblirf). 
 kind, %xi, f. -ten. what — of, 
 
 tt)ag fiir : see 175. 
 kindness, 2Bot)Ut)at, /. -ten. 
 king, ^onig, m. -gg, -ge. 
 knee, ,^nie, n. -eg, -e. 
 kneel, Mr. fnieen. 
 knife, SO^effer, n. -rg, -r. 
 knock, i^j^r. ffopfen, ipoc^en. 
 know, tr. It) iff en (irreg.), fennen 
 
 (irreg.), evfennen. 
 known, adj. befannt. 
 
 lack: there is a —of, eg fe^U 
 
 (il)m) an. 
 lady, !5)ame, /. -men. 
 lament, tr, bemeinen. 
 lamp, ?ampe, /. -pen. 
 land, ?anb, n. -beg, -anber. 
 landlord, mxt^ [SEStrt], m. -tfjeg, 
 
 -tf)e. 
 large, cw?/. gro§. 
 last, cwi/. le^t. 
 
 last, intr. bauern. 
 
 late, adj. or adv. fpdt. 
 
 laugh, intr. Iarf)en. 
 
 laughable, adv. Icici^ertid^. 
 
 law, @efe^, n. -^eg, -^e. 
 
 lay, tr. leg en. 
 
 lazy, adj. fant, trdge. 
 
 lead, tr. fiiljren. — back, juriidE^ 
 
 gie{)en 0. — out, l^inaug= 
 
 fii^ren. 
 learn, tr. (ernen. 
 learned, adj. gele'^rt. 
 least: at , cidu. njenigfteng, ant 
 
 tt)enigften. 
 leave, tr. tterlaffen ; laffen 0. 
 left, adj. Unf. 
 
 less, adj. or adv. minber, weniger. 
 letter, S3rief, m. -feg, -fe. 
 library, 8ibUott)e!, /. -!en. 
 lie, intr. Uegen 0. 
 life, ?eben, n. -ng, -n. 
 lift, tr. ^eben 0. — up, er« 
 
 l^eben 0. 
 light, 2id}t, n. -teg, -ter. 
 light, tr. an^iinben, anfteden. 
 like, adj. gleid^. 
 
 like : be like, gleici^en 0. (dat.), 
 like, tr. {or intr.) lieben, mogen 
 
 (irreg. : see 255), gern ^aben. I 
 
 — it, eg gefoUt mir. 
 
 listen, intr. ^ord)en, 3ut)bren, an= 
 
 t)oren. 
 little, adj. !tein, ircnig. 
 live, intr. Icben ; luo^nen. 
 lonely, adj. einfam. 
 long, adj. lang. adv. tange, tdngft. 
 
 — ago, Idngft. as — as, fo= 
 lange. 
 
 look, tr. (or intr.) fet)cn 0., btirfen, 
 onfefjen. — down, l^innntev 
 blicfen, ^innnterfet)en. 
 
 lose, tr. Derlieren 0. 
 
 love, /r. tieben. 
 
 love, IHcbe, /. 
 
 lowj adj. niebrig. 
 
454 
 
 ENGLISH-GERMAN 
 
 lyin^, pp'le of ticg en 0. 
 
 maid, SJJagb, /. -agbe» 
 
 make, tr. mad)en. 
 
 man, aJlenjc^, m. -\6)tn, -fd^en; 
 
 ajJann, m. -nne§, -tinner. 
 mansard, 9}?anfarbe, /. -ben. 
 many, adj. or noun, t)iet, tjiele. 
 
 — a, mand^. 
 March, Maxi, m. -^eS. 
 march, intr. marfd^ieren. 
 mark (a coin), Ttavt, f. -fen. 
 market: — place, 'Sflaxtt, m. 
 
 -fte§, -cirfte. 
 massiye, '^idj. maffidc*. 
 master, ilReifter, m. -r«, -r. 
 matter: it does not matter to 
 
 me, e« fommt mir nid^t barauf 
 
 on. 
 May, Wai, m. -aie8. 
 meantime, adv. and conj. inbcffen. 
 meat, ^leifc^, n. -fd^eS, -jd^e. 
 medsd, 9)^ebaitle, /. -en. 
 meet, tr. {or intr.) begegnen (dat), 
 
 treffen 0., fid) begegnen. 
 merchant, ^anfmann, m. -anneg, 
 
 -anner or (more generally) ^auf= 
 
 leute. 
 methinks, impers. mic^ bun!t, 
 
 from biinfen. 
 ndle, 9Reile, /. -ten. 
 milk, mild), /. 
 mine, poss. pron. mein, bcr niel= 
 
 nige. 
 minister, SQfinifter, m. -r8, -r. 
 minnte, 9JJinute, /. -ten. 
 misfortune, UngliicE, n. -de8. 
 mock, tr. {or intr.) fpotten {gen.). 
 modesty, ^efc^eiben^eit, /. 
 moment, 9Jlinnte, /. -ten ; 3(ugen^ 
 
 blidf, m. -dfeS, -de. 
 monastery, ^tofter, n. -rg, -ofter. 
 money, @etb, n. -be8, -ber. 
 month, ajJonat, m. -tg, -te. 
 moon, 3Jlonb, m. -beg, -be or -ben. 
 more^ adj. (or adv.) nte^r. 
 
 morning, aJJorgcn, m. -n8, -n. 
 most, adv. am meiften. 
 mother, aJJutter, /. -litter. 
 mountain,' 53 erg, m. -geg, -ge. 
 mourn, tr. (w intr. beweinen, 
 
 flagen. 
 move, intr. ^te^en 0. — in, ein= 
 
 jie^en. — out, angjie^en. 
 moTcment, 33en)egung, /. -gen. 
 Mr., §err, m. -rrn, -rren. 
 much, adj. {or adv.) oiel. 
 murder, 9JJorb, m. -beg, -be. 
 murder, tr. ermorben. 
 music, a^nfif, /. 
 my, poss. pron. mein, 
 
 name, tr. nennen {irreg.). 
 name, 9Zame, m. -ng, -n. 
 naughty, adj. unartig. 
 necessary, adj. not^ig [notig]. 
 neck, ^n(g, m. -feg, -alfe. 
 necklace, ^algbanb, n. -beg, 
 
 -cinber. 
 need, tr. bebiirfen, brand^en. 
 need, ajott) mot], f. -ot^e. there 
 
 is — of, eg braud^t. 
 neighbor, 9^ad)bar, m. -rg or -rn, 
 
 -rn. 
 neither, conj. tucbcr. — .... nor, 
 
 njeber .... nod^. pron. feiner, 
 
 etc. 
 nerve, 9?ert)e, /. -tien. 
 never, adv. nie, niemolg. 
 nevertheless, adv. bennot^, boc^. 
 new, adj. nen. 
 news, a?ad)rid^t, /. -ten. 
 newspaper, S^itnng, /. -gen. 
 next, adj. m6)\i {sup. of na^), 
 
 onber : see 203.1a. 
 night, aJad^t, /. -odfite. 
 no, adv. nein. adj. !ein. — one, 
 
 Reiner, a^iemonb. — longer, 
 
 nid^t me^r. 
 noble, adj. ebet. noun, ber @b!e, 
 
 5(beUge, 
 
VOCABULABY. 
 
 455 
 
 nobleman^ (Sbetmanu, m. 
 
 nod, intr. nicfen. 
 
 north, 9^orb or S'Jorbeu, m. -ng. 
 
 northern, adj. norblic^. 
 
 not, adv. nid)t. — one, !ein eiu= 
 
 ^iger, etc. 
 nothing, noun, ^id^t€, n. adv. 
 
 nic^tg. — hut, ni(^tg alg. 
 novel, 9Joman, m. -n^, -tie. 
 NoYemher, 9?otjember, m. -r8. 
 now, adv. je^t. 
 nomher, 5luso^(, /. 
 
 ohey, ir. ge^orc^en (dat), 
 obliged: be — to, ntuffen: see 
 
 256. 
 ocean, 2J?eer, n. -re8, -re. 
 o'clock, Ut)r, /.; see 211.3. 
 October, October, m. -rg. 
 of, prep. \}on{dat.). 
 offer, <r. anbieten 0., reic^en. 
 officer, Offijier, m. -r§, -re. 
 often, adv. oft. 
 old, adj. ait 
 
 on, prep, auf {dat. or accus.). 
 once, ac?u. einnmt^. at — , gleidf). 
 one, num. eiu. adj. ein, eine, ein, 
 
 etc. pron. einer, eine, eing, etc. 
 
 indef. pron. man: see 185. 
 
 not—, fein. 
 only, adj. einjig. adu. olleiu, nur. 
 
 not — . . . . but also, uicf)t nur 
 
 .... fonbern and). 
 open, tr. offnen, aufmac^eu. 
 opinion, 9iReinung, /. -gen. 
 opportunity, ©etegen^eit, /. -ten. 
 oppose, tr. fid^ njiberfetien. 
 opposite, prep, gegeniiber (dat.). 
 or, conj. ober. 
 order, tr. beflellen; befe^Ien 0. 
 
 (dat). 
 order: in — to or that, conj. ha% 
 
 bomit: see 332.56, urn: see 
 
 346.1. 
 orthodox^ adj. re^tgtaubin. 
 
 other, adj. aitber. 
 otherwise, adv. fouft. 
 ought, intr. joUeii : see 257. 
 our, poss. adj. uiifer, ber un[rigc. 
 out (of), prep, aug ((?ai.). 
 outbreak, 5lugbru(^, m. -d^g, 
 
 -iic^e. 
 outlet, 5Iuggaug, m. -g§, -angc. 
 outside, prep. au§er^atb (gen.). 
 over, prep, iiber {dat. or accus.), 
 
 adv. '^Iniiber. 
 own, adj. eigen. 
 owner, S3efi^er, m. -r8, -r. 
 
 pace, @d)ritt, m. -tteg, -tte. 
 
 pain, tr. fc^merseu {dat.). 
 
 pain, ^d)mer3, m. -3e3 or -;5ett6, 
 
 -sen. 
 paint, tr. or intr. maten. 
 painter, 9Jfa(er, m. -rg, -r. 
 painting, ©emcitbe, n. -beg, -be, 
 pair, ''^aax, n. -reg, -re, 
 pale, adj. bta§. 
 palace, ^^^ataft, m. -tg, -cifle. 
 parents, p^ (Sltern. 
 part, 2:^ei( [2^ei(], m. or n. -leg, 
 
 -le. take — , t^eilnet)men [teil=] 
 
 0. 
 part, tr. trennen. intr. fid^ tren^ 
 
 nen. 
 pass (time), tr. ^ubringen, tier* 
 
 bring en {irreg.). intr. Derftreid^en 
 
 0. 
 past, adv. tiorbei. 
 pastor, starrer, m. -rg, -r. 
 path, ^|?fab, m. -beg, -be. 
 pay, tr. begalilen. 
 peace, ^riebe or -ben, w. -eng, 
 
 -en. 
 peaceful, adj. friebtid^. 
 peasant, 33aner, m. -rg or -rn, -r 
 
 or -rn. 
 pen, ^cber, /. - rn. 
 people, pi. l^cntc ; SSotf, n. -fe« 
 
 -ol!er» 
 
456 
 
 ENGLTSH-GERMAN 
 
 penetrate, ir. burd^bringen 0. 
 
 (sep'le). 
 perhaps, adv. toieUeii^t ; tno'^L 
 philosopher, ^t)iIofopt), m. -p^tn, 
 
 pictnre, 53ilb, n. -be8, -ber. 
 piece, @tu(f, n. -cfeg, -cfe» 
 pilgrim, ^^Ulger, m. -rS, -r. 
 pity, iy. bebauern, be!(agen ; bau* 
 
 ern {impers.). take — on, fid^ er* 
 
 barmen (gen.). 
 place, ^(al^, m. -^e^, -ci^e. 
 plant, tr. ipftansen. 
 plant, ^ftanje, /. -^tn ; @enjac^§, 
 
 n. -fe8, -fe. 
 plate, XtUtx, m, -rs, -r. 
 play, mtr. fpielen. 
 play, @^iei, /i. -Ie8, -Ic. 
 players, pZ. @^ielleutc. 
 pleasant, adj. angene^nt. 
 please, ir. gef alien 0. {dnt). 
 pleasure, ^reube, /. -ben; SSer^ 
 
 gniigen, n. -n^, -n, 
 pluck, tr. pfliicfen. 
 poem, ®ebi(^t, n. ~m, -te. 
 poet, 2)i(^ter, m. -r6, -r. 
 poetry, 2)ic^t!unft, /. 
 point, @pl^e, /. -3en, he on 
 
 the — of, ttJoHen eben: see 
 
 258. 
 politeness, ^bflid^!eit, /. 
 political, adj. politifd^. 
 poor, adj. arm. 
 pope, -^apft, m. -te§, -apfle. 
 portion ; he the — of, einem in 
 
 %\)z\[ {Zn\] iDPrben. 
 pojirait, ^|>ortrait, n. -m, -te. 
 possess, tr. befi^en, im iBefi^ 
 
 :^aben. 
 possession, 93efi^ung, /. -gen. 
 
 take or gain — of, fid) bemtid^- 
 
 tigen igen.), erringen 0. tr. 
 post, ^^oft, /. -ten. 
 potato, tartoffet, /. -In. 
 pound, ^fnnb, n. -beS, -be. 
 
 power, ma^i, f. -ad^te ; ©etrati; 
 
 /. -ten. 
 powerful, adj. mac^tig. 
 praise, tr. toben, preijen 0. 
 pray, intr. beten. 
 preach, inir. prebigen. 
 prepare, tr. jnbereiten. 
 preserye, tr. erbalten 0. 
 president, ^rdfibent, m. -ten, 
 
 -ten. 
 presume : I presume, ttjo^l with 
 
 merben : see 328. 
 pretty, adj. pbfc^. 
 price, ^rei«, m. -je§, -fe. 
 pride, ^od^mut^ [=mut], m. 
 
 -t^eg. 
 prince, ?^urft, m. -ten, -ten ; ^ring, 
 
 m. -jen, -gen. 
 princess, ^iirftin, /. -inncn. 
 print, tr. bruden. 
 prison, ©efangni^ [=nig],n. -ffe3, 
 
 -ffe. 
 prisoner, ©efangen {p'ple as 
 
 noun). 
 prohahly, adv. n)al)rf(^einUd^, 
 
 tt»ol)l: see 328. 
 procure, tr. t>erfd)affen. 
 professor, ^rofeffor, m. -rs, -ren. 
 promise, tr. tjerfprec^en 0. 
 promise, S5erfprec^en, n. -n8, -n. 
 pronounce, tr. auSfpred^en 0, 
 proud, adj. ftolg. 
 proye, tr. beweifen 0., nad^njcifen 
 
 0. 
 Prussia, ^ren^en, n. -n«. 
 Fi*ussian, adj. preufeifd^. noun, bet 
 
 ^reu^e. 
 punish, tr. ftrafen. 
 pupil, ©driller, m. -r§, -r. 
 put, tr. or intr. je^en, ftellen, tegcn, 
 
 ftedfen. — himself, ftcfi ftetlen. 
 
 quarter, 33iertel, n. -I«, -I. 
 queen, ^bnigin, /. -innen. 
 question, tr. fragen. 
 
VOCABULAEY. 
 
 457 
 
 question, %xaQt, f. -en. 
 qnick^ adj. (adv. -ly) fci)uel(I, rofcl). 
 qniet, adj. {adv. -ly) ru^ig. 
 qnite, adv, gang, Dollig. 
 
 race, ©efc^lec^t, n. -te§, -ter. 
 
 railroad, @ijenbot)n, /. -nen. 
 
 rain, intr. impers. regnen. 
 
 rain, 3tegen, m. -ng. 
 
 rank, 9iang, m. -ge§, -cinge. 
 
 reach, <r. erreii^en. 
 
 read, ir. or intr. lejen 0. — alond, 
 
 tjortefen (to, dat). 
 ready, ad/, bereit. 
 really, adv. tvivtii^, 
 receive, tr. emtifangen 0. 
 recognize, tr. erfeixnen {irreg.). 
 reconcile, tr. Derfo^neiu 
 red, adj. rot^ [rot], 
 regard, tr. betrac^ten. 
 regret, intr. reuen {impers. with 
 
 accus.). 
 rejoice, intr. ftc^ freuen (in, gen. / 
 
 over, iihtXf auf). 
 relations, pi. 5Serix)anbtfcf)aft, /. 
 release, ir. entlaffen , eutbinben 
 
 0. (from, gen.). 
 remain, intr. bleiben 0. f, — be- 
 hind, surucfbteibeit. 
 remember, tr. fi(^ erinnern 
 
 {gen. or an), gebenfen {irreg.) 
 
 {gen.). 
 repeat, tr. inieber'^oteu {insep'k). 
 respect, tr. ac^tcn. 
 rest, 9?ut)e/7. 
 
 restaurant, SfJeftauration, /. -nen. 
 revile, tr. fc^intpfen. 
 revolution, 9?et)olution, /. -nen. 
 reward, tr. to^nen. 
 Rhine, $Rt)ein, m. - ne8. 
 ribbon, 53onb, n. -be§, -cinbe'r. 
 rich, adj. reid). 
 riches, 9leid^t^um [=tum], m. -m^, 
 
 -iimer, 
 rid, adj. Io0 (of, accus.). 
 
 ride, intr. rettcn 0. — away, 
 
 fortreiten. 
 ride, $Ritt, m. -tteS, -tte. 
 right, adj. rec^t. 
 right, 9?e(f)t, n. -m, -te. 
 righteous, oc?/. g credit 
 ring, 9ting, m. -ge8, -ge. 
 rise, intr. auffte^en 0. f., (of the 
 
 sun) aufge'^en 0. f. 
 robj ir. raubeu, beraubett. 
 Bome, 9tom, n. -m«. 
 roof, '^ad), n. -c^eg, -ad^er, 
 room, 3itttmer, n. -ra, -r. 
 rude, adj. rau^, ungegogeu. 
 run, intr. laufen 0. f. — away, 
 
 entlaufen (from, dat.). 
 
 sad, adj. traurig. 
 
 sake : for the — of, prep, tucgen 
 
 {gen.). 
 same, adj. \dh, gteid). the — , 
 
 berfelbe, etc. 
 save, tr. rettett. 
 say, ir. fag en. 
 
 scamp, S3ofert)i(^t, m. -tg, -te. 
 scholar, ©chiller, m. -r8, -r; 
 
 @elet)rte (r), m. -en, -en. 
 school, <2>dink, f. -len. 
 science, 2Biffenjd)aft, /. -ten. 
 scream, intr. fd^reien 0. 
 scold, tr. fd^elten, 0. 
 sculptor, 53ilb^auer, m. -r8, -r." 
 season, 3al)re§seit, /. -ten. 
 seat one's self, fid) fe^sen. 
 secret, ©e^eimnife [=uig], n. -ffeS, 
 
 -ffe. 
 secure, tr. fic^ern. 
 see, tr. fe^en 0. - about one, ftd^ 
 
 uinfe^en. — again, tviebevfe^en. 
 seek, tr. fuc^en. 
 seem, intr. fd^einen 0. 
 seldom, adv. felten. 
 self, pron. fclbft, felber: see 
 
 155.5. 
 self-respect, ©elbftad^tung, /. 
 
458 
 
 ENGLISH-GERMAN 
 
 sell, tr. Derfaufcn (to, dat). 
 send, tr. fd^icfen, fenben (reg. or 
 
 irreg.) — in, einfeuben, 
 sensible, adj. {adv. -ly) oevniinftig. 
 September, (September, m. -r§. 
 servant, 2)iener, m. -x^, -v. 
 senrice, S)ienft, m. -fteg, -ftc. 
 set, <r. je^en ; (of the sun) uttter^ 
 
 ge'^en 0. f. — over, iiberfe^en 
 
 (sep'Ze). 
 several, adj, pi me^rere: see 
 
 192.2; Derfc^iebene, 
 she, pers. pron. fte. 
 sheplierd, ^irt, m. -ten, -ten. 
 shoe, @cf)u^, m. -I^eg, -l^e. 
 shop, $?oben, m. -ng, -aben. 
 short, ac?/. furg, 
 show, tr. jetgen, 
 shut, <r. fc^Ue^en 0., jumod^en. 
 sick, «c?/. franf. — bed, ^ran!en= 
 
 bett, n. 
 sickness, ^ranf^eit, /. -ten. 
 silent : be — , intr. fd^meigen 0. 
 silver, @i(ber, n. -r8. 
 silver, adj. filbern» 
 sin, intr. jiinbigen. 
 since, prep, feit (dat.). adv. feit= 
 
 htm. conj. ba, inbem. 
 sing, tr. or intr. fingen 0. — too 
 
 or at the same time, join in 
 
 — ing, mitfmgen. 
 single, adj. ein^ig. not a — , !ein 
 
 einglger, etc. 
 sister, ©c^mefter, /. 
 sit, intr. ftljen 0. — down, fid) 
 
 fe^en. 
 sleep, m^r. fd^Iafen 0. go to — , 
 
 einfc^Iafen. 
 slow, adj. {adv. -ly) Tang jam. 
 slumber, @(^(ummer, m. -r«, -r. 
 small, adj. flein. 
 small-pox, tie 331ottern, pi. 
 smoke, tr. or intr. rand^en. 
 smoke, 0?aud^, m. -df)e6. 
 snoWj ii^r. and impers. jdE|neien. 
 
 so, adv. and conj. fo, at[o ; e8 : see 
 
 154. 4e. 
 soldier, @oIbat, m. -ten, -ten. 
 solid, at?/. foUb. 
 some, prcn. ad/, eintg, cttid^ ; et:= 
 
 it)a§, tttag; trelc^e: see 176.2. 
 
 — thing, etma8, njag. — body, 
 
 Semanb. 
 son, ®o^n, m. -ne8, -o^ne. 
 song, ?ieb, n. -beS, -ber. 
 soon, adv. haih. 
 sorrow, (©ef)mer,5, m. -jeS, -gen; 
 
 (gorge, /. -en. 
 sorrow, intr. leiben (?. 
 sorry : be — for, bebanern tr. ; 
 
 fid) erbormen {gen.). 
 sort : what - of, nja« filr. 
 soul, (geele, /. -len. 
 south, (Siibcn, m. -n3. 
 southern, ac(;. fiiblid^. 
 Spain, ©panien, n. -icn3. 
 Spanish, ad/, fpanifd). 
 Spaniard, (gpanier, m. -r§, -r. 
 spare, ir. fd)onen, t)erfd)onen. 
 speak, tr. or intr. fpred^en 0., 
 
 reben. — out, augfpredjen 0. 
 spend, tr. (of time) tjerbringen 
 
 {irreg.), tterleben. 
 spiritual, adj. geiftig. 
 spite ! in — of, prep, tro^ {gen.). 
 spoil, tr. tierberben 0. 
 spoon, ?offet, m. -t8, -t. 
 spring, ^rut)Ung, m. -gg, -gc. 
 spring, mfr. fpringen 0. \) or f. 
 stand, intr. [te'^en 0. I) or |. 
 stay, m<r. bleiben 0. f. 
 step, (Sd)ritt, m. -tte«, -tte. 
 still, etc?/, ftitt, fd)meigenb. adv. 
 
 noc^, ftetg ; bod^. 
 stop, intr. author en, fte'^en bleiben. 
 story, ®efd)idf)te, /. -ten. 
 strange, adj. fremb. 
 stranger, ber ^rembe, etc. 
 stream, (Strom, m. -meS, -omc. 
 street, @tra^e, /. -^en. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 459 
 
 strength, ^raft, /. -afte. 
 stretch, tr. ftrecfen. Mr. fid) 
 
 ftrecfeit. 
 strike, ir. fci^tagen 0. — off, (xl-- 
 
 fd)(agen. 
 strong, adj. ftarf. 
 student, ©tubent, m. -ten, -tcit. 
 study, ©tubium, n. -mg, -ien. 
 stupid, adj. biimm. 
 style, aJJobe, /. -ben. 
 sublime, adj. er'^aben. {with dat) 
 succeed, intr. gelingen 0. {impers. 
 such, pron. adj. or adv. fotd). 
 
 — a, fold) ein, ein fotcl), jo ein. 
 sudden, {adj. -ly) plbt^lic^. 
 suffer, intr. {or tr.) teiben 0. 
 sufficiently, adv. genng. 
 suitable: be — , piemen {Impers. 
 
 with dal.). 
 summer, (Sommev, m. -r^, -r. 
 sun, ®onne, /. -nen. 
 Sunday, ©onntog, m. -g§. 
 sure, adv. getuijs. to be — , jnjar, 
 surrive, tr. iiberlebeu. 
 suspicion, 5>erbac^t, m. -t§. 
 sweet, adj. \n^. 
 Switzerland, @d)tt)ei5, /. 
 sword, >2)C^mert, n. -te8, -ter. 
 
 table, Zi\6). 
 
 take, tr. ne^men 0. —away, n)cg= 
 
 ne^men. — along or too, ntit= 
 
 ne'^men. 
 talk, Mr. reben, fpred^en 0. 
 
 — over, befprecl^en 0. 
 tall, adj. gro^, \)o^. 
 task, ^nfg abe, /. -ben. 
 tea, 2:t)ee, m. -eeg, -ec. 
 teach, <r. le'^ren. 
 
 teacher, ^tljttv, m, -x^, -r; 
 
 SOfJeifter, m. -r8, -r» 
 teaching, ?e^rc, /. -rem 
 tear, X{)rdne, /. -nen. 
 tell, <r. erj^ci^Ien, fag en. 
 terrible^ adj. furd)tbar. 
 
 thaler, ^'^nter, m. -r8, -r. 
 
 than, conj. (x\^, benn» 
 
 thank, tr-. banfen {dat.). 
 
 thanks, 2)an!, m. -leg. 
 
 that, c?em. pro>2. jener, berjenige, 
 
 etc. ; reZ. pron. tDeld), ber, efc. 
 
 cory. \i(x% bamit. in order — , 
 
 bamit 
 the, de/. ar^. ber (bie, ba§). con/. 
 
 or adv. je, befto. 
 theatre, it)eater, n. -r§, -r. 
 their, poss. pron. i'^r, ber il)vig. 
 then, adv. bann, borauf. conj. 
 
 benn, bann, fo. 
 there, adv. ba, bort. — are, etc., 
 
 eg gibt, etc., e6 finb, etc. 
 therefore, adv. or conj. barnm. 
 they, pers. pron. [ic. indef. man. 
 thine, poss. pron. bein, ber beinig. 
 thing, 2)ing, n. -geg, -ge ; 'Bo.&^t, 
 
 f. -en. 
 think, Mr. benfen (irreg.) ge* 
 
 benfcn. (of, gren.). 
 thirst, infr. biirften {impers. with 
 
 accus.). 
 this, (^ew?. pron. bie0. 
 thou, pers. pron. bu. 
 thought, ®eban!e, m. -fen§, -!cn. 
 three, num. brei. 
 throne, 3:^ron, m. -neg, -ne or 
 
 -nen. 
 through, pnp. bnrc^ (accws.). 
 thunder, Conner, m. -r§, -r. 
 
 -storm, ©emitter, n. -r§, -r. 
 time, 3cit, /• -ten. three times, 
 
 breintat, etc. sometimes, mand)= 
 
 ntal. 
 tire, tr. ermiiben. 
 tired, adj. miibe, ermiibet. be — 
 
 of it, eg miibe fein, eg fatt ^ahtn. 
 to, prep. 3u, nad^ {dat.), in, an 
 
 {accus.), big (da<.) ; ici^/i in/in. ju. 
 today, adv. ^cute. of — , today's, 
 
 l^eutig {adj.). 
 together, adv. jnfammcn. 
 
460 
 
 ENGLISH-GERMAN 
 
 tomorrow, adv. morgcn. 
 tone, 2;on, m. -neg, -one. 
 too, adv. ju ; an6). — mnch, ju 
 
 t)iet or fe^r, all^ufe^r. 
 toward, prep, iiad) (dat), gegen 
 
 (accws.), gen. 
 town, ^tabt, /. -dbte. — hall, 
 
 9latl)l)aug maU], n. 
 translate, tr. uberfe^en (inseple). 
 travel, intr. rcifeit j or f). 
 treason, 33en*at^ [=trot], m. -f^e^. 
 
 high--, ^oc^tjerrat^, m. 
 tree, 93aum, m. -nteS, -aunte. 
 tremble, intr. jittern. 
 troop, Zxnpp, m. -ppt^, -ppe. 
 tropic, Xrope, /. -pen. 
 trouble, 9Jiu^e, /. 
 true, adj. iDaljr; trcu. it is — , 
 
 adv. 3tt)ar. 
 truly, adv. toa^rtic^, tra'^r^aftig. 
 trust, tr. trauen, tjertrauen (dat.). 
 truth, SSa^r^eit, /. 
 try, intr. t)erfut^en. 
 turn (to), intr. biegen 0., fic^ 
 
 menben ; tuerben (gu) 0. 
 twice, adv. jmeimal. 
 
 twig, B^eig^ wi- -gc8, -gc. 
 
 two, nwm. jttjei, 
 
 ngly, «(^i. PBtic^. 
 
 unable: be — , nid^t fbuneu: 
 
 see 254. 
 nncle, Onfel, m. -Ig, -I ; D^elm, 
 
 m. -m^, -me. 
 under, prep, unter (cZa^. and 
 
 accus.). 
 understand, tr. berftel^en 0. 
 undertake, intr. or tr. ftd^ (dat.) 
 
 Dornet)men 0. 
 undone, adj. ungefd^e^ett. 
 unending, adj. enbloS, unenbUc^. 
 unexpected, adj. unern)artet. 
 ungrateful, adj. unbanfbar. 
 nnhappiness, Ungliic!, n. -d^. 
 unhappy, adj. mtgliicfUc!^. 
 
 uninterrupted, adj. uuutitcr^ 
 
 brod^en. 
 university, UniDerfttcit, /. -ten. 
 unknown, adj. unbefannt. 
 unless, conj. o^ne bQJ3, njenn ni^t, 
 
 eg fei benn : see 331. le. 
 until, conj. bis, bi§ ta^. prep, big 
 
 (dat.). 
 unwell, adj. or adv. unmo^t. 
 unworthy, adj. nnwiirbig. 
 up, adv. or prep. au\, an (dat or 
 
 accus.), '^inauf. 
 upon, prep, anf (dat. or accus.). 
 usual, adj. (adv. -ly) get»b^nli(^. 
 
 as 
 
 it)ie genjo^ntic^. 
 
 use, tr. benu^en. be of—, nnt3eu 
 
 (to, dat.). 
 useless, adj. unbranc^bor. 
 
 vain, adj. eitct. 
 
 vainly, in vain, adv. tjergcbeng. 
 valley, Zljai, n. -leg, -citer. 
 vanquish, tr. begtuingen 0. 
 vegetable, ©eniiife, n. -feg, -fc. 
 very, adv. fe^r. 
 victor, ®ieger, m. -rg, -r. 
 victorious, adj. ftegreid). 
 victory, @ieg, m. -geg, -ge. 
 Tienna, SSien, n. -ng. 
 village, 2)orf, n. -feg, -orfer. 
 violet, ^eilc^en, n. -ng, -n. 
 virtue, Slugenb, /. -ben. 
 visit, tr. befuc^en. 
 visit, Sefu(^, m. -d^eg, -6)t, 
 voice, ®timme, /. -men. 
 
 wagon, Bag en, m. -ng, -n or 
 
 -agen. 
 wait, intr. ioarten (for, gen. or 
 
 auf). 
 wake, tr. medfen. intr. aufwad)en. 
 walk, intr. get)en 0. ; ivanbern. 
 
 take a — , fpagieren gef)en. 
 wander, intr. manbern f. 
 wanderer, Sanberer^w. -xi^-x^ 
 
VOCABULABY. 
 
 461 
 
 want, fr. {<yr infr,) n)flnfd)en, iroHen 
 
 {irreg.). 
 war, ^'rieg, m. -ge§, -gc. 
 warm, adj. voaxm, 
 warning, Sarnutig, /. -gen. 
 watch, intr. wac^en. 
 watch, U()u, /. -ren. 
 water, SSaffer, n. -r6. 
 way, 3Beg, m. -geg, -ge. on the — , 
 
 untertt)eg§. 
 we, p^s. pron. ttJtr. 
 weak, adj. jrf)tt)acf). 
 weary, adj. miibc. 
 weather, Setter, n. -vg. 
 Wednesday, 9)litttt)od^, m. -c^g. 
 week, SSocf)e, /. -en. 
 weep, intr. tueinen. 
 weigh, intr. (or tr.) tt)legen 0. 
 welcome, adj. tDlUfommen. 
 well, adv. gut, tt)o^L 
 what, prori. was ; wetcf). — kind 
 
 of, toa^ fiir. - ever, was aud). 
 
 Mer;. n)ie! tuaS! 
 when, adv. a\^, tuenn ; wann. 
 where, adv. roo. — erer, wo, 
 
 tt)o auc^. 
 whether, con/, ob. 
 which, pron. tuetd), tuer, ttJaS efc. 
 
 that — , n?ag. 
 while, adv. inbem, ttja^renb. 
 white, adj. wti% 
 who, pron. tt)er, n)e((f)er, efc, 
 
 ber, e*c. he — , she — , \vtx, 
 
 ber« or bie^jenige. —ever, nier 
 
 aud^. 
 whole, adj. gan^. 
 whose, pron. njcffen {gen. of 
 
 ttjer). 
 why, adv. tDarutn; Wa^: see 
 
 176.3. 
 widower, SBitttner [Sitttjer], m. 
 
 -r«, -r. 
 wife, %xa\x, f. -€n; ©attin, /. 
 
 -nnen. 
 willingly, adv. gertu 
 
 window, ^enj^er, n. ~^r§, -r. 
 wine, SBein, -ne8, -ne. 
 winter, SBinter, m. -rS, -r. 
 wisdom, SBeiS^elt, /. 
 wise, adj. njeife, gete^rt. 
 wish, tr. or intr. tDiiiifd^en, ttJoUen 
 
 (trreg ). wished for, ertt}imfd)t. 
 wish, 2Bunf(^, m. -fc^eS, -iinfc^e, 
 with, prep, ntit (dat.). 
 withdi*aw, tr. juriid^iel^en 0. 
 
 intr. fid^ guriid^ie^en. 
 without, prq). o^ne {accus. or 
 
 infin. with ju). 
 woman, Seib. n. -be«, -ber; 
 
 gran, /. -en. 
 wonder, intr. iuunbevn. — at, fic^ 
 
 ttjunbern iiber. 
 wood, ^oli, n. 3e«, -je ; Satb, m. 
 
 -bes, -dlber. 
 word, Sort, n. -te8, -orter. 
 work, m^r. orbeiten. 
 work, ?lrbeit, /. -ten ; Serf, n. 
 
 - !eg, -!e. 
 
 world, Sert, /. -ten. 
 
 worse, worst, comp. and, superl. 
 
 of bad, fc^ (ed)t. 
 wretched, adj. nngliidfeUg. 
 wring", tr. ring en 0, 
 write, tr. or intr. fc^reiben 0. 
 
 — in, register, elnfc^reiben, 
 writing, @d)reiben, n. -n8. 
 wrong, Unrec^t, n. -teS, -te, 
 
 year, 3al)r, n. -re8, -re. 
 
 yes, ac?v. ja. 
 
 yesterday, ac?v. geftern. 
 
 yet, adv. noc^. not — , nod) nid)t. 
 
 yon, pers. pron. 'tixi, \\\x, <B\t : see 
 
 153. 
 young, adj. jnng, 
 yonr, poss. pron. bein, i^r, 3^t» 
 
 e^c* see 157. 
 youth, rvng'-nb, /. 
 youth, young man, Siingliug, m. 
 
463 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 ^^^The references are to Sections, not to pages. 
 
 a, pronunciation of, 8; a for aa in 
 new orthography, 8.1. 
 
 a, pronunciation of, 15; d for e in 
 new orthography, 15.1. 
 
 miant, 400.2. 
 
 Absolute construction, with accu- 
 sative, 230.3; -with infinitive, 
 347. 
 
 accent, 55. 
 
 accessary clause, see dependent. 
 
 accusative case, general office of, 
 59.4, 226; with transitive 
 verbs, 227.1; with intransitive, 
 227.2; double accus., with 
 verbs, 227.3; accus. with prepo- 
 sitions, 228, 375-6; with ad- 
 jectives, 229; accus. of measure 
 and time, 230.1,2; accus, ab- 
 solute, or of accompanying 
 circumstance, 230.3. 
 
 active voice of verb, 233.3. 
 
 address, use of pronouns in, 153. 
 
 adjective, usual adjunct of noun, 
 110; when declined, 114-7; 
 rules of adj. declension, 118- 
 28; indeclinable adj. 126.4; 
 origin of double declension of 
 adj., 132; adj. as noun, 129; 
 as adverb, 130, 363.1,2; adj. 
 with etwaS, \va^, iud)t§, 129.5; 
 comparison of adj., 133-42; 
 absolute use pf comparative adj., 
 142.2; modifying adjuncts of 
 adj., 143-6; their place, 147:— 
 agreement of adj., 62, 209; 
 genitive dependent on adj . , 2 1 7 ; 
 dative do., 223; accusative do., 
 229: — primitive adj., 413; adj. 
 derived from verbs, 414; deri- 
 ved by suffix, 415; by prefix, 
 416; compound adj., 423^ 
 
 adjective clause, 437, 444.2, 
 110.1c. 
 
 adjective phrase, compound, 437. 
 2a, 147.2, 358. 
 
 adverb, office of, 361; usual ad- 
 junct of adjective, 144; of verb, 
 317; of noun, 110.2, 369.3; of 
 preposition, 369.1; complement 
 of preposition, 379; used as 
 adj., 369.3 ; place of adv., 
 319.2/, 370; classification of 
 adverbs., 362; derivation of ad- 
 verbs, from nouns, 364; from 
 adj . , 36 3 ; from adj . , by derivative 
 endings, 363.3 ; by combination, 
 365; from pronominal roots, 
 367.2; original adverbs, 367; 
 ordinal adv., 207.3; comparison, 
 368; adjective as adv., 130, 
 363.1,2; participle as adv., 356; 
 comparison of adjectives by adv., 
 141. 
 
 adverbial clause, 438, 444.3, 
 144.2. 
 
 adverbial predicate, adjective asj 
 116.16, 316.26. 
 
 5(e, see a. 
 
 5leu, see an, 
 
 ai, pronunciation of, 
 
 all, 193. 
 
 aller, prefixed to superlatives, 
 142.3. 
 
 alphabet, German, 1-3; its origin, 
 1; written character, 2.1, pp. 
 275-77; use of capitals, 4. 
 
 aU, in sense of *asif,' 332. 26, c, 
 4336; do. in substantive clause, 
 436. 3^; omission of al^ after fp 
 and adverb or adjective, 438. 
 Sd,e. 
 
 outer, 194. 
 
 19.1. 
 
464 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 npodosis, 332.1. 
 
 appositive adjective, 110.16, 116. 
 2,4; do. noun, 59.4:, 111.2; in 
 nominative, 213.2. 
 
 arrangement of the sentence, rules 
 for 429-39; summary of rules, 
 440-44; additional remarks, 
 rhetorical arrangements, 445-6. 
 
 articles, declension, 63-4; com- 
 bination with prepositions, Q5; 
 rules for use, 66; place, 67. 
 
 Aryan languages, see Indo-Euro- 
 pean. 
 
 assertive sentence, 427. 
 
 attributive adjective, 110.1a, 115. 
 
 au, pronunciation of, 20. 
 
 aUf pronunciation of, 21.2. 
 
 auxHiaries, of tense, 239-41; of 
 mood, see modal auxiliaries; 
 causative auxiliary, 242.2; 
 •omission of auxiliary of tense, 
 439.3a; verbs taking either 
 tjobtn or fetn as auxiliary, 241.3. 
 
 atj, pronunciation and use of, 19.3. 
 
 b, pronunciation of, 23; English 
 correspondent of, 459.L 
 
 bases, 3936. 
 
 be=, derivation and use of, 307.2, 
 405.III.la. 
 
 bcibc, 1996. 
 
 C, pronunciation and use of, 24. 
 
 capitals, use of, 4; in pronouns of 
 address, 153.3-5. 
 
 cardinal numerals, 197-201; their 
 derivatives, 202-8. 
 
 cases of declension, their uses, 59, 
 212-30: arid see accusative, 
 dative, genitive, nominative. 
 
 causative auxiliary, 242 2; causa- 
 tive derivative verbs, 404.1.1. 
 
 Celtic languages, relationship of, 
 450. 
 
 C^, pronunciation of, 43; English 
 correspondents of, 460. 
 
 df pronunciation and use of, 30, 
 
 classes, under first declension, how 
 determined, 69; first class, 75- 
 80; second, 81-6; third, 87- 
 90. 
 
 cognate accusative, 227.2a. 
 
 collective noun, agreement of verb 
 with, 322.2. 
 
 comparative degree, 134 fE.; de- 
 clension of, 140.1. 
 
 comparison, of adjectives, 133- 
 42; degrees and endings, 134- 
 5; modification of vowel, 136; 
 irregular and defective compari- 
 son, 139; declension, 140: — of 
 participles, 355; of adverbs, 
 368. 
 
 composition or combination of 
 words, 418-25. 
 
 compound adjective phrase, 437. 
 2a, 147.2, 358. 
 
 compound foi-ms of verb, 238-42. 
 
 compound nouns, gender of, 61.4; 
 inflection of, 68.1; formation 
 of, 421-2. 
 
 compound verbs, with prefixes, 
 233.4, 296-311; with otiier 
 elements, 312-3. 
 
 compound words, 418; their fre- 
 quency in German, 419; ortho- 
 graphy, 4196,c; pronunciation 
 of finals and initials in, 53; 
 accent, 55.2-4; rules of forma- 
 tion of compound verbs, 420; 
 nouns, 421-2; adjectives, 423- 
 4; particles, 425, 365. 
 
 conditional clauses, inversion in, 
 433, 443.5. 
 
 conditional tenses, formation o^ 
 240.2c; their use, 334-6. 
 
 conditional use of subjunctive, 
 332. 
 
 conjugation, defined, 231; rules 
 respecting, 232-313; conjuga- 
 tions, distinction and origin of, 
 246 ; New conjugation, 247-60; 
 Old conjugation, 261-73 ; mixed 
 conjugation, 272. 
 
 conjunctions, 382; their classi- 
 fication, 383; general con- 
 nectives, 384; adverbial con- 
 junctions, 385 ; subordinating 
 conjunctions, 386. 
 
 consonants, pronunciation o^ 
 23-54. 
 
 copula, 316.1a, 426.26; omission 
 of, in dependent clause, 439.3, 
 
 correspondences between English 
 
INDEX. 
 
 465 
 
 and German words and letters, 
 452-61. 
 countries and places, declension of 
 names of, 103. 
 
 b, pronunciation of, 25; English 
 correspondent of, 458.1. 
 
 ha, added to relative pronoun, 
 182.2. 
 
 ba or bar, in combination with 
 prepositions, as substitute for 
 pronoun of third person, 154. 
 2,3; for demonstrative, 166.4; 
 for relative, 180. 
 
 dative case, general use of, 59.3, 
 221; dat. with verbs, 222; of 
 possession, with luerben, etc., 
 222. II. Id; with impersonal 
 phrases of condition, 222. II. 1/, 
 292.4; of interest or concern, 
 222.III.; possessive dat., 222. 
 Ilia, 6; dative with adjectives, 
 223; with prepositions, 224, 
 374, 376; with nouns, 225.1; 
 in exclamations, 225.2:— use or 
 omission of e in dat. of nouns, 
 71.15, 83; old dat. sing. fem. 
 in u, 95. 
 
 day of the month, expression of, 
 216. 5d. 
 
 declension, defined, 57; rules of 
 decl., 58-208; decl. of articles, 
 63-4; of nouns, 68-108; of 
 adjectives, 118-28, 140; of 
 pronouns, 151-95 ; of numerals, 
 198-208; uses of the forms of 
 decl., 209-30. 
 
 defective declension of nouns, 
 100; defective theme in declen- 
 sion, 98. 
 
 definitive article, see articles ; use 
 in generaUzing sense, 66.1,2; in 
 senoe of possessive, 66.3, 161. 
 
 demonstratives, 163-71; use of, 
 in sense of personal or posses- 
 sive pronouns, 166.26, 171. 
 
 denominative verbs, 405. 
 
 dependent clauses, 426.2d, 435, 
 444; their arrangement, 434-9, 
 444; their introduction in a 
 period, 439.5; omission of 
 auxiliary or copula in, 439.3. 
 
 ber, as definite article, 63; as de- 
 
 monstrative aajective or pro- 
 noun, 163, 164.1,2, 166 ; as 
 relative, 177-8. 
 
 bcrer, 164.2. 
 
 derivation of words, 393-417. 
 
 S)ero, 162. 
 
 determinative pronouns, 167-71; 
 use of, instead of personal or 
 possessive pronouns, 171. 
 
 bteS, 163, 165-6. 
 
 digraphs, vowel, 18-22; conso- 
 nant, 43-51. 
 
 dimidiative numerals, 207.1. 
 
 diphthongs, pronunciation of, 
 18-22. 
 
 doubled vowels, 7.1, 53; modified 
 vowels not doubled, 14.2; 
 doubled consonants, 7.2, 52.2, 
 53. 
 
 biirfen, 251, 253. 
 
 e, pronunciation of, 9; c for ec in 
 new orthography, 9 .1; e fofr a in 
 new orthography, 15.1. 
 
 ei, pronunciation of, 19.2. 
 
 ein, as indefinite article, 63; as 
 indef. pronoun, 195.1; as 
 numeral, 198. 
 
 eintg, 189. 
 
 emp=, derivation and use of, 
 307.3. 
 
 emphasis or impressiveness, in- 
 version for, 431gf, 443.2. 
 
 endings of inflection and of deri- 
 vation, see suffixes. 
 
 English language, relation of Ger- 
 man to, 447-52 ; corresponden- 
 ces between English and German 
 words and letters, 452-61. 
 
 eiit=, derivation and use of, 307.3; 
 405. III. 16. 
 
 er=, derivation and use of, 307.4; 
 405.IIL1C. 
 
 e6, special uses and constructions 
 of, 154.4; omission of, as im- 
 personal subject, 293. 
 
 etiid), 189. 
 
 tUva^, 188; form of adjective 
 with, 129.5. 
 
 etn^etrf), 189. 
 
 eu, pronunciation of, 21.1; for au 
 in new orthography, 21.3. 
 
 @W.« 162. 
 
m 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 exclamation, construction of , 391, 
 
 432.1c, 439.4a. 
 expletive personal pronoun in 
 
 dative, 156, 222. Ulb. 
 eh, pronunciation and use of, 
 
 19.3. 
 
 f, pronunciation of, 26; English 
 correspondents of, 459.3, 
 
 factitive predicate, see objective 
 predicate. 
 
 feminine, see gender: classification 
 of fem. nouns in declension, 
 69.2, 70; fem. noun invariable 
 in singular, 71.1a; exceptions, 
 95. 
 
 first or strong declension of nouns, 
 69, 73, 74-90; its first class, 
 75-80; second, 81-6; third, 
 87-90:— of adjectives, 1 18-28, 
 132. 
 
 foreign nouns, declension of, 86, 
 92.1a,2c, 97.2, 101; gender, 
 61.5. 
 
 foreign words, pronunciation of, 
 54; of t), ie, e, t, d) in, 13, 18, 
 24, 37, 43.3; of g in words 
 from French, 27; accent, 55.5. 
 
 fractional numerals, 207.2. 
 
 fiir in nja§ fiir, 175, 177, 179. 
 
 future perfect tense, how formed, 
 240.26; its use, 328. 
 
 future tense, how formed, 240.2a; 
 its use, 328; present in sense of 
 future, 324.4. 
 
 g, pronunciation of, 27, 43; Eng- 
 lish correspondents of, 460. 
 
 ge=, derivation and use of, 307.5; 
 use as prefix of participle, 243. 3 ; 
 its origin as such, 243.3c. 
 
 gegeffen, 271.3. 
 
 gender, 60; general rules for, in 
 nouns, 61; in adjectives etc., 
 62; of compound nouns, 421.1; 
 gender of personal pronoun, 
 154.1. 
 
 genitive case, general office of, 
 59.2, 215; gen. with nouns, 
 216; its place, 216.6; with ad- 
 jectives, 217; with prepositions, 
 218, 873; with verbs, 219, 
 
 220.2-4; substitution of dative 
 with t)0U for, 216.4; adverbial 
 gen., 220.1; predicate gen., 
 220.2; gen. with interjections, 
 220.5:— form of gen. deter- 
 mines declension of a noun, 
 69.1, 70; use of e§ or g in, 83; 
 of en or n, 93; old gen. sing, 
 of feminines, in it, 95; omission 
 of sign of genitive, 101.5; gen. 
 of second adjective declension 
 used instead of first, 121.3. 
 
 Germanic or Teutonic group of 
 languages, 449-50; its divi- 
 sions, 451; progression of 
 mutes in, 453-60. 
 
 German language, relation of to 
 English, 447-61; history of, 
 462-9. 
 
 Gothic language, relationship of, 
 451.4. 
 
 gradation of vowels, see variation. 
 
 Greek language, relationship of, 
 450. 
 
 Grimm's law of progression of 
 mutes, 453. 
 
 ^, pronunciation of, 28; used to 
 denote a long vowel, 7.1; Eng- 
 Ush correspondents of, 460. 
 
 l)aben, conjugation of, 239.1,4a; 
 use as auxiliary, 240-1 ; origin 
 of use, 240.4.' 
 
 Hebrew etc., not related with Ger- 
 manic languages, 450.76. 
 
 I^ier, compounded with preposi- 
 tions, in sense of demonstrative, 
 166,4, 
 
 High-German subdivision of Ger- 
 manic group of languages, 451. 
 2; its history, 463-9. 
 
 hour of the day, expression of, 
 211.3, 
 
 hypothetical period, construction 
 of, 332.1,2. 
 
 i, pronunciation of, 10; ic for tin 
 new orthography, 18.1. 
 
 ie, pronunciation of, 18. 
 
 3{)ro, 162. 
 
 imperative mood, 235.4, 237.5, 
 270; filled up from subjunctive 
 
INDEX. 
 
 467 
 
 present, 243.1; use, 337; sub- 
 stitutes for, 338. 
 
 imperative sentence, see optative. 
 
 imperfect tense, see preterit. 
 
 impersonal verb, 233.26, 291-5; 
 relation to passive, 294; omis- 
 sion of impers, subject, 293 ; with 
 genitive object, 219.4; with 
 dative of subject, 222.11. le; 
 accusative of subject, 227.2c. 
 
 impressiveness or emphasis, inver- 
 sion for, 431j7, 443.2. 
 
 indeclinable words, 56.3, 360; 
 indeclinable adj., 126.4. 
 
 indefinite article, see articles. 
 
 indefinite pronouns and numerals, 
 184-95. 
 
 indefinite subjects of verbs, 1 54.4, 
 166.3; agreement of verb after, 
 154.4d, 322.3. 
 
 Indian (East) languages, relation- 
 ship of, 450. 
 
 indicative mode, 235.2; uses of 
 its tenses, 323-8; use of indica- 
 tive instead of subjunctive, 
 330c, 332.5c, 333.5. 
 
 indirect statement, subjunctive of, 
 333. 
 
 Indo-European family of lan- 
 guages, 449-50. 
 
 Indo-Germanic, see Indo-Euro- 
 pean. 
 
 infinitive, verbal noun, 235.5, 
 339; ending, 237.1a; ^vl assign 
 of, 243.2, 341; perfect inf., 
 240. 1(Z; use of inf. for participle 
 in perfect and pluperfect, 240. 
 Ic, 251.4a; inf. as noun, 340; 
 inf. as subject of a verb, 342; 
 as object, 343; subject-accusa- 
 tive of inf., 343.1.5a; active inf. 
 in sense of passive, 343.1. 5c, (?, 
 ni.l&; more special cases, 343. 
 1.6; inf. of purpose or design, 
 343.III.1; inf. dependent on 
 adjective, 344; on noun, 345; 
 on preposition, 346; in absolute 
 construction, 347; inf. clauses, 
 348; with preposition, 346.2; 
 place of inf. 348.2, 319.2a-6; 
 — two infin. , place of transposed 
 verb with, 439.2, 444. 3&. 
 
 inseparable prefixes, 297.2, 307; 
 
 conjugation of verb with, 302- 
 6; denominative verbs foi-med 
 with, 405.III.1. 
 
 interjections, 56.4, 387-9; inter- 
 jectional use of other parts of 
 speech, 390; inter) ectional or 
 exclamatory construction, 391; 
 construction of cases with in- 
 ter)., 392. 
 
 internal change as means of inflec- 
 tion and derivation, 400. 
 
 interrogative pronouns, 172-6; 
 their use as relatives, 176.1; as 
 indefinites, 176.2. 
 
 interrogative sentence, 427; order 
 of, 432.1, 443.3, 439.46. 
 
 intransitive verb, 233.1, 227. 
 la, 6; construction of accusative 
 with, 227.2, 288.1; impersonal 
 passive from, 279.2; reflexive 
 from, 288.2. 
 
 inverted order of sentence, 431-3, 
 441, 443; inversion after ad- 
 verbial clause, 438.3/; after 
 appositive adjective phrase, 
 431(Z; in exclamatory clause, 
 432.1c. 
 
 irregular declension of nouns, 96- 
 100; irr. comparison of adjec- 
 tives, 139, irr. conjugation of 
 verbs, 249-60. 
 
 irregular verbs, list of, pp. 278-84; 
 equivalent to Old or strong 
 verbs, 236 2 Rem.l, 246.3. 
 
 Italic languages, relationship of, 
 450. 
 
 iterative numerals, 206. 
 
 \, pronunciation of, 29, 
 \(x, 360a. 
 |eb, jeber, 190. 
 jebermann, 187. 
 jebmeb, icbmeber, 190. 
 leflUd), 190. 
 jemanb, 186. 
 ien, jener, 163, 165-6. 
 
 f, pronunciation of, 30; English 
 
 correspondents of, 460. 
 !ein, 195.2. 
 fbmten, 251, 254. 
 
468 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 r, pronunciation of, 31. 
 
 Latin language, relationship of, 
 450. 
 
 letters, German, see alphabet. 
 
 Low-German subdivision of Ger- 
 manic languages, 451.1, 452.1. 
 
 Luther's influence on German lan- 
 guage, 467-8. 
 
 m, pronunciation of, 31. 
 
 man, 185. 
 
 man&i, 191. 
 
 masculine, see gender. 
 
 measure, use of singular instead of 
 plural in expressing, 211.2; 
 noun of measured substance not 
 in genitive, 216.5a; accusative 
 of measure, 230.1. 
 
 tnetir, 192.2. 
 
 Meistersanger, works of, 465.2c. 
 
 Middle High-German period, dia- 
 lects, Uterature, 463.2, 465; 
 transition to New, 466. 
 
 Minnesanger, works of, 465.2a. 
 
 mi^, as prefix, 313. 
 
 mixed conjugation, 272; declen- 
 sion of nouns, 97; of adjectives, 
 124. 
 
 modal auxiliaries, 242.1, 251-9. 
 
 modes, 235.2-4. 
 
 modified vowels, origin, 14, 
 400.1; pronunciation of, 15-7, 
 21.2; in declension of nouns, 
 69, 75, 78, 79.n., 81, 84, 
 85, 87, 88, 93.3 ; in compari- 
 son of adjectives, 136 ; in in- 
 flection of verb, 250.2, 251, 
 268.2,3, 269.n.l, 270.2a. 
 
 ntogen, 251, 255. 
 
 Moeso-Gothic, see Gothic. 
 
 month, invariable after numeral 
 designating day, 216.4d 
 
 multiplicative numerals, 204. 
 
 miiffen, 251, 256. 
 
 mutes, progression of, in Germanic 
 languages, 453-6; correspon- 
 dences of, in English and Ger- 
 man, 457-60. 
 
 Tt, pronunciation of, 32. 
 n=declension of nouns, 73; of ad- 
 jectives, 132. 
 nein, 360a. 
 
 neuter, see gender. 
 
 New or weak conjugation, charac- 
 teristics and origin of, 236.1, 
 246.2,3; mles of, 247-60; irre- 
 gular verbs of, 249-60. 
 
 New High-German period and 
 dialects, 463.3, 467-9; tran- 
 sition from Middle to, 466. 
 
 New orthography, 5. 
 
 XIQ, pronunciation of, 45; English 
 correspondent of, 460. 
 
 Nibelungenhed, 46 5. 2b. 
 
 nid}t, position in sentence, 319.2/. 
 
 nic^t^, 188; form of adjective 
 with, 129.5. 
 
 niemanb, 186. 
 
 nominative case, uses of, 59.1, 
 212-4. 
 
 normal or regular order of sen- 
 tence, 319, 430, 441-2. 
 
 noun, declension of, 68-73; first 
 declension, 74-90; second de- 
 clension, 91-5; irregular declen- 
 sion, 96-100; foreign nouns, 
 101; proper names, 102-8; 
 modifjdng adjuncts of the noun, 
 109-12; equivalents of, 113; 
 adjective used as noun, 129; 
 infinitive, 340; noun as adjunct 
 of adjective, 145, 147.3; geni- 
 tive dependent on a noun, 216; 
 dative do. 225 ; syntax of nouns, 
 see the several cases: — primitive 
 nouns, 407 ; derivative, 408 - 
 12; compound, 421-2. 
 
 numbers, in declension, 58; rules 
 for use, 210-11; in conjuga- 
 tion, 235.3; rules for use, 322; 
 of verb or adjective with ®ie, 
 'you,' 153.4. 
 
 numerals, 196-208; cardinals; 
 197-202; ordinals, 203; multi- 
 pHcatives, 204; variatives, 205; 
 iteratives, 206 ; dimidiatives, 
 207.1; fractional, 207.2; inde- 
 finite, 189-95. 
 
 0, pronunciation of, 1 1 ; o for 00 
 in new orthography, 11.1. 
 
 b, pronunciation of, 16. 
 
 objective predicate, noun as, 316. 
 16, 227.26, 36, c; adj. as, 116.1c, 
 .316.2c. 
 
INDEy 
 
 469 
 
 Oe, see B. 
 
 Old or strong conjugation, charac- 
 teristics of, 246.1.3, 261-73; 
 changes of radical vowel in, 262; 
 classification of verbs of, 263- 
 7; rules of inflection of, 268- 
 71; conjugation of, 273. 
 
 Old High-German period, dialects, 
 literature, 463.1, 464. 
 
 omission, of auxiliary or copula in 
 dependent clauses, 439.3; of 
 certain endings of adjective de- 
 clension, 126; of subject of 
 impersonal verb, 293. 
 
 optative or imperative sentence, 
 427; its arrangement, 432.2, 
 443.4. 
 
 optative use of subjunctive, 331. 
 
 ordinal numerals, 203; their deri- 
 vatives, 207; ordinal adverbs, 
 207.3. 
 
 p, pronunciation of, 33; English 
 correspondents of, 459.2. 
 
 participles, verbal adjectives, 235. 
 6, 349; forms, 237.6,7, 243.3; 
 use as adjectives, 131, 148; as 
 adverbs, 356; comparison of, 
 355; participial clauses, 357- 
 8: — present part., form, 237.6; 
 use and office, 350, 353, 355- 
 8:— past part., form, 237.7, 
 246, 271; use of ge as sign of, 
 243.3; value and office, 351, 
 854-8; certain special uses, 
 359; adjectives in form of past 
 part., 351.3:— future passive 
 part,, 278, 352. 
 
 parts of speech, enumeration and 
 classification of, 56. 
 
 passive voice, 233.3, 274; its 
 forms, 275-7 ; future pass, par- 
 ticiple. 278, 352; pass, formed 
 from what verbs, 279; cases 
 used with, 280; infrequency of 
 its use, 281 ; distinction of pass. 
 from past participle with fein, 
 282; pass, use of active ini&ni- 
 tive, 343.I.5c,d,III.16. 
 
 perfect tense, 240.1a, c; use, 326; 
 omission of auxihary of, 439.3, 
 
 Persian languages, relationship o^ 
 45Q. 
 
 personal forms of the verb, 814a. 
 
 personal pronouns, declension of, 
 151-2; use in address, 153; 
 other rules respecting, 154; re- 
 flexive use, 155 ; expletive dativo 
 of, 156: possessive dative of, 
 161, 222.IIIi>; declension of 
 adjective after, 125.2; place of, 
 319.36; do. in inverted and 
 transposed clauses, 431^, 439. 
 1, 443.56, 444.3a. 
 
 persons of verb, 235.3,4; endings 
 of, 237.2,3,5; rules respecting 
 use, 321. 
 
 persons, declension of names ©4 
 104-8. 
 
 pf, pronunciation o^ 46.1; origin, 
 459.4. 
 
 pi), pronunciation of, 46.2. 
 
 pluperfect tense, 240. 16, c; use, 
 327; omission of auxiliary o^ 
 439.3. 
 
 plural, its ending determines class 
 under first declension of nouns, 
 69; irregular formation of, in 
 nouns, 97.2, 99, 100, 101. 
 3-5; singular used for, in expres- 
 sions of measure, 211.2. 
 
 positive degree of adjectives, 134, 
 
 possessive dative, 222.nia,&, 
 225.1. 
 
 possessive pronouns or pronomi- 
 nal adjectives, 157-8; declen- 
 sion, 159; used as nouns, 160; 
 definite article or poss. dative 
 used for, 161; old style expres- 
 sions and abbreviations for, 
 162; used instead of genitive of 
 pronoun, 158.2, 216.3. 
 
 potential use of subjunctiye^ 
 332.3. 
 
 predicate of a sentence, 426.2, 
 428.2. 
 
 predicate adjective, 116.1, 316.2; 
 its form in superlative, 140.26. 
 
 predicate noun, 213, 316.1; verb 
 in plural to agree with, 822.3. 
 
 prefixes, origin of, 395. 
 
 prefixes of verbs: separable, 297. 
 1, 298; inseparable, 297.2, 
 302, 307; separable or in- 
 separable, 297.3, 808-9. 
 
 prepositions, 371; classification. 
 
470 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 372; prep, followed by genitive, 
 218, 373; by dative, 224, 
 374; by accusative, 228.1, 
 375; by dative or accusative, 
 224.2, 228.2, 376; by infini- 
 tive, 346. 1 ; by infinitive clause, 
 346.2; by substantive clause, 
 377, 436. 3c?; by adverbs, 
 378 ; taking adverb as comple- 
 ment, 379 ; combination of 
 prep, with definite article, 65. 
 
 prepositional phrase, 380; as ad- 
 junct of noun, 112; of adjective, 
 146; of verb, 318. 
 
 present tense, 235.1, 268; use, 
 324; in sense of our preterit, 
 324.2; of perfect, 324.3; of 
 future, 324.4. 
 
 preterit tense, 235.1, 269; its 
 origin, 246.3; use 325; in sense 
 of our pluperfect, 325.2; of 
 perfect, 325.3. 
 
 primitive words, 402; verbs, 403; 
 nouns, 407; adjectives, 413; 
 adverbs, 367. 
 
 principal parts of verb, 237. 1. 
 
 progression of mutes in Germanic 
 languages, 453-60. 
 
 pronouns, substantive and adjec- 
 tive use of, 149; classification, 
 150; personal pron., 151-6; 
 reflexive, 155; possessive, 157- 
 62; demonstrative, 163-71; 
 determinative, 167-71; inter- 
 rogative, 172-6; relative, 177- 
 83; indefinite, 184-95. 
 
 pronunciation, 6-55. 
 
 proper names, declension of, 
 102 8. 
 
 protasis, 332.1. 
 
 q, pronunciation of, 34, 39. 
 qu, pronunciation of, 47. 
 question, see interrogative sen- 
 tence. 
 
 r, pronunciation of, 35. 
 reciprocal use of reflexive pronoun, 
 
 155.4. 
 redundant declension, 99. 
 reflexive use of personal pronouns, 
 
 155; reflexive pronoun, 155.3; 
 
 reciprocal reflexive, 155.4. 
 
 reflexive verb. 233.2a, 283; con- 
 jugation of, 284-5 ; from what 
 verbs formed, 286-7; from in- 
 transitives,288; cases used with, 
 289; with reflexive object in 
 dative, 290; with genitive ob- 
 ject, 219.3. 
 
 regular order of sentence, see nor- 
 mal order. 
 
 regular verbs, 246.3. 
 
 relative pronouns, 177-83; com- 
 pound rel., 179.1-3; indefinite, 
 179.4; compound relative used 
 for our simple, 179.5; agree- 
 ment of verb with rel., 181, 
 321.2. 
 
 root of verb, 237. la ; roots of lan- 
 guage, 3936, 398. 
 
 rotetion of mutes, 453. 
 
 j, pronunciation of, 36; English 
 correspondents of, 458.3; use 
 of long or short § (f or g) in 
 writing or printing, 3.1. 
 
 Sanskrit language, relationship of, 
 450. 
 
 Scandinavian languages, relation- 
 ship of, 451.3. 
 
 f A, pronunciation of, 48 
 
 @e., 162. 
 
 second or weak declension of 
 nouns, 70, 73, 91-5; of adjec- 
 tives, 119-28, 132. 
 
 fein, conjugation of, 239.2,46; 
 use as auxiliary, 240-1; origin 
 of use, 240.46. 
 
 fetber, felbft, added to reflexives, 
 155.5, 169.3. 
 
 sentence, definition and constitu- 
 ents, 426, 428; kinds, 427; 
 arrangement, 429-46. 
 
 separable prefixes, 297-8; con- 
 jugation of verbs with such, 
 299-301; place of prefix, 299. 
 1, 319.2c,d; denominative verbs 
 formed with, 405. in. 2. 
 
 fid), 155.3. 
 
 simple predicate adjective, 116. 
 la, 316.2a. 
 
 Slavic or Slavonic languages, re- 
 lationship of, 450. 
 
 fo, as relative pronoTin, 182.1; 
 with atg omitted after, 438. 3d, e. 
 
INDEX. 
 
 471 
 
 \o\d), 170. 
 
 foUen, 251, 257. 
 
 2>x„ 162. 
 
 [[/ % pronunciation and use of, 
 49; English correspondents of, 
 458.3. 
 
 ^, romanized as ss, 2.2; § for §, in 
 new orthography, 49.1. 
 
 stems, 3936. 
 
 strong declension, see first or 
 strong declension. 
 
 strong conjugation, see old or 
 strong conjugation. 
 
 subject of a sentence, 426.2, 
 428.1. 
 
 subjunctive mood, 235.2; nature 
 and use, 329-30; optative 
 subj., 331; conditional and 
 potential, 332 ; of indirect state- 
 ment, 333 ; other less frequent 
 uses, 332.5. 
 
 subordinate clause, see dependent. 
 
 substantive, see noun. 
 
 substantive dependent clause, 
 113.3, 436, 444. 
 
 suffixes, origin and relation of, 
 394-5 ; formation of, 418c. 
 
 superlative degree, of adjective, 
 134-42; declension of, 140-1,2; 
 predicate form, 140. 2&; adver- 
 bial form, 140.2c, 363.2; sup. 
 absolute and relative, 142. 1 ; do. 
 in adverbs, 363.2c; sup. inten- 
 sified by aUer, 142.3. 
 
 t, pronunciation of, 37; English 
 correspondent of, 458.2; t for 
 hi in new orthography, 25.1; t 
 fortt), 37.3. 
 
 tenses, simple, 235.1; compound, 
 240-1; use of, indicative, 
 324 8. 
 
 Teutonic languages, see Germanic. 
 
 t^, pronunciation of, 37, 50; 
 English correspondent of, 458. 
 2; ^ of tt) omitted in new ortho- 
 graphy, 37.3. 
 
 themes, 3936. 
 
 t^un, as auxiliary, 242.3. 
 
 time, accusative of, 230.2; geni- 
 tive of, 220.1. 
 
 titles, declension of, 108; plural 
 verb used with, 322.4, 
 
 transitive verb, 233.1, 227.1a,6. 
 
 transposed order of dependent 
 clauses, 434, 441, 444; limited 
 to clauses grammatically depen- 
 dent, 439.6; of interrogative 
 and exclamatory clauses, 439.4. 
 
 ^, pronunciation of, 51. 
 
 u, pronunciation of, 12. 
 ii, pronunciation of, 17. 
 Ue, see ii. 
 
 ui, pronunciation of, 22. 
 Umlaut, 400.1. 
 
 t), pronunciation of, 38. 
 
 variation of radical vowel in Old 
 conjugation, 400.2, 262-7. 
 
 variative numerals, 205. 
 
 ber=, derivation and use of, 307.6, 
 405. m. Id 
 
 verb, essential characteristic and 
 office of, 232, 314; classifica- 
 tion, 233; simple forms of, 
 235-7; principal parts, 237.1; 
 compound forms, 238-41 ; 
 auxiliaries, of tense, 239; of 
 mood, 242.1, 251-9; other, 
 242.2,3; Old and New conjuga- 
 tions, 245-73; passive voice, 
 274-82; reflexive verbs, 283- 
 90; impersonal, 291-5; com- 
 pound, 296-313, 420:- ad- 
 juncts of verb, 315-8; their 
 order, 319; object, 315; predi- 
 cate noun or adjective, 316; ad- 
 verb, 317; prepositional phrase, 
 318; genitive case with verbs, 
 219-20; dative, 222, 225.1; 
 accusative, 227, 230: — primi- 
 tive verbs, 403; derivative, 
 404-6. 
 
 \)id, 192. 
 
 vocative, nominative in sense of, 
 214. 
 
 voices, active and passive, 233.3. 
 
 boll, as prefix, 313. 
 
 vowels, pronunciation of, 7-22; 
 quantity, 7; modified vowels, 
 14-7. 
 
 rt), pronunciation of, 39. 
 tt)a«, 129.5, 172-3, 176, 179; 
 tpq? fiir^ 175, 177, 179, 
 
472 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 weak declension, see second or 
 weak declension. 
 
 weak conjugation, see New or 
 weak conjugation. 
 
 toeld), 172, 174, 176-9. 
 
 toenig, 192. 
 
 Wer, 172-3, 176, 179. 
 
 Werben, conjugation of, 239.3,4c; 
 as auxiliary of future and con- 
 ditional tenses, 240.2,4; of 
 passive voice, 275-7. 
 
 ttJiffen, 260. 
 
 wo or wov, combined with prepo- 
 sitions, in interrogative sense, 
 173.2; in relative sense, 180. 
 
 njoHen, 251, 258. 
 
 word-combination or composition, 
 418-25. 
 
 word-formation or deri/ation, in- 
 
 troductory-explanations, 393-7; 
 principles, 398-402; means of 
 derivation, 399-400; rules of 
 derivation, 403-17. 
 written character, German, 2.1, 
 pp. 275-77. 
 
 JT, pronunciation of, 40. 
 
 h, pronunciation and use oL 13, 
 19.3, 41. 
 
 2, pronunciation of, 42; English 
 correspondents of, 458.3. 
 
 2er=, derivation and use of, 307. f. 
 405.ni.le. 
 
 JU, as sign of infinitive, 341. 
 
 gnjeen, jtro, 199«. 
 
GERMAN TEXT-BOOKS 
 
 PUBLISHED BY 
 
 HENRY HOLT & CO., New York. 
 
 These hooks are bound in cloth unless otherwise indicated. 
 
 ♦ 
 
 Grammars and Exercise Books. 
 
 Blackwell's German Prefixes and Suffixes. By J. S. Blackwell, 
 
 Professor in the University of Missouri. 16mo. 137 pp. 
 Huss's Conversation in German. By H. C. O. Huss, Professor of 
 
 Modern Languages in Princeton College. 12mo. 230 pp. 
 Joynes-Otto First Book in German. For young pupils. By Bmil 
 
 Otto. Revised by Edward S. Joynes, Professor in the South 
 
 Carolina College. 12mo. 116 pp. Boards. 
 Joynes-Otto Introductory German Lessons, The. New edition, with 
 
 full vocabularies. By Prof. Edward S. Joynes. 12mo. 252 pp. 
 Keetels's Oral Method with German. By Jean Gustave Keetels. 
 
 12mo. 371 pp. 
 Otis's Elementary German. By Charles P. Otis. 16mo. 832 pp. 
 
 ^^° There are two editions of this hook: I. In German type; II. In 
 Roman type, which edition will only he sent when specially ordered. 
 Otto's German Conversation Grammar. By Dr. Emil Otto. New 
 
 edition, revised, and in part re-written, by Wm. Cook. 12mo. 
 
 Half roan. 591 pp. 
 Otto's Elementary German Grammar. With a vocabulary by George 
 
 MoRiTZ Wahl. 12mo. 315 pp. 
 Otto's Translating English into German. By Dr. Emil Otto. 
 
 Edited by Prof. Rhodes Massie and Prof. Edward S. Joynes. 
 
 12mo. 167 pp. 
 Spanhoofd's Deutsche Grammatik. By A. W. Spanhoofd, teacher in 
 
 St. Paul's School, N. H. 16mo. 187 pp. 
 Wenckebach und Schrakamp's Deutsche Grammatik fiir Amerikaner. 
 * By Carla Wenckebach, Professor in Wellesley College, and 
 
 Josepha Schrakamp. 12mo. 291 pp. 
 Whitney's Compendious German Grammar. By Wm. D. Whitney, 
 
 Professor in Yale University. 12nio. 472 pp. Half roan. 
 Whitney's Brief German Grammar, based on the author's "Compen- 
 dious German Grammar." By Wm. D. Whitney. 16mo. 143 pp. 
 Whitney-Klemm German by Practice. By Dr. L. R. Klemm. Edited 
 
 by William D. Whitney. 12jno. 305 pp. 
 
 Natural Method and Conversation Books. 
 Game of German Conversation. By Mme. F. Jeff Tensler. 
 Heness's Der neue Leitfaden. Beim Unterricht in der deutschen 
 
 Sprache. By Gottlieb Heness. 12mo. 403 pp. 
 Heness's Der Sprechlehrer unter seinen Schlllern. By Gottlieb 
 
 Heness. 12mo. 187 pp. 
 Kaiser's Erstes Lehrbuch. By H. C. Kaiser, Ph.D. 12mo. 128 pp. 
 Pylodet's German Conversations By L. Pylodbt. ISmo. ^8 pp. 
 
HENRY HOLT &= CO.'S GERMAN TEXT-BOOKS, 
 
 Schrakamp und Van Daell's Das Dentsche Buch. By A. N. Van Daell 
 and JosEPHA Schrakamp. 12mo. 144 pp. 
 
 Sprechen Sie Deutsch 1 18mo. 147 pp. Boards. 
 
 Stern's Studien und Plaudereien. First Series. By Sigmon M. Stekn, 
 Director of Stern's School of Languages. 12mo. 262 pp. 
 
 Stern's Studien und Plaudereien. Second Series. By Sigmon M. 
 Stern and Menco Stern. 12mo. 380 pp. 
 
 "Wenckebach's Deutscher Anschauungs-Unterricht. By Carla and 
 Helene Wenckebach. 12mo. 451 pp. 
 
 Williams's German Conversation and Composition. By Alonzo Wil- 
 liams, A.M., Professor in Brown University. 12mo. 147 pp. 
 
 Reading Books. 
 
 Fouque's TJndine. With introduction, notes, and vocabulary, by H.C. 
 
 G. VON Jagemann, Professor in the Indiana University. 190 pp. 
 Key's Fabeln fiir Kinder. Illustrated by Otto Speckter. With 
 
 vocabulary. {In roman type.) 12mo. 52 pp. Boards. 
 Joynes-Otto Introductory German Reader. By Dr. Emil Otto. 
 
 With notes and vocabulary by Prof. Edward S. Joynes. 12mo. 
 
 282 pp. 
 
 Klemm's lese- und Sprachbuecher. In sieben Kreisen. By Dr. L. R. 
 Klemm. 
 
 Klemm's Abriss der Geschichte der deutschen Literatur. Kreis VIII. 
 
 12mo. 385 pp. 
 Meissner's Aus meiner Welt. Geschichten fur Grosse und Kleine. 
 
 With vocabulary by Carla Wenckebach. 12mo. 127 pp. 
 Otis's Grimm's Maerchen. Selected and edited, with introduction, 
 
 notes, and vocabulary, by Charles P. Ottis. 151 pp. 
 Otto's German Reader. By Prof. E. P. Evans. 12mo. 239 pp. 
 
 Half roan. 
 Schrakamp's Erzaehlungen aus der deutschen Geschichte. By Josepha 
 
 Schrakamp. 12mo. 286 pp. 
 Simonson's German Ballad Book. Prepared by Prof. L. Simonson, of 
 
 the Hartford (Ct.) High School. 12mo. 304 pp. 
 Storme's Easy German Reading. By G. Storme. 16mo. 356 pp. 
 Wenckebach's deutsches Lesebuch. By Carla and Helene Wencke- 
 bach. 12rao. 316 pp. 
 Wenckebach's Die schoensten deutschen Lieder. By Carla and 
 
 Helene Wenckebach. 12mo. 363 pp. 
 Whitney's German Reader. By William D. Whitney, Professor in 
 
 Yale University. 12mo. 523 pp. Half roan. 
 Whitney-Klemm Elementary German Reader. By Dr. L. R. Klemm. 
 
 Edited by Prof. W. D. Whitney. 12mo. 237 pp. 
 Dictionary. 
 Whitney's Compendious German Dictionary. (German-English and 
 
 English-German.) By William D. Whitney. 8vo. 900 pp. 
 
 A complete catalogue and price-list of Henry Holt d Oo,'s educa- 
 iional publications will be sent on application. 
 
 3 
 
HENRY HOLT &> CO:S GERMAN TEXT-BOOKS. 
 
 Whitney's German Texts. 
 
 Selected and annotated under the general editorship of Professor Wiixiam D. 
 Whitney. 16mo. Cloth. 
 
 Goethe's Iphigenie auf Tauris. With an introduction^nd notes by Frank- 
 lin Carter, President of Williams College. 113 pp. 
 
 Faust. I. Theil. With an introduction and notes by William Cook, 
 
 late Professor in Harvard University. 220 pp. 
 
 Lessing's Minna von Barnhelm. With an introduction and notes by W. 
 D. Whitney, Professor in Yale University. 138 pp. 
 
 Nathan der "Weise. With an introduction and notes by H. C. G, 
 
 Brandt, Professor in Hamilton College. 158 pp. 
 
 Schiller's Wilhelm Tell. With an introduction and notes by A. Sachtle- 
 BEN, Professor in the College of Charleston, S. C. 199 pp. 
 
 Maria Stuart. With an introduction and notes by Edward S. Joynes, 
 
 Professor in South Carohna College. 222 pp. 
 
 Seidensticker's German Scientific Monographs. 
 
 With >otes. 12mo. Paper. 
 
 No. I. Uber Goethe's Naturwissenschaftliche Arbeiten. Von H. Helmholtz. 
 53 pp. 
 
 No II, Uber Bakterien, die Kleinsten lebenden Wesen. Von Dr. Ferdinand 
 CoHN. 55 pp. 
 
 Student's Collection of Classic German Plays. 
 
 12mo. Paper. 
 Goethe's Hermann und Dorothea. With notes by Calvin Thomas. 104 pp. 
 
 Egmont. Edited by Professor William Steften. 113 pp. 
 
 Koerner's Zriny. With an introduction and notes by Edward R. Ruggles, 
 
 Professor in Dartmouth College. 126 pp. 
 Lessing's Emilia Galotti. With notes, 82 pp. 
 Schiller's Der Nefie als Onkel. With notes and a vocabulary by A. 
 
 Clement. 99 pp. 
 Jungfrau Von Orleans. Edited by Rev. A. B. Nichols, Instructor in 
 
 German in Harvard University. 203 pp. 
 
 Wallenstein's Lager. With notes by E. C. F. Krauss. 60 pp. 
 
 Die Piccolomini. With notes by E. C. F. Krauss. 139 pp. 
 
 "Wallenstein's Tod. With notes by E. C. F. Krauss. 210 pp. 
 
 Wallenstein, complete in one volume. Cloth. 
 
 College Series of German Plays. 
 
 12mo. Paper. 
 
 Einer muss heiraten, by Wilhelmi ; and Eigensinn, by Benedix. With 
 
 notes. 63 pp. 
 Three German Comedies. I. Er ist nicht eifersuechtig, by Elz; IL 
 
 Der Weiberfeind, by Benedix ; III. Ln Wartesalon erster Classe, 
 
 by Mueller. With notes. 24 pp. 
 Der Bibliothekar. By Gustav von Moser. With notes. 162 pp. 
 Die Journalisten. By Gustav Freytag. With notes. 178 pp. 
 Zopf und Schwert. By Gutzkowt. With notes. 173 pp. 
 Englisch. By Goerner. With notes by A. H. Edoren. 61 pp. 
 Badekuren. By Putlitz. With notes. 69 pp. 
 Das Hera vergessen. By Putlitz. With notes. 79 pp, 
 
 3 
 
HENRY HOLT &> CO:S GERMAN TEXT-BOOKS. 
 Stern's Selected German Comedies. 
 
 Selected and Edited by Professor S. M. Stern. 12mo. Paper, 
 
 Ein Knopf. By Julius Rosen. 41 pp. 
 
 Der Schimmel. By G. von Moser. 55 pp. 
 
 Sie hat ihr herz entdeckt. By; W. Mueller von Koenigswintbb. 79 pp. 
 
 Simson und Belila. ByEMiLCLAAR. 55 pp. 
 
 Er sucht einen Vetter. By Jungman. 49 pp. 
 
 Er muss tanzen. By C. A.Paul. 51 pp. 
 
 Gaenschen von Buchenau. By W. Friedrich. 59 pp. 
 
 German Plays for Children. 
 
 Kinder-Comoedien. By various authors. Edited and annotated in German 
 by Professor Th. Heness. Five plays in one volume 12mo. 141 pp. 
 
 UnterFialtungs Bibliotliek. (12mo. Paper.) 
 
 Andersen's Bilderbuch ohne Bilder. With notes and vocabulary by Pro- 
 fessor L. SiMONSON of the Hartford (Ct.) High School. 104 pp. 
 Die Eisjungfrau u. andere Geschichten. With notes by E. C. F. Kbauss. 
 
 150 pp. 
 
 Auerbach's Auf "Wache; Koquette's Der gefrorene Kuss. The two in 
 
 one volume. With notes. 126 pp. 
 
 Carove's Das Maerchen ohne Ende. With notes. 45 pp. 
 Ebers' eine Frage. With introduction and notes. 117 pp. 
 Eichendorff s Aus dem Leben eines Taugenichts. 132 pp. 
 Pouqu6's Undine. With a glossary of the principal words and phrases. 
 
 137 pp. See also Jagetiiann's edition under Reading Books. 
 
 Sintram und seine Gefaehrten. 114 pp. 
 
 Grimm's Die Venus vor Milo ; Kafael und Michel- Angelo. ' 139 pp. 
 Grimm's Kinder- und Hausmaerclien. With notes. 228 pp. See also 
 
 Otis's edition under Reading Books. 
 Hauflfs Das kalte if erz. 61 pp. 
 
 Heine's Die Harzreise. With introduction and notes. 97 pp. 
 Heyse's Anfaung und Ende. 54 pp. 
 
 Die Einsamen. 44 pp. 
 
 Hillern's Hoeher als die Kirche. With notes and vocabulary. 46 pp. 
 Muegge's Biukan Voss. 55 pp. 
 
 Signa die Seterin. 71 pp. 
 
 Mueller's Deutsche Liebe. With English notes. 121 pp. 
 Nathusius' Tagebuch eines armen Praeuleins. 163 pp. 
 Ploennies' Princessin Use. With notes by J. M. Merrick. 45 pp. 
 Putlitz's "Was sich der wald erzaehlt. 62 pp. 
 
 Vergissmeinnicht. With English notes. 44 pp. 
 
 Biehl's Der Much der Schoenheit. With introduction and notes by 
 
 Francis L. Kendall. 77 pp. 
 Schiller's Das Lied von der Glocke. With introduction and notes by 
 
 Charles P. Otis, Ph.D. 70 pp. 
 Storm's Immensee. With notes. 34 pp. 
 Tieck's Die Elfen ; Das Kothkaeppchen. With notes by Professor L. 
 
 SiMONSON. 41 pp. 
 
 Vilmar and Richter's German Epic Tales. Told in prose. Die Nibe- 
 lungen, von A. F. C. Vilmar. "Walther und Hildegund, von Au- 
 
 BERT RTCHTER. 100 pp 
 
 4 
 
FRENCH TEXT-BOOKS 
 
 PUBLISHED BY 
 
 HENRY HOLT & CO., New York. 
 
 These books are bound in cloth unless otherwise indicated^ 
 
 Grammars and Exercise Books. 
 
 Borel's Grammaire Frangaise. A I'usage des Anglais. Par Eugene Borel. 
 
 Revised by E. B. Coe, \imo. 450 pp. Half roan. 
 Delille's Condensed French. Instruction. By C. J. Delillk. 18mo. 143 pp. 
 Eugdne's Student's Comparative French Grrammar. To which are 
 
 a<Wed Fi-ench- English Exercises. Kevised by L. H. Buckingham, Ph.D. 
 
 12mo. 284 pp. 
 Eugene's Elementary French Lessons. Revised and edited by L. H. 
 
 Buckingham, Ph.D. 12mo, 126 pp. 
 
 Gasc's The Translator.— English into French. By Professors Gasc, L. 
 
 Brun, and others. 12mo. 220 pp. 
 Gibert's French Manual. A French Pronouncing Grammar for Young 
 
 Students. By M. Gibert, 12mo. 112 pp. 
 Julien's Petites Legons de Conversation et de Grammaire. By F. Julien. 
 
 Square 12ino. 222 pp. 
 Otto's French Conversation Grammar. Revised by Ferdinand Bocher, 
 
 Professor of Modern Languages in Harvard University. 12mo. 489 pp. Half 
 
 roan. 
 Pylodet's Beginning French. Exercises in Pronouncing, Spelling, and 
 
 Translatitig. By L. Pylodet. 16mo. 180 pp. Boards. 
 
 Sadler's Translating English into French. By P. Sadler. Revised and 
 annotated by Prof. C. F. Gillette. 12mo. 285 pp. 
 
 The Joynes-Otto Introductory French. Lessons. By Edward S. Joynes, 
 Professor in University of South Carolina. 12nio. 275 pp. 
 
 The Joynes-Otto First Book in French. By Edward S. Joynes. 12mo. 
 
 116 pp. Boards. 
 WTiitney's French Grammar. By William D. Whitney, Professor in Yale 
 
 University. 12mo. 442 pp. Half roan. 
 Whitney's Practical French. Taken from the author's larger Grammar, 
 
 and supplemented by conversations and idiomatic phrases. By Professor 
 
 W, D. Whitney. 
 Whitney's Brief French Grammar. Systematically arranged, with exer^ 
 
 cises. By William D. Whitney. 16mo. 177 pp. 
 
 Natural Method and Conversation Books. 
 
 AUiot's Contes et Nouvelles. Suivis de Conversations,d'Exercices de Gram- 
 maire. Par Madame L. Alliot. 12mo. 
 
 Aubert's Colloquial French Drill. By E. Aubkrt, Professor in the Normal 
 College, New York City. Part I. l6rao. 66 pp. Part H. 118 pp. 
 
 Le Jeu des Auteurs. 96 Cards in a Box. 
 
 Moutonnler's Les Premiers Pas dans I'Etud e du Frangais par la 
 
 m6thode natiirelle. Par C. Moutonnier. 12mo. 197 pp. Illustrated. 
 
 Pour Apprendre a Parler FranQais. 12mo. 191 pp. 
 
 Parlez-vous Frangais ? A pocket manual of French and English Conversa- 
 tion, with hints for pronunciation and a list of the irregular verbs. l8mo. 
 111pp. Boards. 
 
 I 
 
HENR Y HOL T 6- CO. \S FRENCH TEXT-BOOKS. 
 
 Biodu's Lucie. Familiar Conversations in French and English. By Mme. A. 
 Riodu. 1-^mo. 1J8 pp. 
 
 Stern & M6ras' fetude Progressive de la Langue Francaise. By Sigmon 
 M. Stern and Bapi^iste Meras. K'lno. 288 pp. 
 
 Witccmb & Bellenger's French Conversation. Dialogues on Familiar 
 bubjects, to which is annexed tlie Summary of French Grammar, by Deullk. 
 ISmo. 259 pp. 
 
 Reading Books. 
 
 ^sop's Fables in French. With vocabulary. 16mo. 237 pp. 
 Alliot's Les Auteurs Contemporains. Extraits choisis d'oeuvres diverses, 
 avee Notices Biographiqiies et Motes. By Mme. L. Alliot. 12mo. 371pp. 
 
 Aubert's Litt^rature Frangaise. Premiere Annee. By E. Aubkrt. 16mo 
 
 338 pp. 
 
 Bocher s Progressive French Beader. With notes and vocabulary by 
 F. BocHER, Professor in Harvard Univer>ity. 12mo. 291 pp. Half roan. 
 
 Fisher's Easy French Beading. Historical tales and anecdotes, arranged 
 with foot-notes, contaiuing irans^latioiis of the principal words. 16mo. 253 pp. 
 
 Fleury's L'Histoire de France. Racontee a la Jeunesse. Par M. Lam^ 
 Fleury. 16mo. 372 pp. 
 
 De Janon's Becueil de Po6sies. A I'usage de la Jeunesse Am^ricaine. Far 
 Mlle. Camille de Janon. 16mio. 18t) pp. 
 
 Joynes-Otto Introductory French Beader, The. Edited, with notes and 
 vocabulary, by Edwaro S. Joynes, 12mo. \m pp. 
 
 Julien's Practical and Conversational Beader in French and English. By 
 F. JuLiEN. Square 12mo. 18..' pp. 
 
 Lacombe's Petite Histoire du Peuple Frangais. By Paul Lacombe. 
 With Grammatical and Explanatory Notes by Jules Bufi. 12mo. 212 pp. 
 
 La Fontaine's Fables Choisies. Edited, with notes, by Leon Delbos. 12mo. 
 119 pp. Boards. 
 
 Pylodet's Beginner French Beader. With a complete vocabulary. Ar- 
 ranged by L. Pylodet- 16nio. ::'35 pp. Boards. 
 
 Pylodet's Second French Beader. With a complete French-English vo- 
 cabulary. Compiled by L. Pylodet. Illustrated. 12mo. 277 pp. 
 
 Pylodet's La Litt6rature Frangaise Classique. Tir6es des Matinees Lifct6- 
 raires d' Edouard Mennechet. 12mo. 393 pp. 
 
 Pylodet's La Litt6rature Frangaise Contemporaine. Recueil en prose 
 et en vers. 12mo. 310 pp. 
 
 Pylodet's Gouttes de Bos6e. Petit Tr6sor poetique des Jeunes Personnes. 
 
 l8mo. 188 pp. 
 
 Pylodet's La Mdre I'Oie. Poesies, 6nigmes, chansons et'rondes enfantines. 
 Ilkistre. 8vo. 80 pp. 
 
 Whitney's Short French Reader. With notes and vocabulary. By W. D. 
 Whitney. 16mo. 
 
 Dictionaries. 
 
 Bellow's French and English Dictionary for the Pocket. 32mo. 600 pp. 
 The same. Larger print. 12nio. 600 pp. Half roan. 
 
 Gases K"ew Dictionary of the French and English Languages. By 
 
 Ferdinand E. A. Gasc. 8vo. French-English part, 600 pp. English-French 
 part, 586 pp. One volume. 
 
 Gasc's Improved Modern Pocket Dictionary. By F. A. E. Gasc. 18mo. 
 French-English part, 201 pp. English-French part, 387 pp. One volume. 
 
 A descriptive catalogue, with prices, of Henry Holtd: Co.^s educational publU 
 cations will be sent on application. 
 
HENR V HOL T &= CO:s FRENCH TEXT-BOOKS. 
 Students' Collection of Classic French Plays. 
 
 The first six with full uotes by Prof. E. S. Joynes. The last three with notes 
 by Leon Delbos, M.A. 12mo, Paper. 
 
 Le Cid. Par CoRNEiLLE. 110 pp. 
 
 Athalie. Far Racine. 117 pp. 
 
 liB Misanthrope. Par Moliere. 130 pp. 
 
 L'Avare. Par Moliere. 132 pp. 
 
 Esther. Par Racine. 66 pp. 
 
 Cinna. Par Corneili.e. 87 pp. 
 
 Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme. Par Moliere. 140 pp. 
 
 Horace. Par Corneillk. 78 pp. 
 
 Les Plaideurs. Par Racine. 80 pp. 
 
 The foregoing in 3 vols., three plays in each, in the above order. 12mo. Cloth. 
 
 Ronnantic French Drama. (12mo. Flexible covers.) 
 
 Buy Bias. By Victor Hugo. With notes by Rena A. Michaels. 117 pp. 
 
 College Series of Modern French Plays. 
 
 With Euglish notes by Prof. Ferdinand Bocher. 12mo. Paper. 
 
 La Joie Fait Peur. Par Mme. de Girardin. 46 pp. 
 La Bataille de Dames. Par Scribe et Legouve. 81 pp. 
 La Maison de Penarvan. Par Jules Sandeau. 72 pp. 
 La Poudre aux Yeux. Par Labiche et Martin, 59 pp. 
 Jean Baudry. Par Augusts Vacquerie. 7:2 pp. 
 Les Petits Oiseaux. Par Labiche et Delacour. 70 pp. 
 Mademoiselle de la SeigliSre. Par J. Sandeau. 99 pp. 
 Le Bom-an d'un Jeune Homme Pauvre. Par O. Feuillbt. 100 pp. 
 Les Doigts de F6e. Par E. Scribe. HI pp. 
 Above in 2 vols. Cloth. Vol I. containing the first five, Vol. II. the last four. 
 
 Modern French Comedies. (12mo. Paper.) 
 
 Le Village. Par O. Feuillet. 34 pp. 
 
 La Cagnotte. Par MM. Eugene Labiche et A. Delacour. 83 pp. 
 
 Les Pemmes qui Pleurent. Par MM. Siraudin et Lambert Thiboust. 28 pp. 
 
 Les Petites Mis6res de la Vie Humaine. Par M. Clairville. 35 pp. 
 
 Le Niaise de Saint Flour. Par Bayard et Lemoine. 38 pp. 
 
 Un Caprice. Par Alfred de Musset. 
 
 Trois Proverbes. Par Th. Leclerq. 68 pp. With vocabulary. 
 
 Valerie. Par Scribe. 39 pp. With vocabulary. 
 
 Le Collier de Perles. Par Mazeres. 56 pp. With vocabulary. 
 
 Selected French Comedies. 
 
 Original text, with a close English veision on opposite pages. 
 En Wagon. ComMie en 1 acte. Par Eugene Verconsin. 12mo. 44 pp. 
 C'6tait Gertrude. Comedie en 1 acte. Par Eugene Verconsin. 12rao. 54 pp. 
 
 French Plays for Children. (12mo. Paper.) 
 
 La Petite Maman, par Mme. de M. ; Le Bracelet, par Mme, de Gaule. 38 pp. 
 
 La Vieille CousinCj par E. Souvestre; Les Bicochets. 52 pp. 
 
 Le Testament de Madame Patural, par E. Souvestre; La Demoiselle 
 
 de St. Cyr, par Drohoyowska. 54 pp. 
 La Lotene de Francfort, par E. Souvestre. La Jeune Savante, 
 
 par Mme. Curo. 47 pp. 
 
 French Plays for Girls. (l2mo. Paper.) 
 
 Trois Comedies pour Jeunes Filles: I. Les Cuisinieres; II. Le Petit 
 Tom; III. La Malade Imaginaire. Par Lemercieb de Nkuville. 134 pp. 
 
 3 
 
HENRY HOLT &> CO:S FRENCH TEXT-BOOKS, 
 Bibliotheque d'Instruction et de Recreation. 
 
 12mo volumes. Paper or Cloth. 
 
 Achard's Clos-Pommier, et Les Prisonniers du Caucase. Par Xavibr 
 
 DE Maistrb. Cloth. 144 pp. 
 
 Achard*s Clos-Pommier. Paper. 106 pp. 
 
 B6dolli6re's M6re Michel. With vocabulary. Cloth. 138 pp. 
 
 The same. Paper. 
 
 Biographies des Musiciens C616bres. Cloth. 871 pp. 
 The same. Paper. 
 
 Carraud et Segur's Contes (Les Petites Filles Modules, par Mme. de Skgur, 
 et Les Gouters de la Grand'mere, par Mme. Z. Carraud). With a list of 
 difficult phrases. Cloth. 193 pp. 
 
 Carraud's Les Gouters de la Grand*m6re. With a list of difficult 
 phrases. Paper. 95 pp. 
 
 Choix de Contes Contemporains. With notes. By B. F. O'Connor. Cloth. 
 
 300 pp. 
 
 ■ The same. Paper. 
 
 Erckmann-Chatrian's Conscrit de 1813. With notes. By Prof. F. 
 BocHER. Cloth. 236 pp. 
 
 ■ The same. Paper. 
 
 Le Blocus. With notes. By Prof. F. Bocher. Cloth. 258 pp. 
 
 The same. Paper. 
 
 Madame Th6r6se. With notes. By Prof. F. B6cher. Cloth 216 pp. 
 
 The same. Paper. 
 
 Pallet's Princes de I'Art. Cloth. 834 pp. 
 
 The same. Paper. 
 
 Feuillet's Koman d*un Jeune Homme Pauvre. Cloth 204 pp. 
 
 The same. Paper. 
 
 P6val's ' Chouans et Bleus.' With notes. Cloth. 188 pp. 
 
 The same. Paper. 
 
 Poa's Contes Biographiques. With vocabulary. Cloth. 189 pp. 
 
 The same. Paper, 
 
 Petit Bobinson de Paris. With vocabulary. Cloth. 166 pp. 
 
 The same. Paper. 
 
 Mac6*s Bouch6e de Pain. (L'Homme.) With vocabulary. Cloth. 260 pp. 
 
 The same. Paper. 
 
 De Maistre's Voyage Autour de ma Chambre. Paper. 117 pp. 
 
 Les Prisonniers du Caucase. Paper. 38 pp. 
 
 Merim6e's Columba. Cloth. 179 pp. 
 
 The same. Paper. 
 
 Porchat's Trois Mois sous la Neige. Cloth. 160 pp. 
 
 • The same. Paper. 
 
 Pressens6's Rosa. With vocabulary. By L. Pylodbt. Cloth. 286. 
 
 The same. Paper. 
 
 Saint-Germain's Pour une Epingle. With vocabulary. Cloth. 174 pp. 
 
 The same. Paper. 
 
 Sand's Petite Fadette. Cloth. 205 pp. 
 
 The same. Paper. 
 
 S6gur et Carraud's Contes. (Petites Filles Modules; Les GoMers de la 
 Grand'mere.) Cloth. 193 pp. 
 
 S6gur's Les Petites Filles Modules. Paper. 98 pp. 
 Souvestre's Philosophe sous les Toits. Cloth. 137 pp. 
 — — The same. Paper. 
 
Jjl <Z^JLf . i -«-^ =A-.t„„..J<3 . f ' 
 
 
 ^f ^ itJlv.t>-v-^^t.Xe> i-<>Xv/v>C'Q^»-^-^o 
 
 ^r^\